v-^ CORNELL UNIVERSITY LIBRARY BOUGHT WITH THE INCOME OF THE SAGE ENDOWMENT FUND GIVEN IN -1891; BY HENRY WILLIAMS ^AGE GV1445 .ld i' ab ■h 4^yi * ff>/ i'^Xil * «>/ QRS QKtS QB S s- so Q 5 KS <; Q sy, KB 5 KKi £ /ffl s ? yx QR 4 QKt t 9 yd 9 tyib QB f 9 go Q 4- K4 9 b yy KB -f 9 9^/ 9 'XY KR f 3 y;/ QR 3 QKt 3 QB 3 i. 90 Q 3 Kl L b: L y, /CS 3 KKta QR 2 fQKt a QB z 3. QR Sff QKt S(i ,QB sif:] "4^ ,AS 2 S> 8>/ KB s^ a:/? 2 3 y>f KR 3^ WHITE. TECHNICAL TERMS USED IN THE GAME. Castling.— The King has the privilege of moving two squares in conjunction with one of the Rooks, " once in the game only." The squares intervening between the King and the Rook must be unoccupied, and the operation is performed as follows :— If a player castles on the King's side, he places his King on King's Knight's square, and his King's Rook on King's Bishop's square. If he castles on the Queen's side, he moves his King to Queen's Bishop's square, and places his Queen's Rook on the Queen's square. Castling can only be performed under the following conditions : — 1. No piece, either of his own or his opponent's, must be on any of the squares between the King and the Rook. INTRODUCTION. 13 2. Neither ICing nor Eook must have been moved pre- viously. 3. The King must not be in check ; and 4. The King must not alight upon or pass over a square attacked by a hostile man, whether piece or Pawn. The following diagram illustrates the operation of Cast- ling:— k k k k k k k In the above position, there being no piece intervening between his King and Rook, not having moved either King or Rook, and as his King does not alight upon or pass over a square attacked by a hostile man, White can now castle, placing his King on King's Knight's square, and his Rook on King's Bishop's square (e). (e) Staunton says, "that the practise of Castling is a European innovation of jomparatively modern origin, and that, in the Middle Ages, the King used to be 14 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. Check and Checkmate.— The King is in check when he is attacked hy a piece or Pawn. As he can never be taken, warning must be given by the enemy calling " check." One of three courses must then be adopted. 1. The King must be moved out of check. 2. A piece or Pawn must be interposed between the King and the attacldng hostile piece. 3. The hostile piece that gives check must be taken. If neither of these things can be done, the King is "check- mated," and the game is lost. Four other different kinds of cheek are given in the game — viz., Simple Check, Double Cheek, Discovered Check, and Perpetual Check. Simple Check is when the King is attacked by a single piece or Pawn only. Double Check occurs when the King is attacked by two pieces at the same time, both by the piece moved and the one discovered. Discovered Check is when, by removing a piece or Pawn, check is unmasked from another piece. Perpetual Check takes place when check can be given by one of the players on two or more squares, and his adversary can only parry one check by rendering himself liable to another. The subjoined diagrams illustrate checkmate and perpetual check. played on his first move (under restrictions somewhat similar to those now applied to Castling), two squares in any direction, from the square on which he originally stood, whether the intervening square was vacant or occupied." The method of Castling, given in the text, is adopted all over Europe, except in Italy, where they practise the following mode :— The King and Rook can either he placed on any vacant square within the limits of and including their cwn two, provided they cross over each other. By this means Castling may he effected in no less than sixteen different ways, viz, , in six ways on the King's side, e. g. :-l. ^toj^^ g. JL <° R sq \ K to^R^q K to Kt sq RtoKtsq RtoBsq' R to K sq' R to K sq ' K to Kt sq « K to B sq , . ,, , ^ RtoBsq ' ^- R to Esq' ^""^ " *'" ^"-^^ °'' ^^' Q^^""'' ^ide. ^/, ^ ■ ^ r f////Mm„,„„ ,mmm fi r i 4k fM i ^ 1/^M ^„„™.,„^«^^. WfS. ^mm WHITE. BLACK. 16 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. In the former, White having to play, checkmates his opponent in two moves : this he effects by Castling on Queen's side. Black then has only one possible move with his King— viz., K to his Q R 7th square, his other pieces and Pawns being so hemmed in as to be unable to move. White then gives checkmate by playing his King's Bishop to his Q B fourth square. In the next diagram Black, although a piece minus, is enabled to give his adversary perpetual check, and thus draw the game ; this he accomplishes by playing his Queen to his King's fourth square, giving check ; the White King is then compelled to move to his King's Rook's fourth square, upon which Black checks with Queen at his King's Bishop's third square. The White King is then obliged to retreat to his King's Knight's third to escape checkmate, and Black then draws the game by perpetual check, checking again with Queen on King's fourth square. Stalemate ensues where the King, although not in check, is so placed that he cannot be moved ivithout going into check — i.e. putting himself en prise, and when no other piece or Pawn can be moved. The game is then drawn. Smothered Mate occurs when the hostile King is so hemmed in by his own forces, that he cannot escape the attack of the Knight. Passed Pawn. — A Pawn is termed passed when the adversary has no Pawns, either in front or on the next files immediately right or left, to obstruct its march to Queen. Doubled Pawn.— When two Pawns are on the same file, the front one is called a doubled Pawn. Isolated Pawn.— When a Pawn stands alone, without the protection of other Pawns, it is termed an isolated Pawn. INTRODUCTION. 17 Queening a Pawn. — A Pawn is said to be queened -when it has reached its eighth square^ — i.e. the last square of its file. It may then be exchanged for a Queen, Eook, or a minor piece, or remain a Pawn, at the option of its player. Thus a player may have two or more Queens, Rooks, Bishops, or Knights- on the board at the same time ; or he may refuse pro- motion, electing to remain a Pawn(/). There has been some controversy on this point, but when the question was raised twelve years ago, at the Chess Congress of 1862, the code of laws was revised, and it was decided that a player should have the option of refusal of promotion, as positions may sometimes occur in which a plaj'er compelled to take a superior piece would thereby incur the loss of the game ; whereas, by refusing promotion to the Pawn, he could obtain a draw, the following interesting position being an instance of the case in point : — BLACK. ri: (/) In Italy the Pawn was formerly always retained at the eighth square as a Pawn, until some piece was captured for which it could be exchanged. The plurality 18 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. In the above position (White having the move), if White take Eook with Pawn and claim a Queen or any other piece, Black wiU take Bishop with Pawn, and give checkmate next move. If, however, he refuse promotion, Black cannot do more than draw the game, since, if then Black takes the Bishop, White is stalemated, and if he moves either Pawn or King, White takes the Knight's Pawn with Bishop, and may draw, e.g. : 1. P takes E 1. P to Q Kt 4 (remaining a Pawn) 2. B takes P at Kt 7 2. K to Q B 5 3. B to Q B sq 3. K to Q 5 4. B to Q Kt 2 (ch) 4. K moves 5. K to B sq, etc. Positions sometimes occur in which a player can win a game by claiming a Eook or a minor piece, whereas he would lose by claiming a Queen ; but these instances are comparatively rare. The annexed diagram illustrates a case of this de- scription. of pieces, so justly denounced byPhilidor, was not permitted. Staunton thinks the theory of the game to be as much at variance with pluralitj' of Queens as of other ' pieces (" Praxis," p. 42). Ponziani says, "A pawn arrived at its eightli square, is by that very fact invested with the quality of a piece previously lost. But if no piece has been lost, the player nmst hold its denomination in suspense till that occurs." In our opinion, this is afar more sensible rule than that which now obtains orer the greater part of Europe. INTRODUCTION. BLACK. ^>_.^ , """^^/""""^^^^'^ T i '1 i.. ■A^J^m i^ ^ W/////////M .i„. i .1, mmA 'i^mw/z V'X///^/-'//'/. '^=^ 19 In the above position White has the move. If he play P to K 8 and claim a Queen, he loses the game ; whereas, if he makes the same move and claims a Knight, he wins, as follows : — Suppose 1. P to K 8 Queening 2. K to Kt sq 3. K to K K sq 4. R takes Q . But suppose 1. P to K 8 (becoming a Knight) (ch) 2. Q mates 1. Kt takes P (ch) S. Kt to K R 6 (double ch) 3. Q to K Kt 8 (ch) 4. Kt to K B 7 (checkmate) 1. K to R 2 Gambit Pawn. — The Pawn sacrificed by the first player in Gambit openings is called the Gambit Pawn. 2 20 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. The Exchange.— Winning a Eook for a Bishop or a Knight, is called winning the exchange. En Peise. — When a piece or Pawn is attacked by a hostile piece or Pawn, it is said to be en prise — i.e. exposed to be captured. Forced Move. — When a plaj^er has onl}' one single move at his disposal, it is called a forced move. False Move. — Any improper move, such as moving a Knight like a Eook, or vice versa, or a Bishop like a Knight, or Castling when the King is in check or has been previously moved, is called a false move. MiNOB Pieces. — The Bishops and Knights are termed minor pieces, being thus distinguished from the Queen and Rooks. J'Adoube. — Two French words, signifying I adjust, or I replace, which are to be used by a player when he touches a piece or Pawn to adjust its position on the board, without in- tending to play it. Rank and File. — When the men are an-anged on the board before commencing a game, they are in two ranks. The horizontal rows of squares are styled ranks, and the vertical squares ^Zes. Gambit. — This word is derived from an Italian phrase in wrestling, meaning to trip up, and is used in Chess in par- ticular openings in which the first player sacrifices a Pawn on his second move, with the object of more rapidly developing his game, and the chance of gainmg an overwhelming attack. The chief Gambits are the King's Gambit, the Allgaier, Muzio, Salvio, and Cochrane Gambits, the Evans Gambit, etc., etc. To interpose or cover, is to place a man between your King liSlTEODUCTION, 21 when he is in check, and the attacking piece, or when you interpose a man between a piece attacked and the attacking piece. Dbawn Game. — "When neither player can checkmate the other, the game is drawn. Drawn games are caused as fol- lows : — 1. By stalemate. 2. By perpetual check, or when both players persist in repeating the same moves. 3. When there is not sufficient force to give checkmate, as a King and two Knights only, a King and Bishop, etc. 4. When both players are left at the end of a game with equal, or nearly equal, forces, as a Queen against a Queen, a Book against a Book, etc. 5. Where a player, having sufficient force, is unable to effect mate within fifty moves. Fool's Mate is only given to novices. It is brought about thus : — WHITE. BLACK. 1. P to K Kt 4 1. P to K 4, or K 3 S. P to K B 4 2. Q to K B 5 (mate) To TAKE "En Passant " {g). — On being first played in the game, the Pawn has the privilege to advance two squares. If, however, in so doing he passes a square occupied by a hostile Pawn which has advanced to a fifth square, he is liable to be captured by the said Pawn, whose player may intercept him in his passage as if he had only moved one square, or allow him to make the two steps forward and there remain. As has been previously explained, the Pawn moves fonvard only one square at a time, except on his first move, when he has the option of moving two squares. If, however, he does not avail himself of this privilege on his first move, he can never do so afterwards. (g) Formerly the Pawn was not permitted to take "en passant." The rule of taking " en passant" was first established in Spain, in the time of Lopez, and subsequently adopted in France, England, andGeimany, as giving more animation to the game. It is not allowed in Italy. 22 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. The subjoined diagrams illustrate the operation of taking " en fassant." BLACK. m k i "TT!.:^, k'Vk ^// m4 '^M '<^/m WHITE. In the above position, suppose Black has to play, and suppose he plays his Queen's Pawn to his Queen's fourth square, siipporting his Knight which is attacked by the White gfjiBishcfp*; White can now, if he chooses, capture the Black Queen's Pawn, intercepting it in its leap over its Queen's third square, removing it from the board, and placing his Pawn on the said Queen's third square. Only White cannot do this after another move fias been made. The following diagram illustrates the operation above explained when completed : ikTROJJUCTION. ( 23 BLACK. ON THE RELATIVE VALUE OF THE PIECES AND PAWNS. The Queen is considered rather better in ordinary positions than two Eooks, but in end games she is not so powerful as two Eooks. She may be exchanged sometimes for three minor pieces. The Eook is generally reckoned equal to a minor jpiece and two Pawns — i.e. a Bishop and two Pawns, or a Knight and two Pawns, although in an end game, when the other forces have been exchanged off, the minor piece and two Pawns ought, in most cases, to win if the Pawns are united. A Eook and two Pawns are usually quite as good, if not better, than two minor pieces ; but a Bishop and Knight are more powerful than a Eook and Pawn, and far superior to a single Eook. 24 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. The Knights and Bishops may be considered equal in value, although mathematically speaking the Bishop is slightly superior to the Knight. In end games, however, two Bishops will be usually found much stronger than two Knights. It must be remembered that two Knights alone cannot force check- mate, when there are no other men on the board on either side ; whereas two Bishops can easily do so. The Pawn is the least powerful of the chessmen, a Bishop or a Knight being each worth rather more than three Pawns. The King, from his immunity from capture, is invaluable, and cannot, therefore, be taken into calculation. In average situations, a Queen — Can win against a Bishop or a Knight. „ „ Rook. „ „ Rook and Pawn. „ „ Two Knights. „ „ Two Bishops. „ „ Bishop and Knight. There are, however, exceptions when the weaker force can draw the game ; but such occurrences, 'practically speaking , are rare in actual play. A Rook can generally win against a Bishop or a Knight, sup- posing there are an equal number of Pawns left on each side. A Rook and Bishop " cannot " win against a single Rook, except in very extraordinary cases [a). A Rook and Knight can only win against a Rook in very rare instances. A Rook and Pawn " cannot " always win against a Rook. Three minor pieces should nearly invariably win against a Rook. A Bishop can generally draw against a Rook. {a) Philidor considered that a Rook and Bishop ought always to win against a Rook ; but this opinion has been proved to be erroneous by Zytogorski Kling and others, who have demonstritcd beyond doubt tliat Rook and Bishop against Rook conititutes a drawn game. INTRODUCTION. 25 A Knight can also usuallj- draw against a Eook, unless he can be prevented from approaching his King. A Bishop and Knight can win against a solitary King ; but this checkmate is very difficult, and unless carefully studied, will be found quite impracticable within the stipulated number of moves. GENEEAL EULES AND OBSERVATIONS. 1. The Queen should rarely be brought into play at the com- mencement of a game, because she is liable to be attacked by some hostile inferior piece, and compelled to retreat : time — a most important thing at Chess;— is thus lost, and the adversary enabled to develop his game, a proceeding which ought in- variably to be prevented as far as possible. The King's Bishop's third square is, generally speaking, a bad square for the Queen to occupy early in the game, unless the King's Bishop's Pawn has been advanced to Bishop's fourth. It is usually unadvisable to make an isolated attack with the Queen at the beginning of a game, or to place her within the hostile lines without the cooper!ition of some other piece. As a general rule, when playing on the defensive, "the Queen, if forced to retreat, will be better posted on a fourth than on a third square, on a third than on a second square, and so on ; but, of course, the posi- tion of the other pieces will materially affect the mode of play. 2. The Rook is generally most valuable in the latter portion of a game. It is usually well to double the Rooks when practicable, and it is nearly always advisable to post a Rook on a seventh square of any of your own men — i.e., upon a second square of your opponent's : two Rooks doubled on a seventh ^e are very strong, and cramp the hostile pieces. ^^r J 3. The Bishop should always be brought into play as early " 26 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. as possible in the game. This rule applies more especially to the King's Bishop, particularly in the regular openings, where each player moves Pawn to King's fourth on the first move, because the King's Bishop, when posted at Queen's Bishop's fourth square, attacks at once the adversary's King's Bishop's Pawn, and paves the way for Castling on King's side. Two Bishops are stronger than two Knights in end games. It must be borne in mind, that when each player is left at the end of a game with a Bishop and Pawns, and the Bishops are of " different " colours, the game can nearly always be drawn, even though one of the players may have a considerable numerical superiority in Pawns, because the Bishops being on different colours can never be exchanged, and the advance of the hostile Pawns to Queen can consequently be almost inva- riably arrested, except in very rare instances. The Knight, like the Bishop, should be brought into action as soon as possible. The best square for the King's Knight at the commencement of a game is King's Bishop's third. The King's Rook third and King's second squares are generally bad squares (although King's second was erroneously preferred by Philidor), more particularly the former, since, the adversary by capturing your Knight with his Bishop doubles your Pawns on the King's Rook's file, which is very advantageous to him. The most attacking position that the Knight can occupy is, when he is posted oy his own King's Bishop's fifth square. The Queen's Knight, when first moved to Queen's Bishop's third square, can often be brought round to King's Bishop's fifth, by playing him either to King's second or to Queen's square (supposing the Queen to have been moved), and after- wards to King's Knight's third. The Queen's fifth is frequently a good square for the Queen's Knight to occupy. In end games, a single Knight is more powerful for attack than a Bishop, because he can be played so as to capture the hostile men on either black or white squares ; whereas the Bishop INTRODUCTION. 27 can only take Pawns or pieces on squares of his own colour. He is, however, less valuable than a Bishop for purely defen- sive tactics, since when forced to retreat he ceases to defend his Pawns; whereas, the Bishop may be withdrawn to the opposite side of the board, still continuing to defend them. A Knight should not be recklessly exchanged for a Bishop ; for the enemy wiU often offer the exchange of a Bishop for a Knight, and vice versa, when the piece in question threatens to take up a dangerously attacking position. Therefore, when such exchanges are oifered, it is often good play to decline them, either by protecting the menaced piece, or withdrawing him to another square. Some fine players — notably Mr. Paulsen, the celebrated blindfold player — much prefer a Bishop to a Knight, and sel- dom miss an opportunity of exchanging Knights for Bishops, when practicable ; but this course often loses time and posi- tion, and is far from commendable. The Pawns are styled byPhilidor "the soul of Chess." Few amateurs understand thoroughly the art of Pawn play. The following hints wUl be found iiseful : — A doubled Pawn is not always a disadvantage, especially on the King's Bishop's and Queen's Bishop's files, for when united with other Pawns, it forms a formidable phalanx ; but a doubled Pawn on a Book's file is bad. When Pawns are posted diagonally in a line, the foremost Pawn should be preserved, if possibly, because, when Pawns are so united, they are very strong, but when separated they become weak. Lewis advises this, while Philidor counsels the foremost Pawn being first advanced. Jaenisch recommends two Pawns in the fourth rank being supported ; whilst Philidor says : "If one of these Pawns is attacked, advance rather than take." But there are many cases where it is better to take than to advance, as in the French game, for instance {see Chapter XXVII.). It is usually well to advance the King's Bishop's Pawn two 28 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. squares after Castling. The advance of this Pawn was a favourite manoeuvre with Morphy; and if the Pawn can be advanced to King's Bishop's fifth or sixth squares, it often exercises a ruinous pressure on the adversary's game. Good players try to get a passed Pawn, because when a passed Pawn can be supported, it becomes very dangerous. After Castling on King's side, it is generally hazardous play to push forward the King's Knight's Pawn to King's Knight's fourth square ; and the Pawn should, as a rule, not be played to King's Knight's third, if avoidable. In the majority of instances, it is bad play to advance the King's Bishop's Pawn to King's Bishop's third before Castling. It is usually well to establish Pawns on your King's and Queen's fourth squares. Caution should be exercised in cap- turing a proffered Pawn, as it may only be offered as a, bait, to acquire a more important advantage. THE LAWS OF THE GAME. The following Code of Laws was laid down by the Committee of the British Chess Association in 1862. I. — The Chess Boaed. The board must be so placed during play that each com- batant has a white square in his right-hand corner. If, during the progress of a game, either player discovers that the board has been improperly placed, he may insist on its being adjusted. II. — The Chessmen. If, at anj' time in the course of a game, it is found that the men were not properly placed, or that one or more of them were omitted at the beginning, the game in question must be annulled. If, at any time it is discovered that a man has been dropped off the board, and moves have been made during its absence, such moves shall be retracted and the man restored. If the players cannot agree as to the square on which it should be replaced, the game must be annulled. III. — The Right op Move and Choice op Colour. The right of making the first move, and (if either player require it) of choosing the colour, which shall be retained throughout the sitting, must be decided by lot. In any series of games between the same players at one sitting, each shall have the first move alternately in all the games, whether won or drawn. In an annulled game, the player who had the first move in that game shall move first in the next. 30 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. XV.— Commencing out of Tuen. If a player make the first move in a game when it is not his turn to do so, the game must be annulled, if the error has been noticed before both players have completed the fourth move. After four moves on each side have been made, the game must be played out as it stands. v.— Playing Two Moves in Succession. If, in the course of a game, a player move a man when it is not his turn to play, he must retract the said move ; and after his adversary has moved, must play the man wrongly moved, if it can be played legally. VI. — Touch and Move. A player must never touch any of the men except when it is his turn to play, or except when he touches a man for the purpose of adjusting it; in which latter case he must, before touching it, say, "I adjust," or words to that effect. A player who touches with his hand (except accidentally) one of his own men when it is his turn to play, must move it, if it can be legally moved, unless, before touching it, he say, " I adjust," as above ; and a player who touches one of his adver- sary's men, under the same conditions, must take it, if he can legally do so. If, in either case, the move cannot be legally . made, the offender must move his King ; but, in event of the Eng having no legal move, there shall be no penalty. If a player hold a man in his hand, undecided upon wliich square to play it, his adversary may require him to replace it until he has decided on its destination : that man, however, must be moved. If a player, when it is his turn to play, touch with his hand (except accidentally or in Castling) more than one of his own men, he must play any one of them legally moveable that his opponent selects. If, under the same circumstances, THE LAWS OF THE GAME. 31 he touch two or more of the adversary's men, he must capture whichever of them his antagonist chooses, provided it can be legally taken. If it happen that none of the men so touched can be moved or captured, the offender must move his Kirg; but if the King cannot be legally moved, there shall be no penalty; VII. — False Moves and Illegal Moves. If a player make a false move — that is, either by playing a man of his own to a square to which it cannot be legally moved, or by capturing an adverse man by a move which can- not be legally made — he must, at the choice of his opponent, and according to the case, either move his own man legally, capture the man legally, or move any other man legallj^ move- able. If in the course of a game an illegality be discovered (not involving a King being in check), and the move on which it was committed has been replied to, and not niore than four moves on each side have been made subsequently, all these latter moves, including that on which the illegality was com- mitted, must be retracted. If more than four moves on each side have been made, the game must be played out asJ-+ stands. VIII.— Check. A player must audibly say " Check " when he makes a move which puts the hostile King in check. The mere announce- ment of check shall have no signification if check be not actually given. If check be given but not announced, and the adversary makes a move which obviates the check, the move must stand. If check be given and announced, and the adversary neglects to obviate it, he shall not have the option of capturing the checking piece or of covering, but must " move his King" out of check ; but if the King has no legal move, there shall be no penalty. If in the course of a game it be discovered that a King has been left in " check " for one or more moves on 32 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. either side, all the moves, subsequent to that on which the check was given, must be retracted. Should these not be remembered, the game must be annulled. IX. — Enforcing Penalties. A player is not bound to enforce a penalty. A penalty can only be enforced by a player before he has touched a man in reply. Should he touch a man in reply in consequence of a false or illegal move of his opponent, or a false cry of check, he shall not be compelled to move that man, and his right to enforce a penalty shall remain. When the King is moved as a penalty, it cannot Castle on that move. X. — Castling. In Castling the player shall move King and Eook simultane- ously, or shall touch the King first. If he touch the Rook first, he must not quit it before having touched the King ; or his opponent may claim the move of the Rook as a complete move. When the odds of either Rook or both Rooks are given, >^e player giving the odds shall be allowed to move his King as in Castling, and as though the Rooks were on the board. XI. — Counting Fifty Moves. A player may call upon his opponent to draw the game, or to mate him within fifty moves on each side, whenever his -opponent persists in repeating a particular check, or series of checks, or the same line of play, or whenever he has a King alone on the board, or King and Queen ] King and Rook I King and Bishop ^^^'"^* ""'^ ^1"^^ o^' superior force. King and Knight I tHE LAWS OF THE GAME. 33 King and two Bishops \ King and two Knights ' against King and Queen, King, Bishop, and Knight / and in all analogous cases; and whenever one player considers that his opponent can force the game, or that neither side can win it, he has the right of submitting the case to the umpire or by-standers, who shall decide whether it is one for the fifty move counting. Should he not be mated within the fifty moves, he may claim that the game shall proceed. XII. — Pawn Taking in Passing. Should a player be left with no other move than to take a Pawn in passing, he shall be bound to play that move. XIII. — Queening a Pawn. When a Pawn has reached the eighth square, the player has the option of selecting a piece, whether such piece has been previously lost or not, whose names and powers it shall then assume, or of deciding that it shall remain a Pawn. XIV. — Abandoning the Game, If a player abandon the game, discontinue his moves, volun- tarily resign, wilfully upset the board, or refuse to abide by these laws, or to submit to the decision of the umpire, he must be considered to have lost the game. XV. — The Umpire or By-standees. The umpire shall have the authority to decide any question whatever that may arise in the course of a game, but must never interfere except when appealed to. He must always apply the laws as herein expressed, and neither assume the 34 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. power of modifying them, nor of deviating from them iii par- ticular cases according to liis own judgment. When a question is submitted to the umpire or to by-standers by both players, their decision shall be final and binding upon both players. The term by-stander shall comprise any impartial player of eminence who can be appealed to, absent or present. CHA.PTEE II. PHILIDOR'S DEFENCE. GAME THE FIRST. WHITE. BLACK. 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 a. Kt to K B 3 2. P to Q 3 This defence is so called from having been adopted by the celebrated French player of that name. It has the additional recommendation of being favoured by Morphy, Harrwitz, Lowenthal, and other eminent players, in their matches. It is perfectly sound, and, as Mr. Staunton remarks in the "Praxis," p. 68, entails no other disadvantage than that of a somewhat cramped opening. "We think it preferable to Q Kt to B-3 in ordinary plaj', because the second player can thus evade the harassing " Ruy Lopez " attack, or the no less dangerous " Evans Gambit," which cannot be satisfactorily eluded by retreating the King's Bishop to Knight's third square, as demonstrated in Chapter IX. of the present ' volume. It is also much stronger than the " Petroff Defence," as will be shown in Chapter III., and the " Damiano De- fence " is quite untenable. 3. P to Q 4 (best) 3. B to Q B 4 is also a good move for White at this point, although hardly so effective as P to Q 4. For the consequences of 3. B to Q B 4 see Game the Second. 3. P takes P or (A) (B) (C) 4. Q takes P D % 36 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. White can also play here 4 Kt takes P (for which see Game the Third). For the consequences of 4 B to Q B 4, see Game the Fourth. 4. Q Kt to B 3 We agree with Mr. Wormald in thinking this Black's best move. B to Q 2 — the move invented by Mr. Zytogorski, and which has come into vogue of late years — appears to lose time, and permits White to retain his King's Bishop {see Illustrative Games I. and II.) ; whereas, by bringing out his Queen's Knight on his fourth move, Black in a manner compels his adversary to pin it with his. Bishop, and then follows an ex- change of pieces leading to an even game, as we will endeavour to show. 5. B to Q Kt 5 5. B to Q 2 6. B takes Kt 6. B takes B 7. B to K Kt 5 7. Kt to K B 3 Bkck can also play here P to K B 3, and secure an even ■■g- :— B to K R 4 Kt to B 3 Castles ( K R) 9- r^ . r^ ^ 10. '•PtoKBS °-KttoR3 ''■ QtoQ2 ''•BtoK2 Q R to Q sq Q to Q B 4 (ch), , ,, . r ^ n ^^- CaSiiilKRJ ^^- K to R sq ' and the game is even. Instead °f 12. T^r-—p-— the German "Handbuch "makes Black plav 12.^=^ ^ „ J^to-tisi ^ -' RtoKB2 to which White replies with 13. '- and it then declares White to have the better position. 8. Kt to Q B 3 (best) ,jj g B takes Kt g Q takes Q Kt to Q 2 or B 3, Q takes B ' P takes Q " and again the game is even.) 8. B to K 2 9. Castles (Q R) 9. Castles, and Black has as good a game as White. For further illustra- tion of this form of the opening, see Illustrative Games III., v., and VI. We append a diagram showing the position of the forces, from which it will be readily seen that White has PHILIDOR'S DEFENCE. 37 no advantage, and no prospect of gaining any, with correct play on the part of liis opponent. BLACK. (A.) 3. Kt to K B 3 This is much inferior to 3, P takes P. 4. B to K Kt 5 4. B to K Kt 5 5. P takes P 5. B takes Kt. 6. Q takes B 6. P takes P 7. Q to Q Kt 3 7. P to Q Kt 3 8. B to Q B 4, with a fine attacking position. For Black's fourth move in the ahove variation the " Handbuch " gives also 4 P takes P, as follows : — " P takes P "• B to K 3, ^*°- Q takes P BtoK2 6. Kt to B 3 Castles Castles (QR) Q Kt to B 3 38 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. (B.) 3. B to K Kt 5 This defence is also objectionable, and ought in every case to give White an advantage in position. 4. P takes P 4. B takes Kt 5. Q takes B (best) 5. P takes P 6. B to Q B 4 6. Q to Q 2 (best) This is advised by Max Lange as Black's best play here. Black cannot play 6. Kt to K B 3 vpithout immediate loss ; e.g.— 6. Kt to K B 3 7. Q to Q Kt 3 , -winniiig at least a Pawn. Staunton gives 6. Q to K B 3 for Black {see " Handbook," p. 71) ; but White still gets the advantage by 7. Q to Q Kt 3, followed by 8. Q Kt to B 3 {see Illustrative Games VII. and VIII.). In any case, White appears to obtain a superior position. (G.) 3 P to K B 4 Thi^mode of defence is also quite unsound, although re- commended by Philidor, and ought to give White a decisive advantage. Although often successfully adopted by Morphy, his opponents failed to make the most attacking moves. 4, B to Q B 4 (best) The move given in the " Praxis " — viz., 4. P takes K P, — although good, is open to objection, for it yields the second player too much resource ; whereas the move we give as best ensures White the victory. For the consequences of 4. P takes K P, see (D). We may add, that the move of 4. B to Q B 4, is considered best by Max Lange ; and is also recommended by Lowenthal (Morphy's Games, Bohn's edition, p. 217), and in the " Chess Player's Magazine," p. 130. 4. P takes K P 5. Kt takes K P, and White ought to win. As far as we are aware, this line of attack has never been subjected to PHILIDOR'S DEFENCE. "" 39 searching analysis. We present, therefore, the following original variations, to prove that White should gain a decisive advantage. Black has only two moves worth consideration at his dis- posal at this point — viz., P takes Kt or P to Q 4. Firstly if: 5. P takes Kt 6. Q to K E 5 (ch) 6. K to Q 2 (best) /Tf fi 7 Q takes K P (ch) , Q takes R „ ^ P'toXTs ^- QtoK"2 ^- —■ *"• 7. Q to B 5 (ch) 7. K to Q B 3 8. Q takes P at K 4 8. P to Q R 3 (best) 9. P to Q 5 (ch) 9. K to Q Kt 3 10. B to K 3 (ch) 10. B to Q B 4 11, B takes B (ch) 11. K takes B 12. P to Q Kt 4 (ch) IS. K takes P (best) Qf 12 13 Q takes K P (ch) ^^ P to Q. R 4 (ch) ^ ■ K takes B ' K to Q Kt 4 " K to Kt 3 , _ Q to Q 4 (c h) ■.„ Q takes P mate.) i ■ PtoQB4 13. KttoQ2 13. PtoQKt4 14. R to Q Kt sq (ch) 14. K to B 4 /jf j4 15 QtoQ4 ^g Kt to Kt 3 (ch) ■ K to R 4 ■ Q to Q 3 ' K to R 5 B takes K t P double (ch) P to Q R 4 mate.) "■ K takes B ' ' ■^^• 15. Kt takes K P (ch) 15. K to Q Kt 3 (If 15 ig QtoQB3 (ch) ^^^^ RtoQsq, ■ K takes B winning easily. 40 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. 16. QtoQ4(ch) 16. KtoKt2 17. Rtogt3 , ^^ ) (If 16. KtoE4 17. B takes Q Kt P 17. P to Q B 4 (best) 18. P takes P en passant 18. K to B 2 (ch) 19. Q to K 5 (ch), and wins. Diagram showing the position after White's 19th move. «^V ^.1 , <7i-//y//^////. ■ i '^^M„~.,.j'i'^^^''^'' m mwMm 'm^ ^^...z^....mt:.2 m ■WHITE. Secondly if : 5. P to Q 4 6. Q to K E 5 (ch) 6. P to K Kt 3 (best) (If 6. KtoK2 7 Q t o K B 7 cch) ■ K to Q 3 g Q takes Q P (ch) ■ K to K 2 PHILIDOR'S DEFENCE. 41 9 QtoB7.(ch) la^i^li-etc. K to Q 3 7. Kt takes K Kt P 7. Kt to K B 3 8. Q to K 5 (ch) 8. K to Q 2 (best) 9. Kt taltes E. 9. P takes B 10. Kt to B 7, or B to K Kt 5, and White ought to win without difficulty. The subjoined diagram shows the position of the forces after Black's ninth move. BLACK. w L i A '^, 'W^- WHITE. 42 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. (D.) 4. P takes K P This, as we have ahove remarked, is far inferior to B to Q B 4. 4. B P takes K P 5. Kt to K Kt 5 5. P to Q 4 6. P to K 6 6, Kt to K R 3 (best) The attack now branches off into two variations — 7. P to K B 3 and 7. Q Kt to B 3. The former move is recommended by Lowenthal, Der Laza, and other authorities ; while Staim- ton prefers the latter. We believe that 7. Q Kt to B 3, is best, and ought to give White a decisive advantage, if correctly followed up. Before, however, proceeding further, we must observe that, if Black should play 6. B to Q B 4, instead of Kt to K E 3, which we have given as his best move. White should win the game off-hand by playing 7. Kt takes K P, followed by Q to K R 5 (ch) ; or, if the B be moved to Q Kt 3, by B to K Kt 5. To resume the main variation. Firstly : — 7. P to K B 3 7. B to Q B 4 (best) Black has four other moves at his disposal here — viz., B to K 2, P takes B P, Kt to Q B 3, and P to K 6, the first three of which ought all to lose him infallibly the game. {See Varia- tions (I.), (II.), (III.) The last — viz., P to K 6, for which see Variation IV. — is the invention of Mr. Suhle, and seems to have the effect of completely extricating Black from his difficulties. 8. B P takes P 8. Castles 9. P takes Q P (best) fjf a Q takes Q P , „ B to Q B 4 , „„ . , PHILIDOR'S DEFENCE. 43 9. E to K B 4 10. Kt to Q B 3 10. E to K 4 (ch) (best) B takes R (If 10. R takes Kt 11. ;" ' , " "• 12. Q to K B 3 with the better Q takes B game.) 11. Q Kt to K 4 11. E takes Q P 12. B to Q 2 12. Q B takes P 13. B to Q B 4 13. Kt to Q E 3 14. Q to K B 3, and White has- the better game. {See "Praxis," p. 71.) It is, however, a moot point whether Black might not play 9. B to K B 7 (ch), in the above variation, as suggested by Mr. Wormald, in lieu of 9. E to K B 4, e.g. — K to K 2 , , P takes B , „ K to Q 3 9. B to K B 7 (ch) 10. ^^^^ 11. Q^„-3^^^,) 12. Q j,^ ^,^^^^ p and Black's position is very menacing, — in fact, we believe it difficult, if not impossible, for White to extricate himself without loss ; and therefore we are disposed to concur in the opinion of Mr. Staunton, who rightly prefers 7. Q Kt to B 3, to 7. P to KB 3, in opposition to the German authorities. Besides Mr. Suhle's move of 7. P to K 6, the analysis of which we append under Variation (IV.), appears to refute com- pletely White's seventh move, P to K B 3. This is an in- genious novelty, which has hitherto quite escaped the notice of theoreticians. It first occurred in a game between Messrs. Hirschfield and Suhle. Variation (I.). 7. B to K 2 8. P takes P 8. B takes Kt 9. Q to K E 5 (ch) 9. P to K Kt 3 10. Q takes B 10. Q takes Q 11. B takes Q U. Kt to Kt 5 12. P takes P, etc. 44 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. Vaeiation (II.)- 7. P takes B P 8. Q takes K B P 8. E to K Kt sq 9. Q Kt to B 3 9. P to Q B 3 10. Q to B 7 (ch) 10. Kt takes Q 11. P takes Kt (ch), taking the Book and Queening, etc. Variation (III.)- 7. Kt to Q B 3 8. B to Q Kt 5 8. Q to Q 3 9. Q Kt to B 3 9. B takes K P 10. Kt takes B 10. Q takes Kt 11. Q takes Q P U. Q takes Q 12. Kt takes Q 12. Castles 13. P takes P, etc. Vaeiation (IV.). 7. P to K 6 This is not to be found in any of the " Books," but it completely turns the attack. 8. B takes P 8. B to K 2 9. P to K B 4 " La Strategie " suggests P to K E 4 as equally good. (If 9. QjtoQ_2 10 Kt takes R P Castles ■ K takes Kt 1 „ P to K Kt 4 13. K to Q sq ''• BtoR5(ch) B takes KP '^'^ ^^"^^'^ (If 9. QJ2_Q2 10. Kt takes R P BtoQ3(ch ) Castles ■ K takes Kt ' Kt to K B 4 9. B takes Kt 10. P takes B 10. Kt to K B 4 11. B to B 4 11. B takes P 12. Q to K 2 12. Q to Q 2 with a very good game. PHILIDOR'S DEFENCE. 46 This latter variation proves beyond dispute that 7. P to K B 3 permits Black to equalise matters, and, as will be seen by the subjoined analysis, is not so forcible a move for White as 7. Kt to Q B 3 ; and, consequently, that Mr. Staunton, the great English theoretician, is a better authority on this open- ing than any of the German writers. To return once more to the main variation. Secondly : — 7. Q Kt to B 3 7. P to Q B 3 8. K Kt takes K P 8. P takes Kt 9. Q to K E 5 (ch) 9. P to K Kt 3 10. Q to K 5 10. E to K Kt sq 11. B to K Kt 5, and White must win. Black having only three feasible moves — viz., Q to Q 3, Q to Q Kt 8, or B to K Kt 2, all of which are bad, as foUows : — Firstly, if: 11. Q to Q 3 12. Q takes Q 12. B takes Q 13 Kt takes P 13. B to B sq (for if now 13. Kt to K B 4 14. P to K Kt 4, &c.) 14. Kt to B 6 (ch) 14. K to K 2 15. Kt takes R (dis ck) 15. K takes P 16. Kt takes Kt and wins Secondly, if 11. Q to Q Kt 3 12. Castles 12. Kt to K Kt 5 13. Q to K B 4, winning a piece at least Thirdly, if 11. B to K Kt 2 12. P to K 7 12. Q to Q 2 (Ifl2.Ql^Kr3 ^3-B?£Q(best) j^ B to Q 8 (ch) j^^ B to B 4 (ch) " K to B 2 ' ■ B to K 3 ^„ B takes B (ch) ^y R takes R K takes B ' Kt takes R 18. PQH?5M (oil) 19. B to K 3, &c.) K to B 4 ' ' 13. Q to B 4, and wins. 4e THE CHESS-PLAYEIl*S MANUAL. GAME THE SECOND. WHITE. BLACK. 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 2. Kt to K B 3 2. P to Q 3 3. B to Q B 4 This line of play is favoured by Mr. Boden. but we cannot think it so strong as the usual move, P to Q 4. Black has the choice of three moves, viz., B to K 2, P to Q B 8, and P to K B 4. The two first are considered his best moves, while the last is generally admitted to be inferior, although advised by Philidor. We will examine, firstly, B to K 2. For the consequences of P to Q B 3, and P to K B 4. {See Variations I. and II.) 3. B to K 2 This move was adopted by Harrwitz against Lowenthal. (See Illustrative Game, ,X.) 4. Castles 4, B to K Kt 5 5. Pto Q4 5. Q Kt to B 3 6. P to Q 5 6. Kt to Q 5 7. B toK3 7. Kt takes Kt (ch) 8. P takes Kt 8. B to Q 2 (best) And the game is even. Vaeiation (I.). 3. Pto Q B 3 4. Pto Q4 4. P to Q 4 5. P takes Q P 5. P to K 5 6. Et to K 5 6. P takes P 7. B checks 7. B to Q 2 8. Kt takes B 8. Kt takes Kt And the game is quite equal. PHILIDOR'S DEFENCE. 4t Variation (II.). 3, P to K B 4 4. P to Q 4 4. P takes K P nf A ^ Kt to K Kt 5 .^, „ „ , Kt to O B 3 ^ game. See also Illustrative Game XI.) 5. Kt takes P 5. P to Q 4 (best) (If 5 6 Q to K R 5 (ch) Q to K B 5 (ch) P takes Kt ' K to Q 2 (best) Kto Q B 3 g Q takes P at K 5 g P to Q 5 (ch) B to K 3 (ch) ■ptoQRS ■KtoKt3 BtoQB4 11 B takes B (ch) ^ P to Kt 4 (oh) k takes B ^•'- K takes P (best). If 12 13 Q takes K P (ch) ^^ P to R 4 (c h)') "■ k takes B ' ' K to Kt 4 ' K to Kt 3 15 Q to Q 4 (ch) , „ Q takes P (mate). ■ P to B 4 j3 Kt to Q 2 ^^ R to Kt sq (ch) ^g Q toJ3_4 P to Q Kt 4 (best) ' K to R 4 ' Q to Q 3 ^„ Kt to Kt 3 (ch) j^ B takes P (ch) ,„ P mates.) ■ KtoKtS ■ K takes B 6. Q to E 5 (ch) 6. P to Kt 3 (best) 7. Kt takes P 7. P takes Kt /jj - g Q to K 5 (ch) " „ K t takes R ^ ■ Kt to K B 3 ■ K to Q 2 (best) ' P takes B 10. BloKKi_5 ^^ ) 8. Q takes E, and wins. The preceding analysis sufficiently demonstrates the infe- riority of 3. B to Q B 4 to 3. P to Q 4, as Black can always obtain a perfectly even game by playing P to Q B 3 or B to K 2 in reply. 4s THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. GAME THE THIED. WHITE. BLACK. 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 2. Kt to K B 3 3. P to Q 3 3. P to Q 4 3- P take" 4. Kt takes P A difference of opinion exists among the leading authorities as to whether this move is preferable or not to taking the Pawn with Queen. Staunton says this move " is at least as heneficialto White, as capturing with the Queen {vide " Praxis," p. 69), whilst Max Lange thinks Q takes P is stronger {see " Paul Morphy," Starie's edition, p. 151). Black has two recognised replies, viz., 4. Kt to K B 3 and 4. P to Q 4. We will first examine the former. For the consequences of the latter move, see " Variation I." 4. Kt to K B 3 5. Kt to Q B 3 5. B to K 2 6. B to K 3 or (A) In his match with Morphy, Mr. Lowenthal played here B to K 2, but Max Lange thinks that B to K 3 is to be preferred. 6. B to K 3 7. Kt takes B 7. P takes Kt 8. B to Q B 4, with a fine game. 'A.) 6. B to K 2 6. Castles 7. Castles 7. P to Q B 4 8. Kt to K B 3 8. Kt to Q B 3 9. B to K Kt 5 9. P to K E 3 10. B takes Kt 10. B takes B 11. Q to Q 2 11. B to K 3 12. Q E to Q sq, and Black will find it difficult to save his threatened Queen s Pawn — the loss of which ought to involve the ultimate loss of the game. PHILIDOR'S DEFENCE. 40 Variation I. 4. P to Q 4 5. P to K 5 This is the usual move. We think that 5. P takes P, fol- lowed by B to K 3, or P to Q B 4 would also give White a good game. Also, 5. Kt to K B 3 deserves attention. 5. P to Q B 4 or (B) 6. B to Kt 5 (ch) 6. B to Q 2 7. P to K 6 7. B takes B or (C) (D) 8. P takes P (ch) 8. K takes P 9. K Kt takes B 9. Q to K 2 (ch) (If 9 IQ Q Kt to E 3 ^^ Q to K R 5 (ch) ■QtoQR4(ch) ■ PtoQ5 ■ PtoKKtS 13 toQ5(ch) ,„ KKt takes QP -.-. , . 12. ^ ■ ^ ' 13. ^5^— , ana Anite ougnc to wm. K to K sq 10. Q to K 2, and the positions are about equal. In- terposing with B at K 3 on White's tenth move would be inferior on account of 10. J J Q to K R 5 (ch) j2 Q to Q 5 (ch) P to Q 5 P to K Kt 3 K to Kt 2, &c. The following variations are from the " Handbuch : " after the moves, PtoK4 ^ K ttoK B3 3 P to Q 4 ^ K t takes P ■ P to K 4 P to Q 3^ ' ■ P takes P ' P to Q 4 White may play, in Keu of 5. ^^^ ^ 5. PJ^kf^ thus • 5 P ^^^^^ P 6 QJ.2JL2 (oh) 7 K t takes B g Q takes Q (ch) ■QtakesP ' BtoKSovia) 'QjiakesKt ' P takes Q 9 B to Q B 4 jp BtoK6 ^^ Kt^to_Q BJ ^2 Q B to K Kt 5 ■ P to K 4 ■ Kt to Q 2 ■ K Kt to B 3 " B to Q 3 J3 Castles ( Q R) ^^ B to Q Kt 3 ^^ ■ K to K 2 ■ Q R to K sq (a) g y Kt to Q Kt 5 g Q Kt to Q B 3 g B to K B 4 ■ B to K 2 ■ Kt to Q R 3 ' Q to Q sq ' Ktto K B 3 jQ Q toK 5 j^ Kt takes Q B P ^^ Q takes_Kt jg B takes Q Castles ' Kt takes Kt ' Q takes Q " B to Q Kt 5 1- BtoK5 ,. PtoKB4 ^^^„ „„^„ 14. _ 15. , even same. R to K sq Kt to K 5 ' ^ 50 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. (B.) Variation on Black's Fifth Move. Diagram showing the position after Black's fifth move. fe m. i r* wMm. i k i m ,.,^» WW, mm. III ^ F-. . WHITE. 5. B to Q B 4 This move is thought by some authorities to be much better than P to Q B 4. 6. Q Kt to B 3 7. B to K 2 8. Castles. Even game. 6. K Kt to K 2 7. Castles PHILIDOR'S DEFENCE. 51 (C.) Vaeiation on Black's Seventh Move. 7. B P takes K P 8. Kt takes K P 8. Q to K 2 (best) 9. B takes B (ch) 9. Kt takes B 10. Castles 10. Q takes Kt 11. E to K sq 11. Q Kt to K 4 12. Q to K E 5 (ch), and tlie " Praxis " pronounces the game in favour of White. (D.) Another Variation on Black's Seventh Move. 7. B P takes Kt 8. P takes B (ch) 8. Q Kt takes P 9. Q takes P 9. Kt to K B 3 10. Castles 10. B to K 2 11. Q Kt to B 3 11. P to Q E 8 12. B to E 4 12. P to Q Kt 4 13. B to Kt 8, and again the position is favourable for White. The preceding variations appear to demonstrate that 4. P to Q 4 for Black, in answer to 4. Kt takes P, is not so good a defence as 4. Kt to K B 8. As to whether White's fourth move Kt takes P is preferable or not to Q takes P, we can only say sub judice lis est. The following variation occurred in a game at the Clifton Tournament, 1878, between Mr. Wisker and the Author (see Variation (A.) p. 48) : — 6. B to K 2 6. Castles 7. Castles 7. P to Q B 4 8. Kt to Q Kt 3. We think this move of Mr. Wisker's is preferable to retreating the Knight to K B 3, White being now enabled, after the " sortie " of the hostile Queen's Knight, to advance his King's Bishop's pawn with a very strong game. E 2 52 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. GAME THE FOUETH. WHITE. BLACK. 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 2. Kt to K B 3 2. P to Q 3 3. P to Q 4 3. P takes P 4. B to Q B 4 This move is perfectly sound, and may be safely made. It converts the game into a kind of Scotch gambit. 4. Kt to K B 3 (best) (If 4. 5. PtoQBJ QtoQKt3 ^ j^ ^ BtoK2 P takes P or P to Q 6 ' a good attack.) 6. Castles 5. B to K 2 6. B to K Kt 5 6. P to Q B 4 7. P to K 5 7. P takes P (best) (If 7. 8 ?i5^esJB g B to Q 5 Kt takes Kt ■ Kt to K 5 ■ Q takes B " Kt to K Kt 4 ' Q takes Kt n. P to K B 4, .., „ ,, , , ' with a fine attack.) 8. Kt takes P 8. B to K 8 or Castles and Black seems to have a valid defence. For instances of this form of opening see Illustrative Games, XII. and XIII. Our analysis of this opening would be incomplete without a notice of the ingenious variation in Philidor's counter gambit, recommended by Herr Zukertort, and which first appeared, we believe, in the " Schachzeitung," 1867. After the moves — WHITE. BLACK. 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 2. Kt to K B 3 S. P to Q 3 3. P to Q 4 3. P to K B 4 White can win by playing 4. B to Q B 4, or 4. P takes K P, PHILIDOR'S DEFENCE. 53 as we have shown (see pp. 38—45) ; but Herr Zukertort has suggested another move by which he can equally secure the advantage, viz., 4. Kt to Q B 3, as follows : — 4. Kt to Q B 3 4. B P takes K P 5. Q Kt takes P 5. P to Q 4 6. K Kt takes K P 6. P takes Q Kt 7. Q to K R 5 (ch) 7. P to K Kt 3 8. Kt takes P 8. Kt to K B 3 9. Q to K 5 (ch) 9. K to B 2 10. B to Q B 4 (ch) 10. K to Kt 2 (forced) 11. Kt takes R 11. K takes Kt 12. B to K Kt 5 12. B to K Kt 2 13. B takes Kt 13. B takes B 14. Q takes K P 14. Kt to B B 15. Castles (Q R), and the German " Handbuch " declares White has a winning position. Black has also another move at his disposal {see lUusti'ative Game XVI.), which, although inferior, deserves notice, e.g. : — WHITE. BLACK. 1. P to K 4 1. P to-K 4 2. Kt to K B 3 2. P to Q 3 3. P to Q 4 3. Q Kt to Q 2 This move, although inferior to P takes P, may be safely ventured. White's best reply is 4. B to Q B 4, which ought to ensure him a commanding position. In conclusion, we may repeat that the defence favoured by the immortal Philidor is quite sound. It is far stronger than the Petroff defence, and more safe than bringing out the Queen's Knight ; and the mere fact of its being frequently adopted by so many eminent players speaks volumes in its favour. It was adopted in many instances at the great Vienna Tournament of 1873. 54 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. GAMES ILLUSTRATIVE OF PHILIDOR'S DEFENCE Game L— Between Messrs. Moephy and Boden. White (Mr. Boden). Black (Mr. Morpliy). 1. P to K 4 1. F to K 4 2. Kt to K B 3 2. P to Q 3 3. P to Q 4 3. P takes P 4. Q takes P 4. B to Q 2 (a) 5. B to K 3 (6) 5. Kt to Q B 3 6. Q to Q 2 6, Kt to K B 3 7. B to Q 3 7. B to K 2 8. Kt to Q B 3 8. Castles 9. Castles (K R) 9. P to K R 3 10. P to K. R 3 10. Kt to K R 2 11. P to K Kt 4 11. P to K R 4 12. Kt to R 2 ]2. P takes P 13. P takes P 13. Kt to K 4 14. P to K B 3 14. P to K Kt 4 15. KtoKt2 15. P to Q B 4 16. R to K R sq 16. K to Kt 2 17. Kt to K B sq 17. R to K R sq 18. Kt to Kt 3 18. PtoKBS 19. Kt to Q 5 19. Kt to K B sq (c) 20. Kt to R 5 (eh) 20. K to B 2 21. Q R to Q sq 21. K Kt to Kt 3 22. B to K 2 22. Kt to R 5 (ch) 23. K to B 2 23. B to Q B 3 24. Kt takes B 24. Q takes Kt 25. Q takes Q P 25. P to Q Kt 3 2t). Q takes Q (ch) 26. K takes Q 27. KttoKtS 27. K to B 2 28. Q R to Q 6 28. K to K 2 29. R to Q 2 29. K to B 2 30. P to K B 4 30. P takes P 81. B takes K Kt P 31. K Kt to Kt 3 32. B to K E 6 32. K R to R 2 33. K to K 3 33. Q R to K R sq 34. Kt to B 5 34. K Kt to K 2 35. Kt takes Kt 35. K takes Kt (a) "We do not approve of tliis move, and concur in the opinion of Mr. Wormald, who tliinks it loses time. It also permits White to retain his King's Bishop, which is disadvantageous to the second player. The old move of Q Kt to B 3, compelling White to play B to Q Kt 5, appears much preferable. (6) 5 B to K B 4 is also a good move here. (c) Q R to B sq has been suggested as a better move at this point. PHILIDOR'S DEFENCE. 06 36. P to K Kt 5 36. 37. K E to Q sq 37] 38. E to Q 6 (ch) 38. 39. B to R 5 (ch) 39. 40. Q B takes P (ch) 40. 41. K E to K B sq (ch), and wins (d). KtoK3 P takes P KtoB2 KtoK2 K to B sq Game II. — Between Messrs. Boden and Wayte. (From " The Games of the Chess Congress.") White (Mr. Boden). Black (Mr. Wayte). 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 2. Kt to K B 3 2. P to Q 3 3. P to Q 4 3. P takes P 4. Q takes P 4. B to Q 2 (a) 5. B to K 3 5. Kt to Q B 3 6. Q to Q 2 6. Kt to K B 3 7. Kt to Q B 3 7. B to K 2 8. B to Q 3 8. Castles 9. PtoKE3(6) 9. B to K 3 10. R to Q sq 10. Kt to K 4 11. Kt takes Kt 11. P takes Kt 12. Castles 12. PtoQB3 13. Kt to K 2 13. Q to Q B 2 14. Kt to Kt 3 14. Q E to Q sq 15. Q to K 2 15. Kt to Q 2 16. B to Q B 4 16. B takes B 17. Q takes B 17. KttoQKtS 18. Q to K 2 18. P to K Kt 3 19. P to Q Kt 3 19. B to K E 5 20. B to K R 6 20. E takes E - 21. Q takes R 21. E to Q sq 22. Q to K B 3 22. B ta&s Kt (c) 23. Q to K B 6 And Black resigned. (d) This was the only game, we believe. won by Mr. Boden of his formidable antagonist. Still it does him much credit. (a) See note (a) to the preceding game. (6; In the preceding game Mr. Boden castled at this point. (c) A blunder ! Q to K 2 would have given him an even game. 66 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. Game 111.— Between Messrs. Morphy and Haeewitz. White (Mr. Morphy). 1. P to K 4 2. Kt to K B 3 3. P to Q 4 4. Q takes P 5. B to Q Kt. 5 6. B takes Kt 7. B to K Kt 5 8. Kt. to Q B 3 9. Castles (Q R) 10. K R to K sq 11. BtoKR4 12. B takes B 13. P to K 5 14. P takes B 15. Kto Kt sq 16. R takes P 17. KttoQ5 18. K R to K sq 19. R to Kt sq 20. Q to K 3 21. KttoB4 22. Q to K 2 23. Q to B 4 24. Kt to B 5 (a) 25. Q E to K sq 26. P to R 3 (6) 27. Q to Q 4 28. R to Kt 2 29. Q to B 3 , 30. E to K E sq 31. Q R to Kt sq 32. Q to K sq 33. R to Kt 5 34. Q to K 6 35. Q to K 7 (ch) 36. Q takes Kt 37. Q to K sq Black (Mr. Harrwitz). 1. P to K 4 2. P to Q 3 3. P takes P 4. Q Ktto Q B3 5. B to Q 2 6. B takes B 7. Kt to K B 3 8. B to K. 2 9. Castles 10. P to K R 3 11. Ktto K sq 12. Q takes B 13. B takes Kt 14. Q to Kt 4 (ch) 15. P takes P 16. Q to Kt. 7 17. Q takes E P .18. Q to Q 3 19. K to R 2 20. P to K B 4 21. Q to Q Kt 3 22. R to B 2 23. Q to K B 3 24. Q to K 2 25 Q to Q 2 26. Kt to Q 3 27. R to K Kt sq 28. Kt to K sq 29. P to B 5 30. P to K Kt 3 31. Q to Q 4 32. Q takes Kt 33. Q takes P 34. R to B 3 35. R to Kt 2 36. P takes R 37. Q to Q B 3 And Black wins. {a) Mr. Staunton thinks E. to Kt 6 would have heen better ; but Mr. Lowenthal suggests Q to K 2 as a satisfactory answer to that move. lb) In his notes to this Game, Mr. Lowenthal remarks, that 26 Q to Q B 3, or Q to K K i, instead of the move actually made, would have given White an PHILIDOR'S DEFENCE. 67 Game IV. — Between Messrs. Robey (From " The Games of the Chess White (Mr. Eobey). 1. PtoK4 1. 2. Kt to K B 3 2. 3. P to Q 4 3. 4. Q takes P 4. 5. B to K 3 5. 6. Kt to Q B 3 6. 7. B to K 2 7. 8. Castles (K E) 8. 9. Q to Q 2 9. 10. Kt to K sq 10. 11. P to KB 4 11. 12. B to Q 3 12. 13. KttoKBS 13. 14. Q takes Kt 14. 15. Q R to Q sq 15. 16. P takes B 16. 17. P to K B 5 17. 18. Kt takes Kt 18. 19. Q to K 2 (a) 19. 20. P to Q B 4 20. 21. Q E to K sq 21. 22. Q to K Kt 4 22. 23. E to K B 3 23. 24. B P takes P 24. 25. E to K Kt 3 25. 26. P to K E 4 26. 27 R to K 2 27. 28. PtoKE5 28. 29. K to E 2 29. 30. K to E 3 30. 31. Q E to K 3 31. 32. Q to K 2 32. 33. Q to K B sq 33. 34. Q R to K B 3 34. and MacDonnell. Congress.") Black (Mr. MacDonnell). PtoK4 P to Q 3 P takes P B to Q 2 Kt to K B 3 BtoK 2 Castles Kt to Q B 3 Q Kt to K 4 B to Q B 3 Kt to Kt 3 Kt to K Kt 5 Kt takes B B to K B 3 B takes Kt Q toK 2 Kt to K 4 Q takes Kt P to K B 3 K R to K sq K R to K 2 Q R to K sq P to Q4 B takes P B takes R P B to Q 4 B to Q B 3 P to K R 3 P to Q Kt 4 P to Q R 4 K to R sq BtoQ 2 Q to Q B 4 RtoK4 excellent attack. "We do not think, however, that White could have gained any advantage by adopting the line of play suggested ; e. g. — Q to Q B 3 g^ R takes Kt 29 ^ take s P (rh ) R takes R R takes E Suppose 26. 30. E to Q sq Kt to B 6 (ch) K moves to R sq 27. 31. Kt takes Q R from K sq mates. (as) P to K B 6 would have given White the advantage. THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. 35. K R to K Kt 6 36. B takes R 37. P to Q B 3 38. P to K Kt 4 39. Q to K B 2 40. Q takes R 41. Q to Q 3 42. Q takes Q 43. P to K Kt 5 44. P takes B P 45. P takes P (ch) 46. E P takes B 35. R takes K P 36. R takes B 37. RtoK4 38. R to K 6 39. R takes R (ch) 40. B to Q B 3 41. Qto Q4 42. B takes Q 43. B to K B 2 44. B takes R 45. K takes P 46. P to Q R 5 And White resigned. Game V. — . Messrs. De Riviere and Laroche. (From « The Praxis.") White (Mr. De Riviere). 1. P to K 4 2. Kt. to K B 3 3. P to Q 4 4. Q takes P 5. B to Q Kt 5 6. B takes Kt 7. B to K Kt 5 8. B to K R 4 9. P to Q B 4 10. Q Kt to B 3 11. Castles (K R) 12. P to Q Kt 4 13. P to Q R 4 (6) 14. B takes P 15. Q takes K R 16. Q takes K R P 17. Q R to Q Kt sq 18. Q R to Q Kt 3 19. Q takes P Black (Mr. Laroche). 1. P to K 4 2. P to Q 3 3. P takes P Q Kt to B 3 B toQ 2 B takes B P to K B 3 8. P to K R 4 (a) 9. Q to Q 2 10. Castles (Q R) 11. K to Kt sq P to Q Kt 3 P to K Kt 4 P takes B B to K Kt 2 B takes Q Kt 17. Q B takes K P 18. Kt to K B 3 19. R to K Kt sq 4. 5. 6. 7. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. (a) A novelty for which Chess-players are iiidehted to the ingenuity of Mr. Laroche. The usual moves at this point of the game are Kt to K R 3, or Kt to K 2 ; the former of which was played hy Harrwitz against Morphy. (J) Q R to Q sq might, perhaps, have been played here more advantageously. 20. Q to K 3 21. K to R sq 22. K takes R 23. K to Kt 3 24. P takes Kt PHILIDOR'S DEFENCE. 20. R takes Kt P (oh) 21. R takes R P (ch) 22. Kt to K Kt 5 (ch) 23. Kt takes Q 24. Q to K Kt 2 ch And White resigned. 5D Game VI. — Between Messrs. Gochee and Gossip. White (Mr. Gossip). Black (Mr. Gocher). 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 2. Kt to K B 3 2. P to Q 3 3. P to Q 4 3. P takes P 4. Q takes P 4. Kt to Q B 3 5. B to Q Kt 5 5. B to Q 2 6. B takes Kt 6. B takes B 7. Kt to Q B 3 7. Kt to K B 3 8. B to K Kt 5 8. B to K 2 9. Castles (K R) (a) 9. Castles 10. Q R to K sq 10. Kt to K Kt 5 11. B takes B 11. Q takes B 12. P to K R 3 12. Kt to K 4 13. K Kt to Q 2 13. P to K B 3 14. P to K B 4 14. Kt to Kt 3 15. Q to K B 2 (b) 15. Q to K B 2 16. P to K Kt 4 16. P to Q R 4 17. P to Q R 4 17. R to Q R 3 18. P to Q Kt 3 18. R to Q R sq 19. Kt to Q B 4 19. P to Q Kt 3 20. Kt to K 3 20. Kt to K 2 21. Q R to Q sq 21. Q R to K sq 22. KtoR2 22. Q to K 3 23. K R to K sq 23. P to K Kt 4 24. Kt to K Kt 2 24. P takes B P 25. Kt takes B P 25. Q to K 4 26. Q to Kt 3 (c) 26. Kt to K Kt 3 (a) Castling with Q E was played here by Morphy in his match with Harrwitz. (6) Whether or no this was White's best move is an open question. (c) This we believe to be White's best resource. 60 THE OHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. ,. Kt takes Kt 27. RP takes Kt 28. Kt to Q 5 28. B takes Kt 29. P takes B 29. Q takes Q (oh) K takes Q 30. K to K 4 And the game was drawn by mutual consent. Q 30 Game YIL— Between Mr. Mob; FHY and the Duke of Brunswick and Count Isouaed in Consultation. White (Mr. Morphy). Black (Duke of B. & Ally). 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 2. Kt to K B 3 2. P to Q 3 3. P to Q 4 3. B to K Kt 5 [a) 4. P takes P 4. B takes Kt 5. Q takes B 5. P takes P 6. B to Q B 4 6. Kt to K B 3 (6) 7. Q to Q Kt 3 7. Q to K 2 8. Kt to Q B 3 (c) 8. P to Q B 3 9. B to K Kt 5 9. P to Q Kt 4 10. Kt takes P 10. P takes Kt 11. B takes Kt P (ch) 11. Q Kt to Q 2 12. Castles (Q R) 12. Q R to Q sq 13. R takes Kt 13. R takes R 14. R to Q sq 14. Q to K 3 15. B takes R(ch; 15. Kt takes B 16. Q to Kt 8 (oh) 16. Kt takes Q 17. RtoQ8mate(d). (a) This defence is unanimously condemned by all the authorities. (J) A bad move that loses a pawn at once. There are two other moves at this point, viz., Q to K B 3, recommended by Staunton, and Q to Q 2 advised by Max Lange, both of which give the second player plenty of resource. Of the two we prefer the latter mode of play. (c) B takes P (ch), followed by Q takes Kt P, would also have been good play here, and would have been sufficient to secure tlie victory. (d) A brilliant termination ! PHILIDOR'S DEFENCE. 61 Game VIII. — Between Messrs. Morphy and Harrwitz. White (Mr. Morphy). Black fMr. Harrwitz). 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 2. Kt to K B 3 2. P to Q 3 3. P to Q 4 3. B to K Kt 5 4. P takes P. 4. B takes Kt 5. Q takes B 5. P takes P 6. B to Q B 4 6. Kt to K B 3 7. Q to Q Kt 3 7. B to Q 3 8. B takes P (ch) 8. K to B sq 9. B to Kt 5 9. Q Kt to Q 2 10. B to R 5 10. P to K Kt 3 11. B to E 6 (ch) 11. K to K 2 12. B to B 3 12. Kt to B 4 13. QtoB4 13. PtoQKt4 14. Q to K 2 14. Kt to K 3 15. B to K 3 15. P to Q R 3 16. Kt to Q 2 16. K to B 2 17. Castles (Q R) 17. Q to K 2 18. P to K Kt 3 18. K R to Q Kt sq 19. B to Kt 2 19. P to Q R 4 20. K R to K B sq 20. P to R 5 21. P to K B 4 21. P to R 6 22. P to Kt 3 22. K to Kt 2 23. P to B 5 23. Kt to B sq 24. P to K Kt 4 24. Q to K sq 25. BtoB3 25. Q to B 3 26. Kt to Kt sq 26. P to Kt 5 27. Q to B 2 27. Q Kt to Q 2 28. P to Kt 5 28. Kt to Kt sq 29. P to B 6 (ch) 29. K to R sq 30. P to B 7 30. Kt to Q B 4 31. P takes Kt (Queen's) 31. K takes Q 32. B takes Kt 32. B takes B 33. Q to K 2 33. Q to K 3 34. Kt to Q 2 34. K to R sq 35. B to Kt 4 35 Q to K 2 36. Kt to B 3 36. R to Q sq 37. P to R 4 37. R to Q 3 38. R takes R 38. P takes R 39. Q to B 4 39. R to K B sq 40. Q to K 6 40 B to K 6 (ch) 41. Kto Qsq 41. QtoQB2 42. Kt to Q 2 42. B to B 5 (52 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. 43. Kt to B 4 44. Q to Q. 5 45. P takes Q 46 R to B 3 47. PtoB3 48. P takes P 49. KtoB2 50. KtoB3 51. Bto K 6 52. P to Kt 4 53. P to Kt 5 54. P to Kt 6 55. BtoB8 56. P to Kt 7 57. Kt takes Q P 58. Kt to Kt 5 43. QtoB4 44. Q takes Q (ch) 45. R to Q sc[ 46. K to Kt 2 47. R to Q Kt sq 48. R takes P 49. K to B sq 50. R to Kt 4 51. RtoB4 52. RtoB2 53. K toK2 54. R to Kt 2 55. R to Kt sq 56. K to Q sq 57. KtoK2 58. P toR3 59. P to Q 6 (ch), and wins. Game IX.— Between Messrs. Staunton ani "Alter" against Messrs. MoRPHT and Barnes. White (Messrs. S. & A.). Black (Messrs. M. & B.). 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 2. Kt to K B 3 2. P to Q 3 3. P to Q 4 3. P to K B 4 (a) 4. P takes K P (h) 4. B P takes P 5. Kt to Kt 5 5. P to Q 4 6. P to K 6 6. Kt to K R 3. 7. Kt to Q B. 3 (c) 7. P to B 3 8. K Kt takes K P id) 8. P takes Kt {a) This is a bad move, and ought to have cost Black the game. (See pre- ceding Analysis. ) (b) Much inferior to B Q B 4, which wins with certainty. (c) "We think this move better than P to K B 3, and differ entirely from Lowenthal, Max Lange, Heydebrand, and the German school, who pronounce it inferior to that line of play. {dj Neither do we agree with Max Lange, in thinking this move to be in- ferior to 8. Kt takes R P ; but on the contrary, consider the move selected by Mr. Staunton to be White's strongest mode of play. Max Lange gives Q_ Kt takes K R P g Kt takes KB ^^ Kt takes K P j^ Kt to Kt 5, & c. ■ . Q B takes P ' K takes Kt ' Kt to Kt 5 PHlLIDOil'S DEFENCE. 63 9. Q to K R 5 (ch) 9. P to K Kt 3 10. Q to K 5 10. R to Kt. sq 11. B takes Kt (e) 1]. B takes B 12. R to Q. sq 12. Q to Kt 4 13. Q to B 7 13. B takes P 14. Q takes Kt P 14. P to K 6 15. P to B 3 15. Q to K 2 16. Q takes R 16. K to B 2 17. Kt to K 4 (f) 17. B to K B 5- 18. B to K 2 18. K to Kt 2 19. Castles 19. Q to Q B 2 20. Kt to B 5 20. B takes P (ch) 21. K to R sq 21. B to B sq 22. R to Q 4 22. B to Kt 6 23. R to K 4 23. K to R sq 24. R to Q sq 24. Q to K Kt 2 25. R to K R 4 25. B takes R 26. Q takes Kt 26. B to R 3 27. Q to R 2 27. B takes B 28. R to Q 7 28. Q to R 3 29. Kt to K 4 29. B to B 5 30. Kt to B 6 30. P to K 7 31. R to K 7 31. Q to B e (ch) 32. Q to Kt sq 32. Q takes Q (oli) 33. K takes Q 33. P to K 8 (Queen's) (ch) 34. R takes Q 34. B takes R And White resigned. Game X. — Between Messrs. Harewitz and Lowbnthal. White (Mr. Lowenthal). Black (Mr. Harrwitz). 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 2. Kt to K B 3 2. P to Q 3 3. B to B 4 3. B to K 2 4. Kt to Q B 3 (a) 4. Kt to K B 3 (e) 11. B to K Kt 5 would have won the game without difficulty. {See Chap. II., page 45. Game the First (D). Here the White allies missed their first opportunity.) (/) Again, Q R to Q 4 would have won easily, as pointed out by Mr. Staunton. (See "Praxis, "p. 87.) (a) This is hardly so strong as Castling. 64 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. p to 3 ^" Castles P to K H 3 6. Kt to Q B 3 B to K Kt 5 7. B to K 3 B takes Kt 8. B takes B B to Q Kt 3 9. Kt to K 2 Kt to K 2 10. P to Q B 3 B takes Q B H- P takes B P to Q B 3 12. P to Q 4 Q to Kt 3 13. Q to Kt 3 Castles (KR) 14 Kt to Kt 3 Q takes Q 15. B P takes Q P to K Kt 3 16- P takes P P takes P 17. R to Q R 5 Kt to Q 2 18- B to Kt 4 19. PtoQKtS 19. RtoR3 20. K R to Q sq 20. P to Q Kt 4 21. P to K R 4 21. B takes Kt 22. R takes B 22. K R to Q R sq 23. Kt to Q. B. sq 23. Kt to K B sq 24. Q R to Kt sq 24, P to Q B 4 25. Q R to Kt 2 25. K to B 2 26. P to Q B 4 26. R to Q R 4 27. P to Q Kt 4 27. P takes Q Kt P 28. Q R takes P 28. K R to Q B sq 29. Kt to Q 3 29. P takes P 30. R takes P (ck) 30. K to B 3 31. R to Q B 2. ■ 31. R. to R 6 32. Kt to Q Kt 2 And the game was ultimately drawn. Game XI.— Between Messrs. Lowenthal and Medley against Messrs. MoRPHY and Mongredien. (From " Morphy's Games." Bohn's Edition.) White (Messrs. L. & M.). Black (Messrs. M. & M.). 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 2. Kt to K B 3 2. P to Q 3 3. B to Q B 4 3. P to K B 4 4. P to Q 4 4. Kt to Q B 3 5. P takes K P (a) 5. Q P takes P (a) Kt to Kt 5 is preferable. PHILIDOR'S DEFENCE. 65 6. Q takes Q (ch) 6. Kt takes Q 7. Kt takes P 7. p takes P 8- B to Q 2 8. B to Q 3 9. B to Q B 3 9. Kt to K B 3 10. P to K R 3 10. B to K 3 11. KttoQ2 11. Castles 12. Castles (K R) ^ 12. Kt to Q 4 13. B takes Kt 13. b takes B 14. Q Kt to B 4 14. p to Q Kt 4 15. Kt takes B 15. p takes Kt 16. K R to Q sq 16. P to K 6 17. P takes P (6) 17. B takes K Kt P 18. K takes B 18. P takes Kt 19. B takes P 19. Kt to Q B 3 20. B to Q 4 (c) 20. Q R to K sq 21. K R to Q 2 21. Q R to K 3 22. Q R to K sq 22. R to K Kt 3 (ch) 23. K to R 2 23. K R to K B 6 24. R to Kt 2 24. Kt takes B 25. P takes Kt 25. R to K R 3 26. R to K 7 26. K R takes P (ch) 27. K to Kt sq 27. B to R 8 (ch) 28. K to B 2 28. R to K B 3 (ch) 29. K to K 2 29. R to B 2 30. R to K 8 (ch) 30. R to B sq And the game was drawn. Game XII. — Between Messrs. MacDonnell and Steinitz. (Prom "The Transactions of the British Chess Association, 1866-67.") White (Mr. McDonnell). Black (Mr. Steinitz). 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 2. Kt to K B 3 2. P to Q 3 3. P to Q 4 3. P takes P 4. B to Q B 4 4. Kt to K B 3 5. Castles ' 5. B to K 2 6. B to K Kt 5 6. P to Q B 4 (b) E takes B should have won White the game, as pointed out hy Mr. Loweuthal in his notes to it. (c) Again, B to K B 4 would haye maintained the pawn, the move made loses it. V THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. 7. P to Q B 3 (a) 7. P takes P 8. Kt takes P 8. Castles 9. Q to K 2 9. Q Kt to Q B 3 10. P to K K 3 10. B to K 3 11. B to Q 3 11. P to Q R 3 12. Q K to Q sq 12. Q to Q B 2 13. B takes Kt • 13. B takes B 14. Kt to Q 5 14. Q to Q sq 15. B to Kt sq 15. B to Q 5 16. P to K Kt 4 16. P to K E 4 17. Kt takes B 17. Kt takes Kt 18. E takes Kt 18. P takes E 19. Q to Q 3 19. P takes P 20. P to K 5 20. QtoKE5 21. Kt to K 7 fch) 21. K to R sq 22. P takes Q P 22. P takes E P 23. P to K B 4 23. B to Q B 5 24. Q to K B 3 24 B takes E 25. K takes B 25. P to K R 7 26. B to K 4 26. Q R to Q sq 27. Kt to K B 5 27. P to R 8 (Queen's) (ch) 28. Q takes Q 28. Q takes Q (ch) 29. B takes Q 29. P to Q 6 30. B takes Q Kt P 30. P to K Kt 3 31. B takes P 31. P takes Kt 32. B takes P 32. R takes P 33. B to Q B 4 33. RtoQ7 • And White resigned. Game XIII. — Between Messrs. Morphy and Barnes. White (Mr. Morphy). Black (Mr. Barnes). 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 2. Kt to K B 3 2. P to Q 3 3. P to Q 4 3. P takes P (ffl) P to K 5 is suggested as a stronger move here by Messrs. Lowenthal and Medley. We cannot see that it would lead to anything very satisfactory ; e. g. — „ P toKfl „ Kt takes P j ui , ^ x. ^- P takes P ^- Castles or B to K 3 ' ^''^ ^^""'^ "PP'"'^' *" ^"^^ * ^'"^ '=^'"- fortalile position. 4. B to Q B 4 5. P to Q B 3 6. Q to Kt 3 7. B takes B a Q takes Q Kt P 9. Q to Kt 5 10. Kt to K Kt 5 11. QtoE4 12. Kt takes K P 13. Kt takes Kt 14. Q to B 4 (c.h) 15. Castles 16. PtoB4 17. B takes P. 18. P to K E 3 19. Kt takes R 20. QtoK2 21. R takes Kt 22. Kt to B 4 23. PtoK5 24. PtoB5 25. Q to Kt 4 26. R to Q sq 27. Q takes Q 28. EtoQ7 29. PtoK6 PHlLlbOR'S DEFENCE. 67 4. B to K 2 5. P to Q 6 6. B to K 3 7. P takes B 8. Kt to Q 2 9. Kt to K B 3 10. R to Q Kt sq 11. Castles 12. KttoB4 13. P takes Kt 14. K to E sq 15. Kt to Kt 5 16. P to Q 7 17. R takes Kt P 18. E takes B 19. Kt to K 6 20. Kt takes R 21. Q to Q 2 22. Q to Kt 4 23. B to R 5 24. B to K 2 ' 25. Q to Q 2 26. Q takes P 27. R takes Q 28. B to B sq Resigns. Game XIV. — Between Mr. Wormald and an Amateur. White (Amateur). Black (Mr. Wormald), 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 2. Kt to K B 3 ■ 2. P to Q 3 3. P to Q 4 3. P to K B 4 4. Q P takes K P 4. B P takes K P 5. Kt to K Kt 5 5. P to Q 4 6. P to K 6 6. Kt to K R 3 7. P to K B 3 7. B to Q B 4 (a) 8. B P takes K P 8. Castles (a) Far better than B to K 2. F 2 68 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. 9. K P takes Q P 10. K to K 2 11. P takes B 12. K to Q 3 13. Q to K 2 14. K to Q B 4 15. K takes P 16. K to Q B 4 IV. K takes R 9. B to K B 7 (ch) (6) 10. B to Q 2 11. Q to K 2 (cli) 12. Q Kt takes P 13. Q Kt to B 4 (ch) 14. P to Q Kt 4 (ch) 15. Q R to Kt sq (ch) 16. Q R to Kt 5 (ch) 17. Kt to Q 6 Double check, and Vns. Game XY.— Between KessTB. Schwarz and Paulsen. Played at. the Vienna Tourney, 1873. (From " The Westminster Papers.") White (Herr Schwarz.) Black (Herr Paulsen.) 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 2. Kt to K B 3 2. P to Q 3 3. P to Q 4 3. Kt to K B 3 4. B to K Kt 5 4. P takes P (a) 5. Kt takes P 5. B to K 2 6. B to Q 3 (6) 6. Castles 7. Kt to Q B 3 7. P to Q B 3 (c) 8. Castles 8. P to K R 3 9. B to Q 2 9. Q Kt to Q 2 10. Kt to K B 5 10. Kt to Q B 4 11. Kt takes B(ch) 11. Q takes Kt 12. R to K sq 12. Kt takes B (5) This move — the invention of Mr. Wormald — appears much stronger than the move given by the German authorities as beat for. Black, viz., R to K B 4, and in fact to upset completely the much vaunted attack of 7. P to K B 3. "We much prefer " English" to " German" authorities in this opening. (a) If Black play here 4. B to K Kt 5, White gets a good game by taking P with P. (See preceding Analysis, p. 37.) (4) Mr. Wisker thinks this Bishop should be played to K 2, if possible, (c) If 7. Kt takes P, Herr Zukertort suggests the following continuation :— Kt takes Kt q Qto_R5_ ,„ Castles E to K sq 7. 10. Kt takes P B takes B White's superior position a full L-quivalent for the Pawn, and considers PHILIDOR'S DEFENCE. 69 13. P takes Kt 13. B to K 3 14. P to K B 4 14. Q R to Q sq 15. P to K B 5 (d) 15. B to B sq 16. Q to B 3 16. K to R 2 17. K to E sq 17. Kt to Q 2 18. P to Q 4 18. Q to K B 3 19. Q R to Q sq 19. Kt to Kt 3 20. P to K Kt 4 20. P to K Kt 3 21. P to K 5 21. P takes K P 22. Q P takes P 22. Q to R 5 23. Kt to K 4 23. Kt to Q 4 24. R to K Kt sq 24. P takes P 25. P takes P 25. R to K Kt sq 26. KttoQ6 26. Kt to K 2 27. B to B 3 (e) • 27. P to Q Kt 4 28. Kt takes B 28. R takes Kt 29. P to K 6 29. P to Q Kt 5 30. B to K 5 30. P to K B 3 31. B to Kt 3 31. Q to Q B 5 32. R to Q 7 32. R to Kt 2 33. R to B sq 33. Q takes R P 34. B to Q 6 34. R to K sq 35. B takes Kt 35. Q R takes B 36. Q takes P 36.. Q takes Kt P 37. R takes R 37. R takes R 38. E to Kt sq 38. Q to B 6 (/) 39. Q to Kt 2 and Black resigned. Game XVI. — Between Messrs Blaokburne and Padlsen. Played at the Vienna Tourney. (From " The Westminster Papers.") White (Mr. Blackburne.) Black (Herr Paulsen.) 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 2. Kt to K B 3 2. P to (J 3 3. P to Q 4 3. Kt to Q 2 {a) 4. B to Q B 4 4. Kt to Q Kt 3 {d) White has now the better position. (e) If 27. Kt takes K B P jjj._ -^jgj^g^ gj^gg tjie following :— 27. 28. I^JakesR jQ. ^^-^^A^l , and Black escapes. R takes R (ch) R to Kt sq (ch; Kt takes P (/) As pointed out in "Tlie Westminster Papers," this is a blunder. Black could have drawn the game easily by 38. R to K Kt 2, or 38. Q to K B 7. (a) This mode of conducting the Philidor defence is tolerably safe, but some- what inferior to the usual course of P takes P, followed by B to Q 2. 70 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. 6. B to Kt 3 5. P takes P 6. Q takes P (b) 6. B to K 3 7. Kt to B 3 7. K Kt to K 2 8. B to K B 4 8. Kt to Kt 3 9. B to Kt 3 9. Q to Q 2 10. R to Q sq 10. B takes B 11. R P takes B 11. P to K B 3 12. Q to Q 2 12. B to K 2 13. Kt to Q 4 13. Castles (K R) 14. Kt to B 5 14. R to B 2 15. Q to K 2 15. R to K sq 16. Q to Kt 4 16. B to B sq 17. Castles 17. K to R sq 18. Q to R 5 18. Kt to K 4 19. P to B 4 19. P to Kt 3 (c) 20. Q to R 3 20. Kt to B 3 21. Kt to B 6 21. K R to K 2 22. P to B 5 22. -P to Kt 4 23. Kt to Kt 4 23. B to Kt 2 (d) 24. P to K 5 (e) 24. Kt takes P 25. B takes Kt 25. R takes B 26. Kt takes R 26. R takes Kt 27. y R to K sq 27. B to B sq 28. R takes R 28. Q P takes R 29. R to Q sq 29. B to Q 3 30. Q to B 3 30. Q to Q B sq 31. Kt to K 4 31. B to K 2 32. P to K Kt 4 32. Q to K sq 33. Q to Q B 3 33 P to Q B 3 34. Q to Q 3 34. Q to Q Kt sq 35. P to Q B 4 35. K to Kt 2 36. P to R 4 36. P to K R 3 37. P takes P 37. R P takes P 38. K to Kt 2 38. Q to K sq 39. R to K R sq 39. Q to K Kt sq 40. Q to R 3 40. Kt to Q 2 41. kt takes Kt P. 41. P takes Kt 42. Q to R 6 (oh) 42. K to B 2 43. Q to K 6 (ch) 43. K to B sq 44. Q takes Kt Resigns. (6) White's Queen now occupies a commanding position, from which she cannot he readily dislodged. (c) A perfectly needless manoeuvre , which aids White in his attack. (d) Black's situation hecomes less and less attractive. ■ («) Well played, and decisive. CHAPTER III. THE PETROFF DEFENCE. This defence — so named from being introduced into modern play by Mr. Petroff, the celebrated Eussian player — is now generally admitted to be inferior to Q Kt to B 3, or P to Q 3. GAME THE FIRST. WHITE. BLACK. 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 2. Kt to K B 3 2. Kt to K B 3 3. Kt takes K P (best) This is White's strongest move. He may, however, play 3. P to Q 4, or 3. B to Q B 4. {See Game the Second and Game the Third.) If he move 3. Q Kt to B 3, see Garne the Fourth. 3. P to Q 3 (best), or (A.) (B.) 4. Kt to K B 3 (best) White can also move here 4. Kt takes K B P — a line of play invented by Mr. Cochrane, but which we consider un- sound. For the consequences of this move, see Varia- tion (I.). 72 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. 4, Kt takes K P 5. P to Q 4 (best) g^ PtoQg gj. 5. QtoK2 ^^jy ^^^^ j.^ positions of equality. 5. P to Q 4 6. BtoQ3 6. BtoK2 , , „ Castles g P to Q B 4 g Q to B 2 ^ BtoQ3 Castks BtoKS " P to K B 4 j^Q^ Q to Q Kt 3, ^jjjj a^ yg^y superior game.) The " Handbuch," however, gives for Black 6. ^ ^^ ^^ ^ 3 thus : 6. q- j^^-^^ 7. |3g|-^ P to Q B 4 g Kt to Q B 3 ^q P takes Kt ^^ Q to Kt 3 ■ B to K Kt 5 ' Kt takes Kt ' Castles ' P takes P Q takes Q Kt P ^g P takes B ^^ B takes Q B P Q B takes Kt ' Kt takes Q P ' Kt to K B 4 ^g B to K B 4 ^g B takes B ■ B to Q 3 ■ Kt takes B ^^ Q to B 6 Q takes Kt Kt takes B ^^' Q to B 3 even game. 7. Castles 7. Kt to Q B 3 8. P to Q B 4 (best) 8. B to K 3 9. Q to Q Kt 3 And White has the better position. White's ninth move is considered best by Max Lange. In the fifth game of the match between Messrs. Lowenthal and Morphy, the former, who conducted the attack, moved here 9. P takes P, which is also a good move, and gives White the advantage {see Illus- trative Games at the end of this Chapter, Game I.) ; but we think the move of Q to Q Kt 3 is strongest/ We subjoin a diagram showing the position. THE PETROFF DEFENCE. BLACK. 73 i i t1 i:i i ^.\ 1,^ iCI ;;;i ML In this position Black's game is already difficult. He dare not play , „ ,„ O takes Q Kt P , , Q takes K Kt on account or 10. -•— - — tv^-. - i'- -rrr--. 5 P takes P Kt to Q R 4 P takes B (A.) 4. Q to K 2 5. Q takes Kt 6. P to Q 4 7. P to K B 4 8. Kt to Q B 3 3. Kt takes P 4. Q to K 2 5. P to Q 3 6. P to K B 3 7. Q Kt to Q 2 (best) 8. Q P takes Kt (If 8. 9. B P takes P B P takes Kt B to Kt 5 (ch) P to B 3 witli a pawn more and a winning position 11 P takes P 2 Kt takes Kt (ch) P takes Kt 10 K t to Q 5 ' Kt to K B 3 B takes P (ch) 13. 74 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. 9. Kt to Q 5 9. Q to Q 3 10. Q P takes P 10. P takes P 11. P takes P 11. Q to Q B 3 12. B to Q Kt 5 IS. Q to Q B 4 13. P to Q Kt 4, winning easily. If Black in his 12th move in this variation play 12. Q to K Kt 3, in lieu of 12. Q to Q B 4, White replies 13. Q takes Q, followed hy Kt takes P (ch), &c. (B.) 3. Q to K 2 This defence, although not noticed in the " Handbook," is mentioned % Lopez and recommended by Cozio. Although inferior, it is preferable to 3. Kt takes P. 4. Kt to K B 3 4. Q takes P (ch) (If 4. — -^— 5. Bj!liL2 foHowedby l-^!^^ with the Kt takes P better position. 5. B to K 2 5. B to Q B 4 6. Castles 6. Castles 7. P to Q 4 7. B to Kt 3 8. P to Q B 4 8. P to Q B 3 9. Kt to Q B 3 9. Q to K 2 10. B to K Kt 5, with an incontestable advantage of position. (For a further exemplification of this form of the opening, let the reader refer to Illustrative Game II., between Messrs. Anderssen and Kolisch, at the end of the Chapter.) The German "Handbuch" gives for White's fourth move in this variation, 4. P to Q 4, instead of retreating the Knight, thus : — 4 PtoQ4 g Kt to K B 3 g B to K 2 „ P to Q B 4 ' P to Q 3 ■ Q takes P (oh) ' B to K B 4 ' B to K 2 „ Castles Q QKttoBS , , , „j,.^ , , , , Oastl ' declares White to have the bett"r game. THE PETBOFF DEFENCE. 76 Variation (I.). On Wliite's fourth move : — 4. Kt takes K B P 4. K takes Kt 5. B to Q B 4 (ch) 5. B to K 3, or (C.) (D.) 6. B takes B (ch) 6. K takes B 7. PtoQ4 7. K to B 2 (best) 7. K to Q 2 would be bad for Black. In answer to that move White would get a strong attack by 8. P to K 5. {See Illustrative Game IV.) 8. Kt to Q B 3 8. B to K 2 9. Q to K 2 9. E to K B sq 10. B to K 3 10. K to Kt sq 11. Castles (Q E) Mr. Staunton observes at this point, in the " Praxis," p. 94, " that White will advance the Pawns on the King's side with a fine position." The above continuation for Black is, however, weak, since Black may play on his eighth move g B to K 3 Q Kt to B 3 Q to Q 2 with a winning position, as shown in the German " Handbuch," p. 118. We think, even now, that Black, with care, ought to be able to repel the attack ; for suppose now : 11. P to Q B 3 IS. P to K B 4 This is apparently White's best move. Black has now the choice of several moves — viz., P to Q Kt 4, P to Q 4, and P to Q R 4, which we will examine in succession. We may observe, " en passant," that 12. Q to Q R 4 is bad for Black 76 THE CHESS PLAYER'S MANUAL. {see Illustrative Game III.), and Kt to K sq, or Q Kt to Q 2, seem to give White too much time. Firstly, then : IS. P to Q Kt 4 13. P to K 5 13. Kt to K sq 14. R to K B sq (If 14. Pto_Q-§ Black replies with 14. -"-- witli a good r to C^ ii-t O game.) 14. P to Q R 4 15. P to K Kt 4 15. P to Q 4, followed by P to Q Kt 5 ; and we certainly prefer Black's game. Secondly : 12. P to Q 4 13. P to K 5 13. Kt to K 5 14. Kt takes. Kt 14. P takes Kt 15. P to Q 5 Checking with Q at B 4 is out of the question, as Black would simply interpose his Queen, and P to K Kt 4, or R to K B sq, seem to be well answered by Q to Q 4, followed by Kt to Q R 3. ■ 15. P takes P 16. Q to Q Kt 5 16. Q to Q 2 17. Q takes Q 17. Kt takes Q 18. R takes P 18. Kt to Q Kt 3 And again Black appears to have the better position. Thirdly : 12. P to Q R 4 13. P to K Kt 4 13. P to Q Kt 4 14. P to K Kt 5 THE PETROFF DEFENCE. W afl4 P to K5 ^5 P to K B 5 ^g B takes B ^ ■ Kt to K sq ■ B to K Kt 4 ' Q takes B (oli) ^^ K to Kt sq jg PtoKR4 ^g Q R to K B sq ^o P *" Kt 5 ■ P to y 4 ■ Q to K 2 ■ P'to Q R 5 ' P to Kt 5 21. — , and Black has vet resource on his 21st move in this Q to Q R 2 ' variation : — Tf TOi,-*- 1 oi P to K Kt 6 ,,, Q to R 5 „„ P to B 6 If White plays 21. -- — -~ ;i2. ^ — — — 23. ;:— ;^ . ^ ^ P takes Kt P to R 3 Q to Q Kt 5' and wins.) 14. Kt to K sq 15. P to K E 4 15. P to Q Kt 5, followed by Kt to Q 2, or P to E 6, if the Knight goes to R 4, or Q Kt sq ; and once more we think Black has the advantage, for White can hardly afford to give up the other Knight. To us it appears that the Cochrane PetroiT attack can be successfully repelled by Black pushing on his Pawns on Queen's side, and setting up a counter attack. In any case the attack is unsound, for it must not be forgotten that Black can evade all these complications by simply playing 8. Kt to Q B 3 on his eighth move, instead of 8. B to K 2, the move given in the " Praxis." (C.) 5. K to K sq 6. P to Q 4 6. Kt to Q B 3 7. Q Kt to B 3 7. B to K 2 8. B to K 3, and Staunton thinks Black's game is seri- ously confined. CD.) 5. P to Q 4 Perhaps this is Black's best move at this point. The following variations, from " La Strategic," pp. 352, 353, establish conclusively the superiority of the defence. " La Strategic " prefers 5. P to Q 4 to 5. B to K 3, or 5. K to his square. 6. B to Q Kt 8 6. B to K 3 (best) TS THE CHUSS-PLAYER'S MANtTAL. af firstly: 6. ,^_ PjoQ 3 and " La Strategie " con- ^ ' ' Q to K sq eiders "White has a good game. The proper continuation seems as follows. , PtoQ3 „ PtoK5 ^''PP"'' ^- Q to K sq ^- Bl^K^ ^- KttoKKt5 D. P to Q 4, with the advantage. „ ^, „ „ B takes P (ch) „ Q to K R 5 (chi If, secondly : 6. ^^^^ 7. .^^-^^ 8. ^j^^^^ ) g Q takes Kt (ch) ^^ Q to Q 4 (ch) ^^ Q takes Q (ch) 'KtoKta 'QtoKBS ' K takes Q 12. P to Q 4, and White has three Pawns for his piece, with a good position.) 7. Kt to Q B 3 7. P takes K P 8. B takes B (ch) 8. K takes B 9. Kt takes P 9. Kt takes Kt 10. Q to K Kt 4 (ch) 10. K to B 2 11. Q takes Kt 11. Q to K sq And Black forces the exchange of Queens, and having a Knight against two Pawns, ought to win. GAME THE SECOND. WHITE. BLACK. 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 S. Kt to K B 3 g. Kt to K B 3 3. P to Q 4 This is not so strong a move as Kt takes P, but it has the recommendation of bemg favoured by Mr. Petroff. 3. Kt takes K P, or see (E.) 4. B to Q 3 4. P to Q 4 5. Kt takes K P 5. P to Q B 4 6. P to Q B 3 6. P takes P 7. P takes P 7. B to Q Kt 5 (ch) Even game. THE PETROFI' CEFENOE. 79 (E.) 3. P takes P 4. P to K 5 4. Kt to K 5 5. Kt takes P (best) 5. P to Q 4 And the game again is quite equal. The above variations show that 3. P to Q 4 is a much inferior way of continuing the attack to 3. Kt takes P, inas- much as White only gets an equal game by the former mode of play, whereas he acquires a decided advantage in position by 3. Kt takes P. Let the student refer back to Game the First in this Chapter. GAME THE THIRD. WHITE. BLACK. 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 2. Kt to K B 3 2. Kt to K B 3 3. B to Q B 4 This move, although not theoretically so strong as 3. Kt takes P, leads to many jnteresting variations, and may be safely adopted. 3. Kt takes K P (best) This position occurs in the King's Bishop's opening, by the following transposition of moves — PtoK4 2 B to Q B 4 g Kt to K B 3 ■ PtoK4 ■ Kt to K B 3 ' Kt takes K P Black can resolve the game into the Two Knights' Defence on his third move, by playing 3. Q Kt to B 3, instead of 3. Kt takes P ; for the consequences of which mode of play, see the Analysis of the Two Knights' Game, Chapter IV. 80 THE (JH ESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. 4. Q Kt to B 3 This move is noticed by Mr. Boden in his " Popular Intro- duction to Chess," and was thought for some time to give the advantage to the first player, principally, no doubt, from the fact of its having been successfully adopted by Mr. Morphy ; but his opponents failed to select the correct line of defence. We maintain that it is unsound and ought to give Black the superiority, as demonstrated by the subjoined analysis. Be- fore proceeding further, we must notice that White has two other moves at his disposal at this point — viz., 4. Kt takes K P, and 4. Q to K 2, for the result of which modes of play see Variations (I.) and (11.). 4. Kt takes Kt (best), or (F.) (G.) Black can also here withdraw his Knight to King's Bishop's third ; for which see (F.). For the consequences of his playing 4. P to Q 4, see {&.). 5. Q P takes Kt 5. P to K B 3 (best) This is the only move to secure Black the advantage. 5. P to Q 3 and 5. B to K 2 are inferior ; e.g. — Suppose firstly : 5. out of the question.) PtoQ3 "" QtoK2 7 B takes P(ch) K to Q sq „ Kt takes P ,n -n , ^ t^. • 6. ,; (6. P takes Kt is Castles Q takes Kt 9 E to K s q ^Q R takes Q ^^ S'to Kt 5 (ch) ,„ Q R takes B B to K Kt 5 ■ B takes Q " K moves and White must win. Kt takes K 'P ^ Castles , ■ "■ BtoK2 with a superior position. 6. Castles To return to the main variation. Castles (best) THE PETROFF DEFENCE. 81 T, „ Kt to K R 4 „ Castles t ^^ i i. P to K Kt 3 ■ Q to K 2 ' P to Q B 3 with the advantage. 6. Q to K 2 (best) Mr. Staunton gives here Q Kt to B 3 for Black, but by his own showing it is bad, e.g. — ^ Kt to K R 4 g BtoQ3 g P to K B 4 &c. Q Kt to B 3 Kt to K 2 P to K Kt 3 Black -would also get an inferior game by 6. (vide ® ^ PtoKKtS ^ " Praxis," p. 97). The move of Q to K 2 is undoubtedly Black's best resource at this point, and is advised by Mr. L jwenthal. {See " Games of the Chess Congress," p. 45.) Mr. Staunton saj'-s White should now play 7. Kt to Q 4 in reply to 6. Q to K 2 ; but that would be obviously inferior play, since Black would move 7. Q to Q B 4, and remain with a pawn ahead, and a good game, as pointed out by Mr. Lowenthal, who gives as best for White 7. Kt to K R 4, in answer to Q to K 2, and continues the game thus : — y Kt to K R 4 g K to R sq ^ j^^^y. ^^^- ^^ ^^_^ ^. ^^ PtoKKtS PtoQB3 ' "■' ^ the better game. With due deference to these two eminent authorities, we think they both have failed to hit upon the strongest line of play for White at this juncture, and we venture to suggest the following as the proper continuation : — 7. E to K sq 7. P to Q B 3 8„ Q B to K Kt 5 8. P to Q 3 9. Q B to K R 4 9. Q B to K 3 10. B takes B 10. Q takes B 11. Kt to Q 4 11. Q to K B 2 12. Q to K Kt 4 12. Kt to Q R 3 13. Q R to Q sq 13. Kt to Q B 2 14. P to K B 4 14. P to K Kt 3 82 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. And altliough the attack has been energetically sustained, and Black's game is somewhat cramped, we believe he ought ulti- mately to secure the advantage, since he maintains his extra Pawn, and White moreover labours under the disadvantage of a doubled Pawn on the Queen's Bishop's file. The above moves occurred in the fourth game of the match between ourselves and Mr. John Gocher. We may add that although the game in question was drawn, we thiiik Black ought to have won. (See Illustrative Game V., with the notes.) We consider, therefore. White's fourth move of Q Kt to B 3 to be unsound, and venture to differ entirely from the opinion expressed in the " Schachzeitung," and by Mr. Boden, who recommend the move in question. Variation (I.) On White's fourth move : — WHITE. 1. P to K 4 2. Kt to K B 3 3. B to Q B 4 4. Kt takes K P 5. B to Q Kt 8 6. Q to K 2 6. Q takes Kt, or Q takes Kt P, with the advantage. Variation (II.) On White's fourth move : — WHITE. BLACK. 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 2. Kt to K B 3 2. Kt to K B 3 3. B to Q B 4 3. Kt takes P 4. Q to K2 This, we think, is also bad for White. 4. P to Q 4 5. Kt takes P 5. B to Q B 4 6- P to Q 3 6. P takes B (best) 1. BLACK. PtoK4 2. Kt to K B 3 3. Kt takes K P 4. 5. 6. Pto Q 4 Q to K Kt 4 Q takes Kt, THE PETROFF DEFENCE. 83 (6. Kt takes K B P, or 6. B takes P (cli) are inferior, and give White the better game. See " Handbook," pp. 82, 83.) 7. Q takes Kt 7. Castles 8. Q takes B P 8. Q to K 2 9. P to K B 4 9. Q Kt to B 3 10. QtoK4 10. E to K sq (best) 11. K to Q sq 11. QtoE5 12. Q Kt to Q 2 12. Q to E 4 (ch) 13. Q Kt to K B 3 13. B to K Kt 5 and Black has again the better position. {See " Handbook," pp. 84, 85.) The preceding analysis proves that White's third move of B to Q B 4 in answer to the Petroff Defence is " theoretically " unsound, and ought to give Black the better game, and that 3. Kt takes K P, as remarked above, is beyond cavil Black's best reply. " Practically," however, the move of B to Q B 4 may be safely adopted, since unless the defence is conducted with the greatest nicety. White will obtain an overwhelming attack. Hence the " chances " of success are in favour of the first player, but one must not calculate upon " chances " in chess against first-rate opponents. (F.) 4. Kt to K B 3 Mr. Staunton considers this Black's best play. We con- sider it inferior to 4. Kt takes Kt. Eetreating the Kt to Q 3 is not good, e.g. — 5 B to Kt 3 g Q to^K 2 y_ Kt to Q 4 ^^ ' KttoQ3 'PtoKS 'QtoK^ Mr. Lowenthal thinks 4. Kt to K B 3 ought to lead to an even game. a2 84 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. 5. Kt takes P 5. P to Q 4 6. B to Q Kt 3 6. B to Q 3 7. P to Q 4, and White has a fine position. The German " Handbuch " gives for White's sixth move in this variation : — Q toK2 B toK 2 B to Kt 3 Castles even game. (G.) 4. P to Q 4" This move is the invention of Mr. Lichtenstein, and appears preferable to retreating the Knight, although not so strong, in our opinion, as capturing the White Queen's Knight. 5. B takes P 5. Kt to K B 3 6. B to Q Kt 3 6. B to Q 3 7. P to Q 3 7. Castles and Black has no inferiority. (See Illustrative Game VI.) Diagram showing the position after Black's seventh move, BLACK. THE PETEOFF DEFENCE. 85 GAME THE FOUETH. WHITE . BLACK. 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 2. Kt to K B 3 2. Kt to K B 3 3. Kt to Q B 3 This move can be adopted without danger, but it is not an iittacking one, and merely leads to positions of equality. Still it deserves notice. 3. B to Q Kt 5 (best) 4. Kt takes P 4. B takes Kt 5. Q P takes B 5. P to Q 3 6. Kt to K B 3 6. Kt takes P 7. B to Q 3 7. Kt to K B 3 (best) (If 7 8. P^_9^ &„, ^ P to Q 4 8. Castles 8. Castlefc; And the game is quite even. 86 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUATJ. GAMES ILLUSTRATIVE OF THE PETROEF DEFENCE. Game I. — Between Messrs. Morphy and Lowbnthal. White (Mr. Lowenthal). Black (Mr. Morphy). 1. P to K 4 1. PtoK4 2. Kt to K B 3 2. Kt to K B 3 3. Kt takes P 3. P to Q 3 4. Kt to K B 3 4. Kt takes P 5. P to Q 4 5. PtoQ4 6. B to Q 3 6. B to K 2 (a) 7. Castles 7. Kt to Q B 3 8. P to Q B 4 (6) 8. BtoK3 9. P takes P (c) 9. B takes P 10. B to K 3 10. Castles 11. Kt to B 3 11. P to K B 4 12. Kt takes B 12. Q takes Kt 13. B to Q B 2 (d) 13. K to R sq 14. B to Q Kt 3 14. QtoQ3 15. P to Q 5 15. Kt to Q R 4 16. B to Q 4 16. B to K B 3 17. R to K sq 17. Q R to Q sq 18. B takes B 18. Kt takes Q B (e) 19. Kt to K Kt 5 19. Kt to Kt 5 20. P to K Kt 3 20. QtoB4 21. Q to K S>- 21. Kt takes B 22. P takes Kt 22. Q R to K sq 23. Q to B 3 23. Kt to K 4 24. Q to K R 5 24. P to K R 3 (/) 25. Q R to Q sq 25. Q to Q B 7 26. Kt to K 6 26. Kt to Kt 5 27. R to K B sq 27. Q takes P at Kt 2 28. Kt takes R 28. R takes Kt 29. P to K R 3 29. Kt to K B 3 30. Q takes K B P 30. Q takes Kt P {a) This is now generally thought better than the move recommended in the " Schachpartien" of B to Q 3. (5) The best move at this point. (c) A good move ; but Max Lange considers Q to Q Kt 3 even stronger. {d} Threatening to win the Queen. (e) In his elaborate notes to this game, Mr. Lowenthal thinks Black should have played here Q or R takes B instead of the move in the text. (/) The attack and counter attack sustained by these two great players is highly instructive, and forms an interesting study. THE PETEOFF DEFENCE. 87 31. P to Q 6 32. B takes P 33. E to Q 2 34. R to K sq 35. Q to Q B 5 36. Q R to K 2 37. R takes R 38. Q to K B 8 (ch) 39. R to K 7 40. K to R 2 41. R to K 8 .42. R to Q R 8 43. R to Q R 7 44. R takes Q R P 45. R to Q R 8 46. R to Q R 7 47. R to Q Kt 7 48. Q to K B 7 49. R takes P 50. R to Q Kt 7 51. R to Q 7 52. Q to Q 5 53. Q to Q 3 (ch) 54. R to Q 8 (ch) 55. Q to Q 4 56. K to Kt sq 57. Q to Q 5 58. R takes Q 59. R to K 5 60. P to B 4 61. K to Kt 2 62. K to B 3 63. R to Q R 5 64. R to Q R 6 S5. P to B 5 <56. P to Kt 4 67. P takes P 68. K to B 4 69. K to K 5 70. R to Q R 7 (ch) 31, , P takes P 32, . Q to K B 2 33, . P to R 3 34 , P to Q Kt 4 35. , R to K sq 36. , R takes R 37. Q to Q Kt 6 38, . Kt to Kt sq 39. Q to Q 8 (ch) 40. , Q to Q 5 41. Q to Q B 5 42. P to Q Kt 5 43. QtoQ5 44. P to Kt 6 45. QtoQ4 46. QtoQ5 47. Q to Q B 6 48. KtoR2 49. QtoK4 50. P toR4 51. Kt to R 3 52. QtoB3 53. K to R sq 54. Kt to Kt sq 55. QtoB6 56. K to R2 57. Q takes Q 58. KttoKBS 59. K to Kt 3 60. KtoB2 61. K to Kt 3 62. KtoB2 6-3. K to Kt 3 64. K toB2 65. Kt to Q 4 66. P takes P 67. Kt to K 2 68. Kt to Q 4 (ch) 69. Kt to K B 3 And Black resigned. 88 THE OHESS-PLAYEE'S MANUAL. Game II. — Between Messrs. Kolisch and Anderssjjh. White (Mr. Anderssen). Black (Mr. Kolisch). 1. PtoK4 1. P to K 4 2. Kt to K B 3 2. Kt to K B 3 3. Kt takes P 3. Q to K 2 (a) 4. Kt to K B 3 4. Q takes P (ch) (h) 5. B to K 2 5. B to Q B 4 6. Castles 6. Castles 7. P to Q 4 7. B to Q Kt 3 8. P to Q B 4 8. P to Q B 3 9. Kt to Q B 3 9. Q to K 2 10. BtoKKt5 10. P to K R 3 11. BtoE4 11. P to K Kt 4 12. B to K Kt 3 (c) 12. P to Q 4 13. Kt to K 5 13. Q Kt to Q 2 14. P takes P 14. K Kt takes P 15. Q Kt takes K Kt 15. P takes Kt 16. P to K B 4 16. P takes P 17. Kt takes Kt 17. P takes B 18. Kt to K B 6 (ch) (rf) 18. K to Kt 2 19. Q to Q 3 19. R to K R soi 20. B to K R 5 20. B to K 3 21. Q takes P (ch) 21. K to B sq 22. Q to K 5, 22. Q to B 2 23. Q to K 3 (e) 23. Q to Q 3 (a) The correct move here is P to Q 3. (6) We prefer Kt takes P to the move made. (c) The sacrifice of the Knight would have been, we think, stronger, play : -1 n Kt takes P e.g., suppose 12. P takes Kt 13. B takes P with a tremendous attack. 18. 19. and wins. (d) The tempting move of Kt takes R would have lost White the game : e.g., Kt takes R ^g P to K R 3~or (A) K to R sq Q to K R 5 ■ B takes Q P (ch) ' Q B takes K R P' (A). P takes P 20 R interposes qi B to K B 3 B takes P (oh) ' Q to K B 3 ' K takes Kt ■ with a winning position. (e) White would only have obtained a draw by taking B with Q as follows i — Q takes B „^ Kt takes P dis (ch ) ' ^^ Kt takes Q Suppose 23. P takes Q 24. 26. B toB7(ch) 27 B takes P K to Kt 2 K to Kt sq 2g R to B 7 (ch) K to Kt 3 25. 29. B takes K R talces P BtoQKt3 KtoKt3 ' B takeo P (ch) — -- — ^=r, — and the move actually made shows the profunditv of 30. Q R to Q Kt sq, &c., ^ ^ Mr. Anilersseii's play. THE PETROFF DEFENCE. 89 24. E to K B 4 24. Q E to B sq 25. Q E to K B sq 25. E to Q B 2 26. Q to K Kt 3 26. R to Q B 5 27. KttoE7(oh) 27. K to K sq 28. to K Kt 7 28. R takes Kt 29. Q takes R 29. E takes P 30. B takes P (ch) 30. B takes B 31. Q takes B (cli) 31. K to Q sq 32. Q to K Kt 8 (ch) 32. K to Q B 2 33. E to B 7 (ch) 33. K to B 3 34. Q to K 8 (ch) 34. KtoB4 35. K to E sq 35. E to K E 5 36. R to Q B sq (ch) 36. E to Q B 5 37. P to Q Kt 4 (ch) 37. K takes P 38. E to Q Kt sq (ch) 38. KtoE6 39. E to K B 3 (ch) 39. K takes P 40. Q to K 2 (ch) 40. K takes E 41. R to Q Kt 3 (ch) 41. K to B 8 42. Q to K sq (ch) 42. KtoB7 43. Q to Kt sq (ch) 43. KtoQ7 44. E to Q 3 (ch) 44. KtoK7 45. Q to Q sq (ch) 45. KtoB7 46. E mates. Game III. — Played by Correspondence, in 1860, by the Author agavnsi The Birmingham and Edgbaston Chess Club, Dr. Freeman awi Mr. Wills representvig the Club. White (Mr. Gossip). Black (Birmingham Chess Cluh). 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 2. Kt to K B 3 2. Kt to K B 3 3. Kt takes P 3. PtoQ3 4. Kt takes B P 4. K takes Kt 5. B to Q B 4 (ch) 6. B to K 3 6. B takes B (ch) 6. K takes B 7. P to Q 4 7. K to B 2 8. KttoQBS 8. B to K 2 9. Q to K 2 9. R to B sq lO. B to K 3 10. K to Kt sq 11. Castles (QR) 11. P to Q B 3 90 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. 12. P to K B 4 12. Q to Q R 4 (a) 13. P to K Kt 4 13. Q Kt to Q 2 14. P to K Kt 5 14. Kt takes K P (6) 15. Kt takes Kt 15. Q takes Q E P . 16. Kt to Q B 3 16. Q to K B 2 17. P to Q 5 17. P takes Q P (c) 18. Kt takes P 18. K B to Q B sq 19. P to K B 5 19. B to K B sq 20. K R to K B sq 20. Kt to Q Kt 3 21. P to K Kt 6 21. P takes P 22. P takes P 22. Q takes P 23. Kt to K B 6 (cii) 23. K to B 2 24. Kt to K Kt 4 dis (ch) 24. K to Kt sq 25. Kt to K R 6 (ch) 25. K to R 2 26. Kt to K B 5 26. E to K sq 27. Q to K B 3 27. Kt to Q B 5 28. Q to K R 3 (ch) 28. K to Kt sq 29. Kt to K R 6 (ch) 29. P takes Kt 30. R to K Kt sq Resigns Game IV.— Between Mr. E. Walker and a Cambridge Amateur. {From- the Praxis.) White (Mr. Walker). Black (Amateur). 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 2. Kt to K B 3 2. Kt to K B 3 3. Kt takes P 3. P to Q 3 4. Kt takes K B P 4. K takes Kt 5. B to Q B 4 (ch) 5. B to K 3 6. B takes B (ch) 6. K takes B 7. P to Q 4 '/. K to Q 2 8. P to K 5 8. Q to K sq 9. Castles 9. Kt to K E 4 10. Q to K Kt 4 (oh) 10. K to Q sq 11. BtoKKt5(ch) 11. BtoK2 (a) We do not think this " sortie " of the Queen advisable. P to Q Kt 4 seems better play. (h) Kt to K sq appears preferable ; but Black should, we think, have played P to K Kt 3 on his preceding move. (c) This capture was oertainl-^ injudicious. THE PETROFF DEFENCE. 91 12. Q Kt to B 3 , 12. Q P takes P 13. P takes P 13. B takes B 14 Q takes B (ch) 14. K to Q B s 15. Q to B 5 (ch) 15. Kt to Q 2 16. Q R to Q sq 16. P to Q B 3 17. P to K 6 17. Q Kt to K B 3 18. P to K 7 (dis ch) 18. Q Kt to Q 2 19. K B to K sq 19. K Kt to B 3 20. Q to K 6 20. K to B 2 21. Q to Q 6 (ch) 21. K to B sq 22. Kt to K 4 22. Kt takes Kt 23. K B takes Kt 23. Kt to B 3 24. K B to Q 4 24. Kt to Q 4 25. P to Q B 4 25. Kt takes K P 26. Q to K 6 (ch) 26. K to B 2 27. K B to Q 7 (oh) 27. K to Kt 3 28. P to B 5 (ch) 28. K to R 3 29. Q to B 4 (ch) 29. P to Q Kt 4 30. P takes P en passant 30. K takes P 31. Q to Kt 3 (ch) 31. K to R 3 32. Q to Kt 7 (ch) 32. K to E 4 33. P to Q Kt 4 (ch) 33. K to R 5 34. Q to R 6 (ch) 34. K takes Kt P White mates in three moves. Game V.- White (Mr. Gocher). Black (Mr. Gossip). 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 2. Kt to K B 3 2. Kt to K B 3 3. B to Q B 4 (a) 3. Kt takes P 4. Q Kt to B 3 (6) 4. Kt takes Kt 5. Q P takes Kt 5. P to K B 3 6. Castles 6. Q to K 2 7. R to K sq 7. P to Q B 3 (a) This move, as we have before pointed out, is not so effective, as Kt takes P. (b) This mode of play, which is recommended by Staunton, Boden, Sniiegelski, and other authorities, ought, in Mr. Lowenthal's opinion, to give the second player the advantage. 92 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. 8. Q B to K Kt 5 (c) ,8. P to Q 3 9. B to K E 4 9. B to K 3 10. B takes B 10. Q takes B 11. Kt to Q 4 11. Q to K B 2 12. Q to K Kt 4 12. Kt to g R 3 ((i) 13. Q E to Q sq 13. Kt to Q B 2 14. P to K B 4 14. P to K Kt 3 15. PtoQKt4(e) 15. PtoK B4 16. Q to K 2 16. P to K 5 17. P to Q Kt 5 17. P to Q B 4 18. Kt to K B 3 18. P to K R 3 19. Q to Q 2 19. P to Q 4 (/) 20. P to Q B 4 20. B to Q 3 21. P takes Q P 21. Kt takes Kt P 22. P to Q B 4 22. Kt to Q B 2 23. Q to Q Kt 2 23. Castles (K R) 24. Kt to K 5 24. B takes Kt 25. P takes B 25. P to K Kt 4 26. B to K B 2 26. P to Q Kt 3 27. P to K R 4 27. Q to K Kt 3 28. P to K 6 28. Kt takes P (g) 29. P takes Kt 29. Q takes P 30. R to Q 5 30. Q R to K sq 31. P takes K Kt P 31. P takes P (c) The attack is vigorously maintained, and we believe White's last move to be his best. (d) Whether this move is preferable or not to Kt to Q 2 is an open question. (e) Here Mr. Gocher thought he ought to have played 15. P takes P. (/) We think 19. Kt takes P would have been better play, and might have been safely ventured thus : 19. Kt takes P 20. Kt to K 5 (best) foijp^ej Q to K 3 (best) by P to Q 4, &c. , and Black has a safe game with a pawn more, and a formidable phalanx of pawns in the centre. Black, on his 20th move in the above variationi could not play ; P takes Kt, e. g. , 19. Kt takes P 20. f *° ^ ^ 21. QJA_QU5h) 22. R takes R mate; P takes Kt E takes Q but by capturing the pawn, he would have remained with two pawns ahead and a good position, following up his 20th move of Q to K 3 by 21. P to Q 4 and P to Q 5. The move made throws away a valuable pawn. (g) This sacrifice was wholly unnecessary. Up to this point, Black had main- tained the advantage of the pawn gained in the opening with very slight inferiority in position. The move made was the consequence of sheer exhau.stion, the game having already lasted eight hours, and Mr. Gocher having taken forty-five minutes for reflection over his last three moves. 28. Q to K B 3, instead of the move in the text, would have given Black an excellent game with a pawn ahead. THE PETROFF DEFENCE. 93 32. B to K Kt 3 32. Q to K Kt 3 33. B to K 5 33. P to K B 5 34. Q to Q B 2 34. P to K B 6 35. P takes P 35. K R takes P 36. Q takes K P 36. R to Kt 6 (ch) Qi) 37. K to R 2 37. Q takes Q 38. R takes Q 38. R to Q R 6 39. R to K 2 39. K to B 2 40. R to Q 7 (ch) 40. K to Kt 3 41. R to Q 6 (ch) 41. K to R 4 {i) 42. Q R from Q 6 to Q 2 (j) 42. R to Q R 5 43. Q R to Q B 2 43. R to K 3 44. Q R to Q B 3 44. K to Kt 5 45. K to Kt 2 45. K to B 4 46. Q R to K B 3 (ch) 46. K to Kt 3 47. Q R to Q B 3 47. K to B 4 48. R to B 3 (oh) 48. K to Kt 3 49. R to Q B 3 49. K to B 4 50. R to K B 3 50. K to Kt 3 And hoth parties persisting in making the same moves, the game was drawn. Game VI. — Between Messrs. Morphy and Lichtenhein. . White (Mr. Morphy). Black (Mr. Lichtenhein). 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 2. Kt to K B 3 2. Kt to K B 3 (li) The only resource ! (i) Again the only move, for if : 11 KtoB4 42 I^toKB6(ch) ^g R t o K Kt 2 (ch) ^^ R to K B 5 ■ K to Kt 5 K to R 4 R to K Kt sq 45. B to K B 6 , &c. (/) Here it would appear' at first sight as if White could have won by playing 42. Q R to Q 5 ; but no advantage would have accrued to him, as Black would RtoKKt2 ., BtoB6 simply reply with 42. R to Q R 4 43. ^^^^^^^ 44. ^ ^^ ^^-^ ^g_ R takes P (ch) ^g_ r q,. B takes R takes R above variations wUl be found interesting. ^g_ R takes P (ch) ^g_ r pr B takes R, and Black ought still to draw. The R takes R 94 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. 3. B to Q B 4 3. Kt takes P 4. Kt to Q B 3 4. P to Q 4 5. B takes P 5. Kt to K B 3 6. B to Q Kt 3 6. B to Q 3 7. P to Q 3 7. Castles 8. P to K E 3 8. P to K R 3 9. B to K 3 9. Q Kt to B 3 10. Q to Q 2 10. Kt to Q R 4 11. PtoKKt4 11. Kt takes B 12. R P takes Kt 12. B to Q 2 13. B to K Kt sq 13. Kt to R 2 14. Kt to K 4 14. K to R sq 15. P to Kt 5 15. P to K R 4 16. Kt to E 4 16. P to K Kt 3 17. Q to K 2 17. B to Q B 3 18. P to K B 4 18. P takes P 19. B to Q 4 (ch) 19. K to Kt sq 20. Kt to K B 5 (a) 20. R to K sq 21. Kt to R 6 (ch) 21. K to B sq 22. Castles 22. B takes Kt 23. P takes B 23. Q to K 2 24. P to K 5 (b) 24. B takes P 25. B takes B 25. Q takes B 26. R to Q 7 26. Q to K Kt 2 (c) 27. Q to B 4 27. R to K 2 28. R takes R 28. K takes R 29. R to K sc[ (oil) and wins. _S . (a) It is evident the Knight, cannot be taken without immediate loss. (6) Capitally played ! * (c) Here the oon-ect move was Kt takes P, as pointed out by Mr. Lbwenthal, which would have given Black an even game, e.g., 26. Kt takes Kt P _ 27 S takes Kt gs Q takes K R P gg R takes K Kt P gg Q to Q 5 QtoKBS 'PtoB6 'P takes R ' R to K 3 g^ R to K B 7 (ch) g2 Kt tak es Q gg Q to Q B 5 (ch) Q takes R ' P to B 7 ' K takes Kt 34. Q takes K B P (ch), even game. CHAPTER IV. THE TWO KNIGHTS' DEFENCE. This defence is not, perhaps, so generally played as for- merly, especiallj^ in serious contests, inasmuch as the first player wins a Pawn in the first few moves which he ought to keep with careful play. Herr Steinitz and Herr Zukertort consider it inferior, while Herr Lowenthal, on the contrary, thinks it may be played with perfect safety. The following analysis goes far to show that, although the second player gets in most cases a strong counter attack, still, with correct play. White ought ultimately to secure the advantage — in other words, the Two Knights' Defence is " theoretically " unsoiftd. Practically, however, it may safely be adopted, since the defence to the counter attack is difficult and often breaks down in actual play. The following are the moves : — GAME THE FIRST. WHITE. BLACK. 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 2. Kt to K B 3 2. Kt to Q B 3 3. B to Q B 4 3. Kt to K B 3 This is the " Two Knights' Defence " proper, but the same position may be arrived at by a transposition of the moves — 96 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. e.g., the "Petroff" defence may be turned into the "Two Knights' " game, thus : — PtoK4 2 Kt to K B 3 3 B to Q B 4 pIo K 4 ■ Kt to K B 3 ' Kt to Q B 3, when precisely the same position occurs. Also when the King's Knight's defence is played in the " King's Bishop's " opening, Black can bring about the Two Knights' game as follows : — PtoK4 2 B_to_QB4 , 3 Kt to K B 3 PtoK4 "KttoKBS 'KttoQBS' and we again arrive at the same position. It may be useful to the Chess student to be acquainted with these transpositions, as they are far from generally known. 4. Kt to K Kt 5 or (Games the Second and Third). This move, although considered superficial by some autho- rities, is perfectly sound, as the subjoined analysis will show. White can also play here, instead of Kt to K Kt 5, 4. P to Q 4, or 4. Castles, with great propriety, which modes of play shall be examined at length in Games the Second and Third. If White play 4. Q Kt to B 3, the game is reduced to a dull variation of the Giuoco Piano, or Vienna Game. 4. P to Q 4 (best) 5. P takes P 5. Kt to Q E 4 (best) (If Black takes P with Knight, he loses the game, thus : — Suppose 5. Kttake^ then 6. ^"^^^^ ^ B P 7. Q to K B 3 (A) ^^ K takes Kt K to K 3 fbeat) g QKttoB3 _ ■ Q^KFto K 2 (best)' THE TWO KNIGHTS' DEFENCE. 97 If 9. Q to K 4 10. P to Q 4 11. P to K B 4 12. B P takes P 13. Castles winning in a few moves. 8. KttoQKtS' 9. P to Q B 3 10. Q to Q 3 11. P to Q Kt 4 12. Q to Q 2 Q PtoQ4 ' P to Q B 3 10. n 10. P takes Q P If 10. K moves jj Q B takes Kt B takes B B to K Kt 5 P to K R 3 (best) 11. Castles (Q R), &c. 11. P t akes P , &c. j2 Castle s (Q E) ■ R to K B sq 13 QtoK4 ■ Q to Q 3 14 K^toKsq 15 P to K Kt 4 ^g K to Kt sq „ Q to K R 7 ■RtoKB4 ■ BtoKt4(ch) ' R to B 5 B to K B 3 ,„ P t akes P ,„ B takes Kt (ch) an im ^ t> j ■ x ''•B-iS^ ''-P takes B 20. KUakes_P, and wms.) Black may make some other moves in the above variations, but in every case White ought to win. For further analysis of these variations, see Staunton's "Handbook," pp. 142, 143.) To continue the main variation : 6. B to Q Kt 5 (ch) or (A.) (B.) It is a mooted point among the best authorities whether this move, or 6. P to Q 3, is best. Morphy prefers 6. P to Q 3, and it is undoubtedly a good move, since it maintains the Pawn and the advantage. For the consequences of 6. P to Q 3 , see (A). We may just remark here, that a move which is not noticed in the books may be made with safety — viz., 6. Q toK2. See (B.) 6. P to Q B 3 (best) 98 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. The move given in the " Handbook " by Staunton (vid^ " Handbook," p. 142) here — viz., 6. B to Q 2, is very inferior. 7. P takes P 7. P takes P. 8. B to K 2 (best) White has two other moves at his disposal in this position — viz., 8. B to Q K 4, and 8. Q to K B 3, recommended by Staunton ; but they are both bad, for suppose — T,. ,1 „ BtoQR4 „ Kt to K B 3 ,„ Kt to K 5 ^''''^^-- '• PtoKR3 '■ PtoK5 ''• QI^QT B takes P (ch) ^^ Kt takes Kt ^^.^^. ^^^ ^^^^ Kt takes B QtoQB4' Secondly: 8. ^ ^^ ^ B 3 9 B toQ M 10. Q to-KJ^ ^ QtoQKtS BtoKKtS P to K R a ^^ Kt to K B 3 B to Q 3 ... or Castles with a fine attack. (In this latter variation the move of B to Q 3 is recommended by Lbwenthal, while Staunton, in the "Praxis," gives Castles as best for Black. Thej-^ both give Black the superiority.) 8. P to K E 3 " 9. Kt to K B 3 9. P to K 5 10. Kt to K 5 10. Q to Q 5 11. P to K B 4 This move is preferred by Anderssen and Zukertort to 11. Kt to K Kt 4. As, however, the latter move is frequently made, we give what appears a correct continuation : Suppose 11. KttoKKti ^^ Btake^ Cables '^^ B takes Kt B to Q B 4 ' P to K 6 14. BtoKB3 jjj K to R sg, & c. P takes P (ch) ^ THE TWO KNIGHTS' DEFENCE. dd At move twelve in the above variation, Black could also play P to K 6, with, a good game. (See " Praxis," p. 197.) 11. B to Q B 4 12. E to K B sq 12. Q to Q 3 (best) 13. P to Q B 3 13. Kt to Q Kt 2 14. P to Q Kt 4 14. B to Q Kt 3 The above moves occurred in a game betvi^een Herr Zuker- tort and the Author, and also in another game between Messrs. Anderssen and de Eiviere. Herr Zukertort played here 15. Q to Q R 4 , which appears the best move; but Anderssen moved 15. Kt to R 3. According to the German "Hand- buch," this sortie of the Queen was first brought into notice m the " Schachzeitung," in a game between Herren Mayet and Hirschfeld. 15. Q to Q R 4 15. Kt to Q sq 16. Kt to Q R 3 16. B to K 3 17. Q Kt to Q B 4 17. Q to Q B 2 18. B to Q R 3 18. Castles (best) 19. Castles (Q R) 19. Q R to Q B sq Herr Lowenthal now is of opinion that Black's game is perfectly defensible, whilst Herr Zukertort considers that White has the better position. We prefer White's game, ' although White's only possible move here to avoid loss seems to be P to K R 3. For a further study of this opening we will refer our readers to the illustrative games at the end of this chapter, which will be found highly interesting. 100 THE CHESS-PLAYEK'S MANUAL. Diagram. Showing the position after Black's nineteenth move. BLACK. For Black's seventeenth move in the preceding variation, instead of Q to Q B 2, the German " Handbuch " gives 17. B takes Kt, thus : ^^ ^g B takes E ^g Q B to Q R 3 g^ P to Q Kt 5 B takes Kt 'Castles ■KttoQ4 ' P to Q B 4 and observes that White may now play 21. P to K Kt 3, but that the position does not appear favourable for White. Instead, however, of capturing B with B on his eighteenth move, White may retake with Knight and get a good game, we think. (A.) 6. PtoQ3 (As we have remarked above, a difference of opinion exists as to whether this move is to be preferred to checking with THE TWO KNIGHTS' DEFENCE. 101 Bishop at Knight's fifth. Although both moves are theoreti- cally soundj checking with Bishop is considered somewhat hazardous. Morphy invariably played P to Q 3.) 6. P to K E 3 (best) By this move Black obtains a strong counter attack. He may, however, play here 6. B to Q B 4, as recommended by Heydebrand, bi\t it is in- ferior ; for suppose 6. B to Q B 4, 7. ^-^^^ (best) 8. Q Kt to B 3 , ^^^ Castles White has the better position. Instead of 8. Q Kt to B 3 the " Praxis " and the German " Handbueh " make White play 8. P to Q B 3, a much inferior move, and continue the game, thus : P to Q B 3 g P to Q Kt 4 ^^ P takes B ■ "P to K E 3 ■ P takes Kt " Kt takes Q P ,^ Q B ta kes P ^g B takes Kt (oh) ^3 B to K 3 ■ P to K B 3 ' Q takes B ' B to B 4 ■where the " Praxis " remarks that the game is even. We may add that 6. P to K E 3 (which we have given as best for Black) is preferred by Falkbeer and Wormald, and was invariably adopted by Morphy. 7. Kt to K B 3 7. P to K 5 (best) (7. B to K Kt 5 is not so strong.) 8. Q to K 2 8. Kt takes B Lowenthal thinks this capture only strengthens White's game (" Morphy's Games," Bohn's edition, p. 242). 9. P takes Kt 9. B to K 2 (best) /T^„ p. o-D . in PtoKR3 „ Kt to K B 2 ,n B to K 3 (If9. BtoQB4 10.^^^^^^^ ''■m^^KBr2 ''"BtoQa 13, Castles with the better game. In this last variation, however, unless White play 10. P to K B. 3, he ought infallibly to los e, as Blac k could then Castle with an irresistible attack. Again, if 9. B to Q 3, 10. Kt to Q 4 , with the advantage.) 109 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. To return to the main variation : 10. Kt to Q 4 10. P to Q B 3 And Black regains the Pawn, with a perfectly even game. Diagram. BLACK. It is true that White could play 10. K Kt to Q 2, instead of K"t to Q 4, hut his game would be terribly cramped. (See Illustrative Game VII. at the end of this chapter.) (B.) 6. Q to K 2 (This move occurred in a match between ourselves and Mr. Gocher, of Ipswich.) e. P to K E 3 _ Q takes Kt o Q takes Q _ ■. (IfeKttakesB 7. ^^^-^- 8. M__^, even game.) THE TWO KNIGHTS' DEFENCE. 103 7. Kt to K 4 (best) /jf >j Q takes P (ch) g B check s Q takes Q (ch) ^ ■ QtoK2 'PBS ■ B takes Q ,„ P takes P n B to K 2 or R 4 j r>i i u • j ^r ■ i... r 10. — — ; 11. .ir — — and Black has sained a Knight for P takes P P takes Kt & 8 three Pawns.) 7. Kt takes Kt 8. Q takes Kt 8. B to Q 3 9. B to Kt 5 (ch) 9. B to Q 2 10. B takes B (ch) 10. Q takes B And we prefer Black's game. (If at move 7 in the main variation White had played, instead of Kt to K 4, 7- Kt to K B 3, then the correct continuation appears to be 7. P to K 5, &c.) GAME THE SECOND. WHITE. BLACK. 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 2. Kt to K B 3 2. Kt to Q B 3 3. B to Q B 4 3. Kt to K B 3 4. P to Q4 We consider this move leads to a more enduring attack than 4. Kt to K Kt 5. 4. P takes P (best) 5. Castles (best) P to_K_5 „ B to Q Kt 5 y Castles or ( a) g Kt takes P ^ PtoQ4 KttoK5 ■BtoQB4 ' B to Q 2 ^ B takes Kt ^^ B to K 3 ^j P to Q B 3 or K B 4, even game). ■ P takes B q to K 2 104 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. (a) In this important subvariation, White, in lieu of Castling on his seventh move, may play 7. Kt takes P . which move gives him the better game, in the opinion of the authors of . " La Strategie " (see " Strategie Raisonnde," p. 281) ; but the continuation given in the German " Handbuch " points to an opposite conclusion. As the authorities are so directly at variance, we give these variations in extenso, and may just observe en passant that the same position oocvirs in the Scotch Gambit, by a transposition of moves. I. Kt takes P „ B takes Kt or (6) „ Castles B to Q 2 (best) P takes B B to K 2 (The German " Handbuch " remarks that 9. P to Q B 4 is also a good move for Black here.} jQ P to Q B 4 J J Q Kt to B 3 ^2 P takes K t Castles ■ Kt takes Kt ' B to Q B 4 (Black may also obtain, at least, an even game here by 12. P to Q B 4.) 13 ^J2_.K_3 ^^ Kt takes Q B P ^^ B take s B P takes P ■ P to K B 3 ' B takes Kt ' R to K sq ' Q takes P ,, P takes P ,„ BtoQ4 , ^, . , t,, , , , . B to Kt 4 Olo¥5' ^^™® ^^ ^'^ Black's thirteenth move being admitted to be weak by the " Handbuch," it is pretty clear that the second player can get an even game, to say the least. (J) g_ Kt takes Kt ^ B to Q 3 ^^ B takes Kt Q to K 2 P takes Kt ■BtoQB4 'QtoKRS P takes B 12. Castles (best) , and Black has certainly no inferiority. 6. Kt takes K P (Black may also play here 5. B to Q B 4, reducing the game THE TWO KNIGHTS' DEFENCE. 106 to a position that occurs in the Giuoco Piano — Max Lange's attack — for which see (C).) 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. E to K sq B takes Q P Q Kt to B 3 Kt takes Kt (best) P to Q Kt 3 DiAGEAM. BLACK. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. Pto Q4 Q takes B Q to Q B 5 B to K3 QtoQ4 ta WHITE. 11. B to K Kt 5 12. B to B 6 13. Kt takes B 14. B takes Q P 11. B to Q B 4 (best) IS. Castles (K E) 13. Q takes Kt 14. Kt takes B 15. Q takes Kt, and the game is even. 106 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. (C.) 5. B to Q B 4 As remarked above, this position occurs in Max Lange's attack in the Giuoco Piano, the moves being merely transposed, e.g. :— J P toK 4 2 Kt to K B 3 g B to Q B 4 ^ Castles ■ P to K 4 ■ Kt to Q B 3 " B to Q B 4 ' Kt to K B 3 5. — 5_J and we arrive at the identical position illustrated in tlie P takes P subjoined Diagram. Diagram. BLACK. Mk i k-m,k k k §3 m m WHITE. THE TWO KNIGHTS' DEFENCE. loi 6. P to K 5 6. P to Q 4 7. P takes Kt 7. P takes B 8. R to K sq (ch) (best) 8. K to B sq (best) (For the consequences of 8. B to K 3, see Variation (D).) 9. B to K Kt 5 (best) (This move is the invention of Mr. Wormald, and is certainly i better than the usual move, 9. P takes P (ch), which can be answered thus {vide " Praxis," p. 115) : — g P takes P (ch) ^^ Kt to K 5 ^j B to R 6 (ch) K takes P ' R to K sq ' K to Kt sci 12. Kt takes Kt or P , even game. 9. P takes P 10. B to K E 6 (ch) 10. K to Kt sq 11. Q Kt to B 3 11. B to K B 4 IS. Q Kt to K 4 IS. B to K B sq " The Chess Players' Magazine," p. 134, now considers White's attack exhausted. We believe, however, that 13. Kt to K R 4 , or 13. B takes B, will render Black's game exceedingly difficult. As the analysis has not been continued further, we append the following original variations : — (Iffirstlv 13 KttoJC^R4 ^4 Rjtakes_B or (as) ■ B takes Q Kt ' B takes B ^^ QtoKKt4( ch) jif i 5.BtoKt2 then 16.^1^?^-— K to B 8(i (best) ( Q to K B sq 17. Kt mates [ jg Kt to B 5 ^y Q ^° ^ ^ - , and White still maintains a strong R to Kt sq ^ attack. Perhaps White might play with still greater advantage 16. Q to K R 5 at once, thus : — jg QtoR5 jy P to B 4, &c. ■ BtoKt4 (a) 14. B >^g^ B ^g R takes B , and we again prefer White's game. K takes B 108 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. Secondly: 13. B takes B 14. Kt takes Q B, and White's attack seems irresistible. B takes B Thirdly : 13. B to Kt 3 14. -"^-^S?.^ 15. Q to Q 2 , •' K takes B ^^^^-^ and "White's attack does not appear to be satisfactorily parried.) Again, if White play 13. B takes B , Black's position is critical. He has only two moves in this position, viz., 13. - or 13. -— — — - •' K takes B B takes Kt. Taking B with Q is out of the c^uestion, on account of White's obvious . . , 1 . Kt takes K B P (ch) , . Q to Q 2, &c. '''°'''^''' ''• K^^Ktl ''■ „. ,1 TO 1, QtoQ 2 Q to E 6 f ch) ^^^'''^^- ''-K^^teB ''• B.toKKts,i ''■ EtoKt2 Kt takes doubled P ^^^ Kt to K Kt 5 ^^^ ^^^^ ^^ ^ ^^^. Q to Q 3 mendons attack. „ 11 io TA R takes B ,- Q to Q 2 ■ ^i^^'^'^^'y- 1- B^teKt ''• iTt^iteB ''■ PtoKR-4 16. Kt takes Q P , and White regains the Pawn and threatens to double his Rooks on King's file, with a very strong game. We venture, therefore, to differ from " The Chess Players' Magazine," and believe that 12. B to K B sq, so far from exhausting White's attack, gives Black a very dangerous position. The German " Handbuch," however, makes Black play in the main variation 11. B to K Kt 5, instead of 11. B to K B 4, as in the text, as follows : — 11. ^ . „ „ 12. Kt to K 4 B to K Kt 5 ■ B to K B sq, &c. (D.) 8. B to K 8 9. Kt to K Kt 5 9. Q to Q 4 10. Q Kt to B 3 10. Q to K B 4 11. Q Kt to K 4 (best) THE TWO KNIGHTS' DEFENCE. lod (Staunton gives 11. P to K Kt 4 in the " Praxis," but it is far inferior, as Black ought to win. {Vide "Praxis," p. 117.) The following continuation is given by Wormald : — 11. B to Q Kt 3 (best) (If 11. Caetles Q R 12. P to K Kt 4 QtoQ4 , ... P takes Kt P , ^ t^^ ^ t^ „ ■ . ■'"'• ^r -D i 1^^ — I'*- - t^t to B 6 winning the exchanae.) K R to Kt sq ° ° ' IS. Kt takes Q B 12. P takes Kt 13. P to B 7 (ch) 13. K takes P 14. Kt to K Kt 5 (ch), winning without difficulty. GAME THE THIED. WHITE. BLACK. 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 2. Kt to K B 3 2. Kt to Q B 3 3. B to Q B 4 3. Kt to K B 3 4. Castles 4. Kt takes K P 5. P to Q 4 5. P to Q 4 (or Variation) If Black play here 6. P takes P, we have the same position as that which occurs in the preceding game, by a simple transposition of moves {see p. 98). 6. Q to K 2 6. B to K Kt 5 7. P takes P 7. Q Kt takes P 8. Kt to Q B 3 8. P to K B 4 9. B to Q 3 9. B to K 2 10. B to K B 4 10. Kt takes Kt (ch) 11, P takes Kt 11. Kt takes Kt 12. P takes Kt 12. B to R 6 13. K R to K sq 13. P to K R 3 14. Q to K 5 14. R to K Kt sq itO THE OHESS-PLAYSR'S MANUAL. 15. Q E to Q sq 15. P to K Kt 4 16. B to Kt 3 16. P to B 5 17. B to R 7 17. R to K B sq 18. R takes Q P, with a winning position. Vaeiation. On Black's Fifth Move. 5. Q Kt takes P 6. Kt takes K P 6. Kt to K 3 7. Kt takes K B P 7. K takes Kt 8. B takes Kt (ch) 8. K to K sq 9. Q to R 5 (ch) White may also play here 9. B to B 7 (ch), and retain his advantage, for, if the Bishop is taken, he can stUl check with Queen at R 5, and if then the Kt P is interposed, win the Knight hy checking at Q 5. 9. P to Kt 3 10. Q to K 5 10. Kt to K B 3 (best) 11. B to Kt 3 (dis. ch) 11. B to K 2 12. B to R 6 12. P to Q 3 13. Q to K 2, and again the " Handbuch " considers White to have a winning position. GAME THE FOURTH. WHITE. BLACK. 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 2. Kt to K B 3 2. Kt to Q B 3 3. B to Q B 4 3. Kt to K B 3 4. Kt to K Kt 5 4. P to Q 4 5. P takes P 5. Kt to Q R 4 6. P to Q 3 6. P to K R 3 7. Kt to K B 3 7. P to K 5 8. Q to K 2 8. Kt takes B THE TV\'0 KNIGHTS' DEFEiSTCE. Ill Mr. Ldwenthal remarks here (see " Morphy's Games," Bohn's edition, p. 242) : " Analysis has convinced us that this move at the present juncture only strengthens White's game ; " but he does not indicate any superior line of play for Black, 9. P takes Kt 9. B to Q B 4 10. P to K R 3 (best) 10. Castles 11. Kt to R 2 11. P to K 6 The best move for Black at this point is Kt to K R 2, but we have seen P to K 6 played with success by Mr. Boden against Mr. Bird, the opening being shaped as follows : — IS. B takes P IS. B takes B 13. P takes B 13. Kt to K 5 Mr. Lowenthal now gives the following continuation (" Morphy's Games," p. 237) :— 14 Castles ^g Q to B 3 ^g Kt takes K t ■ Kt to Kt 6 ' Kt takes R and prefers White's game, as he has two Pawns ahead ; but it must be borne in mind that one of these Pawns is doubled. In the above variation, should White play any other move than 14. Castles, he will get an inferior game, for suppose, for instance — , , Q to B 3 , _ P to Kt 3 (best) .,, , 14. -^ ^^—— 15. — i — ;( with a good game. Q to R 5 (ch) Kt or Q takes P " & . _ 1 a K K 2 1 ^ K takes Q e.g. : 15. 16. 17. —, or Q takes P (ch) Q takes Q (ch) B to B 4 perhaps better still 17. „. . j^. . , ,. > ^'^■ Kt to Kt 4 (ch) U2 THE CHESS- LAYER'S MANUAL GAMES ILLUSTEATIVE OF THE TWO KNIGHTS' DEFENCE. Game l.^Betiveen Messrs. Andebssen and De EitiJire. (From " l^a Regence.") White (Mr. Anderssen). Black (Mr. De Riviere). 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 2. Kt to K B 3 2. Kt to Q B 3 3. B to Q B 4 3. Kt to K B 3 4. Kt to K Kt 5 4. P to Q 4 5. P takes P 5. Kt to Q R 4 6. B to Q Kt 5 (oil) 6. P to Q B 3 7. P takes P 7. P takes P 8. B to K 2 (a) 8. P to K R 3 9. Kt to K B 3 9. P to K 5 10. Kt to K 5 10. Q to Q 5 11. P to K B 4 (b) 11. B to Q B 4 12. E. to K B sq 12. Q to Q 3 (c) 13. P to Q B 3 13. Q Kt to Q Kt 2 14. P to Q Kt 4 14. B to Q Kt 3 15. Kt to Q E 3 15. Castles 16. Q Kt to Q B 4 16. Q to Q B 2 17. P to Q E 4 17. P to Q R 3 18. Kt takes B 18. Q takes Kt 19. P to Q E 5 19. Q to Q B 2 20. K to B 2 {d) 20. K Kt to Q 4 21. K to Kt sq 21. Kt takes K B P 22. E takes Kt 22. Q takes Kt 23. Q to K B sq 23. Kt to Q 3 24. B to E 3 24. P to K B 4 25. E to Q sq 25. P to K Kt 4 26. E to K B 2 26. R to Q R 2 27. B to Q B 4 (ch) 27. Kt takes B 28. Q takes Kt (ch) 28. Q to K 3 29. Q takes Q (ch) 29. B takes Q 30. P to Q Kt 5 30. Q R P takes P 31. B takes E 31. K takes B 32. E to Q R sq 32. K to K 2 33. E to K 2 33. P to K R 4 34. P to K E 4 34. P takes P 35. K to R 2 35. K to B 3 (a) The best move at this juncture, although Staunton says (vide '-Praxis," p. 197,) "that after this move White must get a bad game." (6) Anderssen and Zukertort prefer this to 11. Kt to K Kt 4, (c) The only play to avoid the loss of a piece. (d) A deep manoeuvre ! THE TWO KNIGHTS' DEFENCE. 113 36. R to Q R 3 36. B to Q B 5 37. K R to K sq 37. B to Q 6 38. K to Kt sq 38. K to Kt 4 39. K to B 2 39. K to Kt 5 40. R to K R sq 40. B to Q B 7 41. KtoK3 41. Bto QR5 42. Q R to Q R sq (e) 42. R takes P 43. K R takes P (ch) 43. K to Kt 4 (/) 44. Q R to K R sq 44. B to Q Kt 6 45. K R takes P (ch) 45. K to B 3 46. K to B 4 46. B to K 3 47. K R to K R 7 47. B to K B 2 48. Q R to K R 6 (ch) 48. B to Kt 3 49. K R to Q 7 49. P to K 6 50. K takes P 50. K to Kt 4 51. Q R to K R 8 51. R to Q R 5 52. Q R to K Kt 8 52. R to K 5 (ch) 53. K to B 2 53. R to K 3 54. K R to K Kt 7 54. K to R 3 55. K R to Q B 7 55. K to Kt 4 56. P to Q 4 56. K to B 5 57. Q R to Q B 8 57. B to K sq 58. R takes B 58. R takes R 59. R takes P 59. K to K 5 60. R to Q B 5 60. K to Q 6 61. R takes Q Kt P - 61. K takes Q B P 62. R takes P 62. K takes P And after a few more moves Black resigned. (e) Threatening mate in three moves. (/) If K takes E, White plays K to B 4, and mates in three moves thus. Suppose 43. E takes K 44. ^*5JJ 15. g *^^"^ P 46. H t»ias E, BtoQ8 EtoE8 -^ „-,._' and mates next move 114 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. Game II. — Between Messrs. Gossip amd Zukbrtoet. White (Herr Zukertort). Black (Mr. Goss The first fourteen moves on each side are the same as t ■eceding game (Game I). 15. Kt to Q E 3 15. B to K 3 16. QtoQE4 16. Kt to Q sq 17. Q Kt to Q B 4 17. Q to Q B 2 18. B to Q E 3 18. Castles 19. Castles (QE) 19. Q E to Q B sq 20. P to K Kt 4 20. Kt to K E 2 21. P to K B 5 (a) 21. Q B takes Kt 22. Kt takes B 22. Q takes K E P 23. Q E to K sq 23. B to K B 7 24. K E to K E sq 24. Q to K Kt 6 26. Q E to K B sq 25. P to K 6 26. PtoQ4 26. Kt to K B 3 27. Kt to K 5 27. Kt to Q 4 28. Q to B 2 28. Kt to Q Kt 2 29. B to K B 3 29. K E to K sq 30. P to Q B 4 30. E takes Kt (6) And White resigned. Game 111.— Between Messrs. J ANSSENS and Gossip. White (Mr. Janssens). Black (Mr. Gossip). 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 ::. Kt to K B 3 2. Kt to Q B 3 3. B to Q B 4 3. Kt to K B 3 4. Kt to K Kt 5 4. P to Q 4 5. P takes P 5. Kt to Q E 4 6. B to Q Kt 5 (oh) 6. P to Q B 3 7. P takes P 7. P takes P (a) The game has now become very interesting. (6) If now 31. l-tS^?: 32. ^ ^^^^^ ^* Q takes B PtoQ7 33. R takes B Q takes R' and wins. For if now Qjo B^,, Qt^2, then 34. Ci^^^JVw^) 35. ^J^L^L^^_ *e. P takes P (dis. eh) THE TWO KNIGHTS' DEFENCE. 115 8. Q to K B 3 (a) 8. Q to Q Kt 3 9. B to Q R 4 9. B to K Kt 5 10. Q to K Kt 3 10. P to K E 3 11. Kt to K B 3 11. Castles (Q K) (6) 12. P to Q 3 (c) 12. B to Q 3 13. Castles 13. P to K 5 14. Kt to K 5 14. K R to K sq 15. B to K B 4 15. P to K Kt 4 16. Kt takes Q B 16. P takes B 17. Q to K R 3 17. Kt takes Kt 18. Q takes Kt (ch) 18. K to Q B 2 19. P takes P (d) 19. Q takes Q Kt P 20. Q to K B 5 20. K R to K 4 21. Q takes P (ch) 21. Q R to Q 2 22. Q to K Kt 8 22. Q takes R 23. Kt to Q 2 23. Q to Q 5 24. R to Q Kt sq 24. Kt to Q Kt 2 25. Kt to Q B 4 25. B to Q B 4 26. P to Q B 3 26. Q takes K B P (ch) 27. K to R sq 27. R to K Kt 4 28. R takes Kt (ch) 28. K takes R 29. B takes P (ch) 29. K to Q B 2 And White resigned. Game IV. — Between Messrs. Hoene and Gossip. (From « The Era.") White (Mr. Home). Black (Mr. Gossip). 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 2. Kt to K B 3 2. Kt to Q B 3 3. B to Q B 4 3. Kt to K B 3 4. Kt to K Kt 5 4. P to Q 4 5. P takes P 5. Kt to Q R 4 (a) After this move White must get a bad game, as will be seen by the con- tinuation in the present "partie." (S) The move in the text is recommended by Staunton. Lowenthal, however, prefers B to Q 3 at this juncture, and we are inclined to give the latter move the preference. (c) P to K R 3 would have been better play. (d) If Kt to Q 2, then 19. E to K Kt sq, &c. 116 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. 6. B to Q Kt 5 (a) 6. P to Q B 3 7. P takes P 7. P takes P 8. B to Q R 4 (&) 8. P to K R 3 9. Kt to K B 3 9. P to K 5 (c) 10. Q to K 2 10. B to Q B 4 11. Castles 11- Castles 12. Kt to K sq {d) 12. Q to Q Kt 3 13. P to K R 3 13. B to Q R 3 14. P to Q 3 14. K R to K sq 15. Q to Q sq 15- Q R to Q sq 16. B to Q 2 16. P takes Q P 17. Q B takes Kt 17. P takes Q B P («) 18. Q B takes Q 18. P takes Q Becoming a Queen 19. K B takes Q 19. B takes B 20. B to Q R 4 20. Q B takes R 21. K takes B 21. R to K 3 22. Kt to K B 3 22. Kt to K 5 23. B to Q B 2 23. Kt takes K B P 24. Kt to Q B 3 24. Kt to K R 8 25. P to K Kt 4 25. Kt to K B 7 26. K to Kt 2 26. Kt to Q 6 27. R to K B sq 27. Kt to K B 5 (ch) 28. K to Kt 3 28. Kt to K 7 (cli) 29. Kt takes Kt 29. R takes Kt 30. B to Q Kt 3 30. R takes Q Kt P 31. Kt to K 5 31. R takes B (ch) 32. P takes R 32. B to Q B 2, and wins. Game V. — Between Messrs. Fiske, Peerin, and Puller in GonmUation against Mr. Moephy. White (The Allies). Black (Mr. Morphy). 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 Notes by Herr Lowenthal. (a) Moi-phy played here P to Q 3, which he thinks to be the best move White can adopt at this point. (V) Q to K B 3 is indicated by the best authorities as the correct lino of play. The followLag would then be the correct continuation, viz. : — g qtoji B 3 g B to Q R 4 ^g Q to K Kt 3 QtfTQ Ktl ' Q B to Kt 5 ' B to Q 3, &c. (c) Obtaining a fine attacking game. (d) White is compelled to make this disadvantageous move, which necessarily cramps his forces, rendering the game very difficult. (e) The best move to obtain the advantage. THE TWO KNIGHTS' DEFENCE. 117 2. Kt to K B 3 3. B to Q B 4 4. Kt to K Kt 5 5. P takes P 6. P to Q 3 (a) 7. Kt to K B 3 8. Q to K 2 9. P takes Kt 10. P to K R 3 {d) 11. Kt to K R 2 12. B to K 3 13. Castles 14. P to K B 4 15. Kt takes P 16. Q Kt to B 3 17: Q to K B 2 18. B to Q 4 19. Kt takes Kt 20. Q R to K sq 21. R takes R 22. Kt to K R 4 23. P to Q B 5 24. B takes B 25. P to Q B 4 26. Kt to K B 3 27. P takes B 28. P to K B 4 29. P takes P 30. Q takes Q 31. K to Kt 2 32. P to Q 6 33. P takes P 34. P to Q B 5 35. R to B 3 36. K to Kt 3 37. R to Q Kt 3 38. K to B 3 39. P to Q 7 2. Kt to Q B 3 3. Kt to K B 3 4. P to Q 4 5. Kt to Q R 4 6. P to K R 3 (b) 7. P to K 5 8. Kt takes B 9. B to Q B 4 (c) 10. Castles 11. Kt to K R 2 12. B to Q 3 13. Q to K R 5 14. P takes P (e» 15. Q to R 4 16. R to K sq 17. Kt to K B 3 18. Kt to K 5 19. R takes Kt 20. Q B to K B 4 21. B takes R 22. R to K B sq (e) 23. B to K 4 24. Q takes B 25. P to K Kt 4 26. B takes Kt 27. R to K sq 28. Q to K 6 29. P takes P 30. R takes Q 31. K to Kt 2 32. P takes P 33. R to Q 6 34. K to Kt 3 35. R to Q 7 (ch) 36. P to K B 4 37. P to K B 5 (ch) 38. R to K R 7 39. R takes P (cli) (a) Mr. Morphy prefers this move to checking with Bishop on Q Kt 5. (S) Some authorities prefer B to Q B 4 here. (c) B to K 2 may also he played here. (d) The best possible moye at this j uncture. (e) Max Lange thinks P to K B 4 would have been a better move here. 118 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. 40. R to K K sq 41. K to B 3 42. K to K 2 43. R to Q sq 44. K takes R 45. P to Q R 4 46. K to K 2 47. K to y sq 48. P takes P And Black resigned. 40. KtoK4 41. R takes P 42. R to Q B 7 43. R to Q B 8 44. E takes R 45. P to Q B 6 46. P to Q Kt 3 47. P to Q E 3 48. P to Q Kt 4 49. P takes P Game VI. — Between Messrs. MoRPHY and De RivitRB. White (M. De Riviei-e). Black (Mr. Morphy). 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 2. Kt to K B 3 2. Kt to Q B 3 3. B to B 4 3. Kt to K B 3 4. Kt to K Kt 5 4. P to Q 4 5. P takes P 5. Kt to Q E 4 6. P to Q 3 6. P to K E 3 7. Kt to K B 3 7. P to K 5 8. Q to K 2 8. Kt takes B 9. P takes Kt 9. B to Q B 4 10. P to K R 3 # 10. Castles 11. Kt to R 2 11. Kt to E 2 12. Kt to Q B 3 (a) 12. P to K B 4 13. B to K 3 13. B to Q Kt 5 14. Q to Q 2 14. B to Q 2 15. P to K Kt 3 15. Q to K 2 16. P to Q R 3 16. B to Q 3 17. Kt to K 2 17. PtoQKt4 18. P takes P 18. B takes P 19. Kt to Q 4 19. B to Q B 5 20. Kt to K 6 20. K E to K sq 21. Q to Q 4 21. B to Q R 3 22. P to Q B 4 22. P to Q B 4 23. Q to B 3 23. B to Q B sq 24. KttoB4 24. R to Q Kt sq (a) B to K 3 or 12, Castles is stronger. 25. E to Q Kt m 26. Kt to K 2 27. P to K R 4 28, , P takes P 29. Q to Q B sq 30. B takes Kt P 31. K to B sq 32. QtoQ2 33. QtoB2 34. B to B sq 35. Qto R4 36. K to Kt 2 37. Q takes B 38. QtoK4 39. Kt to K B sq 40. Kt to K 3 41. Kt takes P 42. Kt to B 5 43. B takes B 44. B takes R 45. Q takes R P 46. Q takes P 47. K to Kt sq 48. RtoR4 49. KtoR2 50. Q takes Q 51. KtoR3 52. K to Kt 4 53. KtoR5 54. RtoK4 THE TWO KNIGHTS' DEFENCE. no 25. P to K Kt 4 26. Kt to B sq 27. Kt to Kt 3 28. P takes P 29. Kt to K 4 30. Kt to Q 6 (ch) 31. Q to K Kt 2 32. Kt takes KtP 33. B to Q R 3 34. Kt takes P 35. KttoQ7(ch) 36. Kt takes R 37. R to Kt 3 38. K R to Q Kt sq 39. B to K 4 40. P to K B 5 41. B takes Kt 42. Q to K B 2 43. Q takes Kt 44. R takes B 45. R to K B sq 46. Q to B 6 (oh) 47. Kt to B 6 48. Kt to K 7 (ch) 49. Q takes B P (ch) 50. R takes Q (ch) 51. Kt to Kt 8 (ch) 52. P to K 6 53. P to K 7 54. R to B 8, and wins. Game YIL— Between the Rev. W. Wayte and Mr. Gossip. (From " The Illustrated London News.") White (Mr. Wayte). Black (Mr. Gossip). 1. PtoK4 1. P toK4 2. Kt to K B 3 2. Kt to Q B 3 3. B to Q B 4 3. Kt to K B 3 4. Kt to K Kt 5 4. P to Q 4 5. P takes P 5. Kt to Q R 4 6. P to Q 3 6. P to K R 3 120 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. 7. Kt to K B 3 8. Q to K 2 9. P takes Kt 10. K Kt to Q 2 11. Castles 12. QtoK 3 13. P to K B 3 14. Kt to Q B 3 15. Kt to Q Kt 3 16. P to K Kt 4 {a) 17. P takes B 18. Q takes K P 19. Q to K B 3 20. K to Kt 2 21. B takes Kt 7. P to K 5 8. Kt takes B 9. B to K 2 10. Castles 11. B to K Kt 5 12. B to Q 3 13. B to K B 4 14. Q to K 2 15. Kt to K B 4 16. KttoKB5 17. Q to K E, 5 18. Q R to K sq . 19. Kt takes K R P (ch) 20. Kt to K Kt 4 21. Q mates. Game VIII. — Between Messrs. Hooper and Gossip. (Prom "The Era.") White (Mr. Hooper). 1. P to K 4 2. Kt to K B 3 3. B to Q B 4 4. Kt to K Kt 5 5. P takes P 6. P to Q 3 7. Kt to K B 3 8. Kt to K 5 (a) 9. B to Kt 5 (oh) 10. P takes Q B P 11. KttoQ 7 12. Kt takes Kt (ch) Black (Mr. Gossip). 1. P to K 4 2. Kt to Q B 3 3. Kt to K B 3 4. PtoQ4 5. Kt to Q R 4 6. P to K R 3 7. P to K 5 8. B to Q 3 9. P to Q B 3 10. Castles 11. RtoKsq(6) 12. Q takes Kt (a) This advance exposes White to great peril. Q to K 2, or have played the Pawn on to Q B 5. He had better have retired his Notes by Herr LowentJial. (a) Q to K 2 is the correct play here. (b) Takii:g P with P would also have been good play. THE TWO KNIGHTS' DEFENCE. 121 13. P takes Q Kt P (c) 14. B takes R 15. P to Q 4 16. Q B takes P 17. P to K Kt 3 18. P takes R 19. P takes B 20. K to Q 2 21. KtoQBsq 22. Kt to Q R 3 23. K to Q Kt sq 24. KtoQBsq 25. K to Q Kt sq 26. Kt to Q B 4 And 13. Q B takes P 14. R takes B 15. P to K 6 16. Q to K R 5 17. R takes B (ch) (d) 18. B takes P (ch) 19. Q takes R (ch) 20. Kt to B 5 (ch) 21. QtoK5 22. Q takes K P (ch) 23. Kt to Q 7 (oh) (e) 24. Kt to Kt 6 (double check) 25. B to K B 6 26. Q to K B 7 White resigned. Game IX. CFrom the German " Handbuch.") White. 1. P to K 4 2. Kt to K B 3 3. B to Q B 4 4. Kt to K Kt 5 5. P takes P 6. B to Q Kt 5 (ch) 7. P takes P 8. Q to K B 3 9. Q takes B 10. Q to K B 3 11. Q to K Kt 3 12. P to Q 3 (a) 13. Castles Black. 1. P to K 4 2. Kt to Q B 3 3. Kt to K B 3 4. P to Q 4 5. Kt to Q R 4 6. P to Q B 3 7. P takes P 8. P takes B 9. B to Q B 4 10. B to Q Kt 2 11. Castles 12. P to K 5 13. P to Q Kt 5 (c) This wins the exchange, hut gives Black a fine attacking game. (d) Cleverly played. (e) Leading to a speedy termination. (a) If 12. Castles P to E E 3 13. Kt to R 3 Kt to K 5 13, y_takea 1' B to K sq, &c. 122 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. 14. B to K 3 15. Q takes B 16. Q to K Kt 3 17. P to Q B 3 14. B takes B 15. KttoQ4 16. P takes P 17. Q to K B 3, and wrns. (6) Game X.- —Between Messrs. Bird and Gossip. (From " The Illustrated London News.") White (Mr. Bird). Black (Mr. Gossip). 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 2. Kt to K B 3 2. Kt to Q B 3 3. B to Q B 4 3. Kt to K B 3 4. Kt to K Kt 5 4. P to Q 4 5. P takes P 5. Kt to Q R 4 6. P to Q 3 6. P to K R 3 V. Kt to K B 3 7. P to K 5 8. Q to K 2 8. Kt takes B 9. P takes Kt 0. B to Q B 4 10. P to K E 3 10. Castles 11. KttoKR2 11. Kt to K R 2 12. Kt to Q B 3 12. P to K B 4 13. B to K 3 13. B to Q Kt 5 14. Castles (Q R) 14. B takes Kt 15. P takes B 15. P to Q Kt 3 16. PtoQB5 16. P to K B 5 17. B to Q 4 17. E to K sq 18. Kt to K Kt 4 18. Q takes Q P 19. P to Q B 4 19. Q to K Kt 4 20. P to K B 3 20. P takes Q B P 21. B to Q B 3 21. B takes Kt 22. B P takes B 22. Kt to K B 3 (a) 23. R to K E 5 23. Kt takes E 24. P takes Kt 24. Q R to Q sq 25. E takes R 25. R takes E 26. Q takes K P 26. Q takes K Kt P 27. Q to K 6 (ch) 27. K to R sq 28. Q takes K R P (oh) 28. K to Kt sq (6) " La Strat^gie " gives Q to Q Kt 3 for Black here. Notes by Mr. Staunton, (a) The exposed situation of Mr. Bird's King is a serious disadvantage. His opponent now threatens to open an attack by P takes P, &c. , which, if not pre- vented, must be fatal. THE TWO KNIGHTS' DEFENCE. 123 29. Q to K 6 (ch) 29. K to R 2 30. Q to K B 5 (ch) 30. K to R sq 31. Q takes K B P 31. Q to K R 8 (ch) 32. K to Kt 2 32. R to Q Kt sq (ch) 33. K to R 3 (6) 33. Q takes K R P 34. B takes P (ch) 34. K takes B 35. Q takes Q B P (cb) 85. Q to K B 2 36. Q takes R 36. Q takes K B P (ch) 37. Q to Q Kt 3 37. Q to Q B 3 38. K to Kt 2 ■ 38. Q to K B 3 (ch) 39. Q to Q B 3 39. Q takes Q (ch) 40. K takes Q 40. K to Kt 3 41. P to Q R 4 And, after a few more moves, the game was given up as drawn. (i) From the ticklish position of each party's King, the position is highly iiteresting hereabouts. CHAPTER V. THE SCOTCH GAMBIT. GAME THE FIRST. WHITE. BLACK. 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 . S. KttoKB 3 2. Ktto QB3 3. P to Q 4 This move constitutes the Scotch Gambit, which is so named from its having been adopted, many years ago, by the Edinburgh Chess Club, in a match by correspondence with the London Club. 3. P takes P Black can also play here 3. Kt takes P, for the consequences of which see Game the Second. He is compelled to capture the Pawn, or get a very cramped, bad game. 4. B to Q B 4 This used to be considered White's best move, but it is inferior to 4. Kt takes P. {See Game the Third.) 4. B to Q B 4 (best) Black can also play here 4. Kt to K B 3, 4. B to Q Kt 5 (ch), 4. P to Q 3, or 4. Q to K B 3. {See Variations (I.), (II.), (III.), and (IV.). 5. Castles White has two other lines of play at his disposal here, viz. — 5. P to Q B 3, or 5. Kt to K Kt 5. The first4eads to a position which occurs in the Guioco Piano, if Black brings out his THE SCOTCH GAMBIT. 125 King's Knight to Bishop's third on his fifth move, or plays 5. P to Q 3 (see Analysis of the Guioco Piano Opening), and may therefore be briefly dismissed. Kt to K Kt 5 g Kt takes K B P or see (A) Kt to K R 3 Kt takes Kt If secondly : 5. y B takes Kt (ch) K takes B ^ Castles ( best) ^ P to Q B 3 ^ ^^^^^ ^^^ ^ ^^^ P takes P BtoKB4(best) ^ ^ g Q to K B. 5 (ch) P to K Kt 3 Q Q takes B ■ P to Q 4 (best) Instead of 11. B to K B 4 the "Praxis" and the German "Handbuch" give 11. B to K 3, and Wormald considers 11. R to K sq to be-Black's best move ; but they are both inferior. (See also Illustrative Game I.) (A). — In the above variation, White could play 6. Q to K R 5 instead of 6. Kt takes K B P, but that would give Black the advantage; e.g., Castles P to K R 3 Suppose 6. ^^^^^ 7 ^^ Q to K 2 P to Q 3 B to Q 2 9. ^ ^°,^ B.l f!'^^^^ and Black has far the better position. (See Diagram.) Castles (Q R) WHITE. 126 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. To return to the main variation. 5. P to Q 3 (best) Black can also play 5. Kt to K B 3, or 5. Q to K B 8 ; but the}^ are both inferior, e.g. : — T) J.-, T^ K If firstlv • 5 6. with a terrible attack, the •^ ■ ■ Kt to K B 3 White Rook being soon brought into play with fatal effect on the King's file. If secondly 5 6. 5-^°-^-? l.l^^^L^ 11 secondly • »• q ^o K B 3 P to Q 3 B to Kt 3 B to Q Kt 3 g K t takes Kt ^^ P takes P ^^ B takes B ■ Ktto K 4 ■ P takes Kt ' B takes Q P ' P takes B 12 P toK 5 ^3 P to Q R 4 ^^ P takes R P ^^ Kt to Q R 3 ■ Q to Q Kt 3 ■ P to Q R 4 " R takes P with a decided advantage. 6. P to Q B 8 6. B to K Kt 5 (best) This is undoubtedly Black's best move. In fact, it gives him a winning position. It was successfully adopted by Anderssen against Kolisch. (See Illustrative Games II. and III.) Black has four other moves at his disposal here, but three out of the four give White the advantage, e.g. — piratly 6 7 ^ ^^ Q ^t 4 ^ B to Q Kt 2 ■ Q to K B 3 ■ B to Q Kt 3 ' Kt to K 4 Kt takes Kt P takes Kt 10. ^ with a slight advantage in positio Secondly: 6. 7 ^ 1 ° Q Kt 4 P to Q B 4 PtoQ6 BtoKt3 or 8. Q takes P, with a good game. Thirdlv • fi 17 Kt takes P „^ Q to Kt 3 .,, iniraij . b. p-pr — p 7. or ^ , with a superior game. (See Illustrative Games IV. and V.) Fourthly : G 7 P takes P Q Kt to B 3 Kt to K B 3 ■ B to Q Kt 3 * Q B to K Kt 5 THE SCOTCH GAMBIT. 127 This last line of defence, 6. Kt to K B 3, was formerly con- sidered best, but is now quite exploded in favour of 6. B to K Kt 5, which is certainly a stronger move. Still, 6. Kt to K B 3 may be played with perfect safety. (See Illustrative Game VIII. between Messrs. Gossip and Wisker.) 7. Q to Q Kt 3 ,jj y P to Q Kt 4 g P to Q R 4 P to Q Kt 5 ■ B to Q Kt 3 ■ P to Q R 4 " Kt to K 4 ~ 10. BtoK2 ^^_ B takes P ^2 P takes Kt ■ P to Q 6 ■ Kt takes Kt (ch) ' B to K R 6 with the hatter game. Vide also Illustrative Game III.) 7. B takes Kt (best) Mr. Lowenthal recommends here 7. Kt to Q E. 4 for Black, but this move does not appear so forcible as 7. B takes Kt, e.g., ^ g Q to R 4 (c h) g P takes P ' Kt to Q R 4 ■ P to Q B 3 ' P to Q Kt 4 \ Tf g ' 10 ^ ^^^^^ *^ ^ 11 B takes K B P (ch), &c. ) I ■ Q B takes Kt ' B takes QP ' i , „ Q to B 2 1 , P takes B •,„ P takes B and Black cannot ■ kt takes B ' B takes Kt he said to acquire such an advantage as that which he ohtains hy capturing Knight with Bishop on his seventh move. Black can also secure the advantage by playing 7. Q to Q 2, as follows : — o B takes P(ch) „ Q takes QKtP Suppose 7. ^-^Q.^ ^-QtS^ ^'KtoQa ' Q takes R ^j P takes B jg Q ^"° Q ^ and Black ought B takes Kt ' Q takes P Q to K R 6 to win. As the position is curious, we append a diagram :— 128 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. BLACK. ^//y/j'yy^j.y^ £^^i^^^ 8. B takes P (ch) 8. K to B sq 9. B takes Kt 9. E takes B 10. P takes B 10. P to K Kt 4, or 10. Q to Q 2 And Black ought to win. In answer to the former of these moves, viz., 10. P to K Kt 4, White may play 11. Q to Q sq, when Black wins easily (see Illustrative Game II.), or. 11. Q to K 6 , when the following is the proper continuation ; — 11. Q toK 6 R to K Kt 3 12 Q toR3 ■ K to Kt sq J If 12 Q to B 5 (ch ) ) ( ■ K to Kt 2, &c. ) In any case Black gets the advantage, hut it is questionable whether White would not do better to take Bishop with Pawn on his ninth move instead of capturing the Knight with Bishop, and we recommend this line of play to the attention of the student. THE SCOTCH GAMBIT. 129 Variation (I.) On Black's fourth move : — 4. Kt to K B 3 This defence may be adopted with perfect safety. The same position occurs in the " Two Knights' Defence," the moves being merely transposed, thus : — , PtoK4 2 Kt to K B 3 3 B to_Q^^ ^ P tc Qjl_ ■ P to K 4 ■ Kt to Q B 3 ■ Kt to K B 3 ' P takes P Bilguer and Von der Lasa are of opinion that Black gets an 5. P to K 5 White has three other moves here — viz., Kt to K Kt 5, Castles, an.d Kt takes P. Tffi ti "5 Kt to K Kt 5 g P takes P - K to B eg nrsuy : "• p j^ q 4 g^ (A) ' Q to K 2(ch) " Kt to K 4 a Q takes P „ Kt to K 4 , with a pawn ahead. ■ p1o.K R 3 (A) B to K t 3 » Q t akes P g Q takes Kt (ch) Kt to K 4 ■ P to K R 3 ' P takes Kt " Q to K 2 Q takes Q (ch) ^^ B takes Kt P, with the advantage. B takes Q Castles fi R to K sq „ B takes P If secondly : o. j^y^^j^Tp or (B) Pl^Q 4 '• tj takes B - KttoQB3 q Kt takes Kt jq P to Q Kt 3 j^ B to K Kt 5 Qtolj'BS" BtoK3 ■QtoQ4 " B to Q B 4 B to K B 6 ^.^ Kt takes B ^^ B t akes Q P 15 Q takes Kt Castles (K E) ' ' Q takes Kt ' Kt takes B and the game is even. For Black's eighth move in this variation, in lieu of Q to Q B 5, the German " Handbuch" makes Black play 8. Q to K R 4, e.g , 8. g-^-g. j^^ 130 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. Kt takes Kt j,)_ B^toK Kt 5 ^^^ j^ ^^^^ ^^^ continue tlie game B to K 2 B to K Kt 5' ^ further. The following continuation deserves attention : Suppose 11. B t akes B , Black has only two moves, viz., 11. Kt takes B or 11. . In the first place, if 11. ,, — , 12. ^ ^^^^ ^ B takes Kt Kt takes B B takes Kt 13. Q takes K KtP , &c. In the second place, if 11. B takes Kt ■,„ P takes B ,„ Q takes P Kt takes B Castles (K E), even game. (B) 5 g PtoK 5 ^ P t akes Kt g B to K sq (eh) ■BtoQB4 ■ptoQ4 ' P takes B ' K to B sq (best) or (a) Q B to K K t 5 j^Q B to R 6 (ch) . Q Kt to B 3 , with a fine game. - ■ P takes P ■ K to Kt sq (a) 8 9 Kt to K Kt 5 J Q Kt to B 3 ' BtoK3 ■ QtoQ4 ■ QtoKB4" j^ Q Kt to K 4 ^2 Kt take s B P to K B 7 (ch) ■ B to Q Kt 3 ■ P takes Kt ' K or Q takes P 14. Kt to K Kt 5, and wins. After Black's fifth move, B to Q B 4 in this variation, the game is resolved into Max Lange's attack in the Giuoco Piano, for which see, also, the analysing of the Two Knights' Defence and the Giuoco Piano, pp. 105, 106. If thirdly ^ Kt takes P g B t akes K B P (ch) „ Q to K R 5 (ch) Kt takes K P ' K takes B P to K Kt 3 8 QtoQ5 (ch) g Kt takes Q K t Q to K 5 (ch) K to Kt 2 ■ Q to K sq '"• Q takes Q , , Kt takes Q B to Q B 4, and Black has a very good game. To return to the main variation. 5. P to Q 4 (best) THE SCOTCH GAMBIT. i3i Black could play here Kt to K Kt 5, but that would be bad, e.g. — (Supposes. 6. B takes K B P (ch) KttoKKts W Kt to K Kt 5 K takes B ' K to Kt sq 8. Q to K B 3 , and wins.) 5. Kt to K 5 is obvioiisly bad. 6. B to Q Kt 5 (best) P takes Kt leads to nothing. 6. Kt to K 5 7. Kt takes P 7. B to Q 2 8. B takes Kt 8. P takes B 9. B to K 3 9. B to Q B 4 Even game. For other variations see the analysis of the " Two Knights' Defence," in the preceding Chapter. Variation (II.) On Black's fourth move : — 4. B to Q Kt 5 (ch) This move has long been abandoned, as inferior. 5. P to Q B 3 5. P takes P 6. Castles 6. P to Q B 7 (best) < jj g 7 P takes Q BP g P to K 5 g B takes B ■ P to Q 3 ■ B toE, 4 ' ■ B to K 3 (best) ' P takes B jQ (j to Q Kt 3 J J PtateP j2 Kt to K Kt 5 foUowed by ■ Q to B sq ■ P takes P B to K s q.) jj g . Y Q B takes P g P to K 5 ■ P takes Q Kt P ' K to B sq or see (A) (B) ' Q to K 2 g P to Q B 3 jQ Q Kt to B 3 ^^ Kt to Q 5 ^^ B to K sq ■ B to Q B 4 ■ P to Q 3 ' Q to Q 2 ' P takes P iq Q B takes P ,. Kt tak es Kt ,g Kt takes K B P and wins. ' '■ Kt takes B ' Q to Q sq K 2 132 The: CHESS-PLAYER'S MAKtJAL. (A) y 8 ^ *° ^ ""^ (") Q K Kt takes P '■ P to K B 3 ■ P takes P ' " Q Kt takes Kt jQ Q B takes Kt ^^ Q to Q R 4 ,„ Q B takes K t, foUowed by ■ K Kt to B 3 ■ Q to K 2 P to Q R 3, with a good game. (a) 8 Q to Q Kt 3 g PtoK5 ^^ Kt takes P Kt takes Kt Kt to K R 3 ■ P takes P ' Q to K 2 " Q P takes Kt J2 Kt to B 3 ,„ Q takes B , and White has an excellent position. B takes Kt (B) 7. 8 Kt to K Kt 5 PtoK5 K Kt to B 3 ■ Castles p to Q 4 10. P takes Kt , with the advantage.) 7. Q takes P 7. P to Q 3 8. P to Q R 3 8. B to Q B 4 9. P to Q Kt 4 9. Q Kt to Q 5 10. B takes K B P (ch) 10. K to B sq 11. Q to Q 3 11. Q to K B 3 IS. B to K R 5, etc. Variation (III.) On Black's fourth move : — 4. P to Q 3 This move reduces the game to a variation of the " Phih- dorian Defence." Although preferable to checking with the Bishop, it is inferior to B to Q B 4. {See Illustrative Game XVI.) And if 5. Kt takes P, or 5. P to Q B 3, White has a capital position. THE SCOTCH GAMBIT. 133 Variation (IV.) On Black's fourth move : — 4. Q to K B 3 5. Castles 5. P to Q 3 6. P to Q B 3 6. B to K Kt 5 7. Q to Q Kt 3 7. Castles (Q R) 8. B to K Kt 5 8. Kt to Q R 4 9. Q to Kt 5 9. Q to Kt 3 10. Kt to K R 4 With the advantage. Black's fourth move of Q to K B 3 may be dismissed, as unnecessarily cramping and dangerous. Although there are other variations, the above serves to demonstrate its inad- visability. On his sixth move in this variation Black may, however, play P to Q 6, thus :— g yj Q takes P g B to K B 4 g Kt to Q R 3 ■ P to Q 6 ■ Q to Kt 3 ■ B to K 2 followed by 10. Kt to Q B 2 , with a good game. GAME THE SECOND. WHITE. BLACK. 1. P to K 4 1, P to K 4 2. Kt to K B 3 2. Kt to Q B 3 3. P to Q 4 3. Kt takes P 4. Kt takes P, or (A) 4. Kt to K 3 (best) 5. P to K B 4 (best) White can also play 5. B to Q B 4, and get a good game, thus : B to Q B 4 (3 Castles ^ Kt to Kt 4 ■ Kt to K B 3 ■ P to Q 3 ' B to K 2, even game. 134 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL, In this variation, Black on Ms fifth move can also play P to Ci B 3j in reply to B to Q B 4, e. g. : — B take s Kt ^ Kt to B 3 ^ B to Kt 3 ■ PtoQB3 QtoQR4(ch) Q takes K Kt BtoQKt5 , Ca stles 10. P takes B, and White has the better game. BtakesKt(ch) 5. B to Q B 4 (best) Black has three other moves here — viz., P to Q 3, B to Q 3, and Q to K B 3. If firstly 5 6 B to Q Kt 5 (ch) ^ Kt takes Q B P " ' ■ P to Q 3 ■ P to Q B 3 ■ Q to Q Kt 3 8. Kt to_Q_4, dis (ch), with the advantage. If secondly: 5. gKttoQS 7. ^°-? ^ BtoQ3 PtoQBS followed hy 8. P to K B 5 or 8. P to K 5, with a fine position. If thirdly: 5. 6. Kt to K Kt 4 P to K K t_3 QtoKBS QtoKR5 (ch) Q to K R 4 g BtoK2 g Kt to K B 2 ^^ P to K S 5 QtoKR6 ■QtoKR3 ■QKttoKKt4 11. P to K R 4, &c. To resume the main variation : 6. Kt to K B 3 6. Q to K B 3 (If 6. Kt to K B 3, or 6. P to Q 3, then 7. P to K B 5.) 7. P to K 5 7. Q to K Kt 3 8. Q Kt to B 3 8. B to Q Kt 5 9- BtoQ3 9. Q takes K Kt P 10. K R to K Kt sq 10. Q to R 6 11. R to K Kt 3 11. Q to R 4 IS. P to B 5 IS. Kt to Q B 4 13. R takes P, with the better game. Staunton remarks in the "Praxis," p. 216, that should Black play 8. P to Q B 3, instead of B to Q Kt 5, as above, White can get a dangerous attack by playing 9. Kt to K R 4, foUowed by P to K Kt 3. THE SCOTCH GAMBIT. 135 Suppose: 8. 9. Kit2LKRi PtoKKtJ ^^ P to Q B 3 Q to K R 3 P to K Kt 4 ^2 Q Kt to E Kt takes P " B to K 2 ^^ P takes P ^2 Q Kt to K 4 ^g Kt to K B 5, &c. (A.) 4. Kt takes Kt 4. P takes Kt 5. Q takes P 5. Kt to K 2 (best) 6. B to Q B 4 6. Kt to Q B 3 7. Q to Q 5 7. Q to B 3 8. Castles 8. B to K 2 EYen game. If Black play 8. B to Q Kt 5, White obtains a slight ad- vantage in position by 9. P to Q B 3, followed, upon the Bishop retreating to Q E 4, by 10. P to K B 4 or P to K 5. GAME THE THIED. WHITE. BLACK. 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 2. Kt to K B 3 2. Kt to Q B 3 3. P to Q 4 3. P takes P 4. Kt takes P 4. B to Q B 4 For the consequences of Black's playing 4. Kt takes Kt, or 4. Q to K E 5, see Variations (I.), (II.). A difference of opinion exists amongst good players as to which is Black's best fourth move. Mr. Wisker prefers 4. B to Q B 4, whilst Herr Zukertort considers 4. Q to K E 5 to be Black's best play. We prefer the latter move. 5. B to K 3 (best) This is now considered stronger than the old move, 5. Kt takes Kt, given in the "Handbook," p. 173.) 136 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. 5. Q to K B 3 (best) 6. P to Q B 3 6. K Kt to K 2 7. B to K 2 Another move— I'i^., P to K B 4, has been suggested for White here, with the following continuation : ^ PtoKB4 8 PtoK5 g PJo K B 5 ^' p to Q 4 ■ Q to K Kt 3 ' Q B takes P 10. Kt takes B, winning a piece. Black, however, is not compelled to play 7, P to Q 4 on his seventh move, 7. P to Q 4 (best) Castling here is not so good for Black. 8. B to Q 3 And the game is even. For further analysis of this branch of the opening, see Illustrative Games. Variation (I.) On Black's Fourth Move. 4. Kt takes Kt. 5. Q takes Kt And we arrive at the same position as that which occurs on p. 127. {See Variation A, Game the Second.) Variation (II.) On Black's Fourth Move. 4. Q to K E 5 This move has of late been frequently adopted in matches of importance — ^notably in the celebrated contest between the London and Vienna clubs. It was invented many years ago, THE SCOTCH GAMBIT. 137 and so far back as 1846, an elaborate analysis was published in the " Schachzeitung," to prove that the defence of Q to K R 5 was perfectly sound. White has now several ways of continuing the attack — viz., Kt to Q B 3, Kt to K B 3, Q to Q 3, and Kt to Q, Kt 5, the last of which moves is considered to be White's strongest mode of play, and is the invention of Mr. Horwitz. The three first are inferior, and, with correct play, ought incontestably to give Black the advantage. We wUl now examine these moves seriatim. Firstly, then : 5. KLtoQA? e. Q <^° Q ^ P takea B B to Q Kt 5 B takes Kt (ch) Kt to K B 3 with a superior game. Secondly : 5. Kt to K B 3. This move — the invention of Mr. Fraser — although in- genious enough, is quite unsound, inasmuch as it relinquishes a valuable Pawn that can never be regained. Black can safely capture the Pawn with Queen, checking, e.g. : g g B to K 2 y P toB 3 Q takes P (ch) " B to Kt 5 (ch) ' B to B 4 with no disadvantage. Thirdly: 5. 9J2jQ3 Q Kt to K 4, and Black has gained time, with a fine game. This move is recommended by Jaenisch. Staunton gives for Black g Kt takes Q Kt ^ P to K 5 g Q B to K 3 Kt to K B 3 Q P takes Kt B to Q B 4 B takes B g Q takes B ^^ Q to^ j^ P to K B 4 ' Kt to Kt 5 ■ Q to K 2 ' Q to Q Kt 5 (ch), with the advantage. The following continuation, which occurred in a game played at the Clifton Tourney, between Mr. Thompson and the Author, deserves notice : — 5 Q toQ3 g Kt to Q B 3 ^ Kt takes Kt g B to Q 2 KttoKBS 'BtoQKtS ' Q P takes Kt ' B takes Kt 9 B takes B ^^ Q to K 3 j^ B takes K Kt P ^^ ?_to_Q.4_ Kt takes K P ' Q to K 2 " E to K Kt sq ' P to Q B 4 138 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. B to Q B 3 ^4 QJakes^Q (ch) jg P takes Kt Kt takea B ' K takes Q ' B to K B 4, arid Black has slightly the better position. Fourthly : 5. Kt to Q Kt 5. As this is White's best move, we resume with it the main variation. 5. Kt to Q Kt 5 5. B to Q Kt 5 (ch), or see (A.), (B.) 6. B to Q 2 6. Q takes K P (ch) 7. B to K 2 7. K to Q sq 8. Castles Mr. Staunton thinks now that White's game is much to be preferred {vide " Handbook," p. 172), but this is very ques- tionable {see Illustrative Game XVII., between London and Vienna). 8. Kt to K B 3 London played here 8. B takes B against Vienna, and won eventually. 9. Q Kt to Q B 3 9. Q to K E 5 And Black appears to maintain the Pawn without danger, for if now 10. P to K Kt 3 10. Q to K R 6 Followed by Q to K B 4, or P to Q 3, with a safe game, and a Pawn ahead. (A.) 5. Q takes K P (ch) 6. B to K ^2 6. K to Q sq or (a) 7. Castles 7, P to Q R 3 THE SCOTCH GAMBIT. 139 8. Q Kt to Q B 3 8. Q to K sq (beet) 9, K Kt to Q 4 With a better position. (a) , Kt to Q 2 „ BtoK B 3 B checks Q takes Kt P ' Q to K Kt 3 g Kt takes Q B P (ch) ^^ Kt takes B ^^ P to Q B 3 ■ K to Q sq ■ Kt to K B 3 ' B to K sq (ch) ^2 B to K2 j3 RtoBsq ^^ Kt to Q B 4 ^^ P takes B QtoKKt? ■■ KttoQ4 ■ B takes P(ch) 'KttakesQBP ,g Kt to K 3 ^Y B takes R ,„ R takes Kt ,„ B to Q 3 ■ R takes Kt " Kt takes Q ' Q takes KR P ' Q to Q Kt sq and Black has a winning position. This beautiful variation occurred, we believe, in actual play in a game between Messrs. Steinitz and Rosenthal. Black's seventh move of Q takes Kt P is the invention of Mr. Steinitz (" Handbuch," p. 147). The usual move at this point is 7. B takes Kt (ch) g B ta kes B g Casties ^^ B to K B 3 ^^ Kt to Q B 3, and, ■ k to Q sq ■ P to~Q R 3 ■ Q to K Kt 3 as the "Handbuch" observes, it will be diflBcult for Black to bring his Queen's Rook into play. (B.) 6. Q to K B 3 or (6) 7. Kt takes B P (ch) 8. Q to K B 4 9. K to Q sq 10. B takes Q 11. Kt takes Q R 5. B to Q B 4 6. Kt to Q 5 7. K to Q sq 8. Kt takes Q B P (ch) 9. Q takes Q 10. Kt takes Q R With the better game. (6) gQtoK2 „BtoK3 g 'BtoQKtS ■ BtoR4(oh) B to Q 2 g Kt takes B B takes B (oh) ' Q to Q sq jQ Castles (Q B) PtoQR3, &c. 140 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. GAMES ILLUSTRATIVE OF THE SCOTCH GAMBIT. Game L— Between W. H. C. and 0. R. H., taken from " The Hartford Times " {American paper). White (W. H. C). 1. P to K 4 2. Kt to K B 3 3. P to Q 4 4. B to Q B 4 5. Kt to K Kt 5 6. Kt takes K B P 7. B takes Kt (ch) 8. Q to K R 5 (ch) 9. Q takes B (a) 10. Castles 11. P to Q B 3 12. B to K Kt 5 13. Kt to Q 2 14. Q to Q B 4 (ch) 15. Q R to K sq 16. Q takes P (ch) 17. Kt takes P 18. R takes R 19. Q to B 4 (ch) 20. R to B 4 21. B to K R 6 (ch) 22. R takes R 23. Q to K B 4 (ch) 24. y to K B 6 (ch) 25. Q takes Kt Black (C. R. H.) 1. P to K 4 2. Kt to Q B 3 3. P takes P 4. B to Q B 4 5. Kt to K R 3 6. Kt takes Kt 7. K takes B 8. P to K Kt 3 9. P to Q 4 (b) 10. P takes P 11. R to K sq (c) 12. Q to Q 2 13. P to Q Kt 3 14. K to Kt 2 15. P takes P 16. K to Kt sq 17. R takes Kt 18. B to Q Kt 2 19. K to Kt 2 20. R to K B sq 21. K takes B 22. Kt to K 4 23. K to Kt 2 24. K to R 3 And Black resigned. (a) Staunton suggests Q to Q 5 (ch ) before taking the Bishop, but it does not appear to lead to much : e.g., 9. 10, Q take s B P to qT Q to Q 5 fch) K to Kt 2 jj P to Q Kt 4 P takes K P, or R to K sq, and Black still has a Pawn ahead. (J) Far stronger than the old move of P to Q 3. (c) B to K B 4, shutting out the hostile Queen, is a more forcible move, in our opinion. THE SCOTCH GAMBIT. Game II. — Between Messrs. Kolisch and Anderssen. (From " La Rggence.") 141 White (Mr. KoUsch). Black (Mr. Anderssen). 1. PtoK4 1. P to k 4 2. KttoKB3 2. Kt to Q B 3 3. P to Q 4 3. P takes P 4. B to Q B 4 4. B to Q B 4 5. Castles 5. P to Q 3 6. P to Q B 3 6. B to K Kt 5 (a) 7. Q to Q Kt 3 (6) 7. B takes Kt 8. B takes P (ch) 8. K to B sq 9. B takes Kt (c) 9. R takes B 10. P takes B 10. P to K Kt 4 (d) 11. Q to Q sq (e) 11. Q to Q 2 12. P to Q Kt 4 12. B to Q Kt 3 13. B to Q Kt 2 13. P to Q 6 14. Q takes P (/) 14. Kt to K 4 15. Q to K 2 15. Q to K E 6 16. Kt to Q 2 16. P to K Kt 5 And White resigned. Game III. — Between Messrs. MacDonnell and Steinitz. (From " Tlie Games of the Chess Congress.") White (Mr. MacDonnell). Black (Mr. Steinitz). 1. P to K 4 2. P to Q 4 3. Kt to K B 3 4. B to Q B 4 5. Castles 6. P to Q B 3 1. PtoK4 2. P takes P 3. Kt to Q B 3 4. B to Q B 4 5. PtoQ3 6. B to K Kt 5 (a) (a) This is much superior to the old move of Kt to K B 3. (J) After this Mr. Anderssen thinks White cannot save the game. (c) Perhaps P takes B would be preferahle, though even then Black ought to get the advantage. (d) A capital move ! («) Here we helieVe Q to K 6 would have yielded White more resource. (/) Again Kt to Q 2 would have been better play. (as) See note to preceding game. 142 THE CHESS-PLIyER'S MAIJUAL. 7. P to Q Kt 4 (6) 8. P to Q R 4 9. P to Q Kt 5 10. B toK2 11. B takes P 12. P takes B 13. K to R sq 14. R to Q R 2 15. R to K Kt 2 16. Bto K 2 17. P to K B 4 18. P to K B 5 19. R to K B 4 20. R to K Kt 3 21. P takes Q 22. Kt to Q 2 23. Kt to Q B 4 24. R takes Kt 25. B to K B 4 26. P to K Kt 4 27. QtoQ5 28. BtoK3 29. Kt takes Q E P 7. B to Q Kt 3 8. P to Q R 4 9. Kt to K 4 10. PtoQ6 11. B takes Kt (c) 12. Q to K R 5 13. B takes K B P (d) 14. B to Q Kt 3 15. Kt to K B 3 16. P to K B 3 17. Kt to K Kt 3 18. Kt to K 4 19. Q to K R 6 20. Q takes R 21. P to K R 4 22. K Kt to Kt 5 23. Kt to K B 7 (ch) 24. B takes R 25. P to .K R 5 26. P to K B 3 27. Castles (Q R) 28. B to K Kt 6 And Black resigns. Game IV.- —Between Messrs !. Kolisch and Habewitz. White (Mr. ; Kolisch). Black (Mr. Harrwitz). 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 2. Kt to K B 3 2. Kt to Q B 3 3. P to Q 4 3. P takes P 4. B to Q B 4 4. B to Q B 4 5. Castles 5. P to Q 3 (6) This move, although it is to be preferred to 7. Q to Q Kt 3, ought still to give Black the advantage. In fact, after Black's sixth move of B to K Kt 5, White must get a had game, play as he will. (c) Mr. Lowenthal thinks Kt takes Kt would have been a better move here. {d) Kt to K B 3 instead of the move made would have given Black a fine game. THE SCOTCH GAMBIT. 143 6. P to Q B 3 6. P takes P (a) 7. Q to Q Kt 3 7. Q Kt to E 4 8. B takes K B P (ch) 8. K to B sq 9. Q takes Q B P 9. K takes B 10. Q takes Kt 10. Kt to K B 3 (6) 11. P to K 5 11. Kt to K 5 12. P to Q Kt 4 12. B takes K B P (ch) 13. R takes B 13. Kt takes E 14. K takes Kt 14. E to K B sq 15. B to K Kt 5 15. Q to Q 2 16. Q to Q 5 (ch) 16. K to Kt 3 17. K to Kt sq 17. R takes Kt(6) 18. P takes E ■ 18. P to Q B 3 19. Q to Q 2 19. Q to K B 4 20. P to K B 4 20. P takes P 21. Q to Q 6 (ch) 21. B to K 3 22. Kt to Q 2 22. P to K E 3 23. BtoKE4 23. P takes P 24. Kt to K B 3 24. K to E 2 25. E to K sq 25. E to K sq 26. K to B 2 26. QtoKKta 27. E to K 4 27. B to Q 4 (cO 28. E takes K B P (e) 28. Q to K E 4 29. B to K Kt 3 29. E to K 3 30. Q to Q 8 30. Q to K Kt 3 31. Kt to Q 4 31. R to K sq 32. Q to Q 7 32. E to K 4 33. Q to K Kt 4 33. Q to Q Kt 8 34. Kt to K 2 34. P to K E 4 35. Q to K E 3 35. Q takes Q E P 36. g to K B sq 36. Q to Q 7 37. Q to Q Kt sq (ch) 37. K to E 3 (a) A bad move ! B to K Kt 5 is the correct play. (6) Kt to K 2 has been suggested as a better move at this juncture. (c) This was evidently a miscalculation. (i}\ Tf 27 28 B takes P „„ R takes B „» Q takes B ^ ' ■ P to K Kt 4 ■ P takes B ' R takes E ' Q takes Q „j Kt takes P (ch), &o. (e) E takes R would have lost the game: e.g., 28. 29. K to Esq 30 K to K 2 R takes R Q takes Kt (ch) Q to K R 8 (ch) ' Q takes K R P (ch), winning the piece, for if ; Btog:B2 P to B 6 (ch), winning Queen. 144 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. 38. R to K B 6 (ch) (/) 38. P takes E 39. B to K B 4 (ch) And Black resigned. Game V. — Between Messrs. Waite and Hampton. White (Mr. Wayte). Black (Mr. Hampton/ 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 2. Kt to K B 3 2. Kt to Q B 3 3. P to Q 4 3. P takes P 4. B to Q B 4 4. B to Q B 4 5. Castles 5. P to Q 3 6. P to Q B 3 6. P takes P 7. Q to Q Kt 3 7. Q to Q 2 8. Q takes B P 8. PtoB3 9. P to Q R 3 9. K Kt to K 2 10. P to Q Kt 4 10. B to Q Kt 3 11. Q to Q Kt 3 11. K R to B sq 12. Q Kt to Q B 3 12. Kt to Q 5 13. Kt takes Kt 13. B takes Kt 14. R to Q R 2 14. B takes Kt 15. Q takes B 15. P to Q Kt 3 16. R to Q B 2 (a) 16. P to Q B 3 17. P to Q R 4 17. B to Q Kt 2 18. B to K B 4 18. Kt to K Kt 3 19. B to K Kt 3 19. Kt to K 4 20. B to Q Kt 3 20. Castles 21. PtoKB4 21. Kt to K B 2 22. K R to Q sq • 22. Q to K 2 23. B to Q 5 23. PtoQB4 24. P takes P 24. QP takes P 25. B takes B (ch) 25. Q takes B 26. R takes R (ch) 26. R takes R 27. Q to Q B 4 27. R to Q 5 (b) 28. Q takes R, and wins (c). (/) A brilliant termlTiation ! {a) Mr. Lowenthal, in some elaborate analysis, shows that P to K B 4 would flave been a more forcible move in this position. (6) A gross blunder ! Kt to Q 3 would have given resource. (c) To anticipate any objections that might be made to a few of the games com- prised in the present collection, it may be stated that the " parties " in question have been selected more as illustrations of novel modes of attack and defence than as examples of accurate play. THE SCOTCH GAMBIT. 146 Game YL— Between Messrs. MoRPHY and Boden. White (Mr. Morohy). Black (Mr. Boden). 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 2. Kt to K B 3 2. Kt to Q B 3 3. P to Q 4 3. P takes P 4. B to Q B 4 4. B to Q B 4 5. Castles 5. P to Q 3 6. P to Q B 3 6. Kt to K B 3(a) 7. P takes P 7. B to Q Kt 3 a Q Kt to B 3 (6) 8. Castles (c) 9. P to Q 5 9. Kt to Q E 4 (d) 10. BtoQ 3 10. P to Q B 4 11. B to K Kt 5 11. PtoKR3 12. BtoKE4 12. BtoKKt5 13. P to K R 3 13. B to K R 4 14. P to K Kt 4 14. B to K Kt 3 15. Q to Q 2 15. E to K sq 16. Q R to K sq 16. B to Q B 2 17. Kt to Q Kt 5 17. KtoR2 18. Q B t^kes Kt 18. P takes B 19. Kt takes B 19. Q takes Kt 20. Q to B 3 20. Q to Q sq 21. Kt to R 4 21. P to Q Kt 3 22. P to K B 4 22. K to Kt 2 23. Kt takes B 23. P takes Kt 24. P to K 5 24. Q R to B sq 25. B to Q Kt sq 25. K to B 2 26. P to K 6 (ch) 26. K to Kt 2 27. Q to Q 3 27. P to K B 4 28. P takes P 28. Q to B 3 29. P takes P 29. Q takes Q Kt P 30. P to K B 5 30. Q to B 3 31. P to K 7 31. PtoQB5 (a) The position is now resolved into an ordinary Giuooo Piano. (J) In a game between the author and Mr. Wisker, precisely the same position occurred in the Centre Gambit, opening by the following transposition of moves: 1. PtoKi PtoK4 g P to Q B 3 Kt to K B 3 2. PtoQ4 P takes P Castle.s » 3. Ktto K B 3 4. B to Q B 4 B to Q B 4 Q Kt to B 3 P takes P „ Q Kt to B 3 P to Q 3 B to Kt 3 (c) Castling at this juncture is inferior to Q B to K Kt 5— a move adopted with success by Mr. Wisker. Mr. Boden in another game played B to K Kt 5, but failed to follow it up correctly. (d) Mr. Staunton, in his notes to this game in the "Praxis," disapproves of this move. L 146 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. 32. Q to K Kt 3 33. Q R to K 6 34. Q to B 2 35. P to B 6 (ch) 32. P to B 6 33. Q to Q 5 (ch) 34. Q takes CJ P And Black reaigned. DiAGEAM. BLACK. '1 Game Yll.—Betioeen Messrs. Morphy and Boden. White (Mr. Morphy). Black (Mr. Boden). 1. P to K 4 1. P to K4 2. Kt to K B 3 2. Kt to Q B 3 3. P to Q 4 3. P takes P 4. B to Q B 4 4. B to Q B 4 5. Castles 5. P to Q 3 6. P to Q B 3 6. Kt to K B 3 {a) 1. P takes P 7. B to Q Kt 3 8. Kt to Q B 3 8. B to K Kt 5( ft) {a) The game now resolves itself into the Giuoco Piano opening. (6) The best move and one which secures Black the advantage. Castling here is much inferior. {See noi;es to preceding Game.) THE SCOTCH GAMBIT. 147 9. B to K 3 10. Q to Q 3 (c) 11. KKttoQ2 12. B to Q Kt 3 13. PtoK5 14. P to K E 3 15. P to B 4 16. K to R 2 17. K R to K Kt sq 18. K B to B 2 19. K Kt to B 3 20. P to Q Kt 4 21. K Kt to Q 2 22. K Kt to Q Kt 3 23. Q Kt to Q g 4 24. Q Kt to Q B 5 25. Kt P takes Kt 26. K to R sq 27. K R to K B sq 28. Q takes Kt 29. Kt to Q 2 30. Kt to K B 3 31. QRtoQKtsq 32. B to R 4 33. B to B 2 34. K E to K Kt sq 35. P to K Kt 4 36. P to K Kt 5 37. P to K E 4 38. P takes P en passant 39. K R to Kt 2 40. Q R to K Kt sq 41. Kt to Kt 5 42. R P takes B 43. R to R 2 44. R to K Kt 3 45. Q R to E 3 9 . Castles 10 . Q to Q 2 (d) 11 . Q Kt to K 2 12 . P to Q 4 13 . Kt to K sq 14 . Q B to R 4 15 . PtoKB4 16. . P to Q B 3 17. K to E sq 18. B to K Kt 3 19. K Kt to Q B 2 20. K Kt to K 3 21. QKttoKKtsq 22. Q Kt to K R 3 23. QtoK2 24. Kt takes Kt 25. Kt to Kt 5 (oh) 26. Q to K R 5 27. Kt takes Q B 28. B to Q B a_ 29. Q toK 2 30. Q R to K sq 31. P to Q Kt 3 32. P to Q Kt 4 33. PtoQR4 34. B to Q sq 35. QtoK3 36. K to Kt sq 37. P to K R 4 38. K E to B 2 39. B to K E 4 40. Q takes R F 41. K B takes Kt 42. Q to K R sq 43. P to Kt 3 44. R to K R 2 45. Q R to K 2 (c) This is not a good more, Q to Q 2 would have heen better play. (See Game VIII.) id) Mr. Lowenthal thinks this is Black's best move. "We entertain quite a different opinion, and believe that -.^ , as adopted by Mr. ' jVTi lO m JVX u Wisker against ourselves, is a superior line of play, since it at once wrests the attack from White, (See next Game. > L i 148 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. 46. K to Kt sq 46. B to B Kt 5 47 R to R 6 -17. E takes R 48. E takes R 48. R to K E 2 (e) 49. E takes P (oh) (/) 49. K to B sq 50. R to R 6 . 50. E takes R 51. P takes R 51. Q takes P And the game was drawn. Game VIIL— Between Messrs. Gossip and Wiskbr. (Played in " The Glowworm Tourney.") White (Mr. Gossip.) Black (Mr. Wisker). The same position occurred in this game as in the preceding one between Messrs. Morphy and Boden, after White's tenth move, the moves being merely transposed as follows : — 1 PtoK 4 2 PtoQ4 3 Kt to K B 3 4 B to QB4 ■ P to K 4 ■ P takes P ' B to Q B 4 ' Q Kt to B 3 g P to Q B 3 g Castles ^ P t akes P g Kt to Q B 3 ■ Kt to K B 3 ■ P to Q 3 ' B to Q Kt 3 ' B to K Kt 5 g BtoK 3 ^Q QtoQ3 Castles (e) Q to K Kt 2 is the correct play. (f) P to K 6 instead would have won the game off-hand. THE SCOTCH GAMBIT. 149 Diagram Showing the position of the forces after White's tenth move. BLACK. j--...v,,;;/^ i i ij ^ WHITE. 11. Q to Q 2 12. P takes P 13. P takes B 14. B to K Kt 5 15. K to R sq 16. P to K B 4 17. Q B takes Kt 18. Q R to K sq 19. K to K 5 10. Kt to Q Kt 5 (a) 11. P to Q 4 12. Q B takes Kt 13. Q Kt takes Q P 14. Q to Q 2 15. Qto KB4(6)' 16. P to K R 3 17. Kt takes B 18. Q R to Q sq 19. Q to K R 6 (a) We think this far better than Q to Q 2 — the move recommended It M.t. Lowenthal here. (J) Black's game may now be taken for choice. 150 THE CHESS-PLAYEU'S MANUAL. Diagram. Position after Black's 19tli move, White having to play. BrjAOK. f t. '/J^^M „„,„P^^'^'' „Mm,m//''^''"'''''''''''^' 20. Q to K 3 (c) 21. Kt to Q 5 (tZ) 22. Q to K Kt 3 23. B P takes Q 24. Q P takes Kt 25. R to K sq 26. Kt takes B (e) 27. P to K B 5 28. B to Q Kt 3 20. Q to K R 5 21. Ktto K Kt 5 22. Q takes Q 23. Kt takes R 24. K R to K sq 25. P to Q B 3 26. P takes Kt 27. P to Q Kt 4 28. K to B sq (c) This is the only possible move to avoid loss {see, Diagram above). If 20. R to K 3 21. i Q takes R 22. Bt?:kes_Q ^^^ ^^^^y ^^ Q K takes Q P Q takes K R (ch) B takes Q a pawn ahead and a better position. As the position is remarkably interesting, we append a Diagram, showing the state of the Game after Black's 19th move, (ti) A gross error. Q to K Kt 3 was the correct move, but even that would nave given Black the advantage -. e.g., 21. ^ ^° ^ ^* ^ 22. B P takes g ^_ Q takes Q B takes Q P (c) Kt to Kt 4 would perhaps have given more resource. THE SCOTCH GAMBIT. 151 29. PtoK6 30. E to K 5 31. B toB2 32. BtoK4 33. R to Q B 5 34. B tcakes Q Kt P 35. B to K B 3 36. E to Q B 8 (ch) 29. P to Q B 4 30. P to Q B 5 31. RtoQ 7 32. R takes Q Kt P 33. P takes K P 34. R to Q sq 35. K R to Q 7 36. K to K 2, and wins. Game IX. — Between Messrs. Kolisoh and Maczdski. White (Mr. Maczuski). 1. PtoK4 2. Kt to K B 3 3. P to Q 4 4. Kt takes P (a) 5. Kt to Q B 3 6. Q to Q 3 7. Kt takes Q Kt 8. B to Q 2 9. B takes B QtoQ4 Castles (Q R) P to K B 4 BtoQ2 14. Q to Q 8 (ch) (d) 15. B to K Kt 5 (double ch) 16. R mates 10. 11. 12. 13. Black (Mr. Kolisch). 1. P to K 4 2. Kt to Q B 3 3. P takes P 4. Q to K R 5 (6) 5. B to Q Kt 5 6. Kt to K B 3 (c) 7. Q P takes Kt 8. B takes Kt 9. Kt takes K P 10. Q to K 2 U. Q to K Kt 4 (oh) 12. Q takes P (ch) 13. Q to K Kt 5 14. K takes Q 15. K moves Game X.— Between Mr. Rosenthal and Mr. G. B. Fraser and Mr. W. N. Walker, in Consultation,. (From " The Illustrated London News.") White (The Allies). Black (Mr. R.). 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 2. Kt to K B 3 2. Kt to Q B 3 (a) This is stronger than B to Q B 4, which gives the second player the advantage unless White turns the game into the Giuoco Piano by moving P to Q B 3 on his next move. (6) This move was invented by Mr. Pulling, and, we believe, ought, with the best play, to ensure the advantnge to Black. (c) B takes Q Kt is better play. (d) A charming termination. 152 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. 3. P to Q 4 4. Kt takes Q P 5. Kt to K B 3 (a) 6. B to K 2 7. P to Q B 3 8. Castles 9. B to K Kt 5 10. Q Kt to Q 2 /•ll. B takes Kt 12. Kt to K 4 13. B to Q 3 14. Kt takes B 15. Kt to K Kt 5 16. Q to K R 5 17. B to K R 7 (ch) 18. Q R to K sq 19. B to Q Kt sq 20. Q to K R 4 21. Q to K Kt 3 22. P takes Kt 23. R to K 3 24. K R to K sq 25. B takes B 26. Q takes K Kt P 27. Q takes K P . 28. K R to K 2 29. Q to K 5 30. R to K Kt 3 3. P takes P 4. Q to K R 5 5. Q takes K P (ch) 6. B to Q Kt 5 (ch) (6) 7. B to Q B 4 8. Kt to K B 3 9. Castles 10. Q to K Kt 3 11. Q takes B 12. Q to K 2 13. P to Q 4 14. Q takes Kt 15. P to K R 3 (c) 16. Kt to K 4 17. K to Rsq 18. P to K B 3 19. B to K Kt 5 20. B P takes Kt 21. Kt to B 6 (ch) 22. B takes P 23. P to K Kt 5 24. B to K 5 25. P takes B 26. R to K B 4 27. Q R to K B sq 28. R to B 5 29. Q to Q B 5 30. Q to KB 2 The game was here abandoned as a drawn battle. (a) This is the new variation proposed by Mr. Fraser. The customary move, as most of our readers are aware, is to play the Kt to Q Kt 5, the result of which, unless great care is shown, is to give some advantage to the second player. How far, if at all, Mr. Fraser's deviation is an improvement upon the old course it would be premature to say. For the present, we must leave it to speak for itself. (b) In a game which follows, between Mr. Fraser and Mr. Rosenthal, where the same variation is adopted, Mr. Rosenthal now played P to Q 3, instead of checking with the Bishop. (c) It will be admitted, we believe, by all good players that the Allies have at this point a superiority of position which more than counterbalances their minority in Pawns. THE SCOTCH GAMBIT. 153 Game XI. — Between Messrs. playiiig seven other (From " The G. B. Frasee and Rosenthal, the latter Games simultaneously at the time. Illustrated London News.") White (Mr. Fraser). Black (Mr. Rosenthal), L P to K 4 1. PtoK4 2. Kt to K B 3 2. Kt to Q B 3 3. P to Q 4 3. P takes P i. Kt takes Q P 4. Q to K R 5 5. Kt to K B 3 5. Q takes K P (ch) 6. B to K 2 6. P to Q 3 (a) 7. Kt to Q B 3 7. QtoK2 8. B to K Kt 5 8. P to K B 3 9. B to K B 4 9. BtoK3 10. Castles 10. Castles (Q's side) 11. Kt to Q 4 11. Kt takes Kt 12. Q takes Kt 12. P to Q Kt 3 13. P to Q E 4 13. P to Q B 4 14. B to Q R 6 (ch) (6) 14. K to Kt sq 15. Q to Q 3 15. B to Q B sq 16. P to Q R 5 16. B takes B 17. Q takes B 17. Q to Q Kt 2 18. P takes P 18. Q takes P 19. Q to Q 3 19. K to Kt 2 20. R to Q R 3 And White won the game in a few more moves. Game XII. — Between Mr. Staunton and An Amateur. (From " The Illustrated London News.") White (Mr. Staunton). Black (Mr. ). PtoK4 Kt to K B 3 1. P to K 4 2. Kt to Q B 3 Notes by the Editor of " The Illustrated London News." {a) It may be questioned whether this move, confining the King's Bishop, as it does confine him for some time, is the best reply at this moment. [b) Q to K 4 n'ould also have been a winning move. For suppose — 14. Q to K 4 14. P to Q 4 (c) 15. B to Q R 6 (ch) 15. K to Q 2 16. Kt takes QP 16. Q to B 2 and White gives Mate in three moves. (c) If he play K to Kt sq, or K B 2, then 15. B to K B 3 wins. 154 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. 3. P to Q 4 3. P takes P 4. Kt takes P 4. Q to K R 5 5. Kt to Q Kt 5 (a) 5. B to Q B 4 (J) 6. Q to K B 3 6. Kt to Q 5 7. Kt takes Q B P (oh) 7. K to Q sq 8. Q to K B 4 8. Kt takes Q B P (ch) 9. K to Q sq 9. Q takes Q 10. B takes Q 10. Kt takes Q R 11. Kt takes Q R 11. P toQ 3 12. Kt to Q B 3 12. Kt to K 2 13. B to Q B 4 13. B to K Kt 5 (ch) (c) 14. P to K B 3 14. B to K R 4 15. K to Q 2 15. KtoQ2 16. P to Q Kt 4 16. B takes P lY. R to Q Kt sq 17. B takes Kt (oh) 18. K takes B 18. R takes Kt 19. R takes Q Kt P (ch) 19. K to Q sq 20. B takes Q P 20, Kt to Q B 3 21. B takes K B P 21. B takes B 22. R takes B 22. R to Q B sq 23. K to Q Kt 2 23. Kt to Q B 7 24. R to K B 8 (ch) 24. KtoQ 2 25. R takes R 25. K takes R 26. K takes Kt And White must win. Notes by the Editor of " The Illustrated London News." {a) The point in dispute was whether this move, introdnced by Mr. Horwitz, could be successfully adopted in reply to the previous move of Black— Q to K R 5. The general opinion, both here and in Germany, appeared to be that it could not ; but the author of the "Handbook" thought differently, and, in support of his view, published the series of moves which forms the basis of the present little game. (6) It may be well to remark, for the benefit of the uninitiated, that if the second player now take the K Pawn instead of playing out his Bishop, he obtains an inferior position. For suppose — 5. 5. Q takes K P (ch) 6. B to K 2 fi. K to Q sq If he play B to Q 3 for the purpose of saving his Q B Pawn, "White may capture the Bishop with his Queen. 7. Castles 7. P to Q R 3 8. Q Kt to Q B 3 8. Q to K sq 9. Kt to Q 4, &c. (c) This appears to be his best play. If he move P to Q Kt 3, White answers with B to Q 5, &c. THE SCOTCH GAMBIT. 155 Game XIII. — Between Mr. Staunton and one of the Best Players of the Age (From "The Illustrated London News.") White (Mr. Staunton). Black (Mr. ). 1 PtoK4 1. P to K 4 2. Kt to K B 3 2. Kt to Q B 3 3. P to Q 4 3. P takes P 4. B to Q B 4 4. Kt to K B 3 5. B to K Kt 5 5. P to K E 3 6. B takes Kt 6. Q takes B 7. Castles 7. B to Q B 4 8. P to Q B 3 8. P to Q 6 9. P to K 5 9. Q to K B 5 10. Q takes P 10. Castles 11. P to Q Kt 4 11. B to Q Kt 3 12. P to Q R 4 12. P to Q R 4 13. P to K Kt 3 13. Q to K Kt 6 14. PtoQKt5 14. Kt to K 2 15. Q Kt to Q 2 15. Kt to K Kt 3 16. K to E, sq 16. P to Q 4 (a) 17. B takes Q P 17. B to K 3 18. B takes Q Kt P 18. Q R to Q sq 19. Q to K 4 19. Q to K R 4 20. Q to K 2 20. B to K Kt 5 21. Q E to Q sq 21. K R to K sq 22. Kt to Q B 4 (6) 22. R takes R 23. E takes R 23. Kt takes P 24. Q Kt takes Kt 24. R takes Kt 25. Q to Q 3 (c) 25. R to K B 4 26. Kt to K R 4 26. R takes K B P 27. Q to Q 8 (ch) 27. K to R 2 28 BtoK4(oh) 28. P to K B 4 (a) Bold but good, since it enables him to extricate his forces, and bring them at once into action. (6) The game ia peculiarly critical, and proportionably interesting at this stage. (e) If he had tiken the Kook with his Queen, Black would obviously have won with ease by taking the Kt, checking. (d) Here the position is extremely complicated and difficult, and this move of the Kt appeaBs to be the only possible way to save the game. 156 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. 29. B to Q 5 29. B to K B 6 (oh) 30. Kt takes B 30. R takes K B P (ch) 31. Kt takes B 3^- Q takes R (oh) K to Kt 2 32. Q to K 7 (ch) K to R 3 33. Q to K B 4 (ch) 32 33 34. Q to K R 4 And Black resigns. Game XIV. — Between Messrs . Cochrane and Staunton. White (Mr. Cochrane). Black (Mr. Staunton). 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 2. Kt to K B 3 2. Kt to Q B 3 3. P to Q 4 3. Kt takes P 4. Kt takes P 4. Kt to K 3 5. B to Q B 4 5. P to Q B 3 {a) 6. Castles 6. Kt to K B 3 7. Kt to Q B 3 (6) 7. B to Q Kt 5 8. P to K B 4 8. Q to Q R 4 9. Kt takes K B P (c) 9. K takes Kt («) 'Tlireatening, if White take the Kt, to check with the Queen at Q R 4, and then to capture the Kt. It is not, however, a first-class move, for, if the first player does not take the Kt— as in the present game — Black's position is a good deal restricted. (b) Mr. Cochrane at this point, in some after games, got up a beautiful attack, as follows : — 7. Kt takes K B P 7. K takes Kt 8. B takes Kt (ch) 8. K takes B 9. P to K 5 9. Kt to Q 4 10. P to Q B 4 10. Kt to Q Kt 3 11. K to R sq 11. P to K R 4 12. P to K B 4, &c. (c) Capitally played. THE SCOTCH GAMBIT. 157 10. P to K B 5 11. K to E sq 12. P takes Kt (oh) 13. Q to K R 5 (ch) 14. Q to K R 4 15. P takes B (d) 16. B to K R 6, and wins. 10. Q to Q B 4 (ch) 11. Q takes B 12. Q takes P 13. P to K Kt 3 14. B takes Kt 15. R to K B sq Game XV. — Between Messrs. Gossip and Kling. (From " The Chess Player's Magazine.") White (Mr. Gossip). Black (Mr. Kling), 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 2. Kt to K B 3 2. Kt to Q B 3 3. P to Q 4 3. P takes P 4. B to Q B 4 4. P to Q 3 (a) 5. Kt takes P (b) 5. Kt to K B 3 6. Kt to Q B 3 6. B to K 2 7. Castles 7. Q Kt to K 4 8. B to Q Kt 3 8. Castles 9. P to K B 4 9. Kt to Q B 3 10. K to R sq 10. B to Q 2 11. P to K R 3 11. Kt takes Kt 12. Q takes Kt 12. Kt to K R 4 13. R to K B 3 13. P to Q B 3 14. P to K Kt 4 14. Kt to K B 3 15. P to K Kt 5 15. Kt to K R 4 U. B to K 3 16. Q to B 2 17. P to K B 5 17. P to Q 4 (d) Quite useless ; the Kt cannot he saved. (a) This move resolves the Game into a variation of Philidor's Defence. Either Kt to K B 3 or B to Q B 4 are preferable. (J) P to Q B 3 is recommended by Staunton here. The move in the text has, however, the recommendation of being adopted by Paulsen with success. 158 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. 18. K to Kt 2 (c) 19. Kt takes P 20. Q to Q B 3 21. B takes Q B P 22. B takes B 23. K to B sq 18. P takes K P 19. P to Q B 4 20. B to Q B 3 21. B takes Kt 22. Q to Kt 6 (ch) 23. B takes R, and wins. (c) Hastily played. "White had now a wimiing position, and could have won easily by playing 18. P to K 5. As the position is highly interesting, we subjoin a Diagram showing the state of the game, with the following interesting variations, from "The Chess Player's Magazine." BLACK. Suppose 18. P to K 5 19. Q to K R 4 20. Q takes Kt 21. P to Kt 6, and wins. (») 20. Kt takes P 21. Kt takes B (ch) 22. P to B 6 28. K B takes P, and wins. 18. P to Q B 4 (best) 19. P to Q 5 or (a) 20. P takes Kt or B 19. P to Q B 5 20. Q takes K P 21. Q takes Kt 22. Q to Q 3 THE SCOTCH UAMBIT. 159 Game XYl.— Between Messrs. Paulsen and Saalbach. White (Mr. Saalbach). Black (Mr. Paulsen). 1. P to K 4 1. Pto K4 2. Kt to K B 3 2. KttoQB3 3. PtoQ4 3. P takes P 4. KttakesP(a) 4. B to Q B 4 (i) 5. B to K 3 5. Q to K B 3 6. P to Q B 3 6. K Kt to K 2 7. B to K 2 (c) 7. P to Q 4 {d) 8. P takes P (e) 8. Kt takes P 9. Castles 9. Kt takes B 10. P takes Kt 10. Q to K R 3 11. B to Q Kt 5 n. Q takes P (ch) 12. K to K sq 12. Castles 13. Kt takes Kt 13. P- takes Kt 14. B takes P 14. R to Q Kt sq 15. P to Q Kt 3 (/) 15. R to Q Kt 3 16. B to K B 3 16. R to K R 3 17. Q to Q 2 17. Q toK4 18. P to Kt 3 18. B to K R 6 19. Q to K sq 19. Q to K B 3, and wins. Game XVII. Played hy Correspondence between the Clubs op London and Vienna. White (Vienna). Black (London). 1. P to K 4 2. Kt to K B 3 3. P to Q 4 4. Kt takes P 1. P to K 4 2. Kt to Q B 3 3. P takes P 4. Q to K R 5 (a) Stronger than B to Q B 4. (See Analysis, pp. 124—128.) (J) This is a less hazardous mode of play than Q to K R 5. (c) Another move may be played here, viz., P to K B 4. If Black then replies by 7. P to Q 4, White gets the advantage thus : 8. 10. Kt takes B and wins. (d) Preferable to Ca-stling. (e) The correct move here is B to Q 3 (/ ) Again Q to B 2 would have been better. Pto K 5 g P to K B 5 Q to K Kt 3 ■ Q B takes P 160 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. 5. Kt to Kt 5 5. B to Kt 5 (ch) 6. B to Q 2 6. Q takes P (oh) 7. B to K 2 7. K to Q sq 8. Castles 8. B takes B 9. Kt takes B 9. Q to K B 5 10. P to Q B 4 10. Kt to K B 3 11. Kt to K B 3 11. Kt to K Kt 5 12. P to K Kt 3 12. Q to B 3 13. Kt to Q B 3 13. R to K sq 14. Kt to Q 2 14. Kt to K R 3 15. Q Kt to K 4 15. Q to Kt 3 16. B to R 5 16. Q to B 4 17. B to B 3 17. P to Q Kt 3 18. B to Kt 2 18. B to Kt 2 19. Q to Q 2 19. P to B 3 20. Q R to Q sq 20. Kt to B 2 21. KEtoKsq 21. QRtoKtsq 22. P to K B 4 22. Kt to Q E 4 23. Q to Q 3 23. Kt to Q 3 24. P to Q Kt 3 24. B takes Kt 25. Kt takes B 25. R to K 2 26. K to R sq 26. Q Kt to Kt 2 27. P to Q Kt 4 27. P to Q R 4 28. P to Q R 3 28. P takes P 29. P takes P 29. Q to K 3 30. P to Q B 5 30. P takes P 31. Q to Kt sq 31. Q to B 5 32. P takes P 32. Kt takes Kt 33. R takes Kt 33. R takes R 34. B takes R 34. K to Q B sq 35. B to Q 5 35. Q takes P 36. Q takes P 36. Q to B sq 37. Q to Q 3 37. Q to K sq 38. Q to Q B 3 38. Kt to Q 3 39. B to B 3 39. Q to K 3 40. R to Q B sq 40. Kt to Kt 4 41. Q to Q 2 41. P to Q B 3 42. R to K sq 42. Q to K B 2 43. Q to Kt 4 43. Q to Q E 7 THE SCOTCH GAMBIT. Black (London). 161 White (Vienna). Position of the above game after Black's forty-third move. White to move. 44. B to Kt 2 45. B. to Q Kt sq 46. E to Q B sq 44. K to B 2 45. R to Q R sq (c) 46. Q to K 7 Notes by Messrs. Steinitz and Potter. Black's ninth move has the merit of preventing the immediate development of the first player's attack, and compels the latter, sooner or later, to play P to K Kt 3, thereby wpakening the Pawns on the King's side. The utmost that White could have obtained by taking the Knight on his 24th move would have been to recover the Pawn lo-st, in which case. Black's position for the Kt takes Kt „, K to R sq Q to B 4 (eh) ' R takes R (ch) end game we thought preferable, e.g. : 24. 26. B takes R 27. K takes B no Q takes R P Q to B sq 29. B takes B (ch) Q takes Kt followed by K to B 2 with the better game. (c) By this move we consider we obtained a clear winning position. P to Kt 3 P to B 3, 162 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. 47. B to B sq 47. Q to B 6 (ch) 48. B to Kt 2 48. Q to K 6 49. R to K sq 49. Q to B 7 And the game was given up as drawn, Vienna having resigned the other game. London, however, has much the best of the encounter, and had the game been played out would in all probability have won. CHAPTER VI. THE KNIGHT'S GAME OF EUY LOPEZ. Tms is one of the most important offshoots of the King's Knight's opening. It was first seriously analysed in 1561 by Euy Lopez, a Spanish author, whose treatise was translated into Italian by Domenico Tarsia, and pubhshed in Venice in 1584. Although this form of attack had been previously noticed by Damiano and Lucena, Euy Lopez was the first to subject it to a regular, although incorrect, analysis. Hence it has been styled " The Spanish Opening." It is perfectly sound, and leads to a more enduring attack than most of the other forms of the King's Knight's Game — in fact, with the best possible play, the second player cannot do more than draw the game. GAME THE FIEST. WHITE. BLACK. 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 2. Kt to K B 3 2. Kt to Q B 3 3. B to Q Kt 5 This move constitutes the Euy Lopez attack. Black has no less than ten different replies at his disposition — viz., P to Q E 3 (which is now generally admitted to be his best move), Kt to 'K B 8 (recommended by Heydebrand and the German school), B to Q B 4, P to Q 3, Q to K B 3, K Kt to K 2, Kt to Q 5, P to K B 4, B to Q 3, and Q to K 2. M 2 164 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. The two first are his best moves, while the eight others are more or less inferior. We wUl now examine the consequences of the two first lines of defence in Games the First and Second. For the eight other modes of play at the disposal of the second player, -see Games the Third, Fourth, Fifth, Sixth, Seventh, Eighth, Ninth, and Tenth respectively. 3. P to Q R 3 This move is considered preferable to 3. Kt to K B 3, because Black can sometimes subsequently play P to Q Kt 4 with advantage, which he could not do without first dislodging the hostile Bishop. 4. B to Q R 4 (best) 4. Kt to K B 3 (best) ,jf ^ g PtoB3 g B to Kt 3 ^ PtoQ4 ■BtoQB4 ■ptoQKt4 'PtoQa 'P takes Q P P takes P g B to Q 5 ^^ Kt to B 3_ ^j B to K 3 B to Kt 3 K Kt to K 2 Q B to Kt 5 B takea Kt 12. P takes B , and the " Handbuch" considers the game even. 5. Castles (or Variations I., II., III., IV., V.) Castling is preferred by Lowenthal, but White may play 5. P to Q 4, 5. P to Q 3, 5. Q Kt to B 8, 5. Q to K 2, or 5. P to Q B 3. {See Variations.) 5. B to K 2, or (A.) (B.) e. P to Q 4 White may also play here 6. R to K sq, or 6. Q Kt to B 3, which are both good moves, but hardly so strong as the move in the text, in our opinion, e.g : — afflrstlv 6 ^*°^'1 7 ^t°Kt3 P to Q B 3 ^ •^ ■ ■ P to Q Kt 4 ■ P to Q 3 ■ B to K Kt 5 g Bto Q5 ^Q B takes Kt ^^ P to Q 4 ^^ P takes P ■ QtoQ2 ■ QtlikesB " P takes P ' Castles (K E), and the game is about even. „ J, „ Q Kt to B 3 If secondly : 6. ^ -— - — - „ „ , P to Q Kt 4, or 6. Castles — even game. THE KNIGHT'S GAME OF RUY LOPEZ. 165 Messrs. Lowenthal and Medley, however, pronounce 6. R to K sq to be White's best move. {See " The Transactions of the British Chess Association, 1868-9," pp. 103, 104.) 6. P takes P 7. P to K 5 7. Kt to K 5 8. B takes Kt (best) fif „ Kt takes P „ Q takes Kt , ,, ^" ^' KTt^ Kt ^- KttoQB4' ^"""^ '^' same is pronounced equal, by the " Chess Player's Chronicle." (See " C. P. C," December, 1873, p. 367.) 8. Q P takes B Q takes P 9. B to K B 4 Q Kt to B 3 10. B to Q B 4 Q takes Q (ch) 11. R takes Q Kt to K E 4 IS. Kt takes Kt 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. Kt takes B And the game is even. We append a diagram showing the position. BLACK. WHITE. 166 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. (A.) 5. P to Q Kt 4 6. B to Kt 3 6. Kt takes P Lowenthal advises 6. B to K 2 here for Black. If Black play 6. P to Q 4, the proper continuation is — • ^ P takes P g RtoKsq^ g P to K R 3 jq Q takes B ■ Kt takes P ' B to K Kt5 " B takes Kt with the better game. 7. EtoKsq 7. PtoQ4 8. P to Q 3 8. Kt to Q B 4 9. Kt takes P 9. Kt takes Kt 10. P to K B 4 10. B to K 2 11. P takes Kt 11. Castles Even game. (B.) 5. Kt takes P This is indicated as Black's best move by the " Schach- zeitung." It has also the additional recommendation of being favoured by Herr Steinitz. Black's Pawns on Queen's side will be found very strong ultimately. 6. R to K sq 6. Kt to Q B 4 7. B takes Kt 7, Q P takes B 8. Kt takes P 8. B to K 2 And White retains the advantage of the move, without, how- ever, any marked superiority. On his sixth move in this ^ variation. White may play in lieu of 6. R to K sq, 6. P to Q 4, but that will not gain him any advantage, e.g. : — g PtoQ4 P to Q Kt 4, &c. (See Illustrative Game XXII. between Messrs. Steinitz and Bird.) THE KNIGHT'S GAME OF RUY LOPEZ. 167 Vabiation (I.) On White's Fifth Move. Diagram. Diagram showing the position, White having to play. BLACK. ■ * „4i, * m i i T i , ^^/y^^jj^^/-j n ?^ ^p ^///'/^?mx. II^^L^ IJ M V' _3 Let the student refer to the above diagram for this and the four following variations. 5. P to Q 4 6. P to K 6 6. P takes P If 6. Castles, se« Illustrative Game IX. 6. Kt to K 5 (If 6. Kt to Q 4 Castles B to Q B 4 g P to Q B 3 Castles 168 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. P takes P ^Q B to Kt 3 jj B to K Kt5 ■ B to Kt 3 ■ K Kt to K 2 ' Q to K sq,- and White has the better game. 7. Castles 7. Kt to Q B 4 8. B takes Kt 8. Q P takes B 9. Kt or Q takes P And the game is even. The " Handbuch " continues the game thus : Kt takes P .q Kt takes Kt ^^ Q to K 2 ^^ Kt to B 3 ■ Ktto'K"3 ■ B takes Kt ' B to Q B 4 ' Q to K 2^ .„ Kt to K 4 ^^ BtoK3 ^^ Q takes B, &c. ■ P to K K 3 ■ B takes B « Variation (II.) On White's Fifth Move. 5. P to Q 3 This move is condemned by Mr. Lowenthal, as being of a defensive, in place of an aggressive character. It is, how- ever, favoured by Anderssen, Zukertort, Blackburne, and most of the leading German players, and appears to give White a good game. 6. P to Q Kt 4 (If5.__-— 6. P^°QS3 7.BtoKi3^^^^ ^ BtoQB4 PtoQKt4 ' ° 6. B to Kt 3 6. P to Q 3 7. P to Q B 3 7. B to K 2 And the game is even. (See Illustrative Games V. and VI.) " La Strategic " makes Black play 6. B to Q B 4 in the above THE KNIGHT'S GAME OF RUY LOPEZ. 169 variation, in lieu of 6. P to Q 3, and continues the game thus : 6. B to Q B 4 7. P to Q B 3 7. PtoQ3 8. PtoQ4 8. B to Kt 3 9. P takes P 9. P takes P 10. Q takes Q (ch) 10. Kt takes Q 11. Kt takes K P 11. Kt takes K P 12. BtoQ5 18. B to Kt 2 And declares the positions to he equal. Variation (III.) On White's Fifth Move. 5. Q Kt to B 3 This move is censured by Mr. Lowenthal (see " Morphy's Games, Bohn's edition, p. 381) ; but, we think, without suf- ficient reason. In support of our opinion, we refer our readers to Illustrative Games VII. and VIII., at the end of the present chapter. We believe the Knight may be brought out without any disadvantage, although this Une of play is doubt- less inferior to 5. Castles, or 5. P to Q 4, both of which are more immediately attacking moves. Let the student refer once more to the last diagram. 6. B to Q B 4 (best) 6. P to Q 3 6. P to K E 3 Black is compelled to play this to prevent the pinning of hit Knight by the Q B. 7. B to K 3 7. B takes B 8. P takes B 8. P to Q 3 9. Castles 9. Castles 170 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. 10. B takes Kt 10. P takes B 11, Q to K sq 11- B to K 3 And the game is perfectly even. Vaeiation (IV.) On White's Fifth Move. 5. Q to K 2 This move, although recommended by Wormald, is also considered by most authorities to be inferior to CastUng, or P to Q 4. It may, however, be adopted with perfect safety, leading to an even game. 5. P to Q Kt 4 6. B to Kt 3 6. B to K 2, or (C) (D) Here the leading authorities are at variance. Mr. Wisker prefers the move in the text, while Herr Zukertort and Mr. Staunton advise 6. B to Q B 4. The latter authority does not even notice the move of B to K 2. We entirely concur in the opinion of Mr. Wisker in giving the preference to 6. B to K 2 for the second player in this variation of the Euy Lopez, for the reasons which he gives in " The Westminster Papers," April, 1873 — viz., " That the B at King's second covers the King's file, which is often opened, and that it prevents further the King's Knight being pinned disadvan- tageously by the hostile Bishop." 7. P to Q E 4 ,j£ ij, P to Q B 3 g PtoQR 4 g P takes P ^ ■ P to Q 3 ■ Q E to Kt sq " P takes P . „ P to Q 4 n P takes P j t>i i 10. — — 11. 19 , and Black P takes P B to K Kt 5 followed hj ^^- Castles has no inferiority. (See also Illustrative Games XVIII. and XIX.) 7. R to Q Kt sq 8. P takes P 8. P takes P THE KNIGHT'S GAME OF EUY LOPEZ. 17] 9. P to Q 3 10. P to B 3 9. P to Q 3 10. Castles And Black has a very good game. We append a diagram, showing the position after Black's tenth move in the above main variation. BLACK. ^ WHITJ!. (C.) 6. B to Q B 4 7. P to Q K 4 7. Q R to Kt sq 8. P takes P 8. P takes P 9. Q Kt to B 3 9. P to Q Kt 5 10. Kt to Q 5 10. Castles 11. Castles 11. P to Q 3 12. P to K R 3 IS. B to K 3 And the game is declared even by the German " Handbook." Staunton thinks White has the advantage. 172 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. If 7. Kt to Kt 5 Kt to Q 5 ' (D.) B takes P (ch) KtoK2 6. B to Q Kt 2 g Q to Q sq P to K E 3, and Black 7. Castles 8. Kt to B 3 9. P to Q 3 10. B to K 3 11. B takes Kt IS. Kt to Q sq 13. Kt to Q 2 14. P to K E 3 And Black has the advantage. {Vide annexed diagram.) 7. B to Q B 4 8. P to Q 3 9. Castles 10. Kt to Q 5 11. P takes Kt 12. E to K sq 13. Q to Q 2 14. E to K 2 BLACK. '"€ IVW4 Wf m^ WM ^S i 1 i WM./ ^^.^^^ - W/^M. s £S , fi :2^.til^ S w ^ K? &-=1 WHITE. THE KNIGHT'S GAME OP RUY LOPEZ. 173 Black's sixth move, B to Q Kt 2, is favoured by Herr Zukertort, who adopted it with success at the Hamburgh Tournament. Variation (V.) On White's Fifth Move. 6. P to Q B 3 ^ ■ B to Q B 4 P to Q^, B, to K sq, &c. 6. Q to K 2 7. B takes Kt 8. Kt takes P White replies with 6, 5. Kt takes P Castles Even game. followed by 6. Kt to Q 3 7. Q P takes B 8. B to K 2 GAME THE SECOND. WHITE. 1. P to K 4 2. Kt to K B 3 3. B to Q Kt 5 BLACK. 1. P to K 4 2. Kt to Q B 3 3. Kt to K B 3 This move was formerly considered best for Black, and was recommended by some authorities as preferable to P tp Q R 3. Now, however, P to Q R 3 is generally considered best for the second player. 3, B to Q B 4 is inferior, since White, by playing 4. P to Q B 3, gets his Pawns weU established in the centre. (See Illustrative Game XII.) 4, Castles (best) White can also play 4. P to Q 4, with a good game ; e.g. — PtoQ4 Q Kt takes P Kt takes K t P takes Kt 6. PtoKS Kt to K 5' and White 174 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. has a strong attack. (See Games XIII. and XIV.) The " Handbuch " gives the following : — P to Q 4 ^ P to K 5 g Pasties „ Kt takes P o r (a) ■ P takes P ■ Kt to K 5 ' B to K 2 ' Kt takes Kt g Q takes Kt g P to K B 4 ^q Q to K 4 ^^ B to Q 3 ■ Kt to Q B 4 ■ Kt to K 3 ' Castles ' P to K Kt 3 12. P to K B 5 , &c. (a) ,. R to K sq g Kt^takes P „ Q takes Kt ,q B to K 3 " KttoQB4 'Kt takes Kt 'Castles " P to Q 4 ^j Kt to Q B 3 ^2 B to K B sq ^g Q to K Kt 4 ^^ Q R to Q sq ■ptoQB3 'KttoKS 'PtoQS ■ptoQB4 15. B t o Q B sq , &c. 4. Kt takes P Black can also move here 4. P to Q R 3 ; e.g. — 4 5 B to Q B 4 g PtoQ4 ^ P to K 5 ■ P to Q R 3 ■ B to K 2 ' P takes P ' Kt to K 5 Even game. The defence of 4. B to Q 3 is far from commendable. 5. P to Q 4 (If 5 ^ to K sq g Kt tak es K P „ R takes K t (uh) ' Kt to Q 3 ■ Kt takes Kt " B to K 2 g P to Q 4 g R takes Kt , even game.) Kt takes B 5. B to K 2 6. P to Q 5 6. Kt to Q 3 (best) (If 6. 7 Kt takes P R to K gq Kt to Kt sq ■ Castles ' Kt to K B3 „ Kt to Q B 3 j„ Kt to K B 3 , and White has a good game. ■ PtoQ3 7. B to K 2 7. P to K 5 8. P takes Kt 8. P takes Kt THE KNIGHT'S GAME OF RUY LOPEZ. 175 9. P takes Q P (ch) 10. B takes P 11. B to K B 4 12. Q Kt to B 3 13.'KttoQ5 9. B takes P 10. Castles 11. B to K B 4 13. Q to Q 2 13. B to K 3 And White has somewhat the better position {vide diagram). Diagram. BLACK. For White's seventh move in the main variation the " Handbuch " gives — 11. y P takes Kt g P to Q B 4 ■ Kt takes B ' Kt to Q 5 P takes P B takes P, even game. Q Kt takes Kt , „ Q takes P P takes Kt ' Castles 176 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. GAME THE THIED. WHITE. BLACK. 1. PtoK4 1. PtoK4 2. Kt to K B 3 2. Kt to Q B 3- 3. B to Q Kt 5 3. B to Q B 4 This defence is now unanimously condemned by the best authorities. It was formerly preferred by Calvi, but permits White to get up a strong attack in the centre, as follows : — 4. P to Q B 3 4. Q to K B 3 This defence is recommended by Ponziani. ,j£ . g P to Q 4 „ P to K 5 „ Castles * ■ Kt to K B 3 ■ P takes P ' Kt to K 5 ' P to Q 4 g P takes P en passant „ B to K Kt 5 , „ B takes K t (ch) K Kt takes Q P " P to K B 3 ' P takes B 11. R to K s q (oh), with the advantage. If secondly: 4. gCasOes e B to Q R 4 K Kt to K 2 P to Q R 3 Caitlei y P to Q 4 g P takes P g P to Q 5, with the better game. ■ P takes P ■ B to Kt 3 PtoQ4 „ P takes P If thirdly : 4. 5. ^.JiLVJL g PtoQa P takes P BtoKt5(ch) y K to K 2 or (a) (b) g' Q to Q R 4 B takes Kt (ch) ■ P to Q 4 ■ P takes K P ' P takes B ,„ Q takes P(ch) „ Q takes K P (ch) •, m-u-^ i^^ • B t 2 ' White ought to wm. (a) 7 Kt to Q B 3 g B takes Kt (ch ) QtoR4 ■ P to Q R 3 ■ P takes B ' B takes Kt (ch) P takes B ^^ Q to R fl, even game. 10. BtoQ2 (i) ^ K to B sq g QtoR4 E takes Kt (ch) ■ P to Q 4 ■ P takes K P ^- p takes B ^Q Q takes P (ch) ^^ Q takes K P Q to B 2 B to K 3 ■ K to B sq ■ Kt to B 3 ' B to Kt 2 with the hetter game. THE KNIGHT'S GAME OF BUY LOPEZ. 177 If fourthly : (A line of defence recommended by Boden but disapproved of by other authorities) 4. QtoK 2 5. P to Q 4 (or A) See Game the Eleventh.) Castling, as given by Mr. Staunton {see "Handbook," p. 149), leads to an even game. 5. P takes P 6. P to K 5 6. Q to K Kt 3 7. P takes P 7. B to Kt 5 (ch) 8. B to Q 2 8. B takes B (ch) 9. Q Kt takes B 9. Q takes P 10. R to K Kt sq 10. Q to K R 6 11. R takes P With an unquestionable superiority. Diagram. BLACK. £ wmTJi. 178 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. It is worthy of note that if Black, on his fifth move in the preceding main variation, instead of taking P with P, had played 6. B to Q Kt 3, he would equally have got a had game; e.g.— ' Castles ^ BtoKKt5 ^ K B tak es Kt ■ B to Q Kt 3 ■ it Kt to K 2 ' Q to Q 3 Q takes B 9. B takes K t, followed by 10. Kt takes K P, with the advantage. If, however, Black play in the main variation 7. Kt takes Q P in lieu of 7. B to Kt 5 (ch), the following continuation, given hy Mr. Staunton, appears far from satisfactory for White, e.g. : „ o Kt takes Kt g B to K 3 j^ B takes B 5. K Kt to K 2 6. P takes P 7. Q to Kt 3 8. Kt takes B 9. B to Kt 3 10. Castles Kt takes Q P Q to Q Kt 3 B takes Kt Q takes K B j^ PtoK6 ^2 P takes P (ch) ■ Q to K Kt 4 ■ K takes P, &c. (see " Handbook," p. 150). (A) 5. Castles e. P to Q 4 7. B to K Kt 5 8. B takes K Kt 9. P takes P 10. Kt to Q B 3 Staunton here observes, "that White's game is a little better developed," but the " Handbuch " now gives for White — 11. B to Q 3, and considers White has a winning position. GAME THE FOURTH. WHITE. BLACK. 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 a. Kt to K B 3 2. Kt to Q B 3 THE KNIGHTS GAME OF RUY LOPEZ. m 3. B to Q Kt 5 3. P to Q 3 4. B takes Kt (ch) (or 4. P takes B Variation) 5. P to Q 4 5. P takes P Black may also play 5. P to K B 4, for which see Illus- trative Grame XXIII., between Anderssen and Suhle. e. Q takes P The Books now make Black play 6. P to Q B 4, to which White replies 7. Q to Q 3, and is declaimed to have the better game. Instead of this we would suggest, for Black 6. Kt to K B 3, but even then White's position is somewhat superior. Variation. On White's Fourth Move. 4. P to Q 4 4. B to Q 2 fTi A g Cj takes .r P takes P ' B to Q 2, and we arrive at a ■position tha^ occurs in Philidor's Defence. See Chapter II.). 5. Castles 5. B to K 2 And the game is about even. GAME THE FIFTH. WHITE. BLACK, 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 2. Kt to K B 3 2. Kt to Q B 3 3. B to Q Kt 5 3. Q to K B 3 4. Q Kt to B 3 4. K Kt to K 2 This appears as good as the usual move of 4. Q to K Kt 3, to which White replies by 5. Castles. N 2 180 THE CHESS-PLAYElE'S MANUAL. 5. B takes Kt 5. Q P takes B 6. P to Q 4 6. P takes P 7. B to Kt 5 7. Q to Kt 3 8. Q takes P And White has much the better game. GAME THE SIXTH. WHITE. BLACK. 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 2. Kt to K B 3 S. Kt to Q B 3 3. B to Q Kt 5 3. K Kt to K 2 This move has nothing hut its antiquity to recommend it. It was advised by Lucena as far back as 1495, and recom- mended also by Cozio, but is a very weak defence. It is, however, stiU frequently adopted by many strong players. In fact, Mr. Steinitz played it twice in the great Vienna tourna- ment ; but it is worth notice that he lost both his games, and in his subsequent contests he adopted the proper defence of 3. P to Q E 3. 4. P to Q 4 (or Variations (I.), (II.)). The " Chess Players' Chronicle " (December, 1873, p. 366) says : " It is a moot point whether this move or 4. P to Q B 3 is the best mode of carrying on the attack." We are of opinion that P to Q 4 is decidedly White's strongest move ; for, in reply to 4. P to Q B 3, Black may play 4. P to Q R 3, as adopted by Morphy, or 4. P to Q 4, as played by Steinitz, and in either case obtain an even game, time being afforded him for the development of his forces. For the result of 4. P to Q B 3, or 4. Castles, see Variations. 4. P takes P 5. Kt takes P 5. Kt takes Kt 6. Q takes Kt 6. Kt to Q B 3 7. B takes Kt, or (A) 7. Q Kt P takes B THE KNIGHT'S GAME OP RUY LOPEZ. 181 B, Castles 8. P to K 5 10. P takes P en passant 11. E to K sq (ch) IS. B to K B 4 13. Kt to Q B 3 14. R to K 2 15. Q R to K sq 16. Q to Q 3 17. QtoKKtS 18. B to R 6 19. P to Kt 3 20. B to Q 2 And White has the better game. The above moves occur in a game between Messrs. Blackburne and Steinitz, at the Vienna Tourney. We append a diagram of the position. DiAGEAM. BLACK. 8. P to K B 3 9. P to Q 4 10. P takes P 11. B to K 2 K to B sqt^ Pto Q4 K to B 2 R to K sq P to Kt 3 17. B to K B 4 18. Q to Kt 3 19. Q to R 4 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. WHITE. 182 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL, In the game above mentioned, Mr. Steinitz now played 20. P to K Kt 4, and lost the game in a few more moves, as follows : — SO. P to K Kt 4 21. Q to K B 3 21. B takes P 22. B takes P 22, B to K 5 23. Kt takes B 23. P takes Kt 24. Q takes K P 24. Q takes B 25. Q takes K P (ch) 25. K to B sq 26. R takes B 26. R takes R 27. Q takes R (ch) 27. K to Kt sq 28. R to K 3 And Black resigned. The editor of " The Field," in his notes to the above game, characterises Mr. Steinitz's 20th move as " midsummer mad- ness ; " but he does not suggest any better mode of play. We believe White can in any case maintain his advantage, and as the position is highly interesting, we subjoin the following original variations, referring the student to the preceding diagram : — Suppose for Black 20. Q E. to Q sq, for there does not appear to be any better move. 20. Q K to Q sq 21. Kt to Q R 4 21. Q to Q Kt 4 (best) 22. Q to K R 4 22. P to K Kt 4 (forced) 23. Q to K R 5 (ch) 23. B to K Kt 3 24. Q to K B 3 24. P to K B 4 (If 24. 25. PtoKR4,&c.) ^ P to K R 3 25. P to K Kt 4 25. P to K B 5 26. B takes P 26. P takes B 27. Q takes P (ch) 27. B to B 3 28. R takes R 28. R takes R 29. R takes R 29. K takes R 30. Q takes B 30. Q to K 7 THE KNIGHT'S GAME OF RUY LOPEZ. 183 fXf 30 31 Q to K 6 (ch), &c.) ^ ■ B takes P 31. Q takes P (ch) And White has the move with three Pawns more than his opponent. (A.) 7. Q to Q 5 7. B to K 2 Black would gain nothing by attacking the Q with Kt, either at K 2 or Kt 5. 8. Kt to Q B 3 8. B to B 3 9. B to Q 2 9. Castles 10. Castles (Q E) 10. P to Q E 3 11. B to K 2 11. P to Q 3 12. P to K B 4 IS. P to K Kt 3 13. Q to Q 3 13. B to K Kt 2 14. P to K E 4 The advance of this Pawn is fatal to Black. 14. P to K E 4 15. P to K Kt 4 15. P takes P 16. P to K E 5 16. B to K 3 17. P takes P 17. P takes P 18. P to K 5 18. Q to K sq (best) 19. Kt to Q 5 19. Q to B 2 ,Tf 19 20 Q ^""^^^^ ('^> 21 B ^° Q ^ -* ^"-^ ^ ■ B takes Kt ' Q to B 2 White wins the exchange.) 20. Kt to K B 6 (ch) 20. B takes Kt 21. P takes B 21. B to B 4 22. Q to K Kt 3 22. Q takes Q E P 23. B to Q B 3 23. K to B 2 24. E to E 7 (ch) 24. K to K sq 184 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. 25. K B takes K Kt P 25. B to K 5 26. Q to K 3 26. P to Q 4 27. Q to Q B 5 And Black cannot avert mate. The above variation also occurs in a game between Messrs. Blackburne and Steinitz, at the Vienna Tourney. From the subjoined diagram it will be seen that Black's position is indefensible. If Q to E 8 (ch), the King moves to Q 2, and the impending mate at K 7 cannot be prevented. If E to B 2, White checks with Book at E 8, and mates next move. BLACK. WW, , ^^m& ^^^_,_,^ ^_,^ ^JSSii I'T i m k WHITE. Variation (I.). On White's fourth move : — 4. P to Q B 3 4. P to Q 4 or (B-) (C.) THE KNIGHT'S GAME OF RUY LOPEZ. 186 This move, adopted by Steinitz at the Dundee Congress, appears to us to be preferable to the ordinary move of 4. P to Q E 3, for which see (B.). 5. Kt takes K P 5. P takes K P 6. Q to Q E 4 6. Q to Q 4 7. P to K B 4 The position is now reduced to a variation of the Queen's Bishop's Pawn's Game in the King's Knight's opening, which, with correct play, should yield Black at least an even game, as follows : — 7. P takes P en passant 8. P to Q E 3 9. Q to K 5 (ch) 10. B to K 3 8. Kt takes P 9. B to B 4 0. K to B 2 Diagram. BLACK. J" W/ Jy ///'' feiJ W^y7i r "I .mmw ^n^ ^%^ I m WHITE. 186 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. 11. P to Q 3 11. Q to K B 4 12. B takes B IS. P takes B 13. K E to K sq 13. Castles (Q E) And Black has no inferiority. For a further continuation, see " Handbook," p. 91, GameV., between Messrs. Perigal and Evans, consulting against Messrs. Harrwitz and Von Carnap. It is worth noticing that White, on his seventh move in the preceding variation, instead of 7. P to K B 4, may play 7. Kt takes Kt, in which case the following is the best con- tinuation for both players. Suppose : — 7. Kt takes Kt 7. Kt takes Kt 8. B takes Kt (ch) 8. Q takes B 9. Q takes Q (ch) 9. P takes Q 10. P to Q Kt 3 And Black's position is slightly to be preferred. (B.) 4. P to Q E 3 This move was played by Morphy against Medley, with the following result : — 5. B to E 4 5. P to Q Kt 4 6. B to Kt 3 6. P to Q 4 7. P takes P 7. Kt takes P 8. P to Q 4 (best) (If 8 Q*^l^ 9 QtoK4 Q takes Kt (ch) ■ Kt to B 5 ■ Q to Q 6 K t Q sq. ■.J Kt to Kt sq R to Q Kt sq, and Black wins. ) THE KNIUHT'S GAME OF RUy LOPEZ. 187 9. Kt takes P 10. Q takes Kt 11. Castles 12. Q to K 5 13. B to B 2 14. Q to Q 4 8. P takes P 9. Kt takes Kt 10. B to K 3 11. P to Q B 4 12. P to B 5 13. B to Q 3 14. Castles And again Black's game is to be preferred. (See Diagram below.) BLACK. WHITE. 6. P to Q 4 (C.) 4. Kt to K Kt 3 5. P takes P 188 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. 6. P takes P 6. B toK2 7. Q Kt to B 3 7. Castles 8. P to K R 4 8. R to K sq 9. B to Q B 4 9. B to Q Kt 5 10. K to B sq 10. B takes Kt 11. P takes B 11. Pto Q3 IS. Kt to Kt 5 And White wins. The above variation occurred in actual play between Messrs. Blackburne and De Vere, in the Challenge Cup Tourney, 1868-69. We extract it from " The Transactions of the British Chess Association." Variation (II.). On White's fourth move :- 4. Castles 4. Kt to K Kt 3 5. Pto Q4 5. Kt takes Q P 6. Kt takes Kt 6. P takes Kt 7. Q takes P 7. P to Q B 8 8. B to Q B 4 8. P to Q 3 9. Kt to Q B 3 9. B toK3 And the game is equal. GAME THE SEVENTH. WHITE. 1. P to K 4 S. Kt to K B 3 3. B to Q Kt 5 BLACK. 1. P to K 4 2. Kt to Q B 8 3. Kt to Q 5 THE KNIGHT'S GAME OP RUY LOPEZ. 189 This defence, although theoretically unsound and condemned by all the leading authorities, has been resuscitated latterly by Messrs. Bird and Blackburne, who have adopted it successfully in important contests ; the former in his matches with Mr. Wisker, and the latter at the Vienna Tourney. Practically speaking, we believe it may be safely played, and it affords a pleasing variety to the monotony of the accepted defences, P to Q E 3, and Kt to B 3. 4. Kt takes Kt 4. P takes Kt 5. Castles (or Variation) Most authorities recommend P to Q 3 here for White. Mr. Wisker prefers the move in the text, because it enables White to retire his B to R 4, without sustaining a check with the Queen at E 4. 5. B to Q B 4 e. P to Q 8 White may also play 6. P to Q B 3 here. 6. Kt to K B 3, or (A.) 7. P to K 5 7. Kt to Q 4 8. B to Q B 4 8. Kt to Kt 3 9. B to Kt 3 9. P to Q 4 10. P to K B 4 10. P to K Kt 3 This move is necessary to arrest the advance of the hostile KB P. 11. Q to K sq 11. B to K 2 If Black play 11. Castles, Mr. Wisker gives the following variation. j2 F to K B 5 ^3 R takes B ^^_ B to R 6 ■ Castles ■ B takes P ' P takes R and White wins. 190 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL, 12. Kt to Q 2 And White's position is slightly preferable. {See Illustrative Games.) DiAGEAM. BLACK. m^y myj/m 'iH I FS i i ^. „^P„ ^..yMm.. W^ wm '^ '^m ////y/^ imy////////. I — i -' , (A.) 7. Kt to Q 2 e. Q to K E 5 White may also play 7. P to K B 4, with advantage; e.g.:— 7 P to K B 4 g Kt to Q 2 g Kt to K B 3 , with a very good ■ Kt to K B 3 ■ P to Q B 3 3ame. THE KNIGHT'S GAME OP EUY LOPEZ. 191 7. Kt to K B 3 8. P to K 5 8. Kt to Kt 5 9. Kt to K B 3 9. Q to K 4 10. B to K B 4 And White has the advantage, in the opinion of Mr. Wisker. ("Westminster Papers," January, 1874.) Vaeiation. Commencing on White's fifth move. 5. P to Q 3 This move is given hy Staunton and the " Handbuch " as the best continuation. 5. P to Q B 3 or (B) This line of play was adopted with success by Mr. Black- burne, and also by Mr. Bird, against Herr Anderssen, at the Vienna Tournament, and appears as good as the old course of moving out the Bishop. 6. B to Q E 4 or (C.) 6. Kt to B 3 7. Castles 7. P to Q 4 8. P to K 5 8. Kt to Q 2 9. P to Q B 3 And White has the advantage. 19^ THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. BLACK. mmA mm. - m. I fef i k^,d.'%.mkWm.k .mmm m i mm. ^H m« a ^^ ^^ ':»!i^ WHITE. (B.) 6. Q to K E 5 7. B to K Kt 5 8. P to B 3 9. P takes P 10. B to Q B 4 11. Q to B 3 12. Q takes P (ch) 13. P takes B 5. B to Q B 4 6. Q to K 2 7. B to Kt 6 (ch) 8. P takes P 9. Q to B 4 10. P to K Kt 3 11. Q takes Q B 12. K to Q sq And White ought to win. (C.) 6. B to Q B 4 7. Castles 6. Kt to B 8 7. P to Q 4 THE KNIGHT'S GAME OF RUY LOPEZ. 193 jj y B to K Kt 5 g Castles g P to Q B 3 j^j QKt takes P ■ptoQ3 ■BtoK;2 'P takes P ' Kt to K Kt 5 ^^ B takes B ^g P to K R 3 jg B to Kt 3 ^^ P to K B 4 Q takes B ' Kt to K 4 ' B to K 3 ' B takes B , f. P takes B 16. P to Q 4, with the better game. Ktto Q 2 8. P takes P 8. Kt takes P 9. Q to K E 5 9. B to K 3 10. E to K sq 10. P to K Kt 3 If 10. 11. R takes B „ BtoK2 ''"'• 11. Q to K 5 11. E to K Kt sq IS. B takes Kt IS. Q takes B (!) 13. Q takes Q 13. P takes Q And Black has the disadvantage of a doubled Pawn and an vincomfortable position. GAME THE EIGHTH. 1. WHITE. PtoK4 1. BLACK. PtoK4 s. Kt to K B 3 S. Kt to Q B 3 3. B to Q Kt 5 3. P to K B 4 This Counter- Gambit yields the second player a very inferior game, in the opinion of most authorities. 4. Q to K 2, or 4. P takes P Variation jj ^ g P takes B P g P to Q 4, & c. ■ PtoQ3 ■ B takes P 5. B takes Kt 5. Q P takes B 6. Q takes P 6. B to Q 3 7. Kt takes P 7. Q to K 2 8. P to Q 4, and White has gained a Pawn, with no inferiority in position. 194 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. For Black's seventh move, in lieu of 7. Q to K 2, the " Handbuch " gives 7. Kt to B 3, and continues the game as foUows : — g QtoK2 g Q to B 4 (ch) ^^ P to Q 4 ^^ Kt to K B 3 Castles ■ Kt to Q 4 ' Q to E 5 ' Q to K Kt 5 and Black has the preferable position. Black might also take the Bishop with Book on his last move, as suggested by the " Handbuch," following up that move by B to E 6. If this continuation be correct, the Counter-Gambit of 3. P to K B 4 does not appear disadvan- tageous for the second player, after all. Lowenthal advises 4. Q to K 2 as White's best mode of continuing the attack, but we think 4. P to Q 4 at least as good ; e. g. — Variation. On White's fourth move : — 4. P to Q 4 4. P takes Q P Lowenthal prefers 4. B P takes K P. {See " Games of the Congress," p. 252.) 5. Kt takes P 5. Kt takes Kt 6. Q takes Kt 6. P to Q B 8 "7. B to Q 3 7. P takes P 8. B takes P 8. P to Q 4 9. B to Q 3 9. Kt to B 3 10. B to Kt 5 10. B to K 2 11. QtoKE4 The above moves occur in a game between Hannah and Falkbeer. The latter, who conducted the defence, now moved 11. Q to Q Kt 3,to which his opponent replied 12. B to Kt 6 (ch), THE KNIGHT'S GAME OF RUY LOPEZ. 195 and eventually won the game. Lowenthal thinks Black's best move in this position is 11. Kt to K 5. We recommend this position to the attention of the student. If now 12 Q^°^^ ^'=^) 13 B takes B x4 . Q to K 2, &c., and P to Kt 3 ■ Q takes B we believe White will gain a Pawn at least. GAME THE NINTH. WHITE . BLACK. 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 S. Kt to K B 3 2. Kt to Q B 3 3. B to Q Kt 5 3. B to Q 3 Although this close defence gives the second player a very cramped game, the correct attack, as the German " Handbuch " remarks, is not easy. It is seldom adopted, but may be safely ventured, since few players know the analysis, and unless White plays the most forcible moves. Black can secure an equal position, as will be seen from the following continua- tion : — 4. P to Q B 3 (or 4. P to Q R 3 Variation) 5. B to E 4 5. P to Q Kt 4 6. B to Kt 3 6. Kt to K B 3 7. Castles 7. Kt to Q R 4 If Black ventures to take the K P, he gets into difficulties : e. g.— „ g EtoKjq 9 BtoQS ^q P to Q 3 ■ Kt takes K P ' P to B 4 ' B to Kt 2 ' Kt to K B 3 jj Kt takes P ^^ B takes Q Kt ^g B takes B (c h) ■ B takes Kt ' B takes B ' K to B 2 j^ B takes K B P, &c. o 2 196 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL The " Handbuch " gives for Black 7. — -— 8. ^ ^° ^ °1 Castles K to K Lq Kt to Kt 5 jQ P to K B 4 ^^ P to Q 4, and White, in a iew ■ R to K 2 ' ■ P takes P more moves, obtains a winning position. We confess, however, we are unable to accept the above continuation as Black's best. 8. P to Q 4 9, Q takes Kt 10. B to Kt 5 8, Kt takes K B 9. Q to K 2 And Black's game is cramped and difficult. mf^i Mi v/Mm: ifi i if i^C^^^ 9 p fKiRf wm 4. Castles 5. P to Q 4 Vaeiation. On White's fourth move : — 4. Q to B 3 THE KNIGHT'S GAME OF EUY LOPEZ. 197 If 5 P *•" Q "^ 6. Q Kt to B 3 , with a good game. P to K R 3 5. P to K R 3 „ g B takes Kt 7. P to K 5 , &c. • P takes P ■ Q P takes B 6. Q Kt to B 3, or 6. P takes P And White has a capital attack. GAME THE TENTH. WHITE. BLACK. 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 2. Kt to K B 3 2. Kt to Q B 3 3. B to Kt 5 3. Q to K 2 4. Kt to Q B 8 And White has the advantage, since Black must lose time in developing his game, his K B being blocked by his Qr If he play — 4. Kt to K B 3 5. Castles With a fine game. GAME THE ELEVENTH. (The Boden Defence.) white. black. 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 2. Kt to K B 3 2. Kt to Q B 3 3. B to Q Kt 5 3. B to B 4 4. P to B 3 4. Q to K 2 Mr. Boden is the originator of this defence, which, how- ever, is condemned by Max Lange and other authorities. Lowenthal says of it : — " This move, lately adopted at the 198 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. suggestitm of Mr. Boden, seems to us to give the second player a more cramped position than any other defence, and we cannot, therefore, recommend it." (" Morphy's Games," Bohn's edition, p. 92.) Subsequently, however, he would appear to have somewhat modified this opinion; for in his notes to a game between Messrs. Morphy and Boden (" Morphy's Games," p. 299), he writes as follows : — " This is a defence of Mr. Boden's own, but it has not been sufficiently tested in actual play to enable us to speak confidently as to its merits. It seems to give the second player a more cramped position than the ordinary defences, but for all that may turn out not more objectionable." 5. Castles 5. P to K B 3 6. P to Q 4 6. B to Kt 3 7. Kt to Q E 3 Lowenthal suggests 7. P to Q Kt 8, followed by B to Q E 3, as a good mode of continuing the attack. Max Lange prefers 7. P to Q 5 for White at this point, followed by 8. Kt to KE4. 7. Kt to Q sq 8. Kt to B 4 8. Kt to K B 2 9. Kt to K 3 9. P to Q B 3 10. Kt to K B 5 10. Q to B sq 11. B to Q3 (or 11. PtoKt3 Variation) 12. Kt to Kt 3 IS. P to Q 3 13. P to Q E 4 13. B to K Kt 5 14. P to E 5 14. B to B 2 15. P to E 3 15. B to Q 2 16. Q to Kt 3 16. Kt to Q sq 17. E to K sq 17. B to K 3 18. Q to B 2 18. Kt to K 2 And although White has miquestionably some advantage of THE KNIGHT'S GAME OF BUY LOPEZ. 199 position, that is not sufficient to ensure his winning the game. Can more be said in favour of the other defences to the Euy Lopez ? BLACK. i i ^J, f ^^^^-■' '^^ m ^^A ms WHITE. The above moves occur in a game between Messrs. Lowen- thal and Morphy. (See " Morphy's Games," Max Lange's edition, p. 166.) For White's seventeenth move the " Handbuch " gives B to Q B 4, in heu of K to K sq as above, and declares that White has a winning position : this we fail to see. Variation. On White's eleventh move : — 11. B to Q R 4 200 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S ^rANUAL. Lowenthal thinks this inferior to 11. B to Q 3. 11. PtoKtS IS. Kt to K 3 12. P to Q 8 13. P to Q 5 With a strong game. GAME THE TWELFTH. WIIITE. BLACK. 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 S. Kt to K B 3 2. Kt to Q B 3 3. B to Q Kt5 3. Pto QE3 4. B to Q E 4 4. Kt to K B 3 5. Castles 5. Kt takes K P 6. P to Q U 6. P to Q Kt 4 (best) „ „ ^ Kt tak es Kt „ B to K sq, &c. ■ QKt takes P ' P takes Kt -rj. „ ►, E to K sq o Kt takes P, witli the better It D. 7. „- - ~ ^ or o. P takes P P to Q 4 game. 7. B to Q Kt 3 7. P to Q 4 8. P takes P (or Variation) White may play 8. Kt takes P, for which see Variation. 8. Kt to K 2 or (A.) This move is recommended by Anderssen. We submit the following continuation : — 9. B to K 3 9. B to Q Kt 2 10. Q Kt to Q 2 10. Kt takes Kt 11. Q takes Kt THE KNIGHT'S GAME OF BUY LOPEZ. 201 And the game is equal, Black being now able to play 11. Kt to K B 4,J,o which "White's best rejoinder appears to be 12. Q E to Q sq, when the game may be continued thus : — IS. P to Q B 3 j£ 12 13 Q takea K t , . P to K 6 ■ Kt takes B ■ B to K 2 ' Castles 15. P takes P (ch), &c. 13. K E to K sq 13. B to K 2 14. Q to Q 3 14. Kt takes B 15. E takes Kt And we prefer White's game. (A.) 8. Q B to K 3 This move is advised by Max Lange, and seems stronger than Kt to K 2. 9. P to B 3 or (a) 9. B to Q B 4 10. Q Kt to Q 2 10. Kt takes Kt jf .J, ,, Kt takes Kt ,„ B takes B ,„ R takes Q Castles ' P takes Kt ' Q takes Q ' P takes B ,. Kt to Q 4 j^g K t takes K P Kt takes P B takes P (oh), and Black has gained a Pawn, bub will find it difficult to maintain. 11. B takes Kt And the game appears to be even. (a) „ BtoK3 jQ QtoK2 ^^ KKtto Q 2 ^^ P to K B 4 ■ B to K 2 ■ Kt to R 4 ' Castles " ' P to K B 4 ■>„ P to B 3 ,. Kt takes Kt, and, after a few more moves, the Kt takes B " Handbuch " declares the game even. 202 THE CHESS-PLAYEE'S MANUAL. Variation. On White's eighth move. 8, Kt takes P 8. Kt takes Kt 9. P takes Kt 10. P to Q B 3 11. Ktto Q2 12. B takes Kt 9. P to Q B 3 10. B to Q B 4 11. Kt takes Kt IS. Q to K E 5 And Black has a good game. GAMES ILLUSTRATIVE OF THE KNIGHT'S GAME OF RUY LOPEZ. Game I. — Between Messrs. Murpht wnd Wiskee. (From " The Glowworm.") White (Dr. Murphy). 1. P to K 4 2. K Kt to B 3 3. K B to Kt 5 4. B to R 4 5. Castles (6) 6. Q Kt to B 3 7. B to Kt 3 8. P to K R 3 9. P to Q 3 Black (Mr. Wisker). 1. P to K 4 2. Q Kt to B 3 3. P to Q R 3 (a) 4. K Kt to B 3 5. B to K 2 6. P to Q Kt 4 • 7. P to Q 3 8. Castles 9. Kt to Q R 4 Notes hy Herr Lowenthal. [a) Luoena, who flomished before Lopez, from whom the opening derives its name, recommended here K Kt to K 2. The move in the text was approved of by the old Italian authors, and since their epoch, by many modern writers upon the game. ^ (6) The excellence of this attack, instead of Q to K 2, is now recognised by /learly eveiy player. THE KNIGHT'S GAME OF RUY LOPEZ. 203 10. P to Q B 4 (c) 11. Q Rto Kt sq 12. Kt takes B l;j. Kt to Q B 3 14. P to K B 4 15. Kt takes Kt 16. K to E sq 17. Kt takes P (d) 18. Q to K B 3 19. B to Q Kt 2 20. Q to K Kt 3 21. P to Q B 5 («) 22. P takes P (/) 23. P takes Q 24. T to q 4(g) 25. K R to K sq 26. P to K 5 (h) 27. R takes Kt 28. Kt to Q 3 29. R to Q B sq 30. Kt to K B 2 31. Kt to K 4 32. P takes P 33. Kt to B 6 (ch) 34. P takes R 35. R to Q B 2 36. K to Kt sq 37. K to B 2 38. R to K 2 (c) Kt takes B would have had the disadvantage of opening a iile to the hostile Rook, but in such a case White could never afterwards break up Black's position by P to Q K 4 — a move always to be provided for with care by the second player when he has advanced his Q Kt P. The mode of play actually adopted has, however, much to recommend it. (d) Supposing that the Bishop here had made the capture and White had answered with Kt to K Kt 5, some interesting positions might have arisen from Black's pushing his Q B P on the enemy's Queen, and if P takes P, then playing P to K R 3. (e) This requires a careful reply. (/) At first sight it looks as if Black might, with advantage, have promptly exchanged Queens, but this step would not have led to much ultimately. (g) A little premature. (h) If Black had not sacrificed the exchange, he would have lost at once his most important Pawns, which will always afford him resource. (i) White is compelled to sacrifice the exchange in his turn. 10. BtoKS 11. BtoQ5 12. P to Q R 3 13. Q Kt takes Kt 14. P to Q B 3 15. Kt takes B (ch) 16. Q to Kt 3 (ch) 17. P takes P 18. Q R to K sq 19. Kt to K Kt 5 20. Kt to K 4 21. Q to her sq 22 Q to K Kt 4 23. Q takes Q 24. B to K Kt 5 25. Kt to Q B 5 26. Kt to Q 7 27. Kt takes E 28. P to K Kt 4 29. P to Q Kt 3 30. BtoQ2 31. P to K B 3 32. P takes P 3.3. Q R to K 3 34. K R takes Kt (i) 35. R takes Q P 36. KtoB2 37. BtoKS 38. BtoQ4 204 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAI 39. R to Q 2 40. B takes P 41. B to Q 4 42. B to Q B 5 43. R takes R 44. K takes P 39. B to Q 4 40. B takes P 41. B to Q 4 42. Q to K 7 (ch) 43. P takes R 44. P to R 4 And the game was shortly given up as drawn (h) Game II. — Between Messrs, Andeessen and Paulsen. (From "The Handbuuh.") White (Herr Anderssen). BLjiCK (Herr Paulsen). 1. PtoK4 1. PtoK4 2. Kt to K B 3 2. Kt to Q B 3 3. B to Kt 5 3. Kt to B 3 4. P to Q 3 4. PtoQ3 5. B takes Kt (ch) 5. P takes B 6. P to K R 3 6. P to Kt 3 7. Kt to B 3 7. B to K Kt 2 8. Castles 8. Castles 9. Kt to K 2 9. PtoB4 10. Kt to Kt 3 10. B to Q Kt 2 11. R to K sq 11. Kt to Q 2 12. R to Q Kt sq 12. PtoB4 13. P to Kt 4 13. P takes K P 14. Q P takes P 14. P takes P 15. R takes P 15. Kt to Q Kt 3 16. R to Q Kt 3 16. QtoK 2 17. P to Q R 4 17. P to Q R 4 18. B to K 3 18. R to Q R 3 19. Q to K 2 19. B to Q B sq 20. K R to Q Kt 20. Q to Q sq 21. Kt to Kt 5 21. QtoK 2 22. Kt to K B 3 22. Q to Q sq 23. P to K R 4 23. K to R sq 24. E to Q R 3 24. R to Q R sq 25. P to R 5 25, B to Q R 3 (k) A Pawn's advantage can rarely secure a player a game like this, when opposed Bishops ai-e on different colom-s. THE KNIGHT'S GAME OE RUY LOPEZ. 205 26. Q to K sq 26. Kt to B 5 27. Q E to Kt 3 27. QtoQ2 28. P takes P 28. P takes P 29. B to K Kt 5 29. Q takes R P 30. Kt to K R 4 30. Q to K sq 31. Kt to B sq 31. P to R 5 32. R to K R 3 32. K to Kt sq 33. R to K Kt 3 33. P toR6 34. R to Q R sq 34. B to K B 3 35. Kt takes Kt P 35. B takes B 36. Kt takes R 36. K takes Kt 37. R takes B 37. K toK2 38. Kt to K 3 38. KtoQ2 39. R to K Kt 3 39. PtoB3 40. Kt takes Kt 40. B takes Kt 41. Q to B 3 41. PtoQ4 42. E takes P and wins, Game III. — Between Messrs. Bird and MmcHiN. (From " The Transactions of the British Chess Association.") White (Mr. PtoK4 Kt to K B 3 B to Q Kt 5 B to Q R 4 5. Castles 6. P to Q 4 7. P to K 5 8. B to Q Kt 3 9. Kt takes P 10. Q takes Kt 11. Q Kt to B 3 12. R P takes Kt 13. Kt to K 4 14. Q takes K P 15. R to K sq 16. B to Q 2 17. B to Q B 3 18. Q to K B 4 Bird). Black (Mr. Minohin), 1. P to K 4 2. Kt to Q B 3 3. P to Q R 3 4. Kt to K B 3 5. B to K 2 6. P takes P 7. Kt to K 5 8. Castles 9. Kt takes Kt 10. Kt to Q B 4 11. Kt takes B 12. P to Q 3 13. P takes P 14. R to K sq 15. B to Q 2 16. B to Q L 3 17. B to K B sq J8. Q to Q 4 206 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. 19. P to K B 3 20. Q E to Q sq 21. Kt to K Kt 5 22. Kt takes R (o) 23. Kt takes B 24. Kt to Q 5 25. P to K E 4 26. Kt to K 7 (oh) 27. Kt takes B 28. R to Q 7 (oh) 29. K E to K 7 30. BtoQ4 31. E takes Q 32. KtoB2 33. P to Q Kt 4 34. P to Q B 4 35. P to K Kt 4 36. PtoKB4 37. P to K Kt 5 38. B P takes P 19. EtoK3 20. Q to K E 4 21. B to Q 3 22. B takes Q 23. Q to K Kt 4 24. P to K B 3 (b) 25. Q to K R 4 26. K toB2 27. P takes Kt 28. K to B sq 29. Q to Q B 4 (ch) 30. Q takes R 31. K takes E 32. K toQ3 33. R to K sq 34. KtoK3 35. P to K Kt 3 36. P to K R 4 37. P takes P 38. K to K B 4 And White resigned. Game IV. — Between Messrs. De Vebe and Wiskee. Played in the Challenge Cup Tourney, 1868. White (Mr. De Vere). Black (Mr. Wisker.) 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 2. Kt to K B 3 2. Kt to Q B 3 3. B to Q Kt 5 3. P to Q R 3 4. B to Q R 4 4. Kt to K B 3 6. Castles 5. B to K 2 6. R to K sq (a) 6. P to Q Kt 4 7. B to Q Kt 3 7. P to Q 3 8. P to Q B 3 8. B to K Kt 5 (a) An unsound sacrifice, althougli just in Mr. Bird's style. B to K 5 was the proper play. (6) If B takes Kt, E to K 5, &c. (a) We hardly think this so good a move as P to Q i. THE KNIGHT'S GAME OF RUY LOPEZ. 207 9. B to Q 5 10. B takes Q Kt 11. PtoQ4 12. P takes P 13. Kt to Q B 3 (6) 14. Kt to Q 5 1.5. P takes Kt 16. P to K E 3 17. Q to Q Kt 3 18. B to K Kt 5 19. Kt takes B 20. Kt to K B 3 21. Q to Q 3 22. P to K Kt 4 23. Q to Q B 4 24. Kt to K R 2 25. Kt takes P 26. Kt to K 3 27. Kt to Kt 4 28. K to E 2 29. E to K Kt sq 30. Kt to K 3 31. E to K Kt 4 32. E to K E 4 33. Q to Q 3 34. Q E to K Kt sq 35. Q E to K Kt 5 36. Kt to K B 5 37. Kt to K Kt 3 38. E to K 4 39. E to K 6 40. E to K 8 (ch) 41. Kt takes B 42. E takes Q E (ch) 43. Q takes Kt P 44. Q takes E 45. K to Kt 3 46. Q to K E 4 (ch) 9. Q to Q 2 10. Q takes B 11. P takes P 12. Castles (KE) 13. P to Q Kt 5 14. Kt takes Kt 15. Q to Q 2 16. B to K E 4 17. P to Q E 4 18. B takes B 19. P to K E 3 20. P to Q E 5 21. EtoQR4(c) 22. B to K Kt 3 ((f) 23. P to K R 4 24. P takes P 25. P to K B 4 26. P to K B 5 27. P to K B 6 28. Q to K B 2 29. K to R 2 30. Q R to Q R sq 31. B to K R 4 32. P to K Kt 3 33. K to E sq 34. K E to K Kt sq 35. E to K Kt 2 36. R to K R 2 37. Q R to K B sq 38. Q to K Kt 2 39. R to K B 3 40. R to K B sq 41. E takes Kt 42. Q takes E 43. E takes R 44. Q to K B 2 45. K to R 2 46. K to Kt 2 (b) Hazardous ! Q to Q 3 is better play. (c) Black now gets up a strong attack. (d) The sacrifice of the Bishop looks tempting here, but would not have been sound play. 208 THE CHESS-PLAYEK'S MANUAL. 47. Q to Kt 4 (ch) 48. Q to K 4 (ch) 49. P to K R 4 50. Q to K 6 51. Q to K 7 (ch) 52. Q to Q 8 (oh) 53. Q takes B P (ch) 54. Q takes Q P 55. P takes P 56. Q to K 6 (ch) 57. Q to K B 6 (ch) 47. KtoE2 48. K t« B scL 49. Q to K E 4 50. K to B 2 51. K to B sq 52. KtoB2 53. KtoKtsq 54. P to Kt 6 55. P takes P 56. K to B sq And Black resigned (e). 1MB Y.— Between Messrs. Blackburne and Wisker. Played in the Challenge Cup Tourney. (From " The Transactions of the British Chess Association.") White (Mr. Blackbnrne). Black (Mr. Wisker). 1. PtoK4 1. P to K 4 2. Kt to K B 3 2. Kt to Q B 3 3. B to Q Kt 5 3. P to Q E 3 4. BtoQR4 4. Kt to K B 3 5. P to Q 3 (a) 5. P to Q Kt 4 6. B to Q Kt 3 6. P to Q 3 7. P to Q B 3 7. B to K 2 8. P to Q K 3 8. Castles 9. Castles 9. P to Q 4 TO. P takes P 10. Kt takes P 11. QtoK2 11. B to K B 3 12. B to K 3 12. Q B to B 4 13. K B to B 2 13. E to K sq 14. Q Kt to Q 2 14. B to K Kt 3 15. K E to K sq 15. B to K 2 16. Q Kt to B sq 16. P to K B 4 17. Q E to Q sq 17. P to K B 5 18. Q B to his sq 18. B to Q B 4 (e) The whole of this difficult end game is played hy Mr. de Vere in masterly style. (as) This move is favoured hy Anderssen, Zubertort, and the Berlin players, but condemned by Lowenthal as being of too defensive a character. THE KNIGHT'S GAME OF EUY LOPEZ. 209 19. 21. 23. Q Kt to Q 2 BtoR4 Kt to K 4 Q Ukes B Q to Q B 4 19. P to Q Kt 5 (b) 20. Q to K B 3 21. B takes Kt 22. K B to Q so And Black resigned. Game VI. — Between Messrs. Morpht and Anderssen. White (Mr. Anderssen). Black (Mr. Morphy). 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 2. Kt to K B 3 2. Kt to Q B 3 3. B to Q Kt 5 3. P to Q R 3 4. B to Q B 4 4. Kt to K B 3 5. P to Q 3 5. B to B 4 6. P to Q B 3 6. P to Q Kt 4 7. B to Q B 2 7. P to Q 4 8. P takes P 8. Kt takes P 9. P to K R 3 9. Castles 10. Castles 10. P to E 3 11. P to Q 4 11. P takes P 12. P takes P 12. B to Kt 3 13. Kt to B 3 13. K Kt to Q Kt 14. B to Kt sq 14. B to K 3 (a) 15. P to E. 3 15. Kt to Q 4 16. Kt to K 2 16. Kt to B 3 17. B to K 3 17. E to K sq 18. Kt to Kt 3 18. B to B 5 19. Kt to B 5 19. B takes R 20. Q takes B 20. Kt to K 2 21. K Kt to E 4 21. Kt takes Kt 22. Kt takes Kt 22. Q to Q 2 23. B takes P 23. P takes B (J) Hitherto the game has been correctly conducted, but now Black makes a fatal error. {a) If B takes P . B to K 4, &o. 9X0 THE CHESS-PLAYEE'S MANUAL. 24. Q to Q B sq 25. Q takes R P 26. KtoE2 27. B takes Kt 28. Q to Kt 5 (ch) 29. Q to E 6 (ch) 30. Kt takes B .31. Q takes Q 32. R to Q sq 33. RtoQ2 34. P to K Kt 4 35. P to B 3 36. P to K E 4 37. K to Kt 3 38. PtoE5 39. K toB2 40. K to Kt 3 41. KtoB4 24. B takes P (b) 25. E to K 8 (ch) 26. Kt to K 5 27. R takes B 28. K to B sq 29. K to K sq 30. Q to Q 3 (ch) 31. P takes Q 32. K to B sq 33. Q E to K sq 34. Q E to K 4 35. E to K 8 E to Q 4 PtoE4 K to Kt sq E to K sq Rto KB KtoE2 36. 37. 38. 39. 40. 41. And tbe game was drawn. Game VII. — Between Messrs. Morphy and De EiviSre . White (M. De Eivi&re). Black (Mr. Morphy). 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 2. Kt to K B 3 2. Kt to Q B 3 3. B to Q Kt 5 3. P to Q E 3 4. B to Q E 4 4. Kt to K B 3 5. Q Kt to Q B 3 5. B to Q B 4 6. P to Q 3 6. P to K E 3 7. Q B to K 3 7. B takes B 8. P takes B 8. P to Q 3 9. Castles 9. Castles ] 0. B takes Kt 10. P takes B 11. QtoKsq 11. B to K 3 12. Kt to K R 4 12. P to K Kt 3 {b) Kt to E 2 would have the ^ 05 QtakesRP game . '^'' ■ Kt toE2 ""' PtoKB3 „g Kt to K E 4 or (a) "/. KtoR2 (a) 26. BtoE_2ich) 27. R to K 8 ch Kt to K R 4 R takes B, and wins. K to E sq R to K Kt sq, and wins. THE KNIGHT'S GAME OF RUY LOPEZ. all 13. Q R to Q aq 14. P to Q 4 15. P to K R 3 16. R to K B 3 17. R takes P 18. P to Q R 4 19. R to Q 2 20. Kt to Q 5 21. P takes B 22. R to K 2 23. P to B 4 24. R to B 4 25. Kt to B 3 26. Kt to Q 2 27. Q takes Kt 28. Q to Q R 5 29. Q takes R P 30. R takes R 31. Q to B 6 32. Q takes Q B P 33. K to R 2 34. Q to Q 8 (oh) 35. Q to Q 7 (ch) 36. Q to Q 8 (ch) 13. Q to K 2 14. Q R to K sq 15. B to B 5 16. P takes P 17. B to Q Kt 4 18. P to Q B 4 19. B to Q B 3 20. B takes Kt 21. Kt to K 5 22. Q to K 4 23. R to Kt sq 24. K R to K aq 25. Q to Kt 2 26. Kt takes Kt 27. R to Kt 6 28. P to K B 4 29. R takes Kt P 30. Q takes R 31. R takes P 32. R to K 8 (ch) 33. Q to K 4 34. K to B 2 35. K to B 3 And the game was drawn. Game VIII. — Between Messrs. Murphy and Chinnert. White (Dr. Murphy). 1. P to K 4 2. Kt to K B 3 3. B to Q Kt 5 4. B to Q R 4 5. Kt to Q B 3 6. Castles 7. B to Kt 3 8. B to Q 5 9. P takes Kt 10. P to Q 4 11. Kt takes P 12. Q takes B 13. P to B 4 Black (Mr. Ohinnery). 1. P to K 4 2. Kt to Q B 3 3. P to Q R 3 4. Kt to K B 3 5. B to Q B 4 6. P to Q Kt 4 7. P to Q 3 8. Kt takes B 9. Kt to K 2 10. P takes P 11. B takes Kt 12. Castles 13. P to K B 4 212 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. 14. P to Q R 4 15. P takes P en 16. Kt takes P 17. R to Q sq 18. Q takes Q P 19. B to Q 2 20. Q to Q 5 (ch) 21. Q takes R 22. Q to B 3 23. Q to Q R 3 24. Kt to B 3 25. Q to Q 6 14. P to Q B 4 (a) 15. P takes P 16. QtoB2 17. Q takes P 18. Q takes Q B P (J) 19. Kt to Kt 3 20. K to R sq 21. BtoK3 22. Bto Q2 23. BtoB3 24. R to R sq And Black resigned. GfAMB IX. — Between Messrs. Bikd and Wisker. Cup Tourney. Played in the Challenge (From " The Glowworm.") White (Mr. Bird). 1. P to K 4 2. K Kt to B 3 3. B to Q Kt 5 4. B to Q R 4 5. P to Q 4 6. Castles 7. R to K sq 8. P to K 6 9. Kt takes Q P 10. Q takes Kt 11. Q Kt to B 3 12. Q to Q sq 13. B to Kt 3 14. Kt to R 4 15. Kt to B 3 16. B to K B 4 Black (Mr. Wisker). 1. PtoK4 2. Q Kt to B 3 3. P to Q R 3 4. K Kt to B 3 5. P takes P 6. BtoK2 7. Castles 8. Kt to K sq 9. Kt takes Kt 10. PtoQ4 11. P to Q B 3 12. BtoK3 13. Q to Q 2 (a) 14. Q to Q B 2 15. P to K R 3 16. Q R to Q sq (a) B to Q 2 would have been a better move. (b) This was evidently a mistake. Notes by Herr LSwenthal. {a) Black has managed to develop his game ; his position is now equal to that of his adversary. THE KNIGHT'S GAME OF RUY LOPEZ. 213 17. Kt to K 2 17. P to Q B 4 18. P to Q B 3 18. Q to Q B 3 19. Q R to B sq 19. P to K B 4 20. P takes P en passant 20. Kt takes P 21. Kt to K Kt 3 21. Kt to K 5 22. B to K 3 22. P to Q B 5 23. B to B 2 23. Kt takes K B P (6) 24. Q to K R 5 24. B to Q B 4 25. Q to Kt 6 25. B to K B 3 26. Q to R 7 (ch) 26. K to B sq 27. Kt to K R 5 27. R to K B 2 28. B to Q 4 28. B takes B 29. P takes B 29. Q to Q Kt 3 30. B to K B 5 (c) 30. Kt to K 5 31. B takes Kt 31. Q takes P (oil) 32. K to R sq 32. P takes B 33. R takes K P 33. Q to Q 8 (ch) 34. K R to K sq 34. Q takes Kt 35. R takes B 35. R to Q 8 (ch) 36. K R to K sq 36. B takes K R (ch) 37. R takes R 37. R to K 2 38. E to K B sq (ch) 38. R to K B 2 (d) Drawn by mutual consent. Game X. — Between Messrs. Zukertort and Wisker. (From " The Westminster Papers.") White (Mr. Wisker). Black (Mr. Zukertort). 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 2. Kt to K B 3 2. Kt to Q B 3 3. B to Q Kt 5 3. P to Q R 3 4. B to Q R 4 4. Kt to K B 3 5. Castles 5. Kt takes K P (a) (S) An ingenious conception. If B takes Kt, Black can play E takes B, checking afterwards with great effect with his Bishop. (c) Well played, as Black cannot take the piece without immediate loss. (d) The attack and counter-attack are well sustained by both combatants in this game. Notes by the Author. (a) B to K 2 is preferred by Mr. Wisker when the pro])er continuation is — g PtoQ 4 „ PtoK5 P takes P ' Kt to K 5, with a good game. The move in the text, how- ever, is stronger play, in our oniniou. 214 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. 6. R to K sq 7. B takes Kt 8. P to Q 4 9. Kt takes K P (b) 10. B to K 3 11. Q KttoBS 12. Kt to K B 3 13. Q toQ 3(c) 14. B to Q 2 15. Kt to K 4 (e) 6. Kt to Q B 4 7. Q P takes B 8. Kt to K 3 9. B to K 2 10. Castles 11. P to K B 3 12. P to K B 4 13. P to K B 5 (i) 14. B to Q 3 Diagram Showing the position after White's 15th move. BLACK. (b) White has already acquired a somewhat superior position. (c) The commencement of a profound combination. {d) This is an unsound move, as will be seen by the sequel, (e) Vide Diagram. Wliite could also have played here 15. Q to Q B 4, with a good game, followed by Kt to K Kt 5, but the move made is to be preferred. THE KNIGHT'S GAME OF EUY LOPEZ. 215 15. K to B. sq 16. P to Q B 4 16. P to g Kt 4 17. P to Q Kt 3 17. B to Q Kt 2 18. B to Q B 3 18. QtoQ2 19. Q R to Q sq 19. Q to K B 2 20. ij to K 2 20. K R to K sq 21. P to Q B 5 21. B to K 2 22. Kt to K 5 22. Q to K B 4 23. R to Q 3 23. Q R to Q sq 24. P to K Kt 4 24. Q to K B sq (/) 25. R to K R 3 25. K to Kt sq 26. Q to Q 3 26. P to K Kt 3 27. P to Q Kt 4 27. B to K B 3 28. KttoKB3 28. B to Q B sq 29. P to Q 5 29. B to K Kt 2 30. P to Q 6 30. P takes P 31. P takes P 31. Kt to Q B 2 32. R takes K R P 32. K takes E 33. Kt from K B 3 to K Kt 5 (oh) 33. K to Kt sq 34. Q to K R 3 34. B to K R 3 35. Kt to B 6 (ch) 35. Q takes Kt 36. R takes R (ch) 36. Kt takes R 37. B takes Q 37. B takes Kt 38. B takes B {g) And Black resigned. (/) If Black had taken this Pawn en passant, White would have played 25. R to K B 3. (g) An elegant termination to a well-contested gama ! 216 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL, Game XL — Between the same opponents. (From " The Westminster Papers.") White (Mr. Zukertort). 1. P to K 4 2. Kt to K B 3 3. B to Q Kt 5 4. B to R 4 5. P to Q 3 (a) 6. B takes Kt 7. P to K R 3 8. KttoQBS 9. Castles 10. P to Q 4 11. Q to K 2 12. B to K 3 13. P to Q Kt 3 14. Q to Q 2 15. Kt to Q 5 16. Kt takes B (ch) 17. B takes Q 18. B to Q Kt 4 19. P takes P 20. Kt to Kt 5 (ck) 21. Kt takes P 22. Kt to Kt 5 23. B to Q 2 24. P to K B 4 25. B takes P 26. Q R to K sq 27. P to K Kt 4 28. P to K 5 29. Kt to K B 3 30. Kt to Q 4 31. B to Q B sq 32. R takes R 33. K to Kt 2 34. Kt to K B 5 35. Kt to Kt 3 36. B to Q 2 Black (Mr. Wisker). 1. PtoK4 2. Kt to Q B 3 3. P to Q R 3 4. Kt to K B 3 5. P to Q 3 6. P takes B 7. B to K 2 8. Castles 9. Kt to K sq 10. P to B 3 11. B to K 3 12. Q to Q Kt sq 13. Q toQ Kt5 14. Q R to Q sq (6) 15. Q takes Q 16. K to B 2 17. K takes Kt 18. K to B 2 19. K B P takes P 20. K to K 2 21. R to KB 5 22. R to K R 5 23. Kt to K B 3 24. P takes P 25. R to R 4 26. Kt to Q 2 27. R from R 4 to K R sq 28. P to Q 4 29. Q R to K B sq 30. Kt to Q B 4 31. R takes R 32. Kt to K 5 33. K to Q 2 34. P to K Kt 3 35. Kt to Q B 6 36. Kt to Q Kt 4 Notes hy the Author, (a) This is inferior, in tlie opinion of most authorities, to Castling or 1" to Q 4. ^b) Q to Q Kt 2 might have been played here perhaps more advantageously. THE KNIGHT'S GAME OF RUY LOPEZ. 217 37. E to B 6 37. P to Q 5 38. R takes P 38. B to Q 4 (ch) 39. K to B 2 39. P to Q 6 (c) 40. B to Kt 7 (ch) 40. K to K sq 41. P to Q B 4 41. Kt to Q 5 42. P takes B 42. Kt to B 6 (ch) 43. K to Kt 2 43. Kt takes B 44. P to Q 6 44. p takes P 45. P takes P 45. Kt takes Q Kt P 46. Kt to K B 5 46. P to Q 7 47. Kt to K 3 47. Kt to Q 5 48. E to Q Kt 7 48. E to E 3 49. P to Q 7 (ch) 49. K to Q sq 50. E to Q Kt 2 50. Kt to K B 6 51. K takes Kt 51. R takes P (ch) 52. K to B 4 52. E takes Kt 53. E takes P 53. R to K 8 54. P to Kt 5 54. P to B 4 55. P to Kt 6 55. P to B 5 56. E to Q B 2 56. K takes P 57. E takes P 57. K to K 2 58. R to Q B 6 58. K to B sq 59. E takes P 59. K to Kt 2 60. K to B 5 60. E to K B 8 (ch) 61. K to K 5 61. R to Kt 8 62. P to Q R 4 62. R to Kt 4 (ch) 63. K to B 4 63. R to Q B 4 64. K to K 4 64. E to K Kt 4 65. P to R 5 65. R to K R 4 66. K to Q 4 66. R to K Kt 4 67. K to Q B 4 67. R to Kt 5 (ch) 68. K to Q Kt 5 68. R to K Kt 4 (ch) 69. K to Q Kt 6 69. R takes P (ch) 70. K to Kt 7 70. Resigns (d) (c) "Well played ! If P takes P then Kt to Q 5, &c. {d) We think as Black had a good chance to draw, his resignation of the game was premature. 218 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. Game XII. — Between Messrs, Moepht and Schultbn. White (Mr. Morphy). Black (Mr. Sohulten). L P to K 4 I. P to K 4 2. Kt to K B 3 2. Kt to Q B 3 3. B fo Q Kt 5 3. B to Q B 4 (a) 4. P to Q B 3 4. K Kt to K 2 5. Castles 5. Castles 6. r to Q 4 6. P takes P 7. P tal-es P 7. B to Q Kt 3 8. P to Q 5 8. Kt to Q Kt sq 9. P to Q 6 9. P takes P 10. B to K B 4 (b) 10. B to Q B 2 (c) 11. Kt to Q B 3 11. P to Q R 3 > 12. B to Q B 4 12. P to Q Kt 4 13. B fe: Q Kt 3 13. B to Q Kt 2 14. Q B takes P 14. B takes B 15. Q takes B 15. P to K R 3 16. Q R to Q sq 16. Kt to Q B .■»q 17. Q to K B 4 17. Kt to Q Kt 3 18. Kt to K 5 18. Q to K B 3 19. Q takes Q 19. P takes Q 20. Kt to K Kt 4 20. K to Kt 2 21. Kt takes B P 21. B to Q B 3 22. P to K 5 22. P to Q R 4 23. R to Q 3 23. R to K R sq 24. Q Kt to Q 5 24. Kt to Q B 5 25. B takes Kt 25. P takes B 26. R to K Kt 3 (oh) 26. K to B sq 27. Kt to Q Kt 6 27. R to Q R 2 28. K R to Q sq 28. B to Kt 4 29. R to Q 4 29. R to Q B 2 30. K R to K Kt 4, and wins. (a) A bad move in this opening, inasmuch as it permits the first player to establish his Pawns in the centre with a strong attack. The only object of such a weak move is to terayjt White to capture the Knight with Bishop, and afterwards take Pawn with Knight, upon which Black would play Q to Q 5, compelling White to retreat his Kt to Q 3, with a very bad game ; but as White is not oom- pellei to adopt this mode of play, the move of 3 B to Q B 4 for Black is a radically untenable defence. (6) This move is recommended by Max Lange {see the " Schachpartien, '' Game XIX. p. 51), and is far stronger than the old move of 10. Q takes P, wMch can be answered by 10. B to B 2, upon which the White Queen is obliged to retreat to Q R 3, and Black escapes from his difficulties. (c) We should have preferred sacrificing the Pawn at once, in order to relieve Black from his cramped position. THE KNIGHT'S GAME OF RUY LOPEZ. 219 Game XIII. — Between Messrs. Moepht and Andbrssen. White (Mr. Morphy). Black (Mr. Anderssen). 1. PtoK4 1. P to K 4 2. Kt to K B 3 2. Kt to Q B 3 3. B to Q Kt 5 3. Kt to K B 3 4. P to Q 4 (a) 4. Q Kt takes P (h) 5. Kt takes Kt 5. P takes Kt 6. P to K 5 6. P to Q B 3 (c) 7. Castles (d) 7. P takes B 8. B to K Kt 5 8. B to K 2 9. P takes Kt 9. B takes P 10. E to K sq (ch) 10. K to B sq 11. B takes B 11. Q takes B 12. P to Q B 3 (e) 12. P to Q 4 13. P takes P 13. B to K 3 14. Kt to Q B 3 14. P to Q E 3 15. E to K 5 15. E to Q sq 16. Q to Q Kt 3 16. Q to K 2 17. Q E to K sq 17. P to K Kt 4 18. Q to Q sq 18. Q to K B 3 19. Q R to K 3 19. R to K Kt sq 20. E takes B And Black resigned. (a) This move is recommended by Max Lange in the "Schachpartien," p. 55. Lowenthal, however, prefers Castling at this juncture. 4 Q to K 2 only leads to an even game. {See Games of the Chess Congress, 1862, jj. 28.) (J) 4 K Kt takes K P is preferable when the correct continuation is — t; P takes P „ Castles 5. 6. B to K 2 Castles, even game. (c) Kt to K 5 appears a better move than this. (d) This is far stronger than taking the Knight, which would give Black a good P takes Kt g P to Q B 3 ^ Q takes P Q to K 4 (ch) ■ Q takes B " P takes P Q takes K B F ' game: e.g., 7. 10. R to K Kt sq, &c. (e) Max Lange plays Kt to Q R 3 here, which is perhaps better than the move in the text. 220 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. Game XIV. — Between Messrs. Dubois and Bienes. (From " The Games of the Congress.") White (Mr. Barnes). Black (Mr. Duhois). 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 2. Kt to K B 3 2. Kt to Q B 3 3. B to Q Kt 5 3. Kt to K B 3 4. P to Q 4 4. Kt takes K P (a) 5. P takes P 5. B to K 2 6. Castles 6. Castles 7. Q to Q 5 7. Kt to Q B 4 8. B to K 3 8. Kt to K 3 9. Kt to Q B 3 9. P to Q R 3 10. B takes Kt 10. Kt P takes B 11. Q to Q Kt 3 11. P to Q 4 12. P takes P {en passant) 12. P takes P 13. Kt to Q R 4 13. PtoQ4 14. Q R to Q sq 14. Q to Q B 2 15. P to Q B 4 15. R to Q Kt sq 16. Q to Q B 2 16. P takes P 17. Q takes B P 17. P to Q B 4 18. P to Q Kt 3 18. R to Q Kt 5 19. Q to Q B 2 19. B to Q Kt 2 20. Kt to Q 2 20. B to Q 3 21. P to K Kt 3 21. E to K Kt 22.- P to K B 4 22. Kt takes K B P 23. B takes Kt 23. B takes B 24. Kt to K B 3 24. B takes K Kt P 25. K to R sq (6) 25. R to K R 5 26. R to Q 2 '26. Q to K B 5 27. Q to Q 3 27. B to K 5 28. Q to B 3 28. B to K 8 29. R takes B 29. B takes Kt (ch) 30. K to Kt sq 30. R to Kt 5 (ch) SI. K lO B sq 31. B to Kt 7 (ch) 32. K to K 2 32. E to K sq (ch) (a) This is a better move than Q Kt takes P, for the result of which line of play see preceding Game. (6) Apparently White's best resource. Taking the Bishop would be worse, because Black could regain the piece at once, thus : Suppose 26. ^?i''5?J? "^ R takes P (cli) 26. K moves E or B takes Kt, winning the piece and the game. THE KNIGHT'S GAME OF RUY LOPEZ. am 33. K to Q 3 34. Q takes Q B P 35. K to B 3 33. R takes E, 34. B to K 5 (ch) 35. El to B 8 (ch), and wins. Game XV. — Between Messrs. Belaiepp and Anderssen. (J>oin " The Glowworm.") White (Mr. Belaieff). Black (Mr. Anderssen). 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 2. Kt to K B 3 2. Kt to Q B 3 3. B to Q Kt 5 3. Kt to K B 3 4. Castles 4. Kt takes P 5. P to Q 4 5. B to K 2 6. P to Q 5 6. Kt to Q 3 (a) 7. B takes Kt 7. P to K 5 8. Kt to K 5 8. Kt P takes B 9. P takes P 9. Castles 10. Kt takes Q P 10. B takes Kt 11. P takes B 11. Q takes P 12. Kt to Q B 3 12. Q R to Q sq 13. Q to K 2 13. Q to Q B 3 14. B to K 3 14. P to K B 4 15. QRtoQsq 15. P to K B 5 16. Kt to Q 5 (b) 16. B to K Kt 4 (c) 17. Q to K Kt 4 17. P takes B 18. Q takes B 18. Q takes B P 19. P takes P 19. K to R sq 20. R to Q B sq 20. Q takes Q Kt P 21. Q to K 7 21. Kt to K B 4 22. Q takes K P 22. P to Q B 3 23. R takes P 23. Q to Q Kt 4 (d) Notes by Herr LiiwentTial. (a) Black has two other moves here, viz., 6 Kt to his square, and 6 Kt to Q 5. The latter occurs in the second game of the match hetween Harrwitz and Lowenthal. (b) This counter- stroke is White's best play. (c) The best reply. (d) Finely played, as it attacks three pieces at once. 222 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. 24. Q to Q B 4 24. R takes Kt (e) 25. R to Q B 8 (/) 25. K to Kt sq 26. Q takes Q (g) 26. R takes Q 27. R takes R (ch) 27. K takes R 28. P to K 4 28. P to K Kt 3 29. P to K Kt 4 29. R to Q Kt 5 30. Kt P takes Kt 30. P takes P 31. R takes P (cli) 31. K to Kt 2 32. B to Q R 5 32. R takes P 33. R takes P (ch) 33. K to Kt 3 Drawn game. Game XVl.—Betioeen Messrs. Barnes and Green.. (From " The Games of the Congress.") White (Mr. Barnes). Black (Mr. Green). 1. Pto K4 1. P to K 4 2. Kt to K B 3 2. Kt to Q B 3 3. B to Q Kt 5 3. B to Q B 4 4. Castles 4. Q to K B 3 5. P to Q B 3 5. K Kt to K 2 6. B takes Kt 6. Kt takes B 7. P to Q 4 7. P takes P 8. P to K 5 8. Q to K Kt 3 9. P takes P 9. B to Kt 3 10. Q Kt to B 3 10. Q to K R 4 11. P to Q 5 11. Kt to Q sq 12. Kt to K 4 12. Castles 13. Kt to K Kt 3 13. Q to K Kt 5 14. K to R sq 14. P to Q 3 15. P to K R 3 15. Q to Q 2 16. B to K B 4 16. P takes P 17. Kt takes P 17. Q to K 2 (e) Better than Q takes Knight. (/) Very ingenious, but Q takes Q is also good. (g) If 26. R takes Kt then 26. Q to Q Kt 8 (ch) 27. K to K B sq 28. Q takes Q 29. P to K E 3 27. Q takes R (ch) 28. R takes R 29. Q R to B 4, &c. THE KNIGHT'S GAME OF RUY LOPEZ. 223 18. Q to K R 6 18. P to K B 3 19. Kt to K Kt 4 19. Q to K B 2 20. Q to K E 4 20. Q takes Q P 21. Kt to K R 5 21. B takes Kt 22. Q takes B 22. Q to K B 2 23. Q R to K sq 23. Kt to Q B 3 24. B to K R 6 24. Kt to K 4 25. Q takes P (ch) 25. Q takes Q 26. B takes Q 26. R to K B 2 27. B takes B P 27. Kt to Q 6 28. R to K 2 28. Q R to K B sq 29. R to Q 2 29. Kt to Q B 4 30. B to R 4 30. Kt to K 5 31. R to K 2 31. Kt takes P fch) 32. B takes Kt 32. B takes B (a) 33. P to K Kt 4 33. B to Q 5 34. R takes R 34. R takes R 35. K to Kt 2 35. K to B sq 36. Kt to K Kt 3 36. P to Q B 4 37. Kt to K B 5 37. P to Q R 3 38. R to Q 2 38. R to Q 2 39. K to B 3 39. K to K sq 40. Kt takes B 40. P takes Kt 41. K to K 4 41. R to K Kt 2 42. R takes P And White eventually won the game through his extra Pawn. Game XVII. — Between Messrs. Barnes and Mongeedibn. (From " The Games of the Congress.") White (Mr. Barnes). Black (Mr. Mongredien). 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 2. Kt to K B 3 2. Kt to Q B 3 3. B to Q Kt 5 3. B to Q B 4 4. Castles 4. K Kt to K 2 (a) (a) R takes B would have secured the draw. (a) Q to K 2, as recommended by Mr. Boden, can also be played here. 224 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. 5. P to y B 3 5. P to Q 3 (J) 6. P to Q 4 6. P takes P 7. P takes P 7. B to Q Kt 3 8. P to Q 5 8. P to Q R 3 9. B to Q R 4 9. Oastles 10. P takes Kt 10. P takes P 11. B to K Kt 5 11. P to K B 3 12. B to K R 4 12. P to Q 4 13. Kt to Q B 3 13. P to Q 5 14. Kt to K 2 14. P to Q B 4 15. Q to Q 3 15. P to Q R 4 16. Kt to Q 2 16. B to Q E 3 17. B to Kt 3 (ch) 17. K to R sq 18. B to B 4 18. B to Kt 2 19. Kt to B 4 19. Q to Q 2 20. Kt to K 6 20. K R to K sq 21. B to K Kt 3 21. Kt to Q B 3 22. Kt to K B 4 22. Kt to K 4 23. Q to K 2 23. Kt takes B 24. Kt takes Kt 24. Q B takes P 25. Q to Q 2 25. Q to K B 2 26. P to Q Kt 3 26. P to K Kt 4 27. Kt to Q 3 27. Q to K Kt 3 28. Q R to Q sq 28. P to K E 4 29. P to K B 3 29. B to K B 4 30. P to K R 4 30. K R to K Kt sq (c) 31. P takes P 31. B takes Kt 32. Q takes B 32. Q takes P 33. R to K B 2 33. Q takes B 34. Q R to K sq 34. Q R to K sq 35. R takes R 35. R takes R 36. R to K 2 36. R to K Kt sq 37. Q to K B 6 37. Q to Kt 4 38. Q to Q 7 38. P to K R 5 39. K to R sq 39. R to Kt 2 40. Q to K 8 (ch) 40. K to R 2 41. Kt to Q 2 41. P to K B 4 42. P to K B 4 42. Q to K Kt 3 (d) 43. Kt to K B 3 43. Q takes Q 44. R takes Q 44. R to Kt 5 45. Kt to Kt 5 (ch) 45. K to Kt 2 46. R to K 7 (ch) 46. K to Kt 3 (J) A blunder that loses a piece. (c) Black ought now to win without difficulty. (d) What was the objection to taking the Pawn ? THE KNIGHT'S GAME OF RUY LOPEZ. 236 47. R to K 6 (ch) 48. KttoB7 49. E to K 8 50. Kt to K 5 51. E to K B 8 52. R takes P 53. R to B 6 (ch) 54. R takes P 55. P takes B 56. R to Q 6 57. R to Q 5 58. R takes Q B P 59. P to K 6 60. R to K 5 61. R to K 2 62. R to Q 2 63. K to Kt s(i 64. K to B 2 65. K to B 3 66. P to Q R 3 . 67. K to K 3 68. R takes P 69. K takes R 70. K to K 2 71. P takes P (ch) 72. P to Kt 4, and wins 47. KtoR4 48. R to Kt 3 49. R to Kt 2 50. KtoR3 51. P to Q B 3 52. B to Q B 2 53. K to R 2 54. B takes Kt 55. RtoQ2 56. RtoK2 57. K to Kt 2 58. RtoQ2 59. RtoQ3 60. K to.B sq 61. PtoQ6 62. KtoK2 63. K takes P 64. KtoB4 65. RtoQ4 66. K to K 4 (e) 67. K toB4 68. R takes R (ch) 69. K to Kt 5 70. PtoR6 71. K takes P Game XYlll.— Between Messrs. Bird and Wiskeb. (From " The Westminster Papers.") White (Mr. Bird). Black (Mr. Wisker). 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 2. Kt to K B 3 2. Kt to Q B 3 3. B to Q Kt 5 3. P to Q R 3 (e) Another fatal mistake. R to Q 3 must have insured a draw. It is lamentahle to see a game lost that ought to have heen so easily won ; mais c'est k acH de la guerre. THE CHESS-PLAYEK'S MANUAL. 4. B to Q R 4 4. K Kt to B 3 5. Q to K 2 5. P to Q Kt 4 6. B to Q Kt 3 6. B to K 2 7. P to Q B 3 7. P to Q 3 8. P to Q 4 8. B to K Kt 5 9. B to K 3 9- Castles 10. Kt to Q 2 10. P to Q 4 11. P takes Q P H- Kt takes P 12. Castles (K R) 12. P takes P 13. Q B P takes P 13. B to K B 3 (a) 14. Q to Q 3 14. R to K sq 15. P to Q R 3 15. Q to Q 2 16. K R to K sq 16. B to K B 4 17. Q to K B sq (6) 17. Kt to Q Kt 3 18. KRtoQsq 18. Q R to Q sq 19. Q R to Q B sq 19. B takes Q P 20. Kt takes B 20. Kt takes Kt 21. B takes Kt 21. Q takes B 22. R takes P 22. B to K Kt 3 (c) 23. QRtoQB3 23. B to Q 6 (ci) 24. Kt to B 3 24. Q takes R (e) 25. P takes Q 25. B takes Q 26. R takes R 26. R takes R 27. K takes B 27. R to Q 6 And White resigned. Game XIX. — Between Messrs. Bird and Wisker. (From " The Westminster Papers.") White (Mr. Bird). Black (Mr. Wisker). 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 2. K Kt to B 3 2. Q Kt to B 3 Notes by Mr. Wisker. (a) The isolated Queen's Pawn is very difficult to defend. In all the othei Ruy Lopez Games Mr. Bird moved his Queen's Pawn one. The better play. (J) This uufavonrable position of the Queen leaves Black with the advantage. Had the Queen been played to K 2, Kt to K B 5 of course follows. (c) Though the second player has not won a Pawn, he remains with a great advantage of position. (d) This decisive {coup) was not feasible on the previous move on account of B takes K B P check. No reply can now be made. (e) White overlooked this response. THE KNIGHT'S GAME OF BUY LOPEZ. 3. BtoQKt5 3. PtoQR3 4. B to Q R 4 4. K Kt to B 3 5- QtoK2 5. PtoQKt4 6. B to Kt 3 6. B to K 2 7. P to Q R 4 7. R to Q Kt sq 8. P takes P 8. P takes P 9-PtoQ3 9. PtoQ3 10. B to Kt 5 10. Castles 11. B takes Kt 11. B takes B 12. B to Q 5 (a) 12. Kt to K 2 13. B to Kt 3 13. Kt to K Kt 3 14. PtoKKtS 14. BtoKR6 15. Q Kt to B 3 15. P to Q B 3 16. K Kt to Q 2 16. Q to Q 2 (J) 17. P to K B 3 17. Q R to Q R sq 18. Q R to Q Kt sq 18. K to K B sq 19. Q Kt to Q sq 19. B to K Kt 4 20. Q Kt to K B 2 20. B to K 3 21. B takes B 21. Q takes B 22. Castles 22. P to K B 4 23. Q R to Q E sq 23. P to Q 4 24. K Kt to Q Kt 3 24. B to K 2 25. K to Kt 2 25. Q R to Q sq 26. P takes K B P 26. Q takes P 27. P to Q 4 (c) 27. B to Q 3 28. Kt to Q 3 28. Q R to K sq 29. P takes P 29. B takes P 30. Q to Q 2 30. R to K 2 31. Q R to K sq 31. K R to K aq 32. R to K 2 32. P to K B. 4 (d) 33. K R to K sq 33. P to K R 5 34. Kt takes B 34. Kt takes Kt 35. Kt to Q 4 35. P to R 6 (ch) 36. K to B 2 36. Q to K B 3 Notes by Mr. Wisher. (a) The exchange of Bishop for Knight at the preceding move was weak. The subsequent play of the other Bisliop is an obvious loss of time, giving Black the advantage of position. (6) Black might now have prepared for the advance of the K B P. (c) White has successfully emerged from his diflSculties. (d) A very unwise course. Black should have withdrawn his Bishop and sub- mitted to the exchange of Rooks. <12 228 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. 37. Q takes Q 38. Kt to K Kt 3 39. E takes B, 40. Kt takes R 41. K to Kt sq 42. KtoB2 43. KtoB3 44. P to Kt 3 45. K to B 2 46. K to Kt 2 47. K to B 2 48. P takes P 49. KttoKtsq 50. Kt to K 2 And Black resigned. 37. Q to K B 4 (e) 38. P takes Q 39. E takes R 40. E takes R 41. P to Q Kt 4 42. K to Kt 3 43. K takes P 44. K to Kt 4 45. PtoR4 46. K to Kt 5 47. P to K B 5 48. P to K B 4 49. Kt takes P 50. Kt to Q 4 51. P to K B 5 Game XX. — Between Messrs. Anderssen and Blaceburne. Played in the International Tourney at Vienna. (From " The Chess Players' Chronicle.") White (Mr. Anderssen). Black (Mr. Blackbume). 1. PtoK4 1. P to K 4 2. Kt to K B 3 2. Kt to Q B 3 3. B to Q Kt 5 3. Kt to Q 5 (a) 4. Kt takes Kt 4. P takes Kt 5. P to Q 3 5. P to Q B 3 6. B to (J B 4 6. Kt to K B 3 7. Castles 7. P to Q 4 8. P takes P 8. Kt takes P 9. Kt to Q 2 9. B to K 3 (e) Forcing the exchange of pieces, and remaining with a won position in the end game. White's play has heon remarkahly good since his defects in the opening. Notes hy the Editor of " The Chess Players' Chronicle." {a) This move is condemned by the Books, though it is played very generally by Mr. Bird, and with success. THE KNIGHT'S GAME OF RUY LOPEZ. 10. Kt to K 4 10. B to K 2 11. Q to K 2 11. Castles 12. B to Q 2 12. Q to Q 2 13. g R to K sq 13. Q R to K sq 14. P to K B 4 14. P to K B 4 15. Kt to Kt 3 15. B to Q B 4 (J) 16. Q to K B 3 16. Kt to K 6 17. B takes Kt 17. P takes B 18. Q to K 2 (c) 18. B takes B 19. P takes B 19. R to K B 3 20. R to Q sq 20. R to Q 3 21. R takes R 21. Q takes R 22. Kt takes P {d) 22. Q to K B 3 23. P to K Kt 4 23. R to Q sq 24. R to K sq 24. Q takes P 25. P to K Kt 5 25. Q to Q B 6 26. K to R sq 26. Q to Q 7 27. Q takes Q (e) 27. P takes Q 28. R to Q sq 28. B to Q Kt 5 29. K to Kt 2 29. R to K sq 30. ? to Q B 3 30. B takes P 31. K to B 2 31. P to Q B 4 And White resigned. Game XXI. — Between Messrs. Steinitz and Andehssbn. (From " The Westminster Papers.") White (Mr. Anderssen). Black (Herr Steinitz). 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 2. Kt to K B 3 2. Kt to Q B 3 3. B to Q Kt 5 3. P to Q R 3 (J) Very well played. Black has now a strong position. (c) Preventing the advance of the Pawn. (d) This Pawn is only lent for a time, and it must be iiaid back with interest Black strengthening his position by R to Q sq. (e) If 27. Kt takes E P 27. Q takes Q 28. R takes Q 28. R to K sq dnd Mr. Anderssen could only have resigned. 230 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. 4. B to R 4 4. Kt to K B 3 (a) 5. P to Q 3 5. P to Q 3 6. B takes Kt (ch) 6. P takes B 7. P to K R 3 7. P to K Kt 3 8. Kt to Q B 3 8. B to K Kt 2 9. B to K 3 9. R to Q Kt sq 10. P to Q Kt 3 10. P to Q B 4 11. Q to Q2 11. P to KR3 12. P to K Kt 4 12, Kt to Kt sq 13. Castles (Q R) (b) 13. Kt to K 2 14. Kt to K 2 14. Kt to B 3 (c) 15. Q to B 3 15 Kt to Q 5 16. K Kt to Kt sq 16. Castles 17. Kt to Kt 3 17. B to K 3 18. K Kt to K 2 (d) 18. Q to Q 2 19. B takes Kt 19. B P takes B 20. Q to Kt 2 (e) 20. P to Q R 4 21. K to Q 2 21. P to Q 4 (/) 22. P to K B 3 22. Q to K 2 23. Q R to K B sq 23. Q to Kt 5 (ch) 24. K to Q sq (g) 24. P to Q R 5 25. R to R 2 25. P to Q B 4 26. Kt to Q B sq 26. P to B 5 {h) 27. P to Q R 3 27. Q to K 2 28. P to Q Kt 4 28. P to B 6 29. Q to R sq 29. Q to Kt 4 30. Q R to B 2 30. P to B 4 31. K P takes B P 31. P takes P 32. P to R 4 32. Q to Kt 3 33. Kt takes P 33. B takes Kt Notes by Mr. Wisher. (a) Warned by his experience with Mr. Blaokburne, Herr Steinitz this time adopts the true lines of defence. (6) This is indeed a daring course in face of Black's open file. (c) Surely 14. B to K 3 with a view of P to Q R i would be better than this slow process. {d) White appears to be hampered by the task of finding suitable employment. He might as well have taken oflF the hostile Knight a little earlier. (e) Apparently a necessity, and a ruinous one. (/) Securing a great superiority. (g) The results of Castling on the Queen's side are now clearly apparent. White's Queen is out of the game, his King is in danger, and his pieces on the King's side have no range. (K) 26. P to Q R 6 would have driven the White Queen to R sq, completely shutting her out of the game. THE KNIGHT'S GAME OF RUY LOPEZ. 231 34. P takes B 34. R takes B P 35. Kt to K 2 35. Q R to K B sq 36. Q to E 2 (i) 36. Q to B 2 37. R to R 3 37. K to R 2 38. Kt to Kt sq 38. B to B 3 39. K to K 2 39. R to K Ktsq 40. K to B sq 40. B to K 2 41. Kt to K 2 41. R to R 4 42. P to B 4 42. B takes R P 43. Q E to B 3 43. P to K 5 44. P takes P 44. Q to Kt 3 45. Kt to Kt 3 45. B takes Kt And White resigned. Game XXll.—Behoeen Messrs. Steinitz and Bird. (From " The Westminster Papers.") White (Mr. Bird). Black (Herr Steinitz), 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 2. K Kt to B 3 2. Q Kt to B 3 3. B to Kt 5 3. P to Q R 3 4. B to R 4 4. Kt to B 3 5. Castles 5. Kt takes P 6. P to Q 4 6. P to Q Kt 4 7. B to Kt 3 7. P to Q 4 8. Kt takes P (a) 8. Kt takes Kt 9. P takes Kt 9. P to Q B 3 10. P to Q B 3 10. B to Q B 4 — ) ^//////,yA„ W//////M ^ ^^» M» , &/// '! !?; ffl Let the student refer to the above diagram for the three fol- lowing Variations : — 6. Q to K 2 This is the move advised by Mr. Lowenthal, but we cannot think it so good as P takes Kt. THE QUEEN'S BISHOP'S PAWN'S GAME IN THE 245 KING'S KNIGHT'S OPENING. 6. Kt takes K B P 7. P taJkes Q Kt 7. Kt takes E 8. B to K 3 8. B takes B 9. Q takes B 9. Castles 10. P takes Q P 10. Q B takes P With the better game. Vaeiation (II.) On White's sixth move : — 6. Q to Q E 4 6. Kt takes B P 7. E to Kt sq 7. Kt to K 2 8. P to Q Kt 4 8. Kt to Q 6 (ch) 9. B takes Kt 9. B takes E 10. Kt takes B 10. Kt takes P With a very superior game. Vaeiation (III.) On White's sixth move 6. BtoK3 6. B takes B 7. P takes B 7. Kt to Kt sq 8. B to Q 3 8. Kt to Q B 4 9. Kt takes K P 9. Q to K 2 10. Kt to Q B 4 10. P to Q Kt 4 11. K Kt to Q E 3 11. Q takes P (ch) IS. BtoK2 IS. P to Q E 3 And again Black has the advantage. The above Variations are from the " Handbuch," and tend 246 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. to show that 6. P takes Q Kt is White's best move in this game. Mr. Staunton is also of this opinion. GAME THE SECOND. WHITE. BLACK. 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 S. Kt to K B 3 a. Kt to Q B 3 3. P to Q B 3 3. P to Q 4 This defence has the recommendation of being adopted by Mr. Steinitz. Mr. Lowenthal considers it inferior to Kt to K B 3 ; but we are of opinion, on the contrary, that it is Black's strongest move. 4. B to Q Kt 5 (best) White can also play 4. Q to Q E 4, a move invented by Mr. Janssens. {See Illustrative Games IV. and V.) Black's best replies to 4. Q to Q E 4 are P to K B 3, — a discovery of Mr. Steinitz, or Q to Q 3, as advised in the " Praxis." 4. P takes P (best) 5. Kt takes K P 6. Q to Q 4 (best) This is far superior to plajong Q to K Kt 4, as given in the " Handbook," which loses the game at once. e. Q to Q E 4 6. K Kt to K 2 7. P to K B 4 7. P takes P (en passant) 8. Kt takes P 8. P to Q E 3 9. B to Q B 4 9. Q to K 5 (ch) THE QUEEN'S BISHOP'S PAWN'S GAME IN THE KING'S KNIGHT'S OPENING. 247 10. KtoB2 10. B to K 3 (best) 11. Pto Q3 11. Q to K B 4 12. B takes B IS. P takes B 13. R to K sq 13. Castles. 14. P to Q 4 14. Kt to K Kt 3 15. Q to Q Kt 3 15. PtoK4 16. K to Kt sq 16. P takes P 17. B to K Kt 5 17. K Kt to K 2 18. P takes P 18. P to K R 3 19. B takes Kt 19. B takes B And Black has at least as good a game as White. The above moves, which can hardly be improved, actually occurred in a consultation game, which we extract from the " Handbook," between Messrs. Harrwitz and Von Carnap plaving against Messrs. Evans and Perigal. GAME THE THIRD. WHITE. 1. P to K 4 2. Kt to K B 3 3. P to Q B 3 BLACK. 1. P to K 4 2. Kt to Q B 3 3. P to K B 4 This defence is universally condemned. It is the invention of the Italian, Ponziani. The following analysis demonstrates its inferiority : — 4. P to Q 4 (best) 4. P to Q 3 (best) This is also given as best in the " Praxis." (If 4. P takes K P, the usual move, then White should continue the attack, 248 THE CHESS-PLAYEB,'8 MANUAL. , Kt ta kes P g P to K B 4 w Kt takes Kt g P to Q 5 Q to KB 3 ■ P to Q 3 ' P takes Kt " B to Q 2 9. B to Q B 4, with an unquestionable advantage in position. See also Illustrative Game IX.) 5. PtakesKP (B to Q Kt 5 is also a good move for White here.) 5. B P take sP 6. Kt to K Kt 5 6. Pto Q4 7. P to K 6 7. Q Kt to ] K 4 (best) If 7. Kt to K R 3 o B to Q Kt 5 or ■ Q to Q 3 (») „ PtoQB4 ■ P takes P ,„ B takes P ^^ Q takes Q (ch) K takes Q Kt to Q sq, &c. (») 8. P to K B 3. Mr. Staunton observes in the " Praxis," p. 237, that White seems to gain an immediate advantage by this move. The following continuation from the "Handbuch" appears, however, to point to an opposite conclusion : q Q takes P P takes P Kt to K 4, &c. 8, Q to Q 4 (best) 8. Q to Q 3 9. Kt to Q K 3 With the better game, since if Black now play P to Q R 3, White rejoins with 9. B to K B 4, when the following seems a likely continuation : — 9. P to Q R 3 10. B to K B 4 10. Kt to Q 6 or B|6 (ch) 11. Q or P takes Kt 11. Q takes B IS. Q takes Q P, or Kt to B 7, etc. The " Handbuch " gives for Black's ninth mo vb, imsply to 9. Kt to (^ R 3 THE QUEEN'S BISHOP'S PAWN'S GAME IN THE 249 KING'S KNIGHT'S OPENING. g j^Q Q to B 4 -^^ Kt to Q Kt 5, with a winning ■ Kt to Q B 3 ■ Kt to K E 3 position. GAME THE FOUETH. WHITE. BLACK. 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 2. Kt to K B 3 2. Kt to Q B 3 3. P to Q B 3 3. B to Q B 4 4. B to Q Kt 5 (best) White can also get a good game by playing 4. P to Q Kt 4, when the following is a good contiauation : — ,^ P to Q Kt 4 g P to Kt 5 g Kt takes K P ^ P to Q 4 ^"BtoKtS 'KttoQE^ "QtoK2 ' P to Q 3 g B_to_QJl3 9 Kt to K B 3 ^^ B to K 2 ■ P to K B 3 ■ Q takes K P (ch) ' K Kt to R 3 , , Castles , g B to Q 3, with a better position.) If in this variation Castles Black should play 8. Q to K R 5 instead of P to K B 3, White can still obtain the advantage thus : 9. - — ; -;;r%;-7^r", 10. Q takes K P (ch) K Kt to K 2 11. QKttoQ 2, &c. 4. P to Q R 3 The game is now reduced to a " Euy Lopez," and is much in favour of the attack. 5. B takes Kt 5. Kt P takes B 6. Kt takes P 6. Q to K 2 7. P to Q 4 7. B to Kt 3 8. Castles 8. P to K R 3 9. B to K B 4 9. Kt to B 3 10. Kt to Q 2 10. Caatles 11. R to K sq 11. B to Q Kt 2 250 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL 12. Q to Q B 2 IS. P to Q 3 13. K Kt to Q B 4 13. Q to Q 2 14. B takes Q P And White ought to win. The above moves occur in a game between Messrs. Lowen- thal and Mongredien, and establish conclusively the inferiority of the defence of 3. B to Q B 4. The two best defences to the Queen's Bishop's Pawn's opening are 3. P to Q 4 and 3. Kt to K B 3 • and we are of opinion that the former is to be preferred. GAME THE FIFTH. WHITE. 1. P to K 4 S. Kt to K B 3 3. P to Q B 3 4. P to Q 4 5. B to Q Kt 5 BLACK. 1. P to K 4 2. Kt to Q B 3 3. Kt to K B 3 4. P to Q 4 5. B to Q 2 The " Handbuch " remarks that 5. P takes K P is not good for Black here, e.g. : — 5. 6. Kt takes P P takes K P B to Q 2 y Q to R4 g P takes Kt , &c., Kt takes Kt but that Black may play 5. Kt takes K P thus : 5, Kt takes K P g Kt takes P ^ Q to Kt 3 g B takes Kt „ Castles ■ B to Q 2 ■ Kt to Q 3 ' B takes B ' B to K 2 In this latter variation we fail to see that White has any advantage. 6. Kt takes P 7. Kt takes B 8. Castles 6. Kt takes KP 7. Q takes Kt 8. Kt to Q 3 THE QUEEN'S BISHOP'S PAWN'S GAME IN THE 25J KING'S KNIGHT'S OPENING Black may also move 8. B to K 2 here. 9. B takes Kt 9. Q takes B 10. E to K sq (ch) 10. B to K 2 11. Q to K 2 11. Castles 12. B to B 4 13. K K to K sq And the " Handbuch " declares the game to be eveur. GAMES ILLUSTRATIVE OF THE QUEEN'S BISHOP'S PAWN'S GAME IN THE KING'S KNIGHT'S OPENING. Game I. — Between Messrs. Janssens and Hibschfeld. (From " The Chess Player's Magazine.") White (Mr, Jaassens). Black (Mr. Hirschfeld). 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 2. Kt to K B 3 2. Kt to Q B 3 3. PtoQB3 3. Kt to K B 3 4. P to Q 4 4. K Kt takes P 5. P to Q 5 5. Kt to K 2 {a) 6. Kt takes P 6. Kt to Kt 3 1. Kt takes Kt 7. R P takes Kt 8. B to Q 3 8. Kt to B 3 9. B to K Kt 5 9. B to Q B 4 10. KttoQ2 10. P to Q 3 11. Kt to K 4 11. B to Kt 3 12. Q to K 2 12. K to B sq 13. Castles (Q R) 13. B to K B 4 14. Q R to K sq (6) 14. B takes Kt 15. B takes B 15. Q to Q 2 16. Q to B 3 16. Kt to Kt 5 17. B takes Kt P 17. Kt to K 4 18. Q to K B 5 18. Q takes Q 19. B takes Q 19. B takes B P (a) We do not think Black can afford to f^ve up the Queen's Knight here by playing B to Q B 4. {See preceding Analysis.) If he retreats the Et to his square, White can either take the K P or play B to Q 3. (b) Better than Kt takes Kt, to which Black could have replied with B takes B. 252 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. 20. Q R to K B sq 20. B to R 5 21. B to K B 4 21. B to B 3 22. B takes Kt (c) 22. P takes B 23. K to B 2 23. Q E to Q sq 24. P to B 4 24. R to K R 5 25. P to Q Kt 3 25. P to Q Kt 4 26. P to K Kt 3 26. B to Q 5 27. R to Q sq 27. P takes P 28. R takes R 28. P takes P (ch) 29. P takes P 29. P takes R 30. B to K 4 30. R to Q Kt sq 31. B to Q 3 31. B to K 4 32. R to Q R sq 32. R to Kt 2 33. R to R 6 33. B to Q 3 34. R to B 6 34. R to Kt 3 35. B to B 4 35. R takes R 36. P takes R 36. K to K 2 37. K to Q 3 37. B to B 4 38. B to Q 5 38. P to B 3 39. K to B 4 39. K to Q 3 40. B to B 3 40. B to Kt 3 41. B to Kt 2 41. K to K 4 42. B to B 3 42. P to K B 4 43. B to Kt 2 43. B to R 4 44. K to Q 3 44. B to Kt 5 45. B to B 3 45. B to Q 3 46. K to B 4 46. P to Kt 4 47. P to K R 3 47. B to R 6 48. K to Q 3 48. B to B 8 49. K to K 2 49. B to K 6 50. K to Q 3 50. B to B 7 51. P to K Kt 4 51. K to B 5 52. B to K 2 52. K to Kt 6 53. P takes P 53. K takes P 54. P to B 6 54. B to K 8 55. K takes P 55. P to Kt 5 56. P to B 7 56. B to Q Kt 3 57. B to B sq (ch) 57. K to R 7 58. K to K 3 , 58. K to Kt 8 59. B to Q B 4 59. P to Kt 6 (c) We prefer White's game up to this point. Now, however, he throws away his advantage "hy exchanging pieces, the Bishops being on different colours. He ought to have kept his two Bishops, when he would have had the best of the encounter. THE QUEEN'S BISHOPS PAWN'S GAME IN THE 253 KING'S KNIGHT'S OPENING. 60. BtoQ5 61. KtoQ4 62. B takes P 63. KtoB4 64. K to Kt 5 65. KtoR6 66. K to Kt 7 67. P Queens as. K takes B P 60. P to Kt 7 61. K to B 7 62. K takes B 63. PtoR4 64. KtoB6 65. K toK5 66. BtoQ 3 67. B takes Q 68. K toQ4 And the game was drawn. Game II. — Between Messrs. Gossip and Mocatta. White (Mr. Mocatta). Black (Mr. Gossip). 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 2. Kt to K B 3 2. Kt to Q B 3 3. P to Q B 3 3. Kt to K B 3 4. P to Q 4 4. Kt takes K P 5. P to Q 5 5. B to Q B 4 (a) 6. P takes Kt (6) 6. B takes P (ch) (c) 7. KtoK2 7. Kt P takes P 8. Q to Q E 4 (d) 8. P to K B 4 9. Q Kt to Q 2 9. Castles 10. Kt takes Kt 10. P takes Kt 11. K takes B(«) 11. P to Q 4 12. B to K 3 12. B to K Kt 5 13. Q E to Q sq 13. Q to K E 5 (ch) {a) This defence, although ingenious, is in our opinion unsound. (J) The best moye. Q to K 2, B to K 3, or Q to Q R 4, are all more or less unsatisfactory. (.) BetterthantakingwithKnight: ..,., 6. g^^;^-^ 7. f^ g P takes P g Q takes Q B . Q B takes P {d) Necessary to avoid mate. (e) In his notes to this game in " The Illustrated London News," Mr. Staunton thinks Kt takes P would have been a better move at this point, and we concur Id that opinion. Sf34 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. 14. P to K Kt 3 (/) 14. E takes Kt (ch) 15. K to Kt SQ 15. R takes P (ch) 16. P takes R 16. Q takes P (ch) 17. B to Kt 2 17. Q takes Q B (ch) 18. K to R 2 18. E to K B sq 19. Q R to K B sq 19- Q to K R 3 (ch) 20. K to Kt 3 {g) 20. Q to K Kt 3 21. R takes R (oh) 21. K takes R 22. Q to Q Kt 4 (ch) 22. K to B 2 23. E to K B sq (ch) 23. B to K B 6 (dis ch) And Black mates in three moves. Game III.— Between Messrs. Janssens and Gossip. White (Mr. Janssens). Black. (Mr. Gossip). 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 2. Kt to K B 3 2. Kt to Q B 3 3. P to Q B 3 (a) 3. Kt to K B 3 4. P to Q 4 4. Kt takes K P 5. P to Q 5 (6) 5. B to Q B 4 6. P takes Kt 6. B takes K B P (ch) 7. K to K 2 7. Q Kt P takes P (c) 8. Q to Q R 4 8. P to K B 4 9. Q Kt to Q 2 9. B to Q Kt 3 {d) 10. Kt takes Kt 10. B P takes Kt 11. Q takes K P 11. Castles 12. Kt to K Kt 5 (e) 12. P to K Kt 3 13. K to Q sq 13. Q to K 2 14. B to Q 3 14. P to Q 4 15. Q to K R 4 15. P to K 5 (/) K to Kt sq would perhaps have been safer play. (g) K to Kt sq was the correct move. {a) Mr. Janssens seems to have devoted much attention to this opening, and is the author of some ingenious variations. (6) The " Strategic Raisonnee" gives this as White's best move, p. S39. (c) Not so good a move as 7. P to Q 4 recommended by Prdti and Staunton. (d) Perhaps Castling is better here. (e) B to K Kt 5 appears strougei'. THE QUEEN'S BISHOP'S PAWN'S GAME IN THE 255 KING'S KNIGHT'S OPENING. 16. B to K 2 16. P to K 6 ir. P to Q R 4 17. P to Q E 4 18. P to Q Kt 4 18. R to K B 4 19. Kt to K B 3 19. Q to K Kt 2 20. Kt to Q 4 20. P to K Kt 4 (/) 21. Kt takes R 21. B takes Kt 22. Q to K Kt 3 22. Q takes Q B P 23. Q takes K Kt P (ch) 23. B to K Kt 3 24. R to Q R 2 (g) 24. Q to Q Kt 6 (ch) 25. K to K sq 25. Q takes R 26. P to K R 4 26. Q to Q Kt 8 27. B to K B sq 27. Q takes B (ck) And White resigned. Game IV. — Between Messrs. Janssens and Brien. (From the " Praxis.") White (Mr. Janssens). Black (Mr. Brien). 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 2. Kt to K B 3 2. Kt to Q B 3 3. P to Q B 3 3. P to Q 4 (a) 4. Q to Q R 4 (b) 4. P takes P (c) 5. Kt takes P 5. Q to Q 4 6. Kt takes Kt 6. P takes Kt 7. B to Q B 4 7. Q to Q 2 8. Castles 8. B to Q 3 9. B to Q Kt 5 (d) 9. P takes B (/) Mr. Lowenthal, in his notes to this game in the " Era," characterises this more as very well conceived. ig) If R to Q Kt sq, Q to B 7 (ch), &c. Notes by the Author, (a) The strongest move at this point in our opinion. (J) This move is the invention of Mr. Janssens, but, although ingenious, hardly appears so strong as the usual move of B to Q Kt 5. (c) Q to Q 3 is a better move here, and P to K B 3 may also safely he played. {See next Game.) (d) An ingenious but unsound combination. 256 THE CHESS-PLAYEE'S MANUAL. 10. Q takes K P (ch) 10. Kt to K 2 11. Q takes R 11. P to Q B 3 12. P to Q 3 12. Castles 13. B to K 3 13. B to Kt 2 14. Q takes Q R P 14. P to Q B 4 15. QtoR3 15. QtoKKtS 16. P toKB3 16. QtoKE5 17. P to K B 4 17. Q to K Kt 5 18. R to K B 2 18. Q to Q 8 (ch) 19. R interposes 19. Q to K 7 20. B to B 2 20. Kt to B 4 21. y to Q Kt 3 21. B takes K Kt P 22. Kt to R 3 22. Q to Kt 5 23. B to Kt 3 23. Kt takes B. 24. P takes Kt 24. Q takes Kt P And wius. Game Y.— Between Messrs. Wiskbk and Steinitz. (From " The Transactions of the British Chess Association.") White (Mr. Wisker). Black (Mr. Steinitz). 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 2. Kt to K B 3 2. Kt to Q B 3 3. P to Q B 3 3. P to Q 4 4. Q to Q R 4 4. P to K B 3 (a) 5. B to Q Kt 5 5. K Kt to K 2 6. P takes P 6. Q takes P 7. Castles 7. B to Q 2 8. P to Q 4 (6) 8. P to K 5 9. Kt to K sq 9. P to Q E 3 10. B to Q B 4 10. Kt takes Q P 11. Q to Q Kt 4 (c) 11. PtoQB4 12. P takes Kt 12. P takes Q 13. B takes Q 13. Kt takes B 14. K Kt to Q B 2 14. R to Q B sq (a) This is quite a new move. The usual moves are Q to Q 3 and P takes P, both of which give White the better game. The line of play selected by Mr. Steinitz appears to be as sound as it is original. (jb) The correct move here would have been B to Q B 4. Ic) If 11 •'^__^!i5?_Q 12 ^ iii-'i^es Kt P ■ B takes Q ' Kt to K 7 (ch), &o. THE QUEEN'S BISHOP'S PAWN'S GAME IN THE KING'S KNIGHT'S OPENING. 267 15. Kt to K 3 16. Q Kt to Q 2 17. P to K B 3 18. K to R sq 19. K Kt to Q 5 20. Q Kt to Q Kt 3 21. K Kt to Kt 6 22. P to Q 5 23. B to K sq 24. Q Kt to R 5 25. Kt takes Q Kt P 26. Kt to Q 6 (ch) 27. Kt takes B 28. B takes P 29. Kt takes K Kt P 15. Kt to B 5 16. P to K B 4 17. Kt to K 7 (ch) 18. P to K B 5 19. PtoK6 20. BtoK3 21. RtoB7 22. B to K B 4 23. BtoK2 24. B to Q B 4 25. B takes Kt 26. KtoQ2 27. K R to Q B sq 28. P takes B 29. R to B 8, and wins. Game VI. — Between Messrs. Lowenthal and Mongredien. (From " The Games of the Chess Congress.") White (Mr. Lbwenthal). Black (Mr. Mongredien] 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 2. Kt to K B 3 2. Kt to Q B 3 3. P to Q B 3 3. B to Q B 4 4. B to Q Kt 5 4. P to Q R 3 5. B takes Kt 5. Kt P takes B 6. Kt takes P 6. Q to K 2 7. P to Q 4 7. B to Kt 3 8. Castles 8. P to K R 3 9. B to K B 4 9. Kt to B 3 10. Kt to Q 2 10. Castles 11. E to K sq 11. B to Q Kt 2 12. QtoQB2 12. P to Q 3 13. K Kt to Q B 4 13. QtoQ2 14. B takes QP 14. K E to K sq 15. K Kt takes B 15. P takes Kt 16. P to K 5 16. Kt to Q 4 17. P to Q B 4 17. Kt to K B 5 18. P to Q B 5 18. P takes P 19. P takes P 19. K R to K 3 20, Q to K 4 20. P to K Kt 4 21. Kt to Q B 4 21. Kt to Q 4 22. Q R to Q sq 22. Q to K sq THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. 23. R to Q 3 24. Q R to K B 3 25. Q E to Q Kt 3 26. R to Kt 7 27. Kt to Q R 5 28. Q to Q R 4 29. Q R to Kt 3 30. K R to Q sq 31. P toKR4 32. R P takes P 33. Q R to K Kt 3 34. Q to Q Kt 3 35. R to K 3 36. Q R to K Kt 3 37. Q. to Q B 4 38. R to Q Kt 3 39. E to Kt 7 40. Q to K 4 - 41. R takes R (ch) 42. P to K B 3 43. P takes P 44. P to K Kt 5 45. P to K 6 46. Q takes R P 47. Q to Q 4 (ch) 48. P to K 7 49. Q to K B 6 50. R to K B sq 51. Q to B 7 (ch) 52. P Queens (ch) 53. Q takes R (oh) 23. B to B sq 24. K R to Kt 3 25. BtoK3 26. Q to Q B sq 27. Q to K sq 28. B to Q B sq 29. BtoQ2 30. K R to K 3 31. P to K B 3 32. B P takes Kt P 33. K R to Kt 3 34. P to K R 4 35. K R to K 3 36. P to Kt 5 37. R to Kt 3 38. P to K R 5 39. BtoK 3 40. R to Kt 2 41. K takes R 42. QtoQ2 43. Kt to K 2 44. BtoQ4 45. Q to K sq 46. Kt to Kt 3 47. K to Kt sq 48. QtoQ2 49. BtoK 5 50. Q to K Kt 5 51. K to E sq 52. E takes Q And Black resigned. Game VIL — Between Messrs. Hampton and Bied. White (Mr. Hampton). Black (Mr. Bird). 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 2. Kt to K B 3 2. Kt to Q B 3 3. P to Q B 3 3. P to Q 4 4. B to Q Kt 5 4. P takes P THE QUEEN'S BISHOP'S PAWN'S GAME IN THE 259 KING'S KNIGHT'S OPENING. 5. Kt takes P 5. B to Q 2 (a) 6. Kt takes B 6. Q takes Kt 7. Q to K 2 7. Castles . 8. Castles 8. P to K B 4 9. R to Q sq 9. B to Q 3 10. P to Q 4 10. P takes P en passant 11. E takes P 11. Kt to K B 3 12. Q to K B 3 12. K R to K sq (6) 13. Q to Q sq 13. Q to K 3 14. Kt to Q 2 14. Q to K 4 15. R takes B 15. E takes R 16. B to K B sq 16. Kt to K Kt 5 17. P to K Kt 3 17. K E to Q sq 18. P to K E 3 18. Kt to K 6 (c) 19. P takes Kt 19. Q takes K P (cbi) 20. K to E sq 20. E takes Kt 21. B takes R 21. R takes B 22. Q to K sq 22. Q takes Q 23. R takes Q 23. R takes P 24. R to K 2 24. E takes E 25. B takes E 25. K to Q 2 26. K to Kt 2 26. K to Q 3 27. K to B 3 27. P to K Kt 4 28. K to K 3 28. K to K 4 29. B to K B 3 29. Kt to Q sq 30. K to Q 3 30. P to Q B 3 31. P to QE4 31. Kt to K 3 32. K to Q B 4 32. P to Q E 4 33. B to K 2 33. P to K B 5 34. P to K Kt 4 34. K to Q 3 35. B to B 3 35. Kt to Q B 4 36. B to Q sq 36. P to K E 3 37. K to Q 4 37. P to Q Kt 4 38. P takes Q Kt P 38. Q B P takes P 39. P to Q B 4 39. P to Q Kt 5 40. B to Q B 2 40. P to Q E 5 41. B to Kt sq 41. P to Q E 6 And White resigned. (a) The best move here is Q to Q 4. It is favoured by Steinitz, being almost invariably adopted by him in his games, and was invented, we believe, by Mr. Harrwitz. (J) We now much prefer Black's game. (c) Very ingeniously played. s 2 260 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. Game YIU.— Between Me£ !srs. Kenny and Geeen. White (Mr. Kenny). Black (Mr. Green). 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 2. Kt to K B 3 2. Kt to Q B 3 3. P to Q B 3 3. Kt to K B 3 4. P to Q 4 4. Kt takes K P 5. P to Q 5 5. Q Kt to Kt sq (a) 6. Kt takes E P (6) 6. BtoQB4(c) 7. Kt to Q 3 7. Castles 8. Kt takes B 8. Kt takes Kt 9. B to K 3 9. Q to K 2 10. B to K 2 10. P to K B 4 11. Castles 11. P to Q Kt 3 12. K R to K sq 12. P to Q 3 13. B takes Kt 13. Q Kt P takes B 14. Kt to Q 2 14. Q to K B 2 15. B to B 3 15. K to R sq 16. Kt to Q Kt 3 16. Kt to Q 2 17. P to K Kt 3 17. P to K B 5 18. Kt to Q 2 18. Kt to K 4 19. B to Kt 2 19. B to Q R 3 {d) 20. Kt to K 4 20. P takes P (e) 21. B P takes P 21. P to K E 3 22. P to Q Kt 3 22. Q R to K sq 23. P to Q B 4 23. B to Q B sq 24. Kt to Q B 3 24. B to R 6 25. R to K B sq 25. Q to Q 2 26. Kt to K 2 26. B takes B 27. K takes B 27. Kt to K Kt 5 28. R takes B (ch) 28. R takes R 29. K to Kt sq 29. R to K B 7 30. Kt to B 4 30. R takes K R P 31. Q to B 3 31. Q to K B 4 32. R to K B sq 32. K to Kt sq («) The best move for Black here is Q Kt to K 2. Another move, viz., B to Q B 4 is "theoretically " unsound, but "practically" may be safely ven- tured since it gives Black a strong counter-attack. (5) The move recommended in the " Handbuch " at this juncture is B to Q 3. (c) Q to K 2 was the correct play now. (d) It is obvious that Black could not push on his K B P on account of the threatened mate with the R. (e) Now it would perhaps have been better to advance this Pawn. THE QUEEN'S BISHOP'S PAWN'S GAME IN THE 261 KING'S KNIGHT'S OPENING. 33. P to Q E 4 33. Kt to K 4 34. Q to K 3 34. P to K Kt 4 35. Kt to K 6 35. R to R 8 (ch) 36. K takes R 36. Q takes R (oh) 37. Q to Kt sq 37. Q to R 6 (ch) 38. Q to R 2 38. Q takes Q (ch) (/ 39. K takes Q 39. Xt to K B 6 (oh) 40. K to Kt 2 40. Kt to Q 7 41. Kt takes P at B7 41. Kt takes Q Kt P 42. Kt to Q Kt 5 42. P to Q R 4 43. Kt takes P 43. K to B sq 44. K to R 3 44. KtoK2 45. Kt to K 4 45. P to K R 4 46. Kt takes K Kt P 46. Kt to Q 7 47. K to E 4 47. Kt takes P 48. Kt to K 4 48. Kt to Q Kt 3 49. Kt takes P 49. Kt takes Q P 50. K takes R P, and wins. Game IX. (From the " : Handbuoh.") White. Black 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 2. Kt to K B 3 2. Kt to Q B 3 3. P to Q B 3 3. P to K B 4 4. Pto"Q4 4. P takes K P 5. Kt takes K P 5. Kt to B 3 (a) 6. B to Q Kt 5 6. P to Q E 3 7. B takes Kt 7. KtPtakesB(6) 8. B to K Kt 5 8. Q E to Kt sq 9. P to Q Kt 4 9. B to Q Kt 2 (/) Black should have been content to draw by perpetual check. (a) If 5. Q to K B 3, see preceding Analysis, Game the Third, pp. 247, 248 (.)K7.- the advantage, ,jv „ » g B to Kt 5 g Kt to Q 2 ^^ Q to Kt 3, with ■ Q P takes B ' B to Q 3 " ' B to K Kt 5 262 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL, 10. Q to Q R 4 (c) 10. P to Q 3 11. Kt to B 4 11. B to K 2 12. Kt to R 5 12. Q to B sq 13. B takes Kt 13. B takes B 14. P to Q 5 With a winning position. (c) "White can also obtain the superiority by 10. Castles_ jj ^ *° ^ ^ ^ ■'■' PtoQ4 BtoK2 , 2 P takes P ^ „ Kt to Q 2, with the better game. Castle:s CHAPTEE VIII. THE EVANS GAMBIT. This opening is a variation of the Giuoco Piano, consisting in the sacrifice of his Queen's Knight's Pawn by the first player on his fourth move, and is so called from its inventor, the late Captain Evans. Like most of the other Gambits, it is "theoretically" a won game for the second player; but there are so many different lines of attack that in practice the defence will be found very difiicult — the players, " bien entendu " being of equal strength. The chief authorities on the " Evans Gambit " are Jaenisch, Walker, Staunton, Zukertort, and the " Handbuch." There is, perhaps, no other opening that has so much occupied the attention of theoreticians. The following are the opening moves : — GAME THE FIEST. WHITE. BLACK. 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 2. Kt to K B 3 S. Kt to Q B 3 3. B to Q B 4 3. B to Q B 4 4. P to Q Kt 4 ' 4. B takes Q Kt P (It is immaterial whether Black effects this capture with Kt or B, as the position becomes the same, e.g. — 5 P to Q B 3 Kt takes Q Kt P Kt to Q B 3, &q. 264 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. Jaenisch, however, condemns the capture with the Knight, on accouni of 6. P to Q 4, but Walker differs from him, and considers 6. Castles to be the preferable move.) 5. P to Q B 3 5. B to Q B 4 This mo ve was formerly considered preferable to 5 . B to Q E 4> the consequences of which will he examined hereafter. {Sre Games the Third, Fourth, and Fifth.) But since the celebrated match between Messrs. Anderssen and Zukertort, the latter defence has been much patronised, and it is now pretty generally admitted that by retreating the menaced Bishop to Queen's Book's fourth square. Black ought ultimately to obtain the advantage. Black, however, has two other moves at his disposal, and although thej^ are both inferior, it is well to show the student the proper line of play in case they should be adopted. These moves are 5. B to K 2, and 5. B to Q 3. Firstly suppose : 5. — — -— - the proper continuation is 6. W to tj Kt J ■^ ^^ BtoK2 ^ ^ KttoKRS ^ PtoQ4 Q Kt to E 4. (If Black Castles here or takes the Q P, White's reply is Q B takes Kt.) 8. ^ ^° ^ ^ 9. Q takes Kt ^^ ? to K R 3 Kt takes B Kt to Kt 5 Kt to B 3 11. P takes P, and White has the better game. If secondly: 5. 6. '^^^^ 7 ^ t° Q ^ B toQ 3 Kt to K B 3 Kt takes K P g P takes P ~' B takes P. (If Black takes with Kt, White's reply is 9. R to K sq.) g Kt takes B , „ Q to Q 5 , winning a piece. kt takes kt 6. Castles White can also play here 6. P to Q 4, e.g. — 6. P to Q 4 6. P takes P 7. Castles 7. P to Q 3 (best) 8. P takes P, and the position is the same as that which occurs after White's eighth move in the main variation. THE EVANS GAMBIT. 265 6. P to Q 3 (best) If, at this juncture, Black should play instead 6. K Kt to B 3, he ought to lose, as follows : — Suppose : 6. Kt to K B 3 7. P to Q 4 7. P takes P 8. P takes P 8. B to Q Kt 3 or (a) 9. P to K 5 White can also play here 9. B to Q R 3, with great effect. 9. Kt to Kt sq j^Q B takes K B P (ch) ,„ R to K sq , „ Kt to K Kt 5 , ^ P takes Kt ) followed by P to Q 4 R to K sc[ (ch), and then B to Q R 3, if K to B sq. To exemplify further the had effects of 6. K Kt to B 3, see continuation between Morphy and Lichtenstein. 10. P to Q 5 10. Kt to Q R 4 Kt to K Kt 5 If 9 Kt to K 5 If 9. Kt to K R 4 And if 9. (If Kt to K 2 then P to Q 6) 11. BtoKKt 5 11. PtoKB3 12. P takes P 12. K Kt takes P (If 12. P takes P 13. Kt to K 5, winning.) 13. P to Q 6 13. Kt takes K B 14. Q to K 2 (ch) 14. K to B sq, and White has incontestably the advantage. (a) 8. B to Q Kt 5 9. P to K 5 9. Kt to K 5 10. Q to K 2 10. Kt to Q B 6 11. Kt takes Kt U. B takes Kt 12. Kt to Kt 5 12. B takes R ,jf 12 13 Q to K R 5 pj, 13 QtoQ 3, winning.) Castles 13. B takes K B P (ch) 13. K to B sq 266 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. 14. Q B checks 15. P takea P 16. B takes P (ch) 17. B to Q R 3 18. Q to K B 3, and wins. 14. P to Q 3 15. P takes P 16. Kt to K 2 17. B to Q B 6 There are, of course, other variations ; but these prove sufficiently that Kt to K B 3, at the sixth move, when the B is at Q B 4, is had for Black. The following continuation also demonstrates its weakness : — 6. Kt to K B 3 7. P to Q 4 7. P takes P 8. P takes P 8. B to Q Kt 3 9. P to K 5 9. Pto Q4 10. P takes Kt 10. P takes B 11. P takes P 11. R to K Kt sc 12. R to K sq (oh) 12. K to K 2 13. B to K Kt 5 13. Q B to K 3 14. Kt to Q B 3 14. B to Q R 4 15. Q Kt to K 4 15. R takes P 16. Kt to B 6 (ch) 16. K to B sq 17. R to K 5 17. P to Q B 3 18. B to K R 6 18. Kt to K B 4 19. R takes B 19. P takes R 20. Kt to K Kt 5 20. KtoK2 21. B takes R 21. Kt takes B 22. Q to K B 3 22. Q takes P 23. R to Q sq 23. Bto Q 7 24. Kt to Kt 8 (oh) 24. R takes Kt 25. Q to B 7 (ch) 25. K to Q sq 26. Kt to B 3, and wins. The above moves occur in a game between Morphy and Lichtenstein. To resume the main Variation : 7. P to Q 4 8. P takes P 7. P takes P 8. B to Q Kt 3 THE EVANS GAMBIT. 267 BLACK. WHITE. The above forms the key position to this branch of the opening. Let the student refer to the above diagram after Black's eighth move in Game the Second. The " Chess Players' Magazine " remarks that White has now four approved modes of carrying on the attack — viz., B to Q Kt 2, P to Q 5, Q Kt to B 3, and P to K E 3. Q to Q Kt 3 is bad, on account of Black's rejoinder, Kt to Q E 4, and Q B to E 3 and P to K 5 are very weak, the former being answered by Q B to K Kt 5, or Kt to Q E 4, and the latter by P to Q 4. As to P to K E 3, although played by Labourdonnais, it is in reality a very weak move. We will confine ourselves, therefore, to the examination of the three strongest moves at White's command, viz.—B to Q Kt 2, P to Q 5, and Q Kt to B 3. 268 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. Istly : 9. B to Q Kt 2 For the result of 9. P to Q 5, and 9. Q Kt to B 3, see Games the Second and Seventh. 9. Q Kt to Q E 4 (best) (This is now universally admitted to be Black's best reply, 9. Kt to K B 3 being inferior, e.g. : — 9. Kt to K B 3 10. Kt to Q 2 10. Castles 11. P to K 5 11. P takes P 12. P takes P 12. Kt to Q 4 13. Q Kt to K 4 13. B to K 3 14. K Kt to Kt 5 14. P to K R 3 15. Kt takes B 15. P takes Kt 16. Q to K Kt 4 16. K to R sq 17. Q B to Q sq 17. E to K B 5 18. Q takes K P 18. R takes Kt 19. B takes Kt 19. Kt to Q 5 20. R takes Kt 20. R takes R 21. B takes R 21. B takes B 22. R t8 K sq 22. Q to K Kt 4 23. B to K B 3 23. R to K B sq 24. Q to Q B 4 24. P to Q B 4 25. P to K 6 25. Q to K 2 26. Q to Q R 4 26. Q to K R 5 27. Q to Q B 2 27. Q to K 2 28. Q to K Kt 6 28. R to K B 3 29. Q to K 4 29. R to K B sq 30. P to K Kt 3 30. P to Q Kt 4 31. R to K 2 31. P to Q Kt 5 32. B to K R 5 32. P to Q R 4 33. B to B 7 33. B to Q R 5 34. Q to Q B 2 34. B to Q R sq 35. Q to K 4 35. R to Q Kt sq 36. Q to Q 6 36. P to Q Kt 6 37. P takes P 37. P takes P 38. B to K Kt 6 38. P to Q Kt 7 THE EVANS GAMBIT. 269 39. B to Q Kt sq 39. R to Q sq 40. Q to K B 5 40. P to K Kt 4 41. QtoKte 41. BtoB3 42. Q takes P (ch) 42. K to Kt sq 43. Q to Kt 6 (ch) 43. B to Kt 2 44. Q to E 7 (ch) 44. K to B sq 45. P to K R 4 45. E to Q 8 (ch) 46. K to Kt 2 46. B to B 3 47. P takes P 47. B to Q 5 48. Q to K B 5 (ch) 48. K to Kt sq 49. Q to K Kt 6 (ch) 49. K to R sq 50. E to K 4 50. Q to Q Kt 2 51. P to K 7, and wins. The above continuation occurs in a game between Messrs. Journoud and De Eivifere, in consultation, against Mr. Morphy.) 10. P to Q 5 ■ 10. K Kt to K 2 The " Chess Players' Magazine " thinks that Black has the better game after playing Q Kt to R 4, in answer to 9. B to Q Kt 2, 9. P to Q 5, or 9. Kt to Q B 3. We differ from this opinion, and will endeavour to show that White's attack ia the two former instances is terribly strong, and even when the defence is conducted with the greatest nicety, the attack ought, on the contrary, in most cases, to wia. It is perfectly immaterial whether White's and Black's ninth and tenth moves are transposed, since the result is the same. 11. B to Q 3 (best) White may also play 11. Q Kt to B 3. If Black then capture B with Knight, White checks with Q at R 4. (If White, instead of these moves, ventured to capture the K Kt P with B, he would lose, as follows : — 11. B takes K Kt P 11. E to K Kt sq 12. B to K B 6 12. Kt takes B 270 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. 13. QtoE4(ch) 13. Q to Q 2 14. Q takes Kt 14. R takes P (ch) 15. K takes R 15. Q to Kt 5 (ch) 16. K to R sq 16. Q takes Kt (ch) 17. K to Kt sq 17. Q B to K E 6 And wins.) 11. Castles (best) (Black could also play here 11. Kt to K Kt 3, but this generally results in the mere transposition of the eleventh and twelfth moves.) IS. Kt to Q B 3 12. Kt to K Kt 8 13. Q Kt to K 2 White can also play here 13. Q to Q 2, and there is a differ- ence of opinion as to the relative merits of these two different moves. 13. P to Q B 4 This move, originated by Paulsen, was subsequently aban- doned by him, as giving the advantage ultimately to White. Herr Steinitz proposes, instead, 13. P to Q B 3, for which see Illustrative Game IX. between England and Germany. 14. Q to Q 2, or see 14. P to K B 3 (best) Game the Second. This move prevents the dangerous attack arising from B takes K Kt P , in case Black allowed the White Queen's Knight to reach K Kt third square before pushing this P. (See Illustrative Game II. between Messrs. Anderssen and Steinitz.) 15. K to E sq 15. B to Q 2 THE EVANS GAMBIT. 271 These moves occurred in a game between Messrs. Kolisch and Paulsen, resulting in favour of the latter, who conducted the defence. At the sixteenth move, however, Mr. Kolisch, who played the attack, played 16. Q R to Q B sq, and his opponent easily defeated him, as follows : — 16. Q E to Q B sq 16. P to Q E 3 17. Kt to K sq 17. B to Q Kt 4 18. P to K B 4 18. P to Q B 5 19. B to Q Kt sq 19. P to Q B 6 20. E takes P (best) 20. Kt to Q B 5 21. Q to Q B sq 21. E to Q B sq 22. B to Q 3 22. B to K 6 23. Q to B 2 23. Kt to Q 7 24. E to Kt sq 24. E takes K 25. Q takes E 25. Q to Q Kt 3 26. B to Q B sq 26. B takes E 27. Kt takes B 27. B takes B 28. Kt takes B 28. Q Kt takes K P And wins. Instead of 15. K to E sq for White, the " Schachzeitung " gives : jg BtoB 3 ^g Kt to Kt 3 -^^ Kt to K B 5, &c. 'BtoQBa 'PtoQES 16. Q B to Q B 3 This move, recommended by Lowenthal, effectually avoids the dangerous attack of Q B to Q Kt 4, and appears to be quite satisfactory, as it leaves the Q Kt file open for the Queen's Rook. Black, at this juncture, has undoubtedly an inferior position, as White threatens a strong attack by the three following moves — viz K R to K Kt sq, Kt to K Kt 3, and P to K Kt 4. 2'72 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. The " Handbuch," however, makes White play 16. Q E to Q B sq, and continues the game as follows : — 16. Q E to Q B sq 16. P to Q E 3 17. Kt to K Kt 3 17. Q E to Q B sq .jj j„ j^g Kt to K B 5 jg B to K 2, &c.) ^ '■ BtoQKt 4 ■ PtoQB5 18. Kt to K B 5 18. B takes Kt 19. P takes B 19. Kt to K 4 SO. Kt takes Kt 20. Q P takes Kt 21. K E to Q sq 21. K E to K B 2 (If 21. 22 Bto_Q_B_3_ ^g P to_Q^ ^^ PtoQ^ ^ B to Q B 2 P to Q Kt 4 B to Kt 3 ' E to Kt sq 25 B to K 4 2g Q to Q 6 ^^ Q to K 6, &c.) K to Esq ■ Ktto Kt2 22. B to Q B 3 22. E to Q 2 23. E to Q Kt sq 23. E takes P 24. B to Q B 4 24. Kt takes B 25. Q takes E (ch) 25. Q takes Q 26. E takes Q 26. E to Q B 2 27. E (from Kt sq) to 27. K to B 2 ' Q sq 28. E to Q 7 (ch) 28. K to K sq 29. E to Q 8 (ch) 29. K to K 2 30. E to K Kt 7 30. K to B 2 31. Q E to Q 8 And White has the better game. THE EVANS GAMBIT. 273 GAME THE SECOND. BLACK. 1. P to K 4 2. Kt to Q B 3 3. B to Q B 4 4. B takes Q Kt P 5. B to Q B 4 6. P takes P 7. P to Q 3 8. B to Q Kt 3 This we consider White's strongest move, although he may play 9. B to Q Kt 2, and arrive at the same position, thus : — WHITE 1. PtoK4 s. Kt to K B 3 3. B to Q B 4 4. P to Q Kt 4 5. P to Q B 3 e. Pto Q4 7. Castles 8. P takes P 9. PtoQS g B to Q Kt 2 ■ Kt to Q B, 4 10 P to Q -"^ ■ K Kt to K 2 simply transposing his ninth and tenth moves. As we have already remarked, White may also play 9. Kt to Q B 3, or 9. P to K E 3 ; but the latter of these two moves is now admitted to be inferior, although adopted formerly by MacDon- nell against Labourdonnais. The former leads to the Eraser and Mortimer attacks, it is true, but some authorities prefer the second player's game in some variations of those forms of the opening. 9. Kt to Q E 4 10. B to Q Kt 2 10. Kt to K 2 11. B to Q 3 11. Castles 12. Kt to Q B 3 12. Kt to K Kt 3 This move was nearly always played by Mr. Bird in his closely-contested matches with Mr. Wisker. Black can also move P to Q B 4 at this point, but White might in that case play P to K 5, with advantage. 274 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. 13. Q Kt to K 2 14. K to E sq or (A.) 13. P to Q B 4 Mr. Wisker suggests this move here for White. The sub- joined diagram shows the position after White's fourteenth move, Black having to play. BLACK. it ^Atf ^ The " Handbuch " gives the following continuation from this point : — 14. P to K B 3 The " Handbuch " considers this move weak. 15. Q E to B sq (If 15 QtoQ 2 ^g Q R to B aq ,^ Q Kt to K Kt 3 ■ B to Q B 2 ' Q R to Kt sq THE EVANS GAMBIT. 275 Mr. Wisker thinks K Kt to K Kt sq followed by P to K B 4 is a more effective mode of prosecuting the attack. j„ jg Kt to K B 5 jg BtoK2 20 ^ to Q 4 ■ptoQKt4 'PtoQBS 'PtoQKtS ' P to B 6 2j_ Q to Cj sq 22. J* to K Kt 4 ' B to Q Kt 3 " Kt to K B 5 This move is condemned by Zukertort. 00 B to K Kt sq „. K to K Kt 2, and we ■ Kt to K R 6 are inclined to prefer Black's game.) 15. B to Q 2 16. Kt to K sq As the " Handbuch " remarks, this Kni£(ht maybe advan- tageously played to Kt sq in many variations. 16. P to Q E 3 .„ ,» P to K B 4 ^g Kt takes Kt ^ Kt to K 4 ■ Kt takes B ' Q to K 2 19. Kt to K Kt 3 , &c.) 17. P to K B 4 17. B to Q Kt 4 18. P to B 5 18. Kt to K 4 19. Kt to B 4 19. K Kt to Q B 5 20. Q to K 2 SO. Kt takes Q B SI. Q takes Kt SI. B to Q 2 2S. Kt to K 6 SS. B takes Kt 23. B P takes B 23. B to Q B 2 24. Kt to B 3 24. P to Q Kt 4 25. Kt to E 4 With the better game. T 2 276 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL, (A.) (Eefer to last diagram, p. 274.) 14. Q to Q 2 14. B to Q 2 or (a) 15. Q E to Q B sq 15. P to Q R 3 16. Kt to K Kt 3 16. P to K B 3 17. Kt to B 5 17. B takes Kt 18. P takes B 18. Kt to K 4 19. Kt takes Kt 19. Q P takes Kt 20. K R to Q sq 20. K to R sq 21. B to K 4 21. B to Q R 2 22. R to Q B 3 22. P to Q Kt 4 23. P to Q 6 23. Kt to Q B 5 24. Q to K 2 24. Kt takes B 25. R to K R 3 25. P to K R 3 26. Q takes Kt 26. Q R to Kt sq 27. Q to Q B sq With much the better game. j^ ^j. Kt to K Kt 3 jg Q R to Bjq ^^ Kt to B 5 "BtoQBS "PtoKBS 'QRtoKtsq ■ptoQKt4 jg K to R sq ^g R to K Kt sq ^^ Kt take s Kt^ ^.^ P to K Kt4 ■ P to Kt 5 ■ ■ Kt to K 4 ■ B P takes Kt ' P to Kt 3 22 QtoR6 23 P to K B 4 24 P takes K P 25 Q takes Q (ch) ■RtoKB2 'QtoKBsq "QB takes Kt ' K takes Q 2„ Kt P takes E „- P takes Kt P, and White has a winning Q P takes P ' position. All these variations tend to prove pretty conclusively the superiority of the attack, ergo the defence of 5. B to Q B 4 is bad for Black. Zukertort, Paulsen, and Wisker consider Black's game to be untenable after his thirteenth move of THE EVANS GAMBIT. 277 P to Q B 4. The analyses of the most eminent German theoreticians establish White's superior position to be more than an equivalent for Black's numerical superiority. GAME THE THIED. WHITE. 1. P to K 4 2. Kt to K B 3 3. B to Q B 4 4. P to Q Kt 4 5. P to Q B 3 BLACK. 1. P to K 4 2. Kt to Q B 3 3. B to Q B 4 4. B takes Kt P 5. B to Q.R4 In the preceding game Black retreated the Bishop to B 4, which is inferior in the opinion of Walker, although preferred by Labourdonnais and Morphy. Recent analysis has shown Walker to be right in- advocating the retrea*, of the Bishop to Queen's Book's fourth square. Zukertort writes as follows (see "Westminster Papers," February, 1874) :—" In fact, 5. B to Q R 4 yields all the advantages ascribed to 5. B to B 4, and gives the second player the opportunity of adopting a special defence, which I consider the best." 6. Castles or (A.) 7. B to Q R 3 or (Vari- ation (I.), Richard- son's attack) 8. P to Q 4 6. Kt to K B 3 7. P to Q 3 8. Castles And Black has a safe game, and maintains his Pawn. 273 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. Diagram. Showing the position after Black's eighth move. WMd mmH//. o(/M/yM , -^'-^-^/-'-'-'/-^ ^- ^ WyM^ , ^ ^^ ^^^^^^^^^^ /gl;3 6. P to Q 4 7. Castles (A.) 6. P takes P /If 7 Q to Q Kt 3 ■ Q to K B 3 B to Kt 2 P to Q 6 " 9. Oaatles K Kt to K 2 j(,_ K B takes Q P ^^ P to B 4 Castles ■ Q to K R 3, witli the better game.) 7. P to Q 3 (weak) Black may play here P takes P, or Kt to K B 3, for which Bee Games the Fourth and Fifth. We consider either of these moves far superior to playing 7. P to Q 3, which gives White THE EVANS GAMBIT. ■ 279 an overwhelming attack, as will be seen by the followifig analj'sis. Morphy pronounces 7. Kt to K B 3 to be Black's best move. It was adopted successfully against him by Anderssen. Taking P with P bj' Black on his seventh move has usually been considered hazardous play; but the Counter-Gambit recommended by Mincwitz appears to give Black the superior position. Black may also play 7. P to Q 6, for which see Game the Sixth. 8. Q to Q Kt 3 .jf „ P takes P , and we arrive at the same position as if the B had ^ ' B'to Q Kt 3 been retreated to B 4. 8. Q to K B 3 9. P to K 5 (best) Mr. Waller, in his analysis of this opening (" Chess Players' Chronicle," vol. ix.) makes White play here 9. P takes P, which is much inferior, giving Black the better game, without question. He continues the game thus : — P takes P ,„ PtoK5 ^^ PtakesP ^^ Kt to Kt 5 B to Kt 3 ■ P takes P ' Q to Kt 3 ' Kt to Q sq (best) ,„ PtoK6 j4 R to K sq ^^ RjoK2_ ■ B takes P ' Q to B 4 ' Kt to K 2, and Mr. Lowenthal pronoiuices White's attack to be parried. The twelfth move of Black's in the above variation— viz., Kt to Q sq— is suggested by Mr. Lowentbal as a satisfactory answer to Kt to Kt 5, and Mr. Horwitz concurs in that opinion. Instead of this move, both "Waller and Boden give 12, Kt to K R 3 for Black, which is unquestionably inferior. " La Strategic " prefers 10. B to Q Kt 5 in the above variation to 10. P to K 5, for White. To resume the main variation. 9. P takes P (best) 10. B to K Kt 5 280 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. Instead of this move, " La Strategic " gives the following, concluding in favour of the defence : — 10. ?L^£^M forii' jlO. B to Q 2 rbestl ' ^j B to K Kt 5 B to Q 2 (best) ( "■ B to Kt 3 ' Q to K B 4 j2 K t takes K P jg P to K B 4 ^^ K to R sq , with the Kt takes Kt ' P takes P (dis ch) advantage. } Kt takes K P ^g P to K B 4 ^g P tak es Kt ■ Kt takes Kt ' Kt to K 2 ' Q to K Kt 3 j^ P toK 6 ^5 P takes P ( ch) ' B to Q B 3 ' K to Q sq, and White's attack is exhausted. We think, in " practice," the attack will in most cases win. 10. Q to K Kt 3 11. E to K sq 11. K to B sq (If 11. P to K 5 Black gets a bad game. {See Anderssen's Games published in " La Nouvelle Regenoe," against an Amsterdam player.) 12. Kt takes K P 12. Kt takes Kt 13. R takes Kt The above moves occurred in a game between Mr. Bird and ourselves, Mr. Bird playing the defence. In this position White has, in our opinion, a forced won game. THE EVANS GAMBIT. Diagram. Showing the position after White's thirteenth move. 281 BLACK. ■40kM iifli ■ * mm WHITE. Mr. Bird, in the ahove position, played, in the first en- counter, where it occurred, 13. P to Q Kt 3 And the game was continued thus : — 14. Kt to Q 2 15. E takes B 16. Q to Q E 3 (ch) 17. QEtoKsq 18. B to K B 4 19. Kt to K 4 20. Kt takes K B P 14. P to K B 3 15. P takes E 16. Kt to K 2 17. Q to K sq 18. P takes Q B P 18. E to Q Kt sq 20. Q to Q sq 282 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. SI. Kt to Q 6 32. Kt takes R S3. Q takes Kt P SI. R to Q Kt 5 SS. P takes Kt And, play as Black may, White has a winning position, (See Diagram below.) Diagram. BLACK. "WHITE. Referring to the above diagram, it will be seen that Black has maintained the Gambit Pawn, but has a game lost by its nature. If he play P to K R 3, White can win by B to K 3. In fact, he has no good move. Referring to the other diagram, showing the position after White's thirteenth move, R takes Kt, if Black play 13. B to Q Kt 3 — a move adopted by Mr. Bird in another game — ^he THE EVANS GAMBIT. 283 will lose by the following continuation, which occurred in actual play between the Author and Mr. Bird : — 13. B to Q Kt 3 14. Kt to Q 2 14. P takes P 15. Kt to K 4 15. Kt to K B 3 16. Q to E 3 (ch) 16. K to Kt sq 17. QtoK7 17. B to K E 6 18. P takes B 18. P to K E 3 19. Kt takes Kt (ch) 19. P takes Kt SO. Q takes P at B 3 20. Q takes Q 21. B takes Q 21. B.to^2 22. Q R to K sq 22. Q E to K B sq 23. BtoQ3 23. BtoQ5 24. B takes E (ch) 24. K takes B And White has merely now to play R to K B 5, and must win easily. " En resume," we do not like the defence, 7. P to Q 3 in the Evans Gambit, after retreating the Bishop to Q E 4. Mr. Bird appeared to be convinced of its weakness, for in all sub- sequent games of this opening played with ourselves he avoided it. Vaeiation (I.). On White's seventh move. (RICHARDSON'S ATTACK.) WHITE. BLACK. 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 2. Kt to K B 3 2. Kt to Q B 8 3. B to B 4 3. B to B 4 4. P to Q Kt 4 4. B takes F 5. P to B 3 5. B to Q E 4 6. Castles 6. Kt to K B 3 7. P to Q 4 7. Castles 284 THE CHESS-PLAYEE'S MANUAL. Black is now considered to have the better game. The Books now make White play 8. P takes P, to which Black replies with 8. Kt takes K P, and, after a few moves, is declared to have the advantage. Diagram. Showing the position after Black's seventh move ;- BLACK. 1 P ^ m W/WM WMMi wmim mmm mr"" t '—•■■■■■ ■ ^«__^^„„„ I fS s s The following continuation, however, does not appear satis- factory for Black : — ' 8. Kt takes KP This move has been brought prominently into notice by Mr. P. Eichardson, of New York. It has been frequently THE EVANS GAMBIT. 285 played by the author, with success. Mr. Eichardson's con- tinuation deserves attention. 8. Kt takes Kt 9. P takes Kt 9. Kt takes P 10. Q to Q 5 10. B takes P 11. Kt takes B 11. Kt takes Kt IS. Q to K B 3 12. P to Q 4 This move is suggested by the Editor of " The Turf, Field, and Farm," as Black's best course. jf 12 13 Q to K Kt 3 . IJ to K Kt 5 ■ Kt to Q E 5 ■ K to R sq ' Q to K sq ^5 K R to K sq ^g B to Q 3 ^^ Q to K R 4 ^g B to K B 6 ■ Kt to Kt 3 ■ Q to K 3 " P to K R 3 ' K to Kt sq , g Q to K Kt 3 g„ B takes P, and wins. ■ P to K Kt 3 13. P takes P " era passant " And White has a decidedly superior position, since Black must now lose time in withdrawing the menaced Knight, upon which White, by bringing out his Queen's Bishop, gets both his Rooks into play, with a splendid attack. GAME THE FOURTH. THE ANDERSSEN-ZUKERTORT, OR THREE PAWNS DEFENCE TO THE EVANS GAMBIT. WHITE. BLACK. 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 2. Kt to K B 3 2. Kt to Q B 3 3. B to B 4 3. B to B 4 4. P to Q Kt 4 4. B takes Q Kt P 286 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. 6. P to Q B 3 6, P to Q 4 7. Castles 5. B to Q E 4 6. P takes P 7. P takes Q B P Diagram. Showing the position after Black's seventh move. BLACK. ■mm^'f Wi 8. Q to Kt 3 or (A.), (B.) 9. P to K 5 (best) 8. Q to B 3 (If 9. B to K Kt 5 Q to Kt 3 ^Q Q Kt takes P B takes Kt ,, Q takes B ■ K Kt to K 2 , n B takes Kt, and Zukertort is of opinion that White has no effective K takes B way to proceed with the attack. See also Illustrative Game VI. at the end of this Chapter. ) THE EVANS GAMBIT. 287 9. Q to Kt 3 (best) Der Lasa gives for Black : — 9. . 10 K to K sq Q to R 4 (c h) Q Kt takes P ' P to Q 3 K to B sq 12 Kt takes K t ^^ Q takes B R takes Q P to B 7 • P takes Kt (Queens) ^*- ? takes Kt j5 B to R 3 (ch) ^g R takes K P Rtakesjvt Kt to K 2 ■ P to Q Kt 3 '' P takes Q 18. R to K 6 (dis eh) , and wins. Von Der Lasa's Variation is, therefore, an untenable line of defence for Black. 10, Kt takes P 10. K Kt to K 2 11. Q Kt to K 2 or Variations (T.), (II.) This is considered White's best move by Anderssen. 11. Pto QKt4 IS. B to Q 3 (best) or Variations (III.), (IV.) (If 12. B takes Q Kt P or 12. Q takes P , see Mincwitz's Analysis, Variations III., IV.) 12. Q to K 3 13. Q to Q Kt 2 (best) Q R to Kt sq, &c. 288 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. Diagram. Showing the position after White's thirteenth move. BLACK. /? ''4/, W ^■" mm T' 11 i ■ i ■ i ^ „m'///m' /mm 'M/ 6// m;^zA ^^ mw/M. yMW/M. WHITE. 14. Q Kt to K B 4 13. Kt to K Kt 3 14. Kt takes Kt If 14. ! if 15. ^g Kt to Q 5 Q to K 2 a move disapproved of by Zukertort ' Q to K 3 16. BtoK4 Q to B 4 ■" Castles and Black's Queen is in jeopardy, j ^g BtoK 4 ^^ BtoQ 2 Castles ' " ^g Q E to Q sc[ ■ Q B to Kt 2 \ if 20. K 4 y^ B to K 3 ^g Q to Kt sq » QtoB5 20. P to Q Kt 5 or {o,\ B to K B 4 P to K R 3 ,Q K R to K sq ■ R to Q Kt sq Kt takes B 2j B takes P ( ch) ) THE EVANS GAMBIT. 289 2j Q B takes P ^^ Kt to B 6 (ch) ^s B^toQ 5 ^4 B takes K t P takes B ' K to Kt 2 ' ' Q to K 2 ' B takes B „. Kt to Q 4 26 QtoK2 ^ Q to K R 5 , and wins. * KttoK R 5 ■ RtoK Ktsq (a) l^ 18 Q R to K sq Kt to K Kt 5 ■ B to Q Kt 3 ■ Q R to Kt sq ' ' Q takes P 2Q_ B to Q B 3 21 Kt takes K R P ^^ Kt takes B 23 B takes K t ■ B to Q 5 ■ B takes B ' R to K sc; ' Q takes R 24 Kt to K K t 5 25 Q to Kt 3 (ch) 26 Kt takes Q P P takes B ' P to Q 4 ' K tc B sq gi- P to K Kt 4 28 R takes Q, and again White wins, according to B takes P the " Handbuch." The following moves occur in a game between Messrs. Anderssen and Zukertort, the latter playing the defence, and winning the game tdtimately : — j4 jg Kt to Q 5 ^g Q takes P -^^ B to Q R 3 ' Q to K 2 ■ Q to K 3 ' Castles " ' R to Q Kt sq jg Q to B5 jg Q R to Q sq ■ B to Q Kt 2 ■ K B to K sq, &c. 15. B takes Kf 15. P to K K 3 This is a necessary precaution to prevent Kt to K Kt 5, &c. 16. Q E to B sq 16. P to Q R 3 17. K E to Q sq 17. B to Q Kt 2 18. Q to Kt sq 18. Q E to Q sq or Castles (Q E) And Black's two Pawns are more than an equivalent for his inferiority of position. We extract the last eight moves of the above main Variation from the able analysis of this opening in " The Westminster Papers," by Herr Zukertort. 290 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. At his fourteenth move in the main Variation, White, in lieu of 14. Q Kt to K B 4 , may play 14. B to K B 4 , to which Black's best replies are either 14. Castles, or 14. B to Kt - {nee " Westminster Papers," April, 1874), with a safe game, and two Pawns ahead. (A.) Variation on White's eighth move : — 8, B to Q E 3 This move is considered weak by the " Schachzeitung." Diagram Showing the position after White's eighth move. .////Amm, ■////^ m i kfc i i. k k '^ ' '!m.,/m,. ''' ' 'V^/-' '''■''^" Kt to R 3 \ QtoB3 ] ■^Q Q Kt takes P j^Qtakes^B ^^ Q R to Q sq B takes Kt ' Castles ' Kt to K Kt 5 (jf j2 13 B to Kt 2, & e. ) .„ P to R 3 ^ ■ B to Kt 5 ■ S ■ Kt to K 4 j4 Kt takes Kt ^g B to K 2 Jg P to B 4, and White has a Kt takes Kt P to K B 4 fine attack. 9. P to K 5 9. Q to Kt 3 10. Q to Kt 3 (best) 10. K Kt to K 2 11. Q Kt takes P 11. P to Q Kt 4 12. Kt takes P IS. E to Q Kt sq 13. B takes Kt 13. P to Q R 3 This move is suggested by Herr Zukertort as preferable to capturing the Bishop with King, 14. B to R 3 14. P takes Kt 15. B to Q 3 15. Q to K R 4 16. B to Q Kt 2 16. Castles And Zukertort considers Black has a fine position, with a Pawn ahead. (" Westminster Papers," April, 1874.) n e 292 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. (B.) Another variation on White's eighth move : — 8. P to K 5 This move, which is recommended "by Stanley, is condemned by Zukertort and the " Schachzeitung." 8. K Kt to K 2 9. B takes P (ch) White has two other moves here — vis:,, 9. Kt to Kt 5, and 9. Q to Kt 3 ; but they ought both to yield Black the advan- tage, in the opinion of Zukertort, who gives the following : — „ ^ J . f, Kt to Kt 5 „ Kt takes K B P -., B takes Kt (ch, ^ ' "' Kt takes P ' Kt takes Kt ' K takes B 12 Q to R 5 (ch) ^3 Q takes B ^^ Q Kt takes P ■ P to Kt 3 ■ P to Q 4 ' B to K 3, and White lias no attack which, in the opinion of Zukertort, counterbalances the loss of two Pawns. On his fourteenth move in this Variation White may play, in lieu of Q Kt takes P, 14. Q takes Q B P at B 6, to which Black may reply satisfactorily Kt to B 3 (see "Westminster Papers," March, 1874); hut we have not space for further Variations. If secondly: 9. -^i^KL^ 10. Kt takes P n. ^-*^i^^-L Castles Kt to Kt 3 P to Q Kt 4 12. BtojSA B to Kt 2, -with the better game. 9. K takes B 10. Q to Kt 3 (ch) 10. K to K sq 11. Kt to K Kt 5 11. E to B sq THE EVANS GAMBIT. 293 12. Kt talies R P IS. Kt to Q 5 13. Q to B 4 13. K Kt to B 4 14. Kt takes R 14. K takes Kt 15. B to R 3 (ch) 15. P to Q 3 16. P takes P 16. P takes P 17. Q to Q 3 17. Q to B 3 18. K to R sq 18. B to K 3 19. Kt takes P 19. B takes Kt SO. Q takes B SO. R to B sq And the " Handbuch " declares Black to have a position. Diagram Showing the position. BLACK. ri 1 /^,y y i g ■# WHITE. 294 THE CHESS-PLAYEU'S MANUAL. Variation (I.) On White's eleventh move : — 11. R to K sq 11. P to Q Kt 4 (best) Lowenthal and Mincwitz prefer this to 11. R to Q Kt sq, a move adopted, by Neumann against Anderssen. Zukertort condemns 11. R to Q Kt sq, on account of the following con- tinuation : — j2 Kt to K R 4 j3_ EtoK4 E to Q Kt sq ' Q to R 4 P to K Kt 4 j^ B to K 2 ^5 Kt to B 3, &c. Q to R 3 12. Kt takes Kt P (best) B takes P If 12, Q R to Kt sq, and Black gains a piece. IS. R to Q Kt sq 13. Kt to K R 4 13. Q to Kt 5 Here the authorities are at variance. Mincwitz and the " Handbuch " give for Black 13. Q to R 4 ; but Zukertort declares this move to be inferior to playing the Queen to Kt 5, for the reason that, although it protects the B 2 square, it permits White to play 14. R to K 4. In order that the student may judge for himself, we give both continuations : — If 13. 14 Rto K 4_ B_to,K_2_ Q to R 4 P to K Kt 4 Q to K R 3 ^g Q to Q 3 (be st) or (c) (d) (e) ^„ Kt to Q 4 j^g Q takes Kt ' P to Q R 3 ■ Kt takes Kt " Q to Kt 2 and Black maintains his numerical superiority. (c) ,g QtoR3 „ Q Kt to B 3 t .. ,„ Q Kt to Q _ ■ PtoR3 ( BtoQKt THE EVANS GAMBIT. 29B 18_ q^oQS ^g R takes Kt R to Q Kt s n ,. K R takes B Kt takes Kt Q to Kt 2 ' P takes Kt" '- and the game is about equaU 17. 18 Qj5:kes_B Kt to K B 3 B takes Kt ' Q to Kt 2 ' Castles or P to R 3, with a good game. (d) jg Kt to K B 3 Q to Kt 3, followed by P to R 3, and Black has the better game, in the opinion of Mr. Lowenthal. ]^g QtoB2 ^^ Kt to Q 4 jg R takes Kt P to R 3 ■ Kt takes Kt ' Q to Kt 2, &c. 14. Q to R 4 14. K to Q sq 15. Kt to K B 3 15. B takes R 16. Kt takes B 16. P to Q R 3 17. Kt to R 3 17. R to Kt 5 18. Q to B 2 18. Kt takes P And Black ought to win with ease, in the opinion of Herr Zukertort. {See "Westminster Papers," April, 1874.) Vaeiation (II.) On White's eleventh move :■ — 11. B to QR3 11. Pto Q Kt4 Black may also play 11. B takes Kt, e.g. : — , , ■,„ Q takes B ,„ Q R to Q sq , and Black with B takes Kt Castles care will be able eventually to develop his game, and maintain his numerical advantage. 12. Kt takes P 12. R to Q Kt sq 13. Q to K 3 or (f) 13. B to Q Kt 3 296 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. 14. Q to B 4 15. Q E to Q sq 16. Kt to Q B 3 14. Castles 15. P to K E 3 16. E to K sq And Lowenthal considers Black has a safe game, with a Pawn ahead. Mincwitz recommends 16. B to Q Kt 2 for Black, which, although ingenious, is not so sound as the move in the text. Diagram Showing the position after Black's sixteenth move. i /drrr ^^ m// i mi — i^M/„, . if W i. ^ i. i '4 y^z «f. ^y,7Wm wMUM Wimm WW m. «i W7' TV' i„„..'rr,.^^M„ I r 4 i n 13. B takes Kt (/) j^ BtoJR 3 ■ P takes Kt j5 BtoQ3 ■ Q to R 4 16. B to K t 2 Castles P to Q R 3 with a very superior game. For other Variations see the analysis of this opening by Herr Zukertort, " Westminster Papers," April, 1874. THE EVANS GAMBIT. 297 Variation (III.) On White's twelfth move. MINOWITZ'S ANALYSIS. 12. B takes P This is given as best by Mincwitz, but is inferior to B to Q3 12. B to Q Kt sq 13. Q to R 4 13. P to Q B 3 A most important link in the combination. 14. B takes Kt (best) 14. Kt takes B 15. Kt to K B 4 15. Q to K B 4 (If 15 B to R 3 jg Q Kt to^Q 4 ^^ Kt takes Kt ^^ P to B 3 ■ II to Kt 4 ■ Kt takes Kt " B to Kt 2 ' B to Kt 3 , Q K to R sq RtoQ4, &c.) 16. Kt to Q 5 16. K to Kt 4 17. R to Q sq 17. Castles 18. B to R 3 18. R to K sq And Black has the better game. The leading feature in this Counter- Gambit is*the entry of Black's Queen's Rook into the combat, as he can, in most of the variations, be posted at Q Kt 4, with deadly effect. 2S» THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. Diagram Showing the position after Black's eighteenth move. BLACK. ^vJ^..y'^,.,.4M. if i « i pl i ^z mm. ^ «j:i J .4 ^^x^ «W^^^,^8JK^ /y/// / / We extract the latter moves of the above analysis from " Land and "Water," May 24th, 1873. Variation (IV.) Beginning at White's twelfth move : — 12. Q takes P 12. Q R to Kt sq 13. Q to Q B 5 13. B to Q Kt 3 14. Q to R 3 14. Q to B 7 15. B to Q 3 15. Q to B 4 16. Q to Kt 2 16. B to R 4 17. Q to B 2 17. Q takes Q 18. B takes Q 18. B to Q R 3 And Black wins the exchange, and retains his extra Pawn. THE EVANS GAMBIT. 299 GAME THE FIFTH. WHITE. BLACK. 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 S. Kt to K B 3 2. Kt to Q B 3 3. B to Q B 4 3. B to Q B 4 4. P to Q Kt 4 4. B takes P 5. P to Q B 8 5. B to Q E 4 6. P to Q 4 6. P takes P 7. Castles 7. Kt to K B 3 Anderssen played this move in the first game of his match with Morphy, and won. " La Strategic," however, condemns it. 8. Q B to E 3 (best) This move is the invention of M. de Eiviere, the celebrated French player. Morphy played instead 8. P to K 5, to which his opponent replied with 8. P to Q 4. (See "Morphy's Games," Bohn's edition, p. 14.) 8. P to Q 8 (best) 9. P to K 5 9. P to Q 4 (best) or (A.) ,-rr q , „ Q to Kt 3 , , R to K s q, with a splendid ■ Q P takes P ' Q to Q 2 attack. jj g j„ Kt takes Kt ^^ Q to Kt 3, &c.) ■ Q Kt takes P ' P takes Kt 10. B to Kt 5 10. Kt to K 5 11. P takes P And White has the preferable game, as Black cannot Castle, 300 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. DiAGEAM Showing the position after White's eleventh move. ^iL«fi# v.M^. 4Sm w- ' i PI i M/^//f WHITE. In the above position Black has scant choice of moves. If he play 11. B to Q 2 12. Q to Kt 3 13. P to Q E 3 rrc -. a , o B takes B (eh) , , B takes K t, winning a ■ Kt to K 2 ■ Q takes B piece.) 13. B to Q 8 (or Vai'iation) 14. R to Q B sq 15. R takes Kt 16. Q to B 2 17. Q Kt to Q 2 13. B to his sq 14. B to Kt 3 15. P takes R 16. B to Kt 2 17. Kt takes Kt THE EVANS GAMBIT. 301 18. Q takes Kt 18. P to E 3 19. R to K sq 19. B to B sq 20. Q to B 3 20. R to Q Kt sq 21. PtoK6 21. B takes KP 22. R takes B (ch) 32. P takes R 23. Kt to K 5 And Black cannot save the game. The above analysis, by Mr. Lowenthal, is from " Morphy's Games," p. 163. (A.) 9. Kt to K 5 10. K P takes P 10. P takes Q P /jf iQ j^ R to K sq (c h) ^^ Kt takes Q P, &c. ■ Kt takes Q P ' K to B sq or (a) (a) 11 12 Q to R 4 (eh) jg Q B takes Kt , . Q takes B ■ Q Kt to K 2 ■ P to B 3 ■ Q takes B winning.) 11. RtoKsq 11. PtoQ4 12. Kt takes P With a fine game. Variation, Beginning at White's thirteenth move : — 13. Q takes P 13. P takes B 14. Q takes Kt 14. P to Kt 5 15. B to Kt 2 15. B to K 3 16. Q Kt to Q 2 And the " Handbuch " pronounces the game even. 302 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. GAME THE SIXTH. WHITE. BLACK. 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 2. Kt to K B 3 2. Kt to Q B 3 3. B to B 4 3. B to B 4 4. P to Q Kt 4 4, B takes P 5. P to Q B 3 5. B to E 4 6. P to Q 4 6. P takes P 7. Castles 7. P to Q 6 The following continuation is from a game between Messrs. Anderssen and Dufresne, published in the " Schachzeitung": — 8. Q to Kt 3 White must not stop to take the Pawn, as that would give his adversary important time to develop his game. .jj. g &t to Kt 5 g P toK5 jQ E to K sq ■ Kt to K E 3 ■ Kt takes K P ' Q to K 2 ^-^ P to B 4 K Kt to K 5, and Black should at least get an even game, i " Handbuch," p. 209.) 8. Q to B 3 9. P to K 5 9. Q to Kt 3 10. E to K sq 10. K Kt to K 2 Mr. Staunton suggests B to Q Kt 3 here for Black (s " Praxis," p. 162), compelling White to retire his Queen. 11. B to E 3 11. P to Kt 4 IS. Q takes Kt P 12. E to Q Kt sq 13. Q to E 4 13. B to Kt 3 14. Q Kt to Q 2 14. B to Kt 2 15. Kt to K 4 16. Q to K B 4 16. K B takes P 16. Q to E 4 THE EVANS GAMBIT. 303 17. Kt to B 6 (ch) 18. P takes P 19. Q E to Q sq And White has a winning position. 17. P takes Kt 18. E to Kt sq As the position is extremely interesting, we append a diagram. BLACK. p i i ^ i gg m&. ,^ ^g P takes Kt P to K R 3 ■ R to K R sq ' R takes B jg Kt to Kt 5 (eh) K to Kt sq, with the better game.) 16. Q takes P 17. Q to Q 5 (ch) ,„ ,- QtoR5(ch) Ts Kt to K K t 5 ^g B to K 3 ^ ■ Kl^K^q" B to K B 4 • P to B 3, &c.) 17. B to K 3 18. Kt to Kt 5 (ch) 18. K to Kt sq With the better game. Thirdly : 15. Kt to his sq 16. Q to B 4 (ch) 16. K to his sq 17. R to K sq With the advantage. 308 THE CHESS-PLAYEE'S MANUAL. Fourthly : 15. Kt to K sq 16. Q to B 4 (ch) 16. K to Kt sq 17. Kt to K Kt 5 17. Q to K 2 18. P to K 6 18. B to his sq 19. Kt to Q 5 And White has the best game, according to Mr. Staunton {see " Praxis," p. 139), who does not, however, carry the analysis further. This we do, as follows : — 19. Q to B sq (best) 20. Qto B 7 (ch) White can also win the exchange by 20. Kt to K B 7. SO. Q takes Q 21. P takes Q (ch) 21. K to B sq 22. P takes Kt Queen's (ch) 22. K takes Q 23. E to K sq (ch) 23. K to B sq (best) 24. B to E 3 24. B takes Q P (best) 25. Kt takes Q B P 25. B takes- E 26. B takes P (ch) 26. K to Kt sq 27. E mates Fifthly : 15. P to K E 3 16. Q to B 4 16. P to K Kt 4 17. Q to Q 2 17. Kt to K R 2 18. P to Q 5 Good game. The last Variation is from the " Praxis." THE EVANS GAMBIT. 309 (A.) Variation oij Black's tenth move : — 10. K to B sq (weak) 11. P to Q 5 (best) 12. B to K 2 13. B takes B 14. K to R sq 15. B to K 2 16. P to B 4 17. B takes Kt 18. P to K 5 11. IS. 13. 14. Q Kt to K 2 B takes Kt Kt to K Kt 3 Kt to K 4 15. Q to K R 5 16. Kt to Kt 5 17. Q takes B With the better game. 310 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. (B.) Another variation on Black's tenth move {see preceding Diagram) : — 10. B takes Kt This move is favoured by Anderssen. Staunton, howeve- is of opinion that after this move White should win. 11. P to Q 5 Iff 1 1 P tak es B , „ B to K 3 , „ K to R si K to B sq Q Kt to K 2 P to Q 4 and, according to Anderssen, Black has a good game. We confess we cannot see this.) 11. BtoKt5 12. P takes Kt IS. Kt P takes P White has now two different accepted modes of play, viz., — firstly, Q takes P (ch), as advised by Mr. Fraser, and secondly, P to K 5, as recommended by Staunton. Firstly, then : 13. Q takes P (ch) 13. B to Q 2 14. Q to Q 5 14. B to K 3 ' 15. B to Kt 5 (ch) 15. K to B sq 16. Q to Q 3 16. Kt to K 2 And "La Strategic" says White has the better game; but Staunton remarks that, " although Black's position is rather cramped, he retains his Pawn." Secondly : 13. P to K 5 13. P takes K P /Tf ,3 ,, B takes P (ch) ,. Q to B 4 (ch) ■ B to Q 2 ' K takes B ' K to K sq 16. K P takes P, and Staunton thinks White must win.) THE EVANS GAMBIT. 311 14. Q takes P (ch) 14. B to Q 2 15. Q to Q 5 15. B to K 3 16. Q takes K P 16. B to Q 5 (If 16 17 Q to Kt 5 (ch), &c.) ■ Q to Q 5 17. B to Kt 5 (ch) 17. K to B sq 18. B to E 3 (ch) 18. Kt to K 2 19. Q to K 4 Followed by Q R to Q sq, with a fine game. (C.) The " Mortimer attack," which we will now examine, is so called from being first brought into notice by an American amateur of that name. It is a most ingenious deviation from the usual mode of plaj', and has given rise to much contro- versy. It certainly affords White far greater scope for attack than the old move of Q to Q 5, and in many variations is irresistible. » 13. Q to B 2 13. K takes B 14. P to K 5 14. P to K R 3 „. ,g S to K sq jg B to K Kt 5 or (a) ^ K to B sq ■ Kt to Q B 3 ' Q to K sq „ PtoK6 ,„ Q takes Q ^g PJakes B ^o Pj2_QA Q to Kt 3 P takes Q ' Kt to K B 3 ' Kt to K 4 2^ Kt takes Kt ^2 ^ takes P gg B takes Kt 24. B to K 8 (ch) ■p takes Kt" ' B to Q 5 ' P takes B 'E takes E „- P tak es E Queens „f. Eto^K^(L(ch) 27 ^^11° ^^ K takes Q ' K to Q 2 ' B to K 5 28 P to K Kt 3 P to Q fi 3, and Black has a slight advantage.) (a) ,„ Pto^J^ ,7 BtoKKt5_ ^g Kt to Q 5 Bto K sq ■ K Kt to K 2 K to Kt sq, &c. 312 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S M*ANUAL. 15. Pto Q5 15. Kt to K B 3 16. P to K 6 (ch) (best) /x£ ,g P takes Kt ■ Q takes P 17. Kt to K 4 Q takes R, &cO 16. B takes P 17. P takes B (ch) 17. K takes P 18. R to K sq (ch) 18. K to B 2 19. KttoKR4 19. QtoQ2 20. Q to Kt 6 (ch) 20. K to B sq 31. Kt to B 5 21. Q Kt to B 3 82. B takes R P 22. R takes B 23. Kt takes R 23. Kt to K 4 24. Q to Kt 5 24. Kt to K B 2 We extract the above Variations from the " Palamede," "La Strategie," and the " Handbuch." The authors of " La Strategie " are of opinion that the game ought to be drawn. In practice, we think the chances are all in favour of White. , As the Mortimer and Fraser attacks give birth to so many highly interesting variations, it is almost matter for regret that they are noTv generally superseded by Black playing the com- paratively tame move of 9. Q Kt to R 4, thus evading all the attacks to be apprehended from 9. B to K Kt 5, which was formerly considered Black's best reply. By playing 9. Kt to Q R 4, Black, in the opinion of the " Chess Players' Magazine," gets a safe game, e. g. — 9. Kt to Q R 4 10. Kt to K Kt 5 10. Kt takes B 11. Q to R 4 (ch) 11. P to Q B 3 12. Q takes Kt (be 12. Q to Q B 2 13 P to K B 4 fif 13 B to R 3 or B 4 ^^ B takes Q P ,g Kt takes K B P ■ptoKRa 'QtoQa 'Q takes Kt THE EVANS GAMBIT. 3i3 16. PtoQ5 Kt to K 2 17. B takes Kt K takes B, and Black has the preferable game.) 13. P to K E 3 14. Kt to K B 3 14. Kt to K 2 And Black has a safe game, but it must be remembered that White's tenth move of Kt to K Kt 5 in this variation is weak. The " Chess Players' Magazine " considers the "Mortimer attack " to be not onlj^ formidable, but apparently irresistible. There are several other modes of attack in the Evans Gambit which must not be left unnoticed. Although they are now generally considered inferior to the lines of play we have thus far examined, they ought not on that account to be entirely discarded. The position from which they spring is illustrated in the subjoined diagram : — Diagram showing the position after Black's eighth move. BLACK. 314 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. In the above position White has at his disposal no less than seven different moves — viz., Kt to Q B 3 (the analysis of which we have partly given under the Eraser and Mortimer attacks, and the completion of which will he found in Game the Eighth), P to Q 5, and B to Q Kt 2, which both tend to bring about the same result, and which we have also examined. The "Chessplayers' Magazine" says "these attacks can be suc- cessfully met on a simple and uniform principle by playing 9. Q Kt to R 4 ; " but this opinion was expressed years ago, and must now be taken " cum grano salis." We quote the following from the able pen of Mr. Lowenthal, in " Land and Water," May 24th, 1873. Speaking of the attack in the Evans Gambit of 9. P to Q 5 in the above diagram, followed by the moves jQ B to Q Kt 2 ^j P. to Q 3, &c. Q Kt to K 4 ' Kt to K 2 Mr. Lowenthal writes : — " The German writers have followed out this Variation with exceptional thoroughness, and seem to have established the complete triumph of the attack. The process of accumulating the White pieces on the King's side can be continued without let or hindrance, whilst the advance of the Black Pawns on the Queen's side is no effective counterpoise. In practice, the defending player is usually checkmated whilst his Pawns are laboriously moving to Queen. After this collapse of the defence, which has been relied upon for ten years past, atten- tion has been directed to entirely new lines of play. One Variation is especially in vogue, and is so far believed to be tolerably favourable for the defence. It is the old course of retreating the Bishop to Q E 4, and afterwards taking both the Q and Q B Pawns." In the position in the above diagram, White can play 9. P to K E 3, 9. Q to Kt 3, or 9. B to R 3. The first of THE EVANS GAMBIT. 315 these moves was played twice by MacDonnell against Labour- donnais, one game being won by the former player, and the other drawn. It is now condemned as weak, thus : — 9. P to K R 3 9. Kt to K B 3 (li 9 10 Kt to Q B 3 or (a) B to Kt 2 " P to K R 3 ■ K Kt to K 2 ''• cI^iiiT J2 Q Kt to K 2 Kt to K Kt 3, even game. (a) „ B to Kt 2 P to Q 5 ■ K Kt to K 2 ■ Kt to Q R 4 13. ^.*".9i. Castles, &c.) 10. B to K Kt 5 10. 11. BtoR4 11. 12. B takes Kt 12. P to K R 3 Q Kt to K 2 P takes B With the better game, Secondly : 9. Q to Q Kt 3 9. Kt to Q R 4 With the advantage, since White dare not take the P with- out losing a piece. Thirdly : 9. B to Q R 3 A move adopted by Harrwitz, but considered inforior. 9. B to K Kt 5 10. Q to Kt 3 (best) 10. Q Kt to R 4 11. B takes P (ch) 11. K to B sq 12. QtoQ5 12. Kt to K B 3 13. Q to K Kt 5 13. B takes Kt 14. P to K5 14. K takes B 15. P takes Kt 15. Q takes B P With the better game. 316 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. GAME THE EIGHTH. ■WHITE. 1. PtoK4 2. Kt to K B 3 3. B to Q B 4 4. P to Q Kt 4 Q. Pto B 3 <6. Castles 7. PtoQ4 8. P takes P 9. Q Kt to B 3 10- B to Q Et 5 Kt to Q B 3 B to Q B 4 B takes P B toB4 P to Q3 P takes P B to Q Kt 8 B to K Kt 5 B to Q 2 or (A.), (B.), (C.) This move is recommended by Morphy for the defence. Black, however, has several other moves here, viz. — firstly, 10. B takes Kt ; secondly, 10. K to B sq; and thirdly, lO. P to Q E 3, for which see (A.), (B.), (C), respectively. 11. P to K 5 11. P takes P 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. BLACK. PtoK4 THE EVANS GAMBIT. 317 IS. P to Q 5 This is the move recommended by Suhle, and is undoubtedly a strong way of carrying on the attack. Neumann — another German authority — advises R to K sq here. We prefer the former move. Neumann's continuation, however, deserves notice. „ ,„RtoKsq ,„PtoQ5 ,,B takes B (oh) Suppose: 12.^^— -1^^ '^-KttoQS '-' Q taTkeTB £t takes P ,„ Kt to Q 3 ,„ B to R 3 j^g R to K 5 QtoKB4 "RtaQsq 'Et,):)- ' tj to Kt 3 Kt to B 5 20 B t akes B gi Qi£Ai> ^^^ ^^^ " ^aad- ■ B takes Kt ' Q Kt to B 4 buch" declares White has a winning position. 13. Kt to R 4 ,„ ^3 KttakesKP ^^ Q to K Kt 4, &c.) ^ ■ Kttohissq ■ KttoK2 13. B takes B (ch) 13. Q takes B 14. Kt takes K P, and White has a fine game, and, we think, ought to win. If at his twelfth move Black venture to play Kt to Q 5 instead of Kt to R 4, or Kt to his sq, he ought to lose, thus : — no B takes B (oh) ,, Kt takes K P ^'^PP"'' ^^- KltoOT '^" Q takes¥ '^- Q to K B 4 ,. Q to R 4 ( ch) ,(. B to Kt 5 (oh) ^^ P to Q 6 KtoQsq ■ KttoK2 P takes P Kt to Q 5 ,q Kt takes Kt 20 QAi2_S_iJ UAL. 10. Q to K B 3 10. B to K 3 (c) 11. B to Q Kt 3 11. Kt to Q Kt 3 12. P to Q B 4 12. B takes Kt 13. P takes B 13. K Kt to Q 2 14. Q to y B 3 14. P to Q R 4 15. Kt to Q 2 15. Q to K Kt 4 16. P to K B 4 16. Q to K Kt 3 17. B to Q B 2 17. B to K B 4 18. B takes B 18. Q takes B 19. P to K 6 19. Kt to K B 3 20. B to K 3 20. K K to K sq 21. P to K 7 21. Q Kt to Q 2 22. Q R to K sq 22. Q R to R 3 23. Kt to Q Kt 3 23. Kt to K 5 24. Q to Q 4 24. Kt to Q 3 25. RtoK3 25. P toQKt4 26. R to K Kt 3 26. Q to K B 3 27. P takes P 27. Q takes Q 28. Kt takes Q 28. R to Q Kt 3 29. B takes Kt * 29. R takes B 30. Kt to K B 5 30. R to K Kt 3 31. R to Q B sq 31. R takes R 32. P takes R 32. P to K Kt 3 33. R takes P 33. P takes Kt 34. R takes Kt 34. P to K B 3 35. P to Q Kt 6 35. K to B 2 36. P to Q Kt 7 36. R to Q Kt sq 37. R to Q 8 And Black resigned (d). Game "V.— Between Messrs. Kolisch and Medley. White (Mr. Kolisch). Black (Mr. Medley). 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 2. Kt to K B 3 2. Kt to Q B 3 3. B to B 4 3. B to B 4 (c) Assuredly P to Q B 3 would have been safer play. (d) The latter portion of the game is conducted in a very able manner by Mr. Mocatta. THE EVANS GAMBIT DECLINED. 369 4, , P to Q Kt 4 5. Castles (a) 6. P to Q B 3 7. P to Q R 4 8. PtoQl/ 9. Q B to K Kt 5 ]0. P to Q R 5 11. P to Q Kt 5 12. B takes P 13. P to Q R 6 14. B takes Q Kt 15. P takes P 16. B takes Kt 17. Q R to R 4 18. P takes B 19. Q to Q 3 20. Kt to Q B 3 21. P takes P 22. Q takes Q 23. Kt to K 2 24. K R to Q B sq 25. P takes P 26. R to Q B 2 27. R takes R 28. R takes P 29. Kt to K Kt 3 30. PtoK5 31. K to Kt 2 32. P to K B 4 33. Kt to K B 5 34. KtoR3 35. P takes P 36. R to Q Kt 7 37. Kt takes P (ch) 38. Kt to K B 7 (ch) 4 . B to Q Kt 3 5, , P to Q 3 6. Kt to K B 3 7. P to Q li 3 8. Castles 9. Q B to K Kt 6 10. BtoR2 11. R P takes P 12. K P takes P 13. B to Kt 3 14. P takes B 15. P to K R 3 (6) 16. Q takes B 17. B takes Kt 18. Q to K B 5 19. P to K B 4 20. P takes P 21. Q to K B 6 22. R takes Q 23. R to Q 6 24. P to Q B 4 25. B takes P 26. R to Q E 6 27. B takes R 28. R takes P 29. B toB4 30. E to R 8 (ch) 31. Rto K8 32. P to K Kt 4 33. R to K 7 (ch) 34. K Kt P takes P 35. B to Q Kt 3 36. B to Q sq 37. K to R sq And Black resigned. (a) An unusual move. P to Q Kt 5 is the best way to continue the attack, (i) This strikes us as weak. Why not have boldly taken Kt with B ? 370 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. Game VI. — Between Messrs. Morphy and the Eev. Geoege Salmon, ths former playing seven other games at the same time " blindfold." White (Mr. Morphy). 1. P to K 4 2. Kt to K B 3 3. B to Q B 4 4. P to Q Kt 4 5. P takes P 6. Castles 7. Kt takes P 8. P to Q 4 9. Kt to Q B 3 10. B to Kt 3 11. P to Q R 3 12. Kt takes R P 13. P to Q B 4 14. P takes Kt 15. QtoK B3 16. R to K sq 17. R to K 2 18. B to Q Kt 2 19. P to K Kt 3 20. Kt takes B 21. R to K 5 22. P to Q 6 23. K R takes R 24. Q to Q 5 25. P to Q 7 26. R to Q B sq 27. B takes Q 28. B to Q B 6 29. P to Q 5 30. R to Q sq 31. P to K B 4 32. B to R 3 33. R to K sq 34. B takes P 35. B takes Kt 36. R to K 8 37. K to B 2 38. K to K 3 39. K to Q 3 40. B to Q B 6 41. P takes P Black (Mr. Salmon'* 1. P to K 4 2. Kt to Q B 3 3. B to Q B 4 4. P to Q 4 5. Kt takes P 6. Kt to K 2 7. Castles 8. B to Q 3 9. B to K B 4 10. P toQ R4 11. PtoQRa 12. Q Kt takes Q P 13. R takes Kt 14. R to Q R 4 15. B to K Kt 3 16. B to Q Kt 5 17. Kt to K B 4 18. Q to Q R sq 19. Q to Q R 2 20. R P takes Kt 21. B takes P 22. B to Q Kt 5 23. B takes R 24. P to Q Kt 3 25. Q to Q R sq 26. Q takes Q ' 27. P to y Kt 4 28. Kt to Q 3 29. B to Q 7 30. B to K Kt 4 31. B to Q sq 32. P to K B 4 33. K to B 2 34. R to K R sq 35. P takes B 36. R to K B sq 37. P to K Kt 4 38. P to Kt 5 39. P to Kt 4 40. P takes P 41. R to Kt sq THE EVANS GAMBIT DECLINED. 371 42. K toB4 43. K to Kt 5 44. K toRo 45. K to Kt 7 46. K toB8 47. E, takes R 48. P Queens, and wins (a). 42. R to Esq 43. R to Kt sc[ 44. R to B sq 45. R to Kt sq 46. B to Kt 3 47. K takes R Game VII. — Between Messrs. Blackburne and Gossip, the former conducting seven other games at the same time " blindfold." Played af the Philidorian Chess Rooms. White (Mr. Blackbume). 1. P to K 4 2. Kt to K B 3 3. B to B 4 4. PtoQKt4 5. P takes P 6. B to Q R 3 (a) 7. Castles 8. P to Q 4 9. P takes Q B (c) 10. K to R sq 11. R to K Kt sq 12. Kt to Q 2 13. Kt to K 4 Black (Mt. Gossip). 1. P to K 4 2. Kt to Q B 3 3. B to B 4 4. P to Q 4 5. Q Kt takes P 6. Q to K 2 (J) 7. B to K Kt 5 8. B takes Kt 9. Q to Kt 4 (ch) 10. P takes Q P 11. Q to K B 3 12. Castles (Q R) 13. Q to Q Kt 3 (as) Considering that the above game was played by Mr. Morphy without sight of board or men, and that he was conducting at the same time seven other games, without sight of boards or men, against seven other opponents, we take this performance to be one of the most stupendous feats of chess ever accomplished. (a) We prefer the continuation given in the J, B to Q K t 5 (c h) g Kt takes KP ' Praxis " by Mr. Staunton. , Kt takes Q B P, &c. Q Kt takes Q P ' ' P to Q B 3 (6) Is this not as good a move as Q to Q 3 ? "We think so. (c) A good move. White can also get a fine game by taking Bishop with Queen : e.g., 9. Q takes B 10. B to Q Kt 5 (ch), with a strong attack. P takes P (best) The move made, however, appears to be quite sound. B B 2 372 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. 14. K to Q Kt sq 14. P to Q B 4 15. B to Q Kt 2 15. P to K B < 16. Kt to K Kt 5 16. Kt to K Tl " 17. Kt to K 6 17. R to Q 2 18. R takes K Kt P 18. R takes R 19. Kt takes R 19. Q to K Kt 3 20. Kt to K 6 20. R to K Kt sq (d) 21. Q to K B sq 21. Q to K R 4 (e) 22. B to K 2 22. B to Q 3 (/) 23. P to K B 4 23. Q to K R 5 24. B to K B 3 24. Kt to K Kt 5 (g) 25. B takes Kt 25. Q takes B (h) 26. P to K B 3 26. Q to K R 5 27. B takes P 27. B takes K B P (i) 28. Q to K B 2 28. Q takes Q 29. B takes Q 29. B to Q 3 30. P to Q B 4 30. Kt takes R P 31. R to Q R sq 31. Kt to Kt 5 32. R takes P 32. K to Q 2 33. R to R sq 33. Kt to Q 6 34. B to K 3 34. P to B 3 35. R to Q sq 35. P takes P 36. R takes Kt 36. K takes Kt 37. P takes P (ch) 37. K to K 4 38. B to B 2 38. P to Q Kt 4 39. B to K sq And the game was drawn [j ). {d) The attack and counter-attack now become highly interesting, and the accuracy of White's play reflects great credit on Mr. Blaokbnrne. (e) Threatening mate in two moves ! (/) Threatening immediate mate. [g) Once more threatening mate. ih) Yet again Black threatens mate in two moves, (i) Mate again menaces White. {f) Black, we think, might have now won by 39. P to Q Kt 5. CHAPTER X. THE GIUOCO PIANO. GAME THE FIRST. Italian writers have thus designated this opening, which although comparatively tame, is not so dull as the Sicilian or French Games. * The following are the usual moves : — WHITE. BLACK. 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 2. Kt to K B 3 S. Kt to Q B 3 3. B to Q B 4 3. B to Q B 4 * It must be borne in mind that the Italian method of Castling, in which the King and Kook have the choice of any of the intervening squares, as well as those they originally occupied (subject to the restrictions of not giving check, nor allowing the King or Rook to take up a position attacking any hostile man when performing the operation of Castling) was calculated to impart far more animation to an otherwise tame opening than the comparatively dull mode of Castling now practised in the rest of Europe, which is still termed by the Italians, alia Calabrista, after Greco who first adopted it. "Walker says, "If the leading Chess Clubs in this country were mutually to agree to Castle after the Italian method, it would speedily become the national law, and the superior advantages arising from it will be readily admitted by a\\ players conversant with the numerous brilliant attacks of the Italian writers, few of which can ever be adapted to our method of Castling. It is true that we should then clash with France and Germany, as in both those countries they Castle as we do ; but it is to be presumed that in time they would be sensible of the propriety of following our example, and the Italian latitude in Castling would then be instantly acknowledged throughout Europe. " Whilst we are disposed to agree with Walker to a certain extent, we cannot concur in his opinion that the Italian mode of Castling would ever be universally acknowledged, for the effect of such a change would be to upset the whole theory of the Openings, and to nullify the laborious researches of the most eminent theoreticians of other countries. Besides, it must not be forgotten that the Italian school does not allow the rapture of the Pawn en passant, and that this rale could never be admitted by chess players of the present age. 374 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. Black's third move is the best at his command. He can, however, play 3. Kt to KB 3, for the consequences of which line of play see " The Two Knights' Defence," (Chapter IV.). Two other moves at his disposal at this point — viz,,^ to Q 3 and Q to K B 3 — are intrinsically bad : the first because it shuts in the King's Bishop, while the second is objectionable as facilitating the development of the first player's game. He can also play 3. P to K B 4, which, although imparting some vivacity to an otherwise dull game, is also inferior ; e.g. : — (3. . Stakes Kt g B to Q 5 g Q take s P P to K B 4 ■ P takes K P " P takes Kt with, tlie better position.) 4. P to Q B 3 This is the usual time-honoured way of prosecuting the attack. White can also play here 4. Castles, 4. P to Q 3, or 4. Q Kt to B 3, for which see Games the Second, Third, and Fourth respectively. 4. Kt to K B 3, or (Var. I., II., III.) This is considered Black's best reply by Jaenisch and the German authorities. See also Games II., Ill,, and IV., at the end of this Chapter. Wormald and Lewis advise P to Q 3 as Black's best play. For the result of Black playing 4. P to Q 3, see Variation (I.). For the result of his moving 4. Q to K 2, or 4. P to K B 4, see Variations (II.) and (III.). e. P to Q 4 or (A.), (B.) White can also play 5. Castles, or 5. P to Q 3, at this point ; but neither of these moves are considered so strong. Kt to Kt 5 would be bad play, e.g. — .g Kt to K Kt 5 g P to K B 4 „ P takes QP Castles ■ P to Q 4 ' Kt takes P g B ta kes K t g Q to K B 3 Q takes B ' K R to Q st^, &c-) THE GIUOCO PIANO. 375 5. P takes P 6. P takes P (best), or (C.) The move advised here by Staunton and many other authorities is P to K 6, but that mode of play ought to give Black the advantage, as pointed out by Mr. Falkbeer and Jaenisch. {See (C.)) 6. P to Q Kt 4 ought only to lead to an even game. 6. B to Kt 5 (ch) This is generally admitted to be Black's best move, but B to Q Kt 3 appears as good ; e. g. — g 7 PtoQ5 ■ B to Q Et 3 ■ Kt to K 2, &c. See also Illustrative Game VI. 7. B to Q 2 7. B takes B (ch) 8. Q Kt takes B 8. P to Q 4 9. P takes P 9. K Kt takes P 10. Q to Q Kt 3 iO. Q Kt to K 2 (For the result of Black playing 10. Q Kt to R 4, see Illustrative Game II.) 11. Castles (K E) 11. Castles 12. K E to K sq 12. Kt to K B 5 13. E to K 4 13. Q Kt to K Kt 3 14. Q E to K sq 14. B to K B 4 ,„ . . .. Kt to K 5, with the advantage. See Illus- ^ ■ Q to K B3 ■ trative Game III.) 15. E to K 8 15. Q takes E (best) 16. E takes Q 16. Q E takes E 17. Q takes Q Kt P And White has undeniably the advantage 376 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. Diagram Showing the position after White's seventeenth move. BLACK. WW'iP ■m^'^'^M W /// ^^ W7M //w/ ffl W/ P-J&i ...... /M/y W/ ..'::^mmw . :i mm. WHITE. In the above position it will be seen that Black's apparent attack on the White King is superficial, and that he cannot avoid the loss of another Pawn. Should he now play 18. Q takes Q B I 19. Q takes Q E Y 17. Q E to Q Kt sq 18. E takes Q Kt P And White, in addition to his numerical superiority, has two formidable passed Pawns, which ought to enable him to win without difficulty. THE GIUOCO PIANO. 377 Variation (I.). On Black's fourth move : — WHITE. 5. P to Q 4 6. P takes P (If 6. ^ B to Kt 5 (ch) Q to Q Kt 3 Castles, even game.) 7. Kt to Q B 3 8. B to K 3 BLACK. 4. P to Q 3 5. P takes P 6. B to Q Kt 3 ^ BtoQ2 B takes B(ch) g Q Kt t akes B ■ Kt to K B 3 7. B to K Kt 5 8. Kt to K B 3 And the game is even, but we would take Black's game for choice. Variation (II.). On Black's fourth move : — 5. P to Q 4 (If 5. P takes P 6. P takes P 7. Kt takes Kt 8. Castles y. K to E sq 4. Q to K 2 6. B to Kt 3 (best) „ Castles , with a fine game.) 6. Kt takes P 7. Q takes Kt 8. P to Q 3 9. B to K 3 Even game. Variation (III.). On Black's fourth move : — 4. P to K B 4 Although this move may be ventured against ordinary players, it is unsound and hazardous. 6. Pto Q4 7. P takes K P 8. R takes B 9. P to Kt 3 10. Q to Q4 11. Q takes P 378 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. 5. p to Q 4 5. P takes Q P (best) Kt takes K P 7 Q checks ("^•P takes KP '-BtoKtS -ptoKtS ^ BtoB7(cli) Q B to R 6 (ch) ^q Q takes Kt (ch) K to B'sq ■ Kt takes B K to K 2 B takes P ,„ Q to K Kt 5 (ch), winning the Queen or checkmate Kt takes Kt \n two moves.) 6. Kt to K Kt 5 7. B takes Q P 8. B takes Kt 9. Q checks 10. Q takes R P 11. P to Q B 4 IS. Kt to Q 2 12. B to Q Kt 5 13. K Kt takes K P with a fine attack. (A.) Variation on White's fifth move : — WHITE. BLACK. 5. Castles This move is not, in our opinion, so strong as P to Q 4. Black in reply can either play 5. P to Q 3, or 5. Kt takes K P. Firstly : 5. P to Q 3 6. P to Q 4 6. P takes P 7. P takes P 7. B to Kt 3 8. B to Q Kt 5 and the game is even. Secondly : 5. Kt takes K P 6. B to Q 5 "White, it must be noticed, has the choice of two othermoves THE GIUOCO PIANO. 379 here— w., Q to K 2 and P to Q 4. The first is a good move, but the second is inferior, e. g. : — (Intheflistplace: 6. ^-^'^A^^ 7 ^ to Q Kt 5 g B take s Kt P to Q 4 Casties ' P takes JB g Kt takes K P ^^ P to Q 4 B to Kt 2 B to Kt 3, and the game is perfectly equal. In the second place : 6. I^L^ 7. ^i?- 9-^^ i PtoQ4 P takes P, and Black ha ^ gained a Pawn without any inferiority.) To resume the main variation : 6. Kt to K B 3 7. B takes Q Kt 7. P takes B 8. Kt takes K P and again the joositions are equal. (B.) Another variation on White's fifth move : — 6. P to Q 3 5. P to Q 3 Black may also play here 5. P to Q 4, a move adopted by De Vere against Paulsen in the Baden Tourney, e.g. : — g PtakesP ,j P to Q Kt 4 PtoQ4 KKt takes P B to Kt 3 „ B takes Kt „ P to Q B 4 Q takes B ' ' Q to Q 2 De Vere played here 9. Q to K 3, but Q to Q ii is declared best by Zukertort, who gives the following continuation : — 10 PloQB^S ,, P takes B ^2 Ki^A^a ■ Kt takes P ' Kt takes P (ch) ' P to K 5 ,, Kt to K sq j4 Kt takes K t ^g Q to E 4 (ch) ■ Q to Q 5 ■ Q takes E ' P to B 3 ,„ Q takes K P (ch) -.^ Kt to B 5 ^g Kt to Q B 3 B to K 3 ■ Q takes P ' Q to B 5 (ch) 380 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. jg Q takes Q g^ K to K s q g^ K Kt to K 4 B takes Q (oh) ' P takes P' ' R to E 8, with the better White, however, on his eighth move ic the preceding Variation, in lieu of taking Kt with B, may play 8. P to Kt 5, and maintain the extra Pawn. 6. P to Q Kt 4. To play P to Q 4 here is a loss of time, e. g. : — g PtoQ 4 ^ P takes P g Q Kt to B 3 P takes P ■ B to Q Kt 3 ' Bto K Kt 5, and Black has incontestably the stronger position, as White can only play now B to K 3 or B to Q Kt 5, and in either case the attack appears in Black's hands. 6. B to Q Kt 3 7. P to Q R 4 7. P to Q E 4 8. P to Q Kt 5 8. Kt to K 2 9. Q to Q Kt 3 9. Castles 10. Kt to K Kt 5 10. P to Q 4 11. P takes P 11. K Kt takes P 12. B to Q R 3 12. B to K 3 13. Q Kt to Q 2 13. P to K R 3 14. Kt takes B 14. P takes Kt 15. Kt to K 4 15. R to K B 2 16. Castles (K R) 16. P to K Kt 4 17. Q B takes Kt 17. R takes B 18. K B takes Kt 18. P takes B 19. Q takes P (ch) 19. Q takes Q 20. Kt to B 6 (ch) With a Pawn ahead and the better position. The first sixteen moves on each side in the above main Variation occurred in a game between Messrs. Hanstein and Heydebrand. The former, who played White, moved Q R to K sq on his seventeenth move, instead of the move we have given, and lost the game. The above effective con- tinuation is from "La Regence," p. 305, and appears to THE GIUOCO PIANO. 381 show that 5. P to Q 3, followed by P to Q Kt 4, is a good mode of continuing the game for White. (C.) Variation on White's sixth move : — 6. P to K 5 As before observed, this move, which was formerly much in vogue, is far inferior to 6. P takes P. Jaenisch and the German authorities rightly condemn it. 6. P to Q 4 (best) CTffi tl • fi 7 ^ *'° Q ^ 8 ^ takes Kt ^ ""^ y= • Kt to K 5 ■ Kt takes KB P ' P takes P (dis ch) 9. K to K sq , with the advantage. _ Castles, &c. If secondly: 6. QtoK2 If thirdly: 6. 7. Bjakei_P W, &c.) ■' Kt to Kt 5 7. B to Q Kt 5 (best) 7. Kt to K 5 8. P takes P (best) ,j-j g B takes Kt g P takes P ^^ Kt to Q B 3 P takes B ' B to Q Kt 3 ' P to K B 3 j^ BtoK 3 Castles, with a good game. The move 10. Kt to Q B 3 is recommended by Jaenisch. Staunton gives for Black in answer to : j„ Kt to Q B 3 j^ P takes P 6)1 ^assoTO* ^2 Kt takes Kt ■ PtoKB4 'Q takes P ■ P takes Kt J3 Kt to K 5 Castles, with the better game. lu this variation Staunton prefers 10. Castles for White to 10. Kt to Q B 3, as advised by Jaenisch, with the following continuation : — -.q Cast l es ■ P tok B 4. We prefer ad- 382 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. vancing the K B P only one square in this opening, as suggestea by Jaenisch.) 8. B to Q Kt 3 (best) (If 8. B to Q Kt 5 (oh) Q K to B sq or {a) Castles 10. 11 Kt to Q B 3 Kt to Q Kt sq ;ood game. g BtoQ2 B takes B (ch) E takes K t P takes B QtoB2 12. B toQ 3 B to K B 4 13. {a) Q Kt takes B Castles 12. 16, 13, Kt to Q Kt 3 P to K B 5 QtoR4 BtoK2 Q to Q B 2, with a ,, Castles ■ P to K B 4 , , R to Q B sq Q to K sq B to Q 2, even game.) 9. Q Kt to B 3 This move is suggested in the " Praxis," p. 112, as satis- factory for White. It will not, however, enable him to overcome the radical defect of the opening consequent upon his unsound sixth move, as we will endeavour to demonstrate. The usual mode of continuing the game for White on his eighth move used to be B takes K t (ch) P takes B P takes P B to Kt 3 10. Castles P to K B 4 or B to K Kt 5, and Black has a good game ; and in the "Praxis" this capture of the Knight is decried as "pre- mature." It will be fomid, however, that this Knight " will " have to be captured ultimately, so it little matters whether he is taken a few moves earlier or later, and in any case Black acquires a superior game. For an exemplification of the bad results of White playing 6. P to K 5, see Illustrative Game I. 9. Castles THE GIUOCO PIANO. S83 10. B takes Kt 10. P takes B 11. Castles 11. B to K Kt 5 IS. B to K 3 12. Kt takes Kt 13. P takes Kt 13. P to K B 3 14. P to Q R 4 14. P takes K P 15. P to Q R 5 15. P to K 5 16. P to K R 3 16. B to K R 4 17. P to K Kt 4 17. R takes Kt 18. P tak«s K B 18. P takes P And the "Handbuch" pronounces Black to have a decisive superiority. GAME THE SECOND. WHITE. BLACK. 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 2. Kt to K B 3 S. Kt to Q B 3 3. B to Q B 4 3. B to Q B 4 4. Castles The leading authorities are at variance respecting the efficacy of this move. It is condemned by Jaenisch and " La Strategie " as weak play, whilst Staunton, on the contrary, thinks it is White's best move, the reason he gives being that White can resolve the game into an Evans Gambit on his next move ; but we differ entirely from this view, for suppose Black play— ^ g P to Q Kt 4 g P to Q B 3 Kt to K B 3 ■ B takes Kt P" " B to Q E 4 >j PtoQ 4 g P takes K P ^ Q to B 2 ■ ' Castles K Kt takes K P ' P to Q 4, and in this form of the Evans Gambit Black is pronounced to have the better game by all the authorities. See " Evans Gambit," Chapter VIII., the Anderssen- Zukertort or three pawns' defence 4. Kt to K B 3 (best) 384 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. (If 4 ' P to Q 3, White can turn the game into an ordinary Evans Gambit with no disadvantage.) (If 5, 5. R to K sq PtoQ4 P takes P Q Kt takes P B to Q 2 game is to he preferred.) 6. PtoK 5 PtoQ4 B takes Kt B takes B 10. ^ B to Q Kt 5 (best) ■ Kt to K 5 Kt takes B P takes Kt, and Black's 6. P to Q B 3 7. P to Q 4 5. Castles 6. P to Q 3 7. B to Q Kt 3 Even game. We think Castling at White's fourth move is quite as good as 4. P to Q B 3, and although only leading to positions of equality, may be safely adopted. The old attack of 4. P to Q B 3 has been completely upset by Mr. Zukertort's defence. {See Games the Fifth and Sixth.) GAME THE THIRD. WHITE. 1. P to K 4 S. Kt to K B 3 3. B to Q B 4 4. P to Q 3 BLACK. 1. P to K 4 S. Kt to Q B 3 3. B to Q B 4 This move also ought to lead to an even game. 5. P to Q B 3 6. P to Q 4 7. P takes P 8. Kt to Q B 3 4. P to Q 3 5. Kt to K B 3 6. P takes P 7. B to Q Kt 3 8. B to K Kt 5 THE GIUOCO PIANO. 385 And in this Variation we much prefer Black's position. DiAGBAM. bjjack. BLACK. 1. P to K 4 2. Kt to Q B 3 3. B to B 4 WHITE. GAME THE FOURTH. WHITE. 1. P to K 4 2. Kt to K B 3 3. B to B 4 4. Kt to Q B 3 We believe this phase of the Giuoco Piano gives the first player a stronger game than any of the other modes of play we have previously examined. The following continuation is from a game between Messrs. Buckle and Schulder :— 4. Kt to K B 3 5. P to Q 3 5. P to Q 3 6. Castles 6. P to K R 3 c « 386 THE CHESS-PLAVER'S MANUAL. 7. Q Kt to K 2 7. Kt to Q E 4 8. B to Q Kt 3, and the game is about even. In fact, when the first player moves his Queen's Knight to Bishop's third square on his fourth move, the opening is resolved into a dull variation of the Vienna Game, or "Queen's Knight's Opening," where the same position is brought about by a simple transposition of moves. {See " The Queen's Knight's Opening," Chapter XXVII.) GAME THE FIFTH. No analysis of the " Giuoco Piano " can be considered complete that does not comprise the following interesting Variations : — WHITE. BLACK. 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 S. Kt to K B 3 2. Kt to Q B 3 3. B to B 4 3. B to B 4 4. P to B 3 4. Kt to B 3 5. P to Q 4 5. P takes P 6. P takes P Better than P to K 5, as we have demonstrated. 6. B to Kt 5 (ch) 7. B to Q 2 7. B takes B (ch) For the consequences of Black playing 7. Kt takes K P here, instead of the move in the text, see Game the Sixth. 8. Q Kt takes B 8. Kt takes K P This move appears stronger than the usual line of play at this juncture of 8. P to Q 4, since it at once relieves Black from danger. 9. Kt takes Kt 9. P to Q 4 10. B takes P (best) 10. Q takes B And Black has slightly the better position. THE GIUOOO PIANO. 387 DiAGBAM. BLACK- WHITE. The above Variation occurred in a game between the author and Mr. Zukertort. The " Handbuch " continues the game from this point as follows : — 11. Castles 11- Castles 12. Kt to Q B 3 13- Q to Q sq Black may also play 12. Q to K E 4, thus :— PtoQ5 ^4 Kt to Q 4, &c. Kt to K 2 13. Kt to K 2 14. Q to Q 3 16. E to K sq 16. Q to B 4 And after a few more moves pronounces White to nave the preferable game. We think Black's fourteenth move is open to objection. c 2 12. Q to K B 4 13. P to Q 5 14. Kt to K 5 15. E to K sq 16. Kt to Q B 4 13. 388 THE CHESS-PLAYEB'S MANUAL. GAME THE SIXTH. WHITE. BLACK. 1. P to K 4 1. PtoK4 2. Kt to K B 3 S. Kt to Q B 3 3. B to B 4 3. B to B 4 4. P to Q B 3 4. Kt to K B 3 5. PtoQ4 5. P takes P 6. P takes P 6. B to Kt 5 (ch) 7. B to Q 2 7. Kt takes K P In the preceding game Black captured the Bishop at this point. The present move, however, gives Black at least an even game. 8. B takes B 8. Kt takes B 9, B takes P (ch) 9. K takes B 10. Q to Kt 3 (ch) 10. P to Q 4 11. Q takes Kt (best) If "White play, instead of this move, 11. Kt to K 5 (ch), as advised by Max Lange, Black should obtain a shght superiority in some variations, thus : — jj Kt to K 5 (ch) ^2 Q takes Kt ^g Q to R 4 ■ K to K 3 or (a) ' P to Q B 4 ' Q to H 5 , , Castles , , P to B 3 14. ~ 15. R to B sq P takes P, or Kt to B 3, and White's advantage is slight. (a) ;^j ^2 Q takes K t (ch) ,„ Q to Kt 3 ■ K to K 2 ' Q to Q 3 " R to K sq 14 Kt to Q B 3 ,, P takes Kt ,„ Castles, even game. Kt takes Kt ' K to B sq ' 11. R to Ksq IS. Castles 12. P to Q B 3 THE GIUOCO PIANO. 389 13. Q Kt to B 3 14. Q E to K sq 15. Q takes Q (best) 13. Kt to K B 3 14. Q to Kt 3 (If 15. Q to Q 6 B to K B 4, with the advantage.) 16. R takes E 17. E to K sq 18. P to K Kt 4 15. P takes Q 16. Kt takes E 17. Kt to Q 3 Even game. The above moves occur in a game between Messrs. Zuker- tort and Steinitz. We may add that the game in question was drawn. Diagram. BLACK. tt i WMM 'Wilim/ .^fc-// V///////M <^^ 'mm. m. p fm #^ m............W 'y/'^'f^ WHITE. 390 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL GAME THE SEVENTH. WHITE. 1. P to K 4 2. Kt to K B 3 3. B to Q B 4 4. P to Q B 3 5. P to Q 3 BLACK. 1. P to K 4 2. Kt to Q B 3 3. B to B 4 4. Kt to K B 3 It has been shown already that by playing 5. P to Q 4 at this point White at best only gets an even game. {See Games the Fifth and Sixth.) We believe that P to Q 3, although apparently a tame move, is in reality sounder play. The following continuation is from the " Handbuch." 5. P to Q 3 6. P to Q 4 6. P takes P 7. P takes P 7. B to Kt 3 8. Kt to Q B 3 8. B to K Kt 5 9. P to Q 5 9. Kt to K 4 And White has evidently lost time. GAMES ILLUSTRATIVE OF THE GIUOCO PIANO OPENING. Game I.—Behoeen Messrs. Down and Zukertort, the latter playing nine other games simultaneously " blindfold." White (Mr. Down). Black (Mr. Zukertort). 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 2. Kt to K B 3 2. Kt to Q B 3 3. B to Q B 4 3. B to Q B 4 4. P to Q B 3 4. Kt to K B 3 5. P to Q 4 5. P takes P 6. P to K 5 (a) 6. P to Q 4 (a) This move is radically unsound, and ought to enable Black to establish his Pawns well in the centre at Q B 4 and Q 4 with a superior position. THE GIUOCO PIANO. 391 7. B to Q Kt 5 7. Kt to K 5 8. P takes P 8. B to Q Kt 3 9. Castles (6) 9. Q^stles 10. P to K R 3 (c) 10. P to K B 3 (d) 11- K to K 3 11. p takes P 12. B takes Kt 12. p takes B 13. Kt takes P 13. Q to K B 3 14. Kt to Q B 3 14. Kt takes Kt 15. P takes Kt 15. p to Q B 4 (e) 16. P to K B 4 16. p takes P 17. P takes P , 17. B to K 3 18. Kt to Kt 4 18. B takes Kt 19. P takes B 19. Q R to K sq 20. P to K Kt 5 . 20. Q to Q 3 21. Q to Q 3 21. P to Q B 4 (/) 22. P takes P 22. R takes B 23. P takes Q 23. R to K R 6 (dis ch) 24. R to K B 2 24. R takes Q And White resigned. Game II. — Betwem Messrs. Zdkertort and Steinitz. White (Mr. Zukertort). Black (llr. Steinitz). 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 2. Kt to K B 3 2. Kt to Q B 3 3. B to B 4 3. B to B 4 4. P to Q B 3 4. Kt to K B 3 5. P to Q 4 5. P takes P 6. P takes P (a) 6. B to Q Kt 5 (ch, (6) The " Praxis " reconimeDds here Q Kt to B 3 ; but that even ought ulti- mately to give Black the better game by his playing P to K B 3 at the proper moment. 9. B takes Kt is bad play. (c) Feebly played ; but Black had in any case the better game. id) This move completely breaks up White's centre. (c) It is the advance of this doubled Q B P in the " Giuoco Piano " that decides the game in favour of the second player, and demonstrates clearly enough that White's sixth move P to K 6, which has long been thought the best at his disposal, is really bad play, if properly taken advantage of. (/) This is quite decisive. (as) Tlie correct move, which, if properly followed up, ought in some variations to give White the advantage. P to K 5 is bad, and ought to give Black the better game, 392 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. 7. B to Q 2 8. Q Kt takes B 9. P takes P 10. Q to Q Kt 3 U. Q to Q R 4 (ch) 12. B takes Kt 13. Castles (K R) 14. K R to Q B sq 15. Q to Q R 3 16. Q to B 3 17. Kt to K 5 18. P to Q Kt 4 19. Q to K B 3 20. Kt takes (SJ0r 21. R takes B 22. Kt to Kt 3 23. P to K R 4 24. Q E to Q B sq 25. P to K R 5 26. R to K sq 27. RtoK 7 28. K R to Q B 7]^f*oM 29. K to E 2 30. R to K 5 31. R takes R P 32. P takes R 33. P to K 6 34. Kt to Q 4 35. Q to K Kt 4 36. P to K Kt 3 37. Kt takes P 38. K to R 3 39. R to R 8 (ch) 40. Q to Q B 4 41. Kt to B 7 (clis ch) 42. R takes Kt 43. Q to K 4 (ch) 44. R takes R (ch) <3B^) 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31. 32. 33. 34. 35. 36. 37. 38. 39. 40. 41. 42. 43. 44. B takes B (ch) PtoQ4 K Kt takes P Kt to Q R 4 (6) P to Q B 3 Q takes B Castles Q to Q Kt 4 P to Q Kt 3 BtoQ2 K R to Q sq Kt to Kt 2 B to K sq B takes Kt Q takes P Q to R 6 (c) Kt to Q 3 Kt to K sq P to K R 3 Q takes R P Kt to K B 3 Q to Kt 8 (ch) Rto Q4 Q R to Q sq R takes R Kt to Q 2 P takes P Q to Kt 5 Q to Q 3 (ch) R to K B sq R takes P (ch^ RtoB2 Kt t(^Kt sq R to ^2 (d) K toR2 R to Q sq K to Kt sq Q takes R (b) This move is, we think, to be preferred to 10. Q Kt to K 2 (for which set next game) ; but in any case "White ought to maintain his advantage in position. (c) The best resource. {(i) Q to K i would not have enabled Black to obtain a draw : e.g., 40 4 J Kt to K B 4 ^2 Q to K 6 ,„ Kt to K Kt 6. ■ Q to K 4 ■ Q to Q 3 ■ Q to Q sq 43. THE GIUOCO PIANO. 393 45. Q to Q 5 (ch) 46. Kt takes Q 47. K to Kt 4 48. K to B 5 45. Q takes Q 46. P to Q Kt 4 47. K to I! i And Black resigned. Game III. — Between Messrs. Buckle and Andjskssen. (The first nine moves on each side are the same as in the preceding game between Messrs. Zukertort and Steinitz. We append a diagram, showing the position after White's tenth move, Black having to .play.) White (Mr. Buckle). 11. Castles (K R) Black (Mr. Anderssen). 10. Q Kt to K 2 (a) 11. Castles BLACK. (a) In the preceding game. Black moved here.Q Kt to R 4, which we think better than this move. Ercolc del Eio was of opinion that 10. Q Kt to K 2 should equalise the game. 394 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. 12. K R to K sq (b) 12. Kt to K B 5 13. K R to K 4 13. Q Kt to K Kt 3 14. Q R to K sq 14. Q to K B 3 (c) 15. Kt to K 5 ' 15. Q to K Kt 4 (d) 16. B takes K B P (ch) 16. K to R sq 17. Kt takes Kt (ch) 17. P takes Kt 18. Q to K Kt 3 18. Q takes Q 19. R P takes Q 19. R takes B 20. R takes Kt 20. K to Kt sq (e) 21. Q R to K 8 (ch) And Black resigned. Game IV.- -Between Messrs. Steinitz and Green. White (Mr. Green). Black (Mr. Steinitz). 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 2. Kt to K B 3 2. Kt to Q B 3 3. B to B 4 3. B to B 4 4. P to B 3 4. Kt to B 3 5. P to Q 4 5. P takes P 6. P takes P 6. B to Kt 5 (ch) 7. B to Q 2 7. B takes B (ch) 8. Q Kt takes B 8. P to Q 4 (a) (6) It little matters which of the Rooks is played to K sq at this point, as they can always he doubled in a few moves to obtain the same position. (c) In the next Game between Messrs. Steinitz and Green, the former, who conducted Black's game, played here 14. B to K B 4 ; but that ought to have lost ,. .1 „„ (.!,„„ li ,r RtoKS ,„ R takes Q him the game : thus, li. — ^, „ 15. 16. ^^ — B to K B 4 Q takes R (best) Q R takes K jy Q takes Q Kt F jg Q takes B P ^^ Q takes R P, and White ought ■ R to Q Kt sq ' R takes Kt P ' to win. (d) Kt takes Kt is the correct move at this point. (c) Black had no resource, for if ho had played 20. R takes R then follows : 2j RJcJf 8 (ch) 22 P takes R gs Kt to K 4 24 Kt to K Kt 5 (ch) ■ K to R 2 ' P to Q Kt 3 ' B to Q Kt 2 ' K to R 8 25. R to K 7 , followed by 26. K t to K 6. w inning ; or 25. R to K 3 , and Black cannot avoid losing the game. (a) We prefer here Kt takes K P, followed by P to Q 4 : the course of play adopted gives Black an inferior position. THE GIUOCO PIANO. 395 9. P takes P 10. Q to Kt 3 ^ 11. Castles (iKrt) 12. K R to K sq (c) 13. R to K 4 14. Q E to K sq 15. K R to K 3 {d) /JFAOM KH) 16. Kt to K 5 ^ 17. R takes Kt 18. Kt to B 3 19. Q to K 3 20. K R to K 8 21. Q takes R 22. Q to K 7 23. Q takes Q 24. P to K R 3 25. R takes R (ch) 26. K to B sq 27. Kt to Q 2 28. K to K 2 29. K to K 3 30. P to K B 4 31. B to Q 3 32. K takes B 33. K to K 3 34. Kt to K B 3 35. P to K Kt 3 36. P takes P (ch) 37. Kt takes Kt 38. K to B 3 39. K to K 3 40. K to B 3 41. P to K Kt 4 Drawn. 9. K Kt takes P 10. Q Kt to K 2 (6) 11. Castles 12. Kt to B 5 13. Q Kt to Kt 3 /pRoM K>0 14. BtoB4 15. Q to Q 3 16. Kt takes Kt 17 B to Kt 3 18. K to B sq 19. Kt to K R 4 20. Q R takes R 21. Kt to K B 3 . 22. P to K R 3 23. P takes Q 24. R to K sq 25. Kt takes R 26. K to Kt sq 27 K to B sq 28. K to K 2 29. Kt to Q B 2 30. P to Q 4 31. B takes B 32. K to B 3 33. Kt to K 3 34. P to K Kt 4 35. P to K R 4 36. Kt takes P 37. K takes Kt 38. K tc B 4 39. K to Kt 4 40. P to R 5 (6) Kt to Q R 4 is not good. (See Illustrative Game II.) (c) Q R to K sq may be played here with equal effect. {d) The correct move here is R to K 8, giving "White the advantage : thus, ,, R to K 8 ,g R takes Q ,_ Q takes Kt P , better game. Q takes R Q R takes R 396 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. Game V. — Between Messrs. Zukeetort and Steinitz. (From " The Westminster Papers.") White (Herr Zukertort). Black (Herr Steinitz). 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 2. Kt to K B 3 2. Kt to Q B 3 3. B to Q B 4 3. B to Q B 4 4. P to Q B 3 4. Kt to K B 3 5. P to Q 4 5. P takes P 6. P takes P 6. B to Kt 5 (ch) 7. B to Q 2 7. Kt takes K P 8. B takes B 8. Kt takes B 9. B takes P (ch) 9. K takes B 10. Q to Kt 3 (ch) 10. P to Q 4 11. Q takes Kt (a) 11. B to K sq 12. Castles 12. P to Q B 3 13. Q Kt to B 3 13. Kt to K B 3 14. Q R to K sq 14. Q to Kt 3 15. Q takes Q (b) 15. P takes Q 16. R takes R 16. Kt takes R 17. R to K sq 17. Kt to Q 3 18. P to K Kt 4 (c) And the game was drawn. Game Y1.— Between the same opponents. (From " The Westminster Papers.") White (Herr Zukertort). Black (Herr Steinitz). 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 2. Kt to K B 3 2. Kt to Q B 3 3. B to B 4 3. B to B 4 4. P to B 3 4. Kt to B 3 5. P to Q 4 5. P takes P 6. P takes P 6. B to Kt 3 (a) , jf 11 Kt to K ,5 (ch) ^2 Q takes Kt ' K to K 3 ' P to Q B 4, and Black has the better game. (6) If 15. QtoQ6 ^ B to B, 4, &c. (c) Neither party has any advantage worth mentioning. (a) The usual move is B to Kt 5 (eh) ; but in the Handicap between the same players, and with the same opening, Steinitz lost, and therefore varied the game. THE GIUOCO PIANO. 397 7. Castles (5) 8. E to K sq 9. R takes Kt 10. B takes P 11. Q Kt to B 3 12. P to Q 5 (c) 13. B to K Kt 5 14. Q to Kt 3 15. Q B to K sq (e) 16. P to Q 6 (/) 17. Kt to Q 5 18. Q takes Kt (g) 19. Q takes Q P (ch) 20. Kt to K 5 (h) 21. K to E sq 22. Kt takes R 23. Q to Q 5 (ch) 24. R takes B 25. Q takes Q 26. B to K 3 27. K to Kt sq 28. R to K 2 29. R to Q 2 30. K to B 2 (0 31. B takes Kt P 32. K takes B 33. K to B 3 34. P to K R 4 Kt takes K P Castles PtoQ<^ Q takes B Q to Q sq 12. Kt to K 2 13. P to K B 3 R to K B 2 (d) K to B sq P takes P Kt takes Kt B to Q 2 K to Kt sq B takes B P (ch) B takes R K takes Kt K to Kt 3 (j) ■ 24. B to B 3 (it) 25. R takes Q 26. K to B 2 27. P to K Kt 4 28. P to Q R 3 29. R to K sq 30. B takes Kt P 31. P takes B 32. K to B 3 33. P to K R 4 34. P takes P 9. 10. 11. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. (i) P to Q 5 is perhaps stronger. (c) The commencement of a good combination. {d) Black cannot of course take the B because of White's reply P to Q 6 ; but it would have been better to have retreated the K to R sq at once. («) All this is finely played. (/) White would have done better to retire the B to B 4. Every move Black would have to make afterwards would only add to his embarrassment. (g) Better than winning the Queen, which White could now do by E to K 8 (ch), &c. (A) In offering this sacrifice, White overlooked Black's resource on the 23rd move, which completely frustrates the attack. (j) The only square. If K to B sq. White plays B to B 4, and the mate is inevitable. {k) Black cannot take the B because of Q to Q 6 (ch), followed by R to Q sq, P to Kt 4, &c. {I) This oversight causes the loss of the game, for even now White, by playing B to Q 4 could have ensured a draw. 398 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. 35. R to Q 4 35. KtoKt4 36. R to Q 5 (ch) 36. K to Kt 3 37. R to Q 6 (ch) 37. K to B 4 38. R to Q 4 38. P to K R 6 39. R to K R 4 39. K to Kt 4 P, 1^ i 40. P to K R 5 40. R takes P (f\'T: 41. K to B 2 41. R to Q B sq 42. R to Q Kt 3 42. R to B 7 (ch) 43. K to Kt sq 43. P to Q Kt 4 44. P to R 4 44. P takes P 45. R to Q Kt 4 45. R to B 8 (ch) 46. K to R 2 46. R to Q Kt 8 47. R takes P 47. R takes P(ch) 48. KtoR3 48. R to Kt 6 (ch) 49. K to R 2 49. R to Kt 3 50. K to R 3 50. K to B 4 (m) 51. K takes P 51. R to K Kt 3 52. K to R 5 52. R to K 3 53. R to R 5 (ch) 53. K to K 5 54. K to Kt 5 (to) 54. R to K 4 (ch) And White resigned. Game VIL — Between Messrs. Gossip and, Macdonnell. (From the " Era.") White (Mr. Gossip). Black (Mr. MacdonneU). 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 2. Kt to K B 3 2. Kt to Q B 3 3. B to B 4 3. B to B 4 4. P to Q B 3 4. Kt to K B 3 5. P to Q 4 5. P takes P 6.,PtoK5 6. P to Q 4 7. B to Q Kt 5 7. Kt to K 5 8. P takes P 8. B to Kt 3 9. KttoQBS 9. B to K Kt 5 10. B to K 3 10. Castles 11. Castles 11. PtoKBS 12. K B takes Kt 12. P takes B {m) This suffices, hut Black might have shortened the road to victory hy E to K R 3. (n) The last of a series of unfortunate oversights. White should have played K to E 4 (ch), and then K to Kt 5. THE GIUOCO PIANO. 399 13. Q Kt to K 2 13. P to K B 4 14. Q Kt to K B 4 14. Q to K 2 15. P to K E 3 15. P to K Kt 4 (a) 16. Kt takes Q P 16. P takes Kt (6) 17. P takes B 17. P takes K Kt P 18. Kt takes P 18. Kt takes Kt 19. Q takes P (c) 19. KtoB2 20. Q to E, 5 (ch) (d) 20. K to Kt's sq 21. Q takes Kt (e) 21. Q takes Q 22. B takes Q 22. B takes P And Black wins. Game Ylll.—Betu; een the late Mr. Maude and Mr. Gossip. (From "The Era.") White (Mr. Gossip). Black (Mr. Maude). 1. P to K 4 - 1. P to K 4 2. Kt to K B 3 2. Kt to Q B 3 3. B to B 4 3. B to B 4 4. P to Q B 3 4. Kt to K B 3 5. P to Q 4 5. P takes P 6. P to K 5 6. P to Q 4 7. B to Q Kt 5 7. Kt to K 5 8. P takes P 8. B to Kt 3 9. Kt to Q B 3 9. Oastles (a) 10. B takes Q Kt 10. P takes B 11. PtoKRS 11. P to K B 3 (b) 12. Q to Q Kt 3 12. K to R sq 13. Castles 13. K B P takes P Notes hy Herr Lowentlial. (a) A very intere.sting position. (J) Had Black moved Q to K 3, White would have gained a piece by first taking the K B with Knight, &c. (c) All this is very pretty. (d} White should have taken Knight with Bishop, obtaining a fine game. (e) An unfortunate slip, which loses the game at once ; B takes Kt, as we have suggested above, would have been the correct move. Notes h) Herr Lowenthal. (a) Q B to K Kt 5 is also considered good. (i) Q B to Q E 3, an apparently good move, would only havp been a loss of time. White would have played Q to Q E 4, compelling the retreat of the threatened Bishop. 400 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. 14. K Kt takes P 14. K B takes Q P (c) 15. K Kt takes Q B P 15. Q to K B 3 16. K Kt takes B 16. Q takes Kt 17. B to K 3 17. Q to K 4 18. Q takes P d) 18. Q takes Q 19. Kt takes Q 19. B to Kt 2 (e) 20. Kt takes Q B P 20. Q R to Q B sq 21. Kt to K 6 21. K R to K B 3 22. Kt to K B 4 22. Q R to K B sq 23. Q R to Q sq 23. P to K R 3 24. Kt to K 2 24. Kt to Q 3 25. P to K B 3 25. K R to K Kt 3 26. Q R takes Kt (/) 26. R takes R 27. B to Q B 5 27. R to Q 7 28. B takes R 28. R takes Kt 29. R to K B 2 29. R takes R 30. K takes R 30. K to Kt sq 31. B to B 5 31. P to Q R 3 32. P to Q Kt 4 And wins. (c) A weak move which gives White the better game ; Black should rather have played Q to K B 3. (d) White has now the advantage of a Pawn with the better position. (e) It is evident that the Q B P could not have been saved. ( f) The speediest mode of terminating the game. CHAPTER XL THE COUNTER GAMBIT IN THE KING'S KNIGHT'S OPENING. GAME THE FIEST. WHITE. BLACK. 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 2. Kt to K B 3 2. P to K B 4 This move, which is noticed b,y Lewis, Walker, Greco, Cozio, and Ponziani, was subjected to a rigid analysis by Messrs. Hanstein, Bledow, Mayet, Von Bilguer, and Von der Lasa, in 1839. The present chapter contains the most important Variations resulting from their investigations. The move of 2. P to K B 4 was first given by Damiano. 3. Kt takes P This move is given as best by Staunton ("Handbook," p. 92), but White may also play 3. B to Q B 4, for the result of which mode of play aee Game the Second. For the conse- quences of 3. P takes K B P, see Game the Third. 3. Q to K B 3 If Black play 3. Q to K 2, Staunton considers that White should obtain the better game, as follows : — 3 ^ Q to R 5 (ch) 5 Kt takes Kt P Q to K 2 ■ P to Kt 3 ■ Q takes K P (ch) g B_to_K 2 „ Q to R 3 g Q takes K Kt to'K B 3 ■ P takes Kt ' Q takes K Kt P q E to K B sq ,^ QtoR^, &c., Wliite having won the irtoB2 ■ exchange. B to Q B 4 . (" ^- PlSi^ PtoQBS 1" " KttoK2 402 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. 4. P to Q 4 4. P to Q 3 i" „ Kt to Q B 3 7 KUo^QKtS g Kt to K B 7, &e. ) Q to K B 4 ■ Kt to Q B 3 1 „ B to B 7 (oh) 7 P to K B 4 g Q_toR5 K to K 2 (best) ■ PtoKR3 KtoQ3 9. B to K Kt 5 , and WMte has a winning attack.) 5. Kt to Q B 4 5. P takes P 6. Kt to Q B 3 6. P to Q B 3, or Vari- ation (I.) 7. Q Kt takes P 7. Q to K 3 8. Q to K 2 8. P to Q 4 9. K Kt to Q 6 (ch), or Variation (II.) Staunton prefers 9. Q Kt to Q 6 (ch), for which see Varia- tion (II.) 9. K to Q sq 10. Q Kt to K Kt 5 10. Q takes Q (ch) 11. B takes Q 11. B takes Kt 12. Kt to B 7 (ch) 12. K to K 2 13. Kt takes E 13. B to K 3 14. B to Q 3 14. Kt to K B 3 15. Q B to K Kt 5 Instead of this move Staunton gives ^5 Kt to K Kt 6 jg B takes P P takes Kt and thinks White ought not to win. The line of play in the text is indicated by the German " Handbuch." 15. Q Kt to Q 2 16. Kt to Kt 6 (ch) 16. P takes Kt 17. B takes Kt P, and the " Handbuch " declares White has the better game. THE COUNTER GAMBIT IN THE KING'S. KNIGHT'S OPENING. 403 The subjoined diagram shows the position of the forces. BLACK. ¥M k i m ^ SI i i i "% „^ Z7f' ' ^Jy/yy/z/y/A ^ 1 fyyyyy WHITE. We prefer for White the line of play indicated by Mr. Staun- ton — viz., 9. Q Kt to Q 6, for which see Variation (T . Variation (I.). Beginning at Black's sixth move : — 6. B to K B 4 7. P to K Kt 4 8. B to Kt 2 9. B takes K P 10. Q Kt takes B 11. Q to K 2 12. K Kt to Q 6 (ch) 7. B to Kt 3 8. PtoQB 3 9. B takes B 10. Q to K 3 11. P to Q 4 IS. K to K 2 13. K Kt to B 5 (ch), and White's game is preferable. D D 2 404 THE CHESS-PLAYEB'S MANUAL. Vaeiation (II.)' Beginning at White's ninth move : — 9. Q Kt to Q 6 (ch) 9. K to Q 2 (If 9. ^ K to Q sq j2 K Kt to Q E_5 ■ K to Kt3 " Kt takes Kt P (cb) 13. ^°' K to B 2 Bto Q2 Q Kt to Q 2 Q Kt to B 5, and White has the advantage.) 10. Q Kt to K B 7 11. Q takes Q (ch) 12. B takes P (ch) 13. Kt takes E 14. B to Q 3 15. B to K Kt 5 14. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. ,, Q takes Q B takes Q P to Q Kt 4 , followed by P takes K Kt K takes Q Kto K2 B to K3 Kt to K B 3 B to Kt sq 16. Castles (K E), and White has surely a better game than that which arises from his checking with the King's Knight on his ninth move. Let the student compare the fol- lowing with the preceding diagram : WHITE. THE COUNTER GAMBIT IN THE KING'S KNIGHT'S OPENING. 406 An exhaustive analysis of this opening is to be found in the " Handbuch des Schachspiels," pp. 83 — 92. Our cumbersome method of notation does not allow space for the Variations. GAME THE SECOND. WHITE. 1. P to K 4 2. Kt to K B 3 3. B to Q B 4 BLACK. 1. P to K 4 2. P to K B 4 3. P takes P (If 3. P to Q 3, see Philidor's Defence, Chapter II., p. 47.) 4. Kt takes P (best) jj ^ B takes Kt ^ Kt takes K P „ Kt to Kt 4 R takes B ' Q to K Kt 4 ' P to Q 4 and Black has the better game. 4. Q to K Kt 4 5. Kt to B 7 or (A.) If5 PtoQ4 Qto R 5 (ch), with a strong attack, but the Q takes Kt P play in the text is safer. See (A.) 5. Q takes Kt P 6. E to B sq 6. P to Q 4 7. Kt takes E 7. P takes B 8. Q to E 5 (ch) 8. P to Kt 3 9. Q takes E P 9. B to K 3 10. Q takes P (ch) 10. Q takes Q 11. Kt takes Q 11. B to Q 3 12. P to K B 4 12. P takes P en passant 13. E takes P 13. Q Kt to B 3 14. P to Q 4 14. P takes P en passant 15. P takes P 15. Kt to Q Kt 5 16. B to B 4 16. B to K B 2 406 *^^' ^^' Kt to B 7 (oh) 19. R to B 8 (ch), and wins.) THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. , „ K to B sq ■ Kt takes R 18. B takes B P takes B 17. B takes B l?. P takes B 18. KttoKS 18. B toQ4 19. E to K 3 (ch), and White has won the exchange and a Pawn, and has a winning position. (A.) 5. Pto Q4 5. Q takes Kt P 6. Q to E 5 (ch) 6. P to Kt 3 7. B to B 7 (ch) 7. K to Q sq 8. B takes Kt P 8. Q takes E (ch) 9. KtoK2 9. Pto Q3 10. B to K Kt 5 (ch) 10. Kt to K 2 11. Q Kt to B 3 11. B to K Kt 5 (ch) 12. Q takes B 12. Q takes E 13. Kt to B 7 (ch) 13. K to K sq 14. Kt takes P (dis ch) 14. K to Q sq 15. Q to Q B 8 mate The above Variations are from the German " Handbuch." GAME THE THIED. WHITE. BLACK. 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 2. Kt to K B 3 2. P to K B 4 3. P takes P 3. P to Q 3 (or Varia- tion) 4. P to Q 4 4. P to K 5 5. Kt to Kt 5 5. B takes P 6. Q to K 2 6. P to Q 4 7. Q to Kt 5 (ch) 7. Kt to B 3 THE COaNTBR GAMBIT IN THE KING'S KNIGHT'S OPENING. 407 8. Q takes Kt P 8. Kt takes P 9. B to Q Kt 5 (ch) 9. Kt takes B 10. Q takes Kt (ch) 10. QtoQ2 11. Q to Kt 7 11. Q R to B sq 12. Q takes E P IS. P to K R 3 13. Kt to K R 3 13. B takes Kt 14. P takes B 14. Q takes P And Staunton considers Black has the superior position. Diagram. BLACK. Mmm ■^ WHITE. Variation on Black's third move : — 4. Q to K 2 6. P to Q 4 3. Q to B 3 4. Kt to Q B 3 5. P to Q 3 408 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. 6. P takes P 6. P takes P 7. B to K B 4 7. B to Q 3 8. P to K Kt 4 8. K Kt to K 2 9. B to K Kt 5 9. Q to B 2 10. P to K E 3 10. P to K E 4 11. B to Kt 2 11- P takes P 12. P takes P 12. R takes E 13. B takes E 13. P to K Kt 3 14. B takes K Kt 14. Q takes B 15. P takes K Kt P 15. B takes Kt P And Black has the advantage. GAME THE FOUETH. WHITE. BLACK. 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 2. Kt to K B 3 2. P to Q 4 Staunton says this defence may be adopted without much danger (" Handbook," p. 99), but it is condemned by most authorities. 3. P takes P (best) 3. Q takes P (or Variation) ,jj 3 4 Qjo_KJ 5 Kt to Q 4 „ Kt to Q B 3 ^ ■ P to K 5 ■ Q to K 2 ■ Kt to K B's ' Q to K 4 y Kt to K B 3 g Kt to K Kt 5 ^ Q to Q Kt 5 (ch), winning ■ Q to K 2' ■ B to K B 4 a Pawn at least. ) 4. Kt to Q B 3 4. Q to K 3 5. B to Kt 5 (ch) 5. B to Q 2 6. Castles 6. P to Q E 3 or (A.) " La Strategie " gives this move. Staunton advises 6. B takes B, for the result of which course of play see (A.). THE COUNTER GAMBIT IN THE KING'S KNIGHT'S OPENING. 409 7. B takes B (ch) 8. P to Q 4 7. Kt takes B 8. Castles (Q R) And White has the move and the attack, with the better position. Diagram. BLACK v^m m.' *k I! f/ZM WW 1 m. .^1 —.. "^ ec-^.; W/////M fs J ; — 1 mc/z/M' i'/./MM t-_ (A.) 6. B takes B 7. Kt takes B 7. B to Q 3 8, P to Q 4. Staunton gives 8. E to K sq, with the following continuation : — Q P takes P 8. EtoKi 9. PtoQ4 10. PtoKBS PtoQBS P takes P 11. K K t takes P , and White wins. 410 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. 8. P to K B 3 If 8. Kt takes B, &c. P to Q E, 3 9. P takes P 9. P takes P 10. Kt to K Kt 5 10. Q to K Kt 3 11. Pto KB 4 11. P takes P 12. Kt takes B (ch) 12. Q takes Kt 13. Q to K 2 (ch), and White has a splendid position. Variation on White's third move : • 3. Kt takes P This move enables Black to equalise the game. 3. Q to K 2 Black may also obtain an even game by playing 3, B to Q 8, ■9- ■■— ■X ^ PtoQ4 g Ktto Btak QB3 g P takes B B to Q 3 " P takes P 4. Pto Q 4 5. KttoKKt4 6. Q takes B 7. Q takes Q es Kt ■ Q takes Q (ch), &c. 4. P to K B 3 5. B takes Kt 6. Q takes P (ch) 7. P takes Q And the game is even. GAMES ILLUSTEATI7E OF THE COUNTER GAMBIT IN THE KING'S KNIGHT'S OPENING. Game I. — Between Messrs. Matet and Hanstein. (Prom " The Handbuch.") White (Herr Mayet). Black (Herr Hanstein) 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 2. Kt to K B 3 2. P to K B 4 THE COUNTER GAMBIT IN THE KING'S KNIGHT'S OPENING. 411 3. Kt takes P 4. P to Q 4 (a) 5. Kt to Q B 4 6. Q Kt to B 3 7. P to Q 5 (6) 8. P to K R 3 9. B to K B 4 10. Q to Q 4 11. P to Q R 4 12. Castles (Q R) 13. Q B takes Q P 14. Kt takes P (ch) 15. Kt takes Q Kt P 16. P to Q 6 17. Q to K 5 (ch) 18. B to Q Kt 5 (ch) 19. Q takes P (ch) 20. Kt mates. 3. Q to K B 3 4. P to Q 3 5. P takes P 6. Kt to K 2 7. Q to K Kt 3 8. P to K R 4 9. B to K B 4 10. P to Q R 3 11. Q KttoQ2 12. Q Kt to K B 3 13. P takes B 14. K to Q 2 15. Kt to Q B sq 16. K to K sq 17. K to Q 2 18. P takes B 19. K to K 3 Game II. — Between Messrs. Lowe and WorMald. White (Mr. Lowe). Black (Mr. Wormald). 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 2. Kt to K B 3 2. P to K B 4 3. B to Q B 4 3. P takes P 4. Kt takes P 4. P to Q 4 5. B to Q Kt 3 5. Kt to K B 3 6. P to Q 4 6. B to K 2 7. Castles 7. Castles 8. P to Q B 4 8. P to Q B 3 9. Kt to Q B 3 9. B to K 3 10. B to K 3 10. Q Kt to Q 2 11. P to K R 3 11. B to Q 3 12. P to K B 4 12. K to R sq 13. Q to K 2 13. Q to K 2 14. Q R to Q sq 14. Q R to Q aq Notes by the Author. (us) Q to K 2 is indicated by Staunton as White's best play here. (6) Evidently White could not capture the King's Pawn. 412 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. 15. B to Q Kt sq 16. P to K Kt 3 17. y to K Kt 2 18. Q to K 2 19. R to K Kt sq 20. Q R to K B sq 21. B to K B 2 22. P to K Kt 4 23. Kt takes Kt 24. B to K Kt 3 25. R to K B 6 26. B takes B 27. R takes R 28. Kt to B sq 29. P to K 6 30. Kt taken Kt 31. Kt to B 5 32. R to K Kt 3 33. P to K 7 34. Q takes Kt P 35. R to K R 3 36. R takes P 37. Q to R 3 And White resigned. 15. P to Q B 5 16. P to K Kt 4 17. R to K B 2 18. R to K Kt 2 19. Q R to K B sq 20. Q to K B 2 21. Q to K R 4 22. Kt takes Kt 23. P takes P 24. K R to B 2 25. Kt to K 2 26. B to K B 4 27. Kt takes B 28. R takes R 29. QtoR6 30. Kt takes B (ch) 31. RtoK 2 32. R to K sq 33. QtoR4 34. Q to Kt 3 35. BtoB 2 36. B toB5 37. Q to K B 2 Game 111. (From "Greco," p. 56.) White. Black. 1. P tp K 4 1. P to K 4 2. Kt to K B 3 2. P to K B 4 3. Kt takes P (a) 3. Q to K 2 4. Q to K E 5 (ch) 4. P to Kt 3 5. Kt takes Kt P 5. Q takes P (ch) • 6. B to K 2 6. Kt to K B 3 7. Q to R 4 (6) 7. Q takes K Kt P 8. Kt takes R(c) 8. y takes R (ch) (a) The best move, although "Greco "gives also P takes K B P which was erroneously preferred by some writers. (b) Q to K 3 is given by Lewis, and is unqnestionably better play. (c) R to B sq would have been safer. THE COUNTER GAMBIT IN THE KING'S 413 KNIGHT'S OPENING. 9. B to B sq 9. Q to K 5 (ch) 10. Q takes Q 10. P takes Q 11. BtoQB4 11. Pto Q4 12. B to Kt 3 12. B to K Kt 2 And Black wins a niece and the game. PAKT 11. (THE KING'S GAMBIT. CHAPTER XII. THE ALLGAIER GAMBIT. This beautiful opening abounds with intricate and difficult positions. Although formerly considered invincible by AUgaier, modern analysis has shown that the second player has several perfectly valid modes of defence. By some writers it is called the Allgaier-Kieseritzki Gambit, from its having been much favoured by Kieseritzki. For the sake of simplicity, the opening may be divided into two branches — the "Allgaier- Kieseritzki" Gambit, and the " Allgaier " Gambit proper. The chief authorities on this Gambit are Salvio, Greco, Cozio, LoUi, Allgaier, Staunton, Walker, " Le Palamede," " La Strategic Eaisonnee," and the " Handbuch." GAME THE FIRST. (Paulsen's defence.) WHITE. BLACK. 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 2. P to K B 4 2. P takes P 3. Kt to K B :^ 3. P to K Kt 4 4. P to K E 4 4. P to K Kt 5 5. Kt to K 5 (best) This move constitutes the Allgaier-Kieseritzki Gambit. For the consequences of White's playing 5 Kt to K Kt 5 — the " Allgaier Gambit " proper— see Game the Ninth. 5. B to K Kt 2 This defence, originated by Paulsen, is now generally ad- mitted to be the best at the second player's disposal. Black 418 THE CHESS-PLAYEE'S MANUAL. has, however, seven other moves at this point — viz., Kt to KB 3, a move first brought prominently into notice in the match between Messrs. Harrwitz and Lowenthal, but now considered inferior ; P to K E 4, the old classical defence ; Kt to Q B 3, a move invented by Herr Neumann ; P to Q 3, recommended by Kohsch ; B to K 2 ; Q to K 2 ; and lastly, P to Q 4, a move invented by the late Mr. E. Morphy, For the result of each of these different moves, see Games the Second, Third, Fourth, P'ifth, Sixth, Seventh, and Eighth respectively. 6. P to Q 4 (best), or 6. Kt to K B 8 (A.) 7. B to Q B 4, or Vari- 7. P to Q 4 (best) ations (I.), (II.) Diagram Showing the position after Black's seventh move. i C4j1 ////// //^ =^ #">V ** J lif WHITE. THE ALLGAIER GAMBIT, 419 Black may move here, in lieu of the move in the text, 7. Castles, e.g. : — Castles g Kt to Q B 3 or (a) P to Q 3 9. Kt takes K B P E takes Kt ,„ B takes B (ch) ,, Q B takes P ,„ Castles, and White has K takes B " K to Kt sq " a fine position. The subjoined Diagram shows the state of the game after White's twelfth move in the above variation : — Diagram. BLACK. m i iij %m m. i m ^ ^f iii W, WmSM Wz/Mi^ 'W////////M n. ^ 'kmA 1 1 mmm„ PI .wmM. / '/'^m m, , i?;!«;-,-,x„.,; ^^ iw^ag WHITE. The above moves occur in a game between Messrs. Steinitz and Hirsch- feld, the latter player conducting' the defence, and the game was continued as follows : — P to K Kt 3 12. 13. Kt to K R 4 " ■ Q Kt to B 3 15 Qi°_Q_A 16 B to K Kt 5 y^ B takes B ■ B to Q 2 ■ B to K B 3 ' Kt takes B 19. Kt to K R 4, and Black resigned. 14. Kt to K 2 18. QtoK2 Kt to B 4 Q takes K P 420 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. Had Black played 18. Kt takes K P, White would still have won by Kt to Q 5, followed hy Q takes Kt, &c. We confess, however, we should much have preferred 14. Kt takes B for Black to the move made, viz., 14. Q to K 2, and suggest the following continuation (let the student refer to the Diagram and play out the variation) : — ^g R takes Kt -^g Q to Q 3 ■ Kt takes B " Kt to K 2 ' Kt to Kt 3 ^^ R to V, --' B to y 2, and Black, although cramped, has apparently resource. a wu-j. 1 ,„ QRtoKBsq iQ Kt to B 4 Suppose now White play 18. "r = ^- la. ,,^ ^ . ^^ '^^ ^ ^ B to K sq Kt takes Kt n,, R takes Kt P to K R 4, and Black maintains his defence. (a) p Kt takes K B P g P to K 5 ■ Q to K 2 or (i) If 9 Kt to Kt 5 (dis ch) j^ B to Q Kt 3 ^^ P to K 5 ■ptoQ4 ■ptoKR3 ■ P takes Kt j2 R P takes P ^^ Q to Q 3 ^^ B takes P (ch) ■ Kt to R 2 ■ Kt takes P ' B' to K 3, and Black has , the advantage. 9 jQ Castles ,, P takes K t ,„ B to Q Kt e ' P to Q 4 ■ Q takes Kt ' B takes P ' Kt to Q B 3 and Black has the better game. (b) g 9 B takes R (ch) j^ P to K 5 R takes Kt " " K takes B " Kt to Q 4 jj P t o Q B 4 Kt to K 6, and " La Strategic," p. 209, pronounces Black's game to be superior. To resume the main Variation {see diagram on p. 418) : 8. P takes P 8. Castles (best) /jj g g Kt takes K Kt P ^^ P to Q B 3 ■ Kt takes P Castles ' R to K sq (ch) J, K to B sq ,g Q takes B .„ B takes K t B takes Kt "" Kt to K 6 ' P takes B 14. R to K R 3 , and the " Handbuch " declares White's game is to be preferred.) . THE ALLGAIER GAMBIT: 421 9. Q B takes P (best) {If 9. Q Kt to B 3. a move given by the " Handbuch," Black should get ttie advantaoe as pointed out in the "Westminster Papers," by the following continuation : — g KttoQ BS ^^ QKttoK2^ ^^ Castles " ■ Kt to K R 4 ■ Q to K B 3 ' P to K B 6, &o. In this variation the " Handbuch " gives for Black's ninth move in . n Kt to Q B 3 answer to 9. ^ 9. P to Q B 4, which we cannot tliink so strong as playing the Kt to K R 4, au I continues the game thus : — g Kt to Q B 3 ^Q Q B takes P P to K Kt 3 ■ P to Q B 4 ' Kt to K R 4 ' P takes Q P ,„ Q takes P ,„ Kt takes Kt ,^ Qjo_QA ■ Kt to Q B 3 ■ P takes Kt ' R to K sq (ch) and Black has a decided superiority. The following variation, which occurred in the final round of the Correspondence Tournament of the " Chess Player's Chronicle," between Mr. W. T. Pierce and the Author, also deserves notice : — • g Kt to Q B 3 -j^Q Kt takes K Kt P ^^ R to K R 2 KFto K R 4 ■ Kt to K Kt 6 " Q to K 2 (ch) j2 K to B 2 (best) ^g Kt to K ■') P to K R 4 ' B takes Kt, and Black has gained a piece, since White obviously cannot retake the Bishop. For a further exemplifi- cation of this form of the opening see Illustrative Games I., HI., and XXIII. at the end of this Chapter.) To return once more to the main Variation : — 9. Kt takes Q P 10. B takes Kt (best) Instead of this move, the " Handbuch " and " La Strategic " make White play 10. P to K Kt 3, which does not appear so good, e.g.— ,(j P to K Kt 3 j^ P to Q B 3 ^^ P takes P ■ P to Q B 4 ■ P takes Q P ' Kt takes 13 jjj P_tal-.es Kt ^^ R toR2 ' Q to Kt 3 ' Kt to Q B 3, with the advantage. 10. Q takes B 422 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. 11. Castles 11. Pto QB4 IS. P to Q B 3 IS. P takes P Black may also play here 12. P to K B 4, as suggested bj Herr Zukertort. 13. Kt takes K Kt P 13. Kt to Q B 3 If Black play here 13. Q to K 3, see Illustrative Game I., between Messrs. Steinitz and Zukertort. The move of 13. Kt to Q B 3, was adopted by Mr. Wisker against the author in a game at the Clifton Tourney, which led to the followiag continuation : 14. B to K E 6 14. P to K B 4 15. B takes B 15. K takes B 16. Kt to K B 2 16. P to K B 5 17. Kt to Q 2 17. B to K B 4 18. Kt to K B 3, and although the game in question was ultimately drawn (see " Illustrated News," 29 Nov. 1874), we prefer Black's position. (A.) Variation on White's sixth move : — 6. Kt takes K Kt P This move is justly condemned by the authorities. {See "La Strategie," pp. 204, 208.) The "Chess Player's Chronicle," April, 1874, p. 41, the " Chess Player's Maga- zine," and the "Illustrated News" also disapprove of it. It is objectionable, since it at once transfers the attack to Black. 6. P to Q 4 (best) 7. Kt to K B 2 (best) (Here White has the choice of several moves. He may play THE ALLGAIER GAMBIT. 423 7. P takes P, 7. P to Q B 3, 7. P to K 5, or 7. P to Q 4. Mr. Falkbeer says {see the " Chess Player's Magazine," pp. 257, 258) : " As to 7. P takes P, or P to K 5, we have not many remarks to oifer. In the first case Black would simply take P with Q, or he may also play Kt to K 2, or P to Q B 3, and White's game would be none the better for it." It is strange that Mr. Falkbeer should have overlooked entirely that Black can win the game ofi'-hand by simply playing 7. Q to K 2 (ch) in answer to 7. P takes P. This move was first adopted by the author against Mr. Bird {see " Chess Player's Chronicle," October, 1873, p. 341), and gives Black a winning position, the following being the best continuation : — „ P takes P oKtoB2 gKtoB3 10 i" 12. Q to K 2 (ch) B to Q 5 (ch) B takes Kt (ch) K takes B ^^ K to R 3 (best) ^^ P to K Kt 4 (best) KttoKB3(ch) ■QtoQ2(ch) ' K to R 2 ) Kt to K Kt 5 (ch), &c. S 12. 13. Bt°K2 P to K R 4 R to K Kt sq, and play as White may, Black must win. 7. P takes P is clearly, therefore, bad for White. In the second place. White may play 7. P to Q B 3, a move strongly recommended by Max Lange, but which is positively bad play. Yet Mr. Falkbeer says of it: " This, of all the variations in the ' New Paulsen Defence,' is the most important." We think it the least worthy of notice. It is strange that two such eminent players as Messrs. Max Lange and Falkbeer should have failed to perceive that Black can at once obtaia the better position by playing 7. P takes P, e. g. — ^ P to Q B 3 g Q to R 4 (ch) P takes P ■ K to B sq or Black may interpose even with Knight and get a much better developed game than his opponent. 424 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. In the third place, in answer to 7. P to K 5, Black can get a good game as follows : — PtoK5 8 Q t^^g» ^ 9 Qto_K2 jtJ takes Kt ■ B takes K P ' Q to K 2 with the better game. In the fourth place, if White play 7. P to Q 4, Black gets a good game, thus : — „ PtoQ4 8 P to Q B 3 g QtoB3 ^^ Kt to K 5 P takes P 'PtoK6 ■ptoKR4 ,„ QtoK4(ch) ,, Q takes Q (ch) ^^ ^t to B 2 ^ Qlo'K 2' ■ Kt takes Q ' B to K B 4 j ' with the advantage. , , P takes B B takes Kt ' B to K Kt 5, winning easily. We may, therefore, assume 7. Kt to K B 2 to be White's best move, although Mr. Falkbeer erroneously supposes it to be inferior to 7. P to Q B 3.) To return, then, to the main Variation : — 7. P takes P 8. Kt takes P 8. Kt to K B 3 "The "Handbuch" gives the following continuation for Black :— g Q to K 2 ^Q P toB3 Q to K 2 Kt to Q B 3 Kt to K R 3 jj Kt to B 2 ^2 Q takes Q (ch) ^^ P to Q 4 ^^ B to R 2 ■ Kt to B 4 ■ K takes Q ' Kt to Kt 6 ' R to K sq jg B to Kt 5 jg K to Q sq j^ B takes R .„ Kt to Q 3 K to B sq (ch) ' R to K 6 ' P takes B ' B to K B 4 jg Ktto Q R3 2^ Kt to Q B 2 R.to Q sq ' B takes Q P, with the advantage.) 9. Kt takes Kt (ch) (Tt 9. P ^°Q3 10 P takes K t ■ Kt takes Kt " Q takes Q :ch), &c.) THE ALLGAIEK GAMBIT. 425 9. Q takes Kt 10. Kt to Q B 3 10. B toKB 11. Q to K B 3 11. Castles 12. B to K 2 12. Kt to Q B 3 13. Kt to K 4 13. Q to R3 14. QtoR5 14. Kt to Q 5 15. Q takes Q 15. B takes Q 16. B to Q sq 16. P to K B 4 And Black has unquestionably the better game. We extract the above Variation, which occurred in a game between Messrs: Hammond and Mackenzie, from the " Illustrated London News," which considers the advantage to be all on Black's side. Variation (I.). On White's seventh move : — Diagram Showing the position after Black's sixth move. White having to play. BLACK 426 THE CHESS-PLAYEE'S MANUAL 7. Q B takes P 7. P to Q 3 8. Kt to Q B 4 8. Kt takes P 9. B to Q 3 9. Q to K 2 10. Q to K 2 10. P to K B 4 B to K B 4 may also be ventured here by Black, to which White's best reply is 11. E to K B sq 11. P to Q B 3 This is the move given in the " Handbuch," but would not 11. Kt to Q B 3 give "White a grand attack ? 11. Kt to Q B 8 IS. Q Kt to Q 2 IS. P to Q 4 13. Kt to Q R 3 13. B to K 3 And the " Handbuch " considers Black has the better game. Variation (II.). On White's seventh move : — 7. Kt to Q B 3 This move is suggested by Mr. PetrofF, the celebrated Russian player, but is not so strong, in our opinion, as 7. B to Q B 4. 7. P to Q 3 8. Kt to Q 3 8. Castles 9. B takes P (best) 9. Kt to Q E 3 (best) 10. Kt to K B 2 10. Kt to K R 4 11. B to K Kt 5 ^ 11. PtoKB 3 IS. B to K 3 ' 12. Kt to K Kt 6 • 13. B to Q B 4 (ch) " La Strategie " gives this move. The " Handbuch " makes White play — R to K R 2 13. P to K B 4, &c. ' THE ALLGAIEK GAMBIT. 427 13. K to R sq 14. R to R 2 14. P to K B 4 And Black's game is again to be preferred. GAME THE SECOND. (philidor's defence.) WHITE. 1. P to K 4 2. P to K B 4 3. Kt to K B 3 4. P to K R 4 5. Kt to K 5 BLACK. 1. P to K 4 2. P takes P 3. PtoKKt4 4. P to K Kt 5 5. Kt to K B 3 Diagram. BLACK. iM i '^y. i ./ /ii^/// ^'(^^^^A ,,mmm ^ 6"'!», //M m; \3 ¥^^^ mmm ^^•f WHITE. This move is noticed by Philidor, and for a long time was considered to be Black's strongest defence ; but of late years 428 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. so many different attacks have been invented, that it has some- what fallen into disfavour, and a growing tendency is observable to prefer P to Q 3, or B to K Kt 2. 6. B to Q B 4 6. P to Q 4 or (A.) 7. P takes P 7. B to Q 3 Black may play here 7. B to K Kt 2, a move which Herr Zukertort thinks he may make without disadvantage (see "Westminster Papers ") ; but the " Chess Player's Chronicle," p. 355, says it is a weak move, which must lead to certain loss on account of White's rejoinder, 8. P to Q 6. We cannot agree with the " Chess Players' Chronicle," on account of the following continuation : — g P to Q 6 g Kt takes K B P ■ B to K Kt 2 ■ Castles ' E takes Kt B takes R (ch) ^^ P takes P ,2 Q to K 2 ■ K takes B " Q^to K 2 (ch) " " Q takes Q (ch) 1 -i K takes Q Kt to Q B 3, and Black has the advantage. 8. P to Q 4 8. Kt to K E 4 or (B.) Mr. Wisker gives the following opinion of this defence (see " Westminster Papers," February, 1873) : — " The style of defence of which this and the three preceding moves are the essentials, was once deemed irresistible. Its popularity dated from the match between Messrs. Lowenthal and Harrwitz, in which the former employed it with decisive success, and it lived in favour long after the publication of Staunton's " Praxis." It is now as completely exploded as tht) Sicilian opening or the "Damiano Gambit." The Editor of the "Chess Players' Chronicle," however, entertains a diametrically opposite opinion (" Chess Player's Chronicle," June, 1873, p. 263). We believe that, although the defence is far from easy. White's attack is by no means as irresistible as is generally supposed. 9. Kt to Q B 3 or Vari- 9. Castles (best) or Vari- ations (I.), (II.) ations (III.), (IV.) THE ALLGAIEE GAMBIT. 429 Castling at this crisis was first suggested by Signor Centu- rini, of Genoa, in a letter to the " Chess Player's Magazine," and is considered best by Lowenthal and Dubois. 10. Kt to K 2 (best) Kt takes K Kt P (If 10. Kt to K Kt 6, with a capital attack. jj ^Q Castles ^j R takes P jg B takes Kt 13. Q takes P ' Kt takes R P to K Kt 6 Q to K B 3 ^^ Q takes P (ch) jg B takes Q P to K B 3 ■ Q takes Q ' P takes Kt jg P takes P ^1^ K to R sq ^^ Kt to K 4 B to Q B 4 (ch) ■ R to K B 4 " B to Cj 5 ^g Kt to B 6 (ch) 2Q BtoQ 3 2j P takes R ■ K to B 2 ■ R takes Kt ' B takes Q Kt P 22 R to Q Kt sq gs B takes Q B P 24 B takes K t B takes K B P ' Kt to Q R 3 ' P takes B 2g_ P to Q B 4 B to K B 4, and wins. The above variation occurs in a game between Messrs. Wayte and Thorold.—" Chess Player's Chronicle," 1873, p. 267.) 10. Q to K 2, and Black has the better game. If, instead of this move, Black play 10. P to K B 3, see Illustrative Game XI., between the Author and Herr Steinitz, with the note by the author. (A.) Variation on Black's sixth move : — 6. Q to K 2 7. B takes P (ch) 7. K to Q sq 8. P to Q 4 8. P to Q 3 9. B to Q Kt 3 ,ff „ Q B takes P ,„ PJakes P (dis ch) ^^ B to Q 5 P takes Kt B to Q 2 " P to Q B 3 ,g P takes Kt ,„ B to Q 2 -^4 B to Q B 3 ■ Q to Q Kt 5 (ch) ■ Q takes Q Kt P ' B to Q Kt 5 and Black ought to win, in the opinion of the authors of " La Strategic." In his analysis of this variation in " La R^gence," Herr Kolisch, instead of 14. B to Q Kt 5, makes Black play 14. Q to Q Kt 3, an inferior move, to 430 THE CEtfiSS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. which White replies by 15. Q to Q 2 , with a good game. NevertheleBS, the Kouscheleff variation is highly ingenious.) 9. P takes Kt - 10. P takes K P (dis ch) 10. B to Q 2 11. P takes Kt 11. Q takes K P (ch) 12. K to B sq 13. B to Q 3 13. Kt to Q B 3 13. Q to K B 4 14. P to K B 7 Jaenisch concludes thus : — " Tous les coups joues ci-dessus sont certainement les meilleurs des deux cotes, et I'di ne peut pas dire que la superiorite de position acquise par les Noirs doive necessairement leur donner la partie." (B.) Variation on Black's eighth move : — 8. QtoK2 This move is recommended by Herr Lowenthal. Mr. Staun- ton prefers 8. Kt to K R 4, the consequences of which we have already examined, and we prefer that move. 9. Kt to Q B 3 9. Kt to K R 4 10. B to Q Kt 5 (ch) 10. P to Q B 8 The "Chess Player's Chronicle" advises 10. K to B sq here for Black, e.g. — jQ n , Castles ._ P takes B K to B aq B takes Kt ' Q takes B, P J3 B takes P ^^ B to R 6 (ch) ' P to Kt 6 ' Kt to Kt 2, and thinks White's attack is over. We think White may now play 15. R takes P (ch thus : lg_ R takes P ( ch) ^^ Q to B 3 (c h) ( K takes R ' B to K B 4 ( ' K to Kt sq j7 Q to B 6 or P to K 6 ( ^g P to K 6 (ch) ^^ ^g B to K B 4 and Black is by no means out of danger. THE ALLGAIER GAMBIT. 431 If White play 18. ^ ^^^^ ^^ then follows 18. K takes B -g (j takes B 2^ K to B sq ^. Q takes B, (eh) Q to R 7 (ch) ' R to B sq ' K takes Q 2, R to K sq 23 K to K 2 24 K to Q sq Q to R 8 (ch) ■ Q takes P (ch) ' Kt to Q B 3 g- R to B sq (ch) K to Kt 2, &c. 11. P takes P 11. P takes P 12. Kt to Q 5 The above moves occur in a game between Messrs. Steinitz and Deacon. The latter, who played Black, now moved Q to K 3, and speedily lost the game, see Illustrative Game V. But suppose now : IS. Q to Q sq Black may also play here 12. Q to Q Kt 2 with advantage, as if then White retreat the Kt to Q B 4, Black plays B to Q B 2. 13. Kt takes Q B P 13. Kt takes Kt 14. B takes Kt (ch) 14. B to Q 2 15. B takes E 15. Q takes B And although White has won the exchange, he has a difi&cult game to play. For White's ninth move in this Variation, in lieu of Kt to Q B 3, Kolisch gives 9. Castles, as follows :— 9. Castles 9. B takes Kt 10. P takes B 10. Kt to K K 4 11. QtoQ4 11. Q takes KRP 12. P to K 6 12. P to K B 3 13. Q B takes P 13. P to Kt 6 14. R to B 3 14. Q to R 7 (ch) 15. K to B sq 15. Q to R 8 (ch) 16. Q to Kt sq 16. Q to R 5 17. B to Kt 5 (ch) 17. P to B 3 18. Q B takes Kt 18. R takes B 19. P takes P, and says the second player has a great disadvantjige. The above Variation is from " La Regence, 432 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. 1860, p. 169. For other Variations, see " Handbuch," 1874, p. 384. White may also play 9. Q B takes P, which we believe to be a good move, although condemned by Staunton ("Praxis,") p. 329. {See Illustrative Games VI. and VII.) Vaeiation (I.). On White's ninth move : — Diagram Showing the position after Black's eighth move. BLACK. i k i J r#/.^^«.#^^^«r^ '0 — i^mm^ ' (III.) 6. Kt takes K B P 6. K takes Kt 7. Q takes P Ihis was formerly thought to be White's best play, but o o 2 452 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. 7. B to Q B 4 (ch), as advised by Walker, is now admitted to be a stronger move. iSee Game the Tenth.) 7. KttoKBB (best) Black may also play here 7. Q to K B 3, as rosommended by Labourdonnais, e. g. — „ gPtoQ4_ gQ takes K B P (ch) ■ Q to K B 3 ■ Q takes Q P ' QTo K'B 3 Q to K Kt 4 ^^ B to Q B 4 (ch) -^^ Q to K B 3 ■QtoKKtS "KtoKta ■ KttoKB3 J3 Kt to Q B 3 j4 B to Q 2 ' B to Q Kt 5 ' P to Q 3, and Black has -the better gam?. Instead of Kt to K B 3 on Black's twelfth move in this Variation, the " Handbuch" gives 12. Q to K B 3, which is obviously bad play. Labour- donnais's move of 7. Q to K B 3 for Black, altliongh quite sound, is not considered so forcible as 7. Kt to K B 3 by the best authorities. 8. Q takes K B P Instead of this move, 8. Q to K B 3 has been suggested in the " Illus- trated Londoh News " as better play for White, as follows : — 8 Q to K B 3 g Kt to Q B 3 ^^ Qtakes^P ■ Q to K 2, or (a) ' P to Q 4 ' Pto Q 5 ^j Kt to Q 5 j2 Q takes_Q ^^ Kt takes P ■ Q takes P (ch) ' Kt takes Q ' Kt to K Kt 6 14 B to B 4 ( ch) .^g B to K Kt sq ■ K to Kt 2 ■ B to K 2, etc. If Black play here 15 iQ Kt takes R ^^ P to Q B 3 'BtoQS ■KttoQB3 'BtoKKtS 18. B to Q 5. The writer in the " Illustrated London News " now makes Black play 18. R takes Kt, and after a few more moves remarks : " White can now free his pieces, and his superiority in Pawns is worth the ex- change," but he failed to perceive that Black can give mate in two moves if, in lieu of making this useless capture of the Knight, he simply play 18. R to K sq (ch). Consequently the move 8. Q to K B 3 leads to no better result for White than the old course of play. (a) g Kt to Q B 3 Q Kt to B 3 Kt to Q 5, with the better game. THE ALLGAIE.R GAMBIT. 45» 8. B to Q 3 (best) Any other move may permit White to equalise matters. The discovery of the move in the text was made by Horny. 9. B to Q B 4 (ch) (If firstly: 9. QJ5LJ^B3_ ^^ P toQ B3 ^^ QjoKJ ■' Q Kt to B 3 Kt to K 4 Q Kt to K Kt 5 ^2 R to K B 3 ^2 P to Q 3 ■ Q to K 2 ■ P to Q B 3, &c. If secondly: 9. Q ^o K B 2 K to Kt -2, followed by R to K B sq, &c. If thirdly : 9. ^ ^° ^ ^ B takes P, and wins.) 9. K to K Kt 2 10. Q to K B 5 jf ^Q Q to K B 3 ■ KttoQBS, &c. 10. B to K Kt 6 (ch) 11. K to B sq 11. E to B sq 12- Q to Q E 5 IS. Kt takes P (dis ch) And Black must win. Variation (I.) On Black's fifth move . 5. P to Q 4 This move may he safely played for the defence, and ought to give Black an advantage in position ; but P to K E 3 is pronounced by all the authorities to be his strongest move at this juncture. 6. P takes P (best) 6. P to K E 3, or (A.), (B.) 7. Kt to K 4 m 7 QJ« K 2^(ch) g Kt to K 4 ' Kt to K 2 ■ B to K Kt 2, with the better game.) 454 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. 7. P to K B 4 8. K Kt to Q B 3 8. B to Q 3 9. P to Q 4 9. Kt to K B 3 And Black's g ame is 1 (A.) ;o be preferred. 6. Q takes P 7. Q Kt to B 3 7. Q to K 4 (ch) 8. QtoK2 8. P to K B 3 9. Q takes Q (cli) 9. P takes Q 10. B to Q B 4 10. K Kt to K 3 11. Pto Q 4 11. P takes P 12. Q Kt to Q Kt 5 IS. Q Kt to K 3 13. Q B takes P 13. B to Q Kt 5 (ch) 14. P to Q B 3 14. P takes P 15. P takes P 15. B to Q E 4 16. Castles (Q E), and White has the better game. (B.) 6. Kt to K B 3 7. B to Kt 5 (ch) 7. B to Q 2 8. B takes B (ch) 8. Q Kt takes B 9. Pto Q 4 9. P to K E 3 10. Q to K 2 (ch) 10. Q to K 2 11. Q takes Q (ch) 11. B takes Q IS. B takes P IS. P takes Kt 13. B takes P 13. Kt takes Q P 14. B takes B 14. K takes B And Black wins. Variation (II.) On Black's fifth move : — 5. P to K E 4 This is a bad defence, as will be seen. 6. B to Q B 4 6. Kt to K E 3 T. P to Q 4 7. P to K B 3 THE ALLGAIER GAMBIT. 455 8. Q B takes P 8. P takes Kt 9. P takes P 9. Kt to K B 2 (If 9. ^Q B to K 5, &o.) Kt to Kt sq 10. P to K Kt 6 10. Kt to Q 3 11. B takes Kt 11. P takes B (best) 12. B to K B 7 (ch) 12. K to K 2 13. Castles (best) 13. Q to Q R 4 14. Bto Q5 14. K to K sq 15. Q to Q B sq 15. K to Q sq 16. Q to K Kt 5 (ch) 16. B to K 2 17. P to K Kt 7, and White wias. Vaeiation (III.) On Black's fifth move : — 5. P to K B 3 This again is a bad defence, and ought speedily to lose Black the game • 6. Q takes Kt P 6. P to K R 4 7. Q to K B 5 7. P takes Kt 8. Q to Kt 6 (ch) 8. K to K 2 9. Q takes P (ch) 9. K to K sq 10. Q to K 5 (ch) 10. Q to K 2 11. Q takes R 11. Q takes P (ch) 12. B to K 2 12. Q takes Kt P 13. Q takes R P (ch) 13. K to Q sq 14. Q to K B 3, and White must win, having won the exchange, and having also a passed Pawn on the King's Rook's file. GAME THE TENTH. (walker's attack.) WHITE. BLACK. 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 456 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. 2. P to K B 4 3. Kt to K B 3 4. P to K E 4 fi. Kt to K Kt 5 6. Kt takes K B P 7. B to Q B 4 (ch) S. P takes P 3. P to K Kt 4 4. P to K Kt 5 5. P to K E 3 6. K takes Kt This move was first introduced by Mr. Walker, and is unquestionably stronger than taking Pawn with Queen, the flonsequences of which mode of play have been just examined. DiAGBAM. Showing the position. BLACK. k k k 8. B takes ±> (ch) 7. P to Q 4 (best) 8. K to Kt 2, or Varia- tion (I.) THE ALLGAIER GAMBIT. 457 Mr. Staunton says of this move ("Praxis," p. 316) :— " It is not, perhaps, quite so good as 8. K to K sq, as it allows White to equalise the game at once by 9 B takes Q Kt P ^^ Q takes K Kt P (oh), and White B takes B draws by perpetual check. 9. B takes Q Kt P or (A.) 9. P to K B 6 or (B.) This move was first introduced by Herr Zukertort, in 1869. 10. B takes B (best) (If 10. B takes R , a move condemned by the " Handbuch," IQ 21 B to K Kt sq (best) P takes K Kt P , iifll K t o B 2 ^2 Q takes Q ( ' P takes K (Queens) ' P to Q B 3, and Black must win, and if 11. ^toKB2 ^^ K to K 2 P Queens (cb) Q takes R (oh), &c. 11 12 K toK2 Q to K sq ■ Q takes K RP (ch) ' P to K Kt 6 (if 13. LtoKA_ ^ ) 13, P to Q B 3, &c. f B to Q B 4 or (a). This is the move given in the " Handbuch," but the author is of opinion that Black may play at this point with equal, if not greater, effect, P to Q B 3 (see Variation (a). ^4 PtoQ4 (,j^ R t akes P ^g K to Q 3 ) r ■QtoKt5(ch) ■ BtoQR3(ch)andwins) 14 jg B to K 3 ^g K to Q 2 B takes P B to K Kt 5 (oh) B takes Q Kt P ]^ Kt to B 3 ^g Q takes B B takes R ' Kt to K B 3, and Black has the better game, in the opinion of the " Handbuch." There can be no doubt of this. (a) 13 14 PtoQ3 ^5 gtoQ2 ■ P to Q B 3 ■ B to K Kt 5 (oh) ' B to Q B 4 Ig R takes P ^^ K to Q B 3 Ig K to Kt 3 Q to Kt 4 (ch) ■ Q to K 4 (ch) ' B to KB 7 and Black has a winning position.) 458 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. 10. Q takes B 11. P takes K B P 11. B to Q 3 IS. E to Kt sq IS. P to Kt 6 13. P to Q 4 13. Q to K E 6 14. P to K 5 14. B to K 2 15. B to K 3 15. Kt to Q B 3 16. Q to K 2 16. E to Q Kt sq 17. P to Q Kt 3 17. B takes E P 18. Kt to Q B 3 18. K Kt to K 2 19. Castles (Q E), and after a few more moves, the " Handbucli " pronounces White to have the better game. "We cannot help thinking Black's play might be improved upon in this last continuation. Why should Black on his 14th move play his B to K 2 ? Would it not be far stronger play to attack the hostile Book by 14. Q to K E 7 ? If then White play 15. B to K 3, Black gets a good game by 15. Kt to Q B 3, for if P takes B, Black plays Q E to K sq, with an apparently irresistible attack. (A.) Variation on White's ninth move : — 9. P to Q 4 9. Q to K B 3 Black may also play here 9. P to K B 6, as indicated in the " Praxis," with the following continuation : — q 1 o ■^ takes P , , Castles P to K B 6 B to K 2 P to K Kt 6 12. B to K B 4 , Black having, perhaps, a slight advantage, but we believe 9. Q to K B 3 to be stronger play. It was adopted with success by Zuker- tort in his match with Steinitz {see Illustrative Games) and is indicated in the " Handbuch." 10. P to K 5 (Tf in Castles ^ P to K B 6 j^^ P takes P P to Kt 6, &o. j-j j^Q Kt to B 3 ■ BtoQKt 5, &c,) ,g P takes P ^^•ptoKte ^^• Q to K Q to R 11. Q to K B 4 12. P to B 6 13. Kt to K 2 14. Q takes R P 15. Q Kt to B 3 THE ALLGAIER GAMBIT. 459 10. Q to K Kt 3 This move, adopted by Zukertort, is stronger, in the opinion of the Editor of the " Westminster Papers," than Q to K B 4 —the move given in the " Handbuch "—which leads to the following continuation : — /■|Q ,, Castles ^■QtoKB4 'PtoBe ■with the advantage.) 11. P to K R 5 12. Castles 13. Kt to Q 2 14. B to K 4 15. Kt takes P Taking the Knight is clearly fatal. 16. Kt to K R 2 (best) jf jg P to Q B 3 jy B takes B Kt to K R 2 ■ B to K B 4 ■ Kt takes B ' Kt takes K P and Black wins.) 16. Kt to Kt 3 And Black has the better game, but must play with great care to maintain his advantage. (B.) Variation on Black's ninth move : — 9. B takes B The " Handbuch " considers this to be Black's best play, but we prefer Zukertort's move, viz., 9. P to K B 6 10. Q takes P (ch) 10. K to B 2 11. Qto R5 (ch) 11. Kto K3 Black may here play for the draw, by retreating the King to Kt 2 again 12. Q to B 5 (ch) 12. K to Q 3 13. P to Q 4, followed by Q B takes P, and White has the advantage. This variation is simply suicidal for Black, 460 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. Variation (I.) On Black's eighth move : — 8. K to K sq 9. P to Q 4 9. Kt to K B 3, or (C), (D), (E.) This move is not noticed in the " Handbuch." Black has here the choice of two other moves — viz., 9. Kt to K 2, as recommended by Mr. Staunton, the authors of " La Strategic," and the " Handbuch ; " and 9. P to K B 6, for the result of which modes of play see {€.), (D.). The move of 9. Kt to K B 3 is given by Mr. Falkbeer in the " Chess Players' Magazine," with the subjoined continuation : — 10. Kt to Q B 3 10. Kt to K E 4 11. Q to Q 3 11. P to Q B 3 12. P to K 5 IS. P takes B 13. Q to K Kt 6 (ch) 13. K to K 2 14. Q takes Kt 14. B to K 3 15. B takes P 15. Q to K sq 16. B to K Kt 5 (ch) 16. K to Q 2 And Black, with care, should win. (G.) 9. Kt to K 2 10. Kt to Q B 3 10. B to K Kt 2 11. Q B takes P Black has three moves at his disposal at this juncture — viz., 11. P to Q B 3, 11. Q Kt to B 3, and 11. Kt takes B. Since the authorities are at variance as to which of these moves is Black's best play, we give a diagram showing the state of the game after White's eleventh move. THE ALLGAIER GAMBIT. 461 DiAGBAM. BLACK. gm -^w ^^ 11 i fiv i f/ WHITE. Il; firstly : 12. Q to Q 3 11. P to Q B 3 12. Kt to Q E 3 (If 12. 15 P takess B 13. Kt to Q Kt 5 Kt to Q R 3 ^^ Castles (K B) ■ P takes P Q takes^P Q to Q 4 19 QtoQ2 B takes P (ch) „n Q takes P (ch) Kt to K 2 „,. R takes Q R takes B 17. Q R to K sq ^g P to Q B 4 ■ Q to Q 2 ,„ Qjo^K^ ■ KtoQsq "■ KttoQB3 KtoRsq 21 B to K Kt 5 (ch) PtoQKtlT " ' P takes B R to K B 7 24. Q R takes K t Q takes R 20. 23. 26. R to K sq Q to K Kt 8 (ch), with the advantage.) 13. B to Q Kt 3 14. Q to K Kt 3 15. E to Q sq 13. E to K B sq 14. Q takes P 15. Q to K B 3 11. Kt takes B IS. Q to K 2 (ch) 13. Q to K B 3 14. K to Q sq 15. Q to K Kt 3 4C2 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. 16. Castles, and the game is rather in White's favour, in the opinion of the authors of " La Strntegie " and the " Handbuch." If, secondly: 11. Q Kt to B 3 12. B to K 3, followed by Q to Q 2, and Castles (Q. R.) ; and Black has a very difficult game. If, thirdly : 12. P takes Kt 13. K to Q 2 14. Q to K 2 (chj 15. B to K 5 16. Q E to K sq, and the " Praxis " declares White to have a good game. 9. P to ? 6 10. P takes P 10. B to K 2 11. Castles 11. PtoKte 12. P to K B 4 12. P to K R 4 13. B takes Kt 13. B to K Kt 5 Staunton makes Black play 13. R takes B, as foUows : — ^3 ^^ Q tak es R P (ch) ^^ Q to K R 6 (ch) R takes B ' K to B sq ' R to K Kt 2 16 P to Q B 3 j^ P to K B 5 jg B takes B K B takes R P ' B to Kt 4 ' Q takes B .„ Q takes Q ^^ Kt to Q 2, and thinks White's Pawns look R takes Q fully equivalent to Black's extra piece, especially as !^ack's Pawn at K Kt 6 must fall. True, but Black's 1.3th move, B takes B, is, in our opinion, decidedly weak play, and far inferior to B to K Kt 5, which gives Black a capital game. 14. Q to Q 3 14. R takes B 15. Q to Q Kt 3 15. K to B sq 16. Q takes Q Kt P 16. Q takes P (ch) 17. K to Kt 2 17. B to K 7, etc. THE ALLGAIER GAMBIT. (E.)' 463 (If 10 10. Castles PtoK 5 Q to B 4 9. Q to B 3 11. C astles P toB6 P takes P Ptoxre J 2 ? takes P ^g Q to K 2 with the advantage, or if 10. ^ ^° ^ ^ ^ ' Kt to K 2 11. 12 PtoK 5 13. BtoK4 Q to Kt 3 "" B to B 4 game is to be preferred.) Qto R6 Kt to B 3 Q Kt to B 3 -^^ Q B takes P, and again Black's R to Q sq 10. P to B 6 11. PtoKt 6 11. P takes P And Black has certainly the better game GAMES ILLUSTRATIVE OF THE ALLGAIER-KIESERITZKI AND ALLGAIER GAMBITS. Game I. — Between Messrs. Steinitz and Zukertort. (From " The Westminster Papers.") White (Mr. Steinitz). 1. P to K 4 2. P to K B 4 3. Kt to K B 3 4. P to KR4 5. Kt to K 5 6. P to Q 4 7. B to Q B 4 8. P takes P 9. Q B takes P (a) JO. B takes Kt 11. Castles Black (Mr. Zukertort). 1. PtoK 4 2. P takes P 3. P to K Kt 4 4. P to Kt 5 5. B to K Kt 2 6. Kt to K B 3 7. PtoQ4 8. Castles 9. Kt takes P 10. Q takes B 11. P to Q B 4 Notes by the Editor of " The Westminster Papers." (a) If, in this petition, White plays Kt to Q B 3, Black replies with Kt to K E 4 10. Kt to K 2 Q to K B 3 11. Castles P to K B 6, &c. 464 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. 12. P to B 3 12. P takes P (6) 13. Kt takes Kt P 13. Q to K 3 14. Kt to K B 2 14. Q to Q Kt 3 15. P to Q B 4 (c) 15. B to K 3 16. Kt to Q 2 16. Kt to Q 2 (d) 17. Kt to Q 3 17. Kt to Q B 4 18. Kt to K 5 18. Q takes Kt P 19. R to Q Kt sq 19. Q to B 6 20. Q Kt to K B 3 (e) 20. Q E to Q B sq (/) 21. Q R to B sq 21. Q to R 4 22. P to K R 5 22. P to K R 3 23. Q takes Q P 23. K R to Q sq (g) 24. Q to K 3 24. Kt to Q 6 (h) 25. Kt takes Kt 25. B takes Q B P 26. K R to Q sq 26, Q takes K R P 37. Kt from Q 3 to K 5 27. E to K sq 28. R to Q 7 28. P to Q Kt 4 (6) Black afterwards expressed an opinion that he should have played P to K B 4 at this point. (c) li P takes P, Black captures the Kt P with Q, and afterwards the Q P with Q, winning the exchange. (d) The best square for the Kt ; for if it is pJayed to B 3, White moves his B to Q 6, followed by P to Q B 5, &c. (e) The young player may be told that if he had played R to B 3, then follows P to Q 6, and Black must win a piece. (/) We agree with a weekly contemporary, that many players would now have played P to K B 3 to win the piece ; but we do not agree with Ms conclusion that he would have lost a piece instead of gaining one. Suppose P to K B 3 B to Q 2 Jito^Kt 4 K to R s q B takes K t Kt to Q 3, and Q to R 6 Q to K 6 (ch) P to Kt 3 (best) P takes B although Black has a very inferior game, the forces are even. {g) In this position White proposed to draw ; but the offer was declined. Here however. Black would have done better by playing Kt to Q 2. White's best reply appears to bo *?' t°_Q 3_ Kt takes Kt Kt takes Kt K R to K sq, and Black has a good game. (h) An oversight that appears unaccountable, but which admits of explanation for all that. The game was played at the Westminster Club, and with pieces of the seven and sixpenny type, which have been returned to that Association, instead of their own three guinea sets, lent for the display at the Crystal Palace. The British Chess Association, who were the borrowers, sharing the defect of all corporations, cannot be expected to display any conscience in such a matter ; but the Club which has been benefited by the exchange must surely number some members who are aware of it, and from these at least restitution might be expected. From the peculiarly hideous conformation of the pieces in question, the White Bishop now at B 4 overshadowed the Kt at K B 3 from Herr Zuker- tort's point of view, and thus led him to play the Kt to Q 6, making his adversary the handsome present of a piece. • * THE ALLGAIER GAMBIT. 465 29. P to K Kt 4 29. Q to K R 6 30. Q to K B 2 30. P to Q K 4 31. P to Q R 3 31. P to Q R 5 (i) 32. B to K sq (k) 32. Q R to Q sq (i) 33. R from K sq to Q ■; . 33. R takes R 34. R takes R 34. P to Kt 5 (m) 35. R to Q 4 (n) 35. B to Kt 6 36. R takes P 36. B takes Kt 37. B takes B 37. B to Q 4 38. Q to K Kt 3 38. Q takes Q 39. B takes Q 39. B takes Kt Drawn game. Game II. — Between Messrs. Kolisch and Hirschpeld. (From the " Illustrated London News.") White (Mr. Kolisch). Black (Mr. Hirschfeld). 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 2. P to K B 4 2. P takes P 3. Kt to K B 3 3. P to K Kt 4 4. P to K R 4 4. P to K Kt 5 5. Kt to K 5 5. Kt to K B 3 6. B to Q B 4 6. P to Q 4 (!) The best move. If Black had now attempted to win the Kt P by playing B to K 3, White replies with R to Q 3, winning tlie Queen. m Threatening to win the Queen by K to K 3. (/) If White plays R takes R, with the view of trying to win the Queen, the „„ , , , i- J J.I, R takes R R to K 3 Kt to K so game would be continued thus : ; :;r ^ , ' — R takes R B takes Kt B to Q 5, &c. (m) A beautiful conception which " forces " the draw against the best play. {n) The best reply to Black's last move. If Kt takes B ^-^^J^ ^ ■' Q takes P (ch) Q takes R B takes R P K to Kt 2 K to R 3 Q to Q 8 (ch) R to K 7 (ch) Q to R 8 (ch), and Black gets two pieces for the Fook. If, on the other hand, EJ^h^lI' , „, , , P to R C, &c., and Black has a terrible passed Pawn. And if: ^ t° Q ^ ^ Q to Kt 3 B takes Q B to Q 4 Q takes Q P takes P, and White cannot win. (o) Again the best move. 466 THE CHESS-PLAYEK'S MANUAL. 7. P takes P 7. BtoQ3 8. P to Q 4 8. Kt to K R 4 9. B to Q Kt 5 (ch) 9. P to Q B 3 10. P takes P 10. P takes P 11. Kt takes Q B P 11. Kt takes Kt 12. B takes Kt (ch) 12. BtoQ 2 13. B takes Q R 13. Kt to K Kt (i 14. K to B 2 14. Kt takes R cl, . 15. Q takes Kt 15. Q to K 2 (a) 16. Kt to Q B 3 16. Castles 17. B to Q 5 17. PtoK Kt 6((;.: 18. K to K B sq 18. B to Q Kt 4 (cli.i 19. Kt takes B 19. R to K sq 20. B takes K B P (ch) 20. K takes B 21. Kt takes B (ch) 21. Q takes Kt 22. B to Q 2 (6) 22. Q takes Q P 23. B to K sq 23. Q to K 6, and witir. Game 111.— Between Messrs. Blackburne and Zukertort. (From the " Westminster Papers.") Grand Tourney played at Westminster Chess Club, on 2&h June, 1872. White (Mr. Blackburne). Black (Herr Zukertort). 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 2. PtoKB4 2. P takes P 3. K Kt to B 3 3. P to K Kt 4 4. P to K R 4 4. P to Kt 5 5. KttoKS 5. B to Kt 2 6. P to Q 4 6. K Kt to B 3 7. B to Q B 4 7. P to Q 4 8. P takes P 8. Castles 9. Q Kt to B 3 9. P to Q B 4 10. P takes P en passant 10. Q Kt takes P 11. Kt takes Kt li: P takes Kt Notes by Mr. Staunton. (a) Black now threatens to play P to K Kt 6 (ch), and when White, as his test, moves K to K B 3, to follow with P to K R 4, &c. (i) He might have deferred tlie inevitahle mate a move or two by playing— 22. B to K 3, but the result would have been the same. THE ALLGAIER GAMBIT. 407 12. Q B takes P 12. Kt to K R 4 13. B to K 5 13. B takes B 14. P takes B 14. QtoKt 3 15. Q to Q 2 15. QtoQB4 16. Q to Kt 5 (ch) 16. Kt to Kt 2 17. B to Q 3 17. R to K sq 18. Castles (Q R) 18. R takes P 19. Q to R 6 19. B to B 4 20. B takes B 20. R takes B 21. Kt to K 4 21. Q to K 4 22. K R to K sq 22. RtoKtsq 23. Kt to Q B 3 23. QtoB2 24. Q to Q 6 24. Q to Q Kt 2 25. P to Q Kt 3 25. Kt to K 3 26. Kt to K 4 26. Q to Q Kt 5 27. R to B sq 27. R to Q R 4 28. Kt to B 6 (ct) 28. KtoRsq 29, Kt to Q 7 29. Q takes Q 30. R takes Q 30. R to Kc 2 31. R takes K B P 31. Kt to Q B 4 32. Q R takes B P (a) 32. K to Kt sq 33. R to K 7 33. Kt takes Kt 34. R to B 8 (ch) 34. Kt to B sq 35. R takes R 35. R takes P 36. K to Q 2 36. R to R 8 37. K to K 2 37. R to R 3 38. K to K 3 38. P to K R 4 39. K to K 4 39. R to K B 3 40. R takes R P 40. Resigns. Game IV. — Between Messrs. Morphy and Medley. White (Mr. Morphy). Black (Mr. Medley). 1. PtoK4 1. P to K 4 2. P to K B 4 2. P takes P 3. Kt to K B 3 3. P to-K Kt 4 4. P to K R 4 4. P to K Kt 5 5. Kt to K 5 5. Kt to K B 3 6. B to Q B 4 6. P to Q 4 7. P takes P 7. B to Q 3 (a) P to Q Kt 4 would also have won. 468 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. 8. P to Q 4 8. Kt to K R 4 9. Kt to Q B 3 9. B to K B 4 (o) 10 Q Kt to K 2 10. Q to K B 3 11. Q Kt takes P 11. Kt to Kt 6 12. Q Kt to K B 5 12. Kt takes Kt 13. Q B to K Kt 5 13. B to Q Kt 5 (ch) (6) 14. P to Q B 3 14. QtoQ3 15. Castles 15; Kt to K Kt 2 16. R takes B 16. Kt takes R 17. Q takes Kt P 17. Kt to K 2 18. R to K sq 18. P to K R 4 (c) 19. Q to K B 3 19. RtoR2 20. B to Q Kt 5 (oh) 20. P to Q B 3 21. P takes P 21. P takes F 22. Kt takes Q B P 22. Q Kt takes Kt 23. B takes Kt (ch) 23. K to B sq 24. B takes Kt (ch) 24. Q takes B 25, R takes Q 25. B takes R 26. B takes R, and wins. Game V. — BeHoeen Messrs. Steinitz and Deacon. White (Herr Steinitz). Black (Mr. Deacon). 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 2. P to K B 4 2. P takes P 3. Kt to K B 3 3. P to K Kt 4 4. P to K R 4 4. P to K Kt 5 5. Kt to K 5 5. Kt to K B 3 6. B to (i B 4 6. P to Q 4 7. P takes P 7. B to Q 3 8. P to Q 4 8. Kt to K R 4 (a) {a) This is a weak move. The best move for Black at tliis juucture is 9. Castles. Max Lange suggests 9. P to K B 3, but this move seems even less sa,tisfactory. (J) Bad ! Q to K Kt 2 might have given Black a chance of equalising matters. (c) Very weak ! {a) The best defence in the opinion of Staunton and the Editor of "La Regence." THE ALLGAIER GAMBIT. 469 9. Kt to Q B 3 (6) 9. Q to K 2 10. B to Q Kt 5 (ch) 10. P to Q B 3 11. P takes P 11. P takes P 12. Kt to Q 5 (c) 12. Q to K 3 (d) 13. Kt to Q B 7 (ch) 13. B takes Kt 14. B to Q B 4 14. Q to K 2 15. B takes K B P (ch) 15. K to B sq 16. B takes Kt 16. B takes Kt 17. P takes B 17. Q takes K P (ch; 18. Q to K 2 18. Q takes B 19. B takes K B P (e) 19. B to K B 4 20. Castles (K R) 20. Kt to Q 2 21. B to K R 6 (ch) 21. K to B 2 22. R takes B (ch) 22. Q takes R 23. R to K B sq 23. Q takes R (ch) 24. Q takes Q (ch) 24. K to Kt 3 25. B to K Kt 5 25. P to K R 3 26. Q to Q 3 (ch), and wins. Game VI. — Between Messrs. Anderssen and Green. (From the " Games of the Congress.") White (Mr. Anderssen). Black (Mr. Green). 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 2. P to K B 4 2. P takes P 3. Kt to K B 3 3. P to K Kt 4 4. P to K R 4 4. P to K Kt 5 5. Kt to K 5 5. Kt to K B 3 6. B to Q B 4 6. P to Q 4 7. P takes P 7. B to Q 3 (b) This move was adopted successfully by Morphy against Mr. Medley {see preceding Game), and is undoubtedly a strong way of continuing the attack, The move of K to K B 2, recommended by Jaenisch, is inferior, and that of B to Q Kt 5 (ch), advised in the " Schachzeitung, " is also unsatisfactory {sec p. 466). The ' ' E^gence " says that Morphy won by playing 9. Kt to Q B 3 simply through his opponent making a bad move, and that 9. Q to K 2 would have given him a decided advantage. The author is not of this opinion, be- lievingthat the correct reply for Black is 9. Castles. {See Illustrative Game XI., and pp. 428, 429.) (c) A very brilliant move. {d) We should have preferred here Q to Q Kt 2 or Q to Q sq. (e) Although having lost a piece, White has so fine a position that winning is a certainty. 470 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. 8. P to Q 4 8. Q to K 2 (a) 9. Q B takes P (6) 9. Kt to K E, 4 10. P to K Kt 3 10. Kt takes B (c) 11. P takes Kt 11. P to K B 3 12. Q to K 2 12. P takes Kt 13. K B P takes P 13. B to Q Kt 5 (ch) 14. P to Q B 3 14. B to Q R 4 15. Kt to Q 2 15. B to K B 4 16. B to Q Kt 3 (d) 16. B to Q Kt 3 17. Kt to Q B 4 17. P to K R ^ 18. P to Q 6 18. Q to K R 2 19. Castles (Q R) 19. Kt to Q B 3 20. P to Q 5 20. B to K 5 21. P takes Kt 21. B takes R 22. R takes B 22. Q Kt P takes F 23. Q to K Kt 2 23. Castles (Q R) 24. Q, takes Q B P 24. K to Kt sq 25. Kt takes B 25. R P takes Kt 26. B to Q 5, and wins. Game YTL— Between Messrs. Gossip and Wisker. (From the " Illustrated London News.") White (Mr. Gossip). Black (Mr. Wisker). 1. P to K 4 2. P to K B 4 3. Kt to K B 3 4. P to K R 4 5. Kt to K 5 6. B to Q B 4 7. P takes P 8. P to Q 4 9. Q B takes P Notes by the Author. {a) Kt to R 4 is Black's best move here. (6) Although this move is condemned by. Mr. Staunton ("Praxis," p. 329), the author believes it may be safely played. (c) Black's correct move here is P to K B 3, to which White's best reply is 11. Q to K 2. Black's best play then is to bring out his Queen's Bishop and Knight, and not to capture the hostile Knight as in the present gamn. {d) Capitally played, threatening to win a piece. 1. PtoK4 2. P takes P 3. P to K Kt 4 4. P to K Kt 5 5. Kt to K B 3 6. Pto Q 4 7. Bto Q3 8. Q toK 2 9. Kt to K E 4 THE ALLGAIER GAMBIT. 471 10. P to K Kt 3 10. P to K B 3 11. QtoK2 11. Kt takes B 12. P takes Kt 12. p takes Kt 13. Q P takes P 13. B to Q B 4 14. P to K 6 (ct) 14. p to K E 4 15. Kt to Q B 3 15. B to Q 3 16. Q to K 4 16. Q to K B 3 17. P to K B 5 17. Castles (6) 18. Castles (Q R) 18. Kt to Q R 3 19. Q R to K B sq 19. Kt to Q B 4 20. Q to K 3 20. P to Q B 3 21. Q to K Kt 5 (ch) (c) 21. Q takes Q 22. P takes Q 22. P to Q Kt 4 23. B to Q 3 23. Kt takes B (ch) 24. P takes Kt 24. P takes Q P 25. Kt takes Q Kt P 25. B to K Kt 6 26. P to K 7 26. R to K sq 27. P to K B 6 27. B to K 3 28. P to K Kt 6 28. Q R to Q B sq (ch) 29. K to Q 2 And Black resigned. Game VIII. — Between Messrs. Steinitz and Hirschfeld. (The first four moves on each side in this game are the same as those in the preceding partie.) White (Mr. Steinitz). Black (Mr. Hirschfeld). 5. Kt to K 5 5. B to K Kt 2 6. P to Q 4 6. Kt to K B 3 7. B to Q B 4 7. Castles 8. Kt to Q B 3 8. P to Q 3 9. Kt takes K B P 9. R takes Kt 10. B takes R (ch) 10. K takes B Notes by Mr. Staunton. (a) "White'.s centre Pawns are certainly powerful ; but whether sufficiently so to justify the sacrifice of the piece may be questioned. (J) B to Q Kt 5 looks stronger. (c) A very good move. From this moment White appears to us to have the better game 472 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. 11. B takes P H. K to Kt sq 12. Oastles 12. Kt to R 4 13. P to K Kt 3 13. Kt to Q B 3 14. Kt to K 2 14. Q to K 2 15. Q to Q 3 15. B to Q 2 16. B to Kt 5 16. B to K B 3 17. B takes B 17. Kt takes B 18. Kt to B 4 18. Q takes K P 19. Kt to R 4 And Black resigned. Game IX.—Behoeen Messrs. Anderssen mid De Rivi^ee. White (Mr. Anderssen). Black (M. de Riviere) 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 2, P to K B 4 2. P takes P 3 Kt to K B 3 3. P to K Kt 4 4 P to K P 4 4. P to K Kt 5 5. Kt to K 5 5. Kt to K B 3 6. Kt takes K Kt P 6. Kt takes K P 7 P to Q 3 7. Kt to K Kt 6 8. Q B takes P 8 Q to K 2 (ch) {a) 9. B to K 2 9. KttakesR(6) 10. B to K Kt 5 10. Q to Q Kt 5 (ck) (c) 11. PtoQB3 11. Q takes QKtP 12. Kt to K B 6 (cli) (d) 12. K to Q set 13. Kt to Q 5 (dis ch) 1 3. B to K 2 (e) 14. B takes B(ch) 14. K to K sq 15. B to K B 6 15. Kt to K Kt 6 («) This is an inferior move. 8 Kt takes R is best. m Here again Black plays a weak move. The proper continuation is : g jQ Q to Q 2 J, Kt takes Q Q to Q Kt 5 (cli) ■ Q takes Q (ch) ' Kt takes E 12. — , and although "White has a strong attack Black has a better P to K B 3 ^ * chance of extricating himself. (c) Too late now ! See preceding note. (d) White's attack is irresistible. (e) Forced ! for if 13. ;, ^ Ktjnates, and if 13. ' K to K SCI P to K B 3 -. B takes P (ch) „ B mates. K to K .sq THE ALLGAIER GAMBIT. 473 16. Q Kt to Q 2 (/) 16. E to K Kt sq 17. B to K B 3 (g) 17. Kt to Q E 3 IS. Kt to Q B 4 18. Q to Q Kt 4 19. K Kt takes Q B P (uh) 19. Kt takes Kt 20. Kt to Q 6 (cli) 20. K to B sq 21. Kt takes Q 21. Kt takes Kt 22. Q to Q R 4 22. R to K Kt 3 23. Q to K B 4 23. P to Q 4 24. P to K R 5 And Black resigned. White (Herr Anderssen). Black (Mr. Morphy). 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 2. P to K B 4 2. P takes P 3. Kt to K B 3 3. P to K Kt 4 4. P to K R 4 4. P to K Kt 5 5. Kt to K 5 5. Kt to K B 3 6. Kt takes K Kt P 6. P to Q 4 (a) 7. Kt takes Kt (ch) 7. Q takes Kt 8. Q to K 2 (b) 8. B to Q 3 9. Kt to Q B 3 9. P to Q B 3 10. P to Q 4 10. Q takes Q P 11. B to Q 2 11. E to K Kt sq ]2. P takes P (dis ch) 12. K to Q sq 13. Castles (c) 13. B to K Kt 5 14. Q to K 4 14. Q takes Q 15. Kt takes Q 15. B takes R 16. Kt takes K B 16. B to K R 4 17. Q B takes P 17. P takes P 18. Kt takes Kt P (ch) 18. K to K 2 19. B to Q Kt 5 19. R takes K Kt P (/) Masterl)- play, and far better than the obvious move B takes R. (g) Beautifully played ! (a) This move is not so strong as Kt takes K P. (J) The move given in the Analysis is Kt to Q B 3. (c) A fine combination, sacrificing the exchange for position. 474 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. 20. R to K sq (oh 21. RtoK 8 22. Kt to Q 6 23. R takes R 24. K to Q sq 25. RtoK 8 26. K to K sq 27. K to B sq 28. B to K 2 29. B to Kt 5 (ch) 30. P takes Kt (oh) 31. B to K 5 (ch) 32. E takes B 20. KtoB3 21. B to K Kt 3 22. Kt to Q B 3 23. R takes P (ch) 24. Kt to Q 5 25. B to R 4 (ch) 26. Kt to B 6 (ch) 27. R takes Kt P 28. R takes P 29. Kt takes B 30. K takes P 31. KtoB3 And Black resigned (cQ. Game XL — Between Messrs. Gossip and Steinitz. (From the " Illustrated London News.") White (Mr. Gossip). Black (Mr. Steinitz). J. PtoK4 1. P to K 4 2. P to K B 4 2. P takes P 3. Kt to K B 3 3. P to K Kt 4 4. P to K R 4 4. P to K Kt 5 5. Kt to K 5 5. Kt to K B 3 (a) 6. B to Q B 4 6. P to Q 4 7. P takes P 7. B to Q 3 8. P to Q 4 8. Kt to K R 4 9. Kt to Q B 3 9. Castles 10. Q Kt to K 2 10. P to K B 3 11. KttoQ3 11. Q to K sq (A.) 12. Castles 12. P to K B 6 13. Q Kt to K B 4 13. Kt to K Kt 6 14. R to K sq 14. Kt to K 7 (ch) 15. Kt takes Kt 15. P takes Kt {d) Tho whole of the game is played by Mr. Andersseu in most brilliant style. Notes by Mr. Staunton, (a) Many players now give tlie preference to Mr. L. Paiilsen's move of B to K Kt 2, which is certainly a strong line of defence ; but the move in the text 18 also a very good one, and it leads to more interesting combinations than the other play. THE ALLGAIER GAMBIT. 475 16. Q takes P 17. B to K B 4 18. P to K Kt 3 19. B takes B 20 Kt to K B 4 (b) 21. Kt to K 6 (c) 22. P takes B 23. P to K 7 (dis ch) 24. Q to K 6 2.5. (j takes Q P 26. R to K 6 27. Q E to K B sq 28. B to Q 3 (e) 29. Q takes Q 30. B to Q Kt 5- 31. P to Q 5 32. B takes Kt 33. B takes P 34. P takes K E 35. E to Q sq 36. P to Q Kt 3 37. E to Q 5 38. E takes E P 39. K to B 2 40. P to Q B 4 And the game was ultimately drawn. (b) From this point White has very much the better position. (c) Mr. Gossip played too impetuously here. He would have done better, perhaps, by moving his King to Kt 2, with the object of opening an attack through his K R file. It must be admitted, however, that he did tolerably weU by the move made, inasmuch as he shortly obtained a position where winning to him was a certainty with moderate skill and care. (d) Bad ; but he had no good move left. (e) Here, as was shown in a back game played by Messrs. G. and S., White had a sure and easy road to victory : — 2g Q R takes P 29 Q takes Q g^ Q R to Kt 6 (ch) Q takes Q P (ch) (best) ' Kt takes Q ' K to B 2 (best) g2 K R to B 6 (double ch) „„ K R to B 7 (ch), and mate next move. K takes P Note by the Author. Mr. Steinitz selected here the best move. Had he played the tempting move 11. Q to K 2, White would have obtained the advantage by 12. Q B takes P. If Black now tries to win a piece by capturing the Bishop, White retakes and wins the Black Queen by the discovered check. 16. Q to K R 4 17. Q takes K E P 18. Q to K R 4 19. P takes B 20. Q to K Kt 4 21. B takes Kt 22. R to K sq . 23. K to Kt 2 24. Kt to Q B 3 25. P to K R 4 26. Q R to Q B sq 27. Q to Q 7 (d) 28. Q to Q Kt 5 29. Kt takes Q 30. Kt to Q B 3 31. R takes P 32. R takes E 33. Q R to Q B 2 34. R takes B 35. K to B sq 36. KtoK2 37. K takes P 38. P to K B 4 39. R to Q B 2 476 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. Game XIL— Between Messrs. Kolisch and Anderssen.' (From " La Regence.") White (Mr. Kolisch). 1 Black (Mr. Anderssen). 1. P to K 4 1. PtoK4 2. P to K B 4 2. P takes P 3. Kt to K B 3 3. P to K Kt 4 4. P to K R 4 4. P to K Kt 5 5. Kt to K 5 5. P to K R 4 (a) 6. B to Q B 4 6. R to K R 2 (ft) V. P to Q 4 7. P to K B 6 (c> 8. P takes P 8. P toQ3 9. Kt to Q 3 9. BtoK 2 10. B to K 3 10. B takes P (ch) 11. K to Q 2 11. B to K Kt 4 (d) 12. P to K B 4 12. B to K B 3 13. Q Kt to B 3 (e) 13. B to K Kt 2 14. P to K B 5 (/) 14. Q Kt to B 3 15. Q to K Kt sq 15. Q B to Q 2 16. QRtoKsq 16. Kt to Q R 4 17. B to Q Kt 3 17. Kt takes B 18. R P takes Kt 18. B to Q B 3 19. Kt to K B 4 19. Kt to K B 3 20. K to Q B sq 20. B to K R 3 21. P to K 5 ((/) 21. B takes K R 22. P takes Kt 22. B to K B 6 23. K Kt to Q 5 23. K to B sq Qi) NOTES. (a) This defence is not quite satisfactory. (J) " La Nouvelle Regence" considers tliis better than Kt to K R 3. (c) Sometimes P to Q 3 is played before this move. In that case White may take the K B P, sacrificing two pieces for the Rook and two Pawns, and having a fine attack. The move in the text is intended to foil this att.ick which would now be far less dane;erous. (d) I prefer the move given in the " Praxis," viz., P takes P, or Kt to Q B 3, recommended by Mr. Lowenthal. The move in the text loses time. (e) The Rook could not take the Pawn on account of 13. K Kt to B 3. (/) In order to prevent the K R P advancing. (g) A very brilliant combination. (h) This move costs Black a Rook, but taking B with B (ch) would have been no better : THE ALLGAIER GAMBIT. 477 24. B takes B (ch) 24. R takes B 25. Q to K 3 25. R takes P 26. Q to K Kt 5 26. R to K Kt 3 27. Q takes Q (ch) 27. R takes Q 28. P takes R 28. P takes P 29. K Kt takes P 29. K to K Kt sa 30. K Kt to K 6 30. R to K sq 31. K to Q 2 31. P to K R 5 32. Kt to K Kt 5 32. R to K j3 sq 33. Q Kt to K 4 33. P to Q 4 34. Q Kt to K B 2 (i) 34. P to K Kt 6 35. Q Kt to R 3 35. B to K Kt 5 36. P to Q B 4 36. R to K B 4 37. P takes P 37. R takes P 38. R to K 4 38. B takes Kt 39. Kt takes B 39. R to K R 4 40. E to K B 4 40. K to Kt 2 41. K to Q 3 41. P to Q R 3 42. K to K 4 42. E to Q Kt 4 43. R takes P 43. R takes P 44. R to K Kt 4 44. K to R 3 45. Kt to K B 4 45. P to K Kt 4 46. Kt to Q 3 46. K to R 4 47. R takes P at K Kt 3 47. K to R 5 48. R to K Kt sq 48. P to K Kt 5 49. P to Q 5 49. R to Q Kt 3 50. K to K 5 50. R to K R 3 51. P to Q 6 51. K to K Kt 4 52. P to Q 7 And Black resigned. e.g., 23. ^ ts^es B (ch) „, Q takes B ( ch) „- Q to K_K^5 K to B sq {see Variation) any move 26. Kt to K 7, forcing mate or winning Queen. Variation : 24 25- Q to K 7 (ch ) ^^ Q to K 8 27 Q takes K B P ■ K to Q 2 ' K to B sq ' K R to R sq ' P to Q B 3 2g Kt to K 7 (ch) 29 Kt to K Kt 6 g^ R to K 7, and win.s. ■ K to Kt sq ■ K K to Kt sq (i) Kt to K B 2 . White plays the only moves to stop the Pawn. 478 THE CHESS-PLAYEE'S MANUAL. Game XIII. — Between Messrs. MoKPHY and Baucheb. White (M. Baiiclier). Black (Mr. Morphy). 1. P to K4 1. P to K 4 2. P to K B 4 2. P takes P 3. Kt to K B 3 3. P to K Kt 4 4. P to K R 4 4. P to K Kt 5 5. Kt to K 5 5. Kt to K B 3 6, Kt takes K Kt P (a) 6. Kt takes K P 7. P to Q 3 7. Kt to K Kt 6 8. Q B takes P 8. Kt takes E (6) 9. Q to K 2 (ch)- (c) 9. Q to K 2 10. Kt to K B 6 (oh) 10. K to Q sq 11. B takes Q B P (ch) 11. K takes B 12. Kt to Q 5 (ch) 12. K to Q sq 13. Kt takes Q 13. B takes Kt 14. Q to K Kt 4 14. P to Q 3 (d) 15. Q to K B 4 15. E to K Kt sq 16. Kt to Q B 3 16. Q B to K 3 17. B to K 2 17. Kt to Q B 3 18. Castles 18. Kt to K Kt 6 19. B to K B 3 19. Kt to K B 4 20. -P to Q 4 20. Kt takes K E P 21. K to Kt sq 21. Kt takes B 22. P takes Kt 22. P to Q 4 23. Kt to Q Kt 5 23. Q E to Q B sq 24. P to Q B 4 24. K to Q 2 25. P takes P 25. B takes P 26. Kt to Q B 3 26. B to Q 3 27. Q to K B 5 (ch) 27. B to K 3 28. Q to Q Kt 5 28. K to Q B 2 29. K to E sq 29. B to Q 2 30. Kt to Q 5 (ch) 30. K to Q Kt sq 31. Kt to K B 6 31. KEtoQsq 32. P to Q 5 32. Kt to K 4 33. Q to K 2 33. B to K B 4 NOTES. (a) This move is decidedly inferior to 6. B to Q B 4, altliough preferred by Max Lange. (6) Some authorities recommend here 8. Q to K 2 (ch), and if B interposes, Q to Q Kt 5 (oh) ; hut this variation does not appear satisfactory for Black, as White, by interposing tlie Queen on Q 2, and giving up the exchange, obtains the better game and a strong attack. (c) I'alkbeer suggests here B to K Kt_5. (d) R to K sq is also good here. , THE ALLGAIER GAMBIT. 479 34. Kt to K 4 34. B takes Kt 35. P takes B 35. Kt to Q B 36. R to Q B sq 36. P to Q Kt 4 (e) 37. P to K 5 37. Kt takes K P 38. Q takes Kt P (ch) 38. K to R sq 39. R to Q sq 39. R to Q B 7 40. Q to Q R 6 40. P to K B 4 41. K to Kt sq 41. EtoQB2 42. R to K B sq 42. Kt to Q B 5 43. R to K B 2 43. K R to Q Kt sq 44. P to Q Kt 3 44. B to Q R 6 And Black wins. Game XIV. — Between Messrs :. Gossip and Maeston. (From the' 'Era.") White (Mr. Gossip) Black (Mr. Marston). 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 2. P to K B 4 2. P takes P 3. Kt to K B 3 3. P to K Kt 4 4. P to K R 4 4. P to K Kt 5 5. Kt to K 5 5. P to K R 4 6. B to Q B 4 6. Kt to K R 3 7. P to Q 4 7. P to Q 3 8. Kt to Q 3 8. P to K B 6 9. P takes P 9. P takes P (a) 10. Q takes P 10. Q B to K Kt 5 11. y to K B 2 11. Q to K 2 12. Castles 12. R to K R 2 13. Kt to Q B 3 13. P to Q B 3 14. P to K 5 14. Kt to K B 4 (6)' 15. Q B to K Kt 5 15. Q to Q 2 (e) Mr. Morphy could have played here B to K B 5 with equal, if not greater effect : for if 37. ^ **^^' ^* 38. Q takes R ^ ' R takes R E to Q B sq, and wins. Notes by Serr LowentliM. (a) Black departs here from the ordinary line of play, which is B to K 2. (h) Had Black moved P to Q 4, White would have taken Pawn with Bishop, obtaining a winning advantage. 480 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. 16. Q Kt to K 4 (c) 16. B to K Kt 2 17. Q Kt takes Q P (ch) 17. Kt takes Kt 18. P takes Kt 18. Q B to K 3 19. Kt to Q B 5 19- Q takes P 20. Kt takes B 20. P to K B 4 21. Q R to K sq 21. K to Q 2 22. Kt to Q B 5 (ch) And Black resgned. Game XV. — Between Messrs. McDonnell and B . White (Mr. B.). Black (Mr. McDonnell). 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 2. P to K B 4 2. P takes P a Kt to K B 3 3. P to K Kt 4 4. P to K R 4 4. P to K Kt 5 5. Kt to K 5 5. P to K R 4 6. B to Q B 4 6. KttoKR3 7. P to Q 4 7. P to Q 3 8. K t to Q 3 8. P to K B 6 9. P takes P 9. B to K 2 10. B to K 3 10. B takes P (ch) 11. K to Q 2 11. Kt to Q B 3 12. Kt to Q B 3 (a) 12. B to K 3 (6) 13. P to Q 5 (c) 13. Kt to Q R 4 14. B to Q Kt 3 14. B to Q 2 (c) P to K 6 would have led to some interesting variations : e.g., 16. P to K 6 17. P^^ 16. Q to B 2 (best) (If 16. P takes P takes P, winning a piece. ) 17. P takes P (ch) 17. K to Q 2 (A) 18. QRto Ksq 18. PtoQ4 19. Kt to K 5 (ch) 19. K to B sq (best) 20. Kt takes B 20. P takes Kt 21. Q takes Kt, and wins. (A.) 17. R takes P 18. Q R to K sq (ch) 18. R to K 2 (best) 19. B takes R 19. B takes B 20. B to K 6, and wins. NOTES. (a) This is White's best move apparently. (6) Very ingenious, (c) B to Q Kt 5 seems stronger. THE ALLGAIER GAMBIT. 481 15. Q to K 2 15. Q to K 2 16. Q to K R 2 16. B to K Kt 4 17. P to K B 4 17. B to K B 3 18. Q takes K R P 18. Castles (Q R) 19. P to K 5 19. Kt to K B 4 20. Q takes K Kt P (d) 20. Kt takes Q B 21. P takes B 21. K Kt to Q B 5 (ch) 22. K to B sq 22. Q to K 6 (ch) 23. K to Kt sq 23. Kt to Q 7 (ch) 24. K to B sq 24. Kt takes B (double c] 25. K to Kt sq 25. Q to Q B 8 (ch) And mates next move. Game XVI. — Between Messrs. Gossip and Sullivan. (From the « Era.") White (Mr. Gossip). Black (Mr. Sullivan). 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 2. PtoKB4 2. P takes P 3. Kt to K B 3 3. P to K Kt 4 4. P to K E 4 4. P to K Kt 5 5. Kt to K 5 5. P to K R 4 6. B to Q B 4 6. Kt to K E 3 7. PtoQ4 7. P to Q 3 8. Kt to Q 3 8. P to K B 6 9. P takes P 9. P takes P (a) 10. Q takes P 10. Q B to K Kt 5 11. Q to K B 2 11. P to K B 4 12. Kt to Q B 3 12. P to Q B 3 13. K Kt to K B 4 13. Q to K B 3 14. K Kt to K 6 14. K to Q 2 15. Q B to K Kt 5 15. Q to K Kt 3 16. P to Q 5 16. B to K Kt 2 17. P takes Q B P (ch) 17. Q Kt takes P 18. Q Kt to Q 5 (b) 18. Q Kt to K 4 19. Q Kt to K B 4 19. Q to K R 2 {d) White evidently dare not take the Knight on account of Q takes B (ch). Notes hy Mr. LSwenthal. (a) B to K 2 is generally preferred. (J) The attack is carried on by White with great spirit and energy, rendering the defence extremely difficult. 482 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. 20. B to Q Kt 5 (ch) 20. Kt to Q B 3 21. Castles (K E) 21. B to K 4 22. Q to K 3 22. P to Q R 3 (c) 23. Q to Q Kt 6 (cQ 23. B takes Kt («) 24. Q takes Q Kt P (ch) 24. K takes Kt 25. B to Q B 4 (ch) 25. K to K 4 26. B takes B (ch) 26. K to B 3 27. B to K Kt 5 (ch) 2'7. K to Kt 3 28. Q takes Kt 28. Q to Q R 2 (ch) (/) 29. K to K 2 29. Q to Q B 4 30. Q takes Q 30. P takes Q 31. B to K 6 31. Q R to K sq 32. Q R to K sq 32. R takes B 33. P takes P (ch) 33. B takes P 34. E takes R (ch) 34. B takes R 35. E to B 6 (ch) 35. K to Kt 2 36. R takes B {g) 36. Kt to K Kt 5 (ch) 37. K to Kt 3 37. R to Q Kt sq 38. P to Q Kt 3 38. P to Q B 5 39. E takes Q R P 39. P takes P 40. R P takes P 40. R to Q B sq 41. P to Q B 4 41. R to Q Kt sq 42. R to Q E 3 42. Kt to K 4 43. B to K B 4, and wins. Game XV [L — Between Messrs. Gocher and Brien. (From the " Chess Player's Chronicle, I860.") White (Mr. Gocher). Black (Mr. Brien). 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 2. P to K B 4 2. P takes P 3. Kt to K B 3 3. P to K Kt 4 4. P to K R 4 4. P to Kt 5 5. Kt to K 5 5. Kt to K B 3 6. Kt takes K Kt P 6. Kt takes P 7. P to Q 3 7. Kt to K Kt 6 (c) This was not so good a move as it at the first glance appeared. (d) Very well conceived. The game has now assumed a phase of great interest. (e) There was nothing better to resist White's attack. (/) The only move to prolong the game. (g) The game is now reduced to a position of a simple character. AVhite having the advantage of a Pawn, with the position in his favour, winning is, therefore, an easy matter. THE ALLGAIER GAMBIT. 483 a B takes P 8. Kt takes R a Q to K 2 (ch) 9. Q to K 2 10. Kt to B 6 (ch) 10. K to Q sq 11. B takes P (oli) 11. K takes B 12. Kt to Q 5 (oh) 12. K to Q sq 13. Kt takes Q 13. B takes Kt 14. Q to K Kt 4 14. R to K sq 15. B to K 2 15. B to K B 3 (a) 16. P to Q 4 16. Kt to Q B 3 17. P to Q B 3 17. P to Q 3 18. Q to K B 4 18. K to Q B 2 19. Kt to Q R 3 (h) 19. P to Q R 3 20. K to Q 2 20. B to K 3 21. E takes Kt 21. B to K R sq 22. Kt to Q B 4 22. B takes Kt 23. B takes B 23. P to K B 3 24. P to K Kt 4 24. Q R to Q sq 25. R to K R 3 25. K R to K 2 26. R to K 3 26. Q K to K sq 27. R takes R (ch) 27. R takes R 28. Q to K R 6 28. K to Q 2 29. B to Q 3 29. Kt to Q sq 30. B takes K R P 30. B to K Kt 2 31. B to K B 5 (ch) 31. K to Q B 2 32. Q to K B 4 32. Kt to K B 2 33. P to K Kt 5 33. K to Q sq 34. B to K Kt 6 34. P takes Kt P 35. P takes P 35. Kt to K R sq 36. Q takes Q P (ch) 36. R to Q 2 37. Q to Q Kt 8 (ch) 37. K to K 2 38. B to K B 5, and wins (c) (D) Notes by the Editor of " The Chess Player's Chronicle." {a) Showy, but unsound. (i) Correct play. (c) By some of these games, Black, whatever be the cause, seems to have sus- tained loss of quality and soundness. Neither of these deiiciencies can avoid giving the advantage to an opponent of so good a form and so complete an accuracy as Mr. Gocher.. (D-) Note by the Author, White, on his ninth move, instead of checking with Q at K 2, might play 9. B to K Kt 5 as follows : g B to g Kt 5 jQ Kt takes F (ch ) ^j Q to^K E^ (ch) ■ptoKBS ■KtoB2 ■ KIo K 3, and "White should win, we believe. I I 2 464 THE CHESS-PLAYEB'S MANUAL. Game XYIIL— Between Messrs. Bied and Gossip. (From the " Chess Player's Chronicle.") White (Mr. Gossip). Black (Mr. Bird). I. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 i. P to K B 4 2. P takes P ;. KttoK B3 3. P to K Kt 4 4. P to K R 4 4. P to K Kt 5 5. Kt to K 5 5. P to Q 3 (a) 6. Kt takes K Kt P 6. P to K R 4 7. Kt to K B 2 7. B to K 2 8. P to Q 4 8. B takes P 9. B takes P 9. B takes Kt (ch) 10. K takes B 10. Q to K B 3 11. Q to Q 2 11. Kt to K 2 12. Kt to Q B 3 12. Q Kt to Q B 3 13. B to Q Kt 5 13. B to Q 2 14. B takes Kt 14. B takes B 15. Q E to K sq 15. Kt to K Kt 3 16. P to K Kt 3 16. Castles (Q R) 17. P to Q 5 17. B to Q 2 18. Q to K 3 18. P to K R 5 19. K to K 2 19. P to Q Kt 3 20. B to K Kt .5 (6) 20. B to K Kt 5 (ch) 21. K to Q 2 21. Q to K B 6 22. B takes R 22. K takes B 23. Q to K Kt 5 (ch) 23. K to B sq 24. Q R to K B sq 24. Q to K Kt 7 (ch) 25. K to B sq 25. Kt to K 4 26. P takes P 26. E to K R 4 27. Q to K 7 27. Kt to Q B 5 (c) 28. Q to K 8 (ch) And Black resigned. Notes by the Editor of " The Ohess Player's Chronicle." (a) By this move Black gives up attempting to defend the Pawn, and gets a tolerably even game, but the position, we take it, is slightly in White's favour. (b) The game is smartly played by Mr. Gossip, but can hardly be considered a specimen of Mr. Bird's best style. (c) Black now loses a clear piece. THE ALLGAIER GAMBIT. 435 Game XIX. — Between the same opponents. (From the " Chess Player's Chronicle.") White (Mr. Bird). Black (Mr. Gossip). 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 2. P to K B 4 2. P takes P 3. Kt to K B 3 3. P to K Kt 4 4. P to K E 4 4. P to K Kt 5 5. Kt to K 5 5. B to K Kt 2 6. Kt takes K Kt P (a) 6. P to Q 4 (6) 7. P takes P (c) 7. Q to K 2 (ch) 8. K to B 2 8. B to Q 5 (ch) 9. K to B 3 9. B takes Kt(ch) 10. K takes B 10. Kt to K B 3 (ch) 11. KtoB3 11. Q to K 5 mate (D) Game XX. — Between Messrs. Gossip and MacDonnell. (From the " Westminster Papers.") White (Mr. Gossip). Black (Mr. MacDonnell). 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 2. P to K B 4 2. P takes P 3. Kt to K B 3 3. P to K Kt 4 4 P to K E 4 4. P to K Kt 5 5. Kt to K 5 5. P to Q 3 {a) Notes by the Editor of " The Chess Player's Chronicle." (a) P to Q 4 is the best move. (6) CoiTectly played. (c) A disastrous experiment. Mr. Bird must have made the move without due consideration. Several variations in this opening appear in Game 98, and the notes, p. 265, &c., vol. ii. Note by the Author. (D) Wliite might have prolonged the game on his eleventh move by playing K to R 3, hut he could not possibly have saved it, e.g. Suppose : ^j K to R 3 j2 F to K Kt i (best) ^g B to K 2 ■ Q to Q 2 (ch) ■ P to K R 4 ' R to K Kt sq, &c. j£jg Q (check s) K to Q sq, &c. Notes by Mr. Wisher. (o) This defence, formerly much in use, has given place in later times to the more powerful 5. Kt to K B 3, or 6. B to K Kt 2. It is tolerably safe, but leads to exchanges of pieces, a dull game, and frequent draws. 486 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. 6. Kt takes K Kt P 6. Kt to K B 3 (6) 7. Kt takes Kt (ch) 7. Q takes Kt 8. Kt to Q B 3 8. B to K 3 (c) 9. P to Q 4 9. B to K E 3 10. Q to K B 3 10. K to K Kt sq {d) 11. P to K 5 11. P takes P 12. Q takes Q Kt P 12. P takes Q P (e) 13. Q takes R (/) 13. P takes Kt 14. Q takes Q Kt (ch) 14. K to Q 2 15. B to Q Kt 5 (oh) 15. K to Q 3 16. Q takes E 16. Q to K 4 (ch) 17. B to K 2 17. K to K 2 18. P to Q Kt 3 18. P to Q B 4 19. B to Q E 3 19. P to K B 6 20. P takes B P 20. B to Q 7 (ch) 21. K to B sq 21. B to K 6 22. Q R to Q sq 22. K to B 3 23. Q to K R .8 (ch) And Black resigned. Game XXI. — Between Messrs. Gossip and Hopper. "White (Mr. Gossip). Black (Herr HofFer). 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 2. P to K B 4 2. P takes P (6) Bad : facilitating the development of White's game, aiid the attack upon the isolated Black Pawn. The usual line of play at this point is 6. B to K 2 7 l'toQ4 g Kt to K B 2 g Q to K B 3 jq Q Kt to B 3 ■ B takes P (ch) ' Q to K Kt 4 ' B to K Kt 6 ' K Kt to B 3, and the game is about even. In this variation Black wins the K E P, which it is needful for him to do, as his isolated Pawn ultimately falls. (c) 8. P to Q B 3 is better. Black may afterwards move R to K Kt sq, and post his Q B at K Kt 5. (d) An oversight. (c) The only resource was to advance P to K B 6. This course gives rise to niiiny complicated variations, some of which might have afforded a chance for Black. For instance, if White takes Pawn with Queen, Black exchanges Queens, then takes Q B with K B and Q P with K P, having the better game. If 13. P takes P, B takes B, foUowed by Q to K B 5. If White takes K B with Q B, Black advances P to K B 7 (ch). If White takes the Rook at once the same answer follows. Probably the best course for White is to check with his Bishop. (/) The game now becomes highly agreeable for Black. THE ALLGAIEE. GAMBIT. \svt 3. Et to K B 3 4. P to K E 4 5. Kt to K 5 6. P to Q 4 1. P takes P 8. Kt to Q B 3 9. Q B takes P 10. B to Q B 4 11. B takes B 12. Castles 13. Q to K 2 14. R takes B 15. B takes P (ch) 16. B takes R (dis ch) 17. Q to Q B 4 18. Q to B 7 (ch) 19. B to B 6 (ch) 3. P to K K 1 4 4. P to K Kt. 5 5. B to K Kt; 2 6. PtoQ4 7. Q takes P 8. Q to Q R 4 9. Kt to K i; 10. B takes Kt 11. R to Kt sq 12. B to K B 4 13. Q Kt to Q B 3 14. Q Kt takes P 15. K to B sq 16. K Kt takes R 17. K to K 2 18. K to Q sq And Black resigned. Game XXII. — Between Messrs. Wisker and Gossip. (Played at the Bristol and Clifton Tourney, 1873.) White (Mr. Gossip). 1. P to K 4 2. P to K B 4 3. Kt to K B 3 4. P to K E 4 5. Kt to K 5 6. PtoQ4 7. BtoQB4 8. P takes P 9. Q B takes P 10. B takes Kt 11. Castles \2. P to Q B 3 13. Kt takes Kt P 14 B to K R 6 15. B takes B 16. Kt to K B 2 17. Kt to Q 2 18. Q Kt to K B 3 19. P takes Q P Black (Mr. Wisker), 1. P to K 4 * 2. P takes P 3. Pto KKt4 4. P to K Kt 5 5. B to K Kt 2 6. Kl to K B 3 7. P to Q 4 8. Castles 9. Kt takes P 10. Q takes B 11. PtoQB4 12. P takes P 13. Kt to Q B 3 14. P to K B 4 15. K takes B 16. P to K B 5 17. B to K B 4 18. Q Rto Q sq 19. Kt takes P 488 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. 20. Kt takes Kt 20. Q takes Kt 21. Q takes Q 21. E takes Q 22. Q R to Q sq 22. K R to Q sq 23. R takes R 23. R takes R 24. R to Q sq 24. R takes R 25. Kt takes R 25. K to R 3 26. K to B 2 Drawn game. Game XXllL—Between Messrs. W, T. Pierce and Gossip. [The deciding game of the third and final round for" the first prize in the Correspondence Tournament of the "Chess Player's Chronicle," 1873-74.] White (Mr. W. T. Pierce). Black (Mr. Gossip). 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 2. P to K B 4 2. P takes P 3. Kt to K B 3 3. P to K Kt 4 4. P to K R 4 4. P to K Kt 5 5. Kt fo K 5 5. B to K Kt 2 6. P to Q 4 6. Kt to K B 3 7. B to Q B 4 (a) 7. P to Q 4 (i) 8. P takes P 8. Castles 9, Kt to Q F3 (c) 9. Kt to K R 4 (d) 10. Kt takes K Kt P (e) 10. Kt to K Kt 6 11. R to K R 2 11. Q to K 2 (ch) (/) (a) Petroff recommends Kt to Q B 3 here. The move made should, we believe, with the best play on both sides, ultimately yield Black a somewhat .superior position. (6) Better than Castling, which would subject Black to a strong attack, e g. : — , „ K t to Q B 3 g Kt t akes K B P ^^ B t akes R (ch) Castles °- P to Q 3 11 takes Kt K takes B B takes P ■■ „ Castles, and White has a fine position. ' K to Kt sq (c) The correct play now would have been 9. Q B takes P. {d} This line of play was first indicated in the "Westminster Papers," and is far stronger than P to Q B 4, the move given in the German " Handbuch." (e) White has no good move at this point. Had he played 10. Q Kt to K 2 Ms opponent would have got the advantage by ,r. ,, Castles '">■ Q to K B 3 ''■ p to B 6, &c. (/) Far better than checking with the Rook. THE ALLGAIER GAMBIT. 489 12. K to B 2 (g) 12. P to K R 4 13. Kt to K 5 13. B takes Kt U. B to K 2 (h) 14. Kt takes £ 15. Kt takes Kt 15. B to Q 3 16. Kt takes K B P 16. B to K Kt !i 17. Q to Q 3 17. R to K sq 18. Q to Q B 3 (i) 18. B to Q Kt 5 19. Q to K 3 19. B to K 8 (ok) 20. K to B sq 20. Q takes Q 21. B takes Q 21. B to K Kt 6 And White resigned. («)Best! If 12. ^^ttoKS jP takes B B takes Kt Q to Q B 4, and Black must get the better game. (h) If White had captured the Bishop, Black would have won the game directly tyi4. --—_-_-- 15. Kj 26. Q takes Q 27. B to K R 4 28. R to K R sq 29. KtoQ 2 30. KtoK2 31. B to K B 2 32. K to B3 33. B to K Kt 3 34. B to K B 4 35. P to Q R 4 36. R to R 8 (ch) 37. R to Q Kt 8 38. KtoK3 39. B to Kt 3 40. R takes R 41. P to Q Kt 4 42. KtoQ 3 43. P takes P 44. B to K B 2 45. PtoRo 46. B takes B 47. K takes Kt 48. P to Q Kt 5 Game 11.— Between Messrs. Heydebrand and Der Goltz. White (Mr. Heydebrand). Black (Mr. Der Goltz). 1. P to k 4 1. P to K 4 2. P to K B 4 2. P takes P 3. Kt to K B 3 3. P t« K Kt 4 4. B to Q B 4 4. B to K Kt 2 5. P to Q 4 (a) 5. P to Q 3 6. P to Q B 3 6. P to K R 3 (a) This is not considered now so strong as Castling. 504 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. 7. Q Kt to Q 2 (b) 8. P to K Kt 5 9. P to K B 6 10. Kt to Q Kt 3 11. Kt takes B 12. Kt to K 2 13. P to Q 4 14. B to K 3 (d) 15. Q to Q 2 16. P to Q R 3 17. P to Q B 3 18. P to K E 4 19. B to K R 3 20. K R to K Kt sq 21. B takes Kt (ch) 22. Q takes B 23. K R P takes P 24. Q to K Kt 4 25. P to Q Kt 4 (e) 26. B P takes P 27. R takes R 28. K to B sq 29. Q to Q 7 (ch) 30. Q takes Q B P 31. K to Kt 2 32. K to R 2 33. B takes Kt 34. K to Kt 3 And the game was drawn. (b) Up to this point the best moves have been made on both sides according to Jaenisch, who, however, makes Blade phiy on his next move Kt to Q Kt 3. followed by B to K 3 with a perfect defence. (c) Staunton suggests Q B takes P here, leaving the Kt to be taken. (d) We much prefer now Black's game. (c) Weak play ! It strikes us that K to K 2, followed by R to K R sq, would have won the game. 7. Gas ties 8. P to K Kt 3 9. Kt to K R 4 (c) 10. B to K B 4 11. Q Kt to Q 2 12. Kt takes Kt 13. PtoK5 14. Kt to K 3 15. P to Q R 4 16. P to Q Kt 4 17. QtoQ3 18. P to K R 3 19. B to K Kt 5 20. B to K B 6 21. B takes Kt 22. Q takes B 23. K R P takes P 24. KtoB2 25. QtoQ3 26. Q R P takes P 27. Q R takes Q R P 28. Q takes Kt P (ch) 29. Q takes Q R 30. K to Kt sq 31. Q to Q 6 (ch) 32. Kt to B 5 (ch) 33. QtoK7 34. Q to K R 4 (ch) 35. Q to B 6 (ch) THE KING'S GAMBIT PEOPEB, OR KING'S KNIGHT'S GAMBIT. Game III. — Between Messrs. A. Hood and J. H. Hood. Played hy Correspondence. (From the " Chess Player's Chronicle.") 505 White (Mr. A. Hood). 1. P to K 4 2. P to K B 4 3. Kt to K B 3 4. B to Q B 4 5. Castles 6. P to Q 4 7. P to Q B 3 8. Q to Q Kt 3 9. P to K Kt 3 10. P take^ P 11. Rto K B 2 12. Kt to K sq 13. Q takes Kt 14. P to K 5 15. E to K 2 16. P takes P 17. Q takes KBP(c) 18. Q to Q B 4 (d) 19. Kt to Q B 2 (e) 20. Q Kt to Q E 3 21. Kt to K 3 Black (Mr. J. H. Hood). 1. P to K 4 2. P takes P 3. P to K Kt 4 4. B to K Kt 2 5. P to Q 3 6. P to K E 3 7. Q to K 2 8. Kt to Q 2 (a, 9. Kt to Q Kt 3 10. B to K E 6 11. P to K Kt 5 12. Kt takes B 13. P to K R 4 14. P to K R 5 15. Castles 16. Q takes P (b) 17. Kt to K E 3 18. Kt to K B 4 19. Q E to K sq 20. Q to K Kt 3 21. Kt takes Kt Notes by Mr. J. E. Hood. (a) Black's 8th move is recommended by the " Handbuch." See "Praxis," p. 292, and a variation by Jaenisch, p. 28i. (ft) If White had not been beguiled by the prospect of gaining the B P, he might perhaps have had time to oppose Black's adventures ou the K side more successfully. (c) White thought he had wrested this P from his adversary by generalship or force of arms, till he found that it had been purposely sacrificed. (d) If 18. Q takes B y to Q E 3 19. F to Q B 4 Q takes Q B P 2j QtoK5 Kt takes Q P, having the advantage. R to K 6 5,p R ta kes Q R takes Kt (ch) 22, 20. Kt to Q B 3 Kt to K B 4 (e) If 19. K E to K sq Q moves and must win. 21. K toB 2 Kt takes R K takes B, jf jg Q to K 6 (ch) R takes Q chance. 20. R takes Q R to K sq 21. R takes^R R takes R, and White has no 506 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. 22 R takes Kt 22. P to K Kt 6 23. Q to K 2 23. P takes P (double ch) 24. K takes P ^^- ^ takes R 25. B takes R 25. Q to Kt 6 (ch) 26. K to R sq 26. B to K Kt 5 27. R to K Kt sq 27. B to B 6 (ch) And White resigned. Game IV. — Between Philidor and Count Brdhl, Philidor playing "blindfold" and conducliruj two other games at the same time without sight of board or men. Played in ISt. James's Street, London, May lOth, 1788. White (Count Bruhl). Black (Philidor). 1. P to K 4 (a) 1. P to K 4 2. P to K B 4 2. P takes P (a) Although the exploits of Philidor in blindfold play have been since sur- passed by the performances of Blackburne, Morphy, Max Fleissig, Maczuski, PauLsen, and Zukertort, it must not thereby be inferred that this great master was incapable of doing what his successors have so often successfully accom- plished. It must be taken into account that le jeu sans voir was less practised then than now ; and again, it must be borne in mind, that whereas modem blind- fold performers are invariably in the habit of receiving the odds of the move from their opponents, Phihdor conceded, on the occasion when the present pariie was contested, those odds to one of his adversaries, and the odds of Pawn and move to two ethers, thus placing himself at a double disadvantage. — It is interesting to compare Philidor's close pawn play with the style now in vogue. Philidor was the founder of the French school, which laid down the rule, that "the Knights must not without necessity be placed before the Bishops' pawns," in direct opposition to the theory of the Anglo-Italian school. Jaeuisch pro- nounces that of the French school to be the only con-ect style of play, and ascribes erroneously the tlien superiority of the French school to English writers having exclusively directed theii attention to the study of the Italian masters, who played their pieces to bear on the hostile K B P. Philidor was unquestion- ably one of the greatest chess geniuses that have ever lived, and was also an accomplished musician. It is lamentable to think that, like his countryman Labourdonnais, he should have died in poverty and exile ; but less fortunate than Labourdonnais, no funeral tablet marks the place of his rest, and it is not even known where he was buried. Thus France treats her great men. "Sic transit gloria mundi." Had PhUidor lived in the Middle Ages he would have been ennobled. His misfortune, like that of his illustrious successors, is to have been born too late in a material and matter-of-fact age, when the hour-glass has to be called into requisition to aid (msufficiently, alas !) talent and genius iu an unequal struggle with jjhysical or brute force. THE KING'S GAMBIT PROPER, OR KING'S KNIGHT'S 507 GAMBIT. 3. Kt to K B 3 3. P to K Kt 4 4. B to Q B 4 4. B to K Kt 2 5. P to K R 4 5. P to R R 3 6. P takes P 6. P takes P 7. R takes R 7. B takes R 8. P to Q 4 8. P to K Kt 5 9. Q B takes P 9. P takes Kt 10. Q takes P 10. Q to K 2 11. PtoQBS 11. KttoKBS 12. Kt to Q 2 12. P to Q 4 13. BtoQ3 13. P takes P 14. Kt takes P 14. Kt takes Kt 15. Q takes Kt (h) 15. Q takes Q 16. B takes Q 16. P to Q B 3 17. K to Q 2 17. B to K 3 18. PtoQKt3 ]8. KttoQ2 19. RtoKRsq 19. BtoK33 20. K to B 2 20. Castles 21. B to Q 6 (c) 21. Kt to Q Kt 3 22. B to Q B 5 22. K to B 2 23. R to R 7 23. R to K R sq 24. P to Q B 4 24. R takes R 25. B takes R 25. Kt to Q 2 26. K to Q 3 26. Kt takes B 27. P takes Kt 27. B to K 2 28. P toQKt4 23. P to Q R 3 29. P to Q R 3 29. P to K B 4 30. B to Kt 6 30. K to Q 2 31. B to R 5 31. B to K Kt 4 32. B to Q sq 32. B to Q B 8 33. B to Q R 4 33. B takes Q R P 34. K to Q B 3 34. B to Q B 8 35. B to Q sq 35. B to K B 5 36. K to Q 4 36. K to K 2 37. P to Q Kt 5 37. K to B 3 38. B to B 3 38. B to Q 2 39. P to Kt 6 39. B to K Kt 4 40. B to Q sq 40. B to K R 5 41. K to K 3 41. K to K 4 42. B to B 3 42. B to K 2 (6) If 15. ^J^^^l^ B to K B 4, or Black may even obtain the advantage by P to K B 4. (c) From this point the end is only a question of time. Philidor's aocmaoj is admirable. 308 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. 43. K to Q 3 44. K to Q B 3 45. K to Q Kt 3 43. K B takes P 44. B takes P 45. K to Q 5 And wins. Game N .—Between Messrs. Labourdonnais and MaodonnelIi. White (Labourdonnais). Black (Macdonnell). 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 2. PtoKB4 2. P takes P 3. Kt to K B 3 3. P to K Kt 4 4. B to Q B 4 4. B to K Kt 2 5. P to K R 4 5. P to K R 3 6. P to Q -4 6. P CO Q 3 7. P to Q B 3 7. Kt to Q B 3 {a) 8. P takes P 8. R P takes P 9. R takes R 9. B takes R 10. Q to K 2 10. Q to K 2 11. Kt to Q R 3 11. BtoKKt5 12. B to Q 2 12. Castles 13. Castles 13. Kt to K B 3 14. B to Q 3 14. R to K sq 15. R to K sq 15. Kt to K R 4 (6) 16. Q to B 2 16. B takes Kt 17. P takes B 17. P to Q R 3 18. B to Q B 2 18. Kt to Kt 6 19. B to Q R 4 19. B to K Kt 2 (c) 20. P to Q 5 20. Kt to Q Kt sq 21. B takes R 21. Q takes B 22. Q to Kt 2 22. Q to K R sq 23. R to Q sq 23. P to K B 4 24. B to K sq 24. B to K 4 25. P takes P 25. Q to K R 2 26. Kt to Q B 4 • 26. Q takes P (a) The Anonymous Modenese (Ercole del Rio) gives P to Q B 3 here for the defence, to which the proper reply would be Q to Kt 3, which we think is stronger than Q to K i;, as advised by PhOidor. (J) Already Black has wrested the attack from his adversary, and has, in our opinion, a mueh superior game. (c) Evidently an oversight, involving the loss of the exchange. Nevertheless, Black's position is so strong that he is able to equalise matters, as will be seen. THE KING'S GAMBIT PROPEB, OR KING'S KNIGHT'S 509 GAMBIT. 27. Kt takes B 27. Q takes Kt 28. B takes Kt 28. P takes B 29. R to Kt sq 29. Q takes Q P 30. Q takes P 30. P to Q Kt 3 31. QtoKt4(ch) 31. KttoQ2 32. R to Q sq 32. Q to K 4 33. R to Kt sq 33. Q to K 6 (oh) 34. K to Kt sq 34. P to B 3 35. R to R sq 35. K to B 2 36. P to R 3 36. P to Kt 4 37. K to R 2 37. Q to K sq 38. Q to B 5 38. Q to K 7 39. Q takes K Kt P 39. Q takes P 40. R to R 6 40. Q to K 5 41. Q to Kt 8 41. Q to K 7 42. R to R 8 42. K to Kt 3 43. R to R 7 43. K to B 2 44. Q to K B 7 44. K to Kt 3 45. R to Kt 7 (d) 45. Q to K 5 46. Q to K B 2 (ch) 46. Kt to B 4 47. R to K Kt sq (e) 47. Q to Q B 5 (ch) 48. K to R sq 48. P to R 4 49. R to Q sq 49. K to B 2 50. Q to B 6 50. Kt to Kt 2 51. R to Kt sq 51. P to B 4 52. R to Kt 7 (ch) 52. K to Kt 3 (/; 53. Q to K B 7 53. Q to K 5 54. K to R 2 54. P to R 5 55. R to Kt 8 55. Q to Q B 3 56. Q to K 6 56. Q to K B 6 57. R to Q B 8 57. Q to K R 8 58. Q to K B 7 58. K to R 2 59. P to B 4 59. Q to K R 6 60. R to Q B 7 60. Q to Kt 6 (ch) 61. K to Kt sq 61. P takes P (g) 62. Q to Q 5 62. Q to Q Kt 3 63. Q to Q B 6 63. Q takes Q 64. R takes Q 64. P to Q 4 {d} Had White captured the Kt, Black would have drawn the game by per- petual check, (e) If 47 P to Q Kt 4 ^g K to Kt sq or Kt 2 Q to Q B 5 (ch) ■ Q to Kt 6 (ch), &o. (/) AU this is very difficult and instructive. ig) Black could obviously draw here, but he played to win. 510 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. 65. K to B 2 65. P to Q 5 66. K to Q sq 66. K to Kt sq 67. K to Q R 6 67. K to B 2 68. E takes P 68. Kt to Q 3 69. R to R 6 69. Kt to K 5 70. K to B 2 70. Kt to Q 3 71. P to R 4 71. Kt to B sq 72. P to E 5 72. K to Kt 2 73. E to K B 6 73. Kt to E 2 74. P to Kt 3 74. P to B 6 75. P to Kt 4 75. P takes P 76. E to Kt 6 (ch) 76. K to B 2 77. R takes P 77. Kt to B 3 78. E to Kt 5 78. Kt to E 2 79. R to Q Kt sq 79. K to B 3 80. P to E 6 80. Kt to B sq 81. K to Q 3 81. K to B 2 82. K takes P 82. P to B 7 83. E to Q B sq 83. K to Kt 3 84. E takes P 84. Kt to E 2 85. E to Q E 2 85. Kt to B 3 (ch) 86. K to B 4 86. Kt to E 2 87. E to E sq 87. Kt to B 3 88. E to E 3 88. Kt to E 2 89. K to Q 5 89. Kt to Kt 4 90. E to (^ Kt 3 90. K takes 1 ' And the game was drawn. CHAPTER XIV. THE CUNNINGHAM GAMBIT. This variation in the defence of the King's Gambit is so named from its having been adopted by Mr. Cunningham, the historian, one of the best players of his daj^ It cannot, how- ever, be recommended, inasmuch as it involves, not only the sacrifice of the Gambit Pawn, but of another also, and it is questionable whether the second player obtains any attack worth mentioning in return. The chief authorities on this opening are the " Handbuch," Sarratt, vol. ii. pp. 50, 56 ; PhiHdor, pp. 383—404 ; Walker, pp. 96, 98 ; Lewis, pp. 266—272 ; " La Strategic Raisonnee, pp. 168 — 173. Lewis and some other writers style this debut the " Three Pawns' Gambit of Captain Bertin," whose treatise was published in 1735. GAME THE FIEST. WHITE. BLACK. 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 2. P to K B 4 S. P takes P 3. Kt to K B 3 3. B to K 2 This move constitutes the " Cunningham " Gambit. Al- though undoubtedly an ingenious attempt to set up a counter attack, it is quite unsound, and, with correct play, ought to give the first player a decisive advantage in position. 4. B to Q B 4 4. B to R 5 (ch) 5. K to B sq (best) 512 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. Instead of this move, White may also play 5. P to K Kt 3, for the consequences of whieh see Game the Second. In the latter case, Black should get the better game. Philidor recommends 5. K to B sq, and says : — " The defence must win every way, when tolerably well performed. Three Pawns, well conducted, cannot be less than equivalent to a piece. But the sure way to win is, when the first check is given with the Bishop, to remove your King to his own Bishop's square, and not pushing the Pawn, as Cunningham showeth." 5. P to Q 4, or Variations (I.), (II.), (in.), (IV). Black has four other moves at his disposal at this point — viz., firstly, 5. B to B 3 ; secondly, 5. Kt to K R 3 ; thirdly, B to K Kt 4 (all of which ought to give White a winning attack) ; and fourthly, 5. P to Q 3, which we consider Black's best course. For the result of these different modes of play, see Variations (I.), (II.), (III.), and (IV.). 6. B takes Q P 6. Kt to K B 3 7. Kt to Q B 3 7. Castles ,jf 7 g Kt takes Kt Kt takes K B P ^ ■ Kt takes B ' Castles ' P to K B 4 10. P to K 5, with the better game.) 8. P to Q 4 8. P to Q B 3 (best) Should Black capture Bishop with Knight here. White secures a Pawn and a better position, thus : — 8. 9 P takes Kt ^^ P to K R 4 Kt takes B ' B to K Kt 4 " B to K R 3 11 QtoQ 3 Q to Q B 4 ,„ KttoKS, winning ''■ PtoK~B4 '^- k to R sq ^^- a Pawn, with the better position, The subjoined diagram shows the state of the game in the above THE CUNNINGHAM GAMBIT. 613 important Variation, from which it will be readily seen that Black's K B P must fall BLACK. WHITE. 9. B to Q Kt 3 9. B to K Kt 5 10. Q B takes P 10. Kt to K R 4 11. QtoQ2 11. B takes K Kt IS. P takes B IS. K to R sq 13. R to K Kt sq 13. P to Q Kt 4 14. B to K Kt 5 14. QtoQ2 15. B takes B 15. Q to R 6 (ch) 16. R to Kt 2 16. Q takes B 17. Q to K Kt 5 17. Q to R 6 18. Q to K Kt 4, and White now forces the exchange of Queens, and ought to win without difficulty. The above moves occur ir the second game of the match between Messrs. Wisker and Bird, the former conducting the White, and, it need hardly be added, winning easily. (See Illustrative Game I.) Although L h 514 ' THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. Black's capture of the Knight on his eleventh move may be objected to, he has, in any case, a very inferior game. Vaeiation (I.) On Black's fifth move : — 5. B to B 3 This move is given by Staunton (" Handbook," p. 256) ; by the " Handbuch," p. 366 ; and " La Strategie," p. 172. It does not, however, yield him so much resource as P to Q 4 — the move we have just examined. 6. P to K 5 6. B to K 2 7. P to Q 4 7. P to Q 4 8. B to K 2 8. P to K Kt 4 9. P to K E 4 9. P to Kt 5 10. Kt to K E 2 10. P to K E 4 11. Q B takes P 11. B takes K R P IS. P to K Kt 3 IS. B to Kt 4 13. Kt takes K Kt P, and White ought to win. On his tenth move in this Variation Black may play 10. P to K B 6, as given in the " Handbuch," but without deriving any advan- tage, as follows : — ,j P takes P j2 Kt t o K Kt 4 ■ P to K B 6 ■ P to K Kt 6 ' B takes K R P Kt to Q B 3 , . K to Kt 2 ^g Kt to K 3 " P to Q B 3 ■ P to K R 4 ' B to K Kt 4 ]6 P to K B 4 j^ B takes K R P, and White has the B takes P advantage. Vabiation (II.) On Black's fifth move : — 5. Kt to K E 3 6. P to Q 4 6. Kt to Kt b THE CUNNINGHAil GAMBIT. 516 7. Q to K 2 7. Kt to B 7 8. Kt takes B 8. Kt takes R 9. Kt to K B 3 9. Kt to Kt 6 (ch) 10. P takes Kt 10. P takes P 11. B to K B 4, and White has decidedly the better game, having two minor pieces for Rook and Pawn, with a splendid position. Variation (III.) On Black's fifth move : — 5. B to K Kt 4 6. P to Q 4, followed by Kt takes B and Q to K B 3, with a fine game. Variation (IV.) On Black's fifth move : — 5. P to Q 3 Although this move is condemned by "La Strategic," p. 175, as sacrificing a Pawn and allowing White to develop his game, we believe it to be more advantageous for the second player than any other move at this juncture. In any case Black must lose a Pawn, but in the present instance he gets a strong counter attack, which, unless correctly met, will not fail to give him the advantage. It' is given by Philidor. 6. P to Q 4 6. B to K Kt 5 Instead of this move, Philidor, the " Handbuch," and " La Strategie," all make Black play 6. Q to K B 8, which is much inferior thus : — 6. P to K 5 „ P takes P „ Q B takes P Q to K B 3 ■ P takes P ' Q to K 2 B to K Kt 6 10 Q Kt to B 3 , , Kt to K 4 , with the advantage. P to Q B 3 L L 2 616 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. " La Strategie " and the " Handbuch " merely declare White to have the better game, but Philidor says White must win. 7. Q B takes P 7. Q to K B 3 8. BtoKS 8. Kt to Q B 3 9. Kt to Q B 3 9. K Kt to K 2 10. BtoK2 10. B takes Kt 11. P takes B 11. Castles (Q R) And, although White's position is to be preferred on account of his centre Pawns, his superiority is slight. For a further continuation, see Illustrative Grame V. GAME THE SECOND. WHITE. BLACK. 1. PtoK4 1. PtoK'4 s. P to K B 4 2. P takes P 3. Kt to K B 3 3. BtoK2 4. B to Q B 4 4. B to R 5 (ch) 5. P to K Kt 3 This move leads to many brilliant variations, but it is not so strong as playing K to B sq. 6. Castles 7. K to R sq 8. Kt to K 5 9. Q to K R 5 10. R takes K B P 11. R toB 8 (double ch) IS. P to Q 4 (If 12 - IS. Q to K 8 (ch) Q takes B 15. Kt to Q R 3, and wins.) 5. P takes P 6. P takes P (ch) 7. B to K B 3, or (A.), (B.) B takes Kt Qto K2 Q to B 4 KtoK2 Q takes P 8. 9 10. 11. 12. K to Q 3 14. Q takes B (eh) K to B3 THE CUNI^INGHAM GAMBIT. 517 13. B to K Kt 5 (ch) 13. K to (^ 3 14. Kt to Q 2 14. Kt to K B 3 15. Q to K B 7 15. Kt takes P 16. B to K 3 18. Kt to Kt 6 (ch) 17. K to Kt 2 17. Q takes Q B 18. Q to Q 5 (ch) 18. K to K 2 19. Q to B 7 (ch) 19. K to Q 3 And the game is drawn hy perpetual check. (A.) 7. P to Q 4 (best) This move, which is given by Stamma and Sarratt, is stronger than B to K B 3, and ought to give Black the advantage. 8. B takes P White may also capture P with P, as advised by Stamma e. g. :— g P take s P g Kt to K 5 ^^ P to Q 6 ■ B to K 2 ■ Kt to K B 3 " Q takes P 11 B takes P ( ch) j^ P to Q 4 ^3 Kt takes Kt ■ K to B sq ■ Kt to Q B 3 " Q takes Kt (ch) j^ PtoQ5 ^^ B to K B 5 jg B to K B 6 (ch> ■ y to Q Kt 3 ■ P to Kt 3 ■ K to K sq 17. B to K B 3 B to K B 4, with the advantage. 8. Kt to K B 3 9. B takes P (ch), or (a) 9. K takes B 10. Kt takes B 10. E to K B sq Black would do ill to play 10. E to K sq here. {See Illus- trative Games II. and III.) 11. Pto Q4 11. Kto Ktsq IS. B to K Kt 5 12, Kt takes K P 518 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. 13. B lakes Q 14. Q takes E 15. K takes P 13. E takes E (ch) 14. Kt to Kt 6 (ch) 15. Kt takes Q (ch) And wins. The above Variation is from Sarratt, vol. ii. pp. 51, 52. The subjoined diagram illustrates the position after Black's fifteenth move in the above Variation, which establishes con- clusively the unsoundness of White's fifth move, P to K Kt 3 WHITE, 9 B to Q Kt 3 ■ Rt takes K V' ,g Q take s P Kt to Kt 6 (oh) ,~ Kt takes Q K takes B 16. (a) IQ Q to K 2 ■ Q to K 2 13 K to'Kta Kt takes R K takes Kt B to K R 6 (ch) J J B takes P ( ch) ■ K to B sq , . Q ta kes B QlakesQ ^„ KtoB2 ■ Kt to Q B 3 THE CUNNINGHAM GAMBIT. 519 and Sarratt remarks " that Black will win the game, having the advantage of a Rook and a Pawn for a Knighf, with a very good situation." (B.) 7. B to K 2 8. B takes P (ch) 8. K takes B /jf 8 9 Kt to K 5 B to Q Kt 3 ■ K to B sq ■ "Kt to K B 3 ' Q to K sq jj K Kt to B 7 ^2 P to K 5 ^g P takes Kt . B takes Q P KEtoKtsq 'PtoQ4 ' P takes P and wins.) 9. Kt to K 5 (double ch) 9. K to K 3 10. Q to Kt 4 (ch) 10. K takes Kt 11. QtoB 5 (ch) 11. Kto Q3 IS. Q to Q 5, and wins. For further exemplification of the Cunningham Gambit, the following Illustrative games will be found instructive. GAMES ILLUSTRATIVE OF THE CUNNINGHAM GAMBIT, Game I.- —Between Messrs. Wisker and Bird. White (Mr. Wisker). Black (Mr. Bird). 1. P to K 4 1. 'P to K 4 2. P to K B 4 2. P takes P 3. Kt to K B 3 3. B to K 2 4 B to Q B 4 4. B to R 5 (ch) 5. K to B sq 5. P to Q 4 (a) 6. B takes Q P 6. Kt to K B 3 7. Kt to Q B 3 7. Castles 8. P to Q 4 8. P to Q B 3 (6) (a) This is Black's best play, enabling him to develop his game by the sacrifice of the Pawn. (5i Kt takes B would be bad, e.g. : 8. ,-; ; 9. P takes Kt Kt takes B B to K Kt 4 10 P to K K 4 jj Q toQ3 ^^ Q to B 4 ^g Kt to K 2, &c. ■ B to K R 3 ' P to K B 4 ' K to R sq 520 THE CHESS-PLAYERS MANUAL. 9. B to Q Kt 3 9. B to K Kt 5 10. Q B takes P 10. Kt to K R 4 11. QtoQ2 11. B takes Kt 12. P takes B 12. K to K sq 13. R to K Kt sq 13. P to Q Kt 4 14. B to K Kt 5 14. Q to Q 2 15. B takes B 15. Q to K R 6 (oh) 16. R to Kt 2 16. Q takes B 17. Q to K Kt 5 17. Q to R 6 18. Q to K Kt 4 18. Q takes Q 19. P takes Q (c) 19. Kt to B 5 20. R to K B 2 20. P to K Kt 4 21. Kt to K 2 21. Kt takes Kt 22. K takes Kt 22. P to K B 3 23. B to K 6 23. Kt to R 3 24. Q R to K B sq 24. K to Kt 2 25. P to K 5 25. P takes P 26. R to B 7 (ch) 26. R takes R 27. R takes R (oh) 27. K to Kt 3 28. P takes P 28. R to K sq 29. R takes Q R P 29. R takes B 30. R takes Kt 30. R takes K P (ch) 31. K to y 3 31. R to K 3 32. P to Q Kt 3 32. P to K R 4 33. P to Q R 4 33. P takes Q R P 34. R takes R P 34. P to K R 5 35. R to K 4 35 R to K B 3 36. P to K R 3 36. R to K B 8 37. P to Q Kt 4 37. K to B 3 38. P to Q B 4 38. R to Q Kt 8 39. K to B 3 ■ 39. R to K R 8 40. R to K 3 (d) 40. R to K Kt 8 41. P to Kt 5 41. P takes P 42. P takes P 42. R to Q Kt 8 43. K to B 4 43. R to Q B 8 (ch) 44. K to Q 5 44. R to Q 8 (ch) 45. K to B 4 45. R to Q B 8 (ch) 46. R to y B 3 46. R to Q Kt 8 47. R to Q Kt 3 47. R to B 8 (ch) 48. K to Q 3 48. R to Q 8 (ch) 49. K to 3 2 49. R to Q 2 («) Here taking with R, as pointed out hy Mr. Wisker, would have been stronger play. {d) Necessary to prevent R to Kt 6, &o. THE CUNNINGHAM GAMBIT. 521 50. P to Kt 6 50. R to Q Kt 2 51. K to B 3 51. KtoK4 52. K to B 4 52. KtoQ3 53. K to Kt 5 53. R to K B 2 54. K to Q 3 (ch) 54. K to K 4 55. K to R 6 65. R to K B 8 56. R to Q R 3 56. R to Q Kt 8 57. P to Kt 7 57. KtoQ3 58. K to B 7, and wins (e) Game II. — Between Messrs. Gossip and Lawrence. White (Mr. Gossip). 1. P to K 4 2. P to K B 4 3. Kt to K B 3 4. B to B 4 5. P to Kt 3 6. Castles 7. K to R sq 8. B takes P 9. B takes P (ch) 10. Kt takes B 11. P to Q 3 12. Kt to Q B 3 13. Q to K B 3 14. B to K Kt 5 15. B takes Kt 16. Q takes Q 17. R takes P Black (Mr. Lawrence). 1. P to K 4 2. P takes P 3. B to K 2 4. B to R 5 (ch) 5. P takes P 6. P takes P (ch) 7. P to Q 4 8. Kt to K B 3 9. K takes B 10. R to K sq (a) 11. K toKtsq 12. Kt takes K P 13. Kt to K B 3 14. B to Q 2 15. Q takes B 16. P takes Q 17. B to B 3 (ch) (e) Because, if now 58. 61. K takes R, and wins. gg P Quee ns g^ R to Q B 3 (ch) K to Q B 2 ' .E takes Q ' K to Q 3 Notes by Mr. Blaclcburiie. (a) This we consider inferior to R to K B sq, when the game is likely to be continued as follows : — jj PtoQ4 ^2 Q B to K t 5 jg B takes Q E to K B sq ■ K to Kt sq ' K Kt takes P ' E takes R (ch) 10. K takes P ■I, Q takes B j- K Kt to Kt 6 (ch) ' Kt takes Q (ch), and wins. 522 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. 18. K takes P 18. Kt to Q 2 19. R to K Kt sq (ch) 19. K to E si| 20. K R to K B 4 20. K E to K B sq 21. Q R to K B sq 21. E takes E 22. R takes R 22. K to Kt 2 23. Kt to B 5 (ot) 23. KtoBSC, 24. Kt to Q 4 (dis oh) 24. KtoK4 25. Q Kt from B 3 to K 2 25. BtoQ4 26. RtoB5 (ch) 26. K to Q3 27. Kt to Q Kt 5 (ch) 27. K to Q B 4 28. Kt take? Q B P 28. R to K B sq (c; 29. E takes B (ch) 29. KtoBS 30. Q Kt to Q 4 (oh) 30. K takes Kt 31. Kt to K 6 (oh) 31. K toB3 32. Kt takes E 32. K takes R 33. Kt takes Kt And Black resigned, Game III. — Between Messrs. Morphy and Bird. (The first ten moves on each side are the same as in the preceding game.) White (Mr. Morphy). Black (Mr. Bird). 11. P to Q3 11. BtoR6 12. Q to R 5 (ch) 12. K to Kt sq 13. R takes Kt 13. P takes E 14. Kt tu Q B 3 14. E to K 4 15. Q to B 3 15. Q to Q 2 16. B to K B 4 16. Kt to B 3 (a) 17. K takes P ■ 17. B to Kt 5 18. R to K Kt sq 18. P to K R 4 19. B takes R 19. P takes B 20. Kt to Q 5 20. Kt to Q 5 21. Kt to B 6 (ch) 21. K to E sq ■ 22. Q to K 3 22. Q to Kt 2 23. Kt takes P 23. Q to E 2 (b) This was certainly miadvisable. (c) Kt to Q Kt 3 would have prolonged the game ; hut we believe it was lost after Black's 23rd move. (a) Well played, and far better than trying to save the exchange. THE CUNNINGHAM GAMBIT. 523 24. R^kesB 24. Q takes Kl 25. Q to K R 3 25. K to R 2 26. P to Q B 3 26. Kt to K 3 27. R to Kt 6 27. R to K sq 28. a takes Kt 28. R takes R 29. Q takes R 29. Q takes Kt (cli) 30. Q to R 3 30. Q takes Q (oh) 31. K takes Q 31. P to Q B 4 32. K to Kt 4 32. K to Kt 3 33. K to B 3 33. K to B 3 34. K to K 3 34. K to K 3 35. P to Q 4 35. p takes P (ch) 36. P takes P 36. P takes P (eh) 37. K takes P 37. K to Q 3 38. P to K 5 (ch) 38. K to K 3 39. K to K 4 39. K to K 2 40. K to Q 5 40. K to Q 2 41. P to K 6 (ch) 41. K to K 2 42. K to K 5 42. P to R 3 43. P to R 3 43. K to K sq 44. K to Q 6 And Black resigned (b). Game IV. — Between Messrs. Gossip and Kiekpatrick. (From the "Era.") White (Mr. Gossip). Black (Mr. Kirkpatrici). 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 2. P to K B 4 2. P takes P 3. Kt to K B 3 3. P to Q 3 4. P to Q 4 ■ 4. B to K 2 5. B to Q B 4 5. B to R 5 (ch) 6. P to Kt 3 6. P takes P 7. Castles 7. Q B to K R 6 (a) 8. Kt takes B (5) 8. P takes P (ch) (6) This beautiful game, so ably conducted on both sides, will well repay perusal. N'otes by Mr. LowentJial, (a) The con-ect move would have been Kt to K B 3, giving Black a tolerably good game. (6) B takes KB? could have been played with equal if not greater elfecti 524 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. 9. K to R aq 9- B takes R (c) 10. Q takes B 10. Q takes Kt 11. Q takes K B P (ch) 11. K to Q sq 12. QtaKB8(ch) 12. Kto Q2 13. Q to K B 5 (oh) 13. K to K sq 14. B to K Kt 5 14. Q to K 8 (oh) 15. K takes P 15. Kt to K B 3 16. Kt to Q B 3 16. Q takes R 17. Q to Q B 8 (oh) And White mates in five moves (d). Game V. — Between Messrs. Bird and Wiskeb. (From the " Chess Player's Chroniole.") White (Mr. Wisker). Black (Mr. Bird.) 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 2. PtoKB4 2. P takes P 3. Kt to K B 3 3. B to K 2 4. B to Q B 4 4. B to R 5 (oh) 5. K to B sq (a) 5. P to Q 3 (6) 6. P to Q 4 6. B to K Kt 5 Y. Q B takes P 7. Q to K B 3 8. B to K 3 8. Kt to Q B 3 9. Kt to Q B 3 9. K Kt to K 2 iO. B to K 2 10. B takes Kt 11. P takes B (c) 11. Castles (Q R) (c) Again, Kt to K B 3 would have been preferable. By the Une of play adopted White obtains an easy victory. (d) The termination is exceedingly well played by White. Notes ly the Author. (a) Here the Editor of the " Chess Player's Chroniole " remarks, that if White play, instead of this move, 5. P to K Kt 3, the game, with the best play, should probably be drawn. We differ completely from this opinion, and consider Black ought to win. {See Notes by Mr. Blackburne to Game II. between the Author and Mr. Lawrence. ) (J) This is, in our opinion. Black's best move. (c) Here the " Chess Player's Chi-oniole " observes, B takes B would probably have been better. We differ again, considering the move selected by Mr. Wisker to be preferable to that course of play for two reasons : firstly, because it strengtheus the centre Pawns, and, secondly, because it opens a file for the King's Kook. THE CUNKINGHAM GAMBIT. 525 12. R to K Kt sq 12. P to Q 4 13. P to K 5 13. Q to K 3 14. K to Kt 2 (d) 14. Kt to K B 4 15. Q to Q 2 15. P to K B 3 16. P to K B 4 16. P to K E 4 17. B to K B 3 17. P to K Kt 4 18. P takes Kt P 18. P takes Kt P 19. K to R sq 19. P to K Kt 5 20. BtoK Kt2 20. B to K 2 21. Kt to K 2 21. P to K R 5 22. P to Q Kt 4 (e) 22. Kt to Kt 6 (cli) And WMte resigned. Game VI. — Between Messrs. Bird and Gossip. (From the " Chess Player's Chronicle.") White (Mr. Gossip). Black (Mr. Bird). 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 2. P to K B 4 2. P takes P 3. Kt to K B 3 3. B to K 2 (a) (d) A very fine move indeed ! (e) Here again we differ with the "Chess Player's C'lironicle," which says here :— " Upon this move Mr. Wisker remarks, — A strange mistake. Had White now played 22. Kt to K B 4, he would have had the hetter game. Mr. "Wisker must, we think, have made a miscalculation ; we find no move that gives White the better game. " The author concurs in the opinion of Mr. Wisker on account of the following continuation : Suppose 22. Kt to K B 4 If: 22. 23 PJsk^lKt Kt to K Kt 6 (ch) ■ P takes P (dis ch) If now, Istly : 24. ^t *« I' ^ P takes Kt, and Black has the advantage ; but if, 2B.dly ; 2^ B to R 3 „, E takes P , with the better game. Q to E 3, or (A.) (A) 2^ nfr Kt takes B „g R takes P, and again White has E takes B (ch) ' R to K E sci the advantage. Notes by the Editor of the " Ohess Player's Chronicle." (a) This defence is now rarely adopted. 526 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. 4. B to Q B 4 5. B takes P 6. P to Q 4 7. P takes Kt 8. K to B sq 9. PtoQB4 10. B takes P 11. Kt to Q B 3 12. Q to Q 2 13. P to Q Kt 3 (i) 14. Q R to K sq 15. Kt to K Kt 5 (c) 16. B takes B 17. BtoK7 18. P to K R 3 19. y to K Kt 5 20. P to Q 6 21. K to B 2 22. Kt to K 4 23. R takes B 24. K R to K sq 25. P to Q B 5 26. Q to K R 4 27. R takes Kt 28. R takes R . 29. Q takes R 30. P takes Q (i) 31. P Queens (ch) 32. K to B 3 33. K to Kt 4 34. K to B 5 (e) 35. K to K 5 36. P to Q Kt 4 37. P to Q R 3 38. P to Q R 4 39. P to Q 5 40. P to Q Kt 5 41. K takes P 42. K to K 5 4. P to Q 4 5. Kt to K B 3 6. Kt takes S 7. B to K R 5 (ch) 8. B to K Kt 5 9. Castles 10. P to Q B 3 11. Ktto Q 2 12. P to K B 4 13. B to K B 3 14. Kt to Q Kt 3 15. B takes Kt 16. Q to Q B sq 17. R to K B 2 18. B to K R 4 19. B to K Kt 3 20. P to K B 5 21. Q to Q 2 22. B takes Kt 23. Q R to K sq 24. Kt to Q B sq 25. P to K R 3 26. Kt takes B 27. K R takes R 28. R takes R 29. Q takes Q 30. K to B 2 31. K takes Q 32. P to K Kt 4 33. K to B 2 34. K to Kt 2 35. K to B 2 36. P to Q R 3 37. K to K 2 38. K to B 2 39. P takes P 40. P to Q 5 41. K to K 2 42. K to Q 2 (J) To render harmless Black's contemplated move of Kt to Q Kt 3. (c) Better than P to Q 6, as the progress of the game will show. {d) These exchanges are all in favour of White. He has now a winning position. (e) The con-ect move. THE CUNNINGHAM GAMBlT. m 43. K to Q 5 43. P to K R 4 44. K to K 4 44. K to K 3 45. P to Q B 6 45. P takes Q B P 46. P takes Q R P 46. P to K B 6 47. P takes P And Black resigned. Gamp, VII.- —Between the same opponents. (From the ' ' Illustrated London News.") White (Mr. Gossip). Black (Mr. Bird). 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 2. P to K B 4 2. P takes P 3. Kt to K B 3 3. B to K 2 4. B to Q B 4 4. B to E 5 (ch) 5. K to B sq 5. P to Q 4 6. B takes P 6. Kt to K B 3 7. Kt to Q B 3 7. Kt takes B 8. Kt takes Kt 8. Castles 9. Kt takes doubled P 9. P to K B 4 10. P to K 5 10. KttoQB3 11. P to Q 4 11. P to K Kt 4 12. KttoKE,5 12. P to K Kt 5 13. Kt takes B 13. Q takes Kt 14. Kt to K B 6 (ch) 14. KtoRsq 15. B to KB 4 15. B to K 3 16. Q to Q 2 16. PtoKKt6(a) 17. P to Q B 3 17. R takes Kt 18. B to K Kt 5 18. B to Q B 5 (ch) 19. K to Kt sq 19. P takes P (ch) 20. E takes P 20. Q, takes R (ch) 21. K takes Q 21. RtoKKtS 22. B to K B 6 (ch) 22. K to Kt sq 23. P to Q Kt 3 23. B to Q 4 24. Q R to K Kt sq 24. K to B 2 25. P to K Kt 4 25. Q R to K Kt sq 26. P to K Kt 5 26. P to K R 3 27. QtoKB4 27. B to K 5 28. PtoQKt4 28. Kt to K 2 29. P to K 6 (ch) 29. K to K sq 30. Q takes Q B P 30. Resigns ISfoie hy the Editor of the " Illmtrcded London News." [a) Black has a bad game now-a game which no skill can retrieve, if his adversary conduct the attack with ordinary prudence. 528 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. White . 1. P to K 4 2. P to K B 4 3. Kt to K B 3 4. B to Q B 4 5. P to K Kt 3 6. Castles /K to E and ^R to B sq 7. B takes P 8. Kt takes B (b) 9. Q takes B 10. Q takes K B P (oi 11. QtoKB8(cli) 12. Q takes P (ch) 13. Q takes K Kt P 14. P takes Q (c) 3 /K to B sq\ I and ) \R to B sa/ Game VIII. (From " Ponziani.") Black. 1. P to K 4 2. P takes P 3. B to K 2 4. B to K R 5 (oh) 5. P takes P (a) 6. P to Q 4 9. 10. 11. 12. B to K E 6 B takes R Q takes Kt K to Q sq K toQ2 Kt to K 2 13. Q takes Q Notes by the Author, (a) We offer the present game as an illustration of the Italian method of Castling, and of the force of the attack obtainable by that system of play. Ercole del Kio was of opinion that the attack in the three pawns variation of the Cunningham Gambit would be irresistible if the Italian mode of Castling were allowed. Ponziani, however, has tried to show in the present partis, that even In that case, with the best play, the result should be a draw, /ii Tjo B takes Q Kt P „ K to Kt sq P to Kt 7 (ch) ' P takes E, remaining a Pawn. jQ B takes B B to B 7 (ch), and Black, by declaring the suspended Pawn a Eook, mates. (This note is from Ponziani, and further exemplifies the Italian rules of play which clash completely with ours.) (d Ponziani now declares the game equal. Ghi lo sa ? CHAPTER XV. THE MUZIO GAMBIT Is the most brilliant and instructive of all the openings.* It consists in the sacrifice of a Knight on the first player's fifth move, the attack thus obtained being so strong and enduring that it must lead to speedy victory, unless opposed with the greatest care and exactitude, and even against the very best defence ought to result in a drawn game, in the opinion of many authorities. Salvio is the oldest author who mentions it, in his treatise published at Naples in 1604. Jaenisch says : — " Le Gambit Muzio prouve qu'aux Echecs les sacrifices sont souvent les coups justes, et que la superiorite de la position ne depend pas du nombre des pieces qu'on a sur I'echiquier, mais du nombre de ceUes qui sont en activite. Aussi pour apprendre I'art si difficile de bien attaquer, c'est le debut qu'il faut etudier de preference." * For this magnificent variation we are indebted to the Italian masters. ' ' Yet, still the loss of wealth is here supplied By arts, the splendid wrecks of former pride, Could nature's bounty satisfy the breast, The sons of Italy were surely blest. " The numerous fertile inventions of the Italian chess-masters are characterised by the same "brio " which is the distinguishing feature of Italian music. With- out doubt there is a certain analogy between chess and music, and the same dis- tinction which exists between the compositions of the most celebrated Italian and German musicians, may be recognised in those of Italian and German chess- masters ; the former full of the brilliancy, fire, and energy of the sunny south ; the latter profound and "savarU," but lacking that "verve " and genius so con- spicuous in the Italians. Morphy, indisputably the greatest chess-player that ever lired, was a child of the sunny south, and his combinations on the chess- board were as far superior to those of liis German opponents as the military com- binations of a Napoleon to those of a Von Moltke. M M 530 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. No similar sacrifice caij be made so early in the game in any other opening. Why it should be called the Muzio Gambit is inexplicable, for Salvio, who fii'st mentions it, states that it had originated with Don Geronimo Cascio, in casual encounters with another player. Salvio says : — " Diro un'altro modo di Gambitto, il quale mai fu pensato, e per quanto mi venne riferito dal Signor Muzio d'Alessandro, gentiluomo di molto garbo, e del giuoco molto intendente ; sueede col Signor Don Geronimo Cascio cosi gran giucatore, con tm' altro giucatore casiialmente." We agree with Walker in thinking it difficult to imagine how such an extraordinary construction can have been put upon the above words. Carrera also speaks of a Doctor Girolamo Cascio, a SicUian priest, as an excellent plaj'^er, whereas Muzio is only described as a third-rate practitioner. The attack would be irresistible if the Italian method of Casthng were permitted. The chief authorities upon this opening are Sarratt, Lewis, Walker, Jaenisch, Staunton, " La Strategic," and the " Handbuch." GAME THE FIRST. (the muzio- cascio attack.) WHITE. BLACK. 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 S. P to K B 4 2. P takes P 3. Kt to K B 3 3. P to K Kt 4 4. B to Q B 4 4. P to K Kt 5 5. Castles This is White's strongest move. For the consequences of his plajing 5. P to Q 4, 5. Q Kt to B 3, or 5. B takes P (ch), see Games the Second, Third, and Fourth. THE MUZIO GAMBIT. 531 5. P takes Kt (best), or (A.), (B.) 6. Q takes P (best), or 6. Q to K B 3 (best), or {€.), (D.) (E.), .'F.), (G.) (H.) 7. P to K 5 White may here play also 7. P to Q B 3, or 7. P to Q 3, but thej^ are not considered so forcible as the move in the text ; e. g. :■ — xr , , P to Q B 3 If firstly: 7. ku^qbI (best) {in lieu of this move, Lewis gives for Black 7. B to K E 3, which is inferior thus: 7.,^ 8. P^°~Qi— 9. f ^° ^ t BtoKRS QKttoBS QtoKB4 jQ Kt to Q 2 ,, Kt to K 4 ^^ Kt to B 6 (ch) ■ K Kt to K"2 ■ Castles ' K to Kt 2 13 BtoQ 3 ^^ Q to K B 5 jg R takes P ■ Q to K 3 ■ Kt to K Kt 3 ' Kt takes R 16. Q B takes Kt, and wins.} g PtoQ4 Kt takes Q P, and Black has the better game. Tf ,1 „ P to Q 3 „ KttoB 3 Q BtoQ2 ^^'''"""^^y- 7- BtoKR3 ®- ICH^K ''■ QKFtoB3 ,Q QRto Ksi ^^ Q to Q sq ^g Kt to Q 5 . ■ Kt to K 4 ■ P to Q 3 ■ Kt takes Kt ,„ P takes Kt 14 BtoQKtS ^g KtoRsq_ KtoQsq ■ RtoKKtsq "BtoKKtS and Black has a winning position. The above moves occur in a game between Herren Mayet and Zukertort. 7. Q takes P 8. P to Q 8 8. B to K E 3 (best] 9. B to Q 2 9. Kt to K 2 10. Kt to Q B 3 10. Q Ktto B 3 (best), or Variations (I.), (II.) Black has two other moves at this point— t^i^., 10. P to Q B 3 M M 2 532 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. a move advised by Kling and Horwitz, and 10. Castles ; but thoy are both inferior. {See Variations (I.), (II.)) The move in «he text is indicated by Labourdonnais. 11. Q E to K sq 11. Q to K B 4 (best) DiAGEAM Showing the position after Black's eleventh move. <^ ^^ ,^ ////://M, m k i ii i =— ' a M m/^A m -^ 'rngm WJ!mi WW§. MW.^, '^ rr-T-"^ This move was first introduced by Paulsen, in his match with Kolisch [see Illustrative Game I. at the end of this chapter), and is preferable to the old course of checking with Queen at Q B 4, which leads to the following train of play : — Suppose 11. 12 KjoR^sq .„ Q toKR3o r(») Q to Q B 4 (ch) ■ Kt to Q 5 ' B to Kt 4 14. Q to K R 5 Q to KB 4 (best) or (6) 15, Kt to K 4 P to K R 3 16. B to Q B 3 Kt takes QBP 15. 18. THE MUZIO GAMBIT. 533 j^ Kt to K B 6 (ch) jg Q takes K B P ^^ Retakes Kt ■ K to Q sq ■ Kt takes R " Q to Q B 4 20 P to Q Kt 4 2j m to K 4__ . ^2 Kt takes B, and ■ Q to Q 3 ■ Q to K Kt 3 wins, because Black must take Kt with Queen, and White wiU then play Q B to K B 6, attacking the Queen. (a) ^3_ Q.E. takesKt (oh) ( ^ ^^ ^^ Q to K R 5 K takes R ( ' Q takes R ' Kt to K 3 Q takes B ^g Q t akes Q ^^ Kt to Q Kt 5 Q to Kt 4 ■ Kt takes Q ' K to Q sq B to Q B 3 , &c. ) ^^ Kt to Q 5 (ch) ^^ Q to K R 5 S ■ K to Q sq ■ Q to K B sq jg Q to K R 4 ( eh) ^^ B takes P ^g R takes B ■ P to K B 3 ■ B takes B ' Kt to Q B 3 ,(, R takes B P on R to K B 8 (dis ch) „, Q mates ■ Q to K sq ■ Kt to K 2 ' We owe this fine variation to Mr. Staunton. The German " Handbuch " makes White play Q B takes P on his 16th move, which only leads to a drawn game. .. ,, Kt to K 4 ,„ B takes Kt ■ Kt to K 3 ■ Q to K B 4 followed by 17. Kt takes K E , and White wins. Checking, therefore, with Queen at B 4 on his eleventh move, is clearly unsatisfactorj for Black. To resume the main Variation : IS. E to K 4 (best) (If 12 ^t to Q 5 jg B to Q B 3 ' K to Q sq ' R to K sq. This move is given by the •' Handbuch" as Black's best, but we prefer 11. R to K Kt sq, as played by Paulsen (see Illustrative Game I. ), which gives Black the advantage. j^ P to K Kt 4 ^5 P to K R 4 ^g R takes R (ch) ' Q to K Kt 3 ' Kt takes Kt ' K takes R jy B takes Kt jg R to K sq ^g P to Kt 5 ' Kt to K 2 ' P to Q 3 ' B takes P and White has not so strong a position as that which he obtains by playing R to K 4 on his twelfth move. It is worth notice that, on his fourteenth move in the preceding variation, White, in lieu of P to K Kt 4, a move adopted by Neumann, may play 14. B to K B 6 , or 14. Kt to B 6. w ith a 534 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. very strong attack. The consequences of the latter mode of play will be found in the " Handbuoh," p. 454. (White's twelfth move, R to K 4, was, we believe, first played by Herr Hirschfeld.) IS. Kt to K 4 (If 12. P toQ 3 13. Q B takes P B takes B ( Lange suggests for Black here 13. B to B sq, which he thinks should give him the advantage, but this is very questionable.} 14. 17. R t akes B QIo^QI? 4 (ch) K takes B P 15. Kt takes R Q to K R 4, with the better game.) K to R sq Kt to K 4 , o B takes Kt (ch) K to Q sq 16. Q to K R 5 K Kt to K Kt 3 ^g Kt to Q 5 ■ KttoK2 13. Q to K 2 13. P to Q 3 (best) (If 13. 14. B takes B P to B 6 " P takes Q 16. R takes Kt (ch), and White has a winning position. Again, if 13. 16. Kt takes B KR takes B Q to B 4 (ch) If 18. 14. P takes Kt Q to Q 3 2j m takes Q B P K takes Kt P to K R 3 KtoR2 Q to K R 5 22. K to Q sq -trj K to R sq ■ PtoKB4 ^g Kt to Q Kt 5 ■ Q to K B 3 R takes Kt ,- R takes Q Kt takes -R 15 B takes P 18 B takes B RtoK5 20. 24. 25. Q takes Kt P Q to K 3, and wins j 23. Q to Q Kt 5 P to B_5_ P to Q~R 3 R take s K B P KtoKtsq 19 20 Q to K R 4 2 J RtoB3 Q takes Q Kt P (best) ' R to K sq ' P to B 3 22 ?J° K B_3 «., RtoK sq P to B 5, and the ■ P to Q 3 ■ ■ BtoQ2 '' Handbuch " considers the game even.) To resume the main Variation : 14. Q B takes P 15. K E takes B 16. P to K E 4 14. B takes B 15. QtoKKt4 16. Q to Kt 2 THE MUZIO GAMBIT. 536 17. E takes B P 17. Kt takes R 18. R takes Kt (ch) 18. K to Q sq 19. B takes Kt 19. Q to Q 6 (ch) 20. Q to K 3, and the " Handbuch " pronounces the game to be about equal. We prefer Black's game. , (A.) Variation on Black's fifth move : — 5. Q to K 2 This defence, recommended by Kling and Horwitz, is con- demned by most authorities, but, for all that, may be ventured. 6. P to Q 4 (best) 6. P takes Kt 7. Kt to Q B 3 7. P to Q 3 (best) /T£ « o R take s P, &c.) P takes P 8. Kt to Q 5 8. Q to Q sq j-rf „ „ Q takes P ,„ Q takes P ■ Qto QY ■ ■ Kt to Q B 3 ■ B to K Kt 2 jj Kt t a kes P (ch) jg B takes P (ch) ^g B to Q Kt 3 (dis oh) ■ Q takes Kt ' K to B sq ' Kt to K B 3 j^ Q to K R 4 ^g B to K Kt 5 ^g B takes Kt ■ K to K sq ■ R to K B sq ' B takes B ^y R takes B ^g Q takes R ^g Q to K R 8 (ch) Rtakes R ' Q to K 2 ' K to Q 2 20. P to K 5, and White has three Pawns for the Knight, with a very- strong position.) 9. Q takes P 9. Kt to Q B 3 M). Q takes P 10. B to K 3 11. Kt takes Q B P (ch) 11. Q takes Kt IS. B takes B 13. B to K R 3 The above moves occur in a game between Messrs. Anderssen and Zukertort. If now White take P with B checking, and Black replies with K to Q sq, White checks at K R 4. 536 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. (B.) Another Variation on Black's fifth move 6. B takes P 7. B to Q Kt 3 8. Q takes P 9. P to Q 4 10. K to E sq 11. Q B takes P lf3. Q to K Kt 3 5. P to Q 4 6. P to Q B 3 7. P takes Kt 8. B to K E 3 9. Q takes P (ch) 10. Kt to K B 3 11. B to K Kt 5 12. Kt takes K P 13. E to K sq, and White has the better game. (C.) Variation on White's sixth move : — Diagram Showing the position after Black's fifth move. m. J// /,///////f WM ^^ ■///M..^ I M .i '^1 gSJ ^/ Sarratt makes White play 11. Kt to K 4, which is weak, on account of the following continuation : — Kt toK4 jg B to Q B 3 ^3 Stakes Q ^^ B takes B, P to Q 4 P takes Kt ' P takes Q ' P takes P K takes P 15, B to K 3, and Black has the advantage. 11. Q to Q B 4 (ch) 12. K to E sq 20 542 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. Staunton suggests 12. E to B 2 as a stronger move here for White, but, as far as we are aware, the move in question has not yet been subjected to rigorous analysis. 12. P to Q 4 13. Q to K K 5 13. Q to Q 3 14. K B takes P (best) 14. P takes B /lfl4_ 15. B to Q Kt 3, & c. \ ' Castles jj^ , . , _ R takes Kt (ch) ■ Q to K Kt 3 ■ K takes R ,g Q to K 5 (ch) liflfi 17 5-*2JL?3. ) ■ B to K 3 < ■ K to Q 2 f ^y B takes B ^g Kt to Q 5 (ch) ^g B to Q Kt 4 (ch) ' Kt to Q 2 ■ P takes Kt "" K to Q sq Q takes R (ch) „, B takes Kt, and wius.X Kt to B sq ■ / 15. Kt takes P 15. Kt to Q B 3 16. B to Q B 3 16. B to Q 2 (best) 17. B takes E 17. Castles 18. Kt takes Kt (ch) 18. Kt takes Kt 19. Q takes P 19. E takes B 20. E takes Kt 20. B to Q B 3 21. Q to K 6 (ch) 21. Q takes Q 22. E takes Q 22. B to K Kt 4 23. P to K R 4 23. K B takes P 24. E takes P 24. B to K Kt 6 25. E to K Kt 4 25. B to Q 2 26. R to Q B 4 (ch) 26. K to Q sq 37. E to K 3, and the game is about even. Variation (II.) On Black's tenth move : — .10. Castles. The German authorities consider that Black can obtain an even THE MliZlO GAMBIT. 543 game by this move. The authors of " La Strategic " con- demn it. 11. Q E to K sq 11. Q to B 4 (ch) 12. K to K sq 12. Kt to Q B 3 ,Tfi2 13 Kt to K 4 B to Q B 3 ^ ■ P to Q B 3 ■ Q to K B 4 ' B to K Kt 2 „ Kt to Q 6 1 e E takes Kt ■■ >, R takes B P 15. -^ lb. 17. Q to K Kt 4 B takes B R takes B 18. Kt takes R, and Wliite has the better game. 13. Q B takes P 13. B to K Kt 2 14. B to K 3 14. Kt to Q 5 15. B takes P (ch) 15. K to E sq 16. Q B takes Kt 16. B takes B 17. Q to K 4 17. Kt to Q B 3 18. E to K B 5 18. Kt to K 4 19. Q E to K B sq 19. P to Q 4 20. Q to K E 4 20. Kt takes K B 21. K E takes Q P For this novelty we are indebted to Mr. Staunton. It certainly seems better than the move given in the " Handbuch " — viz., 21. E takes Kt, which merely leads to a drawn game. 21. Q takes E (best) 22. Kt takes Q 22. B to K Kt 2 23. Kt to K B ' 23. P to K E 3 24. QtoK4 24. Kt to K Kt 4 25. Q to K Kt 6 25. E takes Kt 26. E takes E 26. B takes E 27. Q takes B (ch), followed by P to K E 4, and White should win. We extract this fine Variation from the " Praxis." 544 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. GAME THE SECOND. (the donop, or ghulam kassim attack.) white. black. 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 2. P to K B 4 3. P takes P 3. Kt to K B 3 8. P to K Kt 4 4. B to Q B 4 4. P to K Kt 6 5. P to Q 4 This move constitutes the Donop attack, so named from its having been communicated by Colonel Donop, of Brussels, to Koch, a Gennan author. It was afterwards analysed hy Ghulam Kassim at Madras. It is not so strong a move as 5. Castles. 5. P takes Kt Lewis gives 5. P to Q 4 for Black, when the following con- tinuation may ensue : — g Btakes QP ^ B to Q Kt 3 g Q takes P ■ P to Q B 3 ■ P takes Kt ' Q takes P g Q B takes P (^ Q to R 5, &c. i ■ Kt to K B 3 ( ' Q takes Q Kt P ' j jQ KttoQ2_ ^j Q to Kt 3 PtoB3 ■ B to K Kt 5 ■ R to K Kt sq ' Q to Q 2 ^3 B takes Q Kt ^^ K takes Q ^^ K to Q 3 Q takes Kt (oh) ' Kt takes P (<-.ii) ' Kt takes Q ,/. B takes Kt Castles (ch), with the advantage. 6. Q takes P 6. P to Q 4 (best) Black has several other moves here — viz., 6. P to Q 3, 6. Q to E 5 (ch), 6. Q to B 3, and 6. B to K R 3. If firstly • 6 7 Castles (best) „ Kt to R 3 ■ P to Q 3 ■ Q to B 3 Q takes P (ch) n K to R^ Q B takes P , with the better game. ' BtoKR3 THK MUZIO GAMBIT. 545 If, secondly: 6. V ^ ^o ^<^ 3 Q B take s P Q to R 5 (ch) 'QtoKEB "PtoKBS 9. Kt to Q B 3 , with the advantage. Tf +T," ill R 7 ^^*'" ^~^' fi't'd again White has the supe- ll,tmrcuy: b. ^ ^^ g ^ riority. If, fourthly : 6. 7. ^5!^ ^''■ ■' B to K K 3 7. B takes Q P 7. Kt to K B 3 8, Castles White may here play 8 Q B takes P with the following continuation : — g Q B takes P g B to Q Kt 3 ^^ Kt to Q 2 ^^ QjoKt 3 ■ P to Q B 3 ■ Q takes P ' B to K Kt 5 ' R to K Kt sq ^2 P to Q B 3 jg B takes Kt ^^^ K tak es Q ■ Q to Q 2 ■ Q takes Kt (ch) . " Kt takes P (ch) ^g K toQ 3 ^g B takes Kt ^y K to K 3 Kt takes Q ' Castles (oh) B to R 3 (ch), and wins. This variation by Mr. Cochrane we extract from " Land and Water." 8. Kt takes B 9. P takes Kt. 9. B to K Kt 2 Instead of this move, which gives Black the advantage, the " Handbuch " makes him play the weak move of 9. Q to K B 3, which speedily loses him the game, instead of winning it, e.g. — a jg B takes P -y^ B to K 3 ' Q to K B 3 ' Q takes P (ch) ' Q to K E 5 ^2 Kt to Q 2 ^^ Q takes P (ch) ^^ K t to K B 3 , with a ■ B to Q 3 "■ K to Q sq winning position. 10. E to K sq (ch) 10. K to B sq 11. PtoQB 3 11. QBtoKB4 And Black has the advantage. J46 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL Diagram Showing the position after Black's eleventh move. BLACK. ^ 4mm ^'^A' m m m Wm-^Mfm » m mi WHITE. GAME THE THIED. (macdonnell's attack.) WHITE. 1. P to K 4 S. P to K B 4 3. Kt to K B 3 4. B to Q B 4 5. Q Kt to B 3 BLACK. 1. P to K 4 S. P takes P 3. P to K Kt 4 4. P to K Kt 5 This move was first introduced by the late Mr. MacDonnell, the celebrated opponent of Labourdonnais. It is much inferior to 5. Castles. THE MUZIO GAMBIT. 547 5. P takes Kt 6. Q takes P 6. P to Q 4 Black may also play, without danger, 6. P to Q 3, as recom- mended by Von der Lasa, but any other move is bad for him. 7. B takes P 8. B to Q Kt 3 9. B takes B 10. Q to E5 (ch" 11. P to Q 4 12. Castles 13. Q to Q E 5 14. B takes P 15. Q to Q R 4 7. P to Q B 3 8. B to K 3 9. P takes B 10. K to Q 2 11. Q to B 3 IS. Q to Kt 3 13. Kt to Q R 3 14. B to Q Kt 5 15. Kt to K 2 And Black has the better game. Diagram Showing the closing position. BLACK. WHITE. N K 2 &48 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL, GAME THE FOUETH. (lolli's attack.) white. black. 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 2. P to K B 4 3. P takes P 3. Kt to K B 3 3. P to K Kt 4 4. B to Q B 4 4. P to K Kt 5 e. B takes P (ch) This sacrifice is not advisable. 5. K takes B 6. Kt to K 6 (ch) 6. K to K sq (best) .„ „ „ Q takes Kt P (ch') g Q to K B 5 (ch) ■ K to K 3 ■ K takes Kt ' ' K to Q 3 g Pto(j 4 jQ B takes P (ch) ^^ B to Kt 5 (ch) ■ B to Kt 2 ■ K to K 2 ' B to B 3 .„ Castles ,o Q to K 5 (ch), and wins. ) Q to B sq 7. Q takes P 7. Kt to K B 3 (best) Ponziani advises 7. Q to K B 3 for Black here, but that move, altliough ingenious, ought to give White the advantage, according to the authorities, e.g. — ij, g Q to R 5 (c h) „ Kt to B 7 ■QtoKB3 'KtoKa 'Q takes Kt ^Q Q to K 5 ( eh) ,, Q takes R < We would prefer our- ■ Q to K 3 ■ Kt to K B 3 I selves 11. — for Black, foUowed by 12. - — ^tt—I Q takes K P (ch) ' ' P to K B 6 j securing a draw. J2 Castles Q K t to B 3 , . R tak es KB P PtoQ3 PtoQBS 'QKttoQa 15 PtoQ4 ^g P to K 5 P takes P ■ Q to K B 2 ■ P takes P ' Q Kt takes P THE MUZIO GAMBIT. 548 P to Q Kt 3 jg B to R 3 (ch) ^^ R ta kes K Kt ■ Q Kt to K K:-, 3 ■ k to k'sq ■ Kt takes Q -^ B takes Q „„ R to K sq (oh), with the advantage. Kt takes R It has, however, apparently escaped the notice of all the eminent authorities who. have treated on this opening, that Black, on his eleventh move in the above Variation, can easily force a drawn game, if, instead of idly attempting to win the adverse Queen, he simply play 11. Q takes K P (ch), thus : — a n , o K to B sq ^^PP°^^ = "• QtakesKP (ch) ''■ PioKB 6, &c. or if 12. K to Q sq Q takes K Kt P j3 R to K sq (ch) ^^ Q to K 5 ■ K to Q sq ■ Q to B 6 (ch), &c. To resume the original game : 8. Q takes K B P 8. P to Q 3 9. Kt to Q B 4 9. Q Kt to B 3 10. Castles. 10. B to K Kt 2 11. P to Q 3 11. B to K 3 12. Q to K Kt 3 12. Q to K 2 And Black should win. GAMES ILLUSTRATIVE OF THE MUZIO GAMBIT. Game I.— Between Messrs. Kolisch and Paulsen. (From " La NouveUe R^gence.") White (Mr. Kolisch). Black (Mr. Paulsen). 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 2. P to K B 4 2. P takes P 3. Ktto K B 3 3. PtoK Kt4 4. B to Q B 4 4. P to K Kt 5 5. Castles 5. P takes Kt 6. Q takes P 6. Q to K B 3 7. P to K 5 7. Q takes K P 550 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. 8. B to K E 3 9. K Kt to K 2 10. Q Kt to B 3 11. Q to K B 4 (a) 12. K to Q sq 13. E to K Kt sq 14. B to K Kt 4 (c) 15. B takes B (d) 16. B to K Kt 4 17. Q to K Kt 3 18. B takes P 19. P to Q 3 20. Q takes Q 21. Kt to K 4 22. Kt takes B 23. P to Q B 3 24. E to Q Kt sq 25. B to K 2 26. K takes Kt 27. K to Kt 3 28. E takes E 29. B to K 3 30. B takes Q E P 31. E to K Kt sq 32. E takes P 8. PtoQS 9. BtoQ 2 10. Q Kt to B 3 11. Q E to K sq 12. Kt to Q 5 (b) 13. B to Q B 3 14. B to K B 6 15. E takes Kt 16. EtoK4 17. P to K Kt 4 18. P to K E 4 19. Q takes B P 20. Q takes K B P 21. E takes Q 22. E takes K E P 23. ■ Q E takes Kt 24. Kt to Q B 7 25. Q E to K B 4 26. Q E to K B 7 27. Q R takes B (ch) 28. K E to Kt 7 20. E takes E 30. E to K Kt 6 31. E takes Q P 32. KtoB2 And Black won the game (e). Game IL — Between Messrs. Macdonnbll and Bird. White (Mr. Macdonnell). Black (Mr. Bird), 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 2. P to K B 4 2. P takes P Notes by the Author. (a) This move is, we believe, the invention of Mr. Paulsen, and appears pre- ferable to checking with Q at B 4, as advised by the books. (6) R to K 4 is more forcible, although the move made leads to a very strong attack. (c) The best resource. (d) If 15 16 Kt takes Kt ,» Kt t akes R Kt takes R ' Q takes B ' Q to Kt 2 18. P to K R 4, &c. (e) This game exemplifies the validity of Mr. Paulsen's defence of 11. Q to K B i, instead of the customary move checking at Q B 4. THE MUZIO GAMBIT. 551 3. Kt to K B 3 4. B to B 4 5. Castles 6. Q takes P 7. P to K 5 8. P to Q 3 9. Kt to Q B 3 10. B to Q 2 11. Q R to K sq 12. K to R sq 13. Q to K E 5 14. Q B takes P 15. B takes Kt 16. R takes K B P 17. R takes Kt (6) 18. Q to K B 7 (ch) 19. Kt to Q 5 20. B to Q Kt 5 3. P to K Kt 4 4. P to Kt 5 5. P takes Kt 6. Q to B 3 7. Q takes K P 8. B to K R 3 9. Kt to K 2 10. Q Kt to B 3 11. Q to Q B 4 (ch) (a) 12. Kt to K 4 13. B to Kt 2 14. P to Q 3 15. B takes B 16. K to Q sq 17. K takes R 18. K to y sq 19. R to K sq And Black resigned (o). Game III. — Between Messrs. McDonnell and Labodrdonnais. White (Mr. McDonnell). 1. P to K 4 2. P to K B 4 3. Kt to K B 3 4. B to B 4 5. Kt to Q B 3 (a) 6. Q takes P 7. P to Q 4 8. Castles (c) 9. B takes K B P (ch) 10. Q to K R 5 (ch) Black (M. Labourdormais). 1. P to K 4 2. P takes P 3. P to K Kt 4 4. P to Kt 5 5. P takes Kt 6. B to K R 3 (h) 7. Kt to Q B 3 8. Kt takes Q P 9. K takes B 10. K to Kt 2 (a) Bad. Q to K B 4 is the proper play. (i) "WeU played. (c) A pretty termination. (fe Game I.) (?) This is weaker than Castling or P to Q 4. (i) Not so strong as P to Q 4, which is recommended by Labonrdonnais himself, and gives Black the advantage, (c) Finely played ! 652 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. 11. Q B takes P (d) 11. B takes B 12. R takes B 12. Kt to K B 3 1.3. Q to Kt 5 (ch) 13. K to B 2 14 Q "R to K B sq (e) 14. K to K sq 15. K takes Kt 15. Q to K 2 16. Kt to Q 5 16. Q to B 4 17. K to R sq 17. Kt to K 3 18. R takes Kt 18. P takes R 19. Kt to B 6 (ch) and wins (/) Game lY.— Between Mr. Morphy and An Amatedb, the former giving tj oMs of the Queen's Knight. White (Mr. Morphy). Black (Amateur). 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 •2. P to K B 4 2. P takes P 3. Kt to K B 3 3. P to K Kt 4 4. B to B 4 4. P to Kt 5 5. Castles 5. P takes Kt 6. Q takes P 6. Q to B 3 7. P to K 5 7. Q takes P 8. B takes P (oh) (a) 8. K takes B (6) 9. P to Q 4 9. Q takes P (ch) 10. B to K 3 10. Q to B 3 11. Q to R 5 (ch) 11. Q to K Kt 3 12. R takes P (ch) 12. KttoKBS 13. R takes Kt (ch) 13. K takes R 14. B to Q 4 (ch) 14. K to K 2 15. R to K sq (ch) 15. K to B 2 16. Q to Q 5 (ch) 16. Q to K 3 17. Q to B 3 (oh) 17. K to K sq 18. Q to R 5 (ch) 18. K to Q sq 19. R takes Q 19. B takes R 20. B takes R And White won 'the game. (d) Q to K 5 (cli) would have been answered by Q to K B 3. ^ (e) After this Black's game is hopeless. (/) The Mr. McDonnell who played this game is the celebrated player, and must not be confounded with his namesake in the preceding game. (a) A novelty, but P to Q 3 is stronger. (6) The con'ect move here would have been K to Q sq. CHAPTER XVL THE SALVIO AND COCHEANE GAMBITS. The Salvio Gambit is so named from having first been brought into vogue by Salvio, in 1634, although he was not the inventor, since he admits finding it in the work of a Portuguese writer whose name is unknown. This opening gives birth to many interesting Variations, but is now seldom played, because it allows the first player to adopt the Muzio attack. This is, perhaps, to be regretted, inasmuch as the combinations spring- ing from the difl^erent forms of the " Salvio " are singularly beautiful and instructive. GAME THE FIEST. WHITE. 1. P to K 4 2. P to K B 4 3. Kt to K B 3 4. B-to Q B 4 5. Zt to K 5 BLACK. 1. P to K 4 2. P takes P 3. P to K Kt 4 4. P to K Kt 5 If, instead of this move. White play 5. P to Q 4, or 5. Castles, the game becomes the famous Muzio Gambit, which has been analysed in the preceding chapter. 5. Q to K R 5 (ch) (best) 554 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. This is Black's best move. If he play instead 5. Kt to K K 3, "White should obtain a slight advantage, thus : — „ Castles -, Kt to Q 3 Kt to K E 3 P to Q 3 B to K Kt 2 P to Q B 3, and White 10. ^ Kt ta lies B P y P to Q 4 Castles ■ Kt to Q7B 3 has regained the Gambit Pawn, with a slightly better position. We append a diagram showing Khi position of the forces in this important sub- variation. Diagram. BLACK. m m m m m /J ^ Ww//M — .^^, Km m. ■^/'^> /^ W//y/M i 6. K to B sq (best) [According to all the anthoritiss, White could not play here 6. P to K Kt 3, on account of 6. Q takes Q P takes P Q takes P P to K Kt 7 (dis ch) P takes B, becoming a Queen and checking. This is the line of play THE SALVIO AND COCHRANE GAMBITS. 555 given by the books, but the following Variations are not given by any of the leading writers : — Suppose White play now 9. K to B 2 , Black must play or 9. — — — or, lastly, 9. ■ BtoQB4(ch) KttoKRS ' •" P to Q 4 If, firstly: 9. 10 J^ J° ^ 2 ^^^ K^^Q 3, •^ B to Q B 4 (ch) Q to Kt 7 (ch) i and although White's King is so much exposed and he is minus a Rook, he has yet considerable resource. Tt AT n ,„ QKttoB3 Ti KttoQ5, If, secondly : 9. — 10. "? — -— 11. ^— ' ' ■' Kt to K R 3 R to K Kt sq and the position is extremely critical for both players, Black being threatened with immediate mate, whilst his adversary is menaced with several dangerous checks. If, thirdly and lastly : 9. — - 10. ^-^5^^, , , ' ^ PtoQ4 BtoB4 (ch) , , K to K 2 12. K to Q 3, and. again Black's position is exceed- ■ Qlo'Kr7(ch) ingly dangerous.] 6. Kt to K B 3 This move constitutes the Salvio defence. The best move, however, for Black here is 6. Kt to K E 3, a line of play equaUj- indicated by Salvio, although erroneously attributed to Silberschmidt by some writers. {See Game the Second.) 7. Q to K sq (best) White cannot take the K B P with either Bishop or Kt without getting a bad game, as shown by Philidor, thus : — Firstlvif7 BtakesKBP (ch) g B to Q Kt 3 g Kt to Q_3 ^ *"'"^' " ^- K to K 2 (best) P to Q 3 Kt to K R 4 ,^ Q to K sq „ KtoKtsq .„ PtoQB3_ jg B to Q sq PtoKte BtoKKt2 •QtoKKt4 ' B to K Kt 5 556 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. ,, B takes B „ P to K R 3 ^g Q to K 2 ^^ Kt to K sq, and ^*- Qtek^s^ QtoKKtS ■ KttoQ2 Philidor declares White's game to be inferior. The following diagram shows the position after White's seventeenth move in the above interesting Variation. ItaAGBAIf. BLACK. ■WHITE. „ -11 -f I Kt takes K B P Secondly, if: 7. ^-^^^^ 8. Kt takes R P takes B 10. P to 3 3 Kt to K R 4 -^j Q to K B 2 Q takes Q (ch) 12. QtoK2 ■ B to K 3 Kjakes Q B to K Kt'2 And Black gets two pieces — viz., a Bishop and Knight for his Rook, with a better position, in addition to his numerical superiority. There is, however, a third move for White at this point, which must not be passed by without notice, although not given by the " Handbook.' The move to which we refer is due to Polerio, an Italian writer, and appears to equalise the game. It is 7. Kt to Q B 3, and as our analysis THE SALVIO AND COCHRANE GAMBITS. 557 of this opening could not be considered complete witlioiit a notice of it, we wUl now show the consequences of this third line of play. Thirdly if • V Kt to Q B 3 g P to Q 4 ( j, Kt to Q Kt 5 ) ^' ' ■ Kt to Q B 3 ■ Kt takes Kt ( ' Kt takes K P f g P takes Kt ^^ Q to Q 5 ^^ K to Kt sq ■ Kt to K E 4 ■ Kt to K Kt (j (ch) ' Kt takes R ^3 Q B takes P ^^ Kjakes Kt B to Q B 4 (ch) ■ R to K B sq , „ Q to Q 5, and the game is declared to be about ^2 Q takes B P (ch) K to Q sq 15. B to K Kt 3 Q to K R 3 To resume the chief Variation : 8. K takes Q 7. Q takes Q (ch) Diagram Showing the position after White's eighth move. BLACK. i ill i m Wi • ^ ^^ Z m^^ ^^s^,„,„„,^ ^R> _,^^,^&////,im, We have given the above diagram, because the authorities 558 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. now differ as to Black's best move at this juncture. Jaenisch and Staunton both make Black play 8. Kt takes K P, whereas the authors of " La Strategie " think 8. P to Q 3 is his best move. 8. Kt takes K P or (A.) 9. B takes K B P (eh) 9. K to K 2 10. B to K R 5 (best) This move is acknowledged by Staunton to be better than ihe move recommended by Philidor — viz., 10. B to Q Kt 3, ^hich would lead to the following continuation ; — „ ,„ BtoQKtS „ PtoQ4 ,g KttoQS "^^"PP"^^ = ^'' KttoRB3 ''■ FtoQl ''• PtoKBG j3 P takes P j^ K to B 2 j^ B to K Kt 5 ■ P takes P ■ B to K Kt 5 ' Q Kt to Q 2 ^g Q Kt to Q 2 Q R to K sq, and Philidor concludes as follows : " The White Queen's Rook must check, and take off the opposite Rook. The first player will have the better position : the offer to exchange Queens at the seventh move has foiled the ingenious defence. This preparation to meet the Gambit carries a spear as well as a shield, and is extremely adapted to take the attack out of the hands of the assailant ; yet, after so much promise, it will fail to sustain a perfectly equal game, if the first player be armed by instruction and exercise against the trains of stratagem springing from it. When the defence receives a piece, Salvio's counter move becomes/ highly eligible, as the giver of that odds cannot propose the exchange of Queens. THE SALVIO AND COCHEANE GAMBITS. 559 The move in the text is the invention of Ponziani. 10. P to K Kt 6 11. P to KE3 11. Pto Q 3 IS. Kt to Q 3 12. B to K E 3 13. Q Kt to B 3 13. Kt takes Kt (If 13. 14. Kt to K B 3 and Walker likes White's game.) 14. Q P takes Kt 15. E to K B sq 16. Kt takes P 17. B takes B 18. B takes Q P (ch) 19. E takes B B to KB 3 P to Q B 3 j^g Q Kt to K -2 14. E to K B sq 15. B to K B 4 16. B takes Kt 17. K E to K Kt sq 18. P takes B 19. K E to Kt 2 And White has a Pawn more and a better position, as exemplified in the diagram below. BLACK- i i W WW/M 1^ ^' sa V//// / ^ „„„,„„„ i^ar^-^ # WM^^ 560 THE CHESS-PLAYEE'S MANUAL. (A.) 8. P to Q 3 We concur in the opinion of the authors of " La Strategie," who prefer this move to 8. Kt takes K P, for the reason that it compels White to give up two pieces in exchange for a Eook and Pawn, and thus gives Black the better chance, as follows : — 9. Kt takes K B P 9. PtoQ4 10. B takes P 10. Kt takes B 11. Kt takes R 11. Kt to K B 3 IS. Pto Q 3 13. B to K Kt 2 13. P to Q B 3 13. B takes Kt 14. B takes P 14. P to Q B 3 15. Kt to Q 2, and Staunton considers the game to be about equal. We would take Black's game for choice. GAME THE SECOND. WHITE. BLACK. 1. PtoK4 1. PtoK4 2. P to K B 4 2. P takes P 3. Kt to K B 3 3. P to K Kt 4 4. B to Q B 4 4. P to K Kt 5 5. Kt to K 5 5. Q to K R 5 (ch) 6. K to B sq 6. Kt to K E 3 (be This move is unanimously admitted to be Black's best play b y allthe authorities. 7. P to Q 4 8. P to K Kt 3, or (B.), (C.),( D.), (E.). 9. K to B 2 7. P to K B 6 (best), or (A.) 8. Q to K R 6 (ch) 9. Q to K Kt 7 (ch) THE SALVIO AND COCHRANE GAMBITS. 10. K to K 3 10. P to K B 4 (best) 561 (If 10. P to K B 3, "White gets the advantage, thus :— - Kt to Q 3 KttoKB4 ■ KttoB2 B to K R 3 14. B takes B , and White has a good game.) j^g K to Q 3 B takes Kt Walker thinks after Black plays 10. P to K B 4, White has a lost game. {See diagram.) Diagram Showing the position after Black's tenth move in the main Variation. BLACK. W////A/ Mi^i i i4 a ti m „„^^m, wm/M.. A U..'::;,J. In the ahove position White has a lost game by its nature. He has only two moves worth noticing — viz., 11. Kt to Q B 3, or 11. K to Q 3. 11. P takes K B P is bad play. 562 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. 11. Kt to Q B 3, or see Variations (I.), (II.). 11. P to Q B 8 12. B to Q 3 IS. Pto Q3 13. Kt to Q B 4 13. P takes P 14. Kt takes K P (best) 14. Kt to K B 4 (ch) 15. KtoB4 15. B to R 3 (ch) 16. Kt to K Kt 5 16. Castles And Black must win. (A.) Variation on Black's seventh move : — 7. P to Q 3 This move is much inferior to 7. P to K B 6, because it allows the first player too much liberty, and gives him the choice of several different lines of play, some of which leave him with a perfectly satisfactory game ; whereas the move 7. P to K B 6 restricts him to five moves, all of which are bad, and give Black a winning advantage. 8. Kt to Q 3 8. P to K B 6 9. Pto KKt3 9. Q to K2 10. Q Kt to B 3 White may also play here 10. K to B 2, or 10. Kt to K B 2, and get at least as good a game as Black — e.g. {see diagram below, showing the position after Black's ninth move). THE SALVIO AND COCHRANE GAMBITS. 563 Diagram. BLACK. L i , M m i ■ i W////////////i , tl? %. wwri, '///////, m «^ r ^. f§f ^^^?^^ P(f#^^ WHITE. Firstly : if 10. "^^^^ 11. ^ '^^'^ ^' '^'" ^'"°''- ■^ B to K 3 sio „ 11 -f i„ Kt to K B 2 „ Kt to Q E, 3 ,3 Kt takes R Secondly : if 10. g— j^j- H- BUkS^B- ''• Q to K 3 J3 PtoQ 5 ^^ P to K R 3, and again tlie game is equal. ■ QtoKt3 ■ To return to the main Vaiiation : 10. B to K 3 This is far better for Black than the move given by Mr. Staunton in the " Handboolc," p. 264— i'i.-., 10. P to Q B 3, which gives Wliite a winning position, thus : — P to K R 3 12. Q^J?:?^??-^t 10. P to Q B 3 11. P to K B 4 B takes B o o 2 564 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. P takes K B P ^^ P takes Kt P jg Q takes B , and " QB takes P ' QB takes Kt White wins. 11. P to Q 5 11. B to B sq And Black has a perfectly safe game. The above Variations establish conclusively the inferiority of 7. P to Q 3 to 7. P to K B 6 for the second player in this form of the Salvio opening. (B.) Variation on White's eighth move : — :. P takes P 8. P to Q 3 9. Kt to Q 3 9. P takes P And Black must win. (C.) Another Variation on White's eighth move : — 8. B to K B 4 8. P takes P (ch) 9. K takes P 9. Q to E 6 (ch) 10. K to B 2 10. P to Q 3 And Black has the better game. (D.) Another Variation on White's eighth move : — 8. Q to K sq 8. Q takes Q (ch) 9. K takes Q 9. P to Q 3 10. Kt to Q 3 10. P takes P And again Black has the advantage. THE SALVIO AND COCHRANE GAMBITS. 565 (E.) Another Variation on White's eighth move : — 8. B takes Kt 8. P takes P (ch) 9. K takes P 9. B takes B 10. Kt takes K B P 10. R to K B sq And Black once more ought to win. Variation (I.) On "White's eleventh move {see diagram, p. 561) : — 11. Kto Q3 11. P takes P(ch) 12. K takes P 12. P to Q 4 (ch) 13. B takes Q P 13. P to B 7 (dis ch) With the better game. Variation (II.) On White's eleventh move : — 11. PtakesKBP 11. P to Q 3 12. Kt to Q 3 12. Kt takes P (ch) 13. K to K 4 13. P to B 7 (dis ch) And wins. The preceding analysis demonstrates the superiority of the defence in every Variation after Black's seventh move, P to ]^ B 6. The opening is difficult, and requires some care in mastering. For other Variations see Illustrative Games at the- end of the chapter. GAME THE THIRD. (the COCHRANE GAMBIT.) WHITE. BLACK. 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 2. P to K B 4 2. P takes P 566 THE CHESS-PLAYEll'S MANUAL. 3. Kt to K B 3 3. P to K Kt 4 4. B to Q B 4 4. P to K Kt 5 5. Kt to K 5 5. Q to E 6 (ch) 6. K to B sq 6. P to K B 6 This move constitutes the Cochrane Gambit. Jaenisch says : — " The advance of this Pawn on second player's sixth move constitutes the game known as the Cochrane Gambit. Salvio played this Pawn forwards only on the following move ; yet aU the merit of the discovery reverts to that celebrated author, who had already indicated the sole good method of continuing the attack, while the writers of our own time have erred on this point. In truth, Salvio had already given the combination — K to B sq „ P to. Q 4 g P to K Kt 3 ■RttoKKS 'PtoKBe 'QtoKEe (ch) which, by a simple transposition of moves, becomes K to B sq y PtoQ4 g P to K Kt 3 ■ptoKBB 'RttoKRa 'QtoKEG (ch) etc., being the best continuation of Cochrane Gambit for second player." The Cochrane Gambit, therefore, consisting as it does in a mere transposition of moves, cannot be considered in the light of a discovery or an invention. Moreover, this transpo^tion of moves had doubtless been often made by other Chess players long before it was brought into prominent notice by Mr. Cochrane. Consequently, with all due deference to this cele- brated player, he cannot be said to have made an important or even an original discovery in this opening ; because, as we will show, the so-called Cochrane Gambit is not only much inferior to the Salvio defence, which has been examined in the preceding chapter, but can be resolved into the Salvio defence by the simple process of playing 7. Kt to K K 3 for Black's seventh move, as pointed out by Jaenisch. THE SALVIO AND COCHRANE GAMBITS. 567 7. P to Q 4 (best), or (A.), (B.), (C), (D.), (E.). As White has the choice of no less than five other moves at this point, we append a diagram showing the position after 'Black's sixth move. Diagram. BLACK. m. t//:^ ■ i r i /////y/i'MVAir J PI i 'my/,/A W/ In the above position White may play, instead of 7. P to Q 4, the move we have indicated as best, 7. B takes P (ch), 7. Kt takes K B P, 7. P takes P, 7. Q to K sq, and 7. P to K Kt 3, for the results of which see (A.), (B.), (C), (D.), (E.). 7. Kt to K E 3 (best) This move reduces the game to the Salvio Gambit, Black's sixth and seventh moves being simply transposed, and is recommended by Jaenisch, who rightly considers it to be 568 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. Black's best play, in opposition to Walker, Staunton, Lewis, and Labourdonnais, who advise 7. P takes P instead. For the consequences of Black playing 7. P takes P, or 7. Kt to K B 3, see Games the Fourth and Fifth. For the proper continuation of the present game after Black's move 7. Kt to K R 3, in the text, see preceding analysis (Game the Second), in which this Variation occurs in the Salvio Gambit, Black having the better game. Let the student refer now to the diagram showing the posi- tion after Black's sixth move. (A.) Variation On White's seventh move : — 7. B takes P (ch) 7. K to K 2 (best) 8. P to K Kt 3 White has here three other moves at his disposal, which must be noticed in turn — viz., firstlj', 8. B takes Kt; sucondly, 8. P takes P ; and, thirdly, 8. Q to K sq If firstly • 8 U5^??_Kt 9 P takes P ^^ Kt takes P ■ R takes B or (a) ' P to Q 3 ' E takes Kt j-^ P takes R ^^ Q to K sq ^^ K to Kt sq B takes P ' Q to R 6 (ch) " B to K Kt 2 j4 QtoK3 BtoKB6 /if 14 P to Q B 3 ^g Q to Kt 3 \ V ■ KttoQB3 ■ RtoKBsq, &c. / jg QtoKt5(oh) ^g Q to Q 8 (ch) „ Q takes P (ch) ' K to B sq ■ K to B 2 ' Kt to y 2 and Black has much the better game. (a) 8. P takes P (ch). This move is advised by Jaenisch. Staunton and other authors prefer 8. R takes B. THE SALVIO AND COCHRANE GAMBITS. 569 g K takes P j^ K to Kt scl , , Q to K B sq Q to K E 6 (ch) ■ R takes B ' Q^to R 4 j2 Q to K B 4 T^g Q to Kt 3 B to R 3 P to Q 3, with the advantage. If, secondly : 8. PMes_P B takes Kt B to Q B 4 P to Q 3 P takes Kt P takes P " and Black ought to win. If thirdly • 8 Q ^° ^ ^1 9 ^ takes P (best) ^ KtoB2 ' ■' ■ P takes P (ch) ' Q to R 6 (ch) ' P to Q 3 ,, B takes Kt ,„ KttoQ 3 R takes B ' P to K Kt 6 (ch), and Black again should win. To return to the main Variation : 8. Q to K E 6 (ch) 9. K to B 2 9. Kt to K B 3 10. B to Q B 4 10. P to Q 3 11. Kt to K B 7 ^j£ , , B to B sq , -f , , Kt to Q 3 ^ ■ Q to K K 4 ■ Kt takes K P (ch), &c.) 11. Kt takes P(ch) 12. K to K 8 12. B to K B 4 13. K to B 4 13. K to B 3 And Black must win. (B.) Another Variation on White's seventh move : — 7. Kt takes K B P 7. Kt to K B 8 8. Kt takes R P takes P \ (K 8. P to Q 4, &c. / 8. Kt takes KP 9. Q to K sq 9. P takes P (ch) 10. K takes P 10. Q to R 6 (ch) 11. K to Kt sq 11. B to B 4 (ch) And wins. 570 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. (C.) Another Variation on White's seventh move : — 7. P takes P 7. Kt to K B 3 8. Q to K sq White has here the choice of six other moves ; but this is merely tantamount to a choice of evils, since Black ought to win in every Variation. Still, as his road to victory is not by any means so clear as might be supposed, we give the correct modes of play in each Variation. The subjoined diagram illustrates the position of the forces after Black's seventh move. White having now to play. DiAGEAM. BLACK. 1 / w,^ Mm iM, ;^^^P mm/M /mmu Wim -^.^^ • W WM 1 C^Jl m .-^ mm m ikk'^\ '"^\ - '(f %f- ^ WHITE. The six other moves at White's disposal, besides 8. QtoKsq in the above position, are— 8. Q to K 2, 8. P to K E 3, 8. Kt THE SALVIO AND COCHEANE GAMBITS. 571 takes B P, 8. Kt takes Kt P, 8. B takes P (ch), and 8. P to Q 4. If firstly : 8. Qi2_K2_ g Kt takes B P ■' P to Q 3 (li 9. ^^ takesKtJP ^^ P takes Kt ^^ Q to K 3 \ Kt takes Kt ' B takes P ' B to E 6 (ch) 12 KtoK2 \ E to K Kt so, &c. / 9 XO QJ^LA^ ^i K to K sq ■ P takes P ■ B to R 6 (ch)' ' Q takes K P^(ch) j2 K to Q sc| Q takes B, and Black must win. If secondly ^ 8. ^ *° ^ R 3 ^ PjoQ 4 ^^ KUoQ 3 P takes R P P to Q 3 Kt to E 4 jj Q to K sq ^, K to Kt sq ^ K to E 2 kt to Kt 6 (ch) "■ E to Kt sq ' Kt~to"K 7 and Black again must win. Tf thirdlv • 8 Kt takes B P „ KJ^ takes E ^ ' ■ P to Q 4 ■ KiTp takes ITp ^Q Q takes P ^^ K to Kt s q ^^ P to Q 4 B to K R 6 (ch) ■ B to B 4 (ch) ' B takes P (ch) j3 B to K 3 Q to K 8 (ch), and wins. Tf f thl • 8 ^^ takes Kt P „ P takes Kt , „ K to K sq ^ ■ ■ Kt takes Kt" ' ' Q to E 6 (ch) ' P to Q 4~ 11 Bt o K 2 j2 K to B sq Q to E 5 (ch) " P to K E 4, with a capital game. If fifthl ■ 8 B takes P (ch) „ B to Q B 4 „ Kt takes K t P ^ K to K 2 ■ P to Q 3 ■ Kt takes Kt j^ P takes Kt ,„ P to K E 3 ^3 KJo K 2 _ ■ B to K Kt 2 ■ E to K B sq (ch) ' E to K B 7 (ch) and wins. If sixthly 8. li^Qi o.KttakesKtP ip. ? takes Kt P to Q 3 Kt takes Kt Q B takes P jj Q toQ 3 j2 K toK 2 ^3 B to K s q _ ■ B to E 6 (ch) ■ B to K Kt 7 ' B takes K P 14. Q to Q Kt 3 B to K 2, with a winning position. To resume the main Variation (C.) after White's eighth move, Q to K sq : 572 THE CHESS- PliAYER'S MANUAL. 8. Q to K R 6 (ch) 9. K to K 2 9. P to Q 3 10. Kt takes Kt P 10. Kt takes Kt 11. P takes Kt 11- B takes P (ch) 12. K to B 2 IS. B to K 2 13. Q to K 3 13. B to K E 5 (ch) 14. K to Kt sq 14. B to K B 6 And Black wins. (D.) Another Variation on White's seventh move : — 7. Q to K sq 7. P takes P (ch) 8. K takes P /jjP g K to 1^2 g R to Kt sq \ \ ■ QtoE6' ■ P to Q 3, &o./ 8. Q to K R 6 (ch) 9. K to B 2 9. B to K Kt 2 10. P to Q 4 10. P to Q 3 11. B takes P (ch) 11. K to K 2 15. B takes Kt /jj ^2 B to Kt 5 ( ch) \ \ ■ BtoK B 3, &c./ IS. R takes B 13. Kt to Q B 4 13. Q to B 6 (ch) 14. K to Kt sq 14. B takes P (ch) 15. B to K 3 15. P to Kt 6 16. P to K R 3 16. P to Kt 7 17. R to R 2 17. B takes R P And Black must win. (E.) Fifth and last Variation on White's seventh move : — 7. P to K Kt 3 THE SALVIO AND COCHRANE GAMBITS. 673 Let our readers refer for this and the preceding Variations on White's seventh move to the key diagram which we have given on page 567, showing the position of the game after Black's sixth move — viz., P to K B 6, which constitutes the Cochrane Gambit. By so doing they can set up the pieces according to the diagram, and wUl be thus spared the trouble of playing the game over up to this point. 7. Q to R 6 (ch) 8. K to B 2 (best) 8. Kt to K B 3 9. P to Q 3 (best) White may also play here, instead of the move we have given above in the text as his best — 9. B takes P (ch), 9. K to K 3, and 9. Kt to Q B 3 ; and as Black's road to victory in these three sub-Variations is by no means clear, we give the proper continuation in each case : — Tffirstiv 9 B takes P (ch) ^ B to Q Kt 3 ^^ it nrstly • y- g t^ g. 2 ^"- Q to Kt 7 (ch) ' KtoK 3 Q to Kt 7 (ch) B to R 3 (ch) ^2 KtoQ3 R to K B sq, &c. If secondly : 9. ^^-^^"^ 10. KtoQ3 ^^ Kt t^kes B P ^ B to R 3 (ch) P to y 3 P to Q 4 ^2 B takes P ^g Kt takes R Kt takes B ' Q to K R 4, &c. Tf th- A-[ q Kt to Q B 3 ,Q K toK 3 tnirmy . ^- Q^^^^^ ^^j^) • b to R 3 (ch), and Black ought to win. i 9. P to Q 3 10. Kt takes B P 10. P to Q 4 11. Kt takes R 11. Q to Kt 7 (ch) 12. K to K 3 IS. Kt to Q B 3 13. Kt to B 7 13. K takes Kt 14. B takes P (ch) 14. Kt takes B (ch) 574 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. 15. P takes Kt 15. B to E 3 (ch) 16. K to K 4 16. P to B 7 (dis ch) And mate next move. GAME THE FOURTH. WHITE. BLACK. 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 2. P to K B 4 S. P takes P 3. Kt to K B 3 3. P to K Kt 4 4. B to B 4 4. P to Kt 5 5. Kt to K 6 5. Q to R 5 (ch) 6. K to B sq 6. P to B 6 7. P to Q 4 7. P takes P (ch) 8. K takes P 8. Q to R 6 (ch) 9. K to Kt sq 9. Kt to K R 3 (best) 10. Q to Q 3 (best) 10. Q takes Q 11. P takes Q" 11, P to Q 3 12. B takes Kt 12. B takes B 13. Kt takes K P 13. B to K 6 (ch) 14. K to Kt 2 14. R to B sq 15. R to B sq 15. B takes Q P And Black ought to win. THE SALVIO AND COCHRANE GAMBITS. " Diagram Showing the position after Black's fifteenth move. BLACK. m"^:m mmi^ 5>*- ^?IW wm ^"W0 — ^^^^'"^^ m , _ .......1 ^ ms. -mmm m 'ik/ty/zi m m ;^>^^„, .^^S, wW'i. _ '■lU/, „/ ///y. m P m m y//////j^ 'P^ ^»| mmm WHITE. 575 Although Black ought to win with the best play on account of his extra Pawn, the contest is by no means over, as a glance at the diagram will show. GAME THE FIFTH. WHITE. 1. P to K 4 S. P to K B 4 3. Kt to K B 8 4. B to B 4 5. Kt to K 5 BLACK. 1. P to K 4 2. P takes P 3. P to K Kt 4 4. P to Kt 5 5. Q to R 5 (ch) 576 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. 6. K to B sq 6. P to B 6 7. P to Q 4 7. Kt to K B 3 8. Q Kt to B 3 8. P to Q 3 9. Kt takes K B P, and White has little, if any, in- feriority. All the complications and uncertainties arising from the numerous Variations that occur through Black's playing P to K B 6 on his sixth move, may be simply avoided by the second player moving 6. Kt to K R 3, which, as we have already shown, is a much stronger defence than the so-called Cochrane Gambit. With regard to the Variations and sub- Variations in Game the Third in this chapter, we would advise the student to play over first the main Variations in large type : he can then advantageously study afterwards the other Variations at his leisure. GAMES ILLUSTRATIVE OF THE SALVIO AND COCHRANE GAMBITS. Game I. — Betioeen Messrs. Steinitz and Anderssen. (From the " Book of Transactions of the British Chess Association, 1866-67.") White (Mr. Steinitz). Black (Mr. Anderssen). 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 2. P to K B 4 2. P takes P 3. Kt to K B 3 3. P to K Kt 4 4. B to Q B 4 ' 4. P to Kt 5 5. Kt to K 5 5. Q to R 5 (ch) 6. K to B sq 6. Kt to K R 3 7. P to Q 4 7. P to Q 3 (a) 8. Kt to Q 3 8. P to K B 6 (6) (a) This is a very inferior move, and ought to give "White the advantage. The proper play here is 7. P to K B 6, and it is surprising that a player of Mr. Anderssen's well-known experience should systematically adopt a move that is pronounced by all the authorities, without exception, to be bad. (J) Black's seventh and eighth moves should have been transposed. This simple transposition of moves makes all the difference in the world, trifling and unimportant though it may appear at first sight. THE SALVIO AND COCHRANE GAMBITS, 577 9. P to K Kt 3 9. Q to K 2 10. Q Kt to B 3 10. B to K 3 (c) 11. BtoQKtS U. BtoKKt2 12. B to K 3 12. B takes B 13. K P takes P 13. P to Q B 3 14. Q to Q 2 14. K Kt to K Kt sq 15. P to K 5 15. P to Q 4 16. B to K Kt 5 16. y to K 3 17. Q Kt to R 4 17. Q Kt to R 3 18. Q Kt to Q B 5 18. Kt takes Kt 19. Kt takes Kt 19. Q to K Kt 3 20. Kt takes Q Kt P 20. K Kt to R i 21. Kt to Q 6 (oh) 21. K to Q 2 22. PtoKR3 22. P to K B 3 23. K P takes P 23. K B to K B sq 24. Kt to Q Kt 7 24. Kt to B 4 25. B to K B 4 25. P takes R P 26. K to B 2 26. (J takes B P 27. B to K 5 27. Q to Kt 3 28. K R takes P 28. B to R 3 29. Kt to B 5 (ch) 29. K to K sq (d) 30. R takes B 30. Kt takes R 31. B takes R 31. K to B 2 32. B to K 5 32. Q to R 4 33. Q to B 4 (oil) 33. K to Kt sq (e) 34. E to K R sq 34. Kt to Kt 5 (ch) 35. K to Kt sq (/) And White won the game. (c) This is better than the move given by Mr. Staunton in the ' ' Handbook '' for Black at this point — viz., P to Q B 3. (d) This move loses the game : anything else almost would have been better. 34. R to K R s q. («) If 33. K to K 2 (/) If 35. 36. K_toja2_ 37 R takes Q P to B 7 (oh) P Queens (ch) Q to R 7 (ch) 38 ^toB3 ( .f gg gg Q takes R (ch), &c. ) Kt takes B (ch) ( R to B sq S9, K to K 3, with a winning position. 578 THE CHESS-PLAYEK'S MANUAL. Game II. — Between Messrs. Von dee Lasa ajid H. (From the " Handbook.") White (Mr. H.). ] Black (Mr. Von der Lasa). 1. P to K 4 1. PtoK4 2. P to K B 4 2. P takes P 3. Kt to K B 3 3. P to K Kt 4 4. B to Q B 4 4. P to K Kt 5 5. Kt to K 5. Q to K E. 5 (ch) 6. K to B sq 6. Kt to K R 3 7. P to Q 4 1. P to K B 6 8. P to K Kt 3 (a) 8. Q to K E, 6 (cb) 9. K to B 2 9. Q to K Kt 7 (ch) 10. K to K 3 10, P to K B 3 (i) 11. Kt to Q 3 11. Kt to K B 2 (c) 12. Kt to K B 4 12. B to K R 3 13. K to Q 3 13. B takes Kt 14. B takes B 14. P to Q B 3 (d) 15. Q Kt to B 3 15. Castles 16. B to Q 6 16. P to Kt 4 17. B takes Kt(ch) 17. R takes B 18. P to K R 3 18. P to Kt 5 19. B takes Q Kt P 19. B to R 3 (ch) 20. K to K 3 20. Q takes K Kt P 21. Q to K Kt sq^ 21. Q to Q B 2 22. Q takes P (ch) 22. R to Kt 2 23. Q takes double pawn, and wins, because play as fciacik will, WMte will now be able to post either of his Rooks at King's Knight's square with deadly effect. (a) This is, in our opinion, White's best, and at the same time his most attack- ing, move. (b) Up to this point. Black has made the best possible moves, and has obtained a decisive superiority in position. Here, however, he should have prosecuted his attack by 10. P to K B 4 (a move advised by Silberschmidt), and he would then liave had an irresistible attack, as pointed out by Walker in his "Art of Chess Play," p. 204. The move in the text is weak, and allows White to escape from his difficulties. It is true, however, that it is recommended by three writers of the Italian school— viz., Ponziani, Cozio, and Salvio himself; but modem analysis has shown it to be faulty. (c) A move made solely in order to give a useless check with the Bishop. ,^^ jf 14 ;j5 Q Kt to-B 3 .„ B takes Kt ( eh) ^ PtoQS 'PtoQBS 'K takes B 17. Q_B_ takes jP,^&c. THE SALVIO AND COCHEANE GAMBITS. 579 Game III. — Between Messrs. Steinitz and Anderssbn. (From the " Transactions of the British Chess Association.") White (Mr. Steinitz). Black (Mr. Anderssen), 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 2. P to K B 4 2. P takes P a Kt to K B 3 3. P to K Kt 4 4. B to Q B 4 4. P to Kt 5 (a) 5. Kt to K 5 (J) 5. Q to R 5 (ch) 6. K to B sq 6. Kt to K R 3 7. P to Q 4 7. P to Q 3 (c) 8. Kt to Q 3 8. P to B 6 9. P to K Kt 3 9. Q to K 2 10. Q Kt to B 3 ((Q 10. B to K 3 11. P to Q 5 11. B toBsq 12. P to K 5 (e) 12. P takes P 13. Kt takes P 13. Q takes Kt 14. B to K B 4 14. QtoKKt2(/) 15. KttoQKtS 15. B to Q 3 (g) 16. Q to K sq (ch) 16. K to Q sq 17. B takes B 17. P takes B 18. 'ij to Q Kt 4 18. Kt to K B 4 19. B to Q 3 19. Q Kt to Q R 3 20. Q to Q R 3 20. Kt to Q B 4 21. B takes K Kt 21. Q to K R 3 (h) 22. B to Q 3 22. R to K sq 23. P to K R 4 23. Q to Q 7 24. R to K Kt sq 24. R to K 7, and wins (a) The systematic adoption of this move by Mr. Anderssen, shows that he at any rate has no fear of tlie much-dreaded Muzio Gambit. (J) And the fact of Ills opponent invariably playing Kt to K 5 throughout the match at this stage of the game, proves that he also dare not venture to play the Muzio. " Ergo," the Muzio is unsound ! (c) The proper move here is 7. P to B. 6. In other words. Black's seventh and eighth moves should be transposed. (d) This more is given by Staunton. —Some authorities prefer K to B 2 at this juncture. (e) The commencement of an ingenious but unsoxmd combination. (/) Good, but Q to K R 4 is even stronger. (g) Black offers the exchange, foreseeing that he must get the advantage, for suppose 16 5ialiSlH 17 Kt_toQJL7 (oh) jg. KtJak_e^R_ P takes B K to Q sq Kt to K B 4, with a terrible attack. (h) Artistically finished. Black disdains to take the Bishop. 1' p 2 580 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL Game IV.— Between Messrs, Hanstein and Hetdbbband. White (Mr. Hanstein). Black (Mr. Heydebrand). 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 2. P to K B 4 2. P takes P 3. Kt to K B 3 3. P to K Kt 4 4. B to B 4 4. P to Kt 5 5. Kt to K 5 5. Q to E 5 (ch) 6. K to B sq 6. P to K B 6 7. P to Q 4 V. Kt to K R 3 (a) 8. P to K Kt 3 8. Q to R 6 (ch) 9. K to B 2 9. Q to Kt 7 (ch) 10. K to K 3 10. P to K B 3 (J) 11. KKttoQS 11. KKt to KB 2(c) 12. KKttoKB4 12. BtoKE3 13. K to Q 3 13. B takes Kt 14. Q B takes B 14. P to Q B 3 15. Kt to Q B 3 15. P to Q Kt 4 (tZ) 16. B takes Kt (ch) 16. K takes B 17. B to Q 6 17. Kt to Q E 3 18. P to K R 4 (e) 18. P to Q Kt 5 19. K R to K Kt sq 19. Q to K B 7 20. R to K B sq 20. Kt to Q B 4 (ch) 21. K to Q B 4 (/) 21. B to Q R 3 (ch) 22. K takes Q Kt P 22. B takes R 23. K takes Kt 23. B to Q E 3 24. Q to Q B sq 24. P to K E 4 (a) Although, strictly speaking, a Cochrane Gamhit, the game is now resolved into the Salvio Gambit hy Black's last move, the position in the Salvio being identically the same as that which now occurs, Black's sixth and seventh moves being merely transposed. Jaenisch recommends the move made in this game, viz., 7 Kt to K R 3 ; but the correct play is 7. P takes P (ch). (b) P to K B 4 is the proper move here, giving Black an immediate advantage. (c) Necessary to prevent the loss of the Queen through Kt to K B i. (d) Better than 15. Castles which could be answered as follows i — Suppose . j5 -jg B toQ 6 J J, B takes Kt (ch) ^g P to K R 3 Castles ■ P to Q Kt 4 ' R takes B ' P to Q Kt 5 jg B takes F go I^ to K 3 gi Q to K Kt sq 22 Q takes P (ch) B checks ' Q takes Kt P ' Q to Q B 2 ' R to K Kt 2 23. Q take.-i K B P , &c. We extract this interesting variation from "Walker's Chess Studies," p. 187. (c) The " Schachzeitung " suggests 18. P to Q Kt 4 as a better move here. (f) If 21. P or B takes Kt, 21. B to Q R 3 (ch), &c. THE SALVIO AND COCHRANE GAMBITS. 581 25. P to K 5 25. Q R to K sq 26. Q to K B 4 26. Q R to K 3 27. R to Q B sq 27. K R to K sq 28. P to Q Kt 3 (5f) 28. Q R takes P (ch) 29. B takes R 29. R takes B (ch) 30. K to Q 6 30. R to K 2 31- P to Q 5 31. Q to Q Kt 3 And White resigned. Game "V. — Between the same opponents (From the " Schaohzeitung.") White (Mr. Hanstein). Black (Mr. Heydebrand.) 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 2. P to K B 4 2. P takes P 3. Kt to K B 3 3. P to K Kt 4 4. B to B 4 4. P to K Kt 5 5. Kt to K 5 5. Q to K R 5 (ch) 6. K to B sq 6. P to B 6 7. P takes P (a) 7. P to Q 4 (b) 8. B takes P 8. Kt to K B 3 9. B takes K B P (ch) 9. K to K 2 10. P to Q 4 10. Q Kt to B 3 11. BtoQB4 11. PtoK Kt6(c) 12. K to K 2 12. Kt takes K P 13. Q Kt to B 3 {d) 13. Kt to K B 7 (9) To prevent the impending mate should the Black Queen he played to K on "White's moving his Kt to K 4. The following Notes are from the " Schachzeitung,'" 1843. (a) P to Q 4 is thfe move indicated by modern authorities. The consequences of the moves Kt takes K B P, B takes P (ch), and P to K Kt 3 will he found in the works of Lewis, "Walker, and Staunton. (b) Kt to K B 3 is more theoretically correct. Tlie treatises above named give a searching analysis of it. The move adopted by Mr. Heydebrand allows the Q B to he brought into play. (c) P takes P wolild perhaps have been stronger ; in that case White would have retaken P'with Kt. (d) Evidently the Kt cannot be taken. 582 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. 14. R P takes P 14. Q takes K Kt P (e) 15. R to K Kt sq 15. Q takes Kt (ch) 16. P takes Q 16. Kt takes Q 17. B to Kt 5 (ch) (/) 17. K to Q 2 18. Q R takes Kt (ch) And Black resigned. (e) If Q takes E, White gives check with Q B at Kt 5, and mate next move. (/) This move, long held in reserve hy White, was a powerful resource, well dissimulated, during this short but brilliant game. CHAPTER XVII. THE KING'S ROOK'S PAWN'S GAMBIT. This debut consists in the first player throwing forward his Rook's Pawn at the third move, instead of bringing out his Knight or Bishop. In the opinion of Calvi, the Rook's Pawn's Gambit does not deserve the bad reputation it has acquired, although it is condemned by most writers. Von der Lasa says that, "practically speaking, experience proves Black's defence to be possible, although naturally laborious ; " while Staunton considers " White's attack, if properly met, is speedily foiled or turned against him." GAME THE FIRST. WHITE. BLACK. 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 S. P to K B 4 2. P takes P 3. P to K R 4 3. B to K 2 This is given as Black's best move by Jaenisch. 4. Kt to K B 3 4. P to Q 3 The " Handbuch" and Jaenisch give also 4. Kt to KB 3 for Black, as foUows : — g P toQ3 g P takes P ■ KttoKB3 ■ PtoQ4 ' Kt takes P » P to Q B 4 g Q B takes Kt g P to Q 4 Kt to K 6 ■ P takes B ' B to K Kt 5 aacl Black has the Letter game. 584 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. 5. P to Q 4 5. B to K Kt 5 6. Q B takes P 6. B takes P (ch) 7. E takes B Instead of this move, Lewis makes White play 7. P to K Kt 3, thus : — y P to K Kt 3 g B takes B B to K Kt 4 B takes Kt and considers Black has the best of the game. 7. B takes Kt 8. Q takes B 8. Q takes R (ch) 9. P to K Kt 3, and Black, although he has won the ixchange and a Pawn, has a difficult defence. CHAPTER XVIII. THE KING'S BISHOP'S GAMBIT. This is, perhaps, the strongest of all the Gambits on the King's side. It certainly leads to a more enduring attack than the " Greco-Philidor," or King's Knight's Gambit. Staunton says, "that, instead of being regarded as a brilliant but hazardous debut, the legitimate result of which is a lost game for the first player, the Bishop's Gambit now takes rank as a perfectly sound and safe opening, in which, with the very best play, the defence cannot do more tlian draw the game." Jaenisch speaks enthusiasticallj' of it, as follows : — " We even think we do not exaggerate in looking upon the Bishop's Gambit, with certain other Chess openings, as an imperishable monument of human wisdom ; for it has required centuries to its erection, and to the completion of it in its actual state : whUe who can foresee how many new forms of attack and defence may yet thereto be added by generations to come ? " The Bishop's Gambit was much in vogue in the sixteenth century, and although considered inferior to the Knight's Gambit by Ponziani and other Italian authors, that was chiefly owing to the Italian mode of Castling, and it again became much practised in both France and England in the eighteenth century, being favoured by the immortal Philidor. It was the favourite opening of MacDonnell, who adopted it suc- cessMly against Labourdonnais, and has finally been played by Morphy and the best players of our own time. The superiority of the Bishop's Gambit over the Knight's Gambit consists in the fact, that, whereas in the former it is 586 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. imijossible (according to Von der Lasa and other eminent authorities) for Black to maintain the Gambit Pawn, in the latter, the Pawn can be preserved by the second player with certainty : this proves the soundness of the Bishop's Gambit for the first player — " ergo " the Knight's Gambit must be inferior for White. Labourdonnais and Stamma, in opposition to Philidor, pronounced erroneously in favour of the defence, being of opinion that Black's extra Pawn should ultimately give him the advantage. Eecent discoveries, however, have demonstrated this opinion to be fallacious. GAME THE FIEST. (bilguee's counter gambit.) white. black. 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 2. P to K B 4 S. P takes P 3. B to Q B 4 3. P to Q 4 This is now generally played for the defence, and may be considered Black's best reply, as it at once gives him a free open game, and avoids the tedious and difficult task of main- taining the Pawn by the old classical defence, Q to K E 5 (ch). Black's third mode, P to Q 4, is styled " Bilguer's Counter- Gambit," having been first adopted by Bilguer against Bledow. {See " Chess Chronicle," 1841, p. 337.) Black has four other defences, which shall be examined in turn — viz., 8. Kt to K B 3, 3. P to Q Kt 4, 3. P to K B 4, and 3. Q to K E 5. (See Games the Second, Third, Fourth and Fifth.) P to K Kt 4, P to Q B 3, B to B 4, Q to K B 3, B to K 2, and P to Q 3 are all more or less untenable defences, and unworthy of notice. 4. P takes P (best), or Variation (I.) THE KING'S BISHOP'S GAMBIT 587 Some authorities prefer B takes P here, but we agree with Mr. Lowenthal in giving the preference to P takes P. For the result of 4. B takes P see Variation (I.). 4. B to Q 3, or (A.) Checking with Q would be bad for Black, e. g. : — 4 5 K to B sq, B to Kt 5 (ch) ■ Q to K R 5 (ch) ■ P to B 6 ' ' P to Q B 3 ^ Kt takes P „ Q to K 2 (ch), followed by 9. P takes P , with ■ Q to Q Kt 5 a Pawn ahead and a fine attack. It is worthy of notice that if on his seventh move in the above Variation Black should withdraw his Q to K B 3, White should still gain the advantage, as follows : — Suppose: 7. 8. -^J^^-^^-P 9. P' ^^ ^ 2 ^^ Q to K B 3 P takes P B to Q 3 10 ^ ^°3 ■*_ 11 B to K Kt 5, followed by P to Q B 4, with a ■ Kt to K 2 splendid game. {See Illustrative Game I. at the end of this Chapter.) Black may, however, play 4. Kt to K B 3, in reply to 4. P takes P, without any disadvantage. {See (A.)) 5. Kt to K B 3 5. B to K Kt 5 If Black play here Kt to K 2, see Illustrative Game II. 6. Castles 6. Kt to K 2 7. P to Q 4 7. Kt to Q 2 ' 8. B to Q Kt 3 8. P to K Kt 4 9. P to Q B 4 9. P to Q Kt 3 10. Kt to Q B 3 10. Castles 11. KttoK4 11. Pto KB 3 And the game is declared even by the German " Handbuch" and "La Strategie Kaisonnee," p. 41. 588 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. Diagram Showing the position. BLACK. /////y/ //// 'Hr./// ■ ■ a ' ■?1 ^ W^W .jf S fel WHITE. (A.) Variation on Black's fourth move : — 4. Kt to K B 3 5. Kt to Q B 3 5. B to Q 3 6- P to Q 4 e. Castles 1. Kt to K B 3, and the game is about even. Instead of this move the " Handbuch " makes White play 7. Kt to K 2, and continues the game as follows : — 7 Kt to K 2 j^ P takes P P to K R 4 PtoB6 jj K to Q 2 Kt to R 4 ' R to "K sq" B to Q 3, Black having the better game. 10. Kt to K 4 B to Kt 6 (ch) THE KING'S BISHOP'S GAMBIT. 68t) Variation (I.) On "White's fourth move : — 4. B takes P This move is recommended hy the French authorities, but Mr Lowenthal prefers P takes P. (See "Book of the Con- gress," p. 85.) 4. Kt to K B 3 or (B.) 5. Kt to K B 3 (best) "White has two other moves at his disposal here — viz., Kt to Q B 3, and Q to K 2. „ „ , Kt to Q B 3 „ Kt to K B 3 ^ Q P take s B nrstly . 0. _____ o. g ^^^^^ ^^ • P to Q B 3 g B to Q B 4 9 K takes Q ^q B takes P Q takes Q (ch) ' Castles ' Kt takes P 11. R to K sq, even game. yr n - Q to K 2 „ P takes Kt (dis oh) ^ Q to K B 3 If secondly : 5. -S_i 6. =- ^ ' 7. ^-j- — - — Kt takes B B to K 2 B checks g P to Kt 3 9 P takes B (best) Castles i jf g Q take s P , „ Kt to K B 3 ^j Kt to Q B 3 ) I ■ Q takes P ' B to K Kt 4 ' Q to Q B 3, and wins ) 9 10 QtoB2 11 Kt to K 2 Q takes P (ch) ' E checks Q to R 4 12 Kt to Q B 3 P to K B 6, and wins. To return to the main "Variation : 5. Kt takes B 6. P takes Kt 6. Q takes P 7. Kt to Q B 3 7. Q to K R 4 Checking at K 3 would be bad play. (See Illustrative Game III., between the Author and Mr. Longman.) 690 THE CHESS-PLAYEE'S MANUAL. 8. PtoQ4 8. B to Q 3 9. Q to K 2 (ch) 9. K to Q sq 10. Castles 10. P to K Kt 4 11. Q to Q Kt 5 11, P to K B 4 12. QtoQ5 12. Kt to B 3 13. Kt to K 5 13. E to B sq 14. B to Q 2 14. Kt to K 2 15. QtoB4 15. E to B 3 16. Q E to K sq 16. P to B 3 17. Kt to E 4 e " Hanclbuch " declares the game to be in The favour. The above moves occur in a consultation game between Messrs. Morphy, Walker, and Greenaway, against Messrs. Lowenthal, Medley, and Mongredien. The game in question was continued a few moves further and left unfinished, but, in Mr. Lowenthal' s opinion, slightly in favour of Black. (B.) 4. Q to E 5 (ch) 5. K to B sq 5. P to K Kt 4 6. Kt to Q B 3 6. B to K Kt 2 7. Pto Q4 7. Kt to K 2 8. Kt to K B 8 8. Q to E4 9. P to K E 4 9. P to K E 3 10. K to Kt sq 10. P to K Kt 5 11. Kt to K sq White may play here 11. Kt to K 5, a move invented by Zukertort, for which see Illustrative Game VII. at the end of the present chapter. 11. PtoB 6 12. P takes P 12. P takes P 13. K to B 2 13. Q Kt to B 3 THE KING'S BISHOPS GAMBIT, 591 14. P to K 5 14. B to K B 15. K B takes P 15. Q to Kt 3 16. E to K Kt sq 16. Q to E 2 17. B to K 3 17. Castles (Q E) 18. B takes Kt 18. Kt takes B 19. Q to B 3 19. K E to Kt sq 20. Kt to K 2 20. Q B takes P 21. Eto Q B sq 21. B to K 5 22. Q to Kt 4 (ch) 22. K to Kt sq And Black has no disadvantage. The Bilguer Counter-Gambit may, therefore, be considered a safe and sound defence. GAME THE SECOND. (the PRUSSIAN DEFENCE.) WHITE. BLACK. 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 2. P to K B 4 2. P takes P 3. B to Q B 4 3. Kt to K B 3 This move, which was noticed by Lopez three centuries ago, was brought again into vogue in modern times in the " Schach- zeitung," by Colonel Hanneken, a Prussian officer: hence its denomination. It was played with success by Morphy against Anderssen, is recommended by Jaenisch and other authorities, and may be safely adopted. 4. Kt to Q B 3, or see Variations (I.), (II.), (III.) White has the choice of several other moves here — viz., P to Q 3, as advised by "La Strategic ; " P to K 5 ; and P to Q 4, for the result of which see Variations (I.), (II.), and 592 THE CHESS-PLAYEE'S MANUAL. (III.). The move of 4. Kt to Q B 3 is given by Heydebrand as best, but is condemned by " La Strategie." 4. B to Kt 5 (best) 5. P to K 5 6. B to Kt 5 (ch) (best) 7. P takes Kt 8. Q to K 2 (ch) 9. Q takes P (ch) 10. Kt to K B 3 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. P to Q 4 P toB 3 P takes B B toK3 Kt to B 3 Castles (best) (If 10. 13. 16. Q takes P Kt to B 7 (ch) R takes Kt P to Q 3 11. Q takes Kt P R to Q B sq 14 Q takes R ■ Q to K 5 (ch) j2 Kt_takesQP ■ Q to"K B 4 ^ ,g K to Q sq Castles Q to Kt 3 17. 11. P takes P IS. Castles Q takes P at B 5, with, the advantage.) 11. E to K sq IS. P to Q E 3 And Black has the better game, in the opinion of Mr. Lowenthal. {See " Book of the Congress," p. 98.) The subjoined diagram illustrates the position after Black's twelfth move. THE KING'S BISHOP'S GAMBIT. 593 BLACK. /r-5 mmw 1 if >-, ^/j-^ ji^/// W/mM. WHITE. Variation (I.) On Wliite's fourth move : — 4. P to Q 3 Lopez makes White play the inferior move 4. Q to K B 3, to which Black can advantageously reply with Kt to Q B 3, as pointed out in the " Handbuch," p. 474 (5th ed.). 4. P to Q 4 5. P takes P 5. Kt takes P 6. Q to K 2 (ch) 6. B to K 3 7. B takes Kt ' 7. Q takes B 8. B takes P 8. B to Q B 4 9. Kt to K B 3 And Black has slightly the better position. The above is from Jaenisch. 594 THE CHESS-PLAYEK'S MANUAL. Diagram. BLACK. #^ ^ ^i,_„„„„fci ^ '''^■"''- * M i ^^P ./.(i^^r'"" ^. JMl ■mr^('^^ym. VM^. W//////M' ^ # '-^ wm WHITE. Vakiation (II.) On White's fourth move : — 4. P to K 5 This move is justly condemned by the " Handbuch." 4. Kt to K 5 Black may also play 4. P to Q 4 with advantage. (Se Illustrative Game IV., between Anderssen and Morphy.) 5. Kt to K B 8 5. P to Q 4 6. B to Kt 3 ■ 6. Kt to Kt 4 7. P to Q 4 7. Kt to K 3 And Black maintains his Pawn. THE KING'S BISHOP'S GAMBIT. 505 Variation (III.) On White's fourth move : — 4. P to Q 4 4. Kt takes P 5. Q B takes P 5. P to Q 4 With a Pawn ahead and a fine attack. The above analysis shows 3. Kt to K B 3 to be a strong and sound defence to the Bishop's Gambit. In fact, " theoretically" speaking, it is perhaps even stronger than the Bilguer Counter- Attack, although, "practically," we think the latter will be found most effective. White has apparently no more moves worth mentioning in reply to the Hanneken defence besides those we have already examined ; for 4. Q to K 2, given by Cozio, is obviously bad, and the move advised by Lopez, viz., Q to K B 3, merely facilitates the development of Black's game. GAME THE THIRD. WHITE. BLACK. 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 S. P to K B 4 3. P takes P 3. B to Q B 4 3. P to Q Kt 4 This Counter- Gambit, by some authors attributed to Kieseritzki, by others to Brien, although generally cons dered inferior, may be safely ventured. 4. B takes Q Kt P, or 4. Q to R 5 (ch) (A.), (B.) 5. K to B sq 5. B to Q Kt 2 (If 5. Kt to K B 3, see Illustrative Game V. between Anderssen and Kieseritzki ) 6. Kt to K B 3 „., . , . v a Kt t o Q B 3 (White may also get a good game by b. -=- „ ^ ^ U Q 2 5y6 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. I if 6. 10. S B to Q Kt 5 P toQ4 Kt to K B 3 Q takea Kt 13. Kt to R 4 PtoK 5 11. ^ PtoQ3 ■ B takes Kt PtoQ 5 ■ KttoK4 P to K Kt 4 P takes P en paaeant P take s B > KttoKXs^&c. S Kt to K B 3 9.: 12, Kt takes Kt K to Kt 2 BtoQ3~ 14. B takes P (ch), with the advantage.) B takes K P 6. Q to R4 7. B to Q B 4 7. Kt to K B 3 8. Q Kt to B 3 8. B to Q Kt 5 9. P to Q 3 9. B takes Kt 10. P takes B 10. P to Kt 4 11. Rto Q Ktsq 11. BtoB 3 12. P to K R 4 12. P to K R 3 13. K to Kt sq 13. P to Kt 5 14. Kt to Q 4, and White has the advantage in position. Diagram. WHITE. THE KING'S BISHOPS GAMBIT. bill The " Handbuch " now continues the game thus : — 14. Q to K 4 15. P to Kt 3 15. P to B 6 16. B to K B 4 16. Q to Q R 4 and declares the game even. We prefer White's position. (A.) 4. B takes K B P (ch) This sacrifice, although highly ingenious, is unsomid. 4. K takes B 5. Q to R 5 (ch) 5. P to Kt 3 6. Q to Q 5 (ch) 6. K to Kt 2 7. Q takes R 7. Q Kt to B 3 8. Kt to Q B 3 (best) White has two other moves at this stage, the consequences of which it will be well to show : — If Istly • 8 ^"0 K B 3 g PjoQ 4 P takes B ■BtoQB4 'KttoKBS ■QtoK2 j^j Castles .„ K to E sq Q takes P (ch) ' B to Q R 3, and Black has the better game, as White must now take R with Q, and be left exposed to a terrifto attack from the hostile pieces. If 2ndlv • 8 ?i2_9_i_ 9 ILt^o Qsq 10 PtoQ5 •^ ■ ■ Q to R 5 (ch) ■ B to Q R 3 ' B to Q B 4 with a very superior game. 8. Q to R 5 (ch) 9. K to Q sq 9. B to Q R 3 10. P to Q R 4 10. P to Kt 5 598 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. 11. Kt to Q 5 12. P to Q 4 And Black has the better game 11. B to Q 3 12. K Kt to K 2 Diagram, BLACK. WA r »,^,., » mm k 'M4 ^Bf I^ i ^-^MyZJM w^aWi n. ^ ^./.../^ WHITE. (B.) 4. B to Q Kt 3 This is also inferior to taking the Q Kt P. 4. P to Q E 4 Checking with Q is not so good for Black. ((See Illustrative Game VI.) 5. P to Q E 4 6. K to B sq 5. Q to E 5 (ch) 6. P to Kt 6 THE KIN(?B BISHOP'S GAMBIT. 599 7. Kt to K B 3 7. B to E 3 (ch) 8. P to Q 3 8. Q to B 3 With the better game. From the above analysis it will be seen that the Brien- Kieseritzki Counter- Gambit, with the best play, should yield the first player an advantage in position. GAME THE FOURTH. (the lopez-gianutio countee-gambit.) white. black. 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 2. P to K B 4 2. P takes P 3. B to Q B 4 3. P to K B 4 This move is noticed by Lopez and Gianutio, and has the recommendation of having been favoured by Philidor and Ercole del Eio. Von der Lasa and Jaenisch consider that it may be safely adopted. In fact, the former prefers it to the Hennecken Defence of 3. Xt to KB 3, but perhaps this estimate is overrated. 4. Q to K 2, or Variations (I.), (II.) This is White's best move, according to Philidor. Labour- donnais advises Kt to Q B 3, while Max L^nge suggests Kt to K R 3 at this juncture. For the result of these modes play of, see Variations (I.) and (II.) White would do badly to play 4. P takes P, 4. B takes Kt, or 4. P to Q 3, e.g.— Suppose, istly: 4. P^ke^ 5. |i^1 '^^ ' ' Q to E 5 (ch) P to B 6 o B takes Kt ,. K takes P D. i, P takes P (ck) Q to Kt 4 (ch), with much the better game. 600 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. , B takes Kt . Q t o R 5 (ch) „ Q takes B P ^""^^^ '■ ^- Wt^keiB' "■ PtoKt3 -RtoKta followed by P takes P, &o. , P to Q 3 - K to B sq g P takes P ^'^^y '• ^' Q checks "^^ Flakes P ' B to Q B 4 „ QtoK2 P to Q 3, with a Pawn more and a better position. To resume the main Variation : 4. Q checks 5. K to Q sq 5. P takes P 6. Q takes P (ch) 6. B to K 2 Neiunann recommends Kt to Q B 3 here for White, which may lead to the . ,, . ,. ,. „ Kt to Q B 3 „ B takes Kt „ Kt to Q 5 following contmuation : 6. .,^ =^- — 7. — — ^— a. -zr— — - — ® B to K 2 R takes B K to Q s(i Q takes K P ^^ Kt to K B 3 ^^ Q Kt tak es K B P, &c. ^' E to K sq ■ Q to R 4 7. P to Q 4 (best), or 7. Kt to K B 3 (A.), (B.) 8. Q takes P 8. Q takes Q 9. B takes Q 9. P to Q 4 10. B to Q 3 10. Q B checks 11. KttoK2 11. Q KttoB 3 12. P to Q B 8, and the game is even. (A.) 7. B takes Kt In the " Handbuch," p. 332, Mr. Staunton remarks "that White would appear to have a better game by taking off the Kt here." This we doubt, for suppose : 7. E takes B 8. Kt to K B 3 8. Q to B 3 9. Kt to Q B 3 9. P to Q B 3 10. K to K sq THE KING'S BISHOP'S GAMBIT. 601 This is the move suggested by Mr. Staunton, but suppose now: 10. P to Q 4 And we cannot see that White has any advantage. " La Strategie " gives 10. P to Q 4 for White, instead of R to K sq, as follows : — 10. P to Q 4 10. P to Q 4 11. Q takes B P 11. Q takes Q 13. B takes Q 13. B to K Kt 5 Even game. (B.) 7. Kt to K B 3 7. Q to K R 4 Q to Kt 5 seems also good play for Black. 8. E to K sq 8. Q Kt to B 3 9. B takes Kt 9. R takes B 10. Kt to Q B 3 10. K to Q sq And Black has a slight advantage. Vaei ATION (I-) On White's fourth move : — 4. Kt to Q B 3 • is move is considered weak by Jaenisch. 4. Q to R 5 (ch) 6. K to B sq 5. P takes P (best), or (C.) 6. Kt takes P 6. P to Q B 3 7. Q to K 2 7. K to Q sq 8. B takes Kt 8. R takes B 9. Kt to K B 3 9. Q to K 2 10. P to Q 4 10. P to Q 4 11. Q Kt to K Kt 5 11. P to K R 3 IS. Q takes Q (ch) IS. B takes Q 602 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. 13. Kt to B 7 (ch) 13. K to K sq 14. Q Kt to K 5 14. P to K Kt 4 And Black maintains the Pawn. The above able analysis is by Jaenisch, the greatest of all theoreticians. (C.) 5. Kt to K B 3 This is the move recommended by Lewis and Walker, and given also by Staunton (" Handbuch," p. 332), but condemned justly by Jaenisch, who proves conclusivelj^ its inferiority to 5. P takes P. 6. Kt to K B 3 6. Q to K E 4 7. P to K 5 7. Kt to K 5 8. Kt to Q 5 8. Kt to Kt 6 (ch) 9. K to Kt sq 9. Kt takes E 10. Kt takes P (ch) 10. K to Q sq 11. Kt takes E 11. Kt to Kt 6 15. P takes Kt . 13; P takes P 13. P to Q 4 13. B to K 2 14. B to K B 4 14. Q to Kt 5 15. Kt to Kt 5 15. Q takes B 16. Kt to B 7 (ch) 16. K to K sq 17. Q to Q 3 17. B to Q sq 18. Kt to Q 6 (ch), foUowed by E to K B sq, and White wins. Variation (II.) On White's fourth move : — 4. Kt to K E 3 Eecommended by Lange, but weak. THE KING'S BISHOPS GAMBIT. 603 4. Q to K R 5 (ch), or (D.) 5. Kt to B 2 5. P takes P 6. B takes Kt 6. R takes B 7. Q to K 2 7. P to Q 4 8. P to Q B 4 8. Kt to Q B 3 9. B P takes P 9. Kt to Q 5 10. Q takes P (ch) 10. Q to K 2 11. Q takes Q (ch) •11. B takes Q IS. K to Q sq 12. B to K R 5 And Black has much the better game. (D.) 4. Q to K 2 5. Kt to Q B 3 5. Kt to K B 3 6. Kt takes P 6. P to Q B 3 7. P to Q 4 7. P to Q 4 8. B to Q Kt 3 8. B P takes K P 9. Castles 9. B to K Kt 5 With the advantage. From the preceding Variations it will be seen that the old defence to the Bishop's Gambit of 3. P to K B 4 is quite sound, and leads to numerous positions of interest and difficulty. GAME THE FIFTH. WHITE. BLACK. 1. PtoK4 1. PtoK4 2. P to K B 4 2. P takes P 3. B to Q B 4 3. Q to R 5 (ch) We now amve at the old classical defence to this Gambit. 604 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. Although modern experience goes a long way to j)rove that its merits have been considerably overrated, and despite the fact that it is now rarely adopted, it leads to most intricate and complicated Variations, and abounds with interesting positions. 4. K to B sq 4. P to K Kt 4 5. Q Kt to B 3 As observed by Staunton (see " Praxis," p. 346), it makes but little difference whether White play 5. Q Kt to B 3, or 6. K Kt to B 3, or 5. P to Q 4, since all three moves will be played in succession, and the order is immaterial. Q Kt to B 8 is given as best by Jaenisch ; 5. Q to K B 3 — the move indi- cated by Cozio — is bad. 5. B to Kt 2 6. P to Q 4, or see Variation (I.) White may also play here 6. P to K Kt 3, for which see Variation (I.). 6. P to Q 3 7. Kt to K B 3, or see 7. Q to R 4 Variation (II.) 8. P to K R 4 8. P to K R 3 9- P to K 5 a. J^-to-K Kt 3, or (A.) 10. Q to K 2 10. K to Q sq Staunton pronounces this to be Black's best move, and gives the following Variation : — If 10 11 Kt to Q Kt 5 F to K E 5 Kt to K 2 ■ Kt to Q K 3 Q to B 4 ' 13. K P takes P, &c. 11- B to Q 3 11. B to K B 4 12. B takes B 12. Q takes B 13. K P takes P 13. Q B P takes P 14. R P takes P 14. P takes P THE KilSlU'B BISHOP'S GAMBIT. 605 15. R takes R 16. Kt to K 4 17. Q Kt takes K Kt P 18. Kt takes B 15. B takes R 16. K to Q 2 17. B takes Q P 18. Q takes Kt 19. Q to K 4, and Staunton saj's White has the better game, remarking that the " Leitfaden " and " Handbuch " give 19. Q to K B 3, -which seems inferior to Q to K 4. We do not think it much matters to which square the Queen is played, except that, as a rule, it is more advantageous in general positions to occupy a fourth than, a third square, and this may be a case in which the rule may hold good. This position being interesting, we continue the analysis a little further. 19. P to Q 4 (If 19. Kt to Q B 3 with a strong game.) 20. Q B takes P or 20. Kt takes Kt 606 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. SO. Q takes K B P 20. Q takes Q 21. Stakes Q 21. Q Kt to B 3 22. Kt to Q Kt 5 22. K Kt to B 3 23. E to Q sq 23. P to R 3 24. Kt to B 7 24. R to Q B sq 25. Kt takes Q P 25. Kt takes Kt 26. R takes Kt (ch) 26. K to K 3 27. R to Q 6 (ch) 27. K to B 4 28. B to Q 2, &c. 10. K Kt takes K P 11. Q Kt takes Q 12. B takes B 13. Kt to K Kt 6 14. R P takes P 15. P takes K R P. the Pawn (A.) 9. P takes K P 10. Q takes Q (ch) 11. B to K 3 12. P takes B 13. R to K R 2 14. B takes Q P Even game, White having recovered Vaeiation (I.) On White's sixth move : — 6. P to K Kt 3 This move is the invention of MacDonnell, and requires the greatest care in answering on the part of Black. 6. P takes P (best) 7. KtoKt2 7. QtoKR3 (If 7 _ 8 B, P takes P g Q to K B sq ■ptoQ3 ■ QtoKKt5 'QtoQa 10 Kt to K B 3 ,. Q to K B 2 ,„ P to Q 4 ■ P to K E 3 ■ P to Q B 3 ' Q to B 2 13 EtoQ2 B to K 3, witt the better game.) THE KING'S BISHOPS GAMBIT. 607 8. P takes P 8. Q to K Kt 3 (best) And Black is considered to have the advantage, on account of the exposed position of the White King. Vaeiation (II.) Beginning at White's seventh move : — 7. P to K 5 Given by Jaenisch, but Staunton prefers 7. Kt to K B 3. 7. P takes P 8. Kt to Q 5 8. K to Q sq 9. P takes P 9. B to Q 2 10. K Kt to B 3 10. Q to K E 4 11. B to Q 2 This is the Schulten attack. For Grimm's and Petroff's attacks, see Games the Sixth and Seventh. 11. Kt to K 2 (best) Black has four other apparently plausible moves here — viz., Q Kt to B 3, P to Q B 3, P to K R 3, and K to Q B sq ; but they are aU really bad. (See " Handbuch," p. 446.) IS. B to Q B 3 IS. K R to K sq 13. Kt takes Kt 13. E takes Kt 14. Q to Q 5, and the game is even. GAME THE SIXTH. (geimm's attack.) As no analysis of the Bishop's Gambit can be considered complete without noticing these two interesting branches of the opening, we extract the following important Variations from the "Praxis." 608 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. WHITE. BLACK. 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 2. P to K B 4 2. P takes P 3. B to B 4 3. Q checks 4. K to B sq 4. P to K Kt 4 5. Q Kt to B 3 5. B to Kt 2 6. P to Q 4 6. P to Q 3 7. P to K 5 "We think 7. Kt to KB 3, as advised by Staunton, is stronger move here. 7. P takes P 8. Kt to Q 5 8. K to Q sq 9. Kt to K B 3 9. Q to K E 4 10. P to K E 4 10. P to K E 3 Black can obtain the advantage here by playing 10. Kt to K 2, according to the " Praxis.' } 11. K to Kt sq 11. Q to Kt 8 12. Kt takes K P 12. QtoB4 13. Q to K E 5 13. B takes Kt (If 13. ^ B to K 3 ,. P takes P j5 Q takes R ■ P takes P ■ B takes Q jg R takes B j, B to Q 3 ^o Kt takes Q P to K B 3 Q takes B B takes Kt jj, BtakesKBP „q Kt takes P „, Q R to K sq, and P takes B ■ B to K B 2 wins. 14. P takes B 14. P to Q B 8 15. B to Q 2 15. P takes Kt 16. B takes Q P 16. Q Kt to B 3 17. P takes P 17. B to K 3 18. B takes B 18. P takes B 19. Q E to K B sq 19. Q takes Q B P 20. B takes P 20. Q to B 4 (ch) 21. K to E 2 . 21. Kt takes KP 22. P to Kt 6, and wins. THE KING'S BISHOP'S GAMBIT. 609 GAME THE SEVENTH. (PETROFP'S ATTACK.) WHITE. 1. P to K 4 2. P to K B 4 3. B to Q B 4 4. K to B sq 5. Q Kt to B 3 6. P to Q 4 7. P to K 5 8. Kt to Q 5 9. Q P takes P 10. Kt to K B 3 11. P to K E 4 12. K to Kt sq 13. E P takes P 14. E takes E 15. K Kt takes K Kt P BLACK. 1. P to K 4 2. P takes P 3. Q checks 4. P to K Kt 4 5. B to Kt 2 6. P to Q 3 7. P takes P 8. K to Q sq 9. B to Q 2 10. Q to K E 4 11. PtoKE3 12. Q to K Kt 3 13. E P takes P 14. B takes E This move constitutes the "Petroff" attack, which is well nigh irresistible. Walker considei.j it " one of the finest things in Chess," and Staunton says "it deprives Black of all. chance of doing more than draw the game. Black, however, may avoid all this trouble by simply playing on his ninth move B to K Kt 5— a move that not only relieves him from all apprehension of this terrible attack, but also actually gives him a strong attacking game. The subjoined diagram shows the position to which we refer. 610 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. Diagram. BLACK. WHITE. 16. Q B takes P 17. P to K 6 18. Kt takes Q B F 19. K to R sq 20. Q to Q 6 21. QEto Q sq 22. Kt takes R 15. Q takes Kt 16. Q to K B 4 17. P takes P 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. Q to B 4 (ch) Q takes B PtoK4 P takes B Kt to K 2 23. Q takes Q Kt (chj, and Petroff thinks the gamt should ultimately be drawn. Suppose now — 23. Kt to B sq 24. Q takes Kt P 24. Q to K B 2 25. Q to B 7 (ch) 25. K to K sq 26. R to K sq (ch) 26. K to B sq 27. Q to Q B 5 (ch) THE KING'S BISHOP'S GAMBIT. 6U E to K B sq would be unavailing, on account of Q to R 4 (ch), followed by B to Q 5, &c. 27. Kt to K 2 And the result would probably be a draw — • For if 28 ^ takes R P ^„ K to Kt sq, &c. ' Q to K R 4 (ch) And if 28. 5^A2 P to B 6, &c. Of the several defences which we have examined to the Bishop's Gambit the last is the least advisable, since Black can only obtain at most a drawn game, with the greatest nicety of play. The following Illustrative Games weU exemplify the various defences to this fine opening. We must not omit to notice a new system of attack introduced by Mr. Zukertort, which will be found in Illustrative Game VII. GAMES ILLUSTRATIVE OF THE KING'S BISHOP'S GAMBIT. Game I. — Between Messrs. Andeessbn and Dubois. (From the " Book of the Congress.") White (Mr. Anderssen). Black (Mr. Dubois). 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 2. P to K B 4 2. P takes P 3. B to Q B 4 3. P to Q 4 4. P takes P 4. Q to K R 5 (ch) (a) 5. K to B sq 5. P to B 6 (b) 6. B to Q Kt 5 (eh) 6. P to B 3 7. K Kt takes P 7. Q to B 3 (c) The following Notes are by the Author. (a) Very bad play, although suggested by Falkbeer. {See Paul Morphy, by Max Lange. Translated by Falkbeer, p. 323.) (6) See preceding note. (c) Q to Q Kt 5 might perhaps yield Black more resource, although he would even then get a bad game from the following continuation :— 7. Q to Q Kt 5 8. Qto K2 (ch) followed by 9. P takes P, &c. 612 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. 8. P takes P 8. P takes P 9. B to K 2 9. B to Q 3 10. P to Q 4 10. Kt to K 2 11. B to K Kt 5 11- Q to Kt 3 12. P to Q B 4 12. P to K B 3 13. B to Q 2 13. Castles 14. Kt to Q B 3 14. B to K B 4{d) 15. P to Q B 5 15. B to Q B 2 16. Q to Kt 3 (oh) 16. K to R sq 17. Q to Kt 7 17. B to Q 6 18. Q takes B 18- Kt to Q 4 19. Q to K Kt 3 19- Kt takes Kt 20. P takes Kt 20 Q to K 5 21. B takes B 21. Q takes B (ch) 22. K to B 2 22. Kt to Q 2 23. K R to K sq 23. Kt to K 4 (e) 24. P takes Kt 24. P takes P 25. K to Kt sq 25. P to K 5 26. BtoR6(/) 26. P takes B 27. Q to K 5 (ch) 27. K to Kt sq 28. R takes P 28. R to B 3 29. Q takes R 29. Q takes R 30. R to K sq 30. Q to K Kt 3 31. Q takes Q (ch) 31. P takes Q 32. R to K 6 And Black resigned. Game II. — Between Messrs. MoNGtREDiEN and Deacon. (From the " Book ot the Congress.") White (Mr. Mongredien). Black (Mr. Deacon). 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 2. P to K B 4 2. P takes P 3. B to Q B 4 3. P to Q 4 4. P takes P (a) 4, B to Q 3 (6) (d) Evidently a mistake, since it involves the loss of a piece. (e) Black struggles hard to recover himself ; but it is of no use against White's accurate as well as brilliant play. (/) Played in masterly style, and leading to an artistic finish. The subjoined Notes are by the Author. (a) We concur in the opinion of Mr. LiJwenthal, who prefers this move to B takes P, as advised by many other authorities. (b) Kt to K B 3 here leads also to an equal game. THE KING'S BISHOPS GAMBIT. 613 5. Kt to K B 3 5. Kt to K 2 (c) 6- Kt to Q B 3 6. Castles 7- Castles 7. Q Kt to Q 2 ^- P *° Q "* 8. Kt to Q Kt 3 9. B to Q Kt 3 9. B to K Kt 5 10. Q Kt to K 2 10. Q Kt takes Q P (d) "•Pt°QB4 11. QBtakesKt 12. K R takes B 12. Kt to K 6 13. Q B takes Kt 13. p takes B 14. P to Q B 5 14. B takes R P (ch) 15. K takes B 15. Kt to K Kt 3 16. E takes K P 16. P to Q B 3 17. Q to Q 3 17. Q to B 2 (ch) 18. K to E sq 18. Q R to K sq 19. Q E to K B sq 19. r takes E 20. Q takes R 20. K to R sq 21. B to Q B 2 21. Kt to K 2 22. Kt to K B 4 22. Q to Q 2 23. Kt to K 6 (e) 23. R to Kt sq 24. E takes K B P 24. Kt to Q 4 25. Q to K E 3 And Black resigned. Game III. — Between Messrs. Gossip and Longman Played by Gorrespondence. White (Mr. Gossip). Black (Mr. Longman). 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 2. P to K B 4 2. P takes P 3. B to B 4 3. P to Q 4 4. B takes P 4. Kt to K B 3 5. Kt to K B 3 5. Kt takes B 6. P takes Kt 6. Q takes P 7. Q Kt to B 3 7. Q to K 3 (ch) 8. K to B 2 8. K to Q sq 9- P to Q 4 9, B to Q 3 (c) The correct move at this point is B to K Kt 5. (d) A misconception that loses a game which should have been drawn in probability, {i) The best move. 614 THE CHESS-PL A. YER'S MANUAL. 10. K R to K sq 11. KttoQ5 12. R to K 5 13. P takes B 14. Q B takes P 15. B to K Kt 5 (ch) 10. Q to K B 3 11. QtoKB4 12. B takes R 13. B to Q 2 14. P to Q B 3 And Black resigned. Game IV. — Between Messrs. Moepht and Anderssen. "White (Mr. Anderssen). 1. P to K 4 2. P to K 3 4 3. B to Q B 4 4. P to K 5 5. B to Kt 3 6. Kt to K B 3 7. Castles 8. B to R 4 9. B takes Kt (ck) 10. P to Q 4 11. P to B 3 12. P to Q Kt 4 13. P takes P 14. Q to Kt 3 15. P to Q R 3 16. Kt to B 3 17. Q takes Kt 18. P takes P 19. Q to Q 3 20. P to R 4 ?1. P takes P 22. P to Kt 3 23. R to R 2 24. R to K Kt 2 25. P to K 6 26. P takes P (ch) 27. K takes B 28. Kt to K 5 29. P takes P 30. P takes P Black (Mr. Morpky). 1. PtoK4 2_ P takes P 3. Kt to K B 3 4. PtoQ4 5. Kt to K 5 6. B to K Kt 5 7. Kt to Q B 3 8. P to K Kt 4 9. P takes B 10. P to Q B 4 11. Bto K 2 12. P takes Kt P 13. Castles 14. R to Q Kt sq 15. P to Q B 4 16. Kt takes Kt 17. P takes Kt P 18. B takes P 19. P to Q R 4 20. P to R 3 21. P takes P 22. R to Kt 3 23. R to K Kt 3 24. B to K R 6 25. B takes R 26. K to Kt 2 27. g to Q B sq 28. R to K R 3 29. K R to R sq 30. R to R 7 (ch) THE KING'S BISHOP'S GAMBIT. 31. K to Kt sq 31. R to R 8 (ch) 32. K to B 2 32. K R to R 7 (ch) 33. K to K 3 33. R to R 6 (ch) 34. Kt to B 3 34. R takes Kt (ch) 35. R takes R 35. Q takes B (ch) And mates in two moves. 615 Game V. — Between Messrs. Andeessen and Kieseritzki. White (Mr. Anderssen). Black (Mr. Kieseritzki). 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 2. P to K B 4 2. P takes P 3. B to Q B 4 3. P to Q Kt 4 (a) 4. B takes Q Kt P 4. Q to R 5 (ch) 5. K to B sq 5. Kt to K B 3 (c,) 6. Kt to K B 3 6. Q to K R 3 7. P to Q 3 7. Kt to K R 4 8. Kt to K R 4 8. P to Q B 3 9. Kt to K B 5 ' 9. Q to K Kt 4 10. P to K Kt 4 10. Kt to K B 3 11. R to K Kt sq (c) 11. P takes B 12. P to K R 4 12. Q to Kt 3 13. P to K R 5 13. Q to Kt 4 14. Q to KB 3 14. Kt to K Kt sq (d) 15. B takes P 15. Q to K B 3 16. Kt to Q B 3 16. B to Q B 4 17. Kt to Q 5 (e) 17. Q takes Q Kt P 18. B to Q 6 (/) 18. B takes R 19. P to K 5 19. Q takes R (ch) 20. K to K 2 20. Kt to Q R 3 21. Kt takes Kt P (ch) 21. K to Q sq 22. Q to K B 6 (ch) 22. Kt takes Q 23. B to K 7— mate (a) This was a favourite counter-gambit of Kieseritzki's, and may be safely ventured. (i) The proper move here would have been B to Q Kt 2. (c) Quite sound, as will be seen by the sequel. (d) The only move to save the Queen. (e) The attack is carried on in charming style. (f) A. " coup de mailre." If noW 18. 19. Q takes R (ch) 20. Kt takes P (ch), and mates next move. KtoK2 Q takes R 616 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. Game YL— Between Messrs. Andbessen and Mongrbdien. White (Mr. Mongredien). Black (Mr. Anderssen). 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 2. P to K B 4 2. P takes P 3. B to Q B 4 3. P to Q Kt 4 4. B to Kt 3 (a) 4. Q to R 5 (ch) 5. K to B sq 5. B to Q B 4 6. P to Q 4 6. B to Kt 3 7. P to Q B 3 (b) 7. Kt to K 2 8. Kt to K B 3 8. Q to E 4 9. B takes P 9. P to K B 4 10. Q Kt to Q 2 10. K E to B sq 11. P toK5 11. BtoQ Kt2 12. Q to K sq 12. P to K E 3 13. B to Q sq 13. Q to B 2 14. B to Q Kt 3 . 14. Kt to Q 4 15. P toK E4 15. Q to K R 4 16. B takes Kt 16. B takes B 17. B, to fi 3 17. Kt to Q B 3 18. PtoQE4 18. P takes P 19. R takes P 19. B to K 5 20. Kt takes B 20. P takes Kt 21. Q takes P 21. Q to K Kt 5 22. P to Q 5 22. Kt to Q 5 23. P to y 6 23. P to B 3 24. P takes Kt (c) 24. E takes B 25. Q to Q 3 25. K to B sq 26. K to Kt sq 26. KtoKtsq 27. K to R 2 27. R to K 5 28. P to Q Kt 3 28. Q E to K B sq 29. R to Kt 3 29. QtoB4 30. Q to Q 2 30. Q to K 3 31. R to Q B 4 31. QRtoKB5 32. Q to Q 3 32. Q to Q 4 33. P to R 5 33. Q to K B 2 34. R to R 3 34. Q R to K Kt 5 And the game was drawn after a few more moves. a) "Weak play ! The correct move is 4. B takes Kt P. B takes K B P is unsound. (J) Again weak. Why not 7. Kt to K B 3 at once ? (c) Once more inefficient play on the part ot White. R takes Kt must have secured the victory. THE KING'S BISHOP'S GAMBIT. 617 Game \1J.— Between Messrs. Steinitz and Zukeetort. White (Mr. Zukertort). Black (Mr. Steinitz). 1. P to K 4 1. p to K 4 2. P to K B 4 2. P takes P 3. B to Q B 4 3. P to Q 4 4. B takes P 4. Q to R 5 (ch) 5. K to B sq 5. P to K Kt 4 6. Kt to Q B 3 6. B to K Kt 2 7. P to Q 4 7. K Kt to K 2 8. Kt to K B 3 8. Q to E 4 9. P to K R 4 9. P to K R 3 10. K to Kt sq 10. P to K Kt 5 11. Kt to K 5 (a) 11. B takes Kt 12. P takes B 12. Q takes P (6) 13. Q to K B sq 13. P to K B 6 (c) 14. P takes P 14. Q to K Kt 6 (cli) 15. Q to Kt 2 15. Q to K 8 (ch) 16. Q to K B sq (d) And the game was drawn. Game VIII. — Between Messrs. Macdonnell and Labourdonnais. White (Mr. Macdonnell). Black (M. Labourdonnais). 1. PtoK4 1. PtoK4 2. P to K B 4 2. P takes P 3. B to B 4 3. Q to R 5 (ch) 4. K to B sq 4. P to Q 3 5. P to Q 4 5. B to K Kt 5 6. Q to Q 3 6. Kt to Q B 3 7. B takes P (ch) 7. K takes B (a) This is a novelty. In similar positions it is usual to retreat the Kt. (M Tf 12 13 lil" Q KL? j^ Q to B sq ^ P to Q B 3 ■ Q takes P ' Kt to K Kt 3, with the advantage. (c) Black's best play, ensuring a draw. He would have gained nothing by checking with Q : e.ff.,— Suppose 13. ,, , , ij , !*■ n 7T — W7\.\ ^ ^ " ' '^ QtoQ5 (ch) Q takes Q (ch) K„t akes Q ,„ K to B 3 , and White regains the Fawn, and will win P checks another. {d) This game is another instance of the difficulty for Black of doing more than draw after checking with Q at E 5. 618 THE CHESS-PLAYEK'S MANUAL. 8. Q to Q Kt 3 (ch) 8. K to Kt 3 9. Q takes Q Kt P 9. Kt takes Q P 10. Q takes R 10. Kt to K B 3 11. Kt to Q K 3 11. P to K B 6 12. P to K Kt 3 12. B to K E 6 (ch) 13. K to K sq 13. Q to K Kt 5 14. B to K 3 14. P to Q 4 15. Q takes Q R P 15. Kt to Q B 3 16. Q takes Q B P 16. P to Q 5 17. B to Q 2 17. Q takes K P (ch) 18. K to Q sq 18. P to K B 7, and wins. Game IX. — Between Messrs. Gelbfuhs and Rosenthal. Played at the Vienna Tourney. (From the " Wflstminster Papers.") White (Herr Gelbfuhs). Black (Mr. Rosenthal). 1. P to K 4 1. PtoK4 2. P to K B 4 2. P takes P 3. B to B 4 3. P toQ4 4. B takes Q P 4. Q to R 5 (ch) 5. K to B sq 5. P to K Kt 4 6. Kt to Q B 3 6. B to Kt 2 7. Kt to K B 3 7. Q toR4 8. P to Q 4 8. Kt to K 2 9. P to K E 4 9. P to K R 3 10. P to K 5 10. Kt takes B (a) 11. Kt takes Kt 11. Kt to R 3 (6) 12. Q to K 2 12. P to Q B 3 13. Kt to B 6 (ch) 13. B takes Kt 14. P takes B (dis ch) 14. BtoK3 15. P to Q 5 (o) 15. P takes Q P Notes by Mr. Wisher. (a) These moves for the defence are now considered the best that can be adopted. In this view I concur. But here Mr. Rosenthal deviates from the accepted course, and gets into trouble. 10. Q Kt to B 3 is the best play at this point. The Bishop at Q 5 then remains weak, and Black threatens B to K Kt 5, and Castles on Q side. (6) This piece is now out of play. (c) Well plaved, with the immediate result of winning the game, THE KING'S BISHOPS GAMBIT. 619 16. Q to Kt 5 (ch) 16. K to Q sq 17. Q takes Kt P 17. Kt to B 2 18. B to Q 2 18. E, to Q B sq 19. QtoKt4 19. RtoKsq 20. Q to Q 6 (ch) 20. B to Q 2 21. Kt to K 5 21. R takes Kt 22. Q takes E 22. Kt to K 3 23. B to R 5 (ch) 23. E to B 2 24. Q takes Q P 24. K to K sq 25. B takes R 25. Kt takes B 26. Q to Q 6 26. B to Kt 4 (ch) 27. K to Kt sq 27. Q to K 7 28. K to R 2 28. Q to K 6 29. K R to K sq 29. B to K 7 30. R takes B 30. Q takes R 31. Q takes Kt 31. Resigns Game X. — Between Messrs. Burn and Gossip. (From the "Illustrated London News.") White (Mr. Bum). Black (Mr. Gossip). 1. P to K 4 (a) 1. P to K 4 2. P to K B 4 2. P takes P 3. B to B 4 3. P to Q 4 4. P takes P 4. Q to K R 5 (ch) 5. K to B sq 5. B to Q 3 6. Kt to K B 3 6. Q to K R 4 7. K to B 2 (6) 7. P to K Kt 4 8. R to K sq (ch) 8. Kt to K 2 9. K to Kt sq 9. P to K Kt 5 10. Kt to Q 4 10. B to Q B 4 (c) Notes by Mr. Staunton. (a) The following game has many critical and interesting points. (b) This is an unusual, but by no means a bad, move. (c) "What was the objection to advancing the Pawn to B 6 ? That move looks terribly menacing. Suppose, 10. 11. r .f y. P takes P , 2 K to B sq "1 L ' Q takes P (ch) ' P takes P, and Black ought to win, we think / j^ -,„ K takes P P to B 7 (ch) ' Q takes P (ch), and the second player appears to have a winning advantage. 6.20 THE CHESS-PLAYEK'S MANUAL. 11. P to Q B 3 11. P to K B 6 12. P to Q 3 12. P to K Kt 6 13. Q takes P 13. Q takes P (ch) 14. K to B sq 14. Castles 15. BtoK3 15- KttoKKt3 16. Kt to Q 2 16. Kt to K 4 (d) 17. Q to K 4 17. Kt to K Kt 5 18. B to K Kt sq 18. Q to K R 4 19. Q to K B 3 19- Kt to K E 7 (oi) 20. B takes Kt 20. B to K Kt 5 21. Q takes K Kt P 21. B to Q 3 22. Kt to K 4 22. B takes Q 23. Kt to B 6 (ch) 23. K to E sq 24. B takes B 24. B to K 7 (ch) (e) (E) 25. E takes B 25. Q to K E 8 (ch) 26. K to B 2 26. Q takes Q E 27. B to K 5 27. P to K E 4 28. Kt to K B 5 28. Kt to Q E 3 29. E to K sq 29. Q takes P (ch) 30. K to B 3 30. E to K Kt sq 31. Kt takes P (dis ch) 31. K to E 2 32. Kt to K B 4 32. E takes P 33. Kt takes E 33. P to K B 3 34. E to K E sq (ch) 34. K to Kt 3 35. Kt to K B 4 (ch) 35. K to B 2 36. R to E 7 (ch) 36. K to K sq 37. B takes K B P 37. Q to Q E 6 38. Kt to K 6 38. E to Q B sq 39. P to Q 6 And Black resigned. (d) Kt to K R 4, followed by B to K K 6, looks threatening ; hut Mr. Burn had a satisfactory rejoinder in B to K Kt sq. we believe. (e) Mr. Gossip marks this move as "bad." It is not easy, however, to see what he could do that would have saved him. (E.) Note by the- Author. We believe Black could have now not only extricated himself from his diffi- culties, but obtained the better game by playing liere Q to K Kt 3 instead of the move made. The position will well repay examination. Suppose — 2- 25 1^ to K 5 26 Kt takes B (dis eh) ' Q to K Kt 3 ' P to K K 4 ' P to B 3, Ac, and if 26 K.t t o Q 7 (dis ch) g^ Kt takes R ■ P to B 3 ■ Q to K B 2 CHAPTEE XIX. THE GAMBIT DECLINED. GAME THE FIEST, WHITE. BLACK. 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 2. P to K B 4 S. P to Q 4 This may be considered Black's best move, inasmuch as it usually leads to a very strong counter-attack, which requires great care in answering. The "Handbuch" declares it to be Black's best reply. The second player can also move 2. B to Q B 4, which is often played {see Game the Third) ; or he may refuse the Gambit, with perfect safety, by playing 2. Kt to K B 3 — a move advised by Ercole de Eio, and recom- mended by Boden, but condemned by " La Strategic." {See Game the Fourth.) 3. Kt to K B 3 3. P takes Q P is usually played here, for the consequences of which see Game the Second and Illustrative Games. 3. P takes K P is obviously bad. 3. Q P takes P (best) Bto K 2 g Kt takes P g Q takes B (^^ ^- B to K Kt 5 ■ P takes KP or (aj " B takes B ' Kt to K B 3 7. Q Kt to B 3 , with a fine game. (a) ^ B takes B g P takes K P ■ B takes Kt ' Kt to K B 3 Kt takes P 7. Castles, with a good game.) 622 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. 4. Kt takes P, 4. Q B to K 3 (best) This is considered by Max Lange to be Black's best move. „ . . B to Q B 4, and White has the supe- ■ Kt to K B 3 riority. Again, ■rj. . ^ Q to K E^5. followed by Kt takes B P or ■ B to Q B 4 Kt P, if advanced, with the advantage. 5. Q Kt to B 3 5. Kt to K B 8 /jj 5 g Q to K R 5 (eh) h. Kt takes K Kt P ^ 'PtoKBS 'PtoKKtS 'BtoKBa 8. Q to Q Kt 5 (ch) , with a winning attack. And if 5 Q check s _ » Kt takes K Kt P ■ptoKB4 ^'PtoKKtS "BtoKBa g Q takes KB? g Q t o K 5 (ch) ^^ Q takes R • ■ B takes Kt ' Q to K 2 ' Kt to K B 3 j^ P to K Kt 4 ^2 PtoB5 ^^ P takes B ■ Kt to Q 2 ■ Castles ' B to Kt 2 14 Q ta kes R (ch) K takes Q, and the " Handbuch " prefers Black's game. 6. Q to K 2 6. B to K B 4 7. Q to Q Kt 5 (ch) 7. Q Kt to Q 2 8. B to Q B 4 8. B to K 3 9. Kt takes Q Kt 9. B takes Kt 10. Q takes Q Kt P, with a pawn ahead, and the better game. The above moves occurred in a game between Messrs. Max Lange and Rinne. If Black now plays 10. P to Q B 3, White replies with 11. Q to Q Kt 3, maintaining the attack ; and if he moves 10. R to Q Kt sq, White can capture the Q R P ; and if then 11. R to Q Kt 3, 12. Kt to Q R 4, &c. THE GAMBIT DECLINED. 623 GAME THE SECOND. WHITE. 1. P to K 4 S. P to K B 4 3. P takes Q P BLACK. 1. P to K 4 S. P to Q 4 3. P to K 5 (If firstly : 3. P takes K B P, White can turn the game into a Bishop's Gambit by playing 4. B to Q B 4, the same position occurring in that opening by the following transposition of moves : — ^ PtoK4 2 P t o K B 4 g B to Q B 4 ^ P takes P PtoK4 "P takes P ' P to Q 4 and we arrive at the position in the subjoined diagram : — Diagram. BLACK. i ^ i « iTi m. %M I f*i ^p mm p ^mS. W^A. mw/M. WHITE. In this Variation of the Bishop's Gambit, White can obtain a winning 624 THE OHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. position should Black now venture to check with his Queen at K il 5, as follows : — „ , , K to B sq „ B to Q Kt 5 (ch) ^"^PP"^^ ■ "• Q^^Ry(ch) '• PtoKB 6 '• PtoQBS y Ktjakes P g Q to K 2 (ch), followed by P takes P, and Qto"QKt5 Wliite has a Pawn ahead and a good position. The best move for Black in this situation appears to be 4. B to Q 3, and the following continuation is given in the German " Handbuch " : — KttoKB^S g Castles ^ P to Q 4 ■ B toK Kt 5 ■ Kt to K 2 ' Q Kt to Q 2 g B to Q Kt 3 g P to Q B 4 ^^ Kt to Q B 3 ■ P to K Kt 4 ■ P to Q Kt 3 ' Castles ^^ Kt to K 4 P to K B 3, and the game is pronounced to be even. We would take White's game for choice. White can also play on his fourth move in answer to 3. P takes K B P 4. Kt to K B 3 ) but to us 4. B to Q B 4, which, as explained above, resolves the game into a Bishop's Gambit, seems stronger play (se« preceding variations). Staunton gives the following continuation : — ^ Kt to K B 3 5 P to_Q^, followed by P to Q B 4 or ■ Q takes P 5. Q Kt to B 3, with the advantage. Black is not, however, compelled to capture Pawn with Queen on his fourth move, and can apparently equalise the game by moving 4. B to Q 3. If secondly : 3. 4. QJ^t5_B_3 Q takes P Q to K 3 or Q sq, and Black has lost time. To return to the main Variation : 4. P to Q 3 This move is recommended by Heydebrand, but White has also no less than four other moves at his disposal at this juncture— f/0., Kt to Q B 3, Q to K 2, B to Q Kt 5 (ch), or B to Q B 4, for the result of which see Variations (I.), (II.). (III.), and (IV.). 4. Q takes P jf 4 5 Q to K 2, w ith a good game. ■ B to Q B 4 THE GAMBIT DECLINED. 625 5. Q Kt to B 3 5. B to Q Kt 5 6. Q to Q 2 6. Q to K 3 7. P takes P 7. B takes Kt 8. Q takes B 8. Q takes P (ch) 9. K to B 2 9. Kt to K B 8 10. B to Q 3 10. Q to Q B 3 11. Q takes Q 11. Kt takes Q 12. Kt to K B 3, and the game is quite even. Vaeiation (I.) On White's fourth move : — 4. Kt to Q B 3 4. Kt to K B 3 5. P to Q 3 White may also play here Q to K 2. (See Illustrative Game IX.) 5. B to Q Kt 5 6. B to Q 2 6. P takes K P is not so good : e. g. — Suppose : 6. PtateK P ^ Q to Q^ g_ Ptakes B ^^ Kt takes K P B takes Kt (ch) Castles g Kt to K B .3 ^Q Bto K2 R to K sq P to Q B 4, with the advantage, since White is now compelled to capture the Pawn in passing, his Queen having other- wise no safe retreat, upon which Black can exchange Queens, and then post his Knight at Q B 6. Q. P to K 6 7. B takes P 7. Castles 8. K Kt to K 2 10. BtoK2 /j£ g B toQ 2 g P takes B 'B takes Kt ' R to K sq (ch) ""BtoKKt8 11 ^ to Q B 4 j2 P to K R 3 -^^ Kt takes B ^^ P takes P ■ P to Q B 3 ' B takes B ' P takes P ' Q takes P 1 5, Castles, even game.) 626 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. 8. R to K sq 9. B to Q 2 9. B takes Kt 10. B takes B 10. Kt takes P 11. Qto Q2 11. Kt to K 6 IS. B to K 5 12. Kt takes B 13. E takes Kt 13. P to K B 3 14. B to Q B 3 14. B to K Kt 5 15. R to K B 2 15. QtoQ4 16. K to B sq 16. Kt to Q B 3 17. Kt to K Kt 3. Even game, White's extra Pawn compensating him for his inferiority of position. Variation (II.) On White's fourth move : — 4. Q to K 2 4. Kt to K B 3 5. Q Kt to B 3 5. Kt takes Q P ,j.^ 5 g Q to Q Kt 5 (ch) or Kt to K B 3 , with ^ ■ BtoKKtS the advantage.) 6. Q takes K P (ch) 6. Q to K 2 7. Q takes Q 7. Kt takes Q 8. Kt to Q Kt 5, 01- B to Q B 4, and White has the better game. Variation (III.) On White's fourth move : — 4. B to Q Kt 5 (ch) According to the Berlin " Schachzeitung " this is White's best move, and Mr. Staunton recommends it in the " Praxis," p. 3©2. The following, however, appears bad for White : 4. P to Q B 3 5. P takes P 5. P takes P THE GAMBIT DECLINED. 627 6. B to Q B 4 6. Kt to K B 3 7. P to Q 4 The above moves occur in a game between Messrs. Horwitz and Kolisch. " La Regence," p. 363, thinks White's game is now to be preferred, making the following note : — " Bien que les Blancs aient un Pion de plus, le jeu de leur adversaire est preferable." 7. K B to Q 3 This move is advised by Falkbeer, and was adopted with success by Kohsch. Black can also play here 7. Q Kt to Q 2, which is given as best by Staunton and the " Schachzeitung," or 7. Q to Q Kt 3. „ K Kt to K 2 „ B to Q Kt 3 (If 7. Q Kt to Q 2 Kt to Q Kt 3 B to Q R 3 ^Q QKttoQBS j^ Oastles ^2 P takes B ■ BtoQKt5 ■ KB takes QKt ' K Kt to Q 4 , „ R to K sq , „ 13. 3 or 13. Castles P to K B 4, and the " Handbuch " considti s the game in White's favour if Black adopts the latter move. If, however, he Castles, as suggested by Staunton, White's advantage appears very trifling. It may be noticed in this variation that White on his eighth move can play 8. Q B to K 3 instead of Kt to K 2, as played by Max Lange. 8. Kt to K 2 9. Castles Black may also play 9, here 9. Q K Kt to Q 8. Castles 9. B to K Kt 5 t to Q 2, thus :— ^^ B to Kt 3 Q Kt to Q 2 with a good game. 10. Q Kt to B 3 11. P to K R 3 12. Kt takes B 13. B to Q Kt 3 14. P takes P Kt 3 P to Q B 4 10. Q Kt to Q 2 11. B takes Kt IS. Kt to Q Kt 3 13. P to Q B 4 14. B takes P (eh) s s 2 628 THE CHESS-PLAYEB'S MANUAL. The above moves actually occurred in a game between Messrs. Horwitz and Kolisch. The former, who played the White men, now moved 15. K to E 2 — a gross blunder — and of course, lost the game. The correct play here is — 15. K to E sq; but still Black has a strong attack. Diagram Showing the position after White's fifteenth move. BLACK. M ft y i "W. i tt^^ i i i ^^?«- wmm i m. m ■fmM^.(^ WHITE. Vabiation (IV.) On White's fourth move 4. B to Q B 4 5. Q Kt to B 3 4. Kt to K B 3 5. B to Q Kt 5 (best) In a game between the Author and Mr. Mocatta, in the match played between the City of London and Westminster THE GAMBIT DECLINED. 629 Chess Club, in 1870, the latter gentleman, who had the Black men, moved here 5. B to Q 3, which is also a good move, and was played by Mr. Burn — the well-known amateur— in a game against the Author. [See Illustrative Game XIV.) 6. K Kt to K 2 7. Castles 8. P to Q 4 9. P takes Q B P 10. B to K 3 11. B to Q Kt 3 IS. R P takes Kt 13. P takes B 14. B to Q 2 15. B to K sq 6. B to K Kt 5 7. Castles 8. P to Q B 3 9. Q Kt takes P 10. Kt to Q R 4 11. Q Kt takes B 12. K B takes Q Kt 13. Kt to Q 4 14. P to K 6 15. Q to Q B 2 And Black regains the Pawn, with a much superior position. {See diagram below.) Diagram. BLACK. WHITE . 630 THE CHESS-PLAYEE'S MANUAL. GAME THE THIED. WHITE. BLACK. 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 2. P to K B 4 2. B to Q B 4 This move we consider inferior to P to Q 4. White can now advantageously turn the game into a Variation of Hampe'c opening, by bringing out his Queen's Knight, thus : — 3 Q Kt to B 3 ^ Kt to K B 3 ^ P takes P P to Q 3 (best) ■ B to K Kt 5 ' P takes P B to Q Kt 5 ( cb) ^ B to Q B 4 g R to K B sq P to Q B 3 ■ Q Ktto Q 2 ' Kt to K B 3 g P to K B 3 , „ O takes B , with a fine game. B takes Kt This Variation occurred ia a game in the match between the Author and Mr. J. Gocher. {See "The Queen's Knight's Opening," Chapter XXVII.) 6. 3. Kt to K B 3 3. P to Q 3 or (A.) 4. P to Q B 3 4. B to K Kt 5 5. B to K 2 (bes 5. B takes Kt 6. B takes B 6. Kt to Q B 3 7. P to Q Kt 4 7. B to Q Kt 3 8. P to Q Kt 5 8. Q Kt to K 2 9. Pto Q 4 9. P takes Q P (best) 10. P takes P, and White is said to have the better game, but it is not easy for him to maintain his centre Pawns. At his ninth move in the above Variation, Black can play 9. P takes K B P, without any marked disadvantage. {See Illustrative Game XL) (A.) 3. Kt to Q B 3 4. P takes P 4. Kt takes P 5. P to Q 4 This move was first played by Zukertort. If 5. K t takes Kt ^ P to Kt 3 Q to K 2 ■ Q to R 5 (ch) ■ Q takes K P (ch) Q takes R THE GAMBIT DECLINED. 631 8. 11. PtoQ4 BtoK2 Kt to K B 3 PtoQ3 Q Kt to Q 2 , and White has the better game. 10. BtoKj_ B to K Kt 5 5. Kt takes Kt (ch) 6. P takes Kt 7. K to K 2 8. Kt to B 3 9. B to K 3 10. Q to Q 2 11. R to K sq IS. K to Q sq IS. Castles (Q R) The " Handbuch " now aeclares the game even, but the Editor of the "Westminster Papers" considers that White has a far superior game, on account of his strong centre, his well-developed pieces, and the open file for his Rooks. We append a diagram, to enable the student to study the position. 6. Q to R 5 (ch) 7. B to Q Kt 3 8. PtoQ3 9. Kt to K 2 10. P to K R 3 11. B to Q 2 BLACK. m//M WHITE. 632 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. GAME THE FOURTH. WHITE. BLACK. 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 2. P to K B 4 3. Kt to K B 3 This move is quite sound, and gives the second player a perfectly even game, but it is seldom adopted. If White play 3. P takes P, the Black Knight gets well established at K's 5 by 3. Kt takes K P. 3. P takes P White can turn the game here into a Variation of the Queen's Knight's Opening, by playing 3. Q Kt to B 3 (for which see Queen's Knight's Opening), instead of 3. P takes P, as recommended in the Books. 3. Kt takes K P 4. Kt to K B 3 (best) 4. P to Q 4 And the game appears to be even. GAMES ILLUSTRATIVE OF THE GAMBIT DECLINED. Game I. — Between Messrs. Anderrsen and Dubois. White (Mr. Anderssen). Black (Mr. Dubois). 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 2. P to K B 4 2. P to Q 4 (o) (a) The actual game as played was a Bishop's Gamhit ; but since the position after White's seventh move is exactly the same as that which occurs in the Gambit ■, T T .. . -i- c 1, • , , P to K 4 „ P to K B 4 dechned, the transposition or moves bems merely 1. 2. -— ' ^ " P to K 4 P takes P B to Q B 4 ^ P takes P g Iv to B sq g B to Q Kt 5 (eh) ■ P to Q 4 ' Q to R 5 (ch) 'PtoBe ' PtoQBS 7. Kt takes P we have transposed the moves as an exemplifioation of the opening. 3. P takes Q P 4. B to Q B 4 5. K to B sq 6. B to Q Kt 5 (ch) 7. Kt takes P 8. P takes P 9. BtoK2 10. PtoQ4 11. B to K Kt 5 12. P to Q B 4 13. BtoQ2 14. Kt to Q B 3 15. P to Q B 5 16. Q to Q Kt 3 (ch) 17. Q to Q Kt 7 18. Q takes B 19. QtoKKt3 20. P takes Kt 21. B takes B 22. KtoB2 23. K R to K sq 24. P takes Kt 25. K to Kt sq 26. B to R 6 (/) 27. Q to K 5 (ch) 28. R takes P 29. Q takes R 30. R to K sq 31. Q takes Q (ch) 32. EtoK6 THE GAMBIT DECLINED. 633 3. P takes K B P 4. Q to K R 5 (ch) 5. P to K B 6 (6) 6. P to Q B 3 7. Q to K B 3 (c) 8. P takes P 9. B to Q 3 10. Kt to K 2 11. Q toK Kt3 12. P to K B 3 13. Castles 14. B to K B 4 (d) 15. B to Q B 2 16. K to R sq 17. B to Q 6 18. Kt to Q 4 19. Kt takes Kt 20. Q to K 5 21. Q takes B (ch) 22. Kt to Q 2 23. Kt to K 4 (e) 24. P takes P 25. P to K 5 26. P takes B 27. K to Kt sq 28. E to K B 3 29. Q takes R 30. Q to K Kt 3 31. P takes Q And Black resigned. (b) This is a weak move, although recommended by Falkbeer. (See "Morphy's Games," Max Lauge's edition, p. 323.) (c) If 7. Q to Q Kt 5 then 8. Q to K 2 (oh), followed by P takes P with a Pawn ahead, and a capital game. (d) A mistake that loses a piece. (e) This is merely desperate. (/) Leading to a brilliant termination. 634 THE CHESS-PL A YEE'S MANUAL. Game U.— Between Messrs. Mongrbdien and Deacon. White (Mr. Mongredien). 1. PtoK4 2. P to K B 4 3. P takes Q P 4. B to Q B 4 5. Kt to K B 3 6. Kt to Q B 3 7. Castles 8. P to Q 4 9. B to Q Kt 3 10. Q Kt to K 2 11. P to Q B 4 12. R takes B 13. B takes Kt 14. P to Q B 5 15. K takes B 16. K R takes K P 17. Q to Q 3 18. K to R 3(1 19. Q R to K B sq 20. Q takes R 21. B to QB 2 22. Kt to K B 4 23. Kt to K 6 24. R takes K B P 25. Q to K R 3 Black (Mr. Deacon). 1. P to K 4 2. P to Q 4 3. P takes K B P B to Q 3 (a) Kt to K 2 Castles Q Kt to Q 2 8. Kt to Q Kt 3 9. B to K Kt 5 10. Q Kt takes Q P (6) 11. Q B takes Kt Kt to K 6 P takes B B takes P (ch) Kt to K Kt 3 P to Q B 3 17. Q to B 2 (ch) 18. Q R to K sq 19. R takes R 20. K to R sq 21. Ktto K 2 22. Q to Q 2 23. R to K Kt sq 24. Kt to Q 4 4. 5. 6. 7. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. And Black resigned. Game 111.— Between Messrs. Schulten and Kolisch. White (Mr. Schulten). Black (Mr. KoUach). i. P to K 4 2. P to K B 4 3. P takes Q P 4. Q Kt to B 3 5. P to Q 3 6. B to Q 2 1. P to K 4 2. P to Q 4 3. P to K 5 {a) 4. K Kt to B 3 5. B to Q Kt 5 6. P to K 6 {a) Far better play than checking with the Queen at R 5, as in the preceding game. (6) K Kt to K Kt 3 would have been preferable. (a) This move is now considered preferable to taking Pawn with Queen. THE GAMBIT DECLINED. 635 7. B takes P 7. Castles 8. K Kt to K 2 (6) 8. R to K sq 9- B to Q 2 9. B takes Kt 10. B takes B 10. Kt takes P 11. Q to Q 2 11. Kt to K 6 12. B to K 5 12. Kt takes B 13. R takes Kt 13. P to K B 3 14. B to Q B 3 14. B to K Kt 5 15. R to K B 2 15. Q to Q 4 16. K to B sq 16. Kt to Q B 3 17. P to K R 3 (c) 17. B takes P 18. P takes B 18. R takes Kt 19. K takes R (cJ) 19. R to K sq (oh) 20. B to K 5 20. Kt takes B 21. Q to K 3 21. K to B 2 22. Q to K Kt 3 22. Kt to Q B 5 (dis ch) 23. K to B sq 23. y to K R 8 (ch) 24. Q to Kt sq 24. Q takes P (ch) 25. R to K Kt 2 25. Kt to Q 7 (ch) 26. K to B 2 26. Q to B 6 mate Game TV.— Between Messrs. Schulten and Morpht. White (Mr. Schulten). Black (Mr. Morphy). 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 2. P to K B 4 2. P to Q 4 3. K P takes Q P 3. P to K 5 4. Kt to Q B 3 4. Kt to K B 3 5. P to Q 3 5. B to Q Kt 5 6. B to Q 2 6. P to K 6 7. B takes P 7. Castles 8. B to Q 2 8. B takes Kt (i) In a game between Messrs. Schulten and Morphy, the former played here 8 B to Q 2, which is hardly so good as the move in the text, vide next game. (c) Up to this point Mr. Schulten has conducted the game with great care. Here, however, he relaxes in vigilance. Kt to K Kt 3, followed by P to K K 3 afterwards, would have given him a good game. (d) If Queen or Kook takes R, then Q to K E 8 (ch), &c. Still, we believe 19. R takes R would have been better than the move made, e.g. : Suppose — 19. RtSkesJ 20. l^t^JA (for if 20. Q to K R 8 (ch) Q takes R (best) Q to R 7 (ch), "White may draw) 21. Q to K 3 , and White has resource laft. 636 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. 9. 10. P takes B BtoK2 9. R to K sq (ch) 10. B to K Kt 5 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. P to Q B 4 (a) P takes P (6) K to B sq Kt takes R Q to Q Kt sq K toB2 11. PtoQBS 12. Q Kt takes P 13. R takes B U. Kt to Q 5 15. B takes Kt(ch) 16. Kt to Kt 5 (ch) 17. K to Kt sq (c) And Black forced mate in seven moves. Diagram BLACK. (a) If 11. P to K K 3 Black replies by 11. Q takes P. (6) Bad! Suppose 12. 15. Castles. Even game. (c) Thus: 17. K to R 3 P to K R 3 B takes B 18. 20. Kt to B 6 (ch) Kto R4 Q takes P (ch) 21. Kt to K 6 13. K t takes B P takes P 14. P takes P Q takes P P t akes Kt Q to Q 6 (ch) „„ Q or R to K Kt sq jg K to Kt 2 (host) Q to B 7 (ch) Kt to B 4 (ch), and mates next THE GAMBIT DECLINED. 637 Game Y.— Between Messrs. Blackburne and Puller, the former playing mine other games at the same tinu " blindfold." White (Mr. Blaokbume). Black (Mr. Puller). 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 2. P to K B 4 2. P to Q 4 3. K P takes Q P 3. P to K 5 4. Q Kt to B 3 4. Kt to K B 3 5. P to Q 3 5. B to Q Kt 5 6. B to Q 2 (a) 6. K P takes P (6) 7. B takes P 7. Castles 8. K Kt to K 2 8. B to K Kt 5 9. Castles 9. B takes Q Kt 10. B takes B 10. Kt takes P 11. Q to Q 2 11. R to K sq 12. B to Q 4 12. Kt to Q B 3 13. BtoKB2 13. KKttoQKtG 14. Kt to Q B 3 14. Kt takes B 15. Q takes Kt 15. Kt to Q Kt 5 16. Q to K Kt 3 16. B to K 7 17. Kt takes B 17. E takes Kt 18. P to Q B 3 18. Kt to Q B 7 19. Q R to Q sq 19. Q to K 2 20. P to K B 5 20. P to K B 3 21. Q to Q 3 21. Q R to K sq 22. Q to Q 5 (ch) 22. K to R sq 23. Q to Q 3 23. Q to K 5 (c) 24. Q takes Q 24. K R takes Q 25. R to Q 2 25. Kt to K 6 26. K R to K sq 26. P to K R 4 27. Q R to K 2 27. Q R to K 4 28. R takes Kt 28. R takes R 29. R takes R 29. R takes K B P 30. R to K 7 30. R to Q Kt 4 31. P to Q Kt 4 31. P to Q R 4 32. P to Q R 3 32. P takes Q Kt P 33. R P takes P 33. R to Q 4 34. B to Q 4 34. P to Q B 3 (a) P takes P can also be played here, as advised by Mr. Steinitz, when the game may be continued as follows ; — 6. 7. - — r^^i^ ,, ' Kt takes K P B takes Kt (oh) P takes B g Kt to K B 3 or B to K 2, &c. (See Game VI.) *• Castles (6) P to K 6 is much stronger. (c) This loses a piece, and eventually the game. 638 THE CSESS-PLAYEE'S MANUAL. 35. R takes Q Kt P 36. R to Q B 7 37. KtoB2 38. R to Q 7 39. B to B 5 40. R to Q 6 41. B takes R 42. K to K 3 43. B to B 5 44. B to Q 4 45. K to Q 3 46. B to B 2 47. P to B 4 (ch) 48. K to Q 4 49. P to Q Kt 5 50. P takes P 37. 38. 39. 40. 35. R to Q sq 36. R to Q 3 Bto K3 K to Kt sq P to K Kt 3 R takes R 41. K to B 2 42. K to K 3 43. K to Q 4 44. K to K 3 P to K B 4 KtoQ4 K to Q 3 KtoK3 P takes P 45. 46. 47. 48. 49. And Black resigns. Game VI. — Between Messrs. Steinitz and MacDonnell. White (Mr. Steinitz). Black (Mr. MacDonnell). 1. P to K 4 1. Pto K4 2. P to K B 4 2. P toQ 4 3. P takes Q P 3. P toK 5 4. Q Kt to B 3 4. K Kt to B 3 5. P to Q 3 5. B to Q Kt 5 6. P takes K P 6. Kt takes K P 7. Q to Q 4 7. B takes Kt (ch) 8. P takes B 8. Castles 9. Kt to K B 3 9. R to K sq 10. B to K 2 10. Kt to K B 3 (a) 11. PtoQB4 11. B to K Kt 5 12. Q to Q 3 12. P to Q B 3 13. Castles 13. P takes P 14. P takes P 14. Kt takes Q P 15. P to K R 3 15. BtoQ2 16. Q takes Kt 16. R takes B 17. Kt to K 5 17. Q to K B 3 (6) 18. Q to Q 3 18. R takes Kt 19. P takes R 19. Q takes P (a) P to Q B 4 instead would have given Black the day. His failing to per- ceive this denotes either great want of perception or great carelessness. (6) Q to Kt 3 (ch) might have been played here more advantageously perhaps. THE GAMBIT DECLINED. 639 20. B to Q R 3 20. Q to Q B 2 21. RtakeaKBP (c) 21. Q to Kt 3 (ch) 22. K to E sq 22. K takes R 23. E to K B sq (ch) 23. Q to K B 3 24. Q to Q 5 (ch) 24. K to Kt 3 25. E takes Q (ch) 25. P takes R 26. Q to K Kt 8 (ch) 26. KtoB4 27. B to Q 6 And Black resigned. Game VII. — Between Messrs. De RivitBE and Journoud. White (Mr. de Riviere). Black (Mr. Journoud). 1. P to R 4 1. P to K 4 2. P to K B 4 2. P to Q 4 3. K P takes Q P 3. P takes K B P 4. Kt to K B 3 (a) 4. Q takes P 5. Kt to Q B 3 5. Q to Q sq 6. P to Q 4 6. B to Q 3 7. BtoQB4 7. Kt to K B 3 8. Castles 8. Castles 9. Kt to K 5 9. B takes Kt 10. P takes B 10. Q takes Q 11. E takes Q 11. Ktto K Kt5 12. Q B takes P 12. Q Kt to B 3 13. Q Kt to Q 5 (b) 13. Q B to K 3 14. K E to K sq 14. K R to K sq 15. P to K R 3 15. K Kt takes K P 16. B takes Kt 16. B takes Kt 17. B takes B 17. Kt takes B 18. B takes Q Kt P 18. Q R to Kt sq 19. B to Q 5 19. Q R takes P 20. B to Q Kt 3 20. P to Q B 4 21. Q R to Q sq , 21. K to B sq 22. B to Q R 4 22. R to K 3 23. Q R to Q 8 (ch) 23. K to K 2 (c) This leads to a pretty termination. (a) Instead of this more the first player can advantageously turn the game into a Bishop's Gambit by playing here B to Q B 4. (b) In the notes to this game by Mr. Journoud, he remarks that K E to K sq would have been the best move at this juncture. 640 THE CHESS-PLAYEE'S MANUAL. 24. Q R to K 8 (ch) 24. K to B 3 ?5. K R to B sq (ch) 25. K to Kt 3 26. Q R to Q B 8 26. P to Q B 5 27. Q R to Q B 7 27. P to Q E 3 28. K R to Q R sq 28. Q R to Q Kt 5 29. B to Q 7 29. K E to Q 3 30. B to Q B 8 30. Q R to Q Kt 7 31. P to K Kt4 31. K to K Kt 4 32. Q R to Q B 5 32. P to K B 3 33. Q R to Q B 7 33. Q R takes Q B P 34. Q R takes P (ch) 34. K to B 5 35. B to Q Kt 7 35. Kt to K B 6 (ch) 36. B takes Kt 36. K takes B 37. Q R to K B 7 37. K to Kt 6 38. P to Q R 4 38. P to Q B 6 39. Q R to Q B 7 39. K R to Q 7 And White resigned. Game Ylll.— Between Messrs ,. Blackbdrne and Steinitz, played at the Baden Tourney. White (Mr. Steinitz). Black (Mr. Blackbume). 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 2. P to K B 4 2. B to Q B 4 (a) 3. Kt to K B 3 (6) 3. P to Q 3 4. B to Q B 4 4. Kt to K B 3 5. P to Q 3 5. Kt to Q B 3 6. P to Q B 3 6. Castles 7. B to Q Kt 3 7. B to K Kt 5 8. P to K B 5 8. P to Q 4 0. P to K E 3 9. B takes Kt 10. Q takes B 10. P takes P 11. P takes P 11. Q to Q 3 12. B to K Kt 5 12. Q R4o Q sq 13. B to Q B 2 13. P to K R 3 14. B to Q B sq 14. K to R 2 (c) {a) This is hardly so good a way of refusing the Gambit as 2. P to Q 4, since the first player can now turn the game into a variation of the Queen's Knight's opening, which is unfavourable to Black, by bringing out his Queen's Knight on the next move. (J) See the preceding note. (c) The commencement of a clever combination. THE GAMBIT DECLINED. 641 15. P to K Kt 4 15. K R to E sq 16. Kt to Q 2 16. P to Q Kt 4 17. Kt to Q Kt 3 17. P to Kt 5 18. B to Q 2 18. P takes P 19. P takes P 19. Kt to Q R 4 20. Castles (Q R) 20. Kt to Q B 5 21. K to Kt sq 21. Q to Q R 3 22. B to B sq 22. B to Q R 6 23. K to R sq 23. B takes B 24. R takes B 24. Q to R 6 25. R to Q Kt sq 25. R to Q 3 26. R to R 2 26. R to Q Kt sq {d) 27. B to Q 3 27. Kt to R 4 28. Kt takes Kt 28. Q takes B P (ch) 29. K R to Kt 2 29. R takes R 30. R takes R 30. R takes B 31. Q to K 2 31. R to K 6 And White resigned. Game IX. — Between Messrs. Steinitz, Medley, Ranken, and Forsteh consultmg against Messrs. Lowenthal, Db Veee, and Kennedy. White (Messrs. S. M. R. & F.) Black (Messrs. L. D. V. & K.) 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 2. P to K B 4 2. P to Q 4 3. P takes Q P 3. P to K 5 4. Q Kt to B 3 4. K Kt to B 3 5. Q to K 2 5. B to K 2 6. Kt takes P 6. Kt takes P 7. P to Q 3 7. Castles 8. B to Q 2 8. P to K B 4 9. Kt to Q B 3 9. B to K R 5 (ch) 10. K to Q sq 10. Kt to Q B 3 11. P toKKtS 11. BtoKB3 12. B to K Kt 2 12. K Kt to Q Kt 5 13. Kt to K B 3 13. R to K sq 14. Q to K B 2 14. Q Kt to Q 5 15. R to Q B sq 15. B to K 3 16. Kt takes Kt 16. B takes Kt (d) The whole of this game is conducted with great ability by Mr. Blackburne, 542 THE OHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. 17. Q to K B 3 17. P to Q B 3 18. R to K sq 18. QtoQ3 19. P to Q R 3 19. Kt to Q 4 (a) 20. R takes B (b) 20. Q takes R 21. Kt takes Kt 21. P takes Kt 22. P to Q B 3 22. B to B 3 23. Q takes P 23. QRtoQsq 24. Q takes Q (oh.) 24. R takes Q 25. P to Q 4 25. rtoQKt4 Drawn game. Game X. — Between Messrs. Morpht and Lowdnthal. White (Mr. Morphy). Black (Mr. Lowenthal). 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 2. P to K B 4 2. B to Q B 4 3. Kt to K B 3 3. P to Q 3 4. P to Q B 3 4. B to K Kt 5 5. B to Q B 4 (a) 5. B takes Kt 6. Q takes B 6. Kt to K B 3 7. PtoQKt4(6) 7. B to Q Kt 3 8. P to Q 3 8. Q Kt to Q 2 9. PtoKB5 9. Q to K 2 10. P to K Kt 4 ]0. PtoKRS 11. K to K 2 11. P to Q B 3 12. P to K Kt 5 12. P takes P 13. Q B takes P 13. P to Q 4 14. B to Q Kt 3 14. Q to Q 3 15. Kt to Q 2 15. P to Q R 4 16. P takes R P 16. Q R takes P (c) 17. P to K R 4 17. Kt to K R 4 18. Kt to K B sq 18. Kt to Q B 4 19. B to Q B 2 19. Q R to Kt 4 (d) (a) B takes Kt is also a good move here. (6) By giving up the exchange, White relieve themselves from their difBculties. (a) B to K 2 is a better move here. (6) This is not a good move, and ought to give Black the advantage, as in fact it does in tlie present game. (c) Black has up to this point conducted his game with great energy, and has now a decided advantage in position. (d) Q R to Q K 6 would also have been a good move here. THE GAMBIT DECLINED. 643 20. B to Q B sq 21. Q P takes P 22. Q B takes R 23. K to K sq 24. K B takes Kt 25. K to Q 2 26. K to Q B 2 27. Kt to Q 2 28. KttoKtsq 20. Q P takes P 21. Q R to Kt 7 ( i m^A wwy. ■ f ^„'^ rj 1 i^^ _ /.^ / /// E^ mm.. WHITE. (A.) 4. Kt to K B 3 Staunton considers this to be Black's best move. We are of opinion that it is decidedly inferior to 4. Kt takes Kt. Retreat- ing the Knight to Q 3 is, of course, out of the question, e. g. :— 4 g B to Kt 3 g Q to K 2 ^ Kt to Q 4, &e. ■ Kt to Q 3 ■ P to K 5 ■ Q to K 2 5. Kt takes P 6. B to Kt 3 5. P to Q 4 6. B to K 2 THE KING'S BISHOP'S OPENING. 661 This is given as Black's best move by Lowenthal. Staunton gives B to Q 3 and 7. P to Q 4 for White, and prefers White's position. Lowenthal continues the game as follows : — ■ 7. P to Q 4 7. Castles 8. Castles, and considers the game even. Diagram. BLACK. (B.) 4. 5. 6. 7. P to Q 4 Kt to K B 3 B to Q 3 Castles 6. B takes P 6. B to Kt 3 7. P to Q 3 8. P to K E 3 8. P to K E 3 9. B to K 3. Even game. This Variation is not noticed in the "Praxis." 662 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. (C.) 6. KttoKE4. 6. P to K Kt 3 (best 7. Castles 7. Q to K 2, followed by P to Q B 3, and "White's attack is exhausted, in the opinion of Mr. Lowenthal. (D.) 7. Kt to Q 4 7. Q to B 4 8. Q to K 2 8. P to Q 4 And we prefer Black's game. White, in this position, has apparently only three feasible moves. As the position is highly interesting, we submit the following original Variations : — If firstly ■ 9 '^^°^^^ ("'^^ 10 ^ ^^ Q ^t 4 or (a) ■^ ■ ■ P to B 3 Q takes B P, and wins. (a) ^Q BtoQ3 P to K Kt 3, and Black, although somewhat cramped, has a perfectly safe game. Ifsecondly: 9. B_to_.Q3 10. ^^ to Kt 5 •' P to K Kt 3 or (b) Kt to Q R 3 jj B to K B 4 P to K 5, &c. (b) 9. P to K 5, and again we prefer Black's position. Ifthirdly:9. Li^Li^S ^^KttoQKtS •^ B to K 2 P to Q R 3, &c. (E.) 7. E to K sq This move was first adopted, we believe, in actual play by Mr, Gocher in a match against ourselves. It appears more forcible than the move suggested by Mr. Lowenthal — viz., 7. Kt to K R 4 {see " Games of the Chess Congress," p. 45), THE KING'S BISHOP'S OPENING. 663 the consequences of which have been akeady noticed and shown to be unfavourable to White. 8. B to K Kt 5 9. B to K E 4 10. B takes B 11. Kt to Q 4 7. P to Q B 3 8. P to Q 3 9. B to K 3 10. Q takes B 11. Q to K B 2 With a Pawn ahead and a safe game. For further analysis of this Variation, see " Petroff's Defence," Parti., Chapter III. of the Present volume — Illustrative Game V. between Mr. Gocher and the Author. The foregoing analysis clearly demonstrates White's fourth move, Q Kt to B 3, to be unsound, although recommended by Smiegielskiin the " Schachzeitung " (1856, p. 153), and favoured by Staunton and Boden. The authorship of this move is attributed by some writers to Kieseritzki. Diagram. 664 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. Variation (I.) Beginning at White's fourth move :— 4. Kt takes P (weak) 4. P to Q 4, or (a) 5. Q to K 2 This move is recommended hy Jaenisch. " The " Hand- buch " does not notice it, but gives instead B to Q Kt 3, a move favoured by Allgaier, but which appears to us not so good, e. g. :— 5. E to Kt 3 „ Qto K 2 Q to K Kt 4 Q takes Kt or Q takes Kt P, and Black wins a Pawn, and ought, with common care, to win the game easily. 5. P to Q 3 i9, of course, out of the question for White, and if g Kt takes K B P g Q to K 2 ^ B ta kes Q P ■ Q to K 2 ■ Q takes Kt " Q takes B, &c. 6. B to Q B 4 6. P to Q 3 e. B takes P (ch) 7. K to B sq 7. B to Kt 3 8. B to Kt 3 8. Q to K 2 (best) 9. B takes Q P 9. Q takes Kt 10. Q talies Kt 10. Q takes Q 11. B takes Q 11. Castles And Black's game is preferable. THE KING'S BISHOP'S OPENING. Diagram. i i i „ wmm .„„ »ii^ i i i ^/////// ^ ^^/. (a.) 4. Q to K 2 This move, played by Bledow, appeal's also to give Black the advantage. 5. P to Q 4 6. B takes P (ch) 7. Castles 8. P takes P (dis ch) 9. B to Q 5 10. P to Q Kt 4 11. P takes Kt 12. Q takes P With the better game. 5. P to Q 3 6. K to Q sq 7. P takes Kt 8. B to Q 2 9. Kt to Q B 4 10. P to Q B 3 11. P takes B IS. Kt to Q B 3 666 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. Vaeiation (II.) Beginning ; at White's 5 fourth move : — 4. P to Q 3 4. Kt to K B 3 5. Kt takes P 5. P to Q 4 6. B to Kt 3 6. B to Q 3 7. P to Q 4 7. Castles 8. Castles 8. P to B 4 9. P to B 3 9. Kt to B 3 And the game is even. Variation (III.) Beginning at White's foui-th move : — 4. Q to K 2 4. P to Q 4 5. Kt takes P 5. K B to B 4 6. P to Q 3 This is justly preferred to Castling by Staunton. {See " Handbook," p. 82.) ,jj. g Castles y B to Kt 3 g P to Q 3 Castles R to K sq Kt takes K B P, with the advantage.) 6. B takes P (ch) ,jf „ „ Kt to B 6 (dis ch), &c.) Kt takes B P Black may, however, get a good game by playing 6. P takes B^, as pointed out by Mr. Staunton in his elaborate anatysis, into which we have not space to enter {see " Handbook," pp. 84, 85), where he indicates the correct mode of play for Black, which the German authorities had failed to perceive. 7. K to Q sq 7. B to Kt 3 8. Kt takes K B P 8. B to K Kt 5 9. Kt takes Q - 9. B takes Q (ch) 10. K takes B 10. Kt to B 7 THE KING'S BISHOP'S OPENING. 667 11. R to B sq 11. P takes B 12. Kt to K 6 12. P takes P (ch) 13. P takes P 13. K to K 2 14. Kt takes Kt P 14. R to Kt sq And the game is about even. GAME THE SECOND. (PONZIANl's ATTACK IN THE KNIGHt's DEFENCE TO THE KING's bishop's OPENING.) WHITE. BLACK. 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 2. B to B 4 2. Kt to K B 3 3. P to Q 4 This Gambit, the invention of Ponziani, is generally con- sidered unsound. Staunton is of opinion "that it may be adopted with perfect security, if not with any striking advan- tage." Calvi also recommends it in the " Palamede " of 1842. Jaenisch, on the contrary, condemns it, and Walker also con- siders it inferior. {See "Art of Chess Play," 1846, p. Ill, 4th edition.) 3. P takes P (best) ,jj; „ . P takes P - B takea P (ch) ^ ■ Kt takes P * B to B 4 " K to B sq 6. Q to B 3, with the advantage. If, in this Variation, Black play 4. Kt to Q B 4 to avoid 5. B takes P (ch), he geta a bad position, as pointed out by Jaenisch.) 4. Pto K 5 (best), or (A.) 4. P to Q 4 (best) 5. B to Kt 3 The "Handbuch" gives also— B to Q Kt 5 (cli) g B takes B ,ch ) ^ Q takes P B to Q 2 ■ K Kt takes B ' Kt to Q B 3 and Black has the advantage. 668 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. 6. Kt to K 2 (best) (If 6. Kt to K B 3 B to Kt 5 (ch) g Q B takes P B to K 3, &c.) 5. Kt to K 5 P to B 3 P takes P Castles P takes P 6. P to Q B 4 Diagram BLACK. I i. i W/////m f ^i^f m ^Asi. .^,,^/^iy wm i i m ,„ €/ m ^ t i :%^ Staunton considers, rightly enough, Black to have now much the better game. {See "Praxis," p. 272. Game between Messrs. Heydebrand and Staunton.) 7. P to K B 3 This is given by the " Handbuch," the " Handbook," and THE KING'S BllSHOJ:"S OPENING. 669 Jaenisch ; but we prefer Castling, as played by Von der Lasa in the game above alluded to. 8. Kt to K B 4 9. B to E 4 (ch)' 10. B takes Kt (ch) 11. Q takes P 12. Kt takes Kt 13. Castles 7. Kt to K Kt 4 8. P to Q B 5 9. Kt to B 3 10. P takes B 11. Kt to K 3 12. P takes Kt 13. P to Q B 4 Jaenisch now makes White play 14. Q to B 2, as follows : — P to B 4 ^4 QtoB2 P to Q 5 15. QtoQ4 and considers Black has the better game. Staunton, how- ever, suggests 14. Q to K Kt 4 as a better move for White, and there can be little doubt of this from a glance at the position. Let the student play out the moves from the above diagram. (A.) 11, 4. Q takes P 5. Q to K 3 Clf 5 Q to her sq ^ ' Kt takes K P Q takes Kt B to Kt 5 (ch) Kt to K B 3 4. Kt to Q B 3 6. B takes P (ch) K takes B „ K to B sq R to K sq P to K E 3, with the better game.) B to Q 2 (best) 7 Q to Q 5 (ch) K to B 3 10 Q to B 4 (c h) ■ K to Kt 3 5. B checks P toB3 BtoB4 Kt to K B 3 B to Kt 3 " (If 6. 10. B to K 3, and White has an uncomfortably cramped game.) Q toB4 Castles Castles P to Q 3 6. Castles 670 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. Mr. Staunton remarks here {see " Handbook," p. 223), that White has no disadvantage. This is very questionable. P'or our own part, we vastly prefer Black's position. The following continuation is from " La Strategie" : — 7. Kt to K 2 7. P to Q 4 8. B takes P 8. Kt takes B 9. P takes Kt 9. R to K sq 10. P takes Kt 10. R takes Q 11. P takes R 11. BtoQB4 With a winning position. The Ponziani attack must, therefore, be dismissed as unsound, inasmuch as in every Variation Black ought, with correct play, to obtain the advantage. GAME THE THIRD. (the geeco gambit in the knight's defence to the king's bishop's opening.) white. black. 1- P to K 4 1. P to K 4 2. B to B 4 2. Kt to K B 3 3. P to K B 4 This move, although censured byCalvi— "le Calabrois"— ' may be safely made, and leads to an even game. 3. P to Q 4 (best) (If 3. 4 P t°_Q 3 or (a) P to Kt 3 Kt takes P ■ Q to li 5 (eh) ' Kt takes P g Kt to K B 3 y RtoJCtsq R_to K^ B t akes P (eh) Q to R 4 ■ Kt to B 4 ' Q toR 6 K tateB 10. RI2JLM 11 R takes Kt(ch) R to Kt 5, with QtoKtV • KtoKsq the better game.) THE KING'S BISHOP'S OPENING. 671 (a) 4. Q to K B 3. This is given by Jaenisch, but is obviously inferior. 4 5 P toQ3 g Q takes Kt ^ Q take s P (ch) ■ PtoQ4 ■ P takes B ' P takes Q P ' B to K 2 and Black has the advantage. 4. P takes Q P 4. P takes B P The same position occurs in the Bishop's Gambit. (See our Analysis of that opening, Part II., Chapter XVIII.) 5. P to Q 4 5. B to K Kt 5 6. Kt to K B 3. Even game. GAME THE FOUETH. WHITE. BLACK. 1. P to K 4 i. P to K 4 2. B to Q B 4 2. Kt to K B 3 8. P to Q 3 This is considered weak by Jaenisch. We think it should lead to an even game. 3. P to Q 4 Instead of this, Staunton gives the following continuation for Black:— 4. Kt to K B 3 g P to Q B 3 BtoQB4 PtoQ3 Castles g P to Q R 4 P to Q E 4, even game. 4. P takes P 4. Kt takes P Followed by P to K B 4, with a good game. 672 THE CHESd-PLAYER'S MANUAL. Diagram. BLACK. 1 :4i i :•# i ',,. :j'/M;., _0/M///y//A l^'ll W,^i__i^Bi., i^m i 2^ ,^';:# «s 1^ WHITE. GAME THE FIFTH. WHITE. 1. P to K 4 S. B to Q B 4 3. Q Kt to B 3 BLACK. 1. P to K 4 2. Kt to K B 3 This move is wrongly condemned by " La Strategic." In our opinion, it is, perhaps, the very best move at White's dis- posal, inasmuch as it reduces the opening to a Vaiiation of the Vienna Game, or Queen's Knight's Opening, in which the first player, with correct play, should always obtain a very strong position. The game is resolved into the Queen's Knight's or THE KING'S BISHOP'S OPENING. 673 " Hampe's " Opening by the following transposition of moves : — 1. PtoK4 2 Q Kt to B 3 K Kt to B 3 P to K 4 5. Kt takes Kt or 5. Q to R 5 (ch). 3 B to Q B 4, Black cannot on account of 4. Biake^(ch) K takes B GAMES ILLUSTRATIVE OF THE KING'S KNIGHT'S DEFENCE. Game I. — Between Messrs. Boden and Harrwitz. White (Mr. Boden). Black (Herr Harrwitz), :.. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 2. B to B 4 2. Kt to K B 3 3. Kt to K B 3 3. Kt takes K P 4. Kt to Q B 3 4, Kt to K B 3 5. Kt takes P b. P to Q 4 6. B to Kt 3 6. B to Q 3 7. P to Q 4 7. P to B 3 8. Castles 8. Castles 9. B to K Kt 5 9. P to K R 3 10. B to K R 4 10. B to K B 4 U. P to KB 4 11. BtoK2 12. B takes Kt 12. B takes B 13. Q to B 3 13. Kt to Q 2 14. P to K Kt 4 14. B to K R 2 15. Q R to Q sq 15. B takes Kt 16. Q P takes B 16. Q to R 5 17. Q to Kt 8 17. Q R to K sq 18. R to B 3 18. PtoKB4 19. P takes P 19. B takes P 20. E to Kt 3 20. K to R sq 21. Kt to K 2 21. B to K 5 - 22. Q to R 3 22. Q to K 2 23. P to B 3 23. Kt to B 4 24. KRtoKS 24. Kt to K 3 25. Q R to K B sq 25. Q to B 4 26. Q R to B 2 26. K to R 2 27. R takes B 27. Kt to Kt 4 X z 674 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. 28. Q to Kt 2 28. Kt takes R 29. B to B 2 29. R to K B 4 30. B takes Kt 30. P takes B 31. Kt to Q 4 31. P to K 6 32. R to B 3 32. R to B 2 33. Q to K 2 33. Q to Q Kt 3 34. P to Q Kt 4 34. P to Q R 3 35. P to Q R 3 35. P to B 4 36. P takes P 36. Q to K Kt 3 (oh) 37. K to B sq 37. Q to K 5 38. Q takes P 38. R takes K P 39. Q takes Q (ch) 39. R takes Q And Black won the game. Game II. — Between Philidob and Captain Smith, Philidor playing " blindfold," and giving the odds of the move, and conducting two other games at the same time. White (Captain Smith). 1. P to K 4 2. B to B 4 3. P to Q 3 4. B to K Kt 5 5. B takes Kt 6. Kt to Q B 3 7. B to Q Kt 3 8. P to Q R 3 9. Kt to K B 3 10. Q to Q 2 11. B takes B 12. Castles (K R) 13. P to K R 3 14. Kt to K R 2 15. P to K Kt 3 (a) 16. K to Kt 2 17. P to B 3 18. Kt to K 2 19. PtoQB3 20. P to Q 4 Black (Philidor). 1. PtoK4 2. Kt to K B 3 3. P to Q B 3 4. P to K R 3 5. Q takes B 6. P to Q Kt 4 7. P to Q R 4 8. B to Q B 4 9. PtoQ3 10. Bto K3 11. P takes B 12. P to K Kt 4 13. Kt to Q 2 14. P to K R 4 15. K to K 2 16. P toQ 4 17. Kt to B sq 18. Kt to Kt 3 19. Q R to K Kt sq 20. B to Kt 3 (a) White has already a very inferior game. THE KING'S BISHOPS OPENING. 675 21. Q P takes P 21. Q takes K P (6) 22. Kt to Q 4 22. K to Q 2 23. Q R to K sq 23. P to K R 5 24. Q to K B 2 24. B to B 2 25. Kt to K 2 (c) 25. R P takes P 26. Q takes P 26. Q takes Q 27. Kt takes Q 27. Kt to B 5 (oh) 28. K to R sq 28. R takes P 29. R to K Kt sq 29. R takes Kt (ch) 30. K takes R 30. R to R sq (ch) 31. Kt to R 5 31. R takes Kt (ch) 32. K to Kt 3 32. Kt to R 6 (dis ch) 33. K to Kt 4 33. R mates (d) (b) Black's centre Pawns are now so strong that the end is only a question of time. (c) What a hopeless situation ! (d) Blindfold chess is by no means a modern accomplishment. Twiss, in his quotations on chess, relates that a Saracen named Buzecca visited Florence in 1266, and played three games at chess against the best players in Florence, con- ducting two of the games without sight of board or men, winning two games, and drawing the third. This performance took place in the palace Del Popolo, in the presence of Count Guido Novello. Carrera says that Paolo Boi, the Syracusan, used to play blindfold ou horseback with the Turks. Again, the following lines relate to a player mentioned by Salivo, who neither saw nor heard what was moved, and played only by the touch : " Vi sari dopo qnel che oltre il vedere, E con I'udito sol, come g& I'altri, Nuovo inodo fark unqua no inteso : Che col tatto giocando, e non vedendo Ne udeudo I'inimico, che si faccia, Li stark k fronte, e quanto quelle adopra Co '1 tatto sol conosce, Come udito I'havesse, 6 pur veduto ; Costni con versi, e prose Fara di Soacchi un libro." CHAPTER XXI. THE GAME OF THE TWO BISHOPS (COMPRISING PHILIDOE's ATTACK, THE LOPEZ GAMBIT, MACDONNELL's DOITBLE GAMBIT, THE ITALIAN DEFENCE, ETC. ETC.). GAME THE FIEST. WHITE. BLACK. 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 2. B to Q B 4 S. B to Q B 4 This defence is inferior to 2. Kt to K B 3. Although pre- ferred hy "Walker, and considered unexceptionable by Staunton {see " Handbook," p. 196), it is condemned by Jaenisch. 8. Kt to K B 3 The game is now resolved into the " Giuoco Piano " Open- ing, for which see Chapter X. (Part I.) of this volume. GAME THE SECOND. WHITE. BLACK. 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 2. B to Q B 4 2. B to Q B 4 3. P to Q B 3 This is the classical move advised by Philidor. 3. Kt to K B 3 Jaenisch pronounces this defence incorrect, and "La Strategie" remarks as follows : " Ce coup adopte par Phihdor, a I'inconvenient de favoriser I'attaque et le developpement des Blancs, et de leur laisser finalement une position un peu plus avantageuse." THE GAME OF THE TWO BISHOPS. 677 We differ entii-ely from both these authorities, and consider 3. Kt to K B 3, on the contrarj^ to be not only a perfectly correct defence, but also to give Black the advantage. 4. P to Q 4 (If 4. B to Kt 3 6. B takes P (ch), &c.) 5. 4. P takes P (best) P takes P Q to Q 5 , or Kt takes P 6, P to K 5 or (A.) 5. P to Q 4 (best) /j£ g Q P takes P _ K to B sq ^ ■ Q to K 2 ■ B to Kt 5 (ch) ' Kt to K 5 g Q to K Kt 4 g Q to R 5 (ch) ^^ Q to^R 6 j^ P to K B_3 ■ P to K B 4 ' ■ P to Kt 3 ■ P to B 3 " P to Q 4 12. B to K 2, winning the Knight. j„ _ ___^^_ „ Q to K 2 or (a) ■"•■"- ■ P to Q 4 or (6) n Q takes Kt Kt to K 5 g P takes Q B P Q takes P PtoB3 P takes P en Castles (a) „ B takes P ( ch) This move is given by Lewis. K takes B g P takes K t g K to Q sq R to K sq (ch) ' Q takes P J J Qjake^B ^2 Q to B 5 (ch ) Q takes Kt P ' K to Kt sq 14. K to B 2, with the advantage. rj Q to B 3 ( ch) Kt to B 3 jQ Qto R5 (ch) QtoKtS QtoB 3 ■ Q to B 8 (ch) 6. 9. Kt to K Kt 4 Kt to B 3 10. (6) - P toB4 ■ Kt to K 3 Kt to Kt 5, &c.) 8. PtoB5 Kt to B sq P takes B P To resume the main Variation : 6. B to Q Kt 5 (ch), or (B.), (C.) Jaenisch advises the move in the text, which Staunton also considers White's best play ("Praxis," p. 253) ; whilst "La Strategie " prefers retreating the Bishop to Kt 3. White can 678 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. also play 6. P takes Kt, but this move is justly condemned by the German " Handbuch." For the consequences of the two latter lines of play, see (B.), (C.) 6. B to Q 2 (best) H, P takes Kt g P takes Kt P ^ ■ PtoB3 ■ P takes B ' R to Kt sq g P ta kes P JO Kt to B 3 -.^ Q to K 2 (eh) ■ B checks ' R takes P ' Q to K 2 j2 Q takes Q (ch) ^g K to B sq ^^ P takes B , &c.) ■ K takes Q * B takes Kt 7. B takes B (ch) 7. K Kt takes B 8. P takes P Jaenisch now pronounces White to have the better game. The following continuation from "La Strategic," p. 110, is favourable to Black : — 8. B checks 9. Kt to B 3 9. Castles 10. Kt to K 2 Here we prefer Kt to B 3. 10. P to Q B 4 11. P takes P 11. Kt takes P 12. Castles IS. B takes Kt 13. Kt takes B 13. P to Q 5 And " La Strategic " prefers Black's game. The following diagram shows the position :— THE GAME OF THE TWO BISHOPS. 679 Diagram. BLACK. WHITE. We suggest now the following as a likely continuation : — 14. Kt to Kt 5 14. Kt to Q B 3 15. ?i5JL3 followed by 16. RtoQB jq,&c.) (If 14. P toQ6 15. P to B 4 (If 15 P to K B 3 15. P to Q E 3 ^g P to Q Kt 4) 16. Kt to Q 6, followed by 17. Q to K Kt 4, or 17. P to Q Kt 4, and we do not dislike White's game, as the Black P at Q 5 is weak. We submit the above original Variations to the examination of our readers. 680 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. (A.) Variation on White's fifth move : — 6. P takes P Jaenisch condemns this as weak play, but White appears to get at least as good a game thus as by playing P to K 5. 5. B to Kt 5 (ch) 6. B to Q 2 6. B takes B (ch) 7. Kt takes B 7. P to Q 4 „j ij, g B t akes K B P (ch), &c.) ^ ■ Kt takes K P 8. P takes P 8. Kt takes P 9. Q to Kt 3 9. P to Q B 3 10. Kt to K B 3 10. Castles 11. Castles 11. Kt to Q Kt 3 And the game is declaimed to be even by Jaenisch. (B.) Variation on White's sixth move : — 6. B to Q Kt 3 6. Kt to K 5 7. P takes P 7. B checks 8. B to Q 2 8. B takes B (ch) 9. Kt takes B 9. Q Kt to B 3 10. Kt to K 2 10. Castles 11. Castles, and, contrary to the opinion of many au- thorities, who now declare the game equal, we prefer Black's position. {See diagram.) THE GAME OF THE TWO BISHOPS. 681 Diagram. BLACK. rnKmi ^ J^^J ^^ k i. ^ Suppose now : 11. B to K Kt 5 If IS. P to K B 3 IS. B to K E 4 13. P takes Kt (If 13. P to K Kt 4 y to K Kt 4, &o.) 13. Q Kt takes Q P 14. E to B 2 14. Q to K Kt 4 15. Kt to K B sq 15. Kt to B 6 (ch) 16. K to E sq 16. Kt takes K P And Black has still some attack. (C.) Another Variation on White's sixth move : — 6. P takes Kt 682 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. This move is justly condemned by the German " Handbuch," and although recommended in the " Handbook " by Mr. Staunton, that authority changes his opinion in the " Praxis," p. 253. 6. P takes B 7. P takes K Kt P (If 7 Q to K B 5 g Q takes B g Kt to K 2 ■ Castles ^ ■ R to K sq (ch) ' P to Q 6 ^Q BtoK3 jj Kt to Q 2 jg Q takes P ^^ Q takes K P P takes Kt ' Kt to R 3 " Q takes P and Black has a good position of attack, on account of the situation of White's Queen.) 7. R to K Kt sq 8. Q to R 5 8. Q to K 2 (ch) 9. K to Q sq 9. R takes P 10. K Kt to B 3 10. Q Kt to B 8 11. K R to K sq 11. B to K 3 12. R takes B 18. Q takes R 13. Q takes B 13. P to Kt 3 14. Q to Q Kt 5 14. R takes Kt P And the German " Handbuch " considers Black has the better game, and Mr. Staunton concurs in this opinion in the "Praxis," p. 254, giving the following Valuations in support of this view : — 15. P takes P 15. P to Q R 3 16. Q to Q R 4 /jf -^g Q to K R 5 ^^ Q Kt to B 3 ■ R takes K B P ' Castles, &c.) 16. R takes K B P 17. Kt to K 5 17. P to Kt 4 And Black must win. THE GAME OF THE TWO BISHOPS. 683 GAME THE THIRD. (the LOPEZ DEFENCE.) WHITE. BLACK. 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 2. B to Q B 4 2. B to Q B 4 3. P to Q B 3 3. Q to K 2 This defence is due to Lopez. It is played with the object of preventiag White from playing 4. P to Q 4 ; but Mr. Boden is of opinion that White may play P to Q 4, as follows : — 4. P to Q 4, or (A.) 4. P takes P 5. P takes P 5. Q takes K P (ch) 6. Kt to K 2 6. B checks 7. B to Q 2, and Mr. Boden thinks " that the freedom of White's game, and the weak position of the Black Queen, should give White the better game." Staunton gives the sub- joined continuation from this point : — 7. B takes B (ch) 8. Kt takes B 8. Q to K 2 (best) 9. Castles 9. Q to Q sq 10. K R to K sq 10. Kt to K 2 Followed by Castles and P to Q 4, and Staunton doubts whether White has sufficient advantage to compensate the loss of one Pawn and the isolated position of another. The "Handbuch," too, considers Black has the superiority. (A.) 4. Kt to K B 3 4. P to Q 3 (best) 6. P to Q 4, or (Yarn.) 5. P takes P 6. Castles 6. P takes B P 7. P to Q Kt 4 7. B to Kt 3 (best) 8. Kt takes P 8. Kt to K B 3 684 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. 9. Kt to Q 5 9. Kt takes Kt 10. P takes Kt 10. Castles 11. B to Kt2 11. B to Kt5 13. K E to K sq 12. Q to Q sq And Staunton slightly prefers Black's position. Variation on White's fifth move : — 5. Castles 5. B to K 3 6. Q to Kt 3 6. B to Kt 3 7. B takes B 7. Q takes B 8. Q takes Q 8. P takes Q 9. P to Q 4 9. P takes P 10. P takes P 10. Kt to K B 3 Even game. GAME THE FOURTH. (lewis's counter gambit.) white. black. 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 2. B to Q B 4 S. B to Q B 4 3. P to Q B 3 3. P to Q 4 This move is due to Lewis, and leads, in most Variations, to an even game. 4. B takes P 4. Kt to K B 3 5. Q to K B 3, or see Vari- 5. Kt takes B, or (A.) ations (I.), (II.) 6. P takes Kt 6. Castles 7. Kt to K 2 7. P to K B 4 8. P to Q 4 8. P takes P 9. P to Q Kt 4 9. B to Kt 3 10. P to Q B 4 10. P to Q R 3 11. P to Q B 5 11. B to R 2 12. Kt takes P, and White has gained a Pawn. THE GAME OF THE TWO BISHOPS. Diagram. BLACK. #' i A /J',y/y/. „„„ ■^.rT^vM, ^ 4 i wr" 4 pL //# wmM. W/ wmM h\ i) WHITE. ,ki. 726 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. (E.) 3. P to Q B 4 4. P takes Q P 4. Q P takes P 5. P takes Q B P 5. P to Q 5 6. Kt to Q Kt 5 6. B takes P 7. Kt to K B 3 7. Kt to Q B 3 8. B to K B 4, and White has the advantage. (F.) 3. Kt to K B 3 4. P to K 5 4. K Kt to Q 2 6. Q Kt to K 2 This move was played by Herr Steinitz in the Great Inter- national Tournament at Vienna with marked euccess. We extract the following note by Mr. Wisker from the " West- minster Papers " : — " This mode of playing the French opening I consider good. Whatever may be said about the weakness of White's advanced Pawn, he gets a weU-developed game, and often a fine attack. Usually the opening is brought about by J PtoK4 2 PtoQ 4 3 P to K 5 ■ P to K 3 ■ P to Q 4 ■ P to Q B 4 and White experiences difficulty in bringing out his pieces on the Queen's side. In this case, however. White has deployed his Queen's Knight already, and gets a very good position. Herr Zukertort, however, differs from this opinion, holding that Black ought to get the better game." 5. P to Q B 4 6. P to Q B 3 6. Q Kt to B 8 7. P to K B 4 7. Q to Kt 3 8. Kt to K B 3 8. B to K 2 9. Kt to K Kt 3 9. P to K B 4 THE FRENCH GAME. 727 Followed by Castles, and we think Black has slightly the better position. Diagram. BLACK. M wm. E i i y//7//Mm mmr'''''''' w/i i i WM t. 4/mM ^^P,. i 0mJm WHITE. (G.) Variation on White's fourth move : — 4. P takes Q P 4. P takes P 5. Kt to K B 3 5. Kt to K B 3 6. B to Q 3 6. Castles 7. Castles Even game. The above moves occur in a game between Messrs. Paulsen and Kolisch. 728 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. GAME THE THIED. WHITE. BLACK. _ 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 3 2. P to Q 4 2. P to Q 4 3. P to K 5 This is a weak move, and if properly met should give Black a very superior game. 3. P to Q B 4 4. B to Kt 5 (ch) 4. Kt to Q B 3 5. B takes Kt (ch) 5. P takes B 6. P to Q B 3 6. Q to Q Kt 3 7. Kt to K B 3 7. Q B to Q E 8 And Black has the better position, on account of the weak- ness of "White's centre Pawns. GAMES ILLUSTRATIVE OF THE FRENCH OPENING. Game I. — Between Messrs. Steinitz and Meitner, played at the Vienna Tournament, 1873. (From the " Westminster Papers.") "White (Mr. Steinitz). Black (Dr. Meitner). 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 3 2. P to Q 4 2. P to Q 4 3. Q Kt to B 3 (a) 3. Kt to K B 3 4. P to K 5 4. K Kt to Q 2 5. Q Kt to K 2 (6) 5. P to Q B 4 6. P to Q B 3 6. Q Kt to B 3 7. P to K B 4 7. P takes P (c) 8. P takes P 8. P to K Kt 3 9. K Kt to B 3 9. Q to Q Kt 3 Notes hij the Author. (a) We do not think this quite so strong as 3. P takes P. (b) Mr. Wisker approves of this move, but Herr Zukertort differs from this opinion, and considers that Black ought to get the better game. We agree entirely with Herr Zukertort. (c) Q to Q Kt 3 would have been stronger play. {See Game IIL Illustrative of this Opening.) THE FEENCH GAME. 10. P to Q E 3 11. Kt to B 3 12. P to Q Kt 4 13. BtoK3 14. E to B sq 15. BtoQ3 16. Kt to Q E 4 17. Q to Kt 3 18. Kt to Q B 5 19. Q P takes B 20. P to Q E 4 21. P to Q Kt 5 22. Kt to Q 4 23. Kt to K B 3 24. Kt to Q 4 25. PtoE4 26. Q B to B 2 27. EtoE3 28. BtoK2 29. K E to Q B 3 30. P to B 6 (e) 31. P to Kt 6 32. EtoB5 33. P to Kt 3 34. BtoK3 35. Kt takes Q B P 36. B to Kt 5 37. B takes B 38. Kt to Kt 8 39. Kt takes E 40. EtoB8 41. B takes P 42. Q E to B 6 43. BtoB5 44. B takes Kt 45. Q takes P 10. K Kt to Kt sq (cf) 11. Bto Q2 12. P to Q E 3 13. Kt to E 2 14. BtoK 2 15. Kt to Kt 4 16. Q to Q sq 17. Castles 18. B takes Kt 19. P to Q E 4 20. Kt to B 2 21. Kt to K sq 22. PtoB3 23. PtoB4 24. fitoB2 25. P toE4 26. B to B sq 27. Kt to Kt 2 28. Kt to Q 2 29. Kt to B sq 30. Kt to K sq 31. QtoK2 32. K E to E 2 33. E to Kt 2 34. P takes P 35. QtoQ2 36. BtoE3 37. E takes B 38. Q to Kt 2 39. Q takes Kt 40. PtoQ5 41. EtoK2 42. Q to Kt 2 43. EtoQ2 44. K takes B And Bkck resigned. {d) We cannot divine the object of this move, the effect of which is merely to allow White valuable time to develop his game. B to K 2 or Kt 2 appears far more to the purpose. («) White has now an overwhelming superiority in position. 730 THE CHESS-PLAYEE'S MANUAL. Game II. — Between Messrs. Blackburne and De Vbre in the Challenge Cwp Tourney. (From the " Book of the Transactions of the British Chess Association," 1868-69). White (Mr. De V'ere). Black (Mr. Blackburne). 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 3 2. P to Q 4 2. P to Q 4 3. Kt to Q B 3 3. B to Q Kt 5 (a) 4. B to Q 3 (6) 4. P to Q B 4 5. P takes Q P 5. K P takes P 6. P takes P 6. Kt to Q B 3 7. B to Q 2 7. B takes P 8. K Kt to K 2 8. Kt to K B 3 9. Castles 9. P to K E 3 10. B to K B 4 10. B to K 3 11. QtoQ2 11. P to K Kt 4 12. B to K Kt 3 12. P to Q R 3 13. K to R sq 13. Kt to K R 4 14. Q R to K sq 14. Q to E 4 1.'5. Q to Q sq 15. Castles (Q R) 16. P to Q R 3 16. B to E 2 17. Kt to Q B s.i ^ 17. Kt takes B (ch) 18. B P takes Kt 18. P to K E 4 19. B to K B 5 19. Kt to Q 5 20. Kt to Q Kt 3 20. Kt takes Kt 21. P takes Kt 21. P to Q5 22. P to Q Kt 4 22. Q to B 2 23. Kt to K 4 23. R to Q 4 (c) 24. B takes B (ch) 24. P takes B 25. Kt to K B 6 25. E to K 4 26. Q to Q Kt 3 (rf) 26. R takes E 27. E takes E 27. Q to Q B 3 28. P to K E 3 28. P to K 4 29. Kt to Q 5 29. E to K sq Notes by the Author. (a) This is the best move in the opinion of the authors of " La Strategic," and is to be prefeiTcd to Kt to K B 3. {See Games I. and III.) (b) Better than P takes P, wliich would liberate Black's Queen's Bishop. (c) This is Black's only move to avoid loss. id) Here we should have preferred ploying Kt takes K R P, when the following would have been a probable coutinuation : — Suppose gg Kt takes K R P ^7 Q ta kes R gg Kt to KB 6, and in spite of R takes R ' Pto'Ki(best) Black's two passed Pawns, White has the attack. THE FRENCH GAME. 731 30. P to Q R 4 30. P to Q Kt 4 (e) 31. P takes? 31. P takes P 32. Q to K B 3 32. K to Kt sq 33. R to Q R sq 33. R to Q sq 34. Kt to K 7 34. Q takes Q 35. P takes Q 35. K to Kt 2 36. K to Kt 2 (/) 36. B to Kt 3 37. Kt to K B 5 37. R to Q 2 38. P to K Kt 4 38. P to R 5 39. R to Q B sq 39. B to B 2 40. K to B 2 40. K to Kt 3 41. R to Q sq 41. B to Q 3 42. K to K 2 42. B takes P 43. K to Q 3 43. K to B 4 44. K to K 4 44. K to B 5 45. R to Q 3 45. B to K 8 46. P to Kt 3 (ch) 46. K to Kt 5 47. K takes K P 47. B to B '6 48. Kt takes Q P 48. R takes Kt 49. R takes R 49. K takes P 50. P to B 4 50. P takes P 51. P to Kt 5 (g) 51. P to B 6 52. P to Kt 6 52. P to B 7 53. P to Kt 7 53. B takes R (ch) 54. K takes B 54. P Queens 55. P Queens (ch) 55. Q to B 5 (ch), and wine. Game III. — Between Messrs. Steinitz ami Max i''LEissi&. Played at the Vienna Tournament. (From the " Westminster Papers.") White (Herr Steinitz). Black (Dr. Fleissig). 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 3 2. P to Q 4 2. P to Q 4 (e) Correctly played. Both the attack and counter-attack are admirably .■sus- tained by these two eminent players. If) If 36 I^ t^^Bs B „» Kt to B 6 (ch) „„ Kt takes R K takes R ' K to Kt 3 ' P to Q 6, and wins. (g) Here the correct move was K to K 4, which would have forced the draw, ^ g^ K to K 4 g2 K. takes B gg P to Kt 5 g^ K to K 3 B takes R KtoR6 PtoB6 PtoB7 gg K takes P gg P to Kt 6 g» P to Kt 7 gg P Queens P to Kt 5 P to Kt 6 P to Kt 7" P Queens, &o. 732 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. 3. Kt to K B 3 (a) 4. Kt to Q 2 5. P to Q B 4 6. Q Kt to B 3 7. Q to Kt 3 8. B to K 2 9. K Kt to B sq (c) 10 B to Q 2 11. Castles 12. B takes P 13. P to Q K 4 14. Q to E 2 15. P to Q E 5 16. P to K Kt 3 17. P to E 3 18. K takes Kt 19. E to R sq 20. Q takes B 21. K to K nq 22. Q to E 3 23. E takes Q 24. B to R 2 25. Kt to Q 2 26. K to K 2 27. Kt to E 4 28. E to Q Kt sq 29. Kt to B 5 (i) 30. E to Kt 2 (e) 31. Kt to Kt sq 32. K to Q 2 33. Kt takes Kt 34. K to B 3 35. P takes P (ch) 36. R to Kt 4 Notes by the Author. \a, 'J> to Q Kt 5 is consiilered stronger. {Sec Game II.) (6) As we liave before remarked, we think this move ought to give the secono. player a superior game. Herr Zukertort is also of this opinion. (c) P to K B 4 might have heen better play here. {d) Black has uow obtained a very superior position, and his numerical advan- tage of a Bishop against two Pawns ought, with proper care, to have secured him ultimately the victory. He relaxes, however, on his next move, and throws away his advantage. (e) R to Kt 4 instead must have won in the long run. 3. Q Kt to B 3 4. PtoK5 5. Q Kt to K 2 (c-; 6. P to Q B 3 7. P to K B 4 8. Kt to B 3 9. Kt to Kt 3 10. BtoQ3 11. Bto B2 12. P takes P 13. QtoK2 14. P to Q R 3 15. Q R to Kt sq 16. Kt to R 5 17. Kt to B 6 18. Kt takes B 19. Q to Kt 5 20. B takes R P 21. Q takes P (ch) 22. P to Q Kt 3 23. Q takes Q 24. P to Q R 4 25. BtoQ 2 26. KtoK2 27. R to Q R sq 28. K R to Q Kt s._ 29. P to Q Kt 4 30. PtoR5 31. KtoQ 3 32. B to B .q 33. Kt to Q 2 34. B takes Kt 35. P to Q B 4 36. K takes P THE FEENCH GAME. 733 37. RtoKt3 38. E to Q 3 39. E takes Kt 40. B takes E 41. K to Kt5 42. P to E 6 43. E to Q sq (ch) 44. K to B 6 46. Etc Esq 46. B to E 5 (ch) 47. B to Kt 6 48. E to Q sq 49. P to E 7 50. E to Q 7 37. Kt to Q 2 38. B to Kt sq 39. E takes Kt P (ch) 40. K takes E 41. R to E sq 42. B to E 2 43. K to K sq 44. B to K 6 45. K to Q sq 46. K to B sq 47. B takes P 48. B to Kt 4 49. PtoB4 50. Resigns Game IV. — Between Messrs. Lord and Blackbuene. (From the " Transactions of the British Chess Association," 1868-69.) White (Mr. Lord). Black (Mr. Blackburne). 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 3 2. P to Q 4 2. P to Q 4 3. KttoQB3 3. B to Q Kt 6 4. B to Q 3 4. P to Q B 4 5. P to Q E 3 5. B takes Kt (ch) 6. P takes B 6. P to Q B 5 7. B to K 2 7. Kt to Q B 3 8. P takes P (a) 8. P takes P 9. B to K B 3 9. Kt to K B 3 10. Q B to Kt 5 10. B to K 3 11. Kt to K 2 11. P to K E 3 12. B to K 3 12. Castles 13. E to Q Kt sq 13. P to Q Kt 3 14. P to K E 3 14. Q to Q 3 15. Q to Q B sq 15. Q E to K sq 16. Castles 16. Kt to K 2 17. B to K B 4 17. Q to Q 2 18. Kt to Kt 3 18. Kt to K Kt 3 19. B to K E 5 19. Kt takes K B 20. Kt takes Kt 20. B takes K E P Notes by the Author. (ffl) P to K 5 would have cramped Black's game, whereas the move in the text at once liberates the Queen's Bishop. 734 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. 21. B talve.s K R P 22. Q to K Kt 5 23. B takes Q 24. R to Q Kt 5 25. B to K B 4 (6) 26. BtoQ6 27. B takes R 28. R takes Q P 29. RtoQ6 30. E to Q B sq 31. R to K sq 32. EtoK2 33. P to K B 3 34. P to K Kt 4 35. RtoK4 36. P to K Kt 5 37. PtoQ 5 38. KtoB2 39. R takes B (ch) 40. R takes Q B P 41. R to B 7 (ch) 42. PtoQ 6 43. P takes P 44. K to Kt 3 45. KtoR4 46. R to Q B 4 47. R to Q R 4 48. K to Kt 3 49. K to Kt 2 50. E to Q B 4 21. Q to K Kt 5 22. Q takes Q 23. Q B to K B 4 24. P to K B 3 25. B to Kt 5 26. B takes Kt 27. Kt takes B 28. B to KB 2 29. B to K Kt 3 30. R to Q B sq 31. KtoB2 32. BtoB4 33. BtoQ2 34. E to K sq 35. RtoK2 36. P takes P 37. R to K sq 38. P to K Kt 5 39. Kt takes R 40. KttoKBS ■ 41. RtoK2 42. RtoQ2 43. Kt takes P (ci) 44, Kt to B 3 45. KtoK3 46. K to B 4 47. P to K Kt 4 (ch) 48. Kt to K 5 (ch) 49. P to Q R 4 50. R takes P, and wins. Game V. — Between Messrs. Paulsen and Meitneb. Played at the Vienna Tournament. White (Dr. Meitner). Black (Mr. Paulsen). 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 3 2. P to Q 4 2. P to Q 4 3. P takes P 3. P takes P 4. B to Q 3 4. Kt to K B 3 5. Kt to K B 3 5. B to Q 3 ^J^ Au error which loses a piece. B to K 3 would have heen better. THE FRENCH GAME. ^-^ 6. Castles 6. Castles 7. P to K E 3 7. P to K R 3 a Q Kt to B 3 8. Q Kt to B 3 9. B to K 3 9. Q Kt to Kt 5 10. P to Q R 3 10. Kt takes B 11. Q takes Kt 11. BtoK3 12. K Kt to R 2 12. Q to Q 2 13. P to K Kt 4 13. K Kt to E 2 14. P to K B 4 14. P to K B 4 15. Q to K 2 15. Q R to K sq 16. Q E to K sq 16. P to K Kt 3 17. Q to Kt 2 17. P to Q B 3 18. Kt to Kt sq 18. K to R sq 19. Kt to Q 2 19. Q to Q B 2 20. Q to Kt 3 20. PtoKKt4 21. Q to Kt 2 21. P takes P 22. B to B 2 22. P takes P 23. Kt takes P 23. K R to Kt aq 24. R to K 2 24. P to K E 4 25. K R to K sq 25. Q to Q 2 And White resigned. Game VI. — Between Messrs. Bird and Fleissig. (From the " Westminster Papers.") White (Mr. Bird). Black (Dr. Fleissig). 1 P to K 4 1. P to K 3 2. B to Q Kt 5 (a) 2. Q to K Kt 4 (b) 3. B to K B sq 3. P to Q 4 4. Kt to K B 3 4. Q to K Kt 3 5. P takes Q P 5. P takes P 6. P to Q 4 6. Kt to K B 3 7. Kt to K 5 7. Q to K 5 (oh) 8. B to K 3 8. Kt to K Kt 5 9. Kt takes Kt 9. B takes Kt 10. Q to Q 2 10. Q to K 3 jVoto iy Mr. Wisker. (a) The object of this move was doubtless to vary the monotonous routine of the safe and dreary French opening. Any change in the mode of conducting that miserable business is welcome, but Mr. Bird's variation seems to be destroyed by : 2 3 BtoR4 ^ B to Kt 3 g P tJLSJ. ■ptoQRS ■ptoQKt4 ■ptoQB4 ' P'to Q i,"ke. (J) The position of his Queen, after this sally, is always a trouble to Black, 736 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. 11. BtoQ3 12. Castles 13. Kt to Q B 3 14. Q R to K sq (c) 15. BtoKB4 16. B takes B 17. P to K B 4 18. RtoK 5 19. P to K Kt 4 20. P to K B 5 21. P to K B 6 22. B takes B 23. P to B 7 (ch) 11. B to Q 3 12. Castles 13. P to Q B 3 14. Q to Q 2 15. B to R R 4 16. Q takes B 17. P to K B 4 18. B to K Kt 3 19. P takes P 20. B to K B 2 21. B to K Kt 3 22. P takes B 23. Resigns (d) Game YIL— Between Messrs. Paulsen and Schwabz. (From the "Westminster Papers.") White (Herr L. Paulsen). Black (Herr A. Schwarz). 1. P to K 4 1. PtoK 3 2. P to Q 4 2. PtoQ4 3. P lakes P 3. P takes P 4. Kt to K B 3 4. Kt to K B 3 5. B to K 3 5. B to Q3 6. P to Q B 4 6. P takes P 7. B takes B P 7. Castles 8. Kt to Q B 3 8. Kt to Q B 3 9. P to K R 3 9. B to Q 2 (a) 10. Castles 10. P to K R 3 11. P toQR3 11. Kt to K 2 (6) 12. Kt to K 5 12. B to Q B 3 13. Q to Kt 3 13. B takes Kt 14. P takes B 14. Kt to R 2 (c) In this case the result of the opening is very favourable to White. He gains a much more fully developed game. {d) If he take the Pawn his Rook is lost ; If he play his King, Q to K Kt 5 is decisive. Notes iy Mr. Wisker. (a) Cramping his game. This Bishop should have gone to B 4. (b) Giving White the very opportunity he wanted of planting his Kt at K 5. THE FRENCH GAME. 737 15. Q to K gq 16. K to R aq 17. P to Q Kt 3 18. Kt to Kt 3 19. K takes P 20. B takes Kt 21. P to Q B 3 (d) 22. R takes B 23. Q takes R 24. K to Kt sq 25. Q to K 2 26. Q to B 4 (ch; 27. Q to K 4 28. Resigns (c) It is seldom the iirst player obtains a decisive advantage so early in this the most disagreeable of openings. Black might almost as well resign now. (d) This' is immediately fatal. He should have moved 21. R to Q sq. If White then captured K B P with B, Black could play Q R takes R, and the first player, it is evident, cannot take the Queen. But with proper play 21. R to Q sq could only have prolonged the game. («) A very good combination. 15. Q R to Q sq (c) 16. P to K B 4 17. PtoB5 18. PtoB6 19. P takes P (ch) 20. Kt to Q 5 21. B takes B 22. B takes K B P («) 23. R takes R (oh) 24. B takes R P (ch) 25. PtoK 6 26. RtoQ7 27. K to R sq 28. P to K 7 (ch) 8 b CHAPTER XXVIL THE QUEEN'S KNIGHT'S OPENING. This opening, also known as " Hampe's Opening," or " The Vienna Game," has come a good deal into vogue within the last ten years. Although Jaenisch and the authors of " La Strategic " consider it inferior, Heydehrand, Staunton, and Lowenthal think it a safe and strong debut.* GAME THE FIEST. WHITE. BLACK. 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 S. Q Kt to B 3 S. Kt to K B 3 Black has four other defences here — viz., 2. B to Q B 4, 2. Kt to Q B 3, 2. P to K B 4, and 2. B to Q Kt 5, which shall be examined seriatim. (See Games the Second, Third, Fourth, and Fifth.) Heydehrand considers 2. Kt to K B 3 to be Black's best reply. 3. P to K B 4 This move is given as best by Staunton (vide " Praxis," "La Strat^gie," speaking of White's second move in this opening, says, " It appears to belong to the Italian school, which considers the play of the pieces to be the most powerful means of successful strategy. Considering the central action of this piece, at the very commencement of the game, it has been reasonably supposed that the adversary could not derive sufficient advantage from it to win the game ; but the French school, or that of Philidor, cannot approve of a manoeuvre that from the very outset renounces the attack, and the prospect of creating a centre by the advantage of the move." We cannot agi-ee with "La Strati5gie " on this point, inasmuch as Morphy, Stoinitz, and Anderssen, and all the greatest players since Philidor's time, have adopted the Anglo- Italian style of play. THE QUEEN'S KNIGHT'S OPENING. 739 p. 423) and Lowenthal (vide " G-ames of the Chess Congress," p. 7). With all due deference to their opinion, we prefer 3. B to Q B 4, for which see (A.) 3. P to Q 4 (best) 4. K B P takes P, or 4. Kt takes P Variations (I.), (II.) 5. Kt to K B 3 5. K B to Q Kt 5 (best) B to K2 (If 0. then 6. Q B to K Kt 5 and the game is even. See Illustrative Games.) g PtoQ3 6. Q to K 2 7. Q P takes B 8. P to Q B 4 6. B takes Kt 7. P to Q B 4 Diagram Showing the position after White's eighth move. BLACK. Z'M iA M M /^J/^^//// # „ k M {/■"' "" fa is ""WM" / ^W/ ,,#, r/:/," '/• \/i ?^ai WHITE. 3 B 2 740 THE CHESS-PLAYEB'S MANUAL. Black, on his seventh move in the preceding Variation, may, however, play 7. Castles, with a good game, instead of 7. P to Q B 4. Lowenthal considers, in opposition to the " Schachzeitung," that White has now the hetter position. To us the superiority appears very slight indeed. If, however, Black play now 8. Q Kt to Q B 3 9. P takes P 9. Q takes P 10. P to Q B 4, and Black cannot save the piece. Black's best play in this position seems to be 8. B to K 3, with an even game. Suppose: a- 9. P takes P_ jo. ? ^ ^ 6 ^^ B to K 3 B takes P Tf in -B to K 3 ■ Q to K 2, &c. (A.) 3. B to Q B 4 3. B to Q B 4 Black may also play here 3. P to Q B 3 with perfect safety. (See Game I., illustrative of this opening.) 4. P to Q 3 (best) White can turn the game into an ordinary Guioco Piano, by playing here 4. Kt to K B 3. 4. P to Q 3 5. B to K Kt 5 5. B to K 3 6. Kt to Q 5 6. B takes Kt 7. B takes B 7. P to B 3 8. B to Kt 3 8. Q Kt to Q 2 9. Kt to K B 3 9. Castles 10. Castles, and the game is quite even. THE QUEEN'S KNIGHT'S OPENING. 741 Variation (I.) On White's fourth move : — 4. P to Q 3 This move is recommended by Max Lange, but condemned by Lowenthal. (Games of the Congress," p. 7.) 4. Q P takes K P 5. B P takes K P 5. Kt to K Kt 5 6. P to Q 4 (If 6. Kt takes P, see Illustrative Game VII. between Mr. Burn and the Author in the Challenge Cup Tourney, with the notes thereto by the Author.) 6. P to K 6 7. B to Q B 4 ,jj. ^ Kt to K R 3 Kt to Q B 3. Lowenthal now makes White play . 8. B to Q Kt 5, with the following continuation : g B to Q Kt 5 g K to B sq Q to K E 5 (ch) ' B to Q 2, and declares Black has the better game. Instead of 8. B to Q Kt 5, White may play in this variation 8. Q Kt to K 2, which move, although considered objectionable by Lowen- thal, was adopted by Zukertort against the Author {see Illustrative Game XVIII.), and we believe is, in reality, better play than checking with the Bishop.) 7. Kt takes K P 8. B to Q Kt 3 8. B to K Kt 5 9. Q Kt to K 2 9. Q to R 5 (ch) 10. P to Kt 3 10. Q to B 3 (If 10. B takes Kt Q takes Q P jj Q takes B ^^ Q B takes P , . 11. Q B takes P H. Kt to B 6 (ch) IS. Kt takes Kt 12. Q takes Kt 13. K to Q 2, and the game is even. 742 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. Variation (II.) On White's fourth move : — 4. P takes Q P 4. Kt takes P, or (B.) 5. Kt takes Kt 5. Q takes Kt 6. P takes P 6. Kt to Q B 3 7. Kt to B 3 7. B to K Kt 5 8. B to K 2 8. Kt takes P Even game. (B.) 4. P to K 5 5. P to Q 3 5. B to Q Kt 5 The position is now the same as one which occurs in the King's Gamhit Declined, being brought about by the following transposition of moves : — J Pjo_K_4 2 P to K B 4 g P takes Q P ' P to K 4 ■ P to Q 4 ■ P to K 5 ^ Kt to Q B 3 g P to Q3 ■ Kt to K B 3 ■ B to Q Kt 5 (see Chapter XIX.) 6. P takes P ,jj g EtoQ2 P to K 6, followed by Castles, with a strong but by no means an irresistible attack.) 6, Kt takes K P 7. Q to Q 4 7. Q to K 2 8. B to K 2 8. Castles 9. B to Q 2 9. Kt takes B 10. Q takes Kt 10. B to Kt 5 11. Castles 11. B takes Kt IS. Q takes B , 12. B takes B 13. R to K sq 13. Q to K 5 14. Kt takes B THE QUEEN'S KNIGHT'S OPENING. 743 The above Variation is from a game between Messrs. Hampe aiid Pitschel, from the " Schachzeitimg." After a few more moves, the " Handbuch " pronounces the game equal. We prefer White's game. GAME THE SECOND. WHITE. 1. P to K 4 2. Q Kt to B 3 BLACK. 1. P to K 4 2. B to Q B 4 Lowenthal considers this defence inferior. 3. P to K B 4 (best) The position is now the same as that which occurs in the King's Gambit Declined, where it is arrived at by the following moves : — 1. PtoK4 PtoK4 2. P to K B 4 B to Q B 4 Q Kt to B 3 And White ought in any case, we think, to obtain a superior game. This transposition of moves, and the correct continua- tion, do not appear to be generally known, for when Black refuses the Gambit by bringing out his Bisl.op to B 4, White usually plays 3. Kt to K B 3, which is not so strong a move as 3. Kt to Q B 3, as we will endeavour to show. 3. P to Q 3 (best) ^ ^" B takes K Kt R to K Kt 2 Q to K R 8 ' 4. R taTies B Q to K R 5 (ch) Q to K Kt 4. better game.) Pto.KKt 3 Q takes KRP Again, if in the above Variation Black should play 744 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. 4, P takes KB^P, instead of checking with the Queen, White still maintains the advantage, as follows : — Pto Q 4 g P t o Kt 3 7 R ta kes P Q checks ' P takes P Q takes K R P (best) 7. P to K Kt 3^ 8. B to K Kt 5, &c. I If: If: 7. Kt to K B 3 8. Q to K B 3 g Q to K B 3 g Bto^B4_ ^q B takes Kt P Kt to Q B 3 (best) " Kt to Q sq and White ought to win. (See Illustrative Games.) 4. Kt to K r 3 4. Kt to K B 3 (best) (If 4. B to K Kt 5, a move often made in this position, White gets the advantage, thus : g P takes K P g B^to QKt_5 (ch) ^ B to Q B 4 P takes P (best) ' P to Q B 3 ' Q Kt to Q 2 g R to K B sq 9 P *? ^ JR 3 ^^ (j takes B ■ K Kt to K B 3 ■ B takes Kt ' Castles 11. P to Q 3, and White has a very strong position. See also Illustrative Games IV. and V. (-JJ 4 5 B to Q Kt 5 P takesP ^ ■ Q Kt to B 3 ' ^ and White's game is to be preferred.) 5. B to Q B 4 5. P to Q B 3 6. P takes P jf g PtoQ3 ■ Q to K 2, &c. 6. P takes P 7. Q to K 2 7. Q Kt to Q 2 8. P to Q 8 8. P to Q Kt 4 9. B to Q Kt 3 9. P to Q E 4 10, P to Q R 4 Instead of this move, the " Handbuch" gives P to Q R 3, which it admits to be weak, but does not indicate any better move. The line of j^lay in the text is far preferable. THE QUEEN'S KNIGHT'S OPENING. 745 10. P to Q Kt 5 11. Kt to Q sq 11. Q to Q Kt 3 18. Kt to K 3, and we much prefer White's game. Diagram. BLAOK. Vi^.V, '/// 2 ^2^ 1 W i m ■ J WW // // / /7~M ms////^// m 'mm jy, ^„. mwA g^i S^^ m m ^^^ m "-y/; mi..,,.,... The above Variation is from a game between Blackburne and Anderssen, played at the Baden Tonrney. GAME THE THIED. WHITE. 1. P to K 4 2. Q Kt to B 3 BLACK. 1. P to K 4 2. Kt to Q B 3 This defence is quite sound, and may be safely adopted. 3. P to K B 4 (best) 746 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. In " The Games of the Chess Congress of 1862," p. 8, Mr. Lowenthal gives the following Variations, to show that this move is bad, and gives Black, in his opinion, a winning game : — (3. P takes P Castles P to K Kt 5 ^ Kt to K B 3 ■ PtoKKt4 PtoQS BtoB4 B to Kt 2 ^If 7. PtoQ4 8. Q takes P 9. K to E sq 10. Q takes K B P 11. Kt to Q 5 12. B takes Q 13. Kt takes P (ch) 14. Kt takes K 7. P takes Kt 8. B takes P (ch) 9. Kt to K 4 10. Q to K B 3 11. Q takes Q 12. Kt takes B 13. K to Q sq 14. B to K 4 P takes Kt And Black must win. „ Q takes P Q takes Kt (best) 9. P takes B Q to K B 3 ,,, Q B takes P P to Q 3, with a piece ahead, and Wliite's attack parried.) We venture to entertain quite a different opinion, and main- tain, on the contrary, that 3. P to K B 4 is a very good move. Mr. Lowenthal makes White plaj' on his fourth move, in reply to Black's third move, P takes P, 4. Kt to K B 3, which is very inferior. The correct play is 4. P to Q 4, To return to the main Variation : 3. P takes P 4. P to Q 4 This move was first adopted, we believe, in a game between Messrs. Steinitz and Neumann, by the former player, who won. {See Game XI. of the Illustrative Games.) 5. KtoK2 6. Kt to K B 3 4. Q to K K 5 (ch) 5. Q to K R 4 (ch) (best) 6. P to K Kt 4 THE QUEEN'S KNIGHT'S OPENING. 747 In " The Book of the Transactions of the British Chess Association, 1866-67," p. 92, it is said that Black has now a strong attack. Suppose, however, 7. Kt to Q 5 7. K to Q sq 8. K to K sq 8. B to E 3 9. B to K 2 9. P to K Kt 5 10. Kt to K Kt sq, with a good game, for if now 10. P to B 6 11. P takes P 11. Q to R 5 (ch) 12. K to B sq 12. P to Kt 6 13. K to Kt 2, and White's game seems preferable. GAME THE FOURTH. WHITE. BLACK. 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 2. Q Kt to B 3 2. P to K B 4 This defence is inferior, inasmuch as the first player can turn the game into the ordinary King's Knight's Gambit by playing 3. P takes P, with the advantage of having his Queen's Knight already in action. 3. P takes K B P 3. Kt to K B 3 4. P to K Kt 4, and White's game is superior. GAME THE FIFTH. WHITE. BLACK. 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 2. Q Kt to B 4 ! 2. B to Q Kt 5 This defence is also bad, because White can either turn the game into a Gambit, by playing 3. P to K B 4, or by bringing out his King's Knight, convert the game into a kind of Ruy 748 THE OHESS-PT,AYER'S MANUAL. Lopez defence, Black being a move behindhand, which must of necessity be disadvantageous to him. 3. P to K B 4 (best), or 3. P takes P see (A.) 4. Kt to K B 3 4. P to K Kt 4 5. B to B 4 5. P to K Kt 5 6. Castles 6. B takes Kt 7. Kt P takes B 7. -P takes Kt 8. Q takes P 8. Q to K 2 9. P to Q 4 9. P to Q 3 10. Q B takes P 10. B to K 3 11. Pto Q5 11. BtoQ2 IS. P to K 5, with the advantage. The above interest- ing Variation we extract from Mr. Lowenthal's excellent notes in " The Book of the Congress, 1862," p. 7. Mr. Lowenthal there remarks that it is not good for White to play 3. Kt to K B 3, as recommended in the " Praxis ; " but we cannot see that Kt to K B 3 is a bad move. (A.) 3. Kt to K B 3 3. B takes Kt 4. Kt P takes B, and we prefer White's game. GAMES ILLUSTRATIVE OF THE QUEEN'S KNIGHT'S OPENING. Game I. — Between Messrs. Stanley and Kolisch. (From the " Chess Player's Chronicle.") White (Mr. Stanley). Black (Mr. Kolisch). 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 2. Q Kt to B 3 2. K Kt to B 3 (a) Notes by the Author, {a) This is considered the best defence by most authorities. THE QUEEN'S KNIGHT'S OPENING. 749 3. B to Q B 4 (i; 3. P to Q B 3 (c) 4- Q to K 2 4. P to Q Kt 4 5. B to Q Kt 3 5. P to Q R 4 6. P to Q R 4 6. P to Q Kt 5 7. Kt to Q sq 7. B to Q B 4 8. Kt to K B 3 8. P to Q 3 9. Castles 9. Castles 10. P to Q 3 10. B to Q R 3 11. BtoKKtS 11. Q KttoQ2 12. Q Kt to K 3 12. Q to B 2 13. Kt to K B 5 13. P to Q 4 14. Q to Q 2 14. P takes P 15. B takes Kt 15. Kt takes B 16. Q to K Kt 5 16. Kt to K sq 17. K Kt takes K P 17. K to R sq 18. Kt to K R 4 18. B to K 2 19. Q to K R 5 19. B takes Kt 20. B takes K B P 20. R takes B 21. Kt takes R (ch) 21. K to Kt sq 22. Kt to R 6 (ch) (dl 22. P takes Kt 23. Q takes B 23. P takes P 24. P takes P 24. B takes P 25. K R to K sq 25. B to K Kt 3 26. R to K 7 26. Q to Q 3 27. Q R to K sq 27. Kt to K Kt 2 2rt. Q to K Kt 4 28. R to Q sq 29. P to K R 3 29. Kt to B 4 30. K R to K 6 30. Q to Q 5 31. y to K B 3 31. Q takes Q Kt P 32. Q takes Q B P 32. Q to Q 5 33. Q to Q R 6 33. Kt to K Kt 2 34. K R to K 5 ,34. P to Kt 6 35. Q takes P 35. P to Kt 7 36. K R to Q Kt 5 36. R to Q B sq 37. K R to Q 5 37. Q to K B 3 38. K R to Q sq 38. R to Q Kt sq 39. Q to Q 5 (ch) 39. Q to K B 2 40. Q to K 5 40. Q to Q Kt 6 (e) (i) We consider this move stronger than 3. P to K B 4. (c) The correct move here is B to Q B 4. (d) Q takes B instead would have given White the victory. («) Black could not play here P Queens on account of 41. •^-*''1^??-Q E takes R ^2 R takes R ^3 Q to Q Kt 8 (oh), &c. B takes E 750 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. 41. K R to Q 7 41. Kt to K sq 42. K to R 2 42. P Queens 43. R takes Q 43. B takes R 44. P to R 5 44. R to R sq 45. P to K Kt 3 45. Q to Q R 7 46. Q to K 3 46. Kt to K B 3 47. R to Q 2 47. Q takes P 48. Q to Kt 3 (ch) 48. K to R sq 49 Q to Kt 2 49. R to K B sq 50. R to Q 6 50. Q to K B 4 51. K to Kt sq 51- B to K 5 And White resigned. Game II.— Between Messrs. Blackburnb and Anderssen. White (Mr. Blacktume). Black (Mr. Anderssen). 1. PtoK 4 1. PtoK4 2. Kt to Q B 3 2. B to Q B 4 (as) 3. P to K B 4 3. P to Q 3 4. Kt to K B 3 4. Kt to K B 3 5. B to Q B 4 5. P to Q B 3 6. P takes P 6. P takes P 7. Q to K 2 7. Q Kt to Q 2 8. P to Q 3 8. P to Q Kt 4 9. B to Q Kt 3 9. P to Q R 4 10. P to Q R 4 10. P to Q Kt 5 11. KttoQsq 11. QtoQ Kt 3 12. Kt to K 3 12. B to Q R 3 13. Kt to Q B 4 13. B takes Kt 14. B takes B 14. Castles (K R) 15. KttoKR4 15. QtoQ,R2 16. R to K B sq 16. B to Q 5 17. Kt to K B 5 17. Q R to K sq 18. R to K B 3 18. Kt to K R 4 19. Kt to Q 6 (6) 19. Kt to K B 5 (a) This is far inferior to 2. Kt to K B 3. ,j, jf jg Kttojyi6(cli) 20 R takes K B P or (A.) gi B takes R (ch) P takes Kt ' R takes R ' K. takes B on Q takes Kt (ch) K to K 2, and Black escapes. /J 1 20 B takes R P „, R to Kt 3 (ch). Black has now only two moves at KttoK B5 THE QUEER'S KNIGHT'S OPENING. 751 20. B takes Kt 20. P takes B 21. Kt takes E 21. E takes Kt 22. E takes P 22. Kt to K 4 23. B to Q Kt 3 23. B takes P 24. E to Q Kt s(i 24. Q to K Kt 8 (ch) 25. Q to K B sq 25. B to B 6 (ch) 26. K to K 2 26. Q to Q E 2 27. Q to K B 2 27. B to Q 5 28. Q to K Kt 3 28. K to E sq 29. Q R to K B sq 29. P t6 K B 3 30. Q to K E 3 30. Kt to K B 2 31. P to K Kt 4 (c) 31. Kt to K Kt 4 32. Q to Kt 2 32. B to K 4 33. K E to B 2 33. Q to Q B 4 34. P to K E 4 34. Kt to K 3 35. K to Q sq 35. Kt to Q 5 36. P to Kt 5 36. Q to B 6 37. P takes P 37. P takes P 38. E to K Kt sq 38. Q to E 8 (ch) 39. K to Q 2 39. Kt takes B (ch) 40. P takes Kt 40. Q to B 6 (oh) • 41. K to K 2 41. y to B 7 (ch) 42. K to K 3 42. Q to B 4 (ch) 43. K to K 2 43. Q to B 7 (ch) 44. K to K 3 44. B to Q 5 (ch) 45. K takes B 45. E to Q sq (ch) 46. K to K 3 46. Q takes P (ch) 47. K to B 4 47. Q to Q 3 (ch) And the game was drawn. disposal, viz , Kt to Kt 3 or K to E sq, and as the position is extremely interest- ing, we subjoin the following variations: — Firstly: 21. " — * ' 2 R takes Kt (ch) 23 Q to K Kt 4 34 K. to K 2 P takes R ' B to B 7 (ch) ' K to R sq or R 2 25. Q to K R 3 K to Kt sq, and Black again escapes. Secondly: 21. 22. «j!^KL7 (ch) 38. BtaRMdis ch) K to R sq K to Kt sq Kt to Kt 3 27 P to K R 4 28 Ri2^Lsq B takes Kt P ' B to B 6 (ch), and again Black escapes, for if 29 B toQ 2 gQ K takes B gj PtoR5 g2 Q to B 3 B takes B (ch) ' K to R sq ' Kt to B 5 ' Kt to K B 3 again having the test of the game. (c) If 31. B takes Kt, Black retakes with Queen, and then pushes on the QKtP. 752 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. Game 111.— Between Messrs. Gossip and Gochbe. (From the " Westminster Papers.") White (Mr. Gossip). Black (Mr. Gooher). 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 2. Q Kt to B 3 2. B to Q B 4 3. P to K B 4 3. P to Q 3 4. Kt to K B 3 4. B to K Kt 5 5. P takes K P 5. P takes P 6. B to Q Kt 5 (oh) 6. P to Q B 3 7. B to Q B 4 7. B takes Kt 8. Q takes B 8. Kt to K B 3 9. P to Q 3 9. P to Q Kt 4 (a) 10. B to Q Kt 3 10. P to Q R 4 11. P to Q R 4 11. PtoQ Kt5 12. Kt to K 2 12. Q Kt to Q 2 13. R to K B sq 13. Q to Q Kt 3 14. Kt to K Kt 3 14. P to K Kt 3 15. B to K R 6 15. B to K 2 16. P to K R 4 16. R to K Kt sq 17. P to K R 5 17. a to Q 5 18. Kt to K 2 18. Q to Q 3 (A.) 19. P to K Kt 4 19. Kt to Q B 4 20. B to Q B 4 20. P to K Kt 4 21. Kt to K Kt 3 21. Q Kt to Q 2 22. Kt to K B 5 (6) 22. QtoB4 23. Kt to K Kt 7 (ch) 23. K to Q sq 24. B takes K B P 24. Q takes Q B P 25. R to K B 2 (c) 25. Q to Q B 4 26. Kt to K 6 (ch) 26. K to Q B sq 27. Kt takes Q 27. B takes Kt 28. R to Q B 2 28. P to Q Kt 6 29. R takes B 29. Kt takes R Notes by the Editor of the " Westminster Papers." {a) This attack ou the Queen's side appears to us to waste time. The effect, as will be seen, is to drive the adverse Knight to a point where his services will be most useful. (6) Stronger than Q to K B 5, which, however, also leads to a fine attack. (c) Mr. Gossip plays in this game with a good deal of his old precision and care. The Queen is now trapped, but Black's game has been hopeless for some time. Note by the Atithor. (A.) Tf ■, Q 1 Q E to Q B 2 „. K moves, and the Q takes Q Kt P ' Q to Kt 8 (ch) Black Queen has no escape. THE QUE EN'S KNIGHT'S OPENING. 30. B takes R 30. Kt takes B 31. Q to B 8 (ch) 31. K to Q Kt 2 32. Q takes Kt at B 4 32. Kt takes B 33. Q to K 7 (ch) And after a few more moves Black resigned. 753 Game IV. — Between Messrs. Max Lange and Gueetzki-Comitz. White (Mr. Max Lange). Black (Mr. G. Comitz), 1. PtoK4 1. P to K 4 2. Kt to Q B 3 2. B to Q B 4 3. P to K B 4 3. B takes Kt 4. R takes B 4. K P takes P (a) 5. P to Q 4 5. Q to B 5 (ch) 6. P to K Kt 3 6. P takes P 7. R takes P 7. Q takes K R P (i) 8. Q to K B 3 8. P to K Kt 3 (c) 9. B to Q B 4 9. P to K B 3 10. Kt to Q 5 10. K to Q sq 11. Q B to K Kt 5 11. P to Q B 3 12. B takes B P (ch) 12. K to K sq 13. Kt to Q B 7 (ch) 13. K to B sq 14. Q to Q R 3 (ch) 14. P to Q B 4 15. Q takes Q B P (ch) 15. PtoQ3 16. Q takes Q P (ch) 16. Kt to K 2 17. Q mates (a) If d c P to K Kt 3 Q E to K Kt 2 '"' " '■ Q to K R 5 (oh) Q takes KRP QtoKES 7. Q to K Kt 4, and White has the advantage. jj ^ 5. Q to K 2. PtoQ3 If 4. 5. Q to K Kt 4. Q Kt to B 3 (J) If 7. or 7. Kt to K B 3, White moves 8. Qi°J_?_3. PtoKRS ' j„ „ ^ . B to K K t 5, and White again has the advantage. ' P to K Kt 3 ■ /,) If 8 . 9 B to Q B 4 10 R takes Kt P ■ Q Kt to B 3 ■ Q Kt to Q sq Q to K R 5 (ch] 11. KtoQ sq j2 Kt to Q 5 jg Kt takes Q B P (ch), and wins. ' Q to K 2' ■ Q to K B sq The above game with notes is from the " Schachpartien." 734 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. Game Y .—Between Mr. De Vbeb and Dr. Fraser. White (Mr. De Vere). Black (Dr. Fraser), 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 2. Kt to Q B 3 2. B to Q B 4 3. P to K B 4 3. P to Q 3 4. Kt to K B 3 4. B to K Kt 5 5. P takes P 5. P takes P 6. B to Q Kt 5 (ch) 6. P to Q B 3 7. B to Q B 4 7. Q Kt to Q 2 {a) 8. R to K B sq 8. K Kt to K B 3 9. P to K R 3 9. B takes Kt 10. Q takes B 10. Castles 11. P to Q 3 11. P to Q Kt 4 12. B to Q Kt 3 12. P to Q R 4 13. P to Q R 13. P takes Q R P 14. Kt takes P 14. B to Q Kt 5 (ch) 15. K to K 2 15. Q to K 2 16. P to K Kt 1 16. Q R to Q R 2 (6) 17. P toKR4 17. Kt to K sq 18. B to K Kt 5 18. Q Kt to K B 3 19. B to K 3 19. R to Kt 2 20. P to K Kt 5 (c) 20. Q Kt to Q 2 21. PtoKR5(d) 21. P to K Kt 3 22. P takes P 22. R P takes P 23. Q to K R 3 23. K Kt to Kt 2 24. Q to K R 6 24. Kt to K R 4 25. Q takes Kt P (ch) 25. Kt to Kt z 26. K R to K R sq, and wims Game 'VI.— Between Messrs. Falkbeer and Lowbntha: White (Mr. Falkbeer). Black (Mr. Lowenthal). 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 2. Kt to Q B 3 2. Kt to K B 3 3. B to Q B 4 3. B to Q, B 4 (a) In Game III., Illustrative of this opening, Black played here 7. B takes Kt, which appears at least as good as the move in the text. (V) A very weak move, wliich permits White to push on his Pawns with fatal effect. (c) All this is very cleverly played by Mr. De Vere. (d) Decisive ! The Pawns cannot now he arrested. THE QUEEN'S KNIGHT'S OPENING. 755 4. P to Q 3 4. P to K R 3 (a) 5. P to K B 4 5. P to Q 3 6. Kt to K B 3 6. Castles 7. Kt to Q E 4 7. P to Q B 3 8. P takes K P 8. P takes P 9. Kt takes B 9. Q to R 4, (ch) 10. B to Q 2 10. Q takes Kt 11. PtoQRS 11. PtoQKt4 12. B to Q Kt 3 12. P to Q R 4 13. Q to K 2 13. Kt to Q R 3 14. B to K 3 14. Q to K 2 15. Castles (K R) 15. Ktto K Kt5 16. B to Q 2 16. Kt to Q B 4 17. B to Q R 2 (b) 17. Kt to K 3 18. P to Q B 3 18. Q to Q 3 19. P to K R 3 19. Kt to K B 3 20. P to Q 4 20. Kt to Q 2 21. B to K 3 21. K to R 2 22. Q R to Q sq 22. Q to B 2 23. Kt to K R 4 23. Kt to K B 3 24. B takes K R P (c) 24. K takes B 25. R takes Kt (ch) 25. P takes R 26. Kt to B 5 (oh) 26. K to Kt 3 27. B takes Kt 27. P takes B 28. Q to Kt 4 (ch) 28. K to R 2 29. <3 to R 5 (oh) 29. K to Kt sq 30. Q to Kt 6 (ch) 30. K to R sq 31. Q to R 6 (ch) 31. K to Kt sq 32. R to Q 3 32. P takes P 33. P to K 5 33. P takes Kt 34. R to Kt 3 (ch) 34. K to B 2 35. Q to Kt 7 (ch) 35. K to K sq 36. Q takes Q 36. B to K 3 37. R to Kt 7 37. R to K B 2 38. R takes R 38. B takes R 39. Q takes P (ch) And Black resigned. (a) Apparently a weak move. P to Q 3 would be stronger. (i) In the King's Bishop's Defence to the Queen's Knight's Game, the first player is often able, as in the present game, to retain two Bishops against two Knights, which is incontestably advantageous to him. (c) Capital play 1 The whole of this game is ably conducted by Mr. Falkbeer 3 c 2 756 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. Game Vll.— Between Messrs. Burn and Gossip. (Played in the Challenge Gup Tourney, 1870.) White (Mr. Bum). 1. P to K 4 2. KttoQBS 3. P to K B 4 4. P to Q 3 (a) 5. B P takes K P 6. Kt takes K P (b) 7. Kt to K B 3 8. B to K 2 9. P to Q B 3 10. P takes Q B 11. K to Q 2 12. K to Q B 2 13. B to K 3 14. B to K B 2 15. P to K B 4 16. Kt to K Kt 3 17. BtoKB 3 18. R to K Kt sq 19. Q to K B sq 20. B to K 2 21. Q B takes Kt 22. P to Q 4 23. P takes Kt 24. P to Q Kt 3 25. B to Q 3 26. Kt takes K B P 27. Kt to K R 6 (ch) (/) Black (Mr. Gossip). 1. P to K 4 2. Kt to K B 3 3. P to Q 4 4. P takes K P 5. Kt to K Kt 5 6. Kt takes K P 7. B to K Kt 5 8. B to Q Kt 5 (ch) (c) 9. Q B takes Kt 10. Q to K R 5 (ch) 11. B to K 2 [d) 12. Q Kt to B 3 13. P to K B 4 14. Q to K R 4 15. Q to K B 2 16. Kt to Q 2 17. Castles (KR) 18. Kt to Q B 4 19. Q R to Q sq 20. P to Q R 3 21. B takes B 22. Kt takes P (ch) («) 23. R takes P 24. P to Q Kt 4 25. K R to Q sq 26. R takes B 27. K to B sq (a) This move is advised by Max Lange, and is given in the " Handbuch." (6) The usual move here is 6. P to Q i. The following continuation occurred in a game between Messrs. Steinitz and Neumann : — Kt takes K P Kt takes K P 7 P toQ4 Kt to K Kt 3 Kt to K B 3. (.c) Black has already completely wrested the attack from his opponent. {(l) Best. It 11. B to Q R 4, White checks with Queen at Q R 4, winning a piece. (e) Forced on account of the terrible threatened move B to Q B 4 (/) Here an interesting variation would have occurred by White playing Q taltes Q 28 R ^^'^^^ P (oh) 29 Kt take s Q g^ Kt to K fi R takes Q ' Q takes R ' R to K R 6 ' R takes P (ch), &c. 27 THE QUEEN'S KNIGHT'S OPENING. 757 28. Kt takes Q (g) 28. R to Q 7 (ch) 29. K to Kt sq {h) 29. K takes Kt 30. R to K Kt 2 (i) 30. R to Q 8 (ch) 31. K to Q B 2 31. R takes Q 32. R takes R 32. B to K 6 33. R to K 2 33. B to B 4 34. Q R to Q sq 34. B to Q 3 35. y R to Q 5 35. K to B 3 36. K R to K 5 ( y ) 36. B takes R 37. R takes R 37. B takes P 38. P to K R 3 38. B to Q 3 39. R to Q R 8 39. K to Kt 4 40. R takes Q R P 40. P to Q Kt 5 41. R to Q B 6 41. K to R 5 42. R takes B (k) 42. P takes R 43. P to Q R 4 43. P takes P en passant 44. P to Q Kt 4 44. P to Q 4 45. K to Kt 3 45. P to Q 5 46. K takes P 46. K to Kt 6 47. P to Q Kt 5 47. P to Q 6 48 P to Kt 6 48. P to Q 7 49. P to Kt 7 49. P Queens 50. P Queens (ch) 50. K takes P, and Tins If, in this variatiou, "White, on his 28th move, had played 2S. Kt to K K 6 (ch) in lieu of taking P with R, then the following continuation occurs : 2g Kt to R 6 (ch) 29 Kt takes Q gg Kt to K 5 ■ K to B sq ■ R to K E 6 ' E takes P (ch), followed by B takes E, and Black lias two Pawns for his lost piece. (g) White should have now played 28. ^ ^^^°^ ^' '^' *™' 28. E takes Q 29. Mijke^, ^ith the advantage, for if 29 30. ^' ^o Kt _2. ^ '^''- E to K E 6 (h) If White had played 29. K to Q B 3, the following continuation would have occurred : 29. K to Q B 3 29. P to Kt 6 (ch) 30. K to Q B 4 30. R to Q B 7 (ch) mate. (i) There was nothing better. (j) Evidently a miscalculation. (k) This loses the game, but it required the most exact play on Black's part even now to win. The end game is a study. But for the loss of this game Mr. Burn would have secured the honours of the British Chess championship, which ultimately fell to Mr. Wisker. It was protracted for over seventy more moves, and we believe was the longest game ever played. Duration, twelve hours, 758 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MAM UAL. Game 'Vlll.— Between Messrs. White (Mr. Hoffer). 1. P to K 4 2. Kt to Q B 3 3. P to K B 4 4. P takes K P 5. Kt to K B 3 6. B to Q 3 (a) 7. P takes P c?i j 8. Q to K 2 (ck^ 9. Castles 10. Kt to Q sq 11. K to R sq 12. Kt to K 3 13. P to Q B 3 14. B to Q B 2 15. P takes P 16. Q to Q 3 17. Kt to K Kt 5 18. Kt to K Kt 4 19. Kt takes Kt 20. Kt to B 7 (ch) 21. R takes Q 22. Kt to R 6 (oh) 23. B to Kt 3 (ch) 24. R to K 6 OFI 'ER and Minchin. Black (Mr. Minchin). 1. PtoK4 2. Kt to K B 3 3. PtoQ4 4. Kt takes P 5. B to Q Kt 5 6. P to K B 4 7. Kt takes K B P 8. BtoK2 9. Castles 10. B to Q B 4 (ch) 11. R to K sq 12. B to K Kt 5 (6) 13. K to R sq 14. P toQ5 15. BtoQ3 16. B to K E 4 17. Q Kt to Q 2 18. B to K Kt 3 19. Q takes Kt (c) 20. K to Kt sq 21. B takes Q 22. P takes Kt 23. K to Kt 2 24. R takes R, and wins (d) Game IX.— Between Messrs. Gossip and Janson. White (Mr. Gossip). Black (Mr. Janson). 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 2. Q Kt to B 3 2. Kt to K B 3 3. P to K B 4 3. Kt to Q B 3 4. Kt to K B 3 4. P to Q 3 (a) B to K 2 would have been a better move. (J) This is preferable to the obvious move of P to Q 5, which might have re3ultedi.iadraw,thus:]2. ,^:^_ "ig. B to Q B 4 (ch) ,, KttoKKtS 15 16. PtoQ5 Q toB 7 (ch) kto Q3 17. K to B sq R takes K t (ch) P takes R 14. 18. Q t oR5 KtoK2 perpetual check. (c) Of course the Queen cannot be captured without immediate mate. (d) The latter part of this game is capitally played on both sides. P takes Kt QtoQS (ch), THE QUEEN'S KNIGHT'S OPENING. 759 5. B to Q Kt 5 6. P to Q 4 7. B takes Kt (cli^ 8. B takes P 9. P to K R 3 10. Q takes B 11. Castles (K R) 12. P to K 5 13. P takes P 14. K to R sq 15. Kt to K 4 16. Kt to Q 6 (ch) 17. P take.s P 18. Q R to K sq 19. Q takes Q 20. R takes B 21. B to Q 2 22. B to Q Kt 4 23. R takes Kt 24. P to Q B 4 25. P to Q B 5 26. P to Q B 6 (b) 27. P to Q 7 28. P to B 7 29. R to Q B sq 5. P takes P 6. P to Q R 3 7. P takes B 8. B to K Kt 5 9. B takes Kt 10. Kt to Q 2 11. Q to K B 3 12. P takes P 13. B to Q B 4 (ch) 14. Q to K 3 15. B to K 2 16. P takes Kt 17. Castles (K R) (a) 18. Q to Q 4 19. P takes Q 20. Q R to Q sq 21. Kt to Q B 4 22. Kt to K 5 23. P takes R 24. K R to K sq 25. R to Q Kt sq 26. R takes B 27. K R to Q sq 28. Q R to Q Kt sq And Black resigned. Game X. — Between Messrs. BnoEN and Minchin. Black (Mr. Boden). White (Mr. Minchin) 1. P to K 4 2. Kt to Q B 3 3. PtoKB4 4. Kt to K B 3 1. P to K 4 2. BtoB4 3. P to Q 3 4. Kt to Q B 3 (a) (a) If 17. then follows 18. Q takes Q B P with a decisive supe- B takes P riority. The sacrifice of the Knight was consequently quite sound on White part, although Mr. Staunton, in his notes to tliis game in the " Illustrated London News," doubted its soundness. (J) The advance of the Pawns must win the day. (a) B to K Kt 5 or Kt to K B 3 are usually played liere. 760 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MAKU'Al,. 5. P to K R 3 (fc) 6. B to Q B 4 7. PtoQ 3 8. Kt to K 2 9. P to K B 5 10. P to K Kt 4 11, P to K B 6 ((Z) 12. B to K Kt 5 13. R to K B sq 14. K takes Q 15. Bto R6 16. B takes Kt 17. Kt to Kt 3 18. Q to K B 3 19. BtoK 3 20. B takes B 21. P to Q B 3 22. KtoK2 23. Q to K 3 24. K toQ 2 25. P to Q Kt 4 26. P takes P 27. R to Q B sq 28. R to Q B 3 29. K to Q B 2 30. Kt to K 2 31. Q to K B 2 32. K to Q Kt 3 33. Kt to Kt 3 34. P to Q R 4 35. QtoK 3 36. P takes B 37. R takes R 38. KtoB3 5. P to Q E 3 (vi 6. Kt to K B 3 7. Kt to K K 4 8. y to K 2 9. P to K Kt 3 10. Kt to K Kt 2 11. Q takes P 12. Q takes Kt 13. Q takes R (oh) (»/ 14. P to K B 3 15. Kt to K 3 16. B takes B 17. R to K Kt sq 18.' K to K 2 19. Q R to K B sq s 20. P takes B 21. B to Q 2 22. Kt to Q sq 23. Kt to K 3 24. P to Q Kt 3 25. P takes P 26. R to Q sq 27. E to K Kt 2 28. B to Q Kt 4 29. K to B sq 30. K R to Q 2 31. K to Kt 2 32. B takes P 33. B to Kt 4 34. R to Q 7 35. Q R to Q 6 36. R takes Q 37. P takes P 38. E to Q 2, and wins (6) "We should much have preferred 5. B to Q Kt 5. The move made seems "very weak. (c) Preventing the move mentioned in the preceding note. M) Ingeniously played ! , rf , 3 -It B takes P (oh), followed by B to B 6 , &o. ■ Q takes P THE QUEEN'S KNIGHT'S OPENING. 761 Game XI. — Between Messrs. Steinitz and Neumann, White (Mr. Steinitz). Black (Mr. Neumann). 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 2. Q Kt to B 3 2. Kt to Q B 3 3. P to K B 4 3. P takes P 4. P to Q 4 (a) 4. Q to K R 5 (ch) 5. K to K 2 5. P to Q 3 6. Kt to K B 3 6. B to K Kt 5 7. Q B takes P 7. B takes Kt (ch) 8. K takes B 8. K Kt to K 2 9. B to K 2 9. Castles 10. B to K 3 10. Q to B 3 (ch) 11. K to Kt 3 11. P to Q 4 12. B to Kt 4 (ch) 12. K to Kt sq 13. P to K .5 13. Q to Kt 3. 14. K to B 2 14. P to K R 4 15. B to E 3 15. P to K B 3 16. P takes P 16. Q takes K B P (ch) 17. Q to B 3 17. Q takes Q (ch) 18. P takes Q 18. P to K Kt 3 19. Kt to K 2 19. Kt to B 4 20. B takes Kt 20. P takes B 21. P to Q B 3 21. B to Q 3 22. B to B 4 22. K to Q B sq 23. K R to K Kt sq 23. K to Q 2 24. B, to Kt 7 (ch) 24. Kt to K 2 25. Q R to K Kt sq 25. K to K 3 26. B takes B 26. R takes B 27. Kt to B 4 (ch) (b) 27. KtoB3 28. Kt to Q 3 28. R to Q Kt 3 29. P to Q Kt 3 29. R to K R 3 30. Kt to K 5 30. Q R to Q Kt 4 31. PtoQR4 31. Q RtoQR4 32. PtoQ Kt4 32. QRtoQR3 33. KttoQ7(ch) And Black resigned. (a) A novelty, for which chess-players are indebted to the ingenuity of Mr. Steinitz, The usnal move which gives Black the advantage is 4. Kt to K B 3. {b) The winning move, followed up by Mr. Steinitz with his wonted accuracy. 762 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. Game XII. — Between Messrs. Rosenthal and Steinitz. at the Vienna Tourney.) White (M. Rosenthal). Black (Herr Steinitz), 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 2. Kt to Q B 3 2. Kt to Q B 3 3. Kt to K B 3 3. P to K Kt 3 4. P to Q 4 4. P takes P 5. Kt takes P 5. B to Kt 2 6. B to K 3 6. K Kt to K 2 7. B to Q B 4 7. P to Q 3 8. Castles 8. Castles 9. P to K B 4 9. Kt to R 4 10. B to Q 3 10. P to Q 4 11. P takes P 11. Kt takes P 12. Kt takes Kt 12. Q takes Kt 13. P to Q B 3 13. R to Q sq 14. Q to B 2 14. Kt to B 5 15. B takes Kt 15. Q takes B 16. Q to K B 2 16. P to Q B 4 17. Kt to B 3 17. P to Q Kt 3 18. Kt to K 5 18. Q to K 3 19. Q to B 3 19. B to Q R 3 20. K R to K sq 20. P to K B 3 21. Ktto Kt4 21. P to K K 4 22. Kt to B 2 22. Q to B 2 23. P to K B 5 23. P to K Kt 4 24. Q R to Q sq 24. B to Kt 2 25. Q to Kt 3 25. R to Q 4 26. R takes R 26. Q takes R 27. R to y sq 27. Q takes B P 28. Q to B 7 28. B to Q 4 29. P to Q Kt 3 29. R to K sq 30. P to Q B 4 30. B to B 2 31. B to B sq 31. R to K 7 32. R to B sq 32. Q to B 7 33. Q to Kt 3 33. Q takes B P 34. Q to Kt 8 (cli) 34. K to R 2 35. Q to Kt 3 35. B to Kt 3 36. P to K R 4 36. P to K Kt 5 37. Kt to Q 3 37. Q takes Kt P 38. Q to B 7 38. Q takes Kt And White resigned. THE QUEEN'S KNIGHT'S OPENING. 763 Game XIII. — Between Messrs. Padlsen and Meitner. {Flayed at the Vienna Tourney.) White (Hen- Paulsen). Black (H' it Meitr 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 2. Q Kt to B 3 2. Q Kt to B 3 3. P to K Kt 3 3. BtoB4 4. B to Kt 2 4. P to Q 3 5. P to Q 3 5. B to K 3 6. K Kt to K 2 6. Q to Q 2 7. P to K R 3 7. P to Q R 3 8. Kt to Q 5 8. B takes Kt 9. P takes B 9. Q to B 4 10. Castles 10. Q Kt to K 2 11. P to y 4 11. P takes P 12. Kt takes P 12. Btakts Kt 13. y takes B 13. Kt to B 3 14. R to K sq 14. K to B sq 15. P to Q B 4 15. P to Q Kt 3 16. BtoQ2 16. Kt to Q 2 17. BtoB3 17. P to K B 3 18. P to K B 4 18. P to K R 4 19. K to R 2 19. Q to Kt 3 20. P to Q Kt 4 20. Q R to Q sq 21. R to K 6 21. Q to B 7 22. Q R to K sq 22. Q Kt to K Kt sq 23. K R to K 4 23. Kt to R 3 24. Q R to K 2 24. Q to Kt 8 25. E to K sq 25. Q to B 7 26. K R to K 2 26. Q to Kt 3 27. B to K 4 27. Q to B 2 28. Q to Q 3 28. P to K B 4 29. B to Kt 2 29. Kt to K Kt sq 30. P to K R 4 30. R to K 2 31. R to K 6 31. P to K Kt 3 32. Q to Q 4 32. Kt to R 3 33. B to K B 3 33. Kt to K Kt sq 34. K to Kt 2 34. Kt to R 3 35. B to Q sq 35. Kt to K Kt sq 36. B to R 4 36. Kt to R 3 37. B takes Kt 37. R takes B 38. R to B 6 38. Kt to Kt 5 39. R takes Q (ch) 39. R takes R 40. R to K 6 And Black abandoned the game. ?64 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. Game XIY.— Between Messrs. Paulsen and Stbinitz. (From the ' ' Westminster Papers.") White (Herr Paulsen). Black (Herr Steinitz). 1. P to K 4 1. PtoK4 2. Kt to Q B 3 2. Kt to Q B 3 3. P to K Kt 3 3. BtoB4 4. B to Kt 2 4. Kt to K B 3 5. P to Q 3 5. P to Q R 3 6. Kt to K B 3 6. PtoQ3 7. Castles 7. P to K R 3 8. B to K 3 8. B takes B 9. P takes B 9. Kt to K R 2 10. Kt to Q 5 10. Kt to K 2 11. Kt to Q 2 11. BtoK3 12. P to Q B 4 12. P to Q B 3 13. Kt takes Kt 13. Q takes Kt 14. P to Q 4 14. Castles (K R) 15. P to Q 5 (a) 15. BtoQ2 16. Kt to B 3 16. P to Q B 4 17. Q to Q 2 17. P to Q Kt 4 (b) 18. P to Q Kt 3 18. K R to Kt sq 19. Q R to Kt sq 19. Kt to B 3 20. Kt to E 4 20. P to K Kt 3 21. P to K R 3 21. R to Kt 3 22. K to E 2 22. Q R to Kt sq 23. P takes P 23. P takes P 24. R to B 2 24. B to K sq 25. Q R to K B sq 25. Kt to Q 2 26. Q to K 2 26. R to R sq 27. B to B 3 27. Kt to B 3 28. B to Kt 2 28. Kt to R 2 29. Q to Kt 4 29. Kt to Kt 4 30. Kt to B 5 (c) 30. P takes Kt 31. P takes P 31. P to K B 3 32. P to K R 4 32. P to K R 4 (d) 33. Q to K 2 33. Kt to E 2 Notes iy Mr. Wisker. (a) The position of White's Pawns in the centre is not advantageous. (6) One of the great points in Herr Steinitz's play is always to direct the attack according to the position. White's weakness is on the Queen's side : any attack against his King's side would be only in his favour. (c) Hitherto White's play has been of a very ordinary character. This move is a spark of genius, but unfortunately a bi-ief spark. The combination is unsound. (d) Wliite probably overlooked this reply, which is decisive. THE QUEEN'S KNIGHT'S OPENING. 7^5 34. B to B 3 34. K R to R 3 35. R to R sq 35. P to K 6 36. B takes R P 36. Q to K 4 37. B takes B 37. Q takes R 38. B takes P 38. R takes P 39. Q to Kt 4 (ch) 39. K to R sq 40. B to K 2 (e) 40. Q to K 8 41. K to Kt 2 41. R to K Kt sq 42. Q to R 5 42. Q to Q 7 43. Q to R 6 43. Q takes Q P 44. P to K Kt 4 44. R takes B 45. R takes R 45. Q takes B P 46. Resigns Game XV. — Between Messrs. Blackbuene and Bird. (From the " Westminster Papers."; White (Mr. Blackburne). Black (Mr. Bird). 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 2. Q Kt to B 3 2. B to B 4 3. K Kt to B 3 (a) 3. P to Q 3 4. B to B 4 4. B to K Kt 5 5. P to Q 3 5. P to Q B 3 6. Kt to K 2 6. B takes Kt 7. P takes B 7. Kt to K 2 8. Kt to Kt 3 8. Kt to Q 2 9. B to K Kt 5 9. P to K B 3 10. B to Q 2 10. P to Q 4 11. BtoKtS 11. PtoQ R4 12. P to Q R 4 12. Q to Kt 3 13. Q to K 2 13. P to K Kt 3 14. P to K B 4 14. B to Q 5 15. Castles (K R) 15. P to K R 4 16. Q to Q sq 16. Kt to Q B 4 (b) 17. P takes Q P 17. P takes Q P 18. B to R 2 18. P to K R 5 (c) (e) White is in the pleasing position of being a Rook behind, and of acting at the same time on the defensive. Notes hy Mr. Wisher. (a) 3. P to K B 4 or 3. B to Q B 4, and 4. P to K B 4 is here the preferable course. (i) Well played : giving Black a decided advantage. (c) Very injudicious ; if Black had simply taken Q Kt P with Q, which he played for, it would have secured for him a winning advantage, as White must lose a Pawn, and the exchange, or two Pawns,, with a broken-up game. Castling 766 THE CHESS-PLAYEK'S MANUAL. 19. Kt to K 2 19- B takes Kt P 20. E to Q Kt sq 20. Q to K 3 21. P to K B 3 (i) 21. B to R 6 22. P to Q 4 (e) 22. Kt to Q 2 23. Kt to B 3 23. Kt to Kt 3 (/) 24. Kt to Kt 5 24. B to Q 3 25. R to K sq 25. R to R 4 26. Q P takes P 26. P takes P 27. B to K 3 27. R to Q R 3 28. B to Q 4 28. Kt to Q 2 29. P takes P 29. B to Kt sq 30. Q to K 2 20. R to Kt 4 (ch) 31. K to R sq 31. R to Q B 3 32. P to K B 4 32. R to Kt 5 (g) 33. Kt to Q 6 (oh) 33. K to B sq 34. R takes P 34. Kt to K B 4 35. Kt takes Kt 35. P takes Kt 36. Q to Q Kt 5 36. R to Kt 2 37. B takes P 37. Resigns 1. PtoK4 2. Kt to Q B 3 3. Kt to K B 3 4. Kt to R 4 5. Kt takes B 6. BtoK2 Game XVI. (From the " Westminster Papers.") White (Herr Paulsen). Black (Mr. Bird). 1. P to K 4 2. B to B 4 3. P to Q 3 4. Q B to Kt 5 (a) 5. P takes Kt 6. Q to Q 3 on Queen's side would also have heen good, for if White played P to Q B 3, Black, could then play B takes P (ch), giving up Kt and B for R and two Pawns, with a good game. (d) If E takes B, then Q to Kt 5 (ch) ; Kt interposes. Q takes Q, and P takes Kt, with a slight advantage for White. (e) White having escaped his troubles, now plays extremely well. (/) P to Q Kt 3 would have been better. ig) This hasty move loses the game. R to E 4 might possibly yet have led to a drawn game. Each player's time had nearly expired, five minutes remaining to make seven moves. Notes by Mr. Wisher, {a) 4. Kt to Q 2, 4. Kt to K B 3 or 4. Q to K 2 would he better. The move in the text results in the exchange of both the Black Bisliops for Knights. THE QUEEN'S KNIGHTS OPENING. /67 7. P to K R 3 8. B takes B 9. P to K Kt 3 10. P to Q 3 11. BtoK3 1-2. B to Kt 2 13. Q to Q 2 14. Castles (K R) 15. P to K Kt 4 16. P to K B 4 17. B takes P 18. R takes Kt 19. R to B 2 20. Q to B 3 21. P to Q Kt 4 22. P takes P 23. P to B 5 24. P to R 4 25. P to K 5 26. Q to K 3 27. Q takes P 28. P to B 3 29. Q R to K B sq 30. B to B 5 31. R to B 6 32. Q takes Kt (ch) 33. Q takes R 34. Q takes P (mate) 7. B takes Kt 8. Kt to Q B 3 9. K Kt to K 2 10. Castles (y R) (h) 11. Kt to Q 5 12. P to K R 4 13. Q to Q R 3 14. P to R 5 (c) 15. Kt to Kt 3 16. P takes P 17. Kt takes B 18. P to K B 3 19. Kt to K 3 20. K R to K sij 21. P to Q B 5 22. R to Q 5 23. K R to Q sq 24. Kt to Kt 4 25. P takes P 26. Q to K R 3 27. R takes Q Kt P 28. R to Kt 6 29. Q to K Kt 3 30. Kt to K 3 31. P takes R 32. K to Kt sq 33. QtoQ6 Game XVII. — Between Messrs. Paulsen and Rosenthal. (From the " Westminster Papers.") White (Herr Paulsen). Black (M. Rosenthal). 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 2. Q Kt to B 3 2. Q Kt to B 3 3. PtoKKtS 3. BtoB4 4. B to Kt 2 4. P to Q 3 (b) Castling on the King's side, followed by P to K B 4, would have given Black a fine position ; in my opinion, a finer one than that enjoyed hy White, despite his Bishops. Black might also have played R to Q sq with advantage. If White, on his part, had castled on the Queen's side, the Black Pawns could have been thrown up with great facility. (c) Black's play for the last two or three moves has not improved his game. This last move deprives him of all chance of making an impression on the King's side. 768 THE CHESS-PLAYEK'S MANUAL. 5. P to Q 3 5. K Kt to B 3 6. K Kt to K 2 6. B to K Kt 5 7. P to K R 3 (a) 7. B to Q 2 (6) 8. Kt to R 4 8. B to Kt 3 9. Kt takes B (c) 9. R P takes Kt 10. P to K B 4 10. P takes P 11. Kt takes P 11. Q to K 2 12. P to Q B 4 12. y to K 4 13. Castles 13. Castles (Q R) [d) 14. Kt to K 2 14. Kt to Q 5 15. B to B 4 15. Kt takes Kt (ch.) 16. Q takes Kt 16. Q to K R 4 17. P to K Kt 4 17. Q to Kt 3 18. P to Q R 4 18. P to K R 4 (e) 19. P to K Kt 5 19. Kt to R 2 20. Q to K 3 20. P to K B 3 21. P to R 5 (/) 21. Kt takes P 22. K to R 2 22. P takes P 23. R takes P 23. P to Q Kt 3 24. R to R 7 24. B to B 3 25. P to B 5 25. Kt P takes P 26. Q takes P 26. Q to K sq (g) (A) 27. Q to R 5 27. Kt to K 3 28. RtoBsq 28. P to Kt4 29. Q to R 6 (ch) 29. K to Q 2 30. R takes B 30. P takes B 31. R takes Q P (oh) 31. Resigns Notes by Mr. Wisher. {a) Herr Paulsen is never loth to exchange a Knight for a Bishop. (6) If Black did not intend to take the Knight, his sixth move was very bad : he lost time, whilst White improved his position on the King's side. (c) Again the favourite manoeuvre is repeated, hut this time with the object of being able to Castle K R after pushing the K B P. (cC) Very injudicious. The King can be easily attacked on this side, whilst Black's assault on his left wing is a mere figment. (e) A perfectly useless movement. White advances his Pawn one square, and s free from danger. He can afterwards pursue his own assault at will. (/) White acts vigorously in pushing on his attack, regardless of the loss of the K Kt P. The rest of the game is very well played by him'. (g) Had he taken the Queen, White would of course have captured the Q B P (ch), and afterwards the K Kt P (dis ch), coming out of the skirmish with a winning preponderance. Note by the Author. (A) In our opinion P takes Q would have been better, e.g : 2g 27 R takes P (ch) „. R takes K Kt P (dis ch) P takes Q ' K to Q Kt sq ' K to B sq 2g E takes Q Q R takes Q P, with considerable resom'ce. THE QUEEN'S KNIGHTS OPENING. 769 Game XYIIl.—Between Messrs. Zdkeetort and Gossip. White (Herr Zukertort). Black (Mr. Gossip), 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 2. Kt to Q B 3 2. Kt to K B 3 3. P to K B 4 3. P to Q 4 4- P to Q 3 4. p takes K P 5. B P takes K P 5. Kt to K Kt 5 6- P to Q 4 6. P to K 6 7. Kt to K R 3 7. Kt to Q B 3 8. QKttoK2(a) 8. P to K B 3 9- P to K 6 9. Q B takes P 10. Q Kt to K B 4 10. B to K B 4 11. BtoQKt5 11. BtoQ3 12. Q to K B 3 12. Q to K 2 13. B takes Kt (ch) 13. p takes B 14. Q takes P (ch) 14. K to B 2 15. Castles 15. p to K R 3 16. Q to Q 5 (ch) 16. B to K 3 17. Kt takes B 17. Q takes Kt 18. Q takes Q (ch) 18. K takes Q 19. Kt to K B 4 (ch) 19. K to B 2 20. P to K R 3 20. P to K Kt 4 21. Kt to K 2 21. Kt to K R 7 22. R to K B 5 22. K to Kt 3 23. R to Q 5 23. K R to K sq 24. R takes B 24. P takes R 25. K takes Kt 25. Q R to Q B sq 26. P to Q B 3 26. P to K B 4 27. K to Kt 3 27. P to K B 5 (ch) 28. K to B 3 28. P to K R 4 29. P to K Kt 3 29. P takes P 30. Kt takes P (6) 30. K R to K B sq (ch) 31. K takes P 31. Q R to K sq (ch) 32. K to Q 2 32. K R to K B 6 33. Kt takes K R P 33. K takes Kt 34. K to Q B 2 34. Q R to K 7 (ch) 35. B to Q 2 35. K E takes K R P 3a R to K Kt sq (c) 36. P to K Kt 5 (d) (a) Although this move is considered objectionahle by Mr. Lowenthal (Games of the Congress, p. 7), we prefer it to checking with Bishop. (J) This was a serious mistake, and one which ought to have cost Herr Zukertort the game, had not his opi)onent made an astounding oversight on his forty-fourth move. (c) Merely desperate ! {d) K E to K E 7 would have also won the game. 3 D 770 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. 37. K to Q sq 37. K R to K K 7 38. B to K B 4 38. K E to K Kt 7 39. E takes R 39. R takes R 40. B takes Q P 40. R takes Q Kt P 41. P to Q B 4 41. K to R 5 42. P to Q B 5 42. P to K Kt 6 43. P to Q B 6 43. P to K Kt 7 44. B to K R 2 44. P Queens (ch) (e) 45. B takes Q 45. R to Kt 8 (ch) 46. K to B 2 46. R takes B 47. P to B 7 47. R to K Kt sq 48. P to Q 5 48. R to Q B sq 49. P to Q 6 49. K to Kt 4 50. K to Kt 3 50. K to B 3 51. P to Q 7 51. R takes Q B P 62. P Queens (ch) 52. R to K 2 53. P to Q R 4, and wins («) An amazing oversight caused hy over confidence in victory. K to R 6 must , -1 Ai ^K BtoKKtsq .„ KtoQBi nave won easily, e.g. : 44. — 45. ^ , ,, — ^, , 4b. — , „ ^ KtoR6 RtoQKt8(ch) R takes B 47 P t o B 7 ^g K takes-R ^g K to Q B 2 K to Q B 8 (ch) ' P Queens (ch) ' Q to K Kt sq, and wins. CHAPTER XXVIII. THE FIANCHETTO. This opening may be divided into three branches — viz., the Fianchetto proper, called by the Italians " II Fianchetto di Donna," and known in France as "La partie des Petites Chapelles ; " the Fianchetto on the King's side, or " Fian- chetto di Ee ; " and lastly, the Fianchetto adopted by the first player. These modes of defence and attack are justly condemned by the authorities. Speaking of the " Fianchetto di Donna," or Fianchetto proper, Lolli says : — " L'errore del nero consiste neUa apertura che egli fa del suo Giuoco, la quale non e da imitarsi, perche non e sicura." Jaenisch says : "It is, in general, dangerous to advance the Knight's Pawns one square before the close of the game ; for the wings become necessarily weakened, and Castling is thereby rendered dangerous. Moreover, two squares are opened to attack, which the Bishops cannot always continue to defend, by occupying the intervals as surely even as the Pawns themselves." Staunton is of opinion "that the 'Fianchetto di Donna,' r although disapproved of by the earlier writers, may be made by the second player without much harm, if followed speedily by P to K 3 and P to Q B 4." The Fianchetto has been brought somewhat conspicuously into vogue of late years by Mr. Owen, the provincial champion, who invariably adopts it, and, generally speaking, with toler- able success ; but, in our opinion, all the Fianchettos are inferior, and should give the opposing player a decided advan- tage of position. Sd 2 772 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. GAME THE FIRST. (the FIANCHETTO PROPEE, OB " FIANCHETTO DI DONNA.") WHITE. BLACK. 1. P to K 4 1. P to Q K-t3 2. P to Q 4, or Varia- 2. B to Q Kt 2 tion (I.) 3. B to Q 3 3. P to K 3, or (A.), (B.) 4. P to Q B 4, or (C.) This move is preferred by Jaenisch to playing 4. Kt to E B 3, and is given by Staunton (see " Handbook," p. 379). We, however, concur in the opinion of the authors of "La Strategic," who consider playing the King's Bishop's Pawn two squares on "White's fourth move cramps the Queen's Bishop, and is an inferior move. 4. P to Q 4 5. P to K 5 6. P to Q B 4 6. P to Q B 3 6. K Kt to K 2 Instead of this move, given by Jaenisch, Staunton makes Black play the Knight to K R 3, and declares the game to be equal ; but White has a fine free position. Jaenisch continues the game as follows : — 7. B to K 3 7. K Kt to Q B 3 8. K Kt to B 3 8. B to K 2 9. P to Q R 3 9. Castles 10. Q to B 2 10. P to K R 3 11. Castles 11. Q Kt to Q 2 13. P to Q Kt 4, and thinks White can now commence a dtrong attack on Black's left flank. THE FIANCHETTO. ns Diagram. BLACK. i m isFa k k '//'W, ^y/////// ;^^^ ,M 'w// .,^^^^ :^F^^ (A.) 3. P to K Kt 3 Jaenisch declares this to be a bad move. 4. P to K B 4 5. Kt to K B 3 6. P to Q B 3 7. B to K 3 8. Q Kt to Q 2 9. Castles, with a good game. 4. B to K Kt 2 5. P to K 3 6. P to Q B 4 7. P to Q 3 8. K Kt to K 2 (B.) 4. K P takes P 5. Q checks 3. P to K B 4 4. B takes Kt P 5. P to K Kt 3 774 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. 6. P takes P 6, B to K Kt 2 7. P takes P (ch) 7- K to B sq 8. P takes Kt (Queens) (ch) 8. K takes Q 9. Q to K Kt 4 9. B takes R 10. P to K R 4 10. P to K 3 11. P to K R 3, with the better game. The above Vari ation is from Lolli. (C.) 4. KttoKB.3 4. PtoQ4 5. P takes P 5. P takes P 6. Castles 6. P to Q B 4 White is now compelled to play P to Q B 3, but, in spite of that, has the preferable position. Variation (I.) On "White's second move : — 2. P to K Kt 3 2. PtoKS 3. B to K Kt 2 3. B to Q Kt 2 4. Kt to Q B 8 4. P to K B 4 5. K Kt to K 2 5. Kt to K B 3 6. Pto Q 3 6. B to Q Kt 5 7. Castles 7. B takes Q Kt 8. Kt takes B 8. P takes K P «. Kt takes P 9. Kt takes Kt 10. Q to K R 5 (ch) 10. P to K Kt 3 11. QtoK5 The above moves occur in a game between Messrs. Paulsen and Owen, the latter playing the defence {see Illustrative Game III., at the end of this Chapter), and there can be no doubt that White has much the better game. [Vide subjoined diagram.) THE FIANCHETTO. Diagram. BLACK. /| ^/ i, . A .J i ^^j Wmm m ^Xk ^Si w--^ •WHITE. GAME THE SECOND. (the FIANCHETTO ON KING's SIDE, OR " FIANCHETTO DI RE.") WHITE. 1. P to K 4 BLACK. 1. P to K Kt 3 This defence is less advisable than P to Q Kt 3. 2. P to Q 4 White may also play P to K B 4, with equal, if not greater, advantage. 2. B to K Kt 2 3. P to K B 4 3. P to K 3 4. Kt to K B 3 4. P to Q Kt 3 776 THE CHESS-PLAYEE'S MANUAL. 5. P to B 4 5. B to Q Kt 2 6. Kt to Q B 3 6. Kt to K 2 7. B to Q 3, followed by 8. Castles, and White has a superior position. GAME THE THIED. (the fianchetto adopted by the fiest playeb.) WHITE. BLACK. 1. P to Q Kt 3 1. PtoK4 2. B to Kt 2 2. Kt to Q B 3 3. P to K 3 3. PtoQ4 4. Kt to K B 3 4. P to K B 3 5. PtoQ4 5. P takes P 6. Kt takes P 6. Kt takes Kt 7. P takes Kt 7. B to K B 4 8. B to K 2 8. B to Q 3 9. Castles 9. Kt to K 2 10. P to Q B 4 10. P to Q B 3 11. Kt to Q B 3 11. Castles IS. P takes P 12. P takes P 13. R to K sq 13. B to K Kt 3 14. B to Q3 14. P to K B 4 15. QtoQ2 15. R to K B 3 16. Q R to Q B sq 16. B to K B 2 17. Kt to Q Kt 5 The above moves form the commencement of a game between Messrs. Skipworth and Ranken, played at the Counties Chess Association Meeting at Clifton, in 1873. The " Chess Player's Chronicle " advises now for Black 17. B to Q Kt sq, followed by P to Q R 3, and then B to Q R 2, or Q to Q 3, when Black would obtain a fine attacking position. When the first player adopts the Fianchetto, he cannot legitimately aspire to more than an even game. THE FIANCHETTO. 777 GAMES ILLUSTRATIVE OP THE FIANCHETTO. Game I. — Between Messrs. Owen and Skipwoeth. (From the " Chess Player's Chronicle.") White (Mr. Skipworth). 1. P to K 4 2. P to Q 4 3. B to Q 3 4. Kt to K B 3 5. P to K 5 6. P to Q B 4 (a) 7. Kt to Q B 3 8. Q takes K* 9. Castles 10. Kt to K 2 11. P to Q R 3 12. P to Q Kt 4 13. P to Q B 5 14. B to K 3 15. K R to Q B sq 16. Q to Q 2 17. Kt to K Kt 3 18. Kt to K E 5 (c) 19. Kt to K sq 20. Q to Q sq 21. Q to K Kt 4 22. Kt to K Kt 3 23. R to Q B 3 (d) 24. Kt to Q B 2 25. B to K B 4 26. Kt takes P Black (Mr. Owen). 1. P to Q Kt 3 2. L to Q Kt 2 3. P to K 3 4. Kt to K B 3 5. Kt to Q 4 6. Kt to Q Kt 5 7. Kt takes B (ch) 8. B to Q Kt 5 9. Kt to Q R 3 10. B to K 2 11. Castles 12. P to Q 4 13. P to Q B 3 14. Kt to Q B 2 15. B to Q R 3 16. B to Q B 5 17. P to Q Kt 4 (b) 18. Kt to K sq 19. P to Q R 3 20. K to R sq 21. P to K Kt 3 22. R to Q R 2 23. P to Q R 4 («) 24. Q to Q 2 25. P takes P 26. B to Q sq (/) (o) If, in reply, (Notes from the ' ' Chess Player's Chronicle. ") 6. B to Q Kt 5 (ch) 7. Kt to K 2 (only sq) 7. K to B sq 8. PtoQE3 And Black cannot save the Bishop. (6) Though the Bishop is well posted, and now strongly supported at Q B fi, the position was obtained at the cost of valuable time. (c) This move was th* result of long deliberation, and it presently affords White some slight advantage. (d) Preventing Black's Bishop from coming to the rescue, if the Kt is played to E B 3, and occupying itself a threatening position. (e) The commencement of a counter-attack, for which, as the after play proves, there was jiist too little time for success. (/) Better probably to play P to K B 4 than continue the attack on the Queen's side. „8 THE CHESS-PLAYEE'S MANUAL. „ Tr 27. B to QB4 ''■l:\'\.. 28. B takes Kt 28. Kt to K B sq „„ t, t„ HP 7 29. P takes B ^^- ^ ° ^ t? 30 R to K R 3 30. B takes Kt 31. K takes B 31. Kt to K Kt 2 (jr) 32 Q to K B 4 32. Kt to K R 4 {h) 33. P to K Kt 4 33. P to K B 3 34. B to K R 6 (i) 34. E to K B 2 35. R to K B 3 (k) 35. Kt to K B 6 36. B takes Kt 36. P to K Kt 4 37. Q to K R 6 37. P takes B 38. P takes P 38. P to K 4 39. P takes P 39. Q takes P 40. Q takes B P 40. Q takes Q 41. R takes Q And Black resigns {I). Game II. (From the "Chess Player's Chronicle.") Between the same opponents. White (Mr. Skipworth). Black (Mr. Owen). 1. P to K 4 1. P to Q Kt 3 2. P to Q 4 2. B to Q Kt 2 3. B to Q 3 3. P to K 3 4. Kt to K B 3 4. Kt to K B 3 5. Q to K 2 5. P to Q 4 6. P to K 5 6. Kt to K 5 7. Castles r. B to K 2 8. Q Kt to Q 2 8. Kt takes Kt 9. B takes Kt 9. Kt to Q 2 (g) This is scarcely his best move, though it may be that had is the best. {h) An ingenious defence in spite of appearances all against the move. (!) If 34. P takes Kt 34. P to K Kt 4 35. B takes P 35. P takes B 36. Q takes P 36. K R takes P (ch) 37. K to Kt sq 37. E to K Kt 7 (eh). And Black wins the Queen for two Rooks, though White has, perhaps, rather the best game. (k) Wliite might now have safely taken the Kt. (l) Being unable to prevent the advance of the Pawns. THE FIANCHETTO. 779 10. Kt to K sq (a) 10. P to Q B 4 11. P to Q B 3 11. P to Q R 4 12. PtoQK3(6) 12. QtoQBsq 13. P to K B 4 13. P to K Kt 3 14. Kt to K B 3 14. B to Q E 3 15. Q R to Q B sq 15. Q to Q Kt 2 16. B to K sq (c) 16. Castles (K R) 17. B to K R 4 17. B takes B 18. Kt takes B 18. K R to Q B sq 19. B takes B 19. Q takes B 20. Q takes Q 20. R takes Q 21. P to Q R 4 21. R to Q R 2 22. K to B 2 22. Q R to Q B 2 23. Kt to K B 3 23. P takes P 24. Kt takes P 24. R to Q B 5 25. R to Q R sq 25. Kt to Q B 4 26. K R to Q sq 26. R takes R P 27. B takes R 27. Kt takes R 28. R to Q Kt sq 28. Kt to Q B 4 29. K to K 3 29. Kt to K 5 30. E to Q R sq 30. R to Q B 5 31. Kt to Q Kt 5 31. K to Kt 2 32. P to K Kt 4 32. P to K B 3 {d> 33. P takes P (ch) 33. K takes P 34. P to K Kt 5 (ch) 34. K to K 2 35. Kt to Q R 3 35. R to Q B 4 36. Kt to Q B 2 (e) 36. P to K 4 37. P to K E 4 37. Kt to Q 3 38. P takes P 38. Kt to Q B 5 (oh) 39. K to Q 4 39. Kt takes Kt P (/) (Notes frnm the " Chess Player's Chronicle.") {a) This is, perhaps, rather premature, though it is difficult to say what is the best move. Something, if possible, should have been done to prevent Black's Bishop coming afterwards into that strong position at Q R 3. (J) This move was made with the view of preventing Black's King's Bishop coming into the field. It would have been better to have played P to Q B 4 at once. (c) White, by four or five moves here, not only throws away all the advantage of a strong position, but he loses a Pawn, and brings about for himself a most uncomfortable game. {d) Mr. Owen was doubtful if this was his best move. (e) Mr. Skipworth has been in some way making up for his careless play by a most skilful defence. (/) In this combination. Black had apparently overlooked White's next move ; he expected E to move to Q Kt sq at once. 780 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. 40. Kt to K 3 (g) 40. K to K sq 41. R to Q Kt sq 41. Kt to Q R 5 42. R takes P 42. Kt takes R 43. K takes R 43. Kt to Q R 5 44. K to Q 4 44. K to Q 2 45. Kt takes P 45. Kt to Q Kt 7 46. P to Q B 4 46. P to Q R 5 47. Kt to Q Kt 4 (h) 47. P to Q R 6 48. P to Q B 5 48. Kt to Q E 5 49. P to Q B 6 (oh) 49. K to K 3 50. Kt to Q R 2 50. Kt to Q Kt 3 51. Kt to Q Kt 4 51. Kt to Q B sq 52. K to B 3 52. K takes P 53. K to Kt 3 53. K to B 5 54. Kt to K 5 (oh) 54. K to K 4 55. Kt to Q Kt 4 55. Kt to K 2 56. K takes P 56. K to Q 3 57. K to Kt 3 (i) And the game was given up as drawn (j). Game III. — Between Messrs. Paulsen and Owen. (From the " Games of the Chess Congress.") White (Mr. Paulsen). Black (Mr. Owen). 1. P to K 4 1. P to Q Kt 3 2. P to K Kt 3 2. P to K 3 3. B to Kt 2 3. B to Kt 2 4. Kt to Q B 3 4. P to K B 4 5. K Kt to K 2 5. K Kt to B 3 6. P to Q 3 6. B to Kt 5 (cf) White must now gain something. (A) White is a Pawn ahead, but there does not seem to be any mode of winning. The position is critical for both parties. If 47. K to B 3 47. P to Q R 6 If 48. K to Kt 3 48. Kt takes P If 49. K takes Kt Black wins. (i) If 57. KtoR4 57. Kt takes P .-iS. Kt takes Kt 68. K takes Kt 59. K to Kt 4 59. K to Q 4. And Black must win the Pawns and the game. 0) This iliffionlt and critical end game may be studied with advant-age. THE FIANCHETTO. 781 7. Castles 8. Kt takes B 9. Kt takes P 10. Q to K R 6 (ch) 11. Q to K 5 12. P takes Kt 13. Q to B 3 14. B to E 6 15. P to K B 4 16. P takes P 17. R takes B 18. R takes E 19. P to K 6 20. P takes P 21. B to E 3 22. Q takes P 23. P Queens (ch) 24. Q (mates) 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 7. B takes Kt 8. P takes P Kt takes Kt P to Kt 3 Castles Kt to B 3 PtoK4 14. R to B 2 15. B to R 3 16. B takes R 17. Q to K 2 18. Q takes R 19. Q to K 2 20. Kt to K 4 (a) 21. P to Kt 4 22. P to Kt 5 23. Q takes Q Game IV. — Between Messrs. Blackburne and Hamel. (From the " Illustrated London News.") White (Mr. Blackburne). 1. P to K 4 2. P to Q 4 3. P to K B 3 4. B to Q 3 5. P to Q B 3 6. P takes P 7. Kt to Q B 3 8. Kt to K 2 9. Castles 10. P takes B 11. Kt to K Kt 3 12. P to K B 4 13. P to K B 5 (a) Black (Mr. Hamel). 1. P to Q Kt 3 2. B to Q Kt 2 3. P to K 3 4. P to Q B 4 5. P takes P 6. B to Q Kt 5 (ch) 7. Kt to K 2 8. Castles 9. B takes Kt 10. Kt to K Kt 3 11. B to Q R3 12. Q to Q B 2 13. q takes Q B P (6) (a) If Q takes P, then P to K 5, &c. Notes hy Mr. Staimton. (a) The advance of this Pawn was evidently the result of a profound calculation, and leads presently to positions of singular interest. (b) This, though dangerous, was compulsory ; for the retreat of the Kt would have been followed by the still further advance of White's danng Pawn, to the utter ruin of Black's game. t82 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. 14. B takes B 14. Kt takes B 15. P takes Kt 15. Q takes R 16. P takes R P (ch) 16. K to R sq 17. Kt to K R 5 17. P to K B 4 18. Kt to K B 4 18. K takes P 19. Q to K R 5 (ch) 19. K to Kt sq 20. Kt to K Kt 6 20, Q takes Q P (ch) 21. K to R sq 2i. K R to K sq 22. R to Q sq 22. Q to Q B 6 23. P to K 5 (c) 23. Kt to Q B 4 24. B to K Kt 5 24. Kt to Q 6 (d) 25. B to K B 6 (e) 25. Kt to B 7 (ch) 26. K to Kt sq 26. Resigns. (c) This and the two succeeding moves of Mr. Blackburne are very fine. (d) Unconscious, quite, of the subtle purpose for which his adversary played the Bishop to Et 5. (e) Admirably played. Black has no means whatever, after this, to avert ■lefeat. CHAPTEE XXIX. THE CENTRE OOUNTBR GAMBIT, Although seldom played, presents many features of interest, and unless opposed with great care, wiU often give the second player the advantage ; but, strictly speaking, it is an incorrect " debut," inasmuch as Black is obliged to lose time by retreat- ing his Queen, and his adversary ought thereby to acquire a superior position. GAME THE FIRST. WHITE. BLACK. 1. P to K 4 1. P to Q 4 2. P takes P 2. Q takes P Black may play here Kt to K B 3, for which see Game the Second. 3. Q Kt to B 3, or Vari- 3. Q to Q sq, or (A.), ation (I.) (B.) Staunton considers this best, but the authors of " La Strategic Raisonnee " prefer playing the Queen to Q R 4, con- sidering that time is lost by retreating the Queen to her square. The student will best judge for himself after playing over this analysis, and the accompanjing Illustrative Games at the end of the Chapter. 4. P to Q 4 4. B to K B 4 (If 4 5 BtoQ3 6 B to K .3 . ■ Kt to K B 3 ■ Kt to Q B 3 P to K 3 » Ktto K B 3 g Castles, with a marked advantage.) BtoQ3 784 THE CHESS-PLAYEE'S MANUAL. 5. Kt to K B 3 5. P to K 3 6. B to Q B 4, with the better position, White's game being more fully developed than that of his opponent. (Vide diagram below.) Diagram. BLACK. mm. s. X // ^ i i i ^m „ , , m^/yY ,„'!^„,„ ^^/y// .. WMim ,„ '// /// w//////f,/ wm. i^ :>, SJSM; f/h¥/ ^ mm, m WHITE. Variation (I.) Beginning at White's third move : — 3. P to Q 4 This move was adopted by Morphy. It sacrifices a Pawn with the object of getting up a strong attack ; but Black, in the opinion of the German " Handbuch," can equalise matters by playing 3. P to K 4, or 3. Q Kt to B 3. If, however, he THE CENTEE COUNTEE GAMBIT. 785 play 3. Q to K 5 (ch), the following continuation is given by the " Praxis " :— 3. Q to K 5 (ch) 4. B to K 3 4. B to K B 4 5. Kt to Q B 3 5. Q takes Q B P 6. Q takes Q 6. B takes Q 7. R to Q B sq 7. B to B 4 8. Kt to Q 5, with a fine attacking position. (A.) 3. Q to Q R 4 4. P to Q 4 4. P to K 4 5. P takes P 5. Q takes P (ch) 6. B to K 2 6. B to Q Kt 5 7. Kt to K B 3 7. B takes Kt (ch) 8. P takes B 8. Q takes P (ch) 9. B to Q 2 9. Q to B 4 10. R to Q Kt sq 10. Q Kt to B 3 11. Castles 11. KttoKB 3 12. B to K B 4 12. Castles (best) (If 12. _ i&. ^ Kt to K 2 B to Q Kt 5 (ch) ^^ B to Q 6 PtoKBS ■QtoKE4 .g B takes Kt j^g E to K sq (ch), and White has a decided K takes B advantage.) 13. B takes P 13. Kt to Q 5 14. Q takes Kt 14. Q takes B 15. B to Q 3 15. P to K R 3 And the game is pronounced even by " La Strategic." We prefer White's position. (B.) 3. Q to K 4 (ch) 8 E 786 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. This move is not to be commended, on account of the follow- ing continuation : — 4. B to K 2 4. B to K Kt 5, or (a.) {b.) 5. P to Q 4 5. Q to K 3 6. P to Q 5 6. Q to K 4 7. P to K B 4 7. B takes B 8. K Kt takes B 8. Q to Q 3 9. Kt to K 4 9. Q to Kt 5 (ch) 10. K Kt to B 3 10. P to K 3 11. Castles, and White should win. The above Varia- ion is from the "Praxis." ( a.) 4. Kt to K B 3 5. Kt to K B 3 5. Q to Q 3 6. P to Q 4 6. B to Kt 5 7. Kt to Q Kt 5 7. Q to Q 2 8. B to K B 4 8. Kt to Q E 3 9. Castles 9. P to Q B 3 10. Kt to Q B 3 10. Kt to Q Kt 5 11. Pto Q R 3 11. QKttoQ4 12. Kt takes Kt 1.3. Kt takes Kt 13. B to K Kt 3 13. Castles (Q R) 14. P to Q B 4 14. Kt to Q Kt 3 15. Kt to K 5 15. B takes B 16. Q takes B 16. Q to K sq 17. P to Q 5 17. P to Q B 4 18. P to Q Kt 4 18. P to K B 3 19. P takes P 19. P takes Kt 20. P takes Kt 20. P talces P 21. Q takes P, and wins "We extract the above analys ds from " La Strategie." THE CENTRE COUNTER GAMBIT. 787 (h.) 4. Kt to Q B 3 5. K Kt to B 3 5. Q to K B 3 6. Q Kt to Q Kt 5 6. K to Q sq 7. Castles 7. B to K Kt 5 8. PtoQ4 8. P to Q E 3 9. Pto Q 5 9. Q Kt to Q Kt 5 10. Q Kt to B 3 10. B to K B 4 11. K Kt to Q 4 11. Q to K Kt 3 IS. P to Q E 3 12. B takes Q B P 13. K Kt takes B 13. Q Kt takes Kt 14. B to Q 3, and wins. GAME THE SECOND. WHITE. BLACK. 1. P to K 4 1. P to Q 4 2. P takes P 2. Kt to K B 3 Althoufth this move is theoretically unsound, it gives hirth to many interesting Variations. 3. B to Q Kt 5 (ch), or 3. B to Q 2 Variations (I.), (II.) 4. B to Q B 4 4. P to Q Kt 4 ,j„ . g Kt to Q B 3 g P takes B ^ ■ B to KB 4 ■ P to Q B 3 ' Kt takes P ^ PtoQ3 g B to K Kt 5 ' P to K 4 ' B to Q B 4, and White maintains Ida pawn. ) 5. B to Kt 3 5. B to K Kt 5 j^ g ^____ g P to Q R 3, &c.) ^ ■ PtoQR4 6. P to K B 3 (best) 6. B to B sq 7. Q to K 2 7. P to Q E 3 3 E 2 788 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. 8. P to Q R 4 8. P to Kt 5 9. Q to B 4 9. Q to Q 3 10. P to R 5, and White has a Pawn ahead, with no inferiority in position. We append a diagram showing the state of the game. DiAGEAM. BLACK. mm. w///////i' |i i T i '4 ^j////^ m. mi , I i mm. 3 F 2 604 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL, (C.) 4. B to Q B 4 5. Q Kt to B 3 5. Q to Q Kt 3 6. Kt to Q R 4 6. Q to R 4 (ch) 7. P to Q B 3, and the game is even. The above is from the " Praxis." Vabiation (I.) On White's third move : — WHITE. BLACK. 3. Q takes P 3. Kt to Q B 3 4. Q to Q sq 4. Kt to K B 3 Black has several other moves here, which it is well to examine in turn. He may play 4. P to K B 4, 4. P to K 3, or 4. P to Q 3. TiJ £ 41 H , P to K 5, &" "'*"''y= '•ptoKB-4 '■ - If, secondly. 4. - 5. gt to K B 3 gBtoQJJ •^ P to K 3 Kt to K B 3 and White has a good game. ^, , . „ K B to Q B 4 c B takes Kt, &c. If' *l-^y ■■ 4- p-toQ3 '■ PtoKBl '■ 5. Kt to Q B 3 5. P to K 3 6. B to K Kt 5 e. B to K 2 Followed hy P to Q 4, with a good game. Vaeiation (II.) On White's third move : — WHITE. BLACK. 3. B to Q B 4 3. P to K 3 The " Handbook " gives 8. P to K 4 for Black, as foUows :— 3 4 P to K B 4 g K Kt to B 3 g QtoJCZ ■ P to K 4 ■ Q Kt to B 3 ' K Kt to B 3 ' B to K 2 Y Castles P to Q 3, and considers Bla;;k has far the better game. THE SICILIAN GAME. 805 4. Q takes P 5. Q to Q sq 6. B to Q 2 7. Q takes B 8. Kt to Q B 3 9. Kt takes Kt 4. Kt to Q B 3 5. B to Q Kt 5 (ch) e. B talfes B (ch) 7. Kt to K B 8 8. Kt takes P 9. P to Q 4 With the better game. GAME THE SECOND. WHITE. 1. P to K 4 2. Kt to K B 3 3. Q Kt to B 3 BLACK. 1. P to Q B 4 2. P to K 3, or s«e Variation If 3. P to Q 4, Black replies with 3. P takes P, and we arrive at the same position as that which occurs in Game the First, the second and third moves on both sides being tran- sposed. 3. Q Kt to B 3 4. B to Q Kt 5 4. P to Q E 3 The above is given by Max Lange and the " Praxis." Herr Zukertort prefers for White's fourth move P to Q 4, instead of B to Q Kt 5, and shapes the debut as follows (see " West- minster Papers," December, 1873, p. 163) : — WHITE. 1. P to K 4 2. Kt to K B 3 3. Kt to Q B 3 BLACK. 1. P to Q B 4 2. P to K 3 3. Kt to Q B 3 Herr Zukertort transposes the moves thus : Kt to Q B 3 Kt to Q B 3 3. Kt to K B 3 , but the position is the same Pto K3 806 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. 4. P to Q 4 4. P takes P 5. Kt takes P 5. P to Q K 3 And considers White has the better position. Vai-iation on Black's second move : — S. Kt to Q B 3 3. P to Q 4 3. P takes P 4. Kt takes P 4. P to K 4 __ g Kt to Q Kt 5 g B to K B 4 ■ P to K3 'PtoQS 'PtoK4 „ Bto K 3 B to K 3, with a good game. 5. Kt to Q Kt 5 jj g Kt to KB3 g BtoQ3 ' Kt to K B 3 ' B to Q B 4, even game. „ .„ g Kt takes Kt g B to Q B 4 Kt P takes Kt ' B to Q B 4, and Black has slightly the preferable position. 5. P to Q 3 6. B to K 3 Staunton now prefers White's position. (" Praxis," p. 401.) 6. P to Q E 3 And Black has no inferiority. If White now play 7. Q Kt to B 3, sacrificing the Knight, see Illustrative Game III. GAME THE THIRD. WHITE. BLACK. 1. P to K 4 1. P to Q B 4 2. Kt to Q B 3 It little matters whether White brings out this Knight on his second or third move, the same position being ultimately brought about. If Black play 2. P to K 3, White brings out his King's Knight, and we arrive at the identical position that THE SICILIAN GAME. 807 has been analysed in the preceding game. {See Game the Second.) Black may, however, play 2. Q Kt to B 3, when the following continuation may ensue : — 2. Q Kt to B 3 3. P to K Kt 3 3. P to Q 3 4. B to Kt 2 4. P to K 4 5. Kt to K 2 5. Kt to K B 3 6. Castles 6. P to K R 4 7. P to Q 3 7. P to K R 5 The above Variation occurs in a game between Messrs. Paulsen and Neumann. The " Strategic" remarks that the game is difficult. We prefer Black's game. {See Diagram.) Diagram, <^J i i i O m^ ,^^i i W/////////^ ..fjMM 7 '-^ ^i n ^ •I w/mmi WHITE. 808 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. The following also deserves notice : — WHITE. BLACS. 1. P to K 4 1. P to Q B 4 2. Q Kt to B 3 3. P to K 3 3. P to K Kt 3 . This is a favourite move vyith Herr Paulsen, the celebrated blindfold player, but we cannot think it so effective as the move of 3. Kt to K B 3, the consequences of which we have already examined. 3. Kt to K 2 4. B to Kt 2 4. P to Q 3 5. P to Q 3 6. Kt to Q B 3 6. Kt to K B 3 6. P to Q E 8 And Black has no inferiority. GAME THE FOUETH. WHITE. BLACK. 1. P to K 4 1. P to Q B 4 2. B to Q B 4 Although this move is patronised by Anderssen, it is justly condemned by most authorities, on account of the following : — 2. P to K 3 3. Kt to Q B 3 3. Kt to K 2, or see Variation 4. Q to K 2 4. Kt to Q B 3 5. Kt to K B 3 5. P to Q E 3 6. P to Q 3 6. Kt to K Kt 3 7. Castles 7. B to K 2 8. B to K 3 8. Castles AVith a capital game. {Vide subjoined Diagram.) THE SICILIAN GAME. 809 Diagram. BLACK. •#■ M4 WHITE. Variation on Black's third move : — 3. P to Q E 3 4. P to Q E 4 4. Kt to K 2 5. P to Q 4 5. P to Q 4 6. K P takes P 6. K P takes P 7. B to K 2 7. P takes Q P 8. Q takes P 8. Q Kt to B 3 And again Black has the advantage in position. The above is from the German " Handbuch." Let the student compare the following diagram with the preceding one. He can then judge for himself whether 3. Kt to K 2 or 3. P to Q E 3 is preferable for the second player. 810 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. ii w^ Diagram. BLACK. a %m. =/ rfc »/ pdJ » wmm mM ^m mm. ,.4J M '-^ ■ GAME THE FIFTH. WHITE. 1. P to K 4 2. P to K B 4 BLACK. 1. P to Q B 4 This move is unadvisable, because it enables Black to pre- vent his opponent from establishing his centre. Although it was sometimes adopted by Morphy, it is unsound play. S. P to K 3 (best), or see Variation 3. Kt tn K B 3 3, P to Q 4 4. P takes P 4. P takes P 5. P to Q 4 5. Kt to Q B 3 And Black has the better game. THE SICILIAN GAME. 811 Yariation on Black's second move : — S. Q Kt to B 3 3. Kt to K B 3 3. P to K 3 4. P to Q 4 4. P to Q 4 With the better position. Instead of P to Q 4, which is suggested by Philidor, White may play 4. P to Q B 3, or 4. B to K 2, as advised by the German " Handbuch." If istly ; 4. 1^!LQ^A 5 ? to K 5 Q K^to R 3 PtoQ4 'P to KB 3 ■ KttoKRS ij, Kt to Q B 2 g P to Q 4_ ■ Q to Kt 3 ■ B to Q 2, with a fine game. If 2adly : 4. ^ ^° ^ ^ 5. Zi£_Q^^ _ P to Q 4 P to K Kt 3 followed by B to Kt 2, with the advantage. Black's fifth move is suggested by Mr. Staunton. GAME THE SIXTH. WHITE. BLACK. 1. P to K 4 1. P to Q B 4 2. P to Q B 4 This mode of play is condemned by Jaenisch and Staunton, on the ground of unnecessarily confining the King's Bishop, and preventing White firom establishing his centre Pawns. It has, however, been played of late years by Suhle against Anderssen, and, although not perhaps a strong move, does not by any means appear so disadvantageous as those writers con sider it. 2. Kt to Q B 3 ,jf 2 3 Kt to K B 3 4 KttoQB3 ^ ■ P to K 3 ■ Kt to Q B 3 ■ P to K Kt 3 followed by 5. B to Kt 2, -with the superior position.) 3. Kt to Q B 3 3. P to Q R 3 812 THE CHEriS-PLAYEE'S MANUAL. 4. Kt to K B 3 4. P to K 3 5. B to K 2 5. Kt to K 2 6. P to Q 4 6. P takes P • 7. Kt takes P, and the game is even. GAME THE SEVENTH. WHITE. BLACK. 1. P to K 4 1. P to Q B 4 2. P to K Kt 3 This mode of attack has come a good deal into vogue of late years, and the fact of its having been played by Herren Steinitz, Rosenthal, and other distinguished players, entitles it to consideration. Mr. Wisker thinks it hardly so good as the usual play of 2. P to Q 4, or 2. Kt to K B 3. 2. Q Kt to B 3 3. B to Kt 2 3. P to K 4 4. Kt to K 2 4. Kt to K B 3 Black may play 4. P to Q 3, with a good game. 5. Q Kt to B 3 5. P to Q 3 6. Castles 6. B to K 2 7. P to K B 4 7. P to K R 4 And Black has, in our opinion, the preferable position, his pieces having more freedom of action than those of his opponent. For further examples of this form of the opening, see Illustrative Games. GAME THE EIGHTH. WHITE. BLACK- 1. P to K 4 1. P to Q B 4 2. P to Q Kt 4 2. P takes P THE SICILIAN GAME. 813 3- P to Q 4 3. P to K 3, or (A.) 4. P to Q E 3 4. P takes P 5. Q B takes P 6. B takes B 6. Q K takes B 6. Kt to Q B 3 7. P to K B 4 7. P to Q 4 8. P to K 5 8. Kt to K E 3 And Black keeps his Pawn, without any inferiority in position. (A.) 3. P to Q 4 4. P to K 5 4. B to K B 4 5. P to Q E 3 5. P takes P 6. Q B takes P 6. Q Kt to B 3 And again Black has the advantage. GAME THE NINTH. WHITE. BLACK. 1. P to K 4 1. P to Q B 4 2. P to Q Kt 3 Kieseritzki, we believe, first introduced this move, which is merely weak and eccentric. 2. Kt to Q B 3 3. B to Q Kt 2 3. P to Q E 3 4. P to Q E 4 4. P to K 3 And the game is about even. 814 THE CHESS-PL A YER'S MANUAL. GAMES ILLUSTRATIVE OP THE SICILIAN OPENING. Game I. — Between Messrs. Anderssen and Macdonnell. Played in the London Tourney of 1862. (From the " Games of the Chess CongrefS ') White (Mr. Macdoimell). Black (Herr Anderesen) :i. p to K 4 1. P to Q B 4 2. P to Q 4 2. P takes P 3. Kt to K B 3 3. P to K 3 4. Kt takes P 4. Kt to K B 3 5. B to Q 3 5. Kt to Q B 3 6. B to K 3 6. P to Q 4 7. Kt takes Kt 7. P takes Kt 8. P to K 5 (a) 8. Kt to Q 2 9. P to K B 4 9. P to K B 4 10. Castles 10. B to Q B 4 11. Qto K2 11. Castles 12. R to B 3 12. B takes B (ch) 13. R takes B 13. Kt to B 4 (i) 14. Kt to Q 2 14. Kt to K 5 15. Q R to K B sq 15. P to Q E 4 16. Q R to K B 3 16. R to Q R 2 17. R to K R 3 (a) 17. Q to Kt 3 18. Kt to K B sq 18. P to K Kt 3 19. P to K Kt 4 (d) 19. R to K Kt 2 20. K to Kt 2 («) 20. P to Q B 4 (/) 21. B takes Kt 21. B P takes B 22. R to Q Kt 3 22. Q to B 2 23. K to Kt 3 23. P to Q B 5 24. R to Q R 3 24. P to K Kt 4 25. P takes P 25. Q takes P (ch) 26. K to Kt 2 26. P to Q 5 27. R to K E 5 27. P to K 6 Nofes iy the Author (a) This attack is superficial, .and, as wUi be seen, enables Black speedily to acquire a superior game. (J) Already Black has much the better position. (c) A mere " brutum fulmen." {d) Very bad play ! As pointed out by Mr. Lowenthal in liis notes to the pre- sent game, "White should have now played the defensive move of P to Q B 3 ; but even then he would have had a bad game. (e) Making bad worse, "quern Deus vult perdere prim deirmiiat." White's game is now hopelessly broken up, (/) The " coup juste." THE SICILIAN GAME. 815 * 28. Kt to Kt 3 28. Q to Q 4 (ch) 29. K to Kt sq 29. E to B V 30. Q takes R 30. P takes Q (ch) 31. K takes P 31. R to B 2 (ch), and wins Game II.— Between Messrs. Rosenthal and Heral. (From the "Westminster Papers.") White (Mr. Rosenthal). Black (Dr. Heral). 1. P to K 4 1. P to Q B 4 2. Kt to Q B 3 2. Kt to Q B 3 3. P to K Kt 3 (a) 3. P to K 3 4. B to Kt 2 4. P to Q Kt 3 5. K Kt to K 2 5 B to Kt 2 6. Castles 6. R to B sq 7. P to Q 3 7. B to Q 3 8. P to B 4 8. B to Kt sq 9. P to B 5 9. P to K B 4 (b) 10. P to K R 3 10. P to R 5 11. PtoKKt4 11. KttoKBS 12. B to Kt 5 (c) 12. Kt to Q 5 13. Kt to B 4 13. Q to B 2 14. Q to Q 2 14. Kt to Kt sq 15. K Kt to K 2 15. Q to R 7 (ch) 16. K to B 2 16. P takes P 17. R to R sq 17. Q to Q 3 18. Kt P takes P 18. R to E 4 19. B to B 4 19. Q to Q B 3 20. B takes B (d) 20. R takes B 21. Kt to B 4 21. R to Kt 4 22. Q Kt to Q 5 22. Q to R 3 23. P to B 3 (e) 23. Kt takes P Nop s by Mr. Wisher. (a) This style of attack, though good, is scarcely equal to the old course of 3 K Kt to B 3, followed hy 4. P to Q 4. (h) In positions like the present, this Pawn should not be advanced without ample force at hand to support the attack, otlierwise the Pawn is liable to be lost, without compensation. (c) White has now the preferable position, as Black cannot Castle with safety. (d) 1 should have prefeiTed 20. R to K Kt sq. (e) Overlooking Black's clever reply, which gives him a winning advantage. Again, the Book should have gone to K Kt sq. 816 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. 24. K to K sq (/) 24. Kt to Kt 6 25. K R to Kt sq 25. K to B sq 26. K to Q sq 26. B takes Kt 27. Kt takes B 27. Q to R 4 (ch) 28. K to B 2 28. Q to K 7 29. Q R to K sq 29. Q takes Q (ch) 30. K takes Q 30. Kt to K 2 31. Kt to B 4 31. Kt to B 3 32. B to B 3 32. Kt to K 4 33. B to Q sq 33. P to K B 4 (g) 34. P takes P 34. R takes P 35. Q R takes Kt 35. R takes Kt 36. K to K 3 36. R to B 3 37. B to Kt 4 37. P to Q 3 38. R to Q 5 (h) 38. R to K sq (ch) 39. K to Q 2 39. Kt to B 8 (ch) 40. R takes Kt (i) 40. R takes R 41. K to B 2 41. R to B 3 42. K to Kt 3 42. B to K 4 43. P to B 4 43. K to K 2 44. K to R 4 44. R takes R 45. P takes R 45. R to B 5 (ch) 46. K K to Kt 5 46. R takes B 47. Resigns. Game III. — Between Messrs. Walker and Lowe. (Prom the " Chess Player's Chronicle.") White (Mr. Walker). Black (Mr. Lowe). 1. P to K 4 1. PtoQB4 2. Kt to K B 3 2. Kt to Q B 3 3. P to Q 4 3. P takes P (/) If 24. P takes Kt 24. R takes B (ch) 25. K takes R (must) 25. B takes Kt (ch) And Black wins. (g) The game is well finished off by Black. (A) This unfortunate position of the Rook brings the game to a speedy ter- mination. (i) The loss of the exchange could not be averted. If 40. K to B sq, then follows 40. R to K 8 (ch) on the part of Black. If the Bishop then be interposed, Black simply takes it oil with the Book, and wins the unhappy soUtary Rook at Q5. THE SICILIAN GAME. 817 4. Kt takes P 5. Kt to Q Kt 5 6. B to K 3 7. Q Kt to B 3 (a) 8. Kt to Q 5 9. B takes P 10. P to Kt 4 11. Kt to B 7 (ch) 12. Kt takes R 13. B takes Kt 14. B to Q 2 15. Castles 16. R to K sq 17. B to B 3 18. Q to Q 5 19. Q to R 8 (ch) 20. Q R to Q sq 21. B takes P 22. Q to Kt 8 23. B to Kt 3 24. Q takes Q (ch) 25. B takes P 26. B takes B (ch) 27. P to Q R 4 28. P to Q B 3 29. R to Q 6 30. R takes P 31. P to Q Kt 5 32. R to K 3 33. P to K E 3 34. E takes B 35. K E to Q R 3 36. P takes Kt The game was continued for many more moves, and was finally won by White. Notes from the " Chess Player's Chronicle." {a) See p. 74 of vol. i. of the C. P. C, where the same opening occurred between the same players. (J) Perhaps E to Q R 5 is the best move at this point. (c) The Q evidently is lost if she takes the B. (d) Black had better have left this Pawn alone. (e) P to K B 3 would have been better. (/) He would have lost a piece by taking the B. (g) He seems to have nothing better. (A) From this point it is only a question of time, for if Black attempts to win the Q R P, the White King cuts him off from the Pawns on the other side of the board. 3o 4. P to K 4 5. PtoQ 3 6. P to Q R 3 7. P takes Kt 8. R to R 3 (b) 9. Q to R 4 (ch) 10. Q to R 6 (c) 11. K to Q sci 12. P takes Kt 13. Q to B 6 (ch) 14. Q takes K B 15. Q takes K P (d) 16. Q to K B 4 17. BtoQ 2 18. Kt to K B 3 19. B to Q B sq 20. BtoK2 21. Q toQ2 22. Kt to K sq 23. Q to B 2 24. Kt takes Q 25. B to K 3 (/) 26. K takes B 27. R to Q Kt sq 28. K to B sq 29. Kt to Q 4 30. Kt takes Q B P 31. B to Q Kt 6 32. E to Q sq 33. Kt takes Q E P (^) 34. Kt to Q B 4 35. Kt takes R 36. E to Q E sq (h) fal8 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MAKUAL. Game IV.— Between Messrs. Sohwarz and Anderssbn. Played at the Vienna Tourneij. (From the " Westminster Papers.") White (Herr Sohwarz). Black (Herr Anderssen). 1. P to K 4 1. P to Q B 4 2. Kt to K B 3 2. P to K 3 3. P to Q 4 3. P takes P 4, Kt takes P ■U P to Q R 3 (a) 5. B to Q 3 (6) 5. Kt to K B 3 6. Castles 6. B to K 2 7. K to K sq 7. Q Kt to B 3 8. P to Q B 3 8. Castles 9. P to K B 4 9. P to Q 4 10. P to K 5 10. Kt to Q 2 11. Kt to Q 2 11. Kt to B 4 12. B to B 2 12. P to B 4 13. Q Kt to B 3 (c) 13. Kt to K 5 14. B to K 3 14. B to Q 2 15. Q to K 2 1^. Q to K sq 16. Kt to Kt sq 16. Kt to R 4 17. B to Q 3 17. P to Q Kt 4 18. Kt to R 3 18. Kt to B 5 19. Q B to Kt sq 19. R to Q B sq 20. Q R to B sq 20. Q to Kt 3 21. R to B 3 21. Q to R 3 22. B to K 3 22. B to K sq 23. K R to B sq 23. B to R 4 24. Kt to B 3 24. B to K Kt 5 25. R to Q B 2 25. B takes Kt at K R 3 26. P takes B 26. Q takes P at R 6 27. R to Kt sq 27. Kt takes B 28. Q takes Kt 28. B to B 4 N^otes by Herr Zukcrtort. (a) Black's best move in tliis position is 4 Kt to K B 3, giving him at least an even game ; but White can maintain tlie better position against the Sicilian J f , . ., . „ ,, , P to K 4 „ Kt to Q B 3 defenue, playing the opening as follows :— 1. — 2. ^^ ^^ -^^ p Kt to K B 3 ^ PtoQ 4 g Kt takes F P to K 3 ■ P takes P P to Q R 3 (This is now forced). (5) The weakness of Black's game is on the Queen's side. By playing B to Q 3, White shut up his Queen from his opponent's weakest points Q 6 and Q 7. B to K 2 was first played in some German Tournaments, and in two correspondence matches by ZuVcitort, six ye.irs ago. (c) Black has now in any case the better game ;_ better, however, for White was P takes P en passant. THE SICILIAN GAME. 819 29. Q to K 2 30. B takes Kt 31. Kt takes B 32. Q to K 3 33. R to Kt 2 34. Q to R 7 35. Q takes R P 36. QtoK7 37. QtoQ7 38. Q takes Kt P 39. Q to K 2 40. Q to B 6 (e) And Black announced mate in three moves, 29. B takes R (d) 30. B P takes B 31. Q to R 3 32. K R takes P 33. Q R to K B sq 34. R to B 8 35. QtoR6 36. P to Kt 3 37. P to K 6 38. Q to B 4 39. Q to K 5 Game V. — Between Messrs. Andbrssen and Guibebt. (From " La Nouvelle Regence.") White (Herr Anderssen). Black (M. Guibert). 1. P to K 4 1. P to Q B 4 2. Kt to K B 3 2. P to K 3 3. P to Q 4 3. P to Q 4 (a) 4. K P takes Q P 4. K P takes P 5. B to Kt 5 (ch) (6) 5. Kt to B 3 6. Castles 6. B to Q 3 7. Q Kt to B 3 7. K Kt to K 2 8. B to K Kt 5 8. P to K B 3 9. P takes P 9. B takes P 10. B to K B 4 10. Castles 11. Q to Q 2 11. B to K 3 12. K R to K sq 12. B to K B 2 13. P to Q R 3 13. Kt to Kt 3 14. B to Kt 3 14. Q Kt to K 2 (d) Why not Kt to B 7, winning the Queen for Kt and B ? (e) There is no escape, if 40. P to K K 3 Black wins by Q R to B 7, 41. Q to Kt 4, R takes R, 42. Q takes R, P to K 7. Notes by the Author, (o) This way of playing the defence in the Sicilian opening has of late years fallen qaite into disu.se. Still we think it is sound, and may be safely adopted. Staunton is of opinion that it leads to an even game. (i) Instead of this move White can play P to Q B 4. {See " Handbook," p. 372.) 8 G 2 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. 15. B to Q 3 15. P to Q R 3 16. P to K R 4 16. Q to Q 2 (c) 17. P to K R 5 17. Kt to K B sq (d) 18. P to R 6 18. P to K Kt 4 19. Kt to K 2 19. B to K R 4 20. Q Kt to Q 4 20. B takes K Kt 21. Kt takes B 21, Kt to K B 4 22. B takes Kt 22. Q takes B 23. P to Q Kt 4 23. B to Kt 3 24. R to K 7 24. R to B 2 25. Q R to K sq ' 25. Q R to K B sq 26. K R to K 6 26. B to Q R 2 (e) 27. B to Q 6 27. Kt to K Kt 3 28. B takes R 28. R takes B 29. P to Q B 4 29. P to K Kt 5 30. Kt to Q 4 30. Q to K E 4 31. P to B 5 31. B to Q Kt sq 32. P to K Kt 3 32. B to K 4 33. P to Q B 6 33. Q to K R 6 34. Kt to B 5 34. P takes P 35. Q R takes B 35. P takes R 36. Q to K Kt 5 36. K to R sq 37. R takes Kt 37. P takes E 38. Q takes P at Kt 6 38. R to K Kt sq 39. Q to B 6 (ch) 39. K to R 2 40. Q to B 7 (ch) 40. K to R sq 41. Kt to K R 4 And Black abandoned the game. Game VI. — Between Herren Steinitz and Heral. Played at the Vienna Tourney. (From the " Westminster Papers.") White (Herr Steinitz). Black (Herr Heral). 1. P to K 4 1. P to Q B 4 2. Kt to K B 3 2. Kt to Q B 3 3. Kt to Q B 3 3. P to K 3 (c) Wu concur in the ophiion of the Editor of " La E^gence," who points out that P to K E 4 would have been preferable here. (d) Black has now a bad position, but he struggles in an able manner to retrieve his late disadvantageous "coup." (c) A blunder. B to B 2 was the correct play, and would have left Black a tolerably even game. THE SICILIAN GAME. 821 4. P to Q 4 4. P takes P 5. Kt takes P 5. Kt to K B 3 (a) 6. K Kt to Kt 5 6. P to Q R 3 7. Kt to Q 6 (ch) 7. B takes Kt 8. Q takes B 8. Q to K 2 9. B to K B 4 9. Q takes Q (b) 10. B takes Q 10. K to Q sq 11. Castles 11. Kt to K sq 12. B to Kt 3 12. K to K 2 13. P to K 5 (c) 13. P to B 3 14. P to B 4 14. P to B 4 15. B to E 4 (cli) 15. K to B 2 16. Kt to E. 4 16. P to K E 3 17. Kt to Kt 6 17. E to Q Kt sq 18. Kt takes B 18. E takes Kt 19. E takes P (ch) 19. K to Kt 3 20. R takes Q Kt P 20. Kt to B 2 21. P to K E 3 21. Kt to Q 4 (rf) 22. B to Kt 3 22. Kt to Kt 5 from B 3 23. P to B 3 23. Kt takes E P (oh) (e) 24. K to Kt sq 24. Kt takes Q B P (ch) 25. P takes Kt 25. Kt takes P (oh) 26. K to Kt 2 26. Kt to Q 8 (oh) 27. K to E 3 27. E to B 8 28. B to B 4 28 K E to Q B sq 29. B takes K P 29. E to E 8 (ch) 30. K to Kt 4 30. P to Q E 4 (ch) 31. K to Kt 5 31. E to Kt 8 (ch) 32. K to E 6 32. E to Q E sq (ch) 33. E to E 7 33. K E to Q Kt sq 34. B to B 7 (ch) • 34. K to E 2 35. B to B 2 (/) 35. Kt takes B 36. R takes R 36. E takes E 37. B to K 6 (g) 37. K to Kt 3 Notes by Mr. Wisher. (a) 5. P to Q R 3 is the usual and better move. (b) 9. Castling was the only way to develop the game ; but the miserable position of Black's Q P makes his game hopeless. (fi) Blocking up the Q P for ever. (d) 21. Kt to K sq was the safest way to prevent any cuimter-attack. (e) Being two Pawns short, Black tries his only chance by the sacrilioe of a piece, and he conducts the attack with great ingenuity. (/) The counter sacrifice brings " White " out of trouble, and secures him at the same time the victory. (g) 37. P to K 6 gains the Knight for the K P ; this wins the Knight, keeping the precious Pawn. 822 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. 38. P to Kt 4 38. P takes P 39. P takes P 39. Kt takes P 40. B takes Kt 40. P toR5 41. P to B 5 (ch) 41. K to Kt 4 42. E takes P (ch> 42. KtoB5 43. PtoB6 43. K takes P 44. PtoB7 44. R to K B 8 45. B toE5 45. R toB7 46. R to Kt 3 46. KtoK3 47. R to K 3 (ch) 47. Resigns h) Game VII. — Between M. S. Rosenthal and Professor Andbrssen. Played at the Vienna Tourney. (From the " Turf, Field and Farm.") White (M. Rosenthal). Black (Professor Anderssen). 1. P to K 4 1. P to Q B 4 2. Q Kt to B 3 2. PtoK 3 3. P to K Kt 3 3. P to Q Kt 3 4. B to Kt 2 4. B to Kt 2 5. K Kt to K 2 5. P to K R 4 (a) 6. P to K R 4 6. P to K B 4 7. Kt to B 4 7. K Kt to B 3 8. P to Q 3 8. P takes P 9. P takes P 9. Kt to Q B 3 10. P to K 5 10. K Kt to Kt 5 11. Kt takes R P . 11. K Kt takes K P 12. Kt to B 4 12. QtoK 2 13. Kt to K R 3 1.3. Kt to B 2 14. Castles 14. Castles 15. R to K sq 15. QtoB3 16. Kt to K 4 16. Q toB4 17. Q Kt to Kt 5 17. Kt to Q 5 18. B takes B (oh) 18. K takes B 19. R to K 4 19. Kt to Q 3 20. R to B 4 20. Q to Kt 3 {h) There is no other escape from the mate. The middle and end of this game is one of the most interesting in the " Tournament. " Notes by the Editor of the " Turf, Field and Farm." (a) Had the first player already Castled on the King's side, this would be a rery good move. As it is, however, it only results to Black's disadvantage. THE SICILIAN GAME. 823 21. E takes Kt (J) 21. P takes E 22. Q to B 3 (ch) - 22. K to Kt sq 23. B to B 4 23. P to K 4 (c) 24. B takes P 24. E to K sq 25. Kl to B 7 25. R to K Kt sq 26. P to R 5 (d) 26. Q to K 3 27. K Kt to Kt 5 ■ 27. Q takes B (e) 28. Kt takes Q 28. R takes Kt 29. Q to Kt 3 29. R to K E sq 30. Kt to B 7 30. Kt takes Kt 31. Q takes Kt 31. Q E takes P 32. Q to K 8 (ch) (/) 32. K to B 2 33. Q to K 4 33. B to Q B 4 34. R to Q sq 34. P to R 4 35. R to Q 3 35. P to K Kt 4 36. P to R 3 36. P to R 5 37. P to Q Kt 4 37. P takes P en 38. P takes P 38. B takes P 39. Q takes P 39. R to R 8 (ch) 40. K to Kt 2 40. Q R to R 7 (ch) 41. KtoB3 41. R toBsq (ch) 42. K to Kt 4 42. Q R takes P 43. P to Kt 4 43. B to Kt 7 44. Q takes Q P (ch) 44. K to Kt sq 45. Q to Q 6 (ch) 45. K to Kt 2 46. P to Kt 5 46. Q E to B 3 47. Q to K 7 (ch) 47. K to B sq 48. R to Q 7 48. B to K 4 49. R to R 7 49. Q R to B 2 50. Q to K 6 (oh) 50. Resigns Game VIII. — Between Messrs. Steinitz and MacDonnell. (From the " Transactions of the British Chess Association, 1866-1867.") White (Mr. Steinitz). Black (Mr. MacDonnell). 1. P to K 4 1. P to Q B 4 2. Q Kt to B 3 2. Q Kt to B 3 (J) Admirably conceived ! The combination of which this is the initiatory move is one of the finest things in chess we have seen for a long time. (c) Apparently the only defence against the deadly move of Kt to K B 7. (d) Taken in conjunction with the sacrifice of tlie exchange, M. Rosenthal's conception is a masterpiece of chess strategy. («) There is nothing better left. (/) Even now White has hy no means an easy game to win. 824 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. 3. K Kt to B 3 4. P to Q4 5. Kt takes P 6. P to K Kt 3 7. Kt takes Kt 8. PtoK5 9. QtoQ2 10. Kt to K 4 11. B to Q 3 ' 12. P to K B 4 13. P takes P 14. Kt takes B 15. Q to Q B 3 (a) 16. P to Q Kt 3 17. P to Q R 3 18. K E to B sq 19. Q B to Kt 2 20. Castles 21. P to K R 4 22. P to K R 5 23. K B to Q B 4 24. Q to K 5 (c) 25. R takes Kt (e) 26. Q to K 8 (ch) 27. B takes P (ch) 28. B takes Q (ch) 29. Q to K 6 30. P to E R 6 3. Pto K3 4. E takes P 5. P to Q R 3 6. B to Q B 4 7. Kt P takes Kt 8. Q to Q Kt 3 9. Kt to K 2 10. Castles 11. Kt to Kt 3 12. PtoQ3 13. P to K B 4 14. Q takes Kt 15. Q takes P 16. P to Q R 4 17. QtoQ4 18. Q R to R 2 19. P to Q B 4 20. Q to Q B 3 21. K E to K B 2 22. Kt to K 2 (6) 23. kt to Q 4 24. Q to Q B 2 25. P takes E 26. R to K B sq 27. Q to K B 2 28. Q E takes B 29. R to K B 3 30. Resigns Game IX. — Between Mr. Steinitz and Mr. Anderssen. (From the " Transactions of the British Chess Association, 1866-1867.") White (Mr. Steinitz). Black (Mr. Anderssen). 1. P to K 4 1. P to Q B 4 2. P to K Kt 3 2. Q Kt to B 3 Notes hy Messrs. Lowenthal and Medley. (a) A good move, as if the Queens are changed he will maintair. his passed Pawn. (ft) Although tlie Kiiiglit hy this means reaches the centre more speedily, his retreat to K B square is safer. (c) A powerful mode of continuing the attack. (d) Under tlie circumstances Q R to Q 2 would be a better resource, but Black would still be under considerable pressure. (e) The most skilful method of terminating the game. THE SICILIAN GAME. 825 3. B to K Kt 2 4. K Kt to K 2 5. Q Kt to B 3 6. Castles 7. P to K B 4 8. P to K E 3 9. Kt to Q 5 10. Kt takes Kt(ch) 11. P to K B 5 12. P to Q B 4 13. Kt to Q B 3 14. P to Q 3 15. P to Q R 3 16. P to Q Kt 3 17. B to K 3 18. P takes P 19. Kt to Q E. 4 20. R takes B 21. Q to her 2 22. P to Q 4 23. P to Q 5 24. B takes B 25. K to R sq 26. Q to K Kt 5 27. P to K B 6 28. P.to K R 4 29. B to K R 3 30. Q E to his 2 31. R to Q sq 32. Q to her 2 33. Q to K 3 34. B to K 6 (c) 3. PtoK4 4. Kt to K B 3 5. P toQ 3 6. Bto K 2 7. P to K R 4 8. B to Q 2 9. Q to her B sq 10. B takes Kt 11. Kt to K 2 12. Q to her sq 13. Q B to his 3 14. Q to her 2 15. P to Q R 4 16. P to Q Kt 4 17. P to Q Kt 5 IS. B P takes P 19. B takes Kt 20. Kt to Q B 3 21. B to Q sq 22. B to Q Kt 3 23. Qto R2 24. Q takes B (ch) 25. Kt to Q sq (a) 26. K to B sq 27. P to K Kt 3 28. Kt to Q Kt 2 29. Q E to Q sq (6) 30. K to his sq 31. E to Q R sq 32. Kt to Q B 4 33. K to Q sq 34. Q to Q Kt 2 (d) Notes hy Messrs. Lowenthal arid Medley. {a) The plausible move of Kt to Q 5 would uot be so effective. Black now threatens to occupy Q B 4 sq at the right moment, attacking both the left wing and the centre of the enemy's position. (b) Mr. Anderssen might have played without delay Kt to Q B 4 as the reply if B to K B 5 and B to K 6 do not appear to gain "White any advantage. (c) Ingeniously conceived, but not critically sound, for though B cannot be taken at once without danger to the second player, that piece will be subse- quently in jeopardy, and also be unable to aid in the defence of his own King's beleaguered quarters until it is too late. (d) Not only relieving his Q, but threatening also to capture • the hostile Bishop, and then the King's Pawn with the Knight, having every way the best game. 826 THE CHEsS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. 35. K to Kt sq 36. P takes P 37. Q R to his sq 38. Q R to Kt sq 39. B to K R 3 (/) 40. B to K B sq 41. R to Q 2 42. K to R 2 43. K R to Q sq 44. Q to K R 6 45. R takes R 46. Q to K B 8 Qh) 47. B to Kt 2 48. Q takes K B P (ch) 49. P to Q B 5 50. K to Kt sq 51. P takes P (ch) 52. R takes P (ch) 53. R to Q Kt sq 54. R to Q Kt 5 (ch) 36. P to Q R 5 (e) 36. P to Kt 6 37. P to Kt 7 38. R takes Q R P 39. K to y B 2 {g) 40. K R to Q R sq 41. Q R to Q Kt 5 42. K R to Q R 8 43. R to Kt 6 44. R takes R 45. Q to Q Kt 5 46. Q to lier 7 (ch) 47. Q to Q 6 48. Kt to Q 2 49. Q takes K Kt P (ch) 50. R to K B 6 51. K to Kt 3 52. K to B 4 53. R to Q B 7 54. K to Q B 5 (i), and wms. Game X. — Between the same Opponents. (From the " Transactions of the British Chess Association, 1866-1867.") White (Mr. Steinitz). Black (Mr. Anclersseu). 1. P to Q B 4 P to K 4 P to K Kt 3 K B to Kt 2 K Kt to K 2 Castles 6. P to Q B 3 2. Q Kt to B 3 3. P to K 4 4. P to Q 3 5. K Kt to B 3 6. Q to her B 2 (e) A careful e.xamiiiation will show that P takes B, followed by 'Q or Kt takes K P, would have been very dangerous. (/) The B must retreat now to avoid a worse fate. (g) Better than the simple capture of the Q B R. After this move Black is in no peril of losing his passed Pawn, but all his pieces are brought into co-operation at the point of the attack. (h) Under the circumstances, Mr. Steinitz plays quite properly in persevering in his counter-attack, as he has thereby a chance of saving or winning the game, unless his opponent is watchful. He could not attempt to defend himself, none of his pieces being able to quit their present positions for that purpose without immediate loss, whilst Black on his side threatens to occupy Q B 6 with his Kt. (i) Mr. Anderssen conducts the whole of this game in his best style. THE SICILIAN GAME. 827 v. P to Q 4 7. Q B to Q 2 8. Q Kt to E 3 8. P to Q R 3 9. Q Kt to Q B 2 9. Q to her B sq 10. Q Kt to K 3 10. K B to K 2 11. QKtto Q 5 11. K B toQs(] 12. Q P takes Q B P 12. P takes P 13. B to K Kt 5 13. Kt takes Kt 14. B takes B 14. Kt takes Q B P (a) 15. Kt takes Kt 15. Q takes B 16. Q to her 6 16. Q to K 2 17. Q to her B 7 17. Castles 18. Kt to Q 5 18. Q to her sq 19. Q takes Kt P 19. R to Q Kt sq 20. Q takes R P 20. R takes Q Kt P 21. Q to her B 4 21. Q to her R 4 22. K R to Q B sq 22. K R to Q E sq (6) 23. Q takes P 23. Q takes Q 24. R takes Q 24. Kt to Q 5 25. K R to Q B 7 25. B to K 3 26. P to Q R 4 26. F to K R 3 27. P to K R 3 27. Q R to his 4 28. Q R to his 3 28. K to R sq 29. Q R to Ms sq 29. K to E 2 30. Q R to his 3 30. P to K R 4 31. Q R to his sq 31. K to R 3 32. Kt to Q B 3 (c) 32. Q R to Q B 7 33. Q R to K sq 33. K E takes Q R P 34. Kt takes R 34. R takes R 35. Kt to Q Kt 6 35. R to a B 7 36. Kt to Q 5 36. R to Q 7 37. Kt to K 3 37. P to K Kt 3 38. E to Q E sq 38. B to Q E 7 39. B to K B sq 39. P to K B 3 40. Kt to Q B 4 40. B takes Kt 41. B takes B 41. P to K E 5 (d) Notes by Messrs. Lowenthal and Medley. (a) We suspect that some of Black's moves with his Queen at an earlier period lost a little time. At this point Kt to K 6 would, perhaps, have been a better resource, for although, by the move in the text, the second player wins a Pawn f jr the moment, he is placed immediately in difficulties. (b) Kt to Q 5 looks promising, but careful examination will show he is wanted to guard his own K 2. (c) This appears to be the primary cause of the loss of White's passed Pawn ; it is difficult, however, to suggest a really good move for him at this Juncture. {d) An excellent mode of putting White directly ou the defence. 828 THE CHESS-PLAYEK'S MANUAL. 42. P to Kt 4 43. K to Kt -i, 44. B to Q 5 45. R to Q R 6 (e) 46. E takes P 47. R to Q 6 48. K to E 2 49. K to Kt sq 50. E to R 6 51. B to Q B 4 52. B to Kt 5 53. R to Q R 3 54. R to Q R 8 55. R to K 8 56. K to R 2 57. K to Kt sq 58. K takes P 69. K to R sq 60. R takes P 61. E to K 8 42. Kt to B 6 (ch) 43. Kt to Kt 4 44. R to g 6 45. Kt takes E P 46. K t" Kt 4 47. Kt to B 5 (ch) 48. E to Q 7 49. P to E 6 50. K to E 5 51. E to Q 5 52. K takes P 53. K to E 5 54. P to Kt 4 55. E to Q 8 (ch) 56. R to Q 7 57. P to R 7 (oh) 58. R takes P (ch) 59. P to Kt 5 60. P to Kt 6 61. R to K R 7 (ch) And White resigned. Game XI. — Between Herr Zdkertort and Mr. De Vere. Played in the Grand Tournament, July Zrd, 1872. (From the " Westminster Papers.") White (Herr Zukertort). 1. P to K 4 2. Kt to K B 3 3. Kt to Q B 3 4. P to Q 4 5. Kt takes P 6. B to K 2 (a) 7. Castles 8. K Kt to Kt 5 (c) 9. Kt takes P Black (Mr. De Vere). 1. P to Q B 4 2. Kt to Q B 3 3. P to K 3 • 4. P takes P 5. P to Q E 3 6. Q to B 2 7. K Kt to K 2 (6) 8. P takes Kt 9. Q to E 4 (d) [e) R to K R sq does not appear to be stronger. («) Notes by Herr Zukertort. (a) Stronger than 6. B to K 3 and 7. B to Q 3. The weakness of Black's position is on the Queen's side. (6) Black overlooks the dangerous position of his Queen. (c) A perfectly sound sacrifice. (d) Q to Kt sq was .perhaps the best, but this only prolongs the game. THE SICILIAN GAME. 829 10. B to Q 2 10. Q to Kt 3 (e) 11. Bto K 3 11. Q toE4 12. Kt to Q 6 (ch) 12. K to Q sq 13. Kt takes B P (ch) 13. K to K sq 14. Kt to Q 6 (ch) 14. K to Q sq 15. Kt to B 4 (/) 15. Q to Kt 5 (g) 16. P to Q R 3 16. Q takes Kt 17. B takes Q 17. Resigns (e) If Q to B 5, AVhite wins the Queen by P to Q Kt 3. (/) Winning the Queen oi' mating in two moves, (ji) Intending to win three pieces for the Queen by 16. B to Kt 6 (ch) 16. K to K sq 17. Kt to Q 6 (ch) 17. Q takes Kt 18. Q takes Q 18. Kt to Q 4 Black's moves being forced. CHAPTEE XXXI. ON SOME OTHER LESS PRACTISED DEBUTS. GAME THE FIEST. WHITE. BLACK. 1. P to K B 4 This way of opening is noticed by Stein, a Dutch, writer, but is not so advantageous as either P to K 4 or P to Q 4. 1. P to Q 4, or Varns (I.), (II.), (III.) 2. P to K 3, or (A.) 2. P to Q B 4 3. Kt to K B 3 3. Kt to Q B 3 4. P to Q 4 4. P to K 3 5. P to Q B 4 5. Kt to K B 3 And Black has shghtly the better position. {Vide Diagram.) Diagram. WHITE. ON SOME OTHER LESS PRACTISED Dl&BUTS. 831 Vakiation (I.) On Black's first move : — 1. P to K B 4 S. Kt to K B 3 S. Kt to K B 3 3. P to Q 4 3. P to Q 4 And the game is strictly equal. Variation (II.) On Black's first move : — 1. P to K 3 a. Kt to K B 3 (If 2. P ^°-^ P to Q 4, and Black has the advantage). 2. P to Q 4 3. P to K 3 3. P to Q B 4 4. B to Kt 5 (ch) 4. Kt to B 3 5. B takes Kt (ch) 5. P takes B 6. P to Q B 4 6. B to R 3 7. Kt to R 3 7. B to Q 3 And we prefer Black's game. The above Variation is to be found in a game between Messrs. Anderssen and Kolisch. Variation (III.) On Black's first move : — 1. P to K 4 S. P to Q 3 3. B takes P 4. Kt to K R 3 5. Kt to Kt 5 6. Kt takes K R P g K to K 2 2. P takes P 3. P takes P 4. Kt to K B 3 5. PtoK4 6. P to K Kt 3 7. R takes Kt /Tf ,, Kt takes Kt ^ ■ Bt^kesP(ch) B takes Kt, and Black wins). 832 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. 7. B takes P (ch) 8. K to K 2 8. B takes K 9. Kt takes B, and "La Strategie " declares White has the advantage ; but suppose Black now plays 9. Q to K E 5, he must gain another Pawn, e.g. : — 9. Q to E 5 10. Kt to K B 3 10. Q takes P (ch) 11. K to B 2, and White has two minor pieces. against a Eook and two Pawns, which, all things considered, does not constitute any great superiority. (A.) 2. Kt to K B 3 2. B to K Kt 5, or (B.) Black can also play 2. P to Q B 4, with a good game, for which see (B.). 3. Kt to K 5 3. B to K B 4 4. P to K Kt 4 4. P to K 8 6. P to K Kt 5 5. P to K B 3 6. Kt to K B 3 6. P takes P 7. Kt takes P 7. B to K 2 And Black has gained time. (B.) 2. P to Q B 4 3. P to K 3 3. Q Kt to B 3 4. B to Kt 5 4. P to Q E 3 5. B takes Kt (ch) 5. P takes B 6. Castles. Even game. GAME THE SECOND. WHITE. BLACK. 1. P to Q B 4 1. P to^K B 4, or Vars. (I.)', (II.), (III.) ON SOME OTHER LESS PRACTISED DfiBUTS. 833 Black may also play 1. P to Q B 4, or 1. P to K 3, and secure an even game. If, however, he play 1. P to K 4, he wiU get a had position ultimately. For these three different modes of defence, see Variations (I.), (II.), (III.). Black's move of 1. P to K B 4, in answer to 1. P to Q B 4 on the part of the first player, is not noticed by Mr. Staunton ia the " Handbook." 2. P to K 3 Instead of this move, Black may play 2. P to K Kt 8, as adopted by Mr. Wisker in one o the games of his third match with Mr. Bird, with the folio viig sontinuation : — 2 P to K Kt. 3 3 B to Kt 2 ^ P to Q R 3 g P to Q 4 ■ P to K 3 ■ Kt to K B 3 ' P to Q 4 ' Kt to Q B 3 g Kt to B 3 „ Kt to K B 3, and the game is about even. See ■ P to K Kt 3 Illustrative Game I. 2. P to K 3 3. P to Q E 8 3. Kt to K B 3 4. Kt to Q B 3 4. B to K 2 5. Kt to K B 3 5. Castles 6. P to Q 4, and the positions are about even. Variation (I.) On Black's first move : — 1. P to K 4 2. Q Kt to B 3, or (A.) We cannot agree with some authorities who make White play 2. P to K 8 here, and consider Black gets the better game. On the contrary, we are of opinion that White should at least obtain an even game. Mr. Staunton shows the absurdity of this notion (" Handbook," p. 384), and points out that when Black plays 1. P to K 4, in answer to 1. P to Q B 4, the position is the same as that which occurs in the Sicilian 834 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. opening, with this difference, that " White has the advantage of the move." 2. P to K B 4 This move is given hy Staunton, Lewis, and the " Hand- bnch ; " but we would suggest 2. Kt to K B 3 as a safer defence, with the following continuation : — 2 3 PtoQ 4 4 P to Q 3, &c. ■ Kt to K B 3 ■ B to Q B To resume the main Variation : 3. P to K 3 3. Kt to K B 3 4. P to Q 4 4. P to K 5 5. P to Q E 3 Staunton makes White play 5. Kt to K R 3 here, and con- siders he has a fine position. 5. P to Q 4 6. P takes P 6. Kt takes P 7. B to Q B 4 7. Kt to Kt 3 8. P to K B 3, with the better game. (A.) 2. P to K 3 2. Kt to K B 3 3. Kt to Q B 3 3. P to Q 4 4. P to Q 4 4. P takes Q P 5. K P takes P 5. B to Q Kt 5 And Black has at least an equal position. Some authorities prefer his game. Vaeiation (II.) On Black's first move : — 1. P to Q B 4 White has three moves here — viz. ,2. P to K 4, 2. Kt to Q B 3, and 2. P to K B 4. ON SOME OTHER LESS PRACTISED DEBUTS. 835 If, firstly : S. P to K 4 S. P to K 4 3. P to Q 3 3. P to Q 3 4. P to K B 4 4. Kt to K B 3 5. Kt to K B 3 5. Kt to Q B 3 Even game, according to Jaenisch. Secondly : 2. Kt to Q B 3 3. Kt to Q B 3 3. P to K 4 3. P to K 4 4. P to Q 3 4. P to Q 3 5. P to K B 4 5. P to K B 4 6. Kt to B 3 6. Kt to B 8 And again the positions are equal. Thirdly : 2. P to K B 4 2. P to K B 4 3. Q Kt to B 3 3. Kt to K B 3 4. P to Q 3 4. P to Q 3 5. PtoK4 5. KttoB 3 6. Kt to B 3 6. P to K 4 And the position is the same as in the preceding Variation. Staunton prefers 2. P to K 3 for White, but no great advan- tage would accrue to the first player by that line of play. Variation (III.) On Black's first move : — 1. P to K 3 2. P to K 4 2. P to Q B 3 3. P to Q 4 3. P to Q 4 Even game. 3 H 2 836 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. GAME THE THIED. WHITE. BLACK. 1. P to Q 4 1. P to K B 4 - This move, first noticed by Stein, in 1789, in his "Nouvel Essai sur le Jeu des Echecs," is considered a safe defence by Von der Lasa, and was successfully adopted by Morphy against Harrwitz. 2. P to K 4 This move was fii'st played by Staunton against Horwitz, and is considered by the former authority a recommendable mode of carrjdng on the attack ("Handbook," p. 381); but the following analysis shows its weakness. 2. P takes P (best) If Black play 2. P to Q 3, White gets the better game. 3. Kt to Q B 3 3. Kt to K B 3 Black may also play here 3. P to K 3, and get a good game, as follows : — 3 4 QtoR5 (ch) g Q to K 5 „ Bto K Kt 5 ■ P to K 3 ■ P to Kt 3 ■ Kt to K B 3 ' B to K 5J ,. PtoQS g B to K R 6 g Q to Q 4 ^^ Q to Q 2 '■ Ca8tles 'PtoQS ' P to K 4 ' R to B 2 -^^ P to K R 3 j2 Castles ^^ B to Q B 4 ^^ K Kt to K 2 ■ Q Kt to Q 2 ■ Kt to Q B 4 ' B to Q 2 ' P to Q R 4^' j5 P to K Kt 4 ^g Kt to Kt 3 Q to K sq P to Q Kt 4, and the " Handbuch," from which we extract this variation, prefers Black's game. These moves occur in a game between Messrs. Owen and Anderssen. 4. B to K Kt 5 4. P to Q B 3 (best) Black may also play here 4. P to K 3 and P to Q 4. The /irst move is safe, but the latter loses the game, e.g. : — ON SOME OTHER LESS PRACTISED DEBUTS. 837 If firstly : 4. — 5. Ijake^t Kt takes P P to K 3 Q takes B y to Et 3 ^ B to Q 3 g Qjo^Ro(ch) g QtoK5 ^ Q takes R ■ Q takes Kt P ' P to Kt 3 ' Q takes R " ' Q takes Kt (ch) j^ "K to Q 2 j2 Kt to B 6 (ch) ^^ Q to Kt 8 (ch) ■ Qtakes R ' K to B 2 ' K to K 2 (best) ^^ Q takes RP(ch) ^^ Q take s P (ch) ^g Q to Xt !S (ch) K takes Kt (best) ' K to K 2 ' K to B 2 17 Q to Kt 6 (ch), aiid White draws by perpetual check. If, secondly : 4. 5. l""^'"' ^' 6. Q^^AA (<=!') '' P to Q 4 P takes B P to Kt 3 „ Q takes Q P „ Kt ta kes P, White winning a Pawn with the better ■ B to KB game. There is yet another move at Black's disposal at this point, viz., 4. P to K Kt 3, the consequences of which it is well to show. Tf +1,™ ti,™.ii„ A K ^ takes Kt „ Kt takes P If, then, thirdly : 4. ^ ^ ,^ ^^^ ^ 5. — — — 6. P to K Kt 3 P takes B B to K Kt 2, even game. 5. B takes Kt 5. K P takes B 6. Kt takes P Staunton, " La Strategic," and the " Handbuch," all make Black play now 6. P to Q 4, which merelj'^ leads to an even e.g. :— g ^ Kt t o K Kt 3 g BtoQ3 ^ K Kt to K 2 P to Q 4 B to Q 3 or (a) Castles P to K B 4 jQ P to K B 4 j^j P to Q B 3 ^^ P takes P ^.^ Kt to Q B 3 ■ptoQB4 'P takes P ' B to Kt 5 (ch) and the game is equal. (») 7. Q t(j Q Kt 3. This move was successfully adopted by Stelnitz against Neumann, w ith the following continuation : 8 Q to K 2 ( ch) g Castles ^q Q to B 3 ■ K to B 2 ■ Kt to R 3 ' P to K Kt 3, even game. 6. Qto QKt3 This move was communicated to the author by Mr. Black- burne, as the invention of Herr Steinitz. It appears to give Black a decided advantage. 7. Q to K 2 7. Q takes Kt P 838 THE CHESS-PLAYEK'S MANUAL. The position is now so interesting that we give a diagram. Diagram. BLACK. J 9// / '/, 11 i i w my. p m -mM ; #. P^mM. JWMM,,^ » PIS ,,o B %„„„ ^ WHiTJS. White to play and mate in three moves. 3 I 2 852 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. No. 5. By Mr. Loyd, of New York. I ^m k 'WW ^^■NM^ WHITE. White to play and compel Black to checkmate him in nme moves. SOLUTIONS OF PEOBLBMS. WHITE. 1. Q to R 3 2. P to K 4 (ch) 3. B mates No. I. BLACK. 1. Q takes Q (best) 2. K takes P, or moves 1. Q to Q Kt 8 2. Kt checks 3. Q mates 2. Q to K 8 3. Q mates No. II. (a) 1. Kt takes P, or (a) 2. Anything 1. P to Kt 6 2, Anything 1. Kt to B 3 (ch) 2. Kt to B 2 3. B mates No. III. 1. P takes Kt 2. K takes E 1. Q to Q E 4 2. Q to Q B 6 (ch) 3. Mates 2. Q to K 8 (ch) 3. P becomes a Kt mate No. IV. (a) 1. K takes E (a) 2. Anything 1. B takes R 2. K takes R No. V. 1. B to Q 7 2. R takes Q 3. R to K 3, mate 1. QtoK Kt4(a) 2. R, Kt, or P takes R (J) 874 THE OHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. WHITE. 3. Kt takes E, mate 2. P to Q 6 (a) BLACK. 2. R takes P at K Kt 6 1. R takes P at K Kt 6 Black has now no less than " thirty-eight " diflferent moves, and what- ever he plays, he is mated by one of the white pieces, or by the Pawn retaking the Rook. No. VI. 1. P to K E 4 2. Kt to Q B 5 i^cn, (lf;0, K. to Q 5 3. Kt to K 3, mate 2. Kt takes K B P 3. B mates 3. Kt mates 2. E takes P (ch) 3. Kt mates (a) (c) (6) 1. Kt takes R (a) i,. K to B 4 „ P mates) 1. KtoB4(6) 2. K takes Kt (q 9 Anything 1. Anything 2. K to B 4 1. R to Q 7 2. Q to R 4 or Kt 4 3. B or R mates 2. R takes B (ch) 3. Q mates No. VII. (a) 1. K to B 4, K 4, or 6 (a) 2. K or B moves 1. K to Q 6 (6) 2. K moves SOLUTIONS OF PROBLEMS. WHITE. 2. Q to Kt 3 (ch) 3. Q or B mates BLACK. 1. K to B 5 2. K moves 875 1. Kt takes P 2. Q to K Kt sq 3. Q or B mates No. 'Vli.L 1. PtoK B 4 (best) 2. Anything No. IX. 1. E takes P 2. R to K 4 (ch) 3. R mates 2. R to Q 5 fcV' 3. R mates 2. R at Q 3 takeb ±i (ch) 3. R to Q 5, mate 2. R at Q B 4 takes R 3. R mates (a) (6) (o/ ' . R takes R at Q 6, or R takes B at Q sq, or (a) 2. K moves 1. R takes R at B 5, or R takes B at Kt 5, or (b) 2. K moves 1. K to Q 3, or (c) i. K moves 1. P toQKt4 2. P takes? 1. QtoQRsq 2. Q to K sq 3. Q mates at K Kt 3 2. Q to Q R 5 3. Q to B 7, mate No. X. (a) 1. K to B 5, or (a) 2. K to Kt 4 1. K to Q 3 2. K to K 2 876 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. No. XI. WHITE. BLACK. 1. Q to K 7 1. E takes Q, or (A), (B), (C), (D). 2. Kt takes Kt P 2. P or Q takes Kt 3. Kt takes R, double check and mate, or single check and mate. (A) 1. Q takes Q 2. Kt takes Kt P 2. P takes Kt, or P to K B 3 3. Kt takes Q, or B P double check and mate 2. Q takes E (ch) 3. R mates (B) J.. Q takes Kt 2. K takes Q 2. Q takes E (ch) 3. E mates (C) 1. E takes B 2. K takes Q 2. Q takes R (ch) 3. R mates (D) 1. Kt moves 2. K takes Q l.BtoK Ktsq 2. Q to K Kt 2 3. Kt takes Kt P 4. Kt mates No. XIL 1. Kt to B 6 (a) 2. P takes Q 3. Anything 2. Q to Kt 2 3. Kt takes Kt P 4. Kt mates (a) 1. Kt to Kt 6 2. P takes Q 3. Anything 1. R to Q 2 2. B to Kt 2 3. K to E 5 4. Kt mates No. XIII. 1. P takes R 2. PtakesKt(a) 3. Anything SOLUTIONS OF PROBLEMS. (a) 877 3. B to B sq (ch) 4. P mates BLACK. 2. P Knights (h) 3. K moves (6) 3. Kt to K 3 (oh) 4. P mates 2. P Queens 3. K moves No. XIV. 1. E, from Q 3 to Q 4 2. R takes Kt 3. E takes P (ch) 4. R takes P, mate 1. P to Q 4 (a) 2. R to K 8, best 3. P takes R 1. R to K 8 2. R takes Q P, and mate follows at once No. XV. 1. RtoR6 2. B takes Kt (ch) 3. Kt to Q B 2 4. Kt mates 2. R to Q 5 (ch) 3. B to K 5 4. R takes Kt, mate (a) 1. P takes R, or B moves, or (a) 2. K or B takes B 3. Anything 1. Kt to K B 4, or Q B 3, or (6) 2. Kt covers 3. Anything 2. RtoB4(ch) 3. R to R 3 (ch) 4. R takes Kt, mate Q>) 1. K to Q 5, or (c) 2. K to Q 6 3. Kt covers 878 THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. W WHITE. 2. 3. R to E 3 (ch) B mates 1. 2. 3. 4. KtoBS KtoK8 KtoQS Kt to Kt 7, mate No. XVI. BLACK. 1. Kt takes K 2. Anything 1. Kt to Q 2 (cli) (a) 2. Kt to B 3, or B 7 (6) 3. Anything (6) 2. Kt to K 4 (dis. ch) or (c) 3. R takes B (oh) 3. Anything 4. Kt mates (a) 1. K to Q 2 2. Kt to K 3 (dis. ch) 2. Q to Kt 5 3. B takes Q (oh) 3. K to B 2 4. Kt takes P, mate («) 2. Kt to B 4 (dis. ch) 3. K to Q 8 3. Anything 4. Kt mates No. xvn. 1. Q to Q 8 1. Kt to Q 2 (a) 2. QtoR4 2. Kt to B sq (ch), best 3. E takes Kt 3. B to B 5, best 4. Q to B 2 (ch) 4. B covers 5. Q takes B, mate (a) 1. P takes Q R P (6) 2. B takes Kt(ch) 2. K to Kt 5 (c) 3. QtoR4(ch) 3. B covers 4. Q takes B (ch) 4. KtoKte 5. Q to B 4, mate (c) 2. Kt takes B 3. Q takes B (ch) 3. K to Q 5 4. Q takes Kt, mate SOLUTIONS OF PROBLEMS. 879 (6) WHITE. 2. Q to B, 4 3. P to Q 6 ((lis. ch) 4. E takes Kt, or Q to B 2 (ch) 5. Q mates 3. P takes P (ch) 4. Q takes Q, mate 2. (jtoE4 3. Kt takes Q B P 4. Q to B 2 (ch) 5. Q takes E, or B mates 2. B takes Kt (oh) 3. Q takes B (ch) 4. Q takes Kt, mate 2. Q takes B 3. QtoB5(ch) 4. Q or B mates («) w (/) [g) {^ BLACK. 1. KttoB5((i) 2. B to B 5, best (e) 3. Kt covers 4. Anything 2. Kt to K 6 3. Q takes P 1. RtoR3(/) 2. P takes Q E P, best 3. E takes P, or B to B 5 4. E or B covers 1. P to B 7, or P Queens {g) 2. Kt takes B 3. K to Q 5 1. KtoQf, 2. K to K 6 (i) 3. K to Q 7 3. Q to B 4 (ch) 4. P discovers mate, or Q to B 4, mate 2. Kt takes Q E P (^) 3. K to B 4 3. QtoK5(ch) 4. Q takes Kt, mate (I) 2. Kt takes Q ? 3. KtoB4 No. XVIII. 1. EfromQ Kt 3 to Q E 3 1. 2. Kt to Q 5 2. P takes R (forced) K to Kt, or (a) 880 THE CHESS-PLAYEE'ri MANUAL. WHITE. 3. K to K 6 4. Kt to K 3 (ch) 5. P to Q B 4, mate 3. Kt to K 7 4. R to R 5 5. Kt to Q B 6, mate (a) (.b) BLACK. 3. B takes P (forced) 4. P takes Kt 2. K to Q Kt 4 3. K to Q Kt 5, or (b) 4. Anything 3. BtoQB6 4. K takes B and mates next move No. XIX. 1. Q takes Q Kt P 2. Q to K Kt 2 3. Q to Q R 8 4. Kt to Q B 6 (ch) 5. Q takes K B, mate 4. Kt to K B 7 (ch) 5. Q to K R 8, mate 4. Q to Q Kt 8 (ch) 5. Kt, mates (a) (b) («) 4. Q takes Kt, and mates next move No. XX. 1. Kt to Q 7 2. B to Q sq 3. B to K 7 4. R to Kt 4 (ch) 5. Q mates (a) 2. BtoK7 3. B to Q sq 4. E to Kt 4 (ch), and mates next move 1. R to Q R 3 (best) 2. E takes B (forced) 3. R takes Kt, or (a) (ft) 4. R takes Kt (c) 3. PtoKKt7 4. B takes Kt 3. P to Q 4 4. R covers 3. Kt to K B 6 (ch) 1. R from B 2 takes Kt, or (a) 2. R takes B 3. Kt takes B 4. P takes R ' 1. R from Q sq takes Kt 2. R takes B (best) 3. R to K R 2 (best) PEOBLEMS. 881 No. XXI. WHITE. 1. Kt from K Kt 6 takes P i. 2. Q to K 6 2. 3. Kt to Q B 5 (couble ch) 3. 4. Ktfi'omKB4takesP(ch) 4. 5. B to K 4, or Kt takes E P, mate BLACK. P takes P (A. B. C.) P takes Q (1. 2. 3. 4. 5.) K to Q 5 (best) K to Q 4, or B 6 (1) 3. Kt to Q Kt 2 (dis ch) 4. Kt takes K P 5. Kt to Q sq, or Q to E 6, mate 2. P to K 7 3. K to K 6 (a) 4. P takes Q, or Kt takes Kt (a) 4. Q to Q 5 (ch) 5. Kt takes E P, or Q to K 4, mate 3. K to Q 5 4. K to B 6, or K 6 (2) 3. Kt to K B 2 (double ch) 4. Q to Q 5 (ch) 5. Kt to Q sq, mate 3. Kt to B 5 (double ch) 4. Q to Q 5 (ch) 5. Kt takes E P, mate (3) 2. E to E 3 3. K to Q 5 (best) 4. K to B 6 2. E to Q Kt 4 3. K to Q 5 4. K to B 6 (4) 3. Kt takes Kt (dis ch) 4. Kt to K 2 (ch) 5. Q takes Kt, mate 3. Kt to B 5 (double ch) 4. Q to Q 5 (ch) 5. Kt to K 2, mate (5) 2. Q to Q Kt 2 3. K to Q 5 (best) 4. KtoQB4 2. P to Q Kt 7 3. K to Q 5 (best) 4. KtoB6 3 L THE CHESS-PLAYER'S MANUAL. (A-.) 2. P takes Kt (ch) 3. KttoK5 4. Kt to K Kt 2 (double ch) 5. K to K R 4, mate (6) 3. Q to R 5 (oh) 4. Q to Q 5 (ch), or Kt dis double check, and mates next move (B.) 2. B takes Kt (ch) 3. Kt to Q 5 (dis ch) 4. Q to R 7 (ch) 5. Q takes P, mate 2. Q to K R 5 3. Kt takes Kt 4. Q mates accordingly (C.) (7) 3. Kt to K B 2, or Q to B 5 (dis ch) 4. Q to R 6, or Kt to Q 5, mate (8) 3. Kt to Q 5 (ch) 4. Kt dis double ch, mate BLACK. 1. Kt to K B 6 (ch) 2. KtakesKP(6) 3. B takes Kt (best) 4. K takes P 2. K takes BP 3. K to K 5 (best) 1. Kt takes Kt (ch) 2. K takes P (best) 3. K takes B 4. P to K B 4 1. K takes P 2. Kt takes Kt (ch), or (7) (8) 3. Anything 2. K to K 5 3. K takes Kt, or to K 6 2. Kt to K Kt 5 3. KtoK5 No. XXII. 1. Kt to K B 4 2. Q to K 3 3. R covers (dis ch) 4. B covers, discovers, mate 1. B takes Kt, or (a) (i) (c) {d) (e) (/) 2. R to Q Kt 8 (ch) best (i) 3. R covers (dis ch) PROBLEMS. 683 (a) WHITE. 2. Kt to Q 5 (oh) 3. R to K Kt 4 (dis ch) 4. Q or Kt mates 2. Kt to Q 5 (ch) 3. Q to K 3 (cli) 4. K mates (b) BLACK. 1. R to Q 2, or 3 2. R takes Kt (beet) 3. Anything 1. KttoQKt? 2. K to Q 7 (2) 3. K moves 2. R to K Kt 4 (ch) 3. Kt to Q 5 (oh) 4. Kt or Q mates (c) 1. P to K 3 2. B covers 3. Anything (1.) If 2. KttoQ5(ch) 3. Q to K 3 4. R to K Kt sq 2. If 2. B to K 4 Notes. (d) 2. Kt to Q 5 (oh) 3. R to R sq 4. R, Q, or Kt mates accord- ingly (e) 2. Q to K 3 3. B takes P (dis ch) 4. Q takes R, mate 2. KtoQ7 3. K to Q 8 4. B interposes 2. Kt to Q 6, and there is no mate 1. R to Q Kt 5 2. K to Q 7 3. Anything 1. Kt to Q Kt 3 2. R to Q 3 (best) 3. R covers 2. R to K Kt 3 (dis ch) 3. R mates (/) 1. P takes B 2. Anything 884 THE CHESS-PLAYEK'S MANUAL. No. XXIII. WHITE. BLACK. 1. Kt takes K Kt P 1. B takes Kt 2. Kt to Q Kt 3 2. P takes Kt 3. QtoKBS 3. Anything 4. B, or R mates accordingly No. XXIV. 1. E to K R 3 1. P takes R, or (a) 2. KtoK2 2. PtoR7 3. BtoK3 3. P Queens 4. R mates (a) 1. P to Kt 6 2. K to K 2 2. P to Kt 7 3. R to R 4, mate No. XXV. 1. R to Kt 7 (double ch) 1. K to R sq 2. Kt fr. Q 5 to Kt 6 (ch) 2. P takes Kt 3. RtoQR7(cli) 3. Kt takes R 4. BtoQKt5(discL) 4. Kt to Q B sq 5. Q to Q 3 5. Q takes B (best) 6. R takes Kt (ch) 6. Q to Kt sq 7. Q takes K R P 7. B takes P 8. Kt takes B 8. Anything 9. Q to Kt 7 (ch) 9. Q takes Q, mate THE END. APPENDIX TO GOSSIP'S CHESS PLAYER'S MANUAL CONTAINING REVISIONS, AMENDMENTS, SPECIMEN GAMES AND PROBLEMS S. LIPSCHUTZ PREPACE. In submitting this "Appendix" to the judgment of the public I feel satisfied that intelligent readers will fully understand the difficulty of the task which devolved upon me and will therefore grant me their indulgence. Mr. Gossip's "Manual" presents an excellent study to a multitude of devotees to the game, of different degrees of strength. It is distinguished by the correctness of its proof-reading and the avoidance of clerical errors, which are so irritating to the learner. In his analytical treatment of the openings he has confined himself chiefly to compilations and selections from celebrated authors, and it is noteworthy that he has paid greater attention to the researches of French, German and Italian writers than any other English Chess analyst, while his illustrative examples of games comprise the most extensive and best English collection of the kind, and is only surpassed in any language by that of IV PREFACE. Salvioli's "Teoria e Pratica." But it is scarcely necessary to point out that enormous changes have been made in the theoretical and practical treatment of the game since the first appearance of Mr. Gossip's Chess work, and a large number of fine additional illustrations could be added from the different matches and tournaments that have taken place since that time. Quite a new book, of the same dimensions as the present one, might have to be compiled in order to mark all the changes of style in practice and of new inventions in theory. It was, therefore^ impossible for me to do more within the scope of the present "Appendix" than to confine myself to such alterations, additions and amend- ments as I thought most important, while carefully examining the analytical part. Nor could I be expected to compare most of the variations with all the authori- ties, who are on record, and especially as regards the change of style which is known as the outcome of the modern school of Chess. I thought it best to select such principles as were in my opinion beyond dispute from the most recent researches of the International Chess Magazine, whose editor, Mr. Steinitz, is univers- ally recognized as the chief founder of the new theories on the game. As regards the few additional games, I have consulted various modern works and periodicals, and I must also express my obligation for the advice and assistance given to me by Mr. Steinitz in framing this '■ Appendix." The new problem department con- sists of a selection from recent first-prize compositions PREFACE. V only, for which I am indebted to Dr. 0. P. Jentz, of New York. It may only be necessary to add that 1 have chosen the present form of revision after careful deliberation, in the first place in justice to the author of this book, and in order to -separate entirely his responsibility from my own. In the second place, it would have caused a great deal of labor and incon- venience, which I thought quite unnecessary, if I had made my alterations and additions in the -body of the book, as the original issue had been preserved in plates, the arrangement of which would have had to be greatly disturbed. In conclusion, I may perhaps express the hope that this work, with its " Appendix," will be satisfactory to experts as well as students. S. LiPSCHUTZ. January, 1888. APPENDIX. INTEODUCTION. Page 16, 15th line from the top.* — There is no checkmate, even if White play K to E 5 instead of K to Kt 3, which the author considers compulsory. For should Black answer K to Kt 2, then White would play P to K 4, with a great many winning chances, without danger of losing. No doubt, iu reply to K to E 5 Black can continue checking by Q to B 2 ch, and ensure a draw by perpetual check, but he has no time for a waiting move. The position on the diagram referred to occurred in a game between Morphy (White) and Harrwitz (Black). PHILIDOE'S DEFENSE. Page 39, 12th line from the top. — It should be added that if 10. P to B 4 11. P takes P in passing ch 11. K takes P 12. Kt to B 3, and Black cannot save the game. Should he continue, for instance, with 12. B to Q 3, then 13. B to Kt 5 ch 13. P takes B * In counting the lines on the pajje, each move on both sides, like „ j, . is reckoned as one linp. APPENDIX. 14. Q takes Kt P ch 14 K to B 2 15. Kt to Q 5 mate. Again if 12. Q to Q 3, then 13. Q takes K P ch, followed by B to B 4 or E to Q sq, winning the Queen. Page 42, bottom litie. — White's position is difficult, no doubt, but there is no immediate danger, and as he is two Pawns ahead, and Black's Q B is blocked in, he ought to be able to extricate himself. Page 43, 13th and 14th lines from the top. — We do not see that Black has an equivalent for the piece sacrificed if White proceed with 13. P to Q B 4 . Pa^e 45, 16th line from the top. — Instead of 12. Q takes Q, White ought to proceed with 12. E to Q sq, as played by Mr. Steinitz at Vienna, about 1859, in a game against Herr Eeiner. (See diagram.) BLACK (Herr Eeiner). Hi ■'7//// ^ ^B i „'///////////- "^m mam. a m '/////////Y/ iSl, WHITE (Mr. Steinitz). PHILIDOR'S DEFENSE. 9 The game then proceeded : 12. Q takes P 13. K B to Q B 4 13. Kt to B 2 14. B takes Q, and wins. Page 46, 12th line from the bottom.— We prefer 6. P to Q B 3 for White. In the position arrived at in Variation I, at the end of the same page, we consider that White will obtain the advantage by 9. Castles, followed by Kt to Q B 3 and P to K B 3. Page 47. — The sub-variations commencing at line 10 are repetitions of the analysis given on page 89. Compare our comments to that page. Page 49, 2d line from the hottom. — 10. Q to B 4 is much stronger than 10. Q to K 5, for if Black then castles. White may safely reply B takes P. Page 52, 6th line from the top. — ^We believe that 4. B to B 4 is not to be recommended for White. The author's demon- stration in the main line is contradictory to his proposition that the move in question is safe, for Black comes out with a Pawn ahead and a safe game. 10 APPENDIX. GAME ILLUSTKATIVE OP THE PHILIDOR'S DEFENSE. Played in the Vienna Congress of 1883, between Messrs Blackburne and Winawer. White (Mr. Winawer). 1. PtoK4 3. Kt to K B 8 3. PtoQ4 4. Kt to Q B 3 (a) 5. Q takes P 6. B to K Kt 5 7. Castles 8. Q to Q3 9. P to Q R 3 (J) 10. P to K R 3 11. B takes Kt 13. Kt to Q 5 13. P takes B 14. PtoK Kt3 15. P to K R4 16. PtoR5 17. Kt to Q 4 18. Q takes P (d) 19. Q toR4 Black (Mr. Blackburne), 1. Pto K4 3. Pto Q3 3. Ktto K B3 4. P takes P 5. Bto K3 6. Castles 7. Kt to B 3 8. B to K3 9. PtoQR3 10. PtoQKt4 11. B takes B 13. B takes Kt 13. Kt to K 3 14. Ktto Kt3 15. R to K sq 16. Kt to K 4 17. P to Q Kt 5 (c) 18. R to Kt sq 19. Kt to B 6 («) (a) Signor Salvioli, in " Teoria. e Pratica," gives the following defense as the best against 4. BtoQB4: 4. . .P talces P; 5. KttoKKtS, 5. Bto K 3; 6. B takes B, 6. P talces B ; 7. Kt takes K P, 7. Q to K 2 ; 8. Kt takes Q P, 8. Q takes P ch; 9. Q to K 3, 9. Q takes Q ch, with an even game. The following variation, which we also extract from the above-quoted Italian work, occurred between Professor Berger and Herr Kampmiller: 4. B to B4, 4. Ktto QB3; 5. Castles, 5. Bto Kt5; 6. P to B3, 6. P takes P; 7. P takes P, 7. B takes Kt ; 8. P takes B, 8. B to K 2 ; 9. Kt to B 3, 9: Castles ; 10. K to R sq, 10. P to KR3; ll.RtoKKtsq, ll.KtoR2; 12.PtoB4, 18. Kt to K Kt sq ? 18. Q to Kt4, 13. P to K Kt 4 ; 14. P takes P, 14. Kt takes P ; 15. P takes P, 15. B to B 3 ; 16. P to K 5, 16. B takes P; 17. Pto B4, 17. B to B3; 18. B to Q 3 ch, and wins; for if 18...KtoRsq; 19. Q to Kt7 ch, and mates next move. Or if 18. . . K takes P; 19. Q to R 3 ch wins easily in a few moves. (6) This gives the opponent an opportunity of forming a wing attack with his Pawns on the side on which White has castled. (o) This sacrifice of a Pawn for the attack leads to complications which give the opponent great difficulties, but we believe that with a patient and circumspective defense White might have repelled the assault and safely retained the material advantage. (d) We would have preferred 18. P takes P, with the following probable continuation : 18. ..P to R4; 19. P to Kt5 (better than 19. P takes P, in which case Black would reply 19...P to QB4, etc.), 19...P to R5; 20. QtoKt4, and should Black now proceed with 20... Ktto Kt5, then would follow 21. KttoB6, 21. Q to B sq; 22. B to R 3, and wins. (e) A beautiful move. PHILIDORS' DEFENSE. jj 20. KttoKt3(/) 31. BtoQ3(^) 33. PtoQ B3(A) 33. B to B2 34. K R to K B sq 35. K to Kt sq 26. R takes Kt 37. R to Q sq 38. B takes R 39. BtoB2(;-) 30. K to B sq 31. Q to K 4 (X) 82. K takes R 33. Q to Kt4 34. P takes B 35. K to B sq 36. Rto Q2 37. B to Kt sq 38. Bto R3 39. K to Q sq 40. K to K sq 41. RtoB2 42. KtoQ3 43. K to K sq 44. K to Q sq 45. P takes P 46. K to K sq 47. K to Q sq 48. Resigns. 30. Q to K3 31. R to Kt 3 33. K R to Kt sq S3. QtoK 7 34. B to Kt 4 ch 35. Kt to Q 7 ch 26. B takes R 27. R takes Kt 28. B takes P (i) 39. R takes P ch 30. R to Kt sq 31. R to Kt 8 ch (I) 33. Q to Kt 4 ch 33. B takes Q 34. Q takes P ch 35. P toR4 36. P toR5 37. PtoR6 88. P to K B 4 39. Q to K Kt 5 ch 40. Q takes R P 41. Q to R 8 ch 43. Q to B6 43. Q to K 5 ch 44. PtoB5 45. Q takes B P 46. Q to K 5 ch 47. P to K R 4 (/) If 20. Kt takes Kt, 80. B takes P ch; 31. K to Q2 (best) (or 21. K to Kt sq, 21. Q to B3 threatening Stakes RP dis. ch, etc.), 81...Q to B3, menacing mate at Q B6 and recovering the Kt with an overwhelming attack, (g) If 21. BtoKt2, 21. QtoK4; 22. PtoQ B3 (or 22. B takes Kt, 22. Q takes Pch; 23. K to Q 2, 28. Q to B 6 ch ; 24. K to B sq, 24. Q takes B with a fine attack), 22. . . Q to B4; 23. B takes Kt, 23. B to Kt4 ch ; 24. Kt to Q 2, 24. Q lakes B ; with an excellent attack. (A) This weakens White's position still more. After 23. Q to B 4, 22. Kt to K 4 ; 23. Q to R4 (best) White had some fair prospects of drawing, whereas the text moves enable Black to force the powerful entrance of his Queen at K 7. (i) Black has conducted the whale attack with consummate skill. As will be seen anon, this capital capture forms part of a further beautiful and deep-laid scheme. U) Obviously, if P takes B, 29. .. Q takes B wins with ease. (A) Immediately fatal, but the game could not be saved. If, for instance, 31. Q to B 6, 31. B to Kt7 chj 32. K to Kt sq; 33. B takes P dis. ch; 33. K to R2, 33. B to B 4 ; 34. Q to R4, 34. R to Kt 5, and wins. (I) A splendid master-stroke, which wins the Q and finishes the game m a most elegant style. 13 APPENDIX. THE TWO KNIGHT'S DEFENSE. Page 97, 2d line from the top. — After the opening moves : 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 2. Kt to K B 3 2. Kt to Q B 3 3. B to B 4 3. Kt to B 3 4. Kt to Kt 5 4. P to Q 4 5. P takes P 5. Kt takes P 6. Kt takes B P 6. K takes Kt 7. Q to B 3 ch 7. K to K 3 8. Kt to B 3 8. Kt to Kt 5 9. QtoK4 Mr. Steinitz suggests tlie following new line of play in the International GJiess Magazine, p. 309, vol. I. : 9. P to Q Kt 4 10. B to Kt 3 10. P to B 4 11. P to Q 3 11. B to Q Kt 2 12. P to K B 4 12. P to B 5 13. QP takes P 13. Kt takes Kt We append a diagram of this most instructive position. TWO KNIGHTS' DEFENSE. * DlAGEAM Showing the position after Black's 13th m(r/r^ X3 BLACK. '^S^ft'*^'^^^ MM WB i#i i» if®i JMi i IMf e tfk; i i v///iv///. mm mi ■ fmkm. 'M^Z. iSl fM iwi 'V/TTTTT!/// ^iTfTTrr^/, V/ /////////,. 1 mm,. WHITE. And now two lines of play may spring from this position. If, in the first place, White play 14 P takes Kt P dis. ch, then might follow 14 Kt from B 6 to Q 4; 15. P to Q E 3, 15. Kt takes B P ch, with a piece ahead and a good game. If, however. White proceeds with 14 Q takes K P ch, liien the following continuation might arise : 14 Q takes K P ch 15. P takes Kt 16. Q to Q 4 ch 17. Q takes Q ch 18. E to K Kt sq 19. E takes B 14 K to Q 2 15. B takes Kt P 16. KtoB2 17. E takes Q 18. P takes P (If 19. B to Q R 4 B to B 3 and wins.) 14 APPENDIX. 19. P takes B 20, P takes Kt 20. B takes P cb. 21. K to B sq 21. B to B 6, and wins. Page 99, 3d line from tlie hottom.— There is no need for "White to play 20. P to K R 3, and lie may proceed at once with P to K Kt 4. Page 102, 9th line from the bottom. — We believe that 10 K Kt to Q 2 is quite safe. In the illustrative game, p. 119, Game YII, referred to by the author, White should have played 13. Kt takes P instead 13. P to K II 3. Page 105, 5th line from the top. — 8. Q to B 5 is inferior to 8. Q to K E 4, for on the 12th move of that variation White might win at least a piece by 12. P to Q B 4, since if Black answer 12. Q to B 4, then follows 13. Kt to E4, 13. Q to K4; 14. Kt to B 6 ch, etc. And if 12. P takes P in passing, then 13. Kt to B 6 ch, 13. P takes Kt; 14. Q takes Q, and wins. Page 107, 10th line from the top. — ^If White play .„ QtoB3 ., ,„ ,„ R takes Kt 12. then 13. 77 ; rr- 13. =r — ; -— Kt takes Kt R takes R . Q to Kt 5 ch Q takes Q ch Q to Kt 4 R takes Q Tvith a Pawn ahead and a superior game. On the same page, 9th line from the bottom. — The variations given by the author are of a dubious character, for in reply 17. Q to K E 5 (6th line from the bottom) Black may answer 17. B to Kt 2, with a piece ahead and a safe game. We would, however, recommend, in lieu of 13. Kt to K E 4, proposed by the author, the attack by 12. Q to Q 2 suggested by Mr. Steinitz in the City of London Chess Magazine, Eeview of "Wormald's Chess Openings." TWO KNIGHTS' DEFENSE. I5 Page 109, at the end of the variation, 9th line from the top.— White has, we believe, the worst of the game after 14. Kt to Kt 5 ch, for Black answers 14 K to Kt sq, and if 15. Kt takes K P, then 15. R to K sq, with a Pawn ahead and a fine game. But the attack could be previously amended on the 12th move by : 12. PtoKKt4 12. QtoKtS 13. P to K B 4 13. P takes P 14. P to B 5 14. Q to Kt 2 15. P takes B 15. P takes Kt 16. B takes P, etc. If, in the meanwhile, Black play P to Q 6 dis. ch, followed by P takes P, White would first move K to Kt 2, and ultimately would have a good answer by Q to Q E 4 ch, if Black should attack by Kt to Q 5. Page 109, 6th line from the bottom. — White's 9th move should be B takes Q P. In the author's variation Black could obtain the best of the game on the 10th move by 10 Kt to K Kt 3. Page 111, 9th line from the bottom.^— White, on the 14th move instead of 14. Castles or 14. Q to B 3, might retain the advantage by 14. Kt to B sq 14. Q to E 5 ch 15. PtoKtS 15. Kt takes P 16. Q to B 2 16. Kt to B 4 (If 16. Q to K 5, then 17. Kt takes Kt, and wins.) 17. Q takes Q, with a Pawn ahead. 16 APPENDIX. GAMES ILLUSTRATIVE OE THE TWO KNIGHTS' DEFENSE. GAME I. — Played in the London International Tournament, 1883, between Messrs. H. E. Bird and M. Tschigorin. (Score from the "Book of the London Chess Congress.") White (Mr. Bird). Black (Mr. Tschigorin). 1. Pto K4 1. P to K 4 3. Ktto KB3 2. KttoQBS 3. B to B 4 3. KttoBS 4. Kt to Kt 5 4. PtoQ4 5. P takes P 5. Ktto QR4 6. B to Kt 5 ch 6. P to Q B 3 7. P takes P 7. P takes P 8. B to K 3 8. P to K R 3 9. Ktto KB3 9. PfoK5 10. Kt to K 5 10. Q to B 3 (a) 11. Ktto Kt4(J) 11. B takes Kt 13. B takes B 13. B to Q 3 13. P to K R 3 13. Castles 14. Kt to B 3 14. Kt to B 5 15. Pto Q Kt3 15. Kt to K 4 16. B to Q Kt 2 16. K R to K sq 17. Castles (c) n. Q Kt takes B 18. P takes Kt 18. QtoQ2 19. Q to K 3 ((?) 19. Kt takes P 30. P to KKt3 (e) 20. 0toB4 31. K to Kt 2 21. Rto K3 (a) One of the strongest continuations for the counter-attaclc in this opening, which is greatly favored by Mr. Tschigorin. (») 11. P to Q4, 11. P taltes P in passing ; 12. Kt takes P (Q 3), 13. B to Q 3 ; 13. Kt to Q 2, followed by Kt to K B 3, gives White an excellent game, with a Pawn ahead. For should Black attempt J3. B takes P, then would follow 14. P to K Kt 3, 14. B takes P ; 15. P takes B, IS. Q takes P ch; 16. Kt to B 2, and should win. (c) 17. B to K 2, 17. Kt to Q 6 (or 17 . . . Kt to B 6 ch; 18. K to B sq, etc.) ; 18. P takes Kt, 18. P takes P; 19. Castles was far more favorable for White than the move in the text. (O) If 19. P to K B 3, 19. B to B 4 ch; 20. K to R sq, 20. Q to K 2, with a winning attack. (e) 20. Kt takes P, 20. Q to B4; 21. P to K B3, 21. QtoR4; 22. P takes Kt, 23. Q to R7 ch; 23. KtoB2, 23.QtoB5ch (if 23...QtoR6ch; 24. P to Kt 3, 24. B takes P ch— or 34. Q to R7 ch'; 25. K to B3, 25. Q takes Q ch ; 36. K takes Q ; 27. R takes Kt ch ; 27. K to B3, with a Pawn ahead— 25. K to Kt2, and White should win). 24. K to Kt sq was, anyhow, far better play, for Black's best play would be now to draw by perpetual check. TWO Kl< riGHTS' DEFENSE. 33. Q R to K sq Cf) 33. Q R to K so 33. R to KR sq 33. PtoK R4 34. K R to K B sq 34. QtoKt3 35. Kt to Q sq (g) 35. P to K 6 (/j) 36. BtoQ4(i) 36. Kt takes P 37. R takes Kt 37. Q takes P ch 38. KtoBsq 38. P takes R 39. Kt to K 3 89. P to Q B 4 30. BtoB3 30. R takes Kt (J) 31. P takes R 31. R takes P 33. Q to Q sq 33. P to R 5 (k) 33. Bto Q3 33. P to R 6 and wii 7? GAME II. — Played between Messrs. X. and L. Paulsen. (From Salvioli's " Teoria e Pratica.") Black (L. Paulsen). White (X.). 1. PtoK 4 3. K Kt to B 3 3. B to B 4 4. Kt to Kt 5 5. P takes P 6. B to Kt5 ch 7. P takes P 8. Q to B3 9. Bto R4 0. Q to K 8 (a) 1. Q takes P ch 3. Castles 1. P to K4 3. Q Ktto B3 3. Kt to B 3 4, PtoQ4 6. PtoB3 7. P. takes P 5. Q Kt to R4 8. QtoKt3 9. B to K Kt 5 10. B to Q B 4 11. K to Q3 13. B takes P ch (J) (f) Ill-judffed. R to K R sq, followed by Q R to K B sq, was much better. (y) Premature. R to R 3 was necessary for the defense. (h) A real master cowp, which forces the victory in an elegant style. (0 If 26. Q P takes P, 26. Kt takes K P ch; 27. Kt takes Kt, 27. R takes Kt, treathening R takes P, and wins. (j) Beautiful play. (A) 32 ... R takes B, followed by K to B sq, in reply to Q takes P, was also safe. (a) If 10. QtoKt3, 10. PtoKRS; 11. Kt to K B3 (or 11. Q takes P ch, 11. K to Q2, and wins). 11. P to K 5; 12. Kt to K 5, 12. B to Q 3, with the superior game.— (Salvioli.) (6) Excellent play. IS APPENDIX. 13. K to R sq (c) 13. Q R to K sq 14. Q to B 4 14. K B to B 4 15. Kt takes P d) 15. K R to B sq 16. Kt to K 5 ch 16. K to Q sq 17. Kt takes B 17. Kt takes Kt 18. Q to KtSch J8. B to K3 19. R takes R, and Black mates in four moves. («) (c) Obviously, if 13. R talces B, the answer Q R to K sq wins at once, ((f) Not good. Kt to K B 3 was better. («) Mate is effected in four moves, tlius : 19. R takes R; 20. P to Kt 3, 20. Q to B 7, etc. SCOTCH GAMBIT. I9 THE SCOTCH GAMBIT. Page 126, 8th line from the top. — In order to demonstrate the inferiority of the defense 5. Q to K B 3, we would sub- stitute the following variation, which we consider more clear and direct than that of the author : P to K 5 P to QB3 with a strong Q to K B 3 • Q to Kt 3 ' ' Q to K 2 attack.) - Kt to Kt 5 R to K sq. B to B 7 ch, KttoKRS*^ Kt takes P ' P to K B 3 and wins.) B to Q 3 . P to K Kt 4, and wins.) ^- P to K B 4 ^'^ ^ Kt to B 4 ^- P takes P in passing ^. Q to R 5 ch, followed by Kt to K 4, winning "• Q takes P "• a piece. On the same page, 7th line from the bottom. — In the variation commencing with the words "Firstly, 6. Q to K B 3," Black may obtain the best of the game by 8. B to Kt 5 instead of 8. Kt to K 4, as proposed. Page 128. — In the position given on the diagram whicL on the previous page the author declares to be won for Black, White has still excellent attacking resources, thus : 13. P to K 5. If now 13. Kt takes P, then, obviously, Q to Kt 2 breaks the whole attack, with the exchange ahead for White ; and if 13. P to Q 4, then 14. B to K sq, with a winning game. Again, if jg , .. P to K 6 ch. Q takes R ■ Kt to K B 3 or Kt to R 3 Q takes P (best) and wins. Finally, if jg .. Kt to K 4 Kt to Kt 3 ■ P takes P Q to Kt 5 ch P to K R 4 ^°'^ P takes P 20 APPENDIX. .„ BtoK3 ,^^ PtoKB3 ,„ K to R sq, and should win. 1^- ^"^-^ ^^- P takes P dis. ch ^^- Page 129, 11th line from the bottom. — After 5. Kt to Kt 5, 5. P to Q 4 ; 6. F takes P , the move given for Black, 6. Q to K 2 ch, is much inferior to 6. Kt takes P, in which case White obviously cannot proceed with 7. Kt takes B P on account of the reply 7. Q to K 2 ch, winning a piece with- out being subjected to the least danger. The other varia- tions on this and on the next page are repetitions of demonstrations already given by the author in the Petroff's Defense, and we have also already commented thereon. Page 131. — In the first variation on the top of the page White will obtain a very good game simply by 8. Q takes Kt, whereas 8. Q to K B 3, which is proposed, can be well answered by 8. B to Kt 5 ch, followed by 9. Q to K 2. Page 132. — At the end of the first variation (A) we do not think that White has sufficient attack for the two Pawns sacrificed, and we would, therefore, recommend in preference the next variation (a) for the attack. Page 136, 3d line from the top. — 7. B to K 2 has been justly discarded as less aggressive than 7. Q to Q 2 or 7. B to Kt 5, or else 7. Kt to Q B 2. ' SCOTCH GAMBIT. 31 GAMES ILLUSTEATIVE OP THE SCOTCH GAMBIT. GAME I. — Second game of the Steinitz-Zukertort match, played in New York, January 13th, 1886. (Score and notes from the International Chess Magazine.) White (Mr. W. Steinitz). Black (Mr. J. H. Zukertort). 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 3. K Kt to B3 3. Q Kt to B3 3. P to Q 4 3. P takes P 4. Kt takes P 4. Kt toB 3 (a) 5. Q Kt to B 3 5. B to Kt 5 6. Kt takes Kt 6. Kt P rakes Kt 7. B to Q 3 (J) 7. P to Q 4 8. P takes P 8. P takes P (, 16. B to K 7 ch, and the game might then continue : 16. KtoBS 17. Kt to B 3 17. Kt to B 7 ch 18. K to Kt 2 18. Q to Kt 5 ch 19. K takes Kt, etc. THE MUZIO GAMBIT. Fage 533, 8th and 9th lines from the bottom. — In lieu of Black's 13th move, R to Kt sq or 13. E to K sq, we would recommend 13. E to K B sq, a move adopted by Paulsen against Anderssen, which has the effect of guarding the Eook against any subsequent attack by Kt to B 6 ; and this is of importance to the defense, for even after 13. E to K Kt sq, which the author holds to be the better alternative, Black must, at least, lose valuable time with his Eook when afterwards attacked by the opponent's Knight, as he cannot afford to give up the exchange in that position. Herr Paulsen himself, who chiefly introduced this ingenious defense, after some experiments with 13. E to K Kt sq and 13. E to K sq, came to the conclusion that 13. E to K B sq is the strongest move at this juncture. 64 APPENDIX. Page 534, lOtli line from the bottom. — The Pawns are even in that position, and as Black has maintained his piece ahead there ought to be some better means of defense than 20. P to Q E 3, which the author justly demonstrates to be favorable for the first player. We would suggest 20. P t:,^ Q Kt 3, which, we believe, would enable Black to extricate himself at the expense of one Pawn. But the following line of play seems to us the simplest and strongest : 20. P to Q 4 21. P takes P in passing , , „, Kt takes BP „„ R takes Kt ch R to B 3 (If 31. ^ ,,,,,, ^, 32. HTTTnii ^^■ K takes Kt ' B to Q 3 ' Q R to K sq „, R fr. B 3 to K 3 „_ R takes R 34. :- ; =; 35. R takes R ' Q takes Kt P and ought to win.) 21. P takes P 22. E to Q 4 22. P to Q 4 23. P to Q B 4 23. B to Q 2, threatening to exchange the Kt or to play Kt to Q B 3 on the next move, with a piece ahead and a satisfactory game in either case. Page 538, 9th line from the bottom. — ^At the end of this variation White, in our opinion, has no superiority of position to compensate for the inferiority of forces, if Black play at once 12. K to K sq, followed by P to Q B 3 and P to Q 3. Page 539, 4th line from the top.— We do not think that after either 12. Kt to Q B 3 or 12. E to B 3 there could be any preference for White's position. Black has two minor pieces for the Eook, with even Pawns, and, against either line of play proposed for White, he may answer 12. Q to Kt 2, forcing the exchange of Queens. Any subse- quent attack of White, either by E to Kt 3 or Kt to Q 5, can MUZIO GAMBIT. 65 be met accordingly, without any danger, by K to B sq or Kt to E 3. Page 543, 4th line from the bottom. — "We believe that in this position Black ought at least to draw, with some prospects of winning thus : 25. B to Q 2 26. P to K B 4 (best) 26. B to K sq 27. Kt takes B (best) 27. E takes E ch 28. K to E 2 28. E takes Kt Diagram, Showing the position after Black's 28th move. BLACK. 1 m. ill i mi WM m, ^ W>M II fj^ '^''■m,J^'m W, m/MMii ^3 WHITE. 29. Q takes E ch (best) '' Q R to K 7 and wins.) 66 APPENDIX. 29. E to B sq 30. Q to K 7 30. Kt to B 2, with three pieces for the Queen. Page 544, bottom line. — In positions of that character we hold that the proof should be quite clear when the superiority is claimed for the side which is weaker in forces. In the present case Black is a piece ahead, and after careful examination we cannot find any satisfactory key- move for the attack in reply to 10. Q to Kt 2. If White then proceed with 11. Q B to K Kt 3, Black may answer 11. P to K B 3, and White will not be able to gain a Pawn for his piece without submitting to some weakening exchanges. And if 11. Kt to Kt 5, then 11. B takes B; 12. Q takes B (best), 12. P to K B 3, and ought to win. Fage 545, 8th line from the top. — The variation by Coch- rane, which is here given, leads to the same position by a slight transposition of moves that arises in the line of play indicated on the preceding page, 10th line from the bottom, which is ascribed to Lewis. The alteration in the order of moves may, we believe, be taken advantage of by White on the 9th move ; for the attack by 9. B to K 5 is much stronger than 9. B to Kt 3, and the former may lead to the following continuation : 9. B to K 2 /Or Q in B takes Kt Kt to B 3 .„ Castles, K side, ^^^ "■ P takes B ^"- Q to R 4 ch "' R to Kt sq ^^- with a fine attack.) 10. B to Kt 3 10. Q Kt to Q 2 11. Kt to B 3 (Better than 11. P^^^^ 13. ^ *° ^ ^ Kt takes B ' Kt to p 4.) followed mostly with Castling on the Queen's side, with an excellent attack. MUZIO GAMBIT. 67 Page 548, 13th line from the top. — Black is two pieces ahead in this position, and albeit his King seems to be very much exposed, we believe he ought to be able to effect his escape by : 9. K to B 3 10. Kt to B 3 10. P to Q 4 11. P takes P ch 11. K to Kt 3 12. Kt to K 4 ch 12. K to E 3 13. Q to Q 3 ch 13. P to Kt 4, with t^o pieces ahead and a defensible game. GAME ILLUSTEATIVB OF THE MUZIO GAMBIT. Played in the Master Tourney at Berlin, 1881, between Messrs. Winawer and Wittek. (Notes translated by Brentano'a Chess Monthly from All. Sp. Zeitung.) White (Mr. Winawer). Black (Mr. Wittek). 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 2. P to K B 4 2. P takes P 3. Ktto K B3 3. P to K Kt4 4. B to B 4 4. P to Kt 5 5. Castles 5. P takes Kt 6. Q takes P 6. Q to B 3 7. P to Q 8 (a) 7. B to R 3 8. Kt to B 3 8. K Kt to K 3 9. Q B takes P 9. Q takes B (V) 10. B takes P ch 10. K to Q sq 11. Q takes Q 11. Stakes Q 12. R takes B 13. Q Kt to B 3 (a) P to K 5 is generally regarded as stronger. (5) Had he taken witli B, the following favorable continuation for White would hava resulted : 10. Q takes B, 10. Q takes Q; 11. R takes Q, 11. Castles; 12. Q R to K B sq, 13. Q Kt to B 3; 13. R takes P, 13. R takes R; 14. R takes R, 14. K to R sq, and, by 15, Kt to Kt 5, at once gain a third Pawn (or his sacrificed piece. 68 APPENDIX. 13. Q R to K B sq. 13. PtoQS 14. P to K R 3 (c) 14. Kt to K 4 15. B to Kt 3 15. Q Kt to Kt 3 16. RtoB7 16. B to Q 3 17. Pto Q4 17. Kt to B 3 18. Kt to K 3 18. KttoR4 19. Kt to Kt 8 19. Kt takes B 30. R P takes Kt 30. B to K sq (!) (d] 31. R to K Kt 7 31. Kt to B sq 33. R to B 6 (!) 33. P to Q R 4 («) 33. Kt to K 3 (/) 33. P to R 5 34. P takes P 24. R takes P 25. Kt to B 4 35. K to B sq (s) 36. Pto B3 36. R to R 8 ch 37. K to R 3 (A) 37. R to K 8 38. Kt to Q 5 38. B to Q 2(!) 29. R (B6) to B 7 29. R takes P 30. Kt to K 7 ch 30. K to Q sq 31. Kt to Kt 8 31. Kt to K 3 33. R takes B ch 33. K to B sq 33. Kt to B 6 (i) 33. Kt takes R 34. R takes Kt 34. R to K 7 (j) 35. Kt takes R P (?) {k) 35. R takes Q Kt I 36. P to K R 4 (0 - 36. R to Q B 7 37. P toR5 37. R takes P 38. Kt to B 6 38. R to Q 6 39. R to Kt 8 ch 39. R takes R 40. Kt takes R 40. R takes P 41. K to Kt 3 41. R to Q 8 43. K td Kt 4 43. K to Q 2 (c) Necessary to prevent adverse Knight from coming to Kt 5. There is threatened 14. . . Kt to K 4; 15. B to Kt 3, 15. K Kt to Kt 3; 16. R to B 2 or 6, 16. Kt to Kt 5, etc. (c?) 20. . -P to Q B 3 is no better, e. g.: 21. Kt to R 5, 21. K to B 2; 22. Kt to B 6, 22. Q R to Q sq ; 23 Kt takes R P, etc., and the advantage is with White. (e) The best way to bring the Black Rook into play. (/) 23. P to K 5 would not now be good, e. g.: 33. P to K 5, 23. Kt to Q 2 ! ; 24. R to K 6, 24. P takes P; 25. P takes P, 25. R to R 3, etc. {g) If 25. . -R takes P, he loses a piece by 26. R takes Kt, followed by 27. Kt to K 6 ch, (Ji) The game is correctly and beautifully played on both sides. (i) 33...Rfr. Kt7 to K7 comes up for consideration here, e. g.: 33... R takes Kt; 34. R takes P ch, 34. Kt takes R; 35. R takes R, and White has a chance for a draw, because of Black's Pawns being isolated. (J) The R P cannot be saved by R to R 5. (k) Taking with R would be much better. (I) Defending the B P with Kt and R, followed by the gradual advance of the unobstructed Pawns, would be sounder. MUZIO GAMBIT. 69 43. K to Kt 5 43, K to K 3 44. Kt to R 6 44. P to B 4 45. P to Kt 4 45. P to B 5 46. Kt to B 5 46. P to B 6 47. Kt to K 3 47. P to Q 4 48. K to Kt 6 48. P to Q 5 49. Kt takes R 49. P to B 7 50. Kt to B 2 50. P to B 8 (queesfi) 51. Kt to R 3 51. Q to B 7 ch 53. K to Kt 7 53. Q to B 3 ch 53. K to R 6 53. K to B 3 54. P to Kt 5 ch 54. K to B 8 55. P to Kt 6 ch 55. K to B 3 56. Resigns. 70 APPENDIX. THE SALVIO JlNB COCHEANE GAMBITS. Fage 554, 3d line from the top. — 6. Castles is inferior to 6. P to Q 4, for after 6. PtoQS; 7. Kt to Q 3, Black, instead of playing 7. B to Kt 2, would clearly obtain the superior game by: 7. P to B 6, if then 8. P takes P 8. E to Ktsq 9. P to B 4 fOr 9. K to Rsq Or if 9. P takes P P to Kt 6 with a winning attack. "" " "' B takes P and wins.) 9. QtoE5 10. P to Kt 6 11. KttoKt5 10. P to B 5 11. Q to K 2 12. PtoKES P takes P (If 13. and wins.) Q takes P ch ^g Q to Kt a ' Q takes Q ch ... K takes Q Kt to K 6 double ch 13. QtoB3 14. KtoKt2 15. Q takes P 12. KttoB7 13. Kt takes P ch 14. KttoKt4 15. Q takes P ch, and wins. Page 555, 3d line from the top. — The line of play proposed here was, we believe, first adopted by Lieut. Eosen- treter. It is very ingenious, and Black is likely to go astray by precipitating the counter-attack, as in the variations given by the author. But the defense can be obviated without leaving "White any hope of a lasting attack by 9. B to K 2, followed mostly by Kt to K B 3. We give a SALVIO AND COCHRANE GAMBIT. 71 diagram of this Mghly interesting position, showing the situation after Black's 9th move : BLACK. sss i k k i y?A m § _M-//////y;: B--. is ■»■, ^////y/y/. 0^//y/y/^/ m m mm mm. ^1 m WHITE. Page 556, 7th line from the bottom. — Stronger still is 11. P to Kt 6, instead of exchanging Queens, for after 12. Q to K sq (best) 12. P to B 6 13. P takes B P (best) 13. P to Kt 7 ch, and wins. Page 565, 3d lirve from the top- — A favorite move of Mr. Steinitz, 8. Q Kt to B 3, which he adopted successfully in his match with Mr. Zukertort, 1872, should be noticed, especially as we believe that by proper play the defense ought to obtain at least an even game, e. g. : 8. Kt to Q B 3 8. P to Q 3 9. Kt to Q 3 9. P takes P ch 10. K takes P 10. Q to E 6 ch 11. K to Kt sq 11. P to Kt 6 72 APPENDIX. 12. Kt to K B 4 12. P takes P ch 13. R takes P 13. Q to Kt 5 ch Kt to Kt 2 (This is Black's best move, if instead 13. =— — tft r 14. 7=— — --, ., ^ R to Kt sq ch Q to Kt 5 Q takes Q R takes P with a superior game.) ^^- Kt takes Q ■^''' 14. Q takes Q 14. Kt takes Q 15. E to Kt 2 15. E to Kt sq (best) (If 15- P to Q B 3; 16. Kt to R 5, followed by B to K 2 with a strong attack.) 16. Q Kt to Q 5 16. K to Q sq 17. Kt to E 5 17. B to K 2, with a Pawn ahead and an excellent game. Page 516, 4th line from tJie top. — We think that even in this variation Black obtains the advantage, thus : 9. P to Q 4 10. Kt takes P 10. K takes Kt 11. Kt takes B P dis. ch 11. K to Kt 2 12. Q to Q 3 12. B to Q 3 13. Kt takes E 13. E to B sq 14. P to K 5 14. P takes P ch 15. K takes P 15. Kt to K 5 16. B to K 3 16. P to Kt 6 17. P to K E 3 j7 P t'tkes B ^g K to Kt sq R takes P K to R sq • B to R 6 ch ■ P takes P ch "■ Q to Kt 5 ch "' Kt to Kt 6 ch .. K to Kt sq Kt to K 7 double ch and mates in two moves.) 17. Kt to B 7 18. B takes Kt (If Q moves, the answer Q to K 5 ch wins speedily.) 18. B takes P ch SALVIO AND COCHRANE GAMBIT. 78 Diagram, Showing the position after Black's 18th move. Black. , oyz^ ^^^ W//M IMJ WM, Ji 1 ^ ^ 'wm / i £ ^» ^^ -^h i ^ ^ ^^ mm wm^m ^^^ ^g ^;^ »^ White. 19. E takes B (Kl9.Kj£Kt^ 2^ KtoR3 P takes B ch ' B to B 8 dis. ch and mates next move.) 19. B takes B ch, and wins. THE KING'S BISHOP'S GAMBIT. Page 600, 8th line from the top.— Mr. Steinitz recom- mends here the novel move 6. Kt to K 2, which threatens immediately to win a piece by P to Q 4, followed by Q to E 4 ch. The game might then further proceed thus : 7. Kt to Q B 3 , 7. P to Q B 3 8. Kt to K B 3 8. Q to Kt 5 74 APPENDIX. 9. E to K sq 10. B takes P 11. Kt takes P 12. Kt to B 7 cli 13. Kt takes E 14 Q takes P Kt to Kt 5 9. P to Q 4 10. P takes B 11. Kt to Q B 3 12. K to Q sq 13. Q takes P (If 14. Q takes P 15, P to B3 Q to R 4 ch 16. Q to B 3 Q takes Q ch (best) Kt takes Q .„ R to B sq B to Kt 5 ■ Kt to K sq and wins.) 15. Q to Q 6 ch 16. Kt to B 7 oil 17. QtoB4ch 18. Q to Q B 4 ch diagram). 14. B to Kt 5 15. K to K sq 16. K to B 2 17. Kt to B 4 18. K to Kt 3, and wins (See Diagram. White. Black. KING'S JBlSHOP'S GAMBIT. 75 Page 603, 7th line from the bottom. — In the main line of play of Game the Fourth, after the moves : 1. P to K 4 1. P to K 4 2. P to K B 4 2. P takes P 3. B to B 4 3. P to K B 4, we may add some comments on 4. P to Q 3, a move recommended by Herr Hirschfeld. The following continuation, in our opinion, comprises the best play on both sides : 4. Q to E 5 ch 5. K to B sq 5. P takes P 6. P takes P (If 6. B takes Kt, Black should simply answer 6. E takes B, and would obtain the best of the game. But the tempting reply P to K 6 would not be favorable for the defense, e. g. : B takes Kt _ Q to B 3 P to K Kt 3 P takes P P to K 6 ■■ R takes B P takes P Q to B 3 R takes P ^^ K to Kt 8 with the superior game.) ^"- Kt to B 3 6. B to B 4 7. Q to B 3 7. Kt to K 2 8. B takes P Kt to Q B 3 B takes P ^ Q Kt to B 3 Kt to Q 5 and should win.) 8. E to B sq 9. P to K Kt 3 9. Q to B 3 10. P to K 5 K to Kt a Q to R 5 ch Q takes Q ch . ^ PtoKKt4 ^^•QtoKKt3 ' Kt takes Q .„ B takes either P ^ , K to R 3 13. ii „ „ . 14. R to B 7 ch ■ P to Q 4 dis. ch and wins.) 10. Q to Q Kt 3 11. Q Kt to B 3 11. P to K Kt 4 12. Q to E 5 ch (If 13 '^''°^* Q to Kt5and wins.) 12. Q to K Kt 3, and wins. 76 APPENDIX. Page 606, 11th line from the bottom. — We think that White will obtain the superiority, for after capturing the K B P he will also gain the Q B P, and remain a Pawn ahead, with an even position otherwise. At the end of the same page it should be added that if 7. B takes Kt 8. Q to B 3 8. Q to B 5 9. Q P takes B 9. Q takes Q eh 10. Kt takes Q 10. P to K B 3 11. P takes P 11. Kt to K 2 io ^ takes Kt ^ R takes P with the better game.) <"' ^^- P to K R 3 ^^- R takes B ^^- 12. E to E 6 12. Kt to Kt 3 13. B to K 3 13. K to B sq 14 Q E to K E sq 14. K to Kt 2 15. P to K 5 15. Kt takes P nf 1K ^ takes P Kt takes Kt P with a winning advantage.) 16. Kt takes Kt 16. P takes Kt 17. B takes Kt P, and White ought to win. Page 608, 10th line from the bottom. — At the end of this sub-variation the position is still very difficult, and we, therefore, add some explanatory analysis, in order to show how White wins. Black has only three plausible defenses. In the first place, if 21. QKttoB3 22. E to E 7 22. B takes P 23. P to Q Kt 3 23. Kt takes P 24. E to Q sq 24. P to Q B 4 25. Kt to K 6 eh 25. K to B sq 26. Kt takes Kt 26. P takes Kt 27. E takes P (threatening E to K Kt 4) 27. P to B 4 KING'S BISHOP'S GAMBIT. 77 28. E to K B 7 and wins. If, secondly : 21. Kt to Q 2 22. Kt to K 6 ch 22. K to B sq 23. Kt to Kt 5 23. P takes Kt 24. E. takes Kt ch and wins. Finally, if 21. P to Q B 3 22. Kt to K 6 ch 22. K to Q 2 ^ B takes Kt K to Q 2 Kt to Q R 3 and wins.) 23. E to R 7, and wins. On the same page, 2d line from the bottom — 21. Kt takes K P is clearly a bad move, and we do not think that White has sufficient attack for the piece sacrificed, if Black play instead K Kt to K 2. On the same pa^e, bottom line. — Mr. Sellman proves by the following variation, published in "Cook's Synopsis," from Brentano's G/iess Monthly, that even now Black ought to win, thus : 22. KKttoB3 23. B to Kt 5 23. Kt to Kt 5 ch 24. K to Kt 3, or a and b 24. Q to K 4 ch 25. K to B 3 25. P takes B 26. Q takes E ch 26. K to B 2 27. Q to Kt 7 ch 27. K to Kt 3 And Black wins easily. White must sacrifice his Queen to delay the impending mate over four moves. a. If 24. Q takes Kt 24. P takes B dis. ch wins. 78 APPENDIX. 24. Q takes K wins. h. And if 24. K to E 3 Secondly : 22. KKttoB3 23. P to Kt 7 23. K E to Kt sq 24. B to K Kt 5, or a and h 24. P takes B 25. Kt to Kt 5 ch 26. Q toK4ch 27. Q takes E 28. K to K 2 29. K to B 2, and wins. 25. E takes Kt 26. Q takes Kt 27. KtoE3 28. E to Q sq ch 29. QtoKt4cli a. If 24. QtoE4 25. KtoE3 26. B takes K E P Black ought to win. h. And, if 24. E or Q to Q sq ch, Black can reply with 24. Kt to Kt 5 ch 25. E takes P 26. EtoKt3 24. K to K 2, in either case, getting a safe game, and still retaining the advantage of a piece. Thirdly : White might play for his 23d move Q takes Kt or In B takes Kt, but in either case Black speedily wins. the first place : 22. K Kt to B 3 23. Q takes Kt 23. Kt to Kt 5 ch, etc. And in the second place : 22. KKttoB3 23. B takes Kt 23. Kt takes Q 24. B takes E 24. Q to Q 3 ch 25. K to Kt sq 25. Kt to Kt 6 26. E to B 7 or a 26. Q to Q 8 ch 27. K to E 2 or B 2, Black wins easily. KING'S BISHOP'S GAMBIT. 79 a. If 26. P to Kt 7 26. K to B 2 wins. FonrtUy : 22. K Kt to B 3 23. Q or R to Q sq ch 23. K to K 2 And Black still holds his advantage in force, with a perfectly safe game. THE GAMBIT DECLINED. Page 621, bottom line. — Should Black play 7- Kt to B 3 then White ought to answer 8. Q to K sq (best), and the game might proceed : 8. B to B 4 ch (If 8. Kt takes K P; 9. P to Q 3 and wins.) 9. K to E sq 9. Castles 10. B takes Kt 10. P takes B 11. Q takes P 11. E to K sq 12. P to Q B 3 12. E takes P 13. Q to B 3 13. E to K 2 14. P to Q 4, with the better game. Page 622, 12th line from the bottom.— On White's 12th move another interesting variation might arise, thus : 12. P to Kt 5 12. Castles 13. P takes Kt 13. Kt takes P 14. B to E 3 ch 14. K to Kt sq 15. P to B 5 15. B to E 4 16. E to Kt sq 16. B to E 3 17. Kt to Q 5 17. Kt takes Kt 18. E to Kt 8 18. Q to E 5 ch 80 APPENDIX. 19. K to B sq 19. Q takes B ch 20. K to Kt sq 20. Q to Kt 5 ch, and should win. Page 626, 11th line from the top. — We do not think that White's position is in any way inferior, and, therefore, the Pawn ahead ought to give him the advantage. Page 630, 15th line from the bottom. — White's 5th move, B to K 2, is now abandoned by analysts and practitioners, having been found unquestionably inferior to 5. B to B 4. The reason that the author's move was formerly held best was based on the supposition that White was bound to attack the adverse K B by P to Q 4, in order to be enabled to Castle on the King's side; but it has since been established that White need not Castle on that wing at all, and will yet retain a strong attack after 5. B to B 4 by continuing afterward with P to Q 3 and Q to K 2. KmG'S BISHOP'S OPENING. Page 659, 10th line from the bottom. — The author pro- nounces "La Strategie" to be "completely in error" as regards the merits of Black's 6th move, B to K 2, rather on light grounds. Por at the end of the variation of three moves which the author attaches in demonstration, we would a little prefer Black if he continue 6. P to Q 3, followed, if the Kt retreats, by P to Q B 3 and P to Q 4. Black has then the advantage that both his wings are secure, while White labors under the inconvenience of a KING'S BISHOP'S OPENING. 81 doubled Pawn, which may become troublesome in the ending. Page 660, 4th line from the bottom. — Any move that blocked the Q P before its advance in the opening used to be viewed with suspicion by authors of the old school. Kt to Q 3 has, however, stood its test for the defense in the Euy Lopez, in variations where Black only maintains even Pawns, and, consequently, it should be also good enough in this opening, with a Pawn ahead. The illustrative variation which the author gives leaves off at a point where Black can force the exchange of one of the opponent's most active pieces by 7. Kt to Q B 3. He then keeps his Pawn, with an excellent game. Page 667, 5th Ihie from the top.— White has a Pawn ahead, and we believe he can maintain that material advantage, with a very good position in several ways. For instance. White may continue 15. Kt to B 5 ch, 15. K to K 3 ; 16. B to K 3 or Kt to K 3, etc. White may also reverse the order of moves and commence with 15. B to K 3. He may also play 15. B to Kt 5 ch, 15. KtoB2; BtoR6 Kt to Q B 3 K to Q 2 etc.) (°'^^- KtoQ3 ^^- Kt to Q B 3 ^'- Kt to Q 5 ch ''*■ 16. B to K 3, and White evidently has the superior game, with a Pawn ahead. On the same page, 8th line from the bottom. — White's sixth move, Q to B 3, is unsatisfactory, on account of the con- tinuation : 6. KttoKt4 . 7. B takes Kt 7. Q takes B 8. B to Kt 3 dis. ch 8. K to K sq, and Black will recover the Pawn, with a good game. But White can 83 APPENDIX. win on the 6th move, thus: 6. B to Q 5, 6. Kt to Kt 4; 7. P to K E 4, and, play as Black may, White wins a piece ; for if 7. KrtoTB2 (or 7. KttoKS; 8. B takes Kt ; or 7. Flo QB3; 8. B takes Kt, 8. Q to E,4ch; 9. B to Q 2) ; 8. B takes Kt, 8. K takes B ; 9. Q to Q 5 ch, etc. THE GAME OF THE TWO BISHOPS. Page 681, 8th line from the bottom. — Here the author ignores the effect of Kt to K B 3, which we believe will maintain the piece, with a good game. At the end of that variation, 4th line from the bottom. Black does not appear to have the least compensation for the piece sacrificed if White proceeds with 17. E to B 5. Page 683, 12th line from the bottom. — The Black Queen is in no immediate danger, and we therefore prefer 9. Kt to K B 3, followed by Castles. Page 684, 4th line from the bottom. — We think that the advance 9. P to Q Kt 4 weakens White's position, and we prefer the plain continuation of 9. P takes P. Black's 10th move of the same variation, one line below, evidently does not help the defense much, and 10. P to Q B 4 is clearly preferable. Page 693, top line. — 15. B takes P is not as good as 15. P takes B P, whereupon the game might continue : 15. P takes B 16. P takes E 16. Q to Q 4 ch 17. K takes P 17. Kt to Kt 5 ch GAME OF THE TWO BISHOPS. 83 18. K to Kt 3 18. Q to Q 3 ch 19. B to B 4 19. Q takes Kt P 20. E to K sq ch 20. B to K 3 21. Q to Kt 5, with a winning game, for, if Black exchanges Queens, White wins afterward a piece by E takes B. On the same page, 8th line from the toj).— White, has at this juncture a much superior game, but instead of the move in the text, which loses valuable time, White ought to play 13. P to K 5 , winning a piece without danger. He can also play B to K 3 first. Page 694. — The variation appearing at the 6th line from 'the top to the end of the page is a mere repetition of the analysis given on page 686, under the heading "Game the Fifth." THE COUNTEE GAMBIT. Page 696, 9th line from the bottom. — White's 4th move, P to K B 4, is pronounced best without stating any further reasons, and the analysis that follows does not appear to prove any tangil le advantage for White. We think that the game ought to be treated on the same principles as the King's Gambit Declined, for White has a position similar to that obtained in the latter opening, and he is, moreover, a move ahead. Therefore we prefer 4. Kt to K B 3, fol- lowed either by Castling or else by Kt to K Kt 5 in reply to 4. Q Kt to B 3 or 4. P to Q 3. 84 APPENDIX THE QUEEN'S BISHOP'S PAWN'S DEFENSE. Page 699, 10th liim from tlie hottom. — On White's 5th move we much, prefer 5. Q Kt to B 3 ; for if 5. Kt takes P 6. B takes P ch 6. K takes B 7. Q to B 3 ch 7. Kt to B 3 8. P takes Kt 8. Q to K 4 ch 9. Kt to K 4, with the superior game, for should Black continue 9. P to Q 4, then 10. P takes P dis. ch 10. K takes P 11. Q to Kt 3 ch leaves White a Pawn ahead, with an excellent position. THE QUEEN'S GAMBIT ACCEPTED AND DECLINED. Page 709, 14th line from the top.— 10. K to B 2 is not as good as 10. K to K 2, which would enable White eventually to defend the K P by K to B 3. On the same page, 7th line from the hottom. — ^We cannot see that White has any advantage. On the contrary, we believe that Black, by 8. P to Q Kt 4, wiU secure a winning position ; for, wherever White's Queen may retreat to. Black may play B to Q 4, followed by P to K 3, and, clearly, QUEEN'S GAMBIT ACCEPTED AND DECLINED. 85 if White sacrifice the Knight for the two Pawns, he has no satisfactory continuation in return. Zukertort, in many of his important contests, favored the commencement 1. KUoK^S, which, by a transposition of moves, leads to a position of the Queen's Gambit Declined. In modern games the Queen's Gambit Declined usually takes the form of the Queen's Fianchetto for both sides. GAMES ILLUSTEATIVE OF THE QUEEN'S GAMBIT DECLINED. GAME I.— Ninth Game of the Match, played at St. Louis, February 10th, 1886, between Messrs. W Steinitz and J. H. Zukertort. (Notes from the International CJiess Magazine.) White (Mr. Zukertort). Black (Mr. Steinitz). 1. Pto Q4 1. P to Q4 3. P to Q B 4 3. P to K 3 3. Q Kt to B 3 8. K Kt to B 3 4. K Kt to B 3 4, P takes P 5. P to K 3 (fl) 5. P to Q B 4 6. B takes P 6. P takes P 7. P takes P 7. B to K 3 8. Castles 8. Castles 9. Q to K 3 9. Q Kt to Q 3 (5) 10. B to Kt 3 (c) 10. Kt to Kt 3 11. BtoKB4 11. Kt fr. Kt 3 to Q 4 13. B to Kt 3 13. Q to R 4 13. Q R to B sq. 13. B to Q 3 14. Kt to K 5 14. K R to Q sq (a) If P to K 4, Black could well answer B to Kt 5. (J) An Improvement, we believe, on Black's plan of development, as compared to the seventh game. The object is to fix one of his Knights strongly in the centre, as will be seen. (c) If he wanted to get rid of his isolated Pawn he could do so now by advancing it but, of course, he would not have any show of attack after that. 86 APPENDIX. 15. Q to B3 15. B to K sq 16. K R to K sq 16. Q R to B sq 17. B to K R 4 (d) 17. Kt takes Kt («) 18. P takes Kt 18. Q to B 3 (/) 19. QtoQS 19. Ktto Q 4 30. B takes B 30. Q takes B 31. B takes Kt 31. R takes B 33. P to Q B 4 33. K R to sq (i?) 33. Rto K 3 33. QtoQS 34. R to Q sq 34. Pto B3 35. R to R 3 (7t) 35. P to K R 3 (i) 36. Ktto Kt4 36. Q to B 5 37. Kt to K 3 37. B to R 5 0) 38. R to B 3 {h) 28. QtoQS (jj) He threatens now Kt takes Kt, which would compel Black to retake with the Pawn, and would not alone cover White's weak Q P, but in turn would subject Black's Q P to attacks. (e) This was, obviously. Black's best reply, and though it strengthens the opponent's centre, it still leaves White's Pawns on the Queen's wing in a loose position. (/) With the object of protecting the K B, whenever he thought fit to offer another exchange by Kt to Q 4. {g) Best ; for if R to R 4, White could well institute a powerful attack by advancing P to 5, which now would be inoperative on account of the reply P to Q Kt 4. {h) A tempting and ingenious offer of a sacrifice which, if accepted, might have involved Black in serious troubles, and would, at any rate, have deprived him of all chances of winning. (i) With the move in the text Black initiates the offensive, which, we believe, must have yielded him the superiority of position under any circumstances, by best play on his own part. Whereas, if he had taken the Knight, he could not hope to win, and might have greatly endangered his game, e.g. : 25. . . P takes Kt; 26. Q takes P ch, 26. K to B sq ; 37. R to B 3 ch. (Mr. Zukertort informs us that he intended to go on with 27. R to K Kt 3, to which, however, 27.. .Rto Q 2 would be a satisfactory, though the only correct, reply. We may, however, safely assume that Mr. Zukertort's fine position judgment in offering the sacrifice would have been supported by accurate reckoning if it had come to this point.) 27. . . B to B 2, best ; 28. Q to R 5 (a most important finessing move for the attack), 28. Q to Q 2 (Black has nothing better than to withdraw the Queen there or to Q B 2, though this disables him from interposing her at any time at K B sq. If 28. . . R to B 2, White answers P to B 5, and 28. . .R to Q 2 loses a Rook by Q to R 8 ch) ; 29. Q to R 8 ch, 89. K to K 2; and now White obviously has a draw by perpetual check, commencing with Q to R 4 ch ; but we believe he may fairly try to wm, with hardly any risk of losing, by Q takes P, followed by P to K R 4, or P to Q 5, according to circumstances. (j ) The finessing with the Bishop has a great bearing on the future of Black's counter- attack. It was of great moment to force the withdrawal of White's Rook from the first rank and to leave the White King without sufficient protection. (k) He might have made it much more difficult for the opponent to find the most potent attack if he had played R to Q 3 at once. But, no doubt, he would have also had a bad game m the case, e. g. : 28. R to Q 2, 28. P to Q Kt 4; 29. R to B 3 (this seems best now), 29. . .Q to Kt sq (P takes P would be bad on account of the reply Q to R 3) ; 30. P takes P, 30. R to B 8 ch ; 31. Kt to Q sq, 31. P to K 4, threatenmg R takes P as well as P to K 4, with an irresistible attack. QUEEN'S GAMBIT DECLINED. 87 29. k to Q 3 30. Rto Kt 3(m) 31. R to Kt 6(ra) 83. Q to Kt 3 33. Pto B5 34. R takes K ?(>■)) 35. Kt to Q sq (?) 36. Q to Kt 2 37. Q to B3 38. R takes B (r) 89. Resigns. 29. B to B 3 © 30. PtoB4 81. B to K 5 82. K to R 3 (o) 83. R takes B " 34. R to B 8 ch 35. Q to B 5 36. RtoKtS 87. R to Q B sq 38. Q takes R GAME II. — Ninth Game of the Match between Captain Mac- kenzie and Mr. S. Lipschiitz. White (Mr. Mackenzie). Black (Mr. Lipschiitz.) 1. Kt to K B 3 1. P to Q 4 3. P to Q 4 3. P to K 3 3. P to K 3 3. Kt to K B 3 4. B to Q 8 4. P to Q B 4 5. P to Q Kt 3 5. Kt to B 8 6. B to Kt 3 6. B to K 2 (I) Which establishes this Bishop on the most important diagonal. Cot) He had no means of dislodging the Bishop. If 30. P to Q 8, 30. P t»kes P; 31. P talces P, 31. B takes P; 33. Kt takes B, 33. R to B 8 ch, followed by R takes R ch and Q takes Kt, with a Pawn ahead and the superior game. (n) He had nothing better, as P to B 5 was threatened. (o) The King had to play to this square in accordance with Black's plan, for otherwise he could not utilize his Queen at great distance from his King, as White, after pushing P to B 5, would threaten Q takes K P ch, followed accordingly by R takes R P ch or R to B 6 ch, with at least a draw by perpetual check. (p) If 34. Q takes K P, 34. R to B 8 ch ; 35. Kt to Q sq (or 35. Kt to B sq, 35. Q takes Q; 36. R takes Q, 36. B to Q 4, followed by B to B 5), 35. . .Q takes Q; 36. R takes Q, 36. B to Q 4; 37. R to K sq, 37. B takes R P, and if White take the Bishop, Black answers R takes P, and wins. (g) Had the Knight interposed at B sq, Black could answer Q to B 3, threatening B to Q 4, as well as a continuation of the attack by R to Kt 8 or Q to B 5, m case White's Queen moved from her post at Kt 3. (r) A desperate resource, on the chance that Black might take with the -Pawn, where- upon White would answer Q tpkes R, threatening to draw by perpetual check, com- mencing with Q to B 5 ch. 88 APPENDIX. 7. Q Kt to Q 2 8. Castles 9. Ktto K5 10. P to Q R 3 11. P takes P{a) 12. B takes Kt la. Q to B3 14. Q to R3 15. P to Q R 4 16. Q R to Q sq 17. B to Kt 2 18. B to R3 19. PtoK4 20. P taker P 21. K R to K sq 22. Q to Kt 3 23. Q toB4 24. QtoQ4 2F. R takes R ch 26. Q takes Kt 27. Q to 4 W 28. Kt to B 3 (/) 29. B to Kt 2 30. Q takes Q P ch 31. Q takes Q ch 32. Rto Q2 33. R takes R 34. KttoQ4 35. Pto B4 36. K toB3 37. P to Kt 3 38. Kt to B 3 7. Castles 8. B to Q 2 a. R to B sq 10. P to Q R 3 11. Kt takes Kt 13. B takes p 13. B to K 2 14. P to K Kt 3 15. B to Q B 3 16. Kt to Q 3 17. B to B 8 18. R to K sq 19. Kt to K 4 30. P takes P (6) 21. B to Q 3 32. B to R 5 33. B to Kt 4 (e) 24. Kt takes B 25. Q takes R 36. B to K B 4 27. R takes P (e) 28. B to K 2 29. P to B 3 30. Q to B 3 31. ic takes Q 33. B to Q Kt 5 33. B takes R 34. B to Q 8 35. K to K 3 36. B to Q 7 37. K to Q 3 38. B to Kt 5 (a) The British Chess Magazine rightly points out that White, by this and his next moves, makes a prematur- attack, whereby- Black gets the better position. P to Q B 4 was m'lch to be preferred. (6) If 20.. .B takes P; 21. B to K4 (!), 21. Q to B 2; 32. K R to K sq, 22. B to Kt2; 23.. P to Q B 4, 23. B to B 3; 24. B takes B, 24. Kt takes B; 25. Kt to K 4, with a superior game. (c) Black might have obtained a decisive advantage by 23.. .Kt takes B; 24. R takes R ch (if 24. P takes Kt, 24. R takes R ch ; 25. R takes R, 25. B to K Kt », winning a piece, for 26. Q to Q Kt 4 cannot save it), 24.. .Q takes R; 25. P takes Kt, 25. Q to K 7; 26. Q to B 3, 26. B to Kt 5; 2^. Q takes Q, 27. B takes Q, winning a Pawn. (O) It 27. Q takes Q P, Black would win by R to Q sq. (e) B takes P appears stronger. (/) If 28. B to Kt 2, 28. R takes B; 29. Q takes R, 29. Q to K 7; 30. Q to B sq, 30. P to Q R 4, with an extra Pawn for the exchange and a winning position, as White cannot move any of his pieces without immediate loss. QUEEN'S GAMBIT DECLINED. §9 39. Kt to Q 4 39. B to Q 7 40. Kt to B 3 40. B to Q R 4 41. Kt to Q 4 41. K to B 4 43. K to K 3 43. B to Kt 3 43. B to B 3 43. K to Q 4 44. P to R 5 44. B to B 4 45. K to Q 3 45. B to K Kt 5 46. P to Q Kt 4 (ff) 46. B to K 2 47. B to Q 3 47. B to K R 6 48. Kt to B 3 48. B to B 8 ch 49. K to B 3 49. K to K 5 50. Kt to K sq 50. P to B 4 51. K to B 3 51. P to R 4 53. B to B 3 53. K to K 6 53. K to Q sq 53. B to K 7 ch 54. K to B sq 54. p to R 5 55. Kt to B 3 ch 55. K to Q 6 56. B to K sq 56. P takes P 57. P takes P 57. B to B 3 58. B to B 3 58. B to Q B 6 59. B to B 5 59. B to Q 7 ch 60. K to Kt 3 60. B to Q 8 61. Kt to R 3 61. B to K 8 63. Kt to Kt sq 62. B takes P 63. Kt to B 3 63. B to B 6 64. B to Q 6 64. P to K Kt 4 (ft) 65. Kt to R 4 65. B takes P 66. Kt to B 5 ch 66. K to K 6 67. Resigns. (g) To this premature advance the loss of the game may be ascribed. (A) 64. . . K to K 6 would have been as good. If 65. K to B 7, 85. B to K 5 ch, will be necessary, as Black would be mated if he captured the Fawn. % APPENDIX. THE FEENCH GAME. Fage 724, top line. — lu the Vienna Tournament of 1882 Mr. Steinitz adopted 2. P to K 5 for the attack, and he afterward, during his first journey on the American side of the Atlantic, played the same move against Martinez, Sellman and Golmayo. His idea was, as stated in some of his comments, to exchange the K P for the adverse K B P or Q P, whichever might advance on the other side, in order to obtain an open file for his Eook at K sq, with the view of stopping the ultimate further advance of Black's K P. He, however, played usually after 2. P to Q B 4, 3. P to K B 4. In his later practice Mr. Steinitz seems to have abandoned this attack, which was never adopted by any first-class player, excepting Winawer, who tried its effect in a few games of this opening. On the same page, 5th line from bottom. — We do not think that 4. B to Q 3 is White's best move, and prefer 4. P takes P, with the continuation, as on page 727, under variation (G), where, however, White, in our opinion, has a slight advantage at the end, for Black cannot well exchange his K B for the adverse Knight, since he would thereby give White the advantages of retaining two Bishops, besides an open Q Kt file and a good prospective attack by P to Q B 4, which would dissolve White's doubled Pawn and strengthen his centre. FRENCH DEFENSE. 91 GAME ILLUSTRATIVE OF THE PEENCH DEFENSE. Played at the Fifth Chess Congress of the German Schach- bund, at Frankfort-on-the-Main, on July 25th, between Dr. Tarrasch and Mr. I. Gunsberg. (Notes from the International Chess Magazine.) White (Dr. Tarrasch). 1. Pto K4 2. PtoQ4 3. Q Kt to B 3 4. Kt takes P 5. B to Q 3 (5) 6. BtoK 3 7. B takes Kt 8. Bto Q 3 9. Kt to B 3 10. Castles 11. Q B to K Kt 5 13. BtoQ2 13. P to K R 8 14. P to Q B 4 15. P to Q Kt 4 16. R to K sq (c?) 17. R to Q Kt sq 18. Q takes B 19. Pto B5 20. Rto Kt3 21. K R to Kt sq Black (Mr. Gunsberg). 1. P to K 3 2. P to Q 4 3. P takes P {a) 4. K Kt to B 3 5. Q Kt to Q2 6. Kt takes Kt 7. Kt to B3 8. B to Q 2 9. B to Q 3 10. Kt to Kt 5 11. P to K B3 13. Q to K 2 18. Ktto R3 14. P to B 3 15. Castles Q side (c) 16. B takes P 17. B takes B 18. K to Kt sq 19. B to B sq 20. Q to Q B3 21. K to R sq («) (o) Inferior to Kt to K B 3 at this point. The move in the text was first adopted by Bird against Steinitz in their match in 1866. (ft) White could gain a speedier advantage in position by 5. Kt talces Kt ch, as played by Steinitz in the above-mentioned game, with the following continuation : 5...Q talces Kt; 6. Kt to B 3, 6. Kt to B 3; 7. Q B to K Kt 5, 7. Q to B 4; 8. B to Q 3, 8. Q to Kt 5; 9. P to K R 3, 9. Q takes Kt P; 10. R to R 3, and wins, (c) If Black had taken the Kt P, White would have exchanged Bishops, followed by R to Q Kt sq, with an excellent attack. ((^ Without disparaging the highly ingenious manner in which White ultimately wins the game, we do not chink that the sacrifice of the Pawn was warranted by the position here, and we should have preferred either R to Q Kt sq or P to B 5, followed by PtoQR4. (e) Unnecessary. Kt to B 2, or else Kt to Kt sq, with the view of reaching the strong post at Q 4, would have sooner commanded the opponent's attention to the defense against Black's centre attack, which was bound to become formidable, with a Pawn ahead. 92 APPENDIX. 23. R to Kt 6 33. P to K 4 (/) 23. R (Kt sq) to Kt 4 33. K R to K sq (^) 24. P takes P 34. P takes P £5. R to R 4 35. P to K 5 Qi) 26. Q to R 5 26. Q to Kt sq 27. B takes P 27. B to B 4 {i) 28. R to R 6 (J) 28. R to Q 8 ch 29. Kt to K sq 39. R takes Kt ch 30. Q takes R 30. B takes B (A) 81. R takes B 31. R takes R 33. Q takes R 32. P takes R 33. Q takes P ch 33. Q to K^ 2 34. Q to K 8 ch 34. Q to Kt sq 35. Q to K 4 ch 35. Q to Kt 2 36. P to B 6 ® 36. Q to B 2 37. Q to K 8 ch 37. Q to Kt sq 38. Q to Q 7 88. Q to Kt 8 ch 39. K to R 3 89. Kt to B 3 40. P to B 7 40. Resigns. (/) Of course, if P takes R, the Pawn retakes, and the Queen is lost, on account of the threatened Q to R 5 ch. ig) Again he cannot take the Rook, for the^ Pawn would retake, followed by R to R 4 ch and R to R 8 ch, etc. ill) He does not get any positive return in position for giving up this Fawn. Kt to B 4 was better. (i) This tempting manoeuvre is outgeneralled by Dr. Tarrasch with admirable depth and ingenuity. (J) The beauty of this splendid move can only be fully appreciated about eight moves on each side later on, for so far he must have calculated in order to verify iiis combination against the line of play actually adopted by the opponent, apart from other complications that might have arisen. (i) If aO...R takes B; 31. R takes R (better than R takes P ch, which leaves Black with three pieces for the Queen), 31 P takes R (B takes R leads to the same position as in actual play); 33. R to K 8, followed by 33. Q to K 4, with a fine attack. (J) The turning point, which must have been clearly perceived by White before he made his elegant sacrifice on the 28th move. After this there is no more hope for Black. QUEEN'S KNIGHT'S OPENING. 93 THE QUEEN'S KNIGHT'S OPENING. This opening is better known as the Vienna Opening, and was first introduced into practice by Herr Hampe, of Vienna. The Steinitz Gambit is the outcome of this debut. Page 741, 5th line from top. — We extract the 'following continuation from "The Match between Messrs. Steinitz and Blackburne," a pamphlet published in London, 1876, with comments by Mr. Steinitz. This variation occurred in the fifth game of the match between the above-named players, Mr. Blackburne having the defense : 4 K B to Q Kt 5 5. P takes K P 5. Kt takes P 6. P takes Kt 6. Q to E 5 ch 7. K to K 2 7. B takes Kt 8. P takes B 8. B to Kt 5 ch 9. KttoBS 9. P takes P 10. Q to Q 4 10. B to E 4 (Obviously best, for if P takes Kt ch. White retakes with the Pawn and wins a piece.) 11. K to K 3 (See diagram). 64. APPENDIX. Diagram, Showing the position after White's 12th move. BLACK. M i f if ■ i iij i m-////////. 'M'/y/Z/O: '/'K/WA Vy-M///^. '^^P ^^ 'W^^^- ?^ ^» ^m, 4mm w^mn^ 'f^y^m W/<%^ , '-.yyyyyyyyA ., '^^jji^yy Wy,. iSl iS^ ■ 'mm 'm MM'...^,.3^M WHITE. (This is White's bust move, if 11. ^ '° g ^ 13. ^ ^° '^ ^ ^ Q to Kt 5 Q to B 5 ch 13 K to Q sq P talces Kt anu wins.) 11. B takes Kt 12. B to Kt 5 ch (If 12. P takes Kt, Black draws or wins, commencing with Q to K 8 ch, as he has a see-saw of checks alternately at E 5 and K 8, unless White interposes the Bishop once at K 2 and gives up the Eook, for which sacrifice he gets no consideration.) 12. P to Q B 3 13. P takes Kt 13. P takes B 14. Q takes K P, with the better game. QUEEN'S KNIGHT'S OPENING. 95 GAME ILLUSTEATIVE OF THE QUEEN'S KNIGHT'S OPENING. Played between Mr. W. Steinitz and an amateur, White giving the odds of the Queen's Rook, which should be removed from the board. White (Mr. Steinitz). 1. P to K 4 2. Q Kt to B 3 3. P to K B 4 4. P to K 5 5. Q to K 2 (J) 6. Kt to B 3 7. Kt to Q 5 8. P takes P disch 9. Kt takes P ch. (e) 10. Kt takes B 11. Kt to K 5 ch 12. Q to B 4 ch 18. Q takes Kt ch 14. B to R 6 ch 15. Kt takes P mate. Black (Amateur). 1. P to K 4 2. K Kt to B3 3. P takes P 4. Q to K 2 (a) 5. Kt to K Kt sq(«) 6. P to Q 3 (d) 7. QtoQsq 8. B to K 3 9. K to Q 2 10. P takes Kt 11. K to B sq (/) 12. Kt to B 3 13. P takes Q 14. K to Kt sq (a) This move looks feasible, and is, tlierefore, likely to be adopted by inexperienced players. We give- tllis little game as an illustration of tiie results of a defense which apparently comprises a good answer, but is, nevertheless, defective. Kt to K Kt sq at once was his best play. (b) Now that Black has blocked his Bishop, White can do the same with great advantage, as will be seen. (c) 5. P to B 6 was a little better, for if then 6. P takes Kt, 6. P takes Q; 7. P takes Q, 7. P takes B queening ch, etc. But, no doubt. White, in that case, would have also obtained a strong attack by 0. Kt taken P, 6. Kt to R 4; 7. P to Q 4, etc. (d) This is disastrous at once, but he has already a bad game. If, for instance, 6. . . PtoK Kt4; 7. Pto K R4, 7. PtoKt5; 8. Kt to K Kt5, 8. Pto K R3; 9. K KttoK4, 9. Q Kt to B 3; 10. Kt to Q 5, 10. Q Ukes K P; 11. P to Q 4, and wins, for if Kt takes P, then K Kt to B 6 ch follows. («) 9. P takes P threatening to queen the Pawn, should Black capture the Knight with the Queen, would have been sufficient if the game were played on even terms, and perhaps also good enough at the odds given, for White wins a piece and can afterward continue the attack by Q to K 5. (/) Better was 11. K to K sq, but White would also, in that case, obtain a strong attack by Q to R 6 ch, followed by B to Kt 5 ch. The move in the text enables White to finish off with a brilliant combination. 96 APPENDIX. THE FLOCHETTO. Page 772, 7th line from the top. — Mr. Steinitz advises here 3. P to K B 3. On the same page, 5th line from the bottom. — 9. F to Q E 3 is not a good move, for Black may answer with advantage 9. P to B 5, and thus create in White's battle-order of Fawns a weak spot, or what is aptly called in the International Chess Magazine, "a hole." According to that journal, any square on the third or fourth row into which a hostile piece can enter without being liable to an attack by a Fawn is a source of weakness sooner or later, but especially in the ending. As White, in this position, can hardly expect to make any impression in the centre or on the King's wing, for Black has not castled, and is not bound to do so, the weakness of his Queen's side is a considerable drawback to his game. Page 774, 6th line, from the iop.— Instead of 11. F to K E 3 we would suggest 11. B to K Kt 5, followed by F to K B 3, which shuts out the adverse Q B ; and as White has already one piece and a Pawn for the Eook he ought either to succeed soon with his direct attack against the King, or he ought to gain another piece in the end and obtain a material superiority. Page 776, top line. — We do not consider P to Q B 4 advisable at such an early stage, for, if Black play P to Q 4, sooner or later White's Q P will be isolated, or else Black will obtain the superiority of Pawns on the Queen's side, THE FIANCHETTO. 97 which is an advantage for the ending. It is generally better for White to retain both the Bishop's Pawns, in order to play them to the third square in support of the centre. THE CENTEE COUNTER GAMBIT. Page^ 181, 10th line from the top.~li should be added that if 12. Kt takes B P 13. Kt takes B 13. Kt takes E 14. B to Q 3, and Black's Knight has no escape. White will, therefore, obtain two minor pieces for the Eook. besides having a strong attack. THE SICILIAN GAME. Page 800, 3d line from the bottom. — This sub-variation comprises, in our opinion. Black's best defense in this form of opening ; and, provided that the final move is altered, we think that it proves the unsoundness of White's second and third moves in the leading line of play. Instead of 7. P to Q 3, which is recommended at the end of this variation, we would much prefer 7. P takes P, whereupon the game might proceed : 8. Castles 8. Kt to K 4 , 9. B to Kt 3 BtoQS Kt to K B 3 Q takes Kt ^ P to K B 3 Kt takes Kt ch P to K Kt 4 ' ■'' 9. Kt to Kt 3, followed by B to B 4, and White will find it difficult, if not impossible, 98 APPENDIX. to recover both Pawns, while Black will be enabled to Castle and play P to Q 3 without hindrance, remaining in most continuations with a Pawn ahead, and, anyhow, with the superior game. Page 801, 10th line from the bottom. — We disapprove, in general, of the advance of a R P on either side early in the opening, and especially on the King's side, on which wing both parties generally Castle. Mr. Steinitz, in the Inter- national Chess Magazine, has pointed out that the Pawns ought to remain unmoved as long as possible on the side on which the King takes refuge ; and in some of the best games between strong masters the aim of the attacking party is, in the first instance, to compel the opponent to advance one of the Pawns on the King's wing, whereupon that side generally becomes weakened, and the advanced Pawn, or the adjoining squares and Pawns, become a mark for the attack of the hostile forces. As stated in the International Chess Magazine, three unmoved Pawns, in conjunction with one minor piece, will defy almost any conceivable attack against the King, and we quite agree with that proposition. 9. Kt to B 5 is much stronger than 9. P to K B 3. ~~ On tlie same page, 3d line from the bottom. — White may play, with much greater advantage, 11. P to B 5. Obviously, Black dare not take the Pawn, and White, therefore, has established the majority of Pawns by three to two on the extreme Queen's wing, and far away from the hostile King, which gives him a great superiority for the ending. The great advantage of such a formation of wings was first pointed out by Mr. Steinitz in the London Field. SICILIAN GAME. 99 Pacje 802, 14th line from the top. — 7. Kt takes Kt unites the hostile Pawns, Kt to Q B 3 is better. But, having adopted this 7th move, White should proceed with 9. P to Q-B 4, in order to neutralize the adverse centre. On the same page, 4th line from the bottom. — 7. Kt to Q B 3 is preferable. On the next line, 5. P to Q E 3 is given as best for Black, but there is no reason why Black should not play 5. Kt to K B 3. Moreover, the main line of play spring- ing from this move ends in favor of White, whereas the sub-variations which follow lead to an even game for the defense. 5. Kt to K B 3 may be turned into a defense of which Mr. Ph. Richardson is the author, and which ought to be further noticed, for we believe that White ought to obtain some advantage in position against this line of play, e. g.: 5. Kt to K B 3 6. Q Kt to B 3 6. B to Kt 5 7. Kt to Q 6 ch 7. K to K 2 (See diagram.) 100 APPENDIX DlAGEAM, Showing the position after Black's 7th move. BLACK. V//////////, Wa i Pi ■ •sHis^T^ y/^77700; #g?^i ,^ (?) ■ '■^//////xi. WHITE. This is Mr. Eichardson's idea, but after - 8. Kt takes B ch 8. E takes Kt 9. B to Q 3, and we prefer White's game. Page 803, top line. — -Instead of wasting a move with his Bishop which is already developed, White ought to proceed at once with 10. Kt to Q B 4, and would, we believe, rapidly gain the advantage in position. ON SOME OTHEB LESS PRACTISED BEBUTS. 101 ON SOME OTHEE LESS PEACTISED DEBUTS. Page 831, 12tli line from the bottom. — '■ Winawer would unhesitatingly pronounce this position in favor of the first player, on the ground that White has two Knights, which gives the former the prospect of remaining in the ending with Knight against Bishop, and he opines that the chances of the Knight against the Bishop are greatly in- creased in the ending, when the side which has the Bishop is incumbered with a doubled Pawn. We concur with the latter opinion, but nevertheless- we would not positively maintain, for instance, that in the above position White has any tangible superiority, for though Herr Winawer has in some excellent games cleverly managed to leave his opponent saddled to the end with the doubled Pawn and retain Knight against Bishop, the chances of actual play are manifold and would, we believe, often turn in favor of Black's two Bishops. We would, therefore, declare the game about even. On the same page, 4th line from the bottom. — The right move at this juncture is 5. P to Q 3, for if then 5. Kt to Kt 5 6. B to K Kt 5 6. P to K B 3 7. B to Q B sq, and Black's counter-attack is broken. Page 834, 6th line from tJie top. — The sub-variations given here are altogether erroneous and unintelligible. Page 837, 5th line from tlie lottorny-'B\&ck's, 6th move, Q to Kt 3, was first adopted by Steinitz against Potter,' in a 102 APPENDIX. game played in the Handicap Tournament of the City of London Chess Club, 1870. The main features of the sub- sequent analysis were first published in the London Fidd, just after the game was played. GAMES ILLUSTRATIVE OP SOME OTHER LESS PRACTISED DEBUTS. GAME I.— Played between Messrs. J. H. Zukertort and J. H. Blackburne. From the "Book of the London International Chess Congress, 1883." (The notes marked with capital letters are by Mr. Zukertort ; those with small letters, by Mr. ]. I. Minchin.) White (Mr. Zukertort). Black (Mr. Blackburne). 1. P to Q B 4 (a) 2. P to K 3 3. KttoK B3 4. B to K 3 5. Castles {A) 6. Pto Q4 7. Kt to B 3 8. P to Q Kt 3 9. B to Kt2 10. Ktto Q Kt5 11. Kt takes B 13. Kt to Q 3 1. P to K 3 2. Ktto K B3 3. P to Q Kt 3 4. B to Kt3 0. P to Q4 6. B to Q 3 7. Castles 8. Q Kt to Q 3 9. Q to K 3 (5) 10. Kt to K 5 11. P takes Kt 12. Q Kt to B 3 (C) (a) I have elsewhere stated my opinion that this is not only by far the finest game played in the Tournament, but probably within the memory of the existing generation of Chess players. It may be fairly classed with the great game won by Anderssen, of Kieseritzky, more than thirty years ago. C^) The development of the King's Bishop has been discussed by various analysts on every possible occasion. Here again I cannot propose a hard and fast rule, but I may state that whenever the Queen's Fianchetto is adopted before playing the Q P two squares the opponent's K B ought to be posted at K 2 ; if, on the other hand, both players have advanced the Q P, the Bishop may be then played at once to Q 3. {B) The routine move, P to B 4, would be preferable. (C) The loss of time occasioned by this continuation gives to the opponent the first opportunity to prepare the following attack. ON SOME OTHER LESS PRACTISED DEBUTS. 103 13. P to B 3 13. Kt takes Kt 14. Q takes Kt 14. P takes P 15. B takes P 15. P to O 4 16. B to Q 3 16. K R to B sq {D) 17. Q R to K sq 17. R to B 3 18. P to K 4* 18. Q R to Q B sq (1st hour .*) 19. P to K 5 (1st hour.) 19'. Kt to K sq 30. P to B 4 20. P to Kt 3 {E) 31. R to K 3 (!) (A) 31. P to B 4 (F) 23. P takes P in passing 23; Kt. takes P {Q) 33. P to B5(!) 33. Kt to K 5 34. B takes Kt 34. P takes B 25. P takes Kt P 35. R to B 7 (H) (c) 36. P takes P ch 36. K to R sq (i) 37. P to Q 5 ch 27. P to K 4 •Time limit was 15 moves per liour. (ft) Wlien Zulcertort made this move lie liad in his mind's eye the whole combination Jiat follows down to Black's 28th move. It may seem singular that his opponent should Aave played the next seven moves exactly as anticipated, but it must be remembered that Mr. Blackbume doubled his Rooks with the intention of playing^ to Q B 7 as soon as he had got rid of the White K B, and played for that purpose, expecting^ to win a piece. The real beauty of Zukertort's play is that he led his opponent into this trap, correctly calcul- ating its real results. (c) The excited spectators naturally thought that Zukertort had here lost a piece and the game, but one confident believer in his skill at this point bet a shilling that he would win the game, not having the slightest conception of the manner in which he could escape from the apparently impending loss. (D) Mr. Blackburne underrated, I think, the power of the coming attack. It would have been more prudent to leave the K R on the King's side, and to occupy the open 51e with the Q R. iE) Of course. Black had to stop the further advance of the B P. Considering, however, that the text move weakens his King's position— especially the K R P— without gaining any equivalent; I would suggest instead of it P to B 4 at once. {F) 21...KttoKt2 would be slightly better. White would then continue with 22. P to K Kt 4. (G) He should retake with the Queen, although he would have even then a difficult game, e. g. : 22. . .Q takes P; 23. Q to K sq, 23. Kt to Kt 2; 24. P to K Kt 4, and White would have unlimited time to force a probably irresistible attack. (S) Notwithstanding its disastrous result, the text move constituted Black's only chance, for, if he play 25 ... P takes P, White forces the game with : 26. R to Kt 3, 26. Q to Kt2 (if 26. . .Q to R 2, then 27. R to B 6, winning, for if 27. . .R to Kt 2, then 28. R to R 3. If 26 .Q to K sq, then 27. Q to R 6, 27. R to Kt 2; 28, R to R 3. If, at last, 26. . . K to Kt2, then 27. P to Q 5 ch, 27. P to K 4; 28. P to Q 6); 27. P to Q 5, 27. P to K 4 (or 2r. . . R to B 7 28. Q takes R, 28. R takes Q; 29. B takes Q, 29. K takes B; 30. P takes P, etc.); 28. Q to Kt B, 28. R to K sq; 29. R to B 6. (J) If 26... takes P, then, of course, 27,RtoKt3ch; if 26... K takes P, then 27. R to R 3 ch, 27. K to Kt sq ; 28; Q to R 6. 104 APPENDIX. 38. Q to Kt 4 (!) {O) 28, Q R to B 4 {J) («) 39. R to B 8 ch {Kj (j , 29. K takes P (£) 30. Q takes P ch 30. K to Kt 3 31, B takes P ch 31. K takes R 33. B 10 Kt 7 ch (!) (g-) 33. K to Kt sq 33. Q takes Q 33. Resigns. (d) This move literally electrified the lookers-on, who were absorbed in this contest. 1 was playing a game in the Vizayan^^ram Tournament at the time, when a friend whispered in my ear, "The fiend has oilered his Queen, and it cannot be taken without suffering mate I " («) When Zukertort played R to K 3 at his 21st move he had calculated that 28. R to K sq was Black's best move, and had prepared the continuation 29. P to Qi^ etc. In that case, so lost is the position that 29. R to B 8 ch would equally win, but not so rapidly. (J) On this move Mr. Steinitz remarks in Thttf, Field and Farm : " In conjunction with White's previous play, this forms one of the most noble combinations conceived over the Chess-board," a remark as honorable to the commentator as to his great rival. (y) " A worthy finish," says Mr. Steimtz, " to one of the most brilliant games on record." ((7) The capture of the Queen would lead to a mate in seven moves with: 29. B takes P ch 29. K takes P 30. R to K 8 ch 30. K to Kt 3 31. R to Kt 3 ch This is the line of play I contemplated when offering the Queen. All the commentators proceed with 81. R to B 6 ch. The difference, however, amounts but to a transposition o. moves. 31. K to R 3 If 31. . . K to R 2 or R 4, mate follows in three moves. 32. R to B 6 ch 32. K to R 4 or R 2 33. R to B 6 or B 7 ch 83. K to R 3 34. B to B 4 ch 34. K moves 85. K R mates. Black had no saving move. If 28. . . K R to B 4, then 29. Q takes P, 29. R takes P (best)- • 30. B takes P ch, 80. R takes B; 31. Q takes R ch, 31, Q takes Q; 32. R takes Q, etc If 28...R to K sq, then 29,.P to Q 6, 29. Q to K 8; 30. P to Q 7, etc. (£■) The shortest and, I may say, the prettiest line of play, but White wins equally with: 29. Q takes P 29. R takes B 30. R to B 8 ch (!) 80. Q to R 4 31. takes P ch 31. K takes P' (Or 31, ..Q to Kt 2; 32, Q to K 8 ch, 32. K takes P; 33. R to R 3 ch, 88 q'io R 3- 34 Q to B 7 ch, 34, K to R sq ; 85, R takes Q mate.) 82. R to R 3 ch 32. K to Kt 3 (Or 32... Q to R 3; 33. Q to K 7 ch, 38. K to Kt sq [33. ..K to Kt 3- 34. Q to K 6 ch etc]- 34. R to Kt 8 ch, 34, K to R sq ; 35. Q to K 8 ch, etc. If 32. . . K to Kt sq, then equally ■ ' 83. Rto KtSch 88. KtoR2 (Or 33... K to R 3; 34. QtoKtSch, 34. KtoR2; 35. R to R 3 ch, etc.) 34. Q to R5 ch, and mates in two more moves. (Z) If 29. . . Q takes R, White replies 80. B takes P ch, 80. K takes P; 31. Q takes P ch, and mates in four moves, ' ON SOME OTHER LESS PRACTISED DEBUTS. 105 GAME II.— An interesting game played at tiie Manhattan Chess Club, between Messrs. F. M. Teed and W. Cohn. (From Baltimore American.) White (Mr. Cohn). Black (Mr. Teed). 1. P to K 3 3. P to Q 4 3. P to Q B 4 4. Q Kt to B 3 5. Q to Kt3 6. Kt to B 3 7. B to K 3 8. Castles 9. P takes B 10. P takes P 11. B to R 3 (c) 13. Q R to B sq 13. P to B 4 14. Q to Kt sq 15. P takes P 16. B to B 4 17. Q to Kt 5 18. B to Q 3 19. R to B 7 30. Kt to K 5 (*~V-**'-— ^* m m % m. 1 M fl, ^ WM i ^///////A •- ■■ ^ ^ ... ^M ^5S' 1 fm m. mm. WHITE. White to play and mate in four moves. 114 APPENDIX. No. 9. First prize in the Hamburg Tourney, 1885. By Feanz Scheuefee. BIACK. m mm m mm; ^Iwi mMi mwM ^ — I i wlm.. m " 'mm m$ th §W$ ^, .^... ^^ ^^^ ^^ WHITE. White to play and mate in four moves. PKOBLEMS.- 115 No. 10. First prize in the Nuova Rivista degli ScaccM Tourney, 1885, By ViCTOB MiESES. BLACK. mm. ^ m _ m ■ii',k^}. ^ mm, -w/mA « *,^P, ..WM^y,, w/My/A,, l,„ Mm ^ ^p 'mm wim ^^ '//m^//i._ WHITE. White to play and mate in four moves. 116 APPENDIX. No. 11. First prize in the Frankfort Tourney, 1887. By J. Bergeb. BLACK. %i ^ ^ iSl ■WW ■ ■ ill ^^. #J « M * ^ ^1 ■ s ^ m m WM WHITE. White to play and mate in four moves. PROBLEMS. 117 No. 12. First prize in the Niirnberg Tournament, 1883. By Fk. Scheuefee. BLACK. 'm. m t*?^ ;_^-. %^/mm,, ^^^ 'wM', 4M.. 4M jmM,,, '///, ■///////////, m////////.,. 4m 'fm% mf* m. , Wa WA mm 1 ^B, W/, #^^ WM^/, WHITE. White to play and mate in five moves. 118 APPENDIX. SOLUTIONS. Problem No. 1. 1. R to Q 6 1. Kt takes Q 2. R to Q 5 ch 2. K takes Kt 3. B takes P mate. 1. B lakes R' 3. Kt to Kt7ch 2. K to B5 3. B takes B mate. 1. P takes Kt 3. B to Kt 6 ch 3. K moves 3. Q to Kt 3 mate. 1. B takes B 2. Q to Kt 5 ch 2. K to K 5 3. Q to B 4 mate. J Problem No. 2. 1. Kt to K 7 1. R takes Kt 2. Q to Kt 5 ch 2. K moves 3. Q to B 5 mate. 1. R to K B sq 2. RtoB6 3. B or R takes R 3. Q to K 3 mate. 1. Any other move 2. R to B 5 ch 2. K moves 3. Q to Q B 4 mate. Problem No. 3. 1. R to B 7 1. P takes Kt 3. R to K 7 ch 3. K to B 3 3. Kt takes P mate. 1. K to Q 5 2. R to B 4 ch 3. K takes R 3. Q to Kt 4 mate. 1. P to R 3 3. Kt takes K P 2. K tks Kt (K 3) 3. Q to K 4 mate. Problem No. 4. 1. B to R 4 1. K takes R 3. Q to K B 4 ch 3. B takes Q 3. P takes B disch mate. 1. PtoKt4 3. K to Kt 3 3. Anything 3. R to B sq or Kt to Q 3 mate. Problem No. 5. 1. Kt to Kt 8 1. R to B 2 3. Q to Q 3 ch 3. Kt takes Q 3. B to R 2 mate. 1. K toK3 3. Q to Q 7 ch 2. K moves 3. R to Kt 6 mate. Problem No. 6. 1. Q to R 7 1. P takes P 3. Kt to Q 8 ch 2. K to 3 3. Q to R 3 mate. 1. K to Kt4 2. Q to B 2 2. K to B 3 3. Q to R 4 mate. 1. B or Kt moves 2. Q to.K4ch 2. Moves 3. Q to R 4 mate. Problem No. 7. 1. Q to R7 1. Kt toB6 2. Kt (B8) takes B ch 3. Moves 3. Q or B mates. 1. Pto Kt6 2. Kt to Q 3 ch 2. Moves 3. Q or B mates. 1. I' to Q 5 3. Q to Kt 4 ch 3. K to Q 3 3. Kt to. Kt 7 mate. Problem No. 8. 1. B takes P 1. K takes P' 3. Kt to B 4 ch 2. K to B 3 3. Q to Kt 8 ch 3. Kt takes Q 4. B to Kt 6 mate. SOLUTIONS. 1. Ktto Kt sq 3. QtoKt4ch 3. KtoQ4 3. Kt to B 7 3. K to B 3 4. Q to B 4 mate. 3. Q to Kt 5 ch 3. K moves 1. P takes Kt 4. Q takes Kt mate. 3. P to B 6 3. K to B 4 1. Kt to K 4 3. Q takes P ch 3. K takes Kt 3. Q to K 4 ch 3. Kt takes Q 4. Q to Q 7 mate. 3. B to K 6 ch 3. K takes P 4. Kt to Kt 5 mate. 1. K to B 4 3. KttoB4dis.ch 3. K to K 5 1. Kt to Kt 3 3. Kt to B 3 ch 3. K takes Kt 3. Q takes Kt, etc. 4. Q to Kt 4 mate. 1. Kt takes R P 3. Q to K 4 ch 3. K takes P ' 3. Kt to Kt 5 mate. 1. K to B 6 3. Kt (K 6) to Q 4 ch 3. K to K 5 1. Kt takes B P 3. Kt to B 3 ch 3. K to B 5 3. Kt to B 4 3. K takes Kt 4. Q to Kt4mate. 8. Q to B 3 ch 3. K to Kt 5 4. Kt to B 6 mate._ Problem No. 11. Problem No. 9. 1. Q to R 8 1. P takes B 3. Q to Q5ch 3. K to Kt 3 3. Kt to R8 ch 3. K to R3 1. P to B 6 1. B takes P (B 6) 3. Ktto Kt 5 3. BtksKt(K7) 4. Q to R 3 mate. 3. Kt to R 7 3. Any move 4. Q to K 4 mate. 1. K takes Kt 3. Btks Kt(Kt5) 3. B to K 5 ch 3. K to B 4 3. Q to K 4 mate. 3. Q to R5ch 3. K moves 4. Q mates. 3. K takes Kt 3. Q to K 3 ch 8. K moves 4. Qto KtSmate. 1. KttoKtS 3. Q to Kt 7 ch 2. K to B 4 3. B to K 5 3. Moves 1. K to K 4 4. Q or Kt mates. 3. Q takes P ch 3. K to K 3 3. Q to Kt 4 ch 8. K to B 3 1. B to B sq 3. Q to Q 5 ch 3. K to Kt 3 3. Kt to B 4 ch 3. K takes Kt 4. Q to KtSmate. 1. B to B 4 4. B to K 5 mate. 3. Q takes P 3. B takes Kt 1. B to K 3 8. Kt to Kt 3 3. Any move 3. B takes P ch 3. K to Q 5 4. Qto B 5 mate. '3. Kt(B7)to KtSch 1. Any other move 8. K moves 3. Kt to Kt 6 ch 3. K moves 4. Q to K 4 mate. 8. Q takes P ch 8. K moves 1. B to Q 3 4. Kt to B 8 mate. 3. Kt to K 4 ch 3. K to Kt 3 Problem No. 10. 3. B to B 3 3. Anything 4. B to R 5 mate. 1. Kt to Q Kt 5 1. Kt takes Kt 1. B to K 5 3. Kt to Kt 5 ch 3. P takes Kt 3. Kt takes B ch 3. Kt to B 5 119 120 APPENDIX. 3. Q to Q 5 ch 3. K moves 4. R to Kt 3 ch 4. KtoK5 4. Q to Kt5 mate 5. B to Kt sq mate. 1. B to Q 6 3. R takes R 3. B takes P ch 3. K to Q5 3. B to Kt sq ch 3. K takes P 3. Q to R 8 mate. 4. Q to K 4 ch 4. K moves 3. K to Kt 3 5. Q or B mates. 3. Q to Kt 7 ch 3. K toR4 1. Kt or R takes R 4. Q to Kt 5 mate. 3. Kt to B sq ch 3. K to B 6 or 7 3. B takes P ch 3. Bto Kt4 1. 3. 3. B toKtSorRC Kto Q5 Any move 3. 4. 5. Q takes P 3. Q to Kt 3 ch 4. Q to Kt sq mate. K to Kt 7 K to R8 4. Q mates. 3. K to Q 5 Problem No. 13. 3. 4. Q to Q sq ch Q to Kt 3 ch 3. 4. K toB6 K to Q 5 1. Bto R3 1. Bto K R3 5. Q to Q 3 mate 3. R to K Kt 6 3. B takes R 1. Kt to Q 4 B to K R 3 B or R takes Kl Any move 3. Kt to Q 6 3. 4. Q to Kt 7 4. 5. Q to Kt sq mate. B takes Kt Any move 3. 3. 4. P takes Kt Kt to Q 6 P takes B or R .3. 3. 4. 3. Kt to B 5 5. R to B 3 mate. 3. Q to K 4 ch 3. 4. R to Kt 4 ch 4. 5. Kt to Kt sq mate. K takes Q K toB6 3. 4. 3. R to R 5 R to Q Kt 6 3. P to K 5 Q takes P (K 3) ch 3. Kt to Q 4 4. K takes Q 3. Q to K 4 ch 3. K takes Q 5. R to Kt 3 mate. 4. B to Kt sq ch 5. R to Kt 3 matf 4. K to B6 3. B to Kt sq ch 3. 3. R takes P K takes P 3. R to R 5 4. Q to K 4 ch 4. K moves 3. Q takes P ch 3. K takes Q 5. Q or B mates. CONTENTS. 121 CONTENTS OF APPENDIX. Page Preface 3 Introduction 7 Philidor's Defense 7 Games illustrative, by Winawer vs. Blaekburne . 10 The Two Knight's Defense 12 Game illustrative, by Bird vs. Tschigorin . . . . 16 " X. vs. Paulsen 17 The Scotch Gambit 19 Game illustrative, by Steinitz vs. Zukertort ... 21 " " Blaekburne vs. Mackenzie . 23 Ruy Lopez 26 Game illustrative, by Winawer vs. Englisch ... 29 " " " Mackenzie vs. Lipschiitz . . 31 " Teed vs. Steinitz 33 " " " Mackenzie vs. Lipschiitz . . 35 The Queen's Bishop's Pawn's Game in the King's Knight's Opening 37 Game illustrative, by Alapine vs. Harmonist ... 37 The Evans Gambit 39 Game illustrative, by Apolda vs. Zema .... 46 The Evans Gambit Declined 48 Game illustrative, by Pollock vs. Blaekburne . . 48 The Giuoco Piano 51 Game illustrative, by Mason vs. Winawer .... 51 The Allgaier Gambit 54 Game illustrative, by Steinitz vs. Simonson ... 61 Cunningham Gambit 63 123 APPENDIX. Page The Muzio Gambit 63 Game illustrative, by "Winawer vs. Wittek ... 67 Tiie Sal-do and Cochrane Gambits 70 The King's Bishop's Gambit 73 The Gambit Declined 79 King's Bishop's Opening 80 The Game of the Two Bishops 82 The Counter Gambit 83 ' The Queen's Bishop's Pawn's Defense 84 The Queen's Gambit Accepted and Declined ... 84 Game illustrative, by Zukertort vs. Steinitz . . 85 " " " Mackenzie vs. Lipschiitz . . 87 The French Game 90 Game illustrative, by Dr. Tarrasch vs. Gunsberg . 91 The Queen's Knight's Opening 93 Game illustrative, by Steinitz vs. Amateur ... 95 The Fianchetto 96 The Centre Counter Gambit 97 The Sicilian Game 97 On Some Other Less Practiced Debuts 101 ' Games illustrative, by Zukertort vs. Blackburne . 102 '' Cohn vs. Teed 105 Problems — Three moves, by Cunningham 106 " Wheeler 107 " Planck 108 " Laws 109 " Butler 110 " Adam Ill " Adama 112 Four " " Dobrusky 118 " " " Schruefer 114 " Mieses 115 " Berger 116 Five " " Schruefer 117 Solutions 118